( cue ^ ^« Jr (j^-^ \\.\i;i;kx c. ii.\i;i)IX(;. Phksidknt op iiiK I'mtki) Staii.;s ok Amkkkw, The lloii'irdri/ I'ic.siilcii I (jf llic V(in;jrcss. / THE PRESS CONGRESS OF THE WORLD IN HAWAH IVith Foreword By WARREN G. HARDING PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA HONORARY PRESIDENT OF THE CONGRESS Edited Bv WALTER WILLIAMS DEAN OF THE SCHOOL OF JOURNALISM OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MISSOURI. COLUMBIA. MISSOURI, U. S. A . PRESIDENT OF THE CONGRESS Columbia, Missouri, U. S. A. W. Stephens Publishing Company. 1922 / 1 -^ ^ WHAT THE BOOK CONTAINS. I. FOREWORD, BY WARREN G. HARDING. PRESIDENT OF THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA, HONORARY PRESI- DENT OF THE PRESS CONGRESS OF THE WORLD. . I II. INTRODUCTION, P>Y WALTER WILLIAMS, PRESIDENT OF THE PRESS CONGRESS OF THE WORLD. . . 3 111. HAWAII AND ITS HOSPITALITY 7 IV. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CONGRESS 65 V. MESSAGES TO THE CONGRESS 403 VI. PAN-PACIFIC PRESS CONFERENCE 419 VII. APPENDIX 507 VIII. LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 599 IX. INDEX . .. .601 M281621 I. FOREWORD. The White House Washington December 12, 1921 I believe that the Press Congress of the World, recently held in Honolulu, marked a real advance toward a proper mutuality of understanding and unification of eiTorts among the representa- tives of the world's press. It is perhaps more than merely a co- incidence that within a few weeks following that Congress, which was held at the cross roads of the Pacific, that a great Inter- national Conference in Washington should have devised a pro- gressive and promising program for the settlement of those prob- lems in a way which seems to give new assurance of the main- tenance of peace in that region. The excellent results accomplished at Honolulu have been followed by equally fortunate ones, in the attitude of the rep- resentatives of the Press during the Conference in Washington. There will hardly be a serious dissent from the proposition that the Washington Conference owes much of its achievement to the fact that there was so excellent a disposition and attitude toward it on the part of the press. These things justify us in the hope that a larger and more ef- fective part of leadership is likely to be taken by the press in the development of public opinion regarding the problems that concern the world and the world's governments. In this view, one can hardly doubt that Dr. Williams is doing a commendable service in presenting his book on the "Press Congress of the World in Hawaii," and I hope it may have the consideration which its merits will doubtless deserve. Warren G. Harding. (1) II. INTRODUCTION. The Press Congress of the World, which held its first ses- sions in Honolulu, Territory of Hawaii, United States of America, in October-November, 1921, had its preliminary organization at the Pan-Pacific International Exposition in San Francisco in July, 1915. Representatives of the world's press had been asked by the Exposition to meet in an International Press Congress, July 6, 7, 8, 9 and 10, of that year. At this meeting it was unani- mously decided, upon resolution offered by Robert Bell, of New Zealand, to effect a permanent organization. The following con- stitution was adopted : Article I — Name. This organization shall be known as the Press Congress of the World. Article II — Object. Its object shall be to advance by conference, discussion and united effort the cause of journalism in every honorable way. The sessions of the Congress are to be open to the consideration of all questions directly af- fecting the press, but discussions of religion, politics and governmental policies will not be permitted. Article III — Membership. Workers in every department of journalism, in every country, who are engaged in promoting the highest standards and largest welfare of the press, are eligible to membership. Article IV — Officers. The officers, who, with the exception of the honorary president to be chosen by the Executive Committee, shall be elected at each session of the Congress, shall be An honorary president, A president, Two vice-presidents from each country holding membership, A secretary-treasurer, An Executive Committee consisting of the president and secretary- treasurer and five additional members chosen from the vice-presidents. (3) 4 The Press Congress of the World Vacancies shall be filled by the Executive Committee upon recommenda- tion of the countries affected. Article V — Meetings. ' The times and places of meetings shall be determined by the Executive Committee. Article VI — Anicnduicjits. This constitution may be amended at any meeting under provisions to be established by the Executive Committee. The following officers were chosen and, in addition, vice pres- idents from all the countries represented : President : Walter Williams, Dean of the School of Journal- ism of the University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri. U. S. A. Secretary-Treasurer: A. R. Ford, Secretary of the Dominion Press Gallery, Ottawa, Canada. Among those who addressed the organization sessions at San Francisco were : James A. Barr, Director of Congresses at the Exposition, at whose suggestion the International Press Congress was held ; Charles C. Moore, President, Pan-Pacific International Exposi- tion; John Clyde Oswald, editor of the American Printer, New York; Mark Cohen of the Evening Star, Dunedin,. New Zea- land ; K. Sugimura, foreign editor, Asahi Shimbun, Tokyo, Japan ; Aaron Watson, of the London Times; Enrique Lievano, of the United States of Colombia ; V. R. Beteta, Diario de Centro America, Guatemala City, Guatemala, who served as president of the International Press Congress ; William Jennings Bryan, editor of the Commoner, Lincoln, Nebraska, former Secretary of State; Harvey Ingham, of the Register and Leader, Des Moines, Iowa; M. H. de Young, of the San Francisco Chronicle; Robert Bell of the Guardian, Ashburton, New Zealand ; Edgar B. Piper, of the Portland Oregonian ; Captain J. W. Niesigh, of Sydney, Australia; S. D. Scott, of the News Advertiser, Vancouver, Brit- ish Columbia ; G. E. Uyehara, of the State, Tokyo ; Norman E. Mack, of the Times, Buffalo, New York ; Kee Owyang, of China ; James A. Buchanan, El Mundo^ Havana ; Mirza Ali Khuli Khan, of Teheran, Persia; Alfred G. Andersen, of the Danish Press Council, Copenhagen ; K. D. Shastri, of the Nawa- jiwan, Benares, India; Dr. H. Schoop, of the Association de la Introduction 5 Presse Suisse, Berne, Switzerland ; C. Vassardakis, of Greece ; Ernesto Nelson, La Nacion, Buenos Aires, Argentina; Geo. E. Hosnier, President, National Editorial Association of the United States ; H. C. Hotaling, the Enterprise, Mapleton, Minnesota ; Peter C. Macfarlane, of New York City ; Percy Andrae, of Chicago ; Friend W. Richardson, of California ; Chester H. Row- ell, of California; Lee J. Rountree, Vice President of the National Editorial Association of the United States ; A. B. McPherson, of Santa Cruz, California; J. C. Morrison, of Morris, Minnesota; John H. Perry, of Seattle, Washington ; James Schermerhorn, the Times, Detroit, Michigan; Fred J. Wilson, of San Francisco; Henry F. Urban, American Correspondent of the Hamburger Fremdenblatt ; Merle Thorpe, of Seattle, Washington ; Colvin B. Brown, of San Francisco ; Dr. Talcott Williams, Director of the Pulitzer School of Journalism, Columbia University, New York ; Dr. Fred Newton Scott, of the University of Michigan ; Hugh Mercer Blain, Louisiana State University; M. M. Fogg, University of Nebraska; Homer Mooney, State Journal, Reno, Nevada ; Charles W. Price, of the Electrical Review, New York ; Ralph E. Fox, of the Indicator, Chicago ; B. B. Herbert, founder of the National Editorial Association, of Chicago ; Lee Sum Ling, of Peking, China ; Wm. McCuUough, of New Zealand ; Geo. D. Pappageorge, of Greece; H. C. Khakeebi, of Java; A..R. Gard- ner, of Kennewick, Washington; Joseph Mesru, of India, and A. R. Ford, of Canada. A number of papers were read by title. This volume contains the stenographic report of the pro- ceedings of the sessions of the Press Congress of the World held in Honolulu, October 11 to November 1, 1921; a report of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference organized at Honolulu ; an ac- count of the history and resources of the Territory of Hawaii and of the hospitality of its government and people ; messages to the Congress from journalists throughout the world ; and, in the appendix, the revised constitution adopted by the Congress, the list of delegates and guests present at Honolulu, together with a number of papers upon journalism in various countries written for but not read during the Congress sessions. Much of the matter contained in the chapter upon "Hawaii and Its Hospital- ity," is taken from the columns of two of the daily newspapers 6 The Press Congress of the World of Honolulu, the Star-Bulletin and the Advertiser. The photo- graph of the opening session of the Congress in the Moana Hotel is used through the courtesy of the Nippu Jiji of Honolulu. The Foreword is by the Honorable Warren G. Harding, Presi- dent of the United States of America, who is Honorary Presi- dent of the Press Congress. President Harding's address to the Congress was read by the Governor of the Territory of Hawaii, the Honorable Wallace R. Farrington, who laid aside his duties as vice president and general business manager of the Honolulu Star-Bulletin, to serve the Territory of Hawaii, under President Harding's appointment, as Chief Executive. Except as noted in the stenographic report of the proceedings, all addresses delivered, papers read and discussions taking place, are reported in full, save that announcements local and tempo- rary in character are omitted. W.\i;iKI! W IIJJA.MS, J)i:a,\ ()!■ TiiK Sciioni, oi. Joi knamsm ok iiik IMmoksitv ok Missoiki, Columbia, Mrssorui, I'. S. A., The I'rejidcnt uf tlic Conarfss. III. HAWAII AND ITS HOSPITALITY. The unsurpassed hospitality of the people of the Territory of Hawaii was shown to the delegates of the Press Congress of the World in many ways. Entertainments of all kinds, miU- tary and naval reviews, automobile rides, visits to industries, luncheons, dinners, teas and receptions, excursions around the islands, gave to the visitors opportunity for acquaintanceship with the marvelous beauty and resources of the islands and with the charm of its hospitable people. From comments written by delegates and visitors this chapter, outlining the attractiveness of the days in Hawaii and some of the features of the entertainment, has been prepared. To it is added a description of Hawaii taken from the beautiful souvenir volume presented to the delegates. The chapter is from many pens, all of which combined cannot do justice to the gracious hospitality of the beautiful Islands of the Pacific and the never failing cordiality of their people. The delegation to the Press Congress from the mainland of the United States of America reached Honolulu at daybreak on the morning of October 10, 1921, on the Matson Navigation Company's liner Matsonia, after six delightful days on a tran- quil ocean. It was accompanied by the delegates from Great Britain, Cuba, Central America, Canada, Greece and Norway. Other delegates arrived at Honolulu at different times from Japan, China, Australia, New Zealand, the Philippines, and else- where, to the total number of two hundred. There were one hundred and eight newspaper men and women in the party ar- riving from the American mainland on October 10 and Honolulu extended to them a typical Hawaiian welcome. It was a day such as those who live in distant lands often conjure up when thoughts turn to long winter months with their snow and icy winds. For several hours before daybreak the (7) 8 The Press Congress of the World delegates were up and about, eager to catch the first ghmpse of the Mokapu Hght which guides the big steamers and saihng ships along the southern coast of Oahu, around famous Diamond Head, and thence into Honolulu harbor. Dawn broke over the city revealing a veritable jungle of vivid green foliage, over which towered great palm trees, and with low-lying mountains, tinged with browns and purples in the faint half-light, as a back- ground. But with the sun there came to view the Honolulu waterfront with its modern steel and concrete wharves, and then the city proper with its great business blocks, its clanging street cars, and men and women hurrying to their work in offices, shops and factories. To some it may have been a disappointment — a disappoint- ment in that a modern American city had come into view when, perhaps, something a little more tropical had been looked for- ward to. Story books to the contrary, there were no grass- skirted girls dancing the hula-hula on the beach ; there were no grass houses along the shore ; there were no hordes of native men and women, clothed in little else than what nature gave them at birth, singing weird chants as they paddled about the liner in outrigger canoes. Just off Diamond Head the Matsonia was met by two Eagle boats which convoyed her to a point outside the harbor, where four submarines did "stunts" for the newcomers. Two sea- planes, shooting here and there in the morning sunlight like silver darts, circled and recircled over the big steamer as it neared the harbor. A launch bearing members of the reception committee, pretty girls with armfuls of "leis" or flower wreaths, musicians and newspaper men met the Matsonia as it came to an anchorage within the harbor. As the launch came within hailing distance official and unofficial greetings were shouted back and forth. "Aloha ! Aloha Oe !" "Same to you !" "How was the trip down?" "Just bully !" Acquaintanceships were formed even before the reception com- mittee went aboard the liner. Accompanying the reception committee's launch were three Hawaii and its Hospitality 9 big outrigger canoes, which later "towed" the Matsonia into her dock, the towHnes being long streamers of ribbon. Duke P. Kahanamoku, champion sprint swimmer of the world who repre- sented America at the Olympic Games at Stockholm and Ant- werp, went out in one of the canoes, boarded the launch and dived overboard. Coming up alongside the Matsonia, he shook the water from his long black hair and shouted to the delegates : "Right over here, now." Every time a big ship comes into Honolulu the "kids" along the waterfront swim out and accompany her in, diving for the pennies and dimes which travelers throw overboard. And here, then, was the "Duke" getting a world of fun out of a sport he had indulged in when, as a youngster, he had used Honolulu harbor to train for the championships which were to be his in later years. Coin after coin was flung into the water by the laughing dele- gates, and less than a minute later Duke had a mouthful of dimes, quarters and nickels. "Who is he?" came a woman's voice from the starboard rail. "That's the Duke." "Duke of what?" "Duke Kahanamoku." Whereupon the delegates applauded the introduction and a battery of cameras opened fire. Then George ("Dad") Center, famous trainer of famous Hawaiian swimmers, dived in, and soon he, too, had a mouthful of coins. This gave the other pad- dlers an idea, and they quickly got into the water to show that they were just as good at the money-making business as the champion. Then an orchestra from the Hawaiian Band — a band that has become famous the world over — played "Aloha Oe," swing- ing a little later into a jazzy hula-hula melody that set every foot on the Matsonia's deck tapping. Singing boys and girls, representing the Hawaiian Civic Club, gave a number of Hawaiian songs which were greatly enjoyed by the visitors. There were also songs by a double quartet of Hawaiian Band boys. After the port doctor had finished his work and the yellow flag had been hauled down, the reception committee and others went aboard, and there followed a welcome and exchange of 10 The Press Congress of the World greetings and handshakings that will long be remembered by those who took part. Miss Josephine Hopkins, Miss Gerd Hiorth, Miss Ethel Marston and Miss Margaret Neely, pretty Honolulu girls, placed about the shoulders of each delegate a Hawaiian wreath, symbolic of the city's welcome to the visitors. Thousands of persons thronged Pier fifteen as the Matsonia pulled into the dock. Lining the edge of the shed was a typical racial group composed of children from the Honolulu public schools wearing the native costumes of the lands of their for- bears, and carrying the flags of those nations. It was a strikingly impressive sight, and furnished a bit of local color of the kind that newspaper men and women especially appreciate. The little group was applauded time and again. A Korean group in national costume was the center of much attention. The Matsonia docked amidst a roar of whistles, applause and music. The Hawaiian Band played old-time Hawaiian melodies. Among the members of the reception committee who met the delegates at the harbor entrance were Col. Riley H. Allen, editor of The Honolulu Star- Bulletin, who, while with the Red Cross during and after the World War, steered the famous Child Ship around the world, giving back little, lonely children into mother arms that had ached through long, hopeless months to hold them ; Lorrin A. Thurston; Worth O. Aiken, representing the island of Maui; Gerrit P. Wilder, Alexander Hume Ford, George T. Armitage, secretary of the Hawaii Tourist Bureau, and Raymond C. Brown, now secretary of Hawaii, and at that time secretary of the Cham- ber of Commerce of Honolulu. Hawaii's official "Aloha" to the delegates was extended by Governor Wallace R. Farrington in the following statement: "In the light of developing world events, the assembling of the Press Congress of the World at this time and place seems like the fulfilment of an inspiration. "As a preliminary to the international conference in Washing- ton, it is appropriate that the journalists and publishers, the interpreters and distributors of the world's news, should gather at the crossroads of the Pacific where many of the problems to be studied at the Congress of Nations concentrate and pass in review. Hawaii and its Hospitality 11 "The 'White Light' of accurate and honestly-balanced pub- licity will go far toward paving the way to clearer understand- ing and intelligent conclusions. "In Hawaii the delegates can study the results of the union of races bordering on the Pacific. They can determine what measure of success has attended the adjustment of ideals and ambitions of the Occident and of the Orient. They can tell the world what Hawaii has demonstrated as possible through toleration and an earnest desire to find a common meeting-ground and working basis. "The territory of Hawaii is gratified and greatly honored to be the host of the delegates who, through making new acquaint- ances, securing new points of view and reaching a friendly understanding among themselves, will speed the day when all that is best in international friendships thus established can be made use of in enlisting support of practical standards for a permanent peace throughout the world. "Hawaii extends to the delegates the cordial Aloha that is all our own. This Aloha is peculiar to the Hawaiian Islands, hav- ing its source in the friendly character of the native races and spreading its beneficent contagion among all who touch these shores." The Hon. John H. Wilson, Mayor of Honolulu, issued the following statement of welcome: "To the Men and Women Who Represent the Press Congress of the World: "Honolulu extends the right hand of fellowship. It is pe- culiarly appropriate that you have gathered this year at the Hub of the Pacific. It is particularly important that you have chosen to deliberate on your records of the past, your activities of the present, and your hopes for the future at this point, around which will revolve within the next few years the wheel of inter- national events, destined to mark the transitory period between a world of divided peoples and a solidified family of the na- tions of the earth. "Honolulu claims her place as the cynosure of the eyes of creation for the coming decade. We stand on the dividing line between the peoples of the East and those of the West; be- 12 The Press Congress of the World tvveen the Occident and the Orient. We are the frontier on which is met at last the advancing vanguard of the white races and the marching forces of the yellow. With patience and fortitude and strength we are endeavoring to meet the issue before us. In sincerity and truth we are judging man by his head and heart and not by his skin and blood. We are to be the center of the great conflict — peaceful, we pray; sane and final, we trust, and certain, we insist. "To you who are to give to the waiting eyes and minds of the world the details of the contest, the victories and defeats, the trials and triumphs, Honolulu extends a warmth of welcome such as only Hawaii knows. From the glory of our sunshine, the beauty of our sea, the grandeur of our hills and the brilliance of our flowers, may you find added strength in your holy mission to show men the truth that the truth shall make them free." Press Congress headquarters were established at the Moana Hotel at Waikiki Beach, Honolulu. Here a majority of the delegates were quartered, although some preferred to live at hotels nearer the business district. An information bureau was established at the hotel by the Honolulu Press Club, of which Mrs. John Trenholm Warren is president, which also furnished typewriters, stenographers, pencils, pens, paper, telephones and other things so essential to working newspaper men and women. Here there could be obtained all sorts of literature descriptive of the islands, and files of local and mainland newspapers. Mr. L. W. de Vis-Norton, executive secretary of the Hawaiian Is- lands committee, also had an office at the hotel, and attended to the registration of the delegates, and the assignment of quarters to them. The Naval Radio office installed telegraphic instru- ments at the hotel, and an operator was on duty daily to receive press and other messages which the delegates desired to send. During the morning of their arrival, and during the fore part of the afternoon the delegates were left pretty much to themselves so that they might get "settled" in their new quarters and become acquainted with their new surroundings. But that afternoon, from three-thirty until five-thirty o'clock delegates and resi- dents of Honolulu were guests at a reception given in the throne room at lolani Palace (the executive building), the only throne Hawaii and its Hospitality 13 room, by the way, in the United States, by Governor and Mrs. Wallace R. Farrington. In the receiving line with the governor, Mrs. Farrington, and their daughter, Miss Frances Farrington, were Dr. Walter Williams and his daughter, Mrs. John F. Rhodes. Refreshments were served, and the occasion formed a splendid opportunity for hundreds of Honolulans to get "on speaking terms" with the visitors. Just before the reception began. Doctor Williams, at the re- quest of Governor Farrington, stopped for a moment to speak to Louis Madeiras, the Portuguese elevator "boy" at the cap- itol. Louis had expressed a desire to meet and speak briefly with Doctor Williams. After greetings were exchanged, Louis pro- duced a package tied up carefully in white tissue paper. This he presented to Doctor Williams. It proved to be a handsome gavel, manufactured from the native "koa" wood and highly polished as only Hawaiians can polish it. Into the top had been sunk a golden plate bearing the Hawaiian coat-of-arms with the motto of the old monarchy "Ua Mau Ke la o Ka Aina I Ka Pono," which means "The life of the land is established in righteousness." Doctor Williams thanked Louis warmly for the gift, and a few days later used the gavel in calling the business sessions of the Press Congress to order. The first official function in honor of the visiting delegates was a banquet given at the Moana Hotel on the evening of October 10 by the members of the Hawaiian Islands executive committee. Here, again, many prominent Honolulans and residents of the outlying islands were given an opportunity to become acquainted with the visitors, and the affair proved to be a joyous demonstra- tion of Hawaiian hospitality to which the delegates responded with many statements of good-will and appreciation. Among the speakers were Governor Farrington, Mayor Wilson, Mrs. John Trenholm Warren and George Denison, then president of the Chamber of Commerce of Honolulu. Those who responded on behalf of the delegates were Col. Edward Frederick Lawson, assisting managing proprietor of the London Daily Telegraph and representative of the British Empire Press Union; Ludvig Saxe of Christiania, Norway, representing the Norsk Pressefor- bund ; Thales Coutoupis, editor of Nea Ellas, Athens, represent- 14 The Press Congress of the World ing Greece, Agustin Lazo, delegate from Cuba; Frank P. Glass, Sr., of Birmingham, Alabama, representing the United States at large ; Mark Cohen, chairman of the New Zealand del- egation; Guy Innes of Melbourne, Australia; T. Petrie of the Morning Post, Hongkong, China; Yasutaro Soga, editor of the Daily Nippu Jiji, Honolulu Japanese language newspaper; Gre- gorio Nieva, delegate from the Philippines ; Virgilio Rodriguez Beteta, representing the Press Association of Central America; Oswald Mayrand, editor-in-chief of La Presse, Montreal, repre- senting Canada ; Hollington K. Tong, one of the members of the splendid delegation that China sent to the Congress, and, lastly. Doctor Williams. Those at the toastmaster's table were Gover- nor and Mrs. Farrington, Maj.-Gen. and Mrs. C. P. Summerall, Admiral and Mrs. Edward Simpson, Mayor and Mrs. John H. Wilson, Delegate and Mrs. Jonah Kuhio Kalanianaole, Doctor Williams, Colonel and Mrs. Lawson, Mr. and Mrs. John T. Warren and Mr. and Mrs. Frank P. Glass, Sr. Hawaiian progress and world peace were the subjects chosen by Governor Farrington for his address to the delegates, during the course of which he gave the visitors some interesting and val- uable information concerning the islands. He spoke in part as follows : "Hawaii is a territory of the United States, an integral part of the United States. It is on the road to statehood, if its own ambitions are to establish its future status. "Hawaii became part of the United States by its own request. Every law that applies to the states and territories of the main- land of our country applies to Hawaii. We have no separate tariff laws. We bear the same federal tax burdens as the people of the States. The only exceptions thus far made are those hav- ing to do with the expenditure of federal funds under general appropriations for roads and schools in which the word terri- tories is specifically eliminated and we are thus definitely left out. Not until recent months has Hawaii ever asked for an ex- ception in its favor, and this is now done only as an emergency relief to avert industrial disaster. "Hawaii is not an insular possession in the sense of those islands coming under American jurisdiction as a direct result of the Spanish-American war. We do not claim to be better or Hawaii and its Hospitality 15 worse than others. We seek only to be judged and treated as the facts show us to be. "New England furnishes the basis of Hawaii's present day progress. For more than a hundred years therefore in moral, educational, political, industrial, financial and commercial life the Americanism of the United States has been the ground work from which our various efforts at constructive progress have been reared. "American Christianity saved the native Hawaiians from the degradation and destruction that would have been possible if Americans had followed the easy course of making headway by ruthlessness. "American education gave Hawaii an educational system to which we cordially invite the special attention of graduates of the little red school houses of the mainland. Our politics have been quite as diversified as you will find in the average American community whose controlling desire is to give every man, woman and child a fair opportunity to enjoy life, liberty and the pursuit of happiness within the limits of laws made by their fellow cit- izens. "We point also with definite, not hackneyed, pride to the finan- cial, industrial and commercial reinforcement that has been woven into the fabric of romance, summer skies, palm trees and all the other settings that song, story and the romantic journalist tells us tend to make men linger by the wayside and let the rest of the world go by. "Hawaii's sugar industry sets a world standard. The crop yields and new programs of cultivation tell the story. A most striking demonstration is the construction by the Honolulu Iron Works of sugar mills not only in Hawaii, but Cuba, the PhiHp- pines, Formosa, the contracts having been obtained in compe- tition with the largest construction companies of the world. "Hawaii's pineapple industry sets a world standard. "No stain of jugglery or repudiation is found on the pages of Hawaii's financial history. "Hawaii's industry enabled the establishment of the finest and largest lines of cargo carriers under the American Flag previous to the war. "Hawaii, with its 275,000 population and area approximating 16 The Press Congress of the World that of Connecticut, paid to the federal government last year (1920) taxes of more than $21,000,000. We bought from the mainland merchandise valued at $77,739,381. We sold to the mainland products valued at $177,173,234. The tonnage of ships using our harbors was 6,088,689, the increases demonstrating how rapidly the Pacific is coming to fulfill the prediction of Secretary of State Seward as the center of great world development. "In April, 1876, when the reciprocity treaty with the United States was passed, we had no pineapple industry. In 1894 our records show 44,903 pieces. That means pineapples. They were exported to the mainland of the United States as fresh fruit. We had no canning industry. *Tn 1921 we exported to the mainland of the United States 5,500,000 cases of pineapples. "In 1894 our sugar crop was 153,000 tons. In 1921 it was 583,000 tons. "Our customs receipts this year were over $1,000,000. "The assessed valuation of property in 1894 was $35,000,000. In 1921 it was $286,000,000. "I presume the business managers of papers can understand this with a keener feeling than the man in the editorial depart- ment, but it is something we all have to consider in the develop- ment of communities, as well as the development of journalistic enterprises. Hawaii has a just claim to a place in the front rank of those who see and understand the power of the white light of publicity. "The printing press is found listed in the equipment of the earliest American missionaries. The first newspaper west of the Rocky Mountains was published in Hawaii and the press on which it was printed is now in a Portland (Ore.) museum. King Kamehameha II pulled the first sheet from the first printing press of Hawaii July 7, 1822, so you can see how quickly they acted. On July 7, 1822, the king of Hawaii presided at the is- suing of the first paper from the press. This was at the American Mission and the first publicity medium was a book in the Hawaiian language. " Xama Hawaii,' interpreted, The Hawaiian Luminary or Light of Hawaii, was the first Hawaiian newspaper published, issued from the press of the Lahainaluna Seminary, February Hawaii and its Hospitality 17 14, 1837. The first newspaper in the EngHsh language was the Sandwich Islands Gazette, that lived in Honolulu from 1836 to 1839. "The Friend, now vigorous, justly claims to be the oldest English paper in the Pacific. It was first issued in 1834, founded by the Rev. Dr. Damon as an exponent of temperance that had other less fortunate mediums in The Cascade and The Fountain of 1844-45. That paper started as far back as 1843 and few have lived to see the proof of the efforts of their friends. "Of other old-timers the Pacific Commercial Advertiser started as a weekly in 1856 and is now the Honolulu Advertiser. The first paper to start as a daily was the Daily Bulletin of 1882 and in 1893 divided its afternoon field with the Hawaiian Star. In 1912 these dailies were merged into the present afternoon daily The Honolulu Star-Bulletin. "How journalistic efforts have followed the tide of immigra- tion is an interesting study. Each alien language list of papers has gradually diminished as the population to be served has be- come merged into the English-speaking and reading citizens of the Islands. The variety of human thought now being served, the bubbling energy that seeks expression within the territory, is indicated by a partial list of the present-day publications. This is rather a long list, but I think you will be interested in it. This list does not include the publications of the high schools, University of Hawaii, church magazines and a number of others too numerous to mention : "Ke Aloha Aina, Ang Abyan, Chee Yow Shin Bo, The Friend, The Guide, The Hawaii Choho, Hawaii Commercial News, Hawaii Educational Review, The Hawaii Hochi, Hawaii Shinpo, Hawaiian Annual, Hawaiian Forester and Agriculturist, Hawaiian Japanese Annual, Hon Mun Bo, The Honolulu Advertiser, Hon- olulu Commercial Times, Honolulu Oil News, Honolulu Star- Bulletin, The Hyoron no Hyoron, The Jitsugyo no Hawaii, Ka Hoaloha, Ke Alakai o Hawaii, Korean Advocate of North Amer- ica and Territory of Hawaii, Korean National Herald. The Labor Review of Hawaii, The Mid-Pacific Magazine, The New Free- dom, Nippu Jiji, Nupepa Kuokoa, The Oahu Jiho, O Luso, The Pacific Times. Paradise of the Pacific. The Service, Sun Chung Kwock Bo, Wah Hing Bo, The Daily Post Herald, Hawaii Asahi 18 The Press Congress of the World Shimbun, Hawaii Herald, The Hawaii Mainichi, Hilo Daily Tribune, The Hilo Shimpo, Ka Hoku o Hawaii, The Kona Echo, The Kwazan Sha, O Facho, Maui News, The Maui Record, The Maui Shimbun, The Wailuku Times, The Garden Island, Kauai Shimpo. "You will see that we have quite a variety. "Journalism is a peculiar human institution. It has its ideal- ists who point the way, and it has the business managers, who, summing up the bread-and-butter conditions, tell these idealists how far they can go without completely wrecking the whole es- tablishment and making the last condition worse than the first. "And so when we turn to some of the topics you may discuss, the editor, the reporter, the writer or the manager has a rather clear understanding of the task before various other interna- tional delegates even, it may be, those meeting at Washington next month. "Forces of publicity that you represent have a definite re- sponsibility. You dealers in and disseminators of news and ideas know full well that the results of every world congress depend on the manner in which the facts of the deliberations are pre- sented to the reading public. Thus the fate of the world may in a large measure be in the hands of men whose life and train- ing have taught them how much irreparable harm can be done by careless reporting, colored comment and failure to give the readers the main line essentials, on account of the demands made on space for a display story of a dog fight or the decision of editors that only in the sensation of a pimple on the premier's nose is news to be found. "Wrigley has said 'Make it short and give it to them often.' That is the secret of advertising or propaganda success. It is worth thinking about in a good cause, and deserves watching when used for evil purposes. There can be no question of the power for good of oft-repeated plain truth-telling by the press of the world. You know that consistent accuracy builds up com- munity decency and self-respect. You know how deadly is the poison of misrepresentation. "The peoples of the world are for peace. No greater or more obvious truth could be uttered than that this is a war-weary world. Hawaii and its Hospitality 19 "The peace of the world will be beyond fear of disturbance when the press of the world top-line features the news of peace, preaches the gospel of peace, devotes its attention to getting the facts and telling the truth about them and thus demonstrates that preparedness accompanied by self-control will not make us a world of mollycoddles or war lords. "We talk about the dangers of armies and navies, that pos- session is a temptation to use them. No more dangerous weapon exists than a well-equipped circulating medium reaching hundreds of thousands of readers. The frightfulness of this weapon is when it is in the hands of foolish ones who don't know it is loaded. One of the matches regularly thrown into the interna- tional powder magazine is the falsifying press. "World peace will be absolutely guaranteed when the press of the world can say to governments and diplomats 'Give us all the facts and we will tell the truth about them.' "This world of ours has passed through an orgy of reckless- ness; it has sounded in wasted life blood the depths of self-sac- rifice. We have experienced the extremes of humanities and inhumanities. Certainly we have reached the era for testing the capacities of the really great people for self-control. The press of the world can lead the way." It had been planned to hold the sessions of the Press Congress in the historic old throne room in lolani Palace, but later it was found that, owing to the large number of delegates, this would be inadvisable, so the banquet hall at the Moana hotel was set aside for this purpose. lolani Palace was built during the reign of the late King Kalakaua, and took the place of the ancient structure that used to stand where the great banyan tree in the rear of the capitol grounds now rears its lofty branches. The throne room is much as it was in the early days, with its koa and kou wood panelling, its great mirrors in their gilded frames, and the crystal chandeliers originally fitted to burn gas. Around the walls hang priceless oil paintings of many of the monarchs of Hawaii and many of the distinguished men and women who at some time or another had associations with the Hawaiian monarchy. 20 The Press Congress of the World The visit by the delegates to the Congress to the Islands of Hawaii and Maui will without doubt remain for many years clearly stamped upon their memories. It was with a great deal of eagerness that they left Honolulu early on the morning of Oc- tober 12 for the port of Hilo, on the Island of Hawaii, one hun- dred and ninety miles distant. An early start was made so the delegates might view by day- light the beauties of the islands of Molokai and Maui, which lie between the islands of Oahu and Hawaii. The day was as per- fect a Hawaiian day as could be wished for, cloudless and with a brisk breeze blowing. The sea was as smooth as the proverbial millpond, and those who were so unfortunate as to suffer from seasickness on the voyage from San Francisco to Honolulu found that not even the Molokai channel, rough at times, gave them the least bit of uneasiness. While the Matsonia was on its way to Hilo, a number of the delegates, meeting in a conference with Doctor Williams, out- lined in a preliminary way the plans for the Pan-Pacific Regional Press Conference that was to be established a few days later at Honolulu. To consider the practicability of establishing a Pan- Pacific School of Journalism at Honolulu which would train young men from all Pacific lands in newspaper and magazine work ; to act as agency for the interchange of accurate informa- tion about the peoples of the Pacific of their problems among newspapers and magazines of the Pacific region, and to take steps necessary to obtain cheaper rates for news matter by radio and cable — these were some of the suggestions of possible fields of endeavor of the proposed regional conference. The whole proposition of the organization of such a con- ference, which would be an integral part of the Press Congress of the World, which would hold sessions, say at Honolulu, every two years, and which would be the forerunner of numerous other regional conferences in other parts of the world, was threshed out at some length, and plans were made for a definite presenta- tion of the whole matter on Pan-Pacific Day. Alexander Hume Ford explained that the matter of forming a Pan-Pacific Press Conference was first taken up a number of years ago. He pointed out that for some time an Hawaiian committee had been actively at work at Honolulu and that in- Hawaii and its Hospitality 21 vitations had been issued to all Pacific countries to send delegates to the initial session. About sixty of the delegates who were at- tending the Press Congress sessions were eligible to represent their respective countries at the proposed conference, Ford said. A number of interesting matters concerning the ways in which a regional press conference could be beneficial to the press of the Pacific, were brought out. Lorrin A. Thurston urged action looking toward the breaking down of restrictions that were at that time tying up the sending of news matter by wire- less. He pointed out that while the Naval Radio at Honolulu, for example, could send messages to Japan, it was restricted from so doing, being permitted to send material only certain dis- tances, after which it was necessary to relay it, with the result that additional tolls were charged, often making the cost pro- hibitive. V. S. McClatchy of the Sacramento (Cal.) Bee expressed the opinion that relief along this line might be obtained if there could be applied the same method used by the United States government in sending press matter by way of the Naval Radio. This pres- ent system, Mr. McClatchy said, was being given a trial for a two-year period, and the entire fabric might collapse in 1922 if Congress declined to grant a further continuance of the system. Congress, Mr. McClatchy continued, might be willing to grant a continuance, but that there would undoubtedly be opposition on the part of radio companies and other private interests. He urged the Press Congress to lose no time in beginning a definite cam- paign for the continuance of this service. Mr. Thurston presented a strong argument in favor of a wider dissemination of news from lands bordering the Pacific. "So far as we. are concerned," he said, "We do not know that New Zealand exists except to look at a map, or except when a stranger from there arrives at Honolulu. We are fairly well acquainted with Japan, but we know little or nothing about South or Central America, in so far as news from those countries is con- cerned." He favored the proposal for the establishment of a central news agency at Honolulu at which news from all Pacific lands could be gathered and then sent out to all of the nations border- ing that ocean. 22 The Press Congress of the World "All the world knows of Kilauea the Mighty ; the Unsur- passed ; the greatest of the Lord's workshops ; the ever-active and ever-changing Volcano. To this Hilo is again the gateway, and there is a strange fascination about lingering for a day or two within so close a distance of the one thing one has traveled thousands of miles to see. "Those who have the time do not fail to explore the confines of the great Hawaiian National Park, for within them may be found a veritable education. Visitors will grow acquainted with wonders they have never before dreamed of. They will visit many old craters, some so remote that the very birds will come and perch upon the shoulder of the intruder out of sheer curios- ity. They will find broad parklands within which are magnificent trees of strange species ; and they will find also spreading areas of prehistoric tree ferns, green and cool and lovely, made for dreaming and rest and quiet thoughts away from the fretful tongues of street-bred people. "Go also beyond the National Park; go down in your auto- mobile over the lava-ravaged country leading to the South; through the sugar lands and to peaceful, dreamy Waiohinu where Mark Twain once upon a time sojourned and of which he had many tender memories. Go still onward across the savage lava flows, into the deep tropical forests. Even here, in the midst of so much intense beauty of color and foliage, you will be reminded that the Lord is great, for here, in the midst of the forest, you will find the road running between great and high banks of lava which, but a few short months ago, were flaming and twisting and groaning as they ground their relentless way down the mountain side into the distant sea. "And so you will come to Kona, with its succession of vil- lages so close that one cannot tell where one begins and the other leaves off. Here you are in the very midst of ancient history, and on every side along the sun-drenched and sleepy coast you will find yourself encompassed about with the long-dead past. Give way to the lesson it will bring you, and enter for a while into the lives of the people of these parts, and so learn to return to the world more filled with loving kindness to your fellows. "After this you may go onward to the highlands of Kohala where the splendid cattle and horses rule the country and roam Hawaii and its Hospitality 23 the huge slopes of Mauna Kea. North Kohala should claim you for at least a day or two, for here is more ancient history combined with magnificence of scenery leading down to the bluest of seas ; and presently you will come to Waipio, of all the great valleys incomparably the greatest and the best. No one could put into words the teachings of Waipio. Go to it ; go down the trail into its village and meet its people ; learn its leg- ends and visit its waterfalls and its beaches. You will not re- gret it, for it will prepare you for the splendid journey down the Hamakua coast and back to Hilo. "Let the visitor who wants to really see and love the Hawaiian Islands turn him away from the streets and get away out into the heart of tropical nature. Let him go to Hawaii where life is still primitive and unspoiled, and let him forget that there is such a thing as time. There are guide books to steer his foot- steps everywhere, and even sign posts, though these are unob- trusive ; every man he meets is instinctively his friend and will be at his service, for that is the spirit of Hawaii always and the stranger feels himself instantly at home with nature in her kind- liest mood." The steamer Matsonia docked at Hilo, Hawaii, shortly before six o'clock on the evening of October 12, and for many days thereafter the delegates talked of little else than the reception tendered them by the residents of the Crescent City. For hours prior to the hour of docking they had stood at the ship's rail drink- ing in the beauties of the islands of Molokai and Maui which they had passed en route. And then the reception at Hilo. Typically Hawaiian it was, breathing the very spirit of Aloha and of the famed hospitality of the Big Island. A committee of fifty persons, headed by Dr. Milton Rice, president of the Hilo Board of Trade, boarded the vessel imme- diately after it had docked, bringing with it several pretty young women who decked each of the visitors with a lei fashioned from the beautiful crimson lehua, entwined with the fragrant leaves of the maile. There was no formality about the recep- tion. Everyone just shook hands and said "Aloha" and "We're glad to have you with us" and "We're glad to be here," and the delegates and the city of Hilo were instantly upon the friendliest of terms. Doctor Rice made no address of welcome. He just 24 The Press Congress of the World said "We are glad you are here, and very glad," and those few words exactly suited the delegates. At about seven o'clock the delegates left the Matsonia in au- tomobiles furnished by the residents of Hilo and motored to the Hilo Yacht Club where, in an outdoor theater under the palm trees through which the moonlight filtered down, they received their first taste of what might be characterized as "real Hawaii." An elaborate program had been prepared. There was splendid singing by members of the choir of the famous Haili church of Hilo. Then there was presented a series of Hawaiian tableaux in which the participants were prettily costumed. The Rev. Stephen L. Desha, senator from the Big Island, and known throughout the territory as the "silver-tongued orator," announced a dignified version of the far-famed hula-hula dance ; and it was indeed dignified, for the young woman who went through the graceful motions of the dance that at one time played such a con- spicuous part in the religious rites of old Hawaii, was dressed in a long-flowing "holoku" or Mother Hubbard of white material. She wore no grass skirt such as one sees during the execution of the vulgarized version of this dance on the American stage and in the "movies." There were a number of other symbolic tab- leaux and dances, and additional singing, after which a Hawaiian quintet played several selections, and the Rev. Mr. Desha recited an ancient bit of Hawaiian poetry which voiced a cordial wel- come to the Press Congress delegates. Following the entertainment the delegates and the Hilo folks spent three hours dancing on the splendid floor of the Yacht Club to music supplied by two Hawaiian orchestras. Early the following morning the delegates took a special train at the wharf for a ride along the famous Scenic Railway which skirts the Hamakua Coast. The railway trip, always beautiful, was probably never more so than on that brilliant morning. For a few miles the railway runs through immense fields of sugar cane, the tourist now and then catching glimpses of brilliant coastal scenery. All at once, the train would float out into mid- air over some marvelous gulch, and then stop so the delegates might fill their eyes with the beauty of foam-fringed sapphire sea and green-clad land, or of Mauna Kea's hoary head looming distantly over the treetops. If there is any man in Hawaii who Hawaii and its Hospitality 25 knows his Hawaii, it is Lorrin Thurston, and he took it upon himself to point out to the delegates the various points of in- terest along the line. He proved to be a veritable mine of in- teresting information and he, with R. W. Filler, genial manager of the Hawaii Consolidated Railway, had their hands full, as it were, explaining this and that to the men and women who con- tinually hurled a barrage of questions at them. Returning to Hilo shortly after noon, the delegates were the guests of the Board of Trade at the Hilo Hotel, where brief speeches were made. Immediately after there was begun the journey to the volcano of Kilauea, that mighty workshop of na- ture lying far up above the city of Hilo upon the slopes of Mauna Loa. Throughout the thirty miles the delegates were treated to a wealth of semi-tropic foliage, passing through seem- ingly endless forests of giant tree ferns that flanked the con- crete boulevard for miles. As mile after mile flicked by, the delegates noticed a decided change in the temperature, and as higher elevations were reached it became colder. Overcoats were donned, and coat collars were turned up to ward off the cold wind that swept down from the lofty slopes ahead. It was almost dusk when the Volcano House, which rests upon the brink of the great, ages old crater that was once a sea of molten lava, was reached. It was still light enough to see the crater of Kilauea steaming in the distance, and there was time before dinner to visit the sulphur beds and the enormous stream cracks that are but a few steps from the hotel. Dinner over, warm wraps were donned and the delegates took automobiles for their first visit to the crater, which is reached over a splendidly paved road that leads for seven miles through a beautiful tropical forest. Imagine, if you can, a mac- adamized road right up to within a hundred yards of the brink of an active volcano — a volcano that ofttimes overflows and spews molten lava over the countryside ; a tame volcano, albeit, and one that, in spite of its many fretful moods, has never been known to injure a human person. 26 The Press Congress of the World THE VOLCANO OF KILAUEA. (Written for the Press Congress Book by Lionel W. de Vis-Norton, sec- retary of the Hawaii Publicity Commission.) Only a few years ago any man who had stated that before long the sky would be barred and streaked with the forms of machines flying in all directions and carrying men at a hundred miles an hour, would not only have been put down as a creature of wild imagination, but would probably have been examined as to his mental condition. In the same way, a man who can say that he has been to hell and back in an excellent automobile would perhaps be classed as a prevaricator, but the skies today are the highways of flying men, and as for the rest, gentle reader, I have made the trip; have made it unscathed and have re- turned from it with the greatest reluctance. It has been well said that the road to hell is paved with good intentions ; for my own part, I found it paved with macadam, and superbly laid mac- adam, too ; the broad path that leadeth to destruction led only down a gentle grade and then round a sweeping curve to the brink of hell itself. I got out of my automobile, walked a few yards, and then I had arrived at the end of my journey. But let me get back to the beginning of my story. Far away in the uttermost West of all things, just where the setting sun sinks to rest in the sapphire seas, heaven is situated. Heaven is di- vided into the loveliest fleet of islands that lies moored in any ocean, and it is in the loveliest of all these lovely islands that hell may be found. And the name of this land is Hawaii ; giving its name to all the other islands of the group, yet superbly alone in beauty, in grandeur and in his- torical antiquity. A land of perennial summer, where the heat does not distress nor the cold make itself felt. A land filled with such pictures of sea and sky and plain and mountain, such magnificence of landscapes, such bright sunshine and tempting breezes, such fragrant foliage, such brilliant colorings in bush and tree, and such dazzling moonlight as may be found in no other land within the human ken. Conjure up a memory of the most perfect May day that God ever made, when sunshine, soft airs and the fragrance of blossoms and smiling na- ture combine to fill the heart with thankfulness; conjure up this sort of a day, multiply it by three hundred and sixty-five, and you have an idea of the climate which the whole year round pervades the surroundings of hell. Hell occupies an area of nearly four and one-half square miles, and no one has yet been able to estimate the depth of it, but the heaven which surrounds it covers 4,000 square miles, and every square foot of every square mile is beautiful. Within its confines you will find great snow-capped mountains; rising to height of 14,000 feet above the sea; hundreds of magnificent waterfalls, set in scenes of rarest beauty; won- Hawaii and its Hospitality 27 derful stalactite caverns ; weird craters ; old and recent lava flows ; thermal lakes ; wild canyons ; ancient "heiaus"' or temples of native worship ; dense tropical forests and restful glades of tree ferns which make the tree ferns of other lands look like pygmies ; quaint survivals of primitive native life ; the glamor of the orient; the gorgeous coloring of the tropics, and a wealth of greenery and freshness to be found nowhere else in all the world. But I write not of heaven, but of the other place, and of my visit there. It was on a sunny summer morning that I was borne away from the snug harbor of Honolulu on the journey to heaven, or rather to Hawaii. The steamer was comfortable to the verge of luxury; the chef was an artist, and the smooth seas over which we slid for the rest of the day were most conducive to the sound sleep which marked the hours of the night. In the roseate glow of a tropical sunrise, next day, we came to Hilo, the chief city of Hawaii, and the gate to Paradise. It is tempting to dwell upon that city and its magnificent setting; one could write much of the gloriously lovely little cocoanut island which guards the harbor entrance, but we are bound for hell direct, and must not linger by the way. Perhaps it is here I should explain that hell has another name, and that name is Kilauea, the largest and most easily accessible active volcano in the world. This sounds tame enough, but I prefer to give it the name generally conferred upon it by those who first look from its brink into the appalling spectacle beneath. And now to get on with the tale. The automobile which was to con- vey me to the verge of hell was in waiting at the wharf at Hilo as I came ashore, and in a few moments we were speeding rapidly over one of the most perfect roads it has been my good fortune to experience. I will say nothing of the drive of thirty miles, though I could fill a volume with rhapsodies about the scenery; suffice it to say that in an hour and a half we suddenly emerged from the dense forest of palms and tree ferns, fifty feet high and more, and found ourselves at the entrance of a modern hotel, built on the very edge of utter devastation and awe-inspiring vast- ness and ruin. The change is simply astounding. It takes tlie breath away, and I can well believe that nowhere else may an equally sudden con- trast be experienced. The hotel stands on a wide shelf, actually within the outer wall of the main crater, though apparently upon its very brink. Away to the right soars the gigantic bulk of Mauna Loa, or Long Mountain, nearly fourteen thousand feet high and the largest mountain of its type in the world. It rises in a magnificent sweep, its great flanks deeply scarred with the dark lines of old and recent lava flows, checkered with patches of forest lands and open greensward. As a color study alone, it provides a spectacle unique in the history of mountain countries, and whether seen at daybreak in the cold, clear morning light, or in the rosy glow of the sunset sky, it is always most beautiful. It is perhaps best viewed at the moment when the setting sun dips beneath its mighty crest, for then the 28 The Press Congress of the World fleecy clouds of steam rising from its still active crater shine like silver in the upward reflected rays, crowning the mountain with a magnificent diadem of jewels; but at all times it dominates the landscape, and ever the eye turns toward it in wonder, tinged with awe. Directly in front of the hotel, separated only from the brink by a narrow road, lies the main crater of Kilauea, and here the task of descrip- tion becomes difficult indeed. Imagine a pit so vast that the further edge may be only dimly discerned ; a pit fully five hundred feet deep, with perpendicular walls nearly eight miles around ; turn into this pit a raging sea, with dashing breakers, seeth- ing whirlpools and confused cross-currents ; color it slate gray, and sud- denly turn it to stone so that all movement is instantly arrested. Now, in the midst of this solid sea, dig a jagged hole in the center of the world, release the molten masses and the roaring fires which underlie the crust of this globe of ours ; let loose a gigantic column of smoke and steam, spouting, bellying and eddying everlastingly into the skies above, you may perhaps gain a faint but a very faint, impression of the main crater of Kilauea and the fire pit "Halemaumau," the "House of Everlasting Fire." It is immense beyond words ; incredible beyond belief ; weird beyond description, and awful beyond human awe ; and yet, here on the edge of eternity as it well appears, is a modern hotel, whose very garden paths emit sulphurous steam and vapor; a hotel trim, well-kept, with dainty flower beds and feathery tree ferns on the one hand ; and Kilauea, grim, repellant, threatening and watchful on tlie other hand. Hoteldom on the brink of helldom ; modern manners and white-clad waiters on the very edge of untold centuries of irresistible power and widespread devastation. What a text for a moralist preacher. The Road to Hell, or rather the road to Halemaumau, the fire pit, runs from the hotel through the forest for some seven miles, then by easy grades into the bed of the main crater, ending within fifty feet of the actual fire pit, and most people make their acquaintance with the volcano by this means. As for me, the sight of that huge main crater drew me strongly, and I walked across its bed, returning in the late night hour by automobile. Oh, that walk across the crater! The trail leads down from the garden of the hotel, and from its commencement to its ending at the edge of Halemaumau is but three miles in length, but I venture to say that no- where in all the world may be found three other miles of such unique and vivid interest. The first quarter of a mile, with its descent of five hundred feet, is somewhat steep, but is easily negotiated either on foot or on horseback, and the bottom is soon reached. Upon setting out from the shore (the simile is irresistible) the traveler finds that the way is smooth and carefully marked with stones placed upon the surface of the lava, so that there is no possibility of straying into dangerous spots. I do not believe that these danger spots are very many, and indeed it would be difficult to find them, but one remembers that one is now walk- ing across the crater of an active volcano, and that is quite enough to Hawaii and its Hospitality 29 remove all desire to try experiments in looking for dangerous places. The great sea of lava, which from the hotel, five hundred feet above, looks almost perfectly smooth, is now found to comprise hills and valleys in bewildering confusion and in every imaginable form. One can plainly see how each successive lava flow has poured over its predecessors, solidify- ing as it poured, so that here are crested breakers arrested in the act of breaking ; great clots of foam, lines of ripples or cross-currents ; there are enormous bubbles that have turned to stone even as they burst — bubbles sometimes covering an acre or more, with fractured sides and broken roofs, the fragments of which are spread around in every direction. One comes across mounds which have burst at the summit and which one may climb to gaze into the darkness of unknown depths and sense the mystery of strange puffs and wisps of sulphur-laden steam. Here and there are hardy little ferns growing in tiny crevices. Terrific chasms and earth- quake cracks are crossed by wooden bridges, and now and again one may find in sheltered cracks the golden spun lava (like glistening cobwebs wet with dew), which is known as "Pele's Hair," and is supposed by the Hawaiian natives to be the farflung tresses of the presiding goddess of the volcano, whose home is in the depths of Halemaumau itself. Onward and upward leads this fascinating trail, and finally it emerges upon the very brink of the great fire pit. And here one feels the limitations of language, for no words could describe nor brush depict the dread majesty of this terrific pit, roaring and bellowing in inconceivable grandeur. One is positively stunned by the immensity of it all, and one realizes in no uncertain degree the puny part man plays in the great sclieme of the creation of the universe in which he lives and moves and has his being. One stands upon a deeply serrated ledge and looks down with awe- struck eyes upon a seething maelstrom of whirling smoke, which ever and again is violently torn asunder, permitting a fleeting glimpse of flame and red hot waters far beneath. Even amid the awful roaring one may hear titanic splashings and the crash of incandescent rock hurled forth by the forces beneath, to fall back into the tortured abyss from whence it came. One is fascinated, appalled and amazed as one gazes at this marvelous sight ; one grows bolder and creeps to the extreme edge, and presently is rewarded by clearer glimpses, gaining a better idea of the spectacle under- lying the streaming column of smoke which ever soars high above one's head and drifts away upon the trade wind to the distant sea. And so the hours pass away in intense interest; darkness comes on apace, and by slow degrees the "pillar of cloud by day" becomes "the pillar of fire by night," and the fires begin to appear at their grandest. One looks straight down into a lake of molten gold, for all the world like a peep into a gigantic Bessemer convertor. But this lake is in violent motion. Its great waves dash from side to side, and foam into cataracts of fire over the red-hot rocks. Ever and again the whole surface is riven and from its depths arise wondrous fountains of fire, roaring up- wards in devilish merriment, and flinging far and wide their awful freight of molten stone. 30 The Press Congress of the World The whole aspect changes with bewildering frequency ; at one moment there appears a calm lake, glowing as with the light of some glorious sun- set; the next — every evil power that Satan possesses is let loose in one roaring inferno, far, far more awful than anything my poor words could ever describe. Fountains and sprays, billows and whirlpools, crashings of tortured rock, cataracts of incredible force, twistings, doublings and writhings until the brain reels and the senses are almost numbed. For hours and hours I sat on the rim of hell and watched in a numb and nameless wonder; for hours I witnessed the terrific forces at work in the creation of the world ; one could only describe it as primal, for it was the beginning of all things, the world in a state of chaos, and yet it was also final, for it was the last stage of our human understanding and the realization of all the terrors of the hell of our childhood's belief. For hours I sat, silent and still, and then, suddenly, I caught sight of an awful, silent eye, one huge watchful orbit of crimson, a hundred feet or more above the molten lake, red-hot, evil, intense and utterly bestial. It was like the glaring eye of some poor wild beast who, after years of hopeless imprisonment, had at last found the way of escape and was waiting there for some passerby, ready to spring forth in one pent-up bombshell of relentless hatred. My better judgment told me it was only a hole filled with red-hot lava ready to pour into the lake beneath, but though I laughed at it, and even, in my frailty, threw futile stones at it and affected to scorn it, it eventually got hold of me, and drove me away. Twice I returned and tried to for- get it was there, but it was of no avail, and so, beaten and ashamed, I turned away and made my way to the road close by, where the automobile was waiting. And, so, after a rush of twenty minutes over a satin slipper road, I found myself back at the hotel, where the smiling faces of my fellow guests seemed all unreal. I do not think I slept much that night. It is not an easy thing to go to hell and come back in a day, and there was so much to think about. I suppose my main impressions are, now that the first awe has died away, that this earthly hades is as unique as it is in- credibly marvelous ; that it is ridiculously easy to get to, and that the cost is but trivial. From San Francisco one may reach it in one week ; from Vancouver, B. C, in about a day longer, and from Australia in just two weeks. The volcano of Kilauea is almost unknown, while Honolulu is a household word. It is but fifteen hours by steamer to Hilo at the Gate of Paradise, and every foot of the way after that is interesting right up to the cul- minating point at the brink of hell. The feeblest person may make the journey; no one has ever been injured, and no fatality is ever likely as far as human eye can see or brain foretell. Delegates to the Press Congress, after obtaining their first glimpse of hell (as Mr. Norton describes it), were wholly un- Hawaii and its Hospitality 31 willing to leave. As the crater on the evening in question was not violently active, and as there was an absence of the strong sulphur fumes which usually are being blown upwards and out over the rim, practically everyone walked a good quarter of the distance around the rim, thus being able to view the floor of the crater from a number of interesting angles. The level of the crater floor at that time was considerably low, but there was sufficient fire play to furnish an awe-inspiring exhibition of na- ture's pyrotechnics. Now and then a great area of the cooled crust, unable to withstand the terrific heat from beneath, would melt suddenly, and its place would be taken by a lake of bril- liantly glowing molten lava which would send up great foun- tains and geysers of white hot rock. A number of great cracks opened up, sending forth huge jets of steam that sounded for all the world like a thousand locomotives blowing off. From early evening until midnight the delegates kept their vigil on the rim of the mighty crater, marveling at the sight which was presented as a full moon arose and cast its golden light over the already weird surroundings. The return to the Volcano House was made by automobile. The following morning the party entered waiting automobiles and visited the crater again, it having been the desire of the general committee that they view the spectacle both at night and by daylight. During the night the volcano had increased some- what in activity, and the visitors were treated to many new and strange scenes, as well as a splendid view of the surrounding countries. After about an hour of investigation, the delegates gathered on a smooth place near the rim and heard an interesting and enlightening lecture on Kilauea and its moods and activities by Dr. Thomas A. Jaggar, Jr., the noted volcanologist, who is in charge of the volcano observatory at Kilauea. There was but little concerning Kilauea, and the scientific work that is being done in and about the great crater, that was not explained. At the conclusion of the lecture, the delegates were taken to the magnificently beautiful fern forest that lies near Kilauea, past many an ancient and dead crater whose steep sides are now densely wooded. The largest of these, "Kilauea Iki," or "Little Kilauea," is more than one thousand feet deep, and its immense 32 The Press Congress of the World bottom of lava that cooled centuries ago is to the spectator gazing over the rim as but a mere speck. The fern forest is truly tropical — dense, cool and with a myriad of strange trees, plants and palms confronting the visitor everywhere. One climbs down and down before the bottom is reached, over a path that passes through a veritable jungle. The sun is blotted out by the dense foliage, and the cool semi-twilight is refreshing indeed after several hours upon the hot edge of the nearby volcano. Here, as Norton might put it, is a tiny tropical paradise within a few steps of hell. Aloft in the trees strange birds of red, orange, green and yellow plumage, flit to and fro emitting strange cries. Along the trail strange fruits grow side by side with the familiar thimbleberry. From Hawaii the Press Congress delegates and other guests went, on the Matsonia, to Maui Saturday morning, October 15. For two days the Valley Islanders unfolded one by one their own program of entertainment and of trips which allowed the visitors to gain a further idea of the territory's conditions and problems. The visitors saw the Maui county fair ; they traveled past Maui's great cane-fields ; a party went up to the summit of lofty Halea- kala on an unforgettable horseback excursion ; there was a luau at the national guard armory at Lahaina; they saw baseball, boxing and swimming. A number of Honolulans as well as the big committee of Maui citizens went out on a lighter to meet the Matsonia in the harbor and escort the visitors ashore. Joseph H. Gray, editor of the Maui News, was chairman of the Maui reception com- mittee. President H. B. Penhallow of the Maui Chamber of Commerce headed a delegation of business men, and Mrs. W. A. Baldwin was chairman of the Maui Women's reception committee. Mr. Gray spoke briefly to the visitors assembled on the upper deck of the Matsonia, giving them a hearty greeting, and Frank P. Glass, Sr., of Birmingham, Ala., U. S. A., responded for the visiting newspapermen. Mr. Glass said that the Press Congress delegates had come to Maui with eyes open, ears open and wills open, ready to learn sympathetically of the island problems. The governor of the territory, Wallace R. Farrington, and a former governer, George R. Carter, went out with the Maui Com- -lAMKS W lilGHT BROWN, Kditou of The Editor and Puulisiiek. New Yokk City, The Secretarii-Treasiircr of the Cuiigicss. Hawaii and its Hospitality 33 mittee. Mr. Carter came to Maui as one of the judges at the fair. Governor Farrington arrived on the Claudine early Satur- day morning. His aide, Capt. Henry P. Beckley, had come over the previous Wednesday. At the fair grounds the visiting party divided. One large party made up for the trip to the summit of the great extinct crater of Haleakala. One visiting newspaper man, Hugh J. Powell, of Coffeyville, Kansas, U. S. A., after seeing the sun set over the mountains of West Maui, and simultaneously, in the east, across the vast, dark floor of the mighty extinct crater, a full moon rise above the rolling clouds, and then, this morning, the sun rise again, wrote in the Haleakala guest book: "Here I saw the end of a perfect day and the perfect be- ginning of another." Twenty-six members of the Press Congress party made the trip, among them several women. More would have gone but for the fact that accommodations in the rest-house at the top are limited. Those who went by automobile to Olinda, and thence by horseback to the top, came down Sunday declaring they had witnessed scenic beauties never surpassed in grandeur, loveliness, charm, and variety. Their many adjectives were called forth by the rapidity with which the immense seas of clouds on all sides of the lofty old mountain changed in form, and changed in color under the rays of sun or moon ; and by the majesty of the pan- orama unrolled when, as often happened, the clouds were swept away by driving wind, and the lower parts of Maui, or the loftier summits of Mauna Kea and Mauna Loa, on Hawaii, were seen afar in the clear air. Frank B. Cameron and A. B. Brown of Maui were the of- ficial escorts on the trip acting for the Maui committee, W. A. Clark and William Walsh. The ride down the mountain on the morning of October 16 was made in quick time. At Olinda the party was met by autos and taken to the Matsonia. Mr. Brown answered hundreds of questions about Haleakala and Maui and he and Mr. Cameron were asked to express to the Maui committee the deep apprecia- tion of the Press Congress party for the Haleakala trip. Mr. Cameron was in charge of transportation, meals and sleeping ar- rangements. 3 34 The Press Congress of the World Only those who reahze the difficulties of getting supplies — not only food, but fuel and bedding — to the rest-house for such a large party, can truly appreciate how well the Maui men did it. Counting guides, the party totalled forty-two. This was more than first expected, and to get the ponies, hurry-up calls were sent out to Maui ranches. As a result, the party's mounts and the cowboy guides were from several ranches, including Halea- kala Grove ranch and the Hawaiian Commercial, Paia and Wailuku Sugar Company plantations. The party rode from Kahului to Olinda in automobiles, and there the ponies were waiting. The ride up the sloping ranges was a beautiful one. The summit was reached just before sun- set, and already supper was being cooked by men sent on ahead. Ample supplies of food and bedding had been packed in a day previously. As the sun set, a full moon arose in the east and shone throughout a long and wonderful evening. The guests were loath to go to bed. After supper they staged an impromptu song-and- dance entertainment in the moonlight. They were awakened at five o'clock on the morning of Oc- tober 16, and had just time for breakfast before the sun rose over the crater. The only flaw in perfect weather conditions was a light fog which came up after breakfast, making photog- raphy difficult. Otherwise the weather was perfect, with that variety of cloud-play which best sets ofif the character of Halea- kaia. For the visiting journalists and women who did not go to Haleakala, there was provided a full afternoon and evening on October 15. After a lunch at the cafeteria on the fair grounds, they took in the afternoon program at the fair — livestock parade, horse-racing, baseball ; had dinner on the Matsonia ; and were back in time for the evening program at the fair. Maui county's fourth annual fair was undoubtedly the best yet held. Not only is the fair ground at Kahului a model in- stitution in the quality and permanency of its equipment, but the general layout and arrangement of the large exhibition build- ings, fine board roadways and ornamental planting is an ob- Hawaii and its Hospitality 35 ject lesson which other fairs might well pattern after. True to the fair management's broad-minded policy, all the islands were invited to exhibit this year as in the past, with the result that some fine exhibits were brought in. The Parker ranch sent 18 head of very fine Hereford beef cattle. Oahu likewise con- tributed some choice stock. The poultry exhibit was extensive and the finest yet shown on Maui. The commercial exhibits from Honolulu alone occupied most of one large exhibition building and were a credit to the enterprising business houses which participated. Aside from the extensive and excellent public school exhibits shown in the territorial building of the fair, together with the always interesting home economics ex- hibits which were received this year, a fine showing was made in the agronomy section, occupying a building forty by one hundred feet. The exhibits of fruits and vegetables in particular were never so extensive as this year. The exhibits of field crops also showed up well. Special emphasis was given to forage crops in general and to the new forage and green manuring crop, the pigeon pea in particular. Grove ranch installed an attractive booth devoted entirely to the pigeon pea, serving hot pigeon pea soup to all visitors. The several agricultural scientific institutions of the territory made fine educational exhibits in the agronomy building. These included the experiment station of the H. S. P. A., which showed a lot of realistic paintings of standard varieties of sugar cane, as well as actual specimens. The Hawaii (U. S.) experiment station illustrated its various activities in agronomy, agricultural chemistry, horticulture and extension work, in a most attractive manner. The territorial board of agriculture and forestry oc- cupied a central position with its exhibit of forest trees, nursery stock and specimens of sawed logs to show the various grains. The entomological and animal industries exhibits, together with a series of fine photographs, made this an instructive and very entertaining exhibit. The University of Hawaii occupied a wall and bench space of eight by twenty feet. All the activities of the university were illustrated by a splendid collection of photographs. The college of agriculture showed photographs of its best dairy animals, to- gether with records of their high performance in milk yields, 36 The Press Congress of the World which are second to none in the territory. Growing field crops showed the possibiHties of diversified agriculture in Hawaii. The central photograph of the university campus, including the university farm together with the series of pictures of the main building and associated buildings, were a revelation to many visitors. Laboratory interiors of chemical, botany and engineer- ing divisions with students at work made another interesting feature. The athletics of the university and a picture of the entire student body, as well as the large incoming freshman class, were amplified by the ingenious photograph showing the sub- stantial growth of the university since its establishment in 1908. A special feature of this exhibit included photographs taken in the art division of ceramics, batiks, wood blocking and em- broidery. An interesting exhibit of chaulmoogra oil and its derivatives as prepared under the direction of Dr. A. L. Dean, president of the University, attracted much attention, and doubtless did much to emphasize the importance of the place the university holds, not only in the territory, but in the world at large. In the evening there was a concert by the Coast Artillery Band and at eight o'clock "A Night in Hawaii" was presented under the direction of William K. Hoopii. Simple in its makeup — just a program of twelve familiar Hawaiian songs, and a tableau portraying some of the kings, queens, princes and princesses of the islands, — yet enacted with a precision that spelled careful attention to details, it made a lasting impression upon the audience that packed the grandstand of the Maui County Fair and Racing Association, with its color- ful setting, picturesque costumes, dreamy music and splendid sing- ing. Delegates to the Press Congress who heard the singing and saw the tableau were delighted. They were unstinting in their praise of the sweet voices of the members of the chorus, more than one hundred in number. There was a distinct charm about it — some subtle thing that played upon the heartstrings and held the attention of the listener until the last note had died away. It was a cosmopolitan chorus, and one in which youth and middle age joined in the business of making song. Probably more than half a dozen races and mixtures of races were rep- Hawaii and its Hospitality 37 resented among the songsters, yet the Hawaiian predominated. The program was made up of a number of songs that one rarely hears in these days of New York manufactured "popular" com- positions, and when "jazz" is striving to inject itself into Hawaiian music. The singers were for the most part young men and women who are connected with the schools of Maui, either as teachers or students. The women wore white dresses and yellow leis. They were directed by William K. Hoopii, who is an authority on Hawaiian music and who has made for himself a reputation in the organization and training of choruses. Each song was rendered in a highly pleasing manner and with delightful and perfect harmony. The song program was as follows : "E Hanai Ai," chorus ; "Kalakaua Serenade," Mrs. Freudenberg and chorus ; "Pulupe Nei He," Mr. Hoopii and chorus ; "O Oe No Ka I Ike," Miss Namau and chorus ; "Laau Hoolulu I Ke Kino," Mrs. Freudenberg and chorus ; "Ane Hila," Miss Chan Wa and chorus ; "Ua Like No A Like," Mrs. Fuller and Chorus; "Malu I Ke Ao," Mr. Hoopii and chorus; "Mauio No Ka Oi," Mrs. A. Garcia and chorus. One of the pleasing features of the program was the "Song of the Islands," which was in charge of Mrs. W. H. Field. As the name of each island was mentioned in song, a Hawaiian girl entered bedecked with flowers of leis representing the island. Islands and flowers represented were : Hawaii, lehua ; Maui, rose ; Oahu, ilima ; Kauai, mokihana ; Molokai, kuki ; Lanai, kanaoha ; Kahoolawe, hinahina ; Niihau, shells ; Molokini, represented by a tiny girl wearing leis of Jobs tears. Miss Kapoo gave a demonstration of the hula dance in a graceful and clever manner, and her efforts were rewarded by hearty applause. The first figure in the tableau was the Princess Kaiulani, the part being taken by Mrs. Charles Farden, who was greeted by serenaders. She wore a white silk holoku and a green maile lei. She was followed by Mrs. Kahewa Seong as Queen Liliuokalani. She wore a red silk gown and a yellow feather lei. Queen Emma was represented by Mrs. Mary Chan Wa, who wore a lavender gown and a feather lei. She was greeted with an oli by Mrs. Hauola. The princess Pomaikalani, was represented by Mrs. 38 The Press Congress of the World Kaiawe Searle, who wore a light gold gown and feather lei. She was followed by Prince Leleohukee (Samuel Mookini of Lahainaluna school), who was a composer of love songs, a tal- ented musician and a brother of King Kalakaua and Queen Liliu- okalani. Mr. Mookini sang an old Hawaiian ballad, accompany- ing himself on a guitar. There was also a little girl in a grass skirt, who proved herself to be a clever exponent of the hula dance. Her daintiness and gracefulness instantly won the ad- miration of the audience, and she responded to two encores. The Princess Pauahi (Bernice Pauahi Bishop), represented by Miss E. Namauu, who wore a black gown with silver stripes was greeted with a song, "Pauahi Lani," sung by Mrs. Freudenberg. After the figures in the tableau had taken their places King Kamehameha I., represented by William Bray, attired in the cloak and helmet costume of the days of early Hawaii, entered, accompanied by two bodyguards, Mr. Oana and Mr. Kalepa, who carried a spear and a tabu stick, respectively. The spear was presented to the king, who then took the position that is so well known to Honoluluans who pass the statue in front of the ju- diciary building every day. This was a signal for the singing of Hawaii Ponoi, and the entire audience stood and joined in the chorus. Just before the opening bars of the "Star Spangled Banner," Uncle Sam, who appeared from some place nearby, stepped onto the platform and clasped hands with King Kamehameha, thus representing the friendship between the Hawaiians and the early missionaries and the final linking of the islands with the United States. "In all my life," remarked a delegate after it was all over, "I have never heard the 'Star Spangled Banner' sung so well and so perfectly as those Hawaiian people sang it." J. J. Walsh, between numbers, introduced several speakers, including Governor Wallace R. Farrington, who harked back to his newspaper days with a seat in the press box ; General Charles P. Summerall, commanding the Hawaiian department, U. S. A. ; Rear Admiral Edward Simpson, commanding the fourteenth naval district, and C. L. Dotson, one of the delegates. "I am glad to be here and receive a share of the welcome extended by this wonderful island and its wonderful people," said the governor. "I am delighted to be for today a citizen of Hawaii and its Hospitality 39 Maui and to say with the rest of you, 'Maui no ka oe.' I assure you that this is one of the very best islands in the territory of Hawaii. The only island that comes anywhere near it is the island of Hawaii, but perhaps Oahu is a little bit better. You see, I must stand up for my home town — or rather island. "I want to express my appreciation of the wonderful co- operation that I have seen evidenced here on the part of the officers and men of the army and navy. I am sure you recog- nize here evidence of which we have a splendid demonstration every day in the year. The army and the navy are a part of the United States and we should never lose an opportunity to co- operate with them." The governor thanked those who were taking part in the "Night in Hawaii" program. "I want those delegates who have come here from abroad to know that these beautiful Hawaiian songs will never grow old," he continued. "They are getting stronger and stronger on your heart strings. And I want to say here that you can't jazz up Hawaiian music, for if you do, you rob it of its character, of that something which carries with it all of the romantic atmosphere of Hawaii. "You have seen what can be done here. You have seen the products of diversified industry. And I want to compliment the people of Maui on the work they are doing in the development of agriculture. This is something upon which we have got to depend in our community life. There is a tremendous necessity for the development of the small farmer, and along this line I want to say that Maui's name will always be famous for the de- velopment of the pigeon pea." "I have heard," said General Summerall, "that this island belonged to the Baldwins. Well, if it ever did, they lost posses- sion this morning, because this morning possession of it was transferred to the strangers who have entered your beautiful port. You have made us feel that we are not strangers, but that this beautiful land is ours for the time being; and we indeed feel that the spirit of old Hawaii has been transmitted back, not only by the splendid men and women of the Hawaiian race, but by all of the others who dwell here. We all want to come again and, speaking for the army, I am sure that we will come again. We belong to all of the islands and all of the people, and 40 The Press Congress of the World it is only because of matters of administration and supply that we are placed in Oahu." Admiral Simpson, who won a reputation among the del- egates for a never-absent smile, said that the navy had sent its envoys under the sea, on the sea and in the air over the sea to the Maui fair. Although the navy is on Oahu, he continued, Oahu is not the only island it desires to make friends with. "After tonight I, a new arrival, am more than eager to visit your beautiful island and your cordial, hospitable people again." Following The Night in Hawaii entertainment there were two boxing matches which were well received. Sunday morning a sightseeing trip was the big event. Maui hosts were at the wharf with their cars. The route was from Kahului to Pala, thence up to Makwao, past the Maui polo field and the Puunene mill, thence to Wailuku, past Waikapu, by Maalea Bay, and along the road which skirts the sea between Wailuku and Lahaina. At Lahaina an elaborate native feast was spread for the vis- itors, which lasted until well along in the afternoon, when they were brought back to the Matsonia for dinner. After dinner they were taken to the swimming tank installed by the Hawaiian Commercial & Sugar Co. at Puunene, where exhibition swim- ming and diving were given. Among the well-known swimmers participating were Duke Kahanamoku, champion sprint swim- mer of the world ; Warren Kealoha, champion backstroke swim- mer of the world; Mariechen Wahselau, joint holder of the fifty yard free style title for women; Gay Harris, K. Kelilipio. Helen Moses, Ruth Scudder, Cecily Cunha, Christine Smoot, and divers R. K. Fuller and Clair Tait. Maui men and women were indefatigable in their efforts to entertain the visiting newspapermen and other guests. When it is considered that the community was simultaneously carrying out the county fair, the success of which taxed the transporta- tion and other resources of the Maui residents, the perfection of the plans for entertainment was all the more commendable. Monday the delegates attended regular Congress sessions, in the evening enjoying a band concert at the Moana Hotel. Con- Hawaii and its Hospitality 41 gress was in session again Tuesday. A "Jamboree luncheon" was given at the Outrigger Club pavilion at noon by the Honolulu Ad Club. There special music and stunts provided amusement. In the evening at the Moana Hotel Dr. Herbert E. Gregory, professor of geology at Yale University (on leave of absence) and curator of the Bishop Museum at Honolulu, lectured upon the status and functions of the Museum and the exploration of the Pacific now in progress by the Museum in cooperation with a number of mainland institutions. Dr. A. L. Dean, President of the University of Hawaii, delivered a lecture upon "The Con- quering of Leprosy by the Use of Chaulmoogra Oil." Wednesday noon Mrs. Wallace R. Farrington, wife of Gov- ernor Farrington, gave a luncheon for women delegates and women visitors at the Press Congress. Automobiles took the guests to the Country Club where the affair was given. In the evening there was a band concert at the Moana Hotel. At eight o'clock on the evening of October 20 delegates to the Press Congress attended a unique entertainment presented by Hawaiian patriotic societies in the War Memorial Park at Waikiki. The "Spirit of Hawaii" revealed the early history and picturesque island life. Feather capes, kahilis, canoes together with much Hawaiian music, hula dancing and the recital of tra- ditions and legends made vivid the colorful life of by-gone days. The program was called "Kahanu O Hawaii," or "The Breath of Hawaii" and embodied events showing the high degree of civilization attained by the natives before the advent of the mis- sionaries, the loyalty to royal authority and elaborate ceremo- nials. "The Landing of the Shipwrecked Spaniards in 1555" show- ed the traditional arrival of a Spaniard and his sister on the island of Hawaii. Harry F. Davison took the part of the Span- iard, while the Spanish sister was portrayed by Miss Olive Dun- can. Samuel Pupuhi acted as the king and the queens were Mrs. Barringer and Mrs. Nauao, with Mrs. David Hoapili as the princess. The half circled grandstand of spectators were caught fast held by the mystic beauty of the night and the setting of the pageant of modern and ancient Hawaii. 42 The Press Congress of the World Soft singing voices, haunting thrumming of music strings, and throbbing color, red, orange, green, yellow — 'that is what the Press Congress delegates and 2000 other folks glimpsed and heard. Serenading groups opened the program. They stepped out of the night into the circle, troubadoured the audience with the beauty of their voices and sensuous humming of their in- struments, and dropped back into darkness. Lights out then — and the amphitheater was in cool darkness. Stars overhead, the beating of the water on the shore, and the dry, pungent smell of palms. Dimmed lights came slowly on, and there on a rock was a slender girl in misty garments, "Ka Hanu o Hawaii," Breath of Hawaii. She talked of the spirit of Hawaii, old Hawaii, when kings strode the highway and all men were war- riors. In swift succession followed tableaux and music pictur- ing various historical events. The Press Congress delegates will never forget that night, not any more than they can forget a bewildering dream of beauty. The morning of October 21 the Press Congress delegates were entertained by a Pan-Pacific pageant in front of the capitol. This colorful event marked the opening of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference. At Old Mission House that afternoon the delegates enjoyed a delightful tea given by the entertainment committee of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference. At this tea there was singing by the Hawaiian children under the direction of Mrs. Berringer and Mrs. Gittel. The biggest and what was probably the best military pro- gram ever staged in Hawaii was given at Schofield Barracks on the morning of October 22 for the entertainment of the delegates to the Press Congress of the World. Nearly every branch of the service which is stationed in Hawaii was represented in the exhibition, which included spec- tacular display of stunts by the army airmen. Every stunt which has been tried by airmen was exhibited. The air program in- cluded an aerial combat, bomb raid, radio communication with a radio hut on the drill field, an attack raid and an exhibition of the military order of passing in review. During the aerial com- bat the plants went through all the maneuvers which are used in Hawaii and its Hospitality 43 actual warfare and did the stunts which have been found to be necessary in gaining the advantageous position in such a combat. The program was started by a review of all the troops of the Hawaiian division, led by Brigadier General Joseph E. Kuhn, commanding officer of the Hawaiian division. The aerial pro- gram came next and then the crack First Battalion of the Twenty- seventh Infantry gave an exhibition of close order drill and Butt's manual. A detachment of infantry staged an attack and the program was concluded by firing by the field artillery. This number on the program included the laying down of a rolling barrage, one of the most wonderful sights which can be seen during a military exhibition. Following the military exhibition, delegates were taken in automobiles to Haleiwa Hotel for luncheon, as guests of the Honolulu Chamber of Commerce. There was a slight detour through the pineapple fields to show the methods of planting and cultivating pineapples. Following the luncheon, the visitors re- turned by automobile to Honolulu on the windward side of the island, coming up the Pali and down the Nuuanu valley. On Sunday morning special services were held at the Central Union Church for Press Congress delegates. The Rev. Albert W. Palmer, pastor, preached on "The Perils of Sensationalism." In the afternoon special street cars were provided to take the guests to Bishop Museum, where there was an exhibit of Hawaiian royal feather capes and cloaks and other relics. Sunday evening motion pictures of the Press Congress were shown on the lawn of the Moana Hotel. All phases of the pineapple cannery industry were revealed on October 24 to delegates to the Press Congress of the World. The delegates were taken in automobiles first to the plant of the American Can Co., Iwilei, where they were shown the various processes through which a piece of sheet tin goes before it finally emerges in the form of from one to six cans. When run- ning full blast the plant can turn out 100,000 cans an hour, and the average annual outturn has been in the neighborhood of 125,- 000,000 cans. Leaving the can factory the delegates passed into the plant 44 The Press Congress of the World of the Hawaiian Pineapple Co., where they traced the course of pineapples from the time they left the freight cars and were placed in the Ginaca machine, until they emerged canned, cooked, labelled and ready for boxing. Especial interest was taken in the Ginaca machine, which peels, cores and trims the pineapple. At noon the delegates had luncheon in the company's cafe- teria, a big, cool roomy place on the upper floor where sub- stantial meals are furnished the employees for five and ten cents. Brief addresses were made by J. H. Kessell, delegate from Queensland, Australia, and James Wright Brown, of the Editor and Publisher, New York. Mr. Kessell compared the Queens- land government with that of the United States, declaring that the reason the latter was so successful was because it permitted and assisted individual and collective private enterprise. He said that the trip through the can factory and the pineapple can- nery had been a revelation, and that the progress of the industry was something he would be sure to tell the people of Australia about. H. L. Lyon, in charge of research work for the Association of Hawaiian Pineapple Packers, gave an illustrated lecture on pineapple culture, in which he explained in an interesting way some of the obstacles that had to be overcome, scientifically and otherwise. A Japanese festival was given at the Pan-Pacific Gardens, Kuakini lane the evening of October 24. Handsome head dresses which had never been seen in Hawaii and which are worn in Japan only by the elite on festive occa- sions, were a feature of the entertainment. Mrs. C. Yada, the Misses Fumi and Kiyo Yada and Mrs. Naito of the Japanese consulate, together with other prominent Japanese women, wore these headdresses with beautiful kimonos. There was geisha dancing and singing in the gardens, which were lighted with myriads of Japanese lanterns. The atmosphere of festive Japan pervaded the artistic plays and stunts of the program. Opportunity was oflFered to eat Japanese food in true Japanese manner, sitting on cushions at low tables. This entertainment was given by the Japanese Women's As- aociation, of which Mrs. Yada is president, under the auspices of Hawaii and its Hospitality 45 the Free Kindergarten and Children's Aid associations. The money raised went toward the building fund for a new kinder- garten. All delegates to the Press Congress and the friends accom- panying them made a special trip to the Oahu sugar plantation on October 25. The opportunity offered the delegates by the planters was an unusual one, for few persons have the chance to visit a planta- tion under conditions which insure a thorough acquaintance with plantation work in a day's time. The processes of cultivation and the manufacture of sugar were shown as well as the general con- dition and the way in which plantation workers live. Luncheon was served at the home of the manager of the plan- tation at noon. An illuminating address on conditions in the sugar industry was made by E. Faxon Bishop, president of the Hawaiian Sugar Planters Association. At 1 :30 o'clock the party was taken to some of the pumping plants belonging to the sugar company, then on back to Honolulu. Dr. Walter Williams, president of the Press Congress of the World, received a new honorary degree on October 25, that of LL. D., which, as Riley H. Allen, editor of the Star-Bulletin, expressed it, means "Doctor of Leis." Dr. Williams was guest of honor at an informal meeting of the Honolulu Press Club at the Moana Hotel and delivered an address upon education for journalism, dwelling chiefly upon methods employed at the School of Journalism at the University of Missouri, the first school of journalism in the world. The program, which preceded the address, included the read- ing of two original poems by Mrs. Adna G. Clarke and a group of songs by Mrs. H. H. Blodgett. Mrs. John T. Warren pre- sented Dr. Williams with a huge blue pencil, symbol of the pro- fession of journalism, and read a clever parody on Kipling's "L'Envoi." One of Mrs. Clarke's poems dedicated to Dr. Williams, fol- lows: 46 The Press Congress of the World We'll miss his smile — Press Congress of the World, A paper's parts that all who run may read ; The grave ones editorials hot-hurled, The gay ones comic supplements that plead Their little space to sordid cares beguile ; We'll miss his smile. We'll miss his smile — his smile of quiet mirth ; His gavel in the room where Congress met To solve the mighty problems of the earth With East and West in mid-Pacific met In conclave on Oahu's jeweled isle ; We'll miss his smile. We'll miss his smile — when on the waters wide His good ship takes her way across day's rim, Aloha's leis returning to the tide Suggesting poignantly the charm of him Whose presence blessed us for so short a while ; We'll miss his smile. After two songs by John Hancock, Mr. Allen spoke briefly regarding the work that has been done by Dr. Williams and the graduates of his school, and then dubbed him "Doctor of Leis," decorating him with a handsome yellow wreath. Members of the executive committee of the club then placed other leis about Dr. Williams' shoulders. The meeting closed with the Press Club yell and the singing of "Aloha Oe." Governor and Mrs. Wallace R. Farrington celebrated their silver wedding anniversary October 26, when they were at home to their friends during the afternoon and after 8 o'clock in the evening. Many of the Press Congress delegates paid their re- spects to Mr. and Mrs. Farrington during the day. Tea was served at the Outrigger Club during the afternoon and provi- sions were made for the guests to bathe and to use the surf boards and canoes. Delegates to the Press Congress on the morning of October 27 looked into Hawaii's "melting pot of races," were impressed by the varied alloy therein, and with hearty applause paid tribute Hawaii and its Hospitality 47 to the work of the public schools in training children of a score of nationalities for the responsibilities of American citizenship. It was the first public school demonstration since the opening of the Congress. With the broad playground of the Royal School, shaded by large trees, as a stage, the visitors were treated to a colorful pageant and ceremony in the mingling of children repre- senting lands bordering the Pacific. If the delegates harbored a desire to inspect at first hand the monster crucible in which Hawaii brings together under one flag and in harmony and contentment nearly a score of races and racial mixtures, that desire was realized on October 27. For there was a real melting pot — a great, black cauldron standing at one side of the out-of-door stage — into which Liberty led her tiny charges, gorgeous in the native costumes of the lands of their forbears, emerging a moment later amidst the fluttering of American flags. Not before in Honolulu has there been a more striking example of Hawaii's right to the title "melting pot." Led by "Uncle Sam" in the person of Little Joseph Freitas ; the spirit of education, represented by Annie Machado, and little Minnie Borges clothed in a gown fashioned from Star-Bulletins and Advertisers, chil- dren representing China, Japan, Korea, Spain, Portugal, Ger- many, Russia, the Philippines and Hawaii, each garbed in the picturesque native costume of the land of his ancestors, filed up to the edge of the great melting pot, and then climbed in. A mo- ment later they emerged, each carrying an American flag, and were met by the spirit of liberty, represented by Miss E. Kirk- patrick, who took them in charge. The keynote of the demonstration was struck by "Uncle Sam" who, as the melting pot was receiving the racial units, spoke to the delegates as follows : "Here she lies — the great melting pot of Hawaii : Chinese, Japanese, Korean, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Russian, Fili- pino and Hawaiian. How shall they all unite to build the Re- public of Man and the Kingdom of God? My dream is that as the years go on and the world knows more and more of America, and shall know that she puts human rights above all other rights and that her flag is not only the flag of America, but of hu- manity !" And little Miss Borges, clasping tightly her bundle of news- 48 The Press Congress of the World papers, turned to the bleachers in which the visiting editors, pub- lishers and newspaper men and women sat, and said : "I am the Press. I am a powerful force. I govern the world. I work for the uplifting of humanity. It gives me a good op- portunity to help my fellow men. It is my duty to serve them well because I love my work and my country. I must see it anything is wrong and try to improve upon it. I am a guiding star, a warning headlight and, above all, the conscience of the world." The program which was taken part in by pupils from most of the larger city schools, and which was under the general direc- tion of Cyril O. Smith, principal of the Royal school, opened with a demonstration of organized play, following which was a pole drill by six groups of girls, eight in a group, dressed in white middies with red ties. This was a cleverly executed, color- ful drill that received warm applause. A massed chorus, composed of pupils from the Royal school, McKinley High School and the Normal school and occupying bleachers on the edge of the playground, sang "Hawaii Ponoi," the Hawaii national anthem, while everyone stood. The next event, the flag salute, was a particularly pleasing feature and a striking demonstration of patriotism in the public schools. While everyone stood at attention, the children being formed on the playground, a large American flag was escorted to the foot of the flag by a guard of children, followed by two pupils, one bearing a smaller national flag and the other a Hawaiian flag. Each of the guard of honor gave a brief recitation of a pa- triotic nature, and as the flag was run up the pole, the children, at the snappy command of a diminutive Japanese Boy Scout, saluted. Then came calisthenics and the singing of "Patriot's Prayer" and "National Anthem" by the student chorus. Aloha chapter of the Daughters of the American Revolu- tion gave a tea on the afternoon of October 27 at the home of the Rev. and Mrs. W. D. Westervelt, Waikiki, honoring the women delegates and wives of the delegates to the Press Congress of the World. Hawaii and its Hospitality 49 The home was exquisitely decorated with hundreds of beauti- ful pastel-tinted hibiscus. A charming and informal musical program was heartily ap- preciated. Mrs. Charles Hall sang a group of Hawaiian songs. The Kamehameha Girls' glee club also gave several splendid numbers. Mrs. Westervelt gave a piano selection. In all about two hundred guests were assembled. By special invitation of the Aloha chapter, Regent Mrs. Douglass, Dr. Walter Williams and the Rev. Mr. Westervelt were also included. High Sheriff William P. Jarrett was heartily applauded by delegates to the Press Congress of the World on the morning of October 28 upon the conclusion of a brief address, delivered in the assembly hall of Oahu prison, in which he outlined the work he and his associates have done to create a model peniten- tiary. The delegates inspected the prison from top to bottom, and the inmates did a thriving business selling curios and other ar- ticles of handicraft. The visitors were especially pleased with the cleanliness of the place, and with the modern appliances em- ployed, as well as with the working out of the honor system. Tempting odors drew everyone to the kitchen, where roasts and stews were cooking, and the big playground, surrounded by noth- ing more than a picket fence, elicited exclamations of surprise. In his address Sheriff Jarrett paid tribute to S. W. Robley of the Prison Aid Society, and to the members of the board of prison commissioners, for their assistance in raising the institu- tion to a high standard. The Pearl Harbor Athletic Club extended an invitation to the delegates to the Press Congress to attend their regular smoker which was given at the station on the night of October 28. Following the inspection of the penitentiary the delegates visited the leprosarium where science has demonstrated its ability to arrest leprosy. The delegates were particularly impressed with the scientific work done and delighted with the program of music and tableaux given by the patients in the hospital yard. The charms of the islands of the group as represented by a youngster in costume was another pleasing feature. Then came a figurative illustration of the chaulmoogra oil treatment, dedicated to the United States Public Health Service, and the singing of a song 50 The Press Congress of the World dedicated to Dr. Hollman, formerly in charge of the hospital. It was explained that in old Hawaii a melee was always composed of a person who had accomplished some particularly noteworthy feat and that in the composition of the song an ancient custom had been revived. There was handed to Princess Kalanianaole, for delivery to Dr. Williams to be presented to President Hard- ing, a letter calling to the attention of the President the work done at the hospital through the chaulmoogra oil treatment. "The Yellow Jacket," from the pens of George C. Hazleton and J, Harry Benrimo, which was a great stage success in the spring of 1921, was staged again at Mission Memorial Hall on October 28 under the auspices of the Chinese community, headed by Consul Hsu Shia, for Press Congress delegates and on Oc- tober 29 for the general public. The play, although written by Occidentals, is strictly a Chinese drama embodying the true characteristics of Chinese life and philosophy. It deals with a mother's love of youth and hatred of men — vividly portraying the simple humor and deep pathos of the Chinese people, their fancies, whims, joys and sorrows ; and aptly bringing forth the conflict of the strength and courage of manhood and the weakness and selfishness of cowardice. A richness of philosophy and a wealth of emotion underlie the play. As a background for action are displayed the wonderful teak- wood furniture, the generous embroideries and tapestries of old China. Stage representations of the Chinese are shown in all their quaintness. A bamboo pole represents a weeping willow tree from which the hero of the play hangs himself. For a moun- tain the property man piles up a few chairs, for a river a plank placed over two stools. The delegates visited Pearl Harbor Saturday morning Oc- tober 29 as the guests of Rear Admiral Edward Simpson and the officers and men of the Fourteenth naval district, making the trip from Honolulu on destroyers and Eagle boats. The delegates were given one thrill after another by the spec- tacular naval maneuvers exhibited by the boats all of the way to Pearl Harbor. The first stunt was the assumption of a submarine attack and the maneuvers of a vessel in repulsing such an at- Hawaii and its Hospitality 51 tack. The demonstration was carried out in minute detail and the delegates were given an opportunity of seeing the actual ma- neuvers of a battleship when attacked by submarines. Following this the two Eagle boats and one destroyer lined up in formation for escorting a transport. A submarine ap- peared, supposedly to attack the transport, and one of the de- stroyers dropped a torpedo. The delegates were much interested in watching the manner in which a torpedo is launched and in following its course through the water. Two seaplanes gave an exhibition attack on a battleship, having an anchored target to represent the battle- ship. The seaplanes dropped a number of bombs, all of which registered as hits or within the range which would have damaged a ship. The destroyers demonstrated the manner of laying down a smoke screen as. protection for a transport in eluding an enemy submarine. This was followed by machine gim practice from one seaplane, the target being hung from another plane. As the party entered Pearl Harbor they were met by four submarines and one seaplane, which escorted them to the dock. The seaplane gave an exhibition of making landings and of hopping off. The guests were then divided into small parties and escorted to points of interest at the station. They were taken to the huge dry-dock, which was partially filled in order to show the manner in which it was operated. A naval officer guided each party of guests and explained everything of interest. The party was taken to the radio station, hospitals, industrial departments and also visited the submarine base. Shortly before noon a reception was held in the entertainment hall of Marine Barracks, the reception being followed by a luncheon. Felicitations were exchanged when the visitors sat down to luncheon in the marine barracks and feasted on good navy "chow." Rear Admiral Edward Simpson told of the pleasure the visit of the newspaper folk had brought to the navy, and explained briefly the desire of the navy to co-operate with the civilian population in every worth-while proposition. In response, President Williams of the Press Congress thanked the admiral and his officers and men for their reception and ex- 52 The Press Congress of the World hibitions, voicing the appreciation of all of the delegates. He then called upon Col. Edward Frederick Lawson, assistant managing proprietor of the London Daily Telegraph, who paid tribute to the American navy, stating this was not the first time he had seen demonstrations of its efficiency. On behalf of the delegates, he thanked the navy, as well as the people of all Hawaii, for the courtesies shown the visitors. I Hawaii's races divided honors on the night of October 29 at the All-Nations' lantern parade, one of the most spectacular of entertainments in honor of the Press Congress. The three visiting delegates who made up the committee of judges awarded the prizes as follows : For the best decorated, illuminated auto, first prize, $250, won by Japanese community float (wisteria arbor) ; second prize, $150, won by Fong Inn's; third prize, $100, won by Oahu Rice Mill Co. For best marching section, first prize, $150, won by Koreans; second prize, $100, won by Chinese ; third prize, $50, won by St. Louis College. The Filipinos, turning out for the first time, made a fine showing. St. Louis College won a prize largely because of the precision of its marching step, and the "pep" shown by the boys, who made up for the loss of their football game to McKinley High School a few hours before by organized cheering during the parade, which won much applause. The Korean marching section, winner of the first prize, fea- tured women and girls in Korean costume. The lanterns in this section were also unusually picturesque. The Boy Scouts, Japan- ese and other marching sections, made very good appearances. It was estimated that close to 50.000 people saw the parade. From Aala park to the capitol grounds the streets were jammed with people. Thousands were massed at Palace square and in the capitol grounds. The stands erected for invited guests were filled. For half an hour after the parade was over the down- town streets were filled. Early Monday morning, October 31, automobiles furnished by the Honolulu Automobile Club, called for the Press Congress Hawaii and its Hospitality 53 delegates and escorted them to Alexander Field, Punahou, where the R. O. T. C. staged a military tournament. The program was in four parts — the battle of Alexander Field ; exhibition of drills by each school ; the assault on Rocky Hill ; and the review of troops by Major General Charles P. Summerall, commanding general of the Hawaiian department. A regular army band furnished music while the five hundred student cadets went through their maneuvers. The Oahu College, University of Hawaii, Kamehameha School and the Honolulu Military Academy were represented in the tournament. The University of Hawaii won first place in the tournament. Following the sham battles came the silent manual, calisthen- ics, semaphore and mass singing of Kamehameha cadets which brought enthusiastic applause from the spectators. Honolulu Mili- tary Academy men were appreciated in their exhibition of manual of arms and Butt's manual, while Punahou cadets demonstrated bayonet training and mass games. An impressive review before General Summerall concluded the program. An army band led the review, followed by cadet corps from each school bearing its flag and the United States flag. After the exhibition automobiles took the delegates on a sight seeing tour about Honolulu. Monday evening the Country Club gave a ball for Press Con- gress delegates and visitors. Tuesday, November 1, the Press Congress of the World closed its convention sessions and the delegates began getting ready for the return to their homes. In Hawaii the long ocean highways meet, the highways that link the younger countries of modern civilization with lands but now really awaking from the lethargy of ages. Here are parents and grandparents from old Cathay, still speaking the tongue of their ancestors, proudly rejoicing in the English education of their oflfspring in American public schools and in many private institutions of learning for which Hawaii is noted. The Japanese, while providing instruction for their youth in the language and history of their forbears, encourage them in the acquisition of English and along all lines of practical new-world education. 54 The Press Congress of the IForld The casual traveler thinks of the Islands as a group. But the many \vor Id- famed attractions of the Hawaiian Islands are by no means concentrated within an area immediately convenient to hurried transients as they disembark at Honolulu. Hawaii is indeed a "string of precious pearls" and each of the live larger is- lands of the principal eight has its own particular attractions. De- lightful climate, beautiful scenery, and wonderful formations are common to all the islands, but each is also renowned for its special features. Oahu, third island in point of area, is first in importance be- cause Honolulu is headquarters, federal, territorial, international, financial, commercial, trans-oceanic. Politically the City and County of Honolulu embraces all of the Island of Oahu, to- gether with the far outlying islets to the northwest of the eight larger islands of the chain, though the city proper, with a popula- tion of about eighty-three thousand, occupies but a comparatively small portion of Oahu on the southwest side. Hilo, capital city of the largest island, Hawaii, is the Terri- tory's second seaport, a haven of vast possibilities, one hundred and ninet}- miles, or fifteen hours, from Honolulu by Inter-Is- land steamer. Hawaii is the only island of the archipelago whose craters are active. \\'ithin thirty-one miles of Hilo, by scenic auto highway, earth's most spectacular volcano, Kilauea, is for- ever in action. Ten thousand feet above Kilauea's lake of living lava, which is itself four thousand feet above sea-leval, Mokua- weoweo crater, at the summit of Mauna Loa, occasionally draws attention from constant Kilauea with a mighty exhibition of its own. There can be few more lovely settings for any city than Hilo is fortunate enough to possess. She nestles along the shores of her sweeping Crescent Bay beneath the slopes of mighty Mauna Kea ; her buildings half buried beneath the cataracts of flowers and foliage which appear, from the sea, to be surging over the entire landscape. Ashore, the fine concrete roadways of the busy little city soon give way to macadam, the delight of motorists who will always take their cars where there are good driving surfaces. The Island of Hawaii is not only the playground of many tourists, but is the leading island of the group in point of production, its twenty-five plantations producing, on an annual Hawaii and its Hospitality 55 average, almost two hundred thousand tons of sugar, while up- wards of three million pounds of the highest grade of fine coffee is shipped away each year from historic and lovely Kona. Also, Hawaii is destined to be heard from where men love the fragrant and soothing weed, since the tobacco industry is growing rapidly, and Hawaii tobacco is rapidly establishing a place for itself in the marts of the world. Wailuku, Kahului and Lahaina are the principal towns of Maui Island. Kahului is the main seaport of the Valley Island. Lahaina, once the seat of royalty in the "days of old," is a noted rendezvous for fishermen. Mount Haleakala (House of the Sun) is Maui's biggest scenic asset. The largest extinct or quiescent volcano in the Pacific, this ten-thousand-foot crater, easily holds second place among the wonders of Hawaii, ranking next to fiery Kilauea. And yet it is vain to speak of first or second place among the Island's marvels, for their individual characteristics put each in a class by itself. He beholds Creation still at work in the "House of Everlasting Fire," at Kilauea, and then climbs to Haleakala's highest rim to look out upon Maui and other islands, or to gaze down upon a sea of clouds at sunrise, or as the sun declines, is usually at a loss to say which never-to-be-forgotten inspiration has impressed him the more. Hawaii's summery clime is well indicated by the fact that light summer clothing, except at high elevations, is worn from one year's end to the other. Between sea level and the fourteen- thousand-foot domes of Hawaii Island almost any climate may be found, as between the beaches and the ten-thousand-foot crater-rim of Haleakala, on Maui, and in the four-thousand-foot regions, as at Kilauea volcano, warmer clothing is required for evening wear; but elsewhere there is little to distinguish winter from summer except the change in the duration of daylight and a greater degree of humidity. There are no extremes of heat or cold below the high altitudes. Most of the world's sports flourish in Hawaii and the Islands afiford a wonderful variety of recreation. In the towns there are many and diversified athletic associations. There are country clubs with golf links, polo grounds and good tennis courts ; there are race tracks and trap-shooting butts. Hawaiian waters offer ideal conditions for yachting. Pearl Harbor's broad protected 56 The Press Congress of the fForld waters attract many small pleasure craft. Surf boat riding, riding the waves on a specially shaped board, is a great sport. ' Of the field games baseball is monarch. In season there is shooting for pheasants, ducks, doves, plover, quail, snipe, curlew, mud-hens and some other birds. There are deer on the Island of Molokai, while on Hawaii, Maui and Kauai the hunter may try his luck with wild boar, wild goats and wild cattle. Hawaiian swimmers are famous the world over. Island boys and girls have scored victories in the world's Olympic games on numerous occasions. Island waters teem with game fish of great variety and size and fishing is a great business as well as an interesting sport. I Very little is known of the ancient Hawaiians except through fragments of history that have been handed down by word of mouth from generation to generation, and which have been pierced together to form legends and the "meles" that are now but rarely chanted. An ofifshoot of the mighty Polynesian race that has spread its peoples of many clans and tribes broadcast throughout the countless islands that dot the South Pacific from Hawaii to Easter Island, and from Tahiti westward to New Zealand, Tonga and the Carolines, the Hawaiian branch stands today as the most intelligent, the most enlightened and the most progressive of them all. Where did they come from? Science has yet to answer the question. One of the two great present-day scientific problems is the origin and migration of the Polynesian race, including the Hawaiian. Learned men who are devoting their lives to the cause of science are now endeavoring to solve the problem. There are, however, quite a number of highly interesting theories. One is that the Polynesians originally lived along the Asiatic coast and were forced gradually into Pacific Island homes by the pressure of the tribes behind them. They made long journeys in the great double canoes about which history has much to say, and the more adventuresome ones finally reached the islands that now constitute the Hawaiian group, laying the foundation for what was to become a highly civilized and sturdy race. Hawaii and its Hospitality 57 Then there is the theory of the existence of a great Pacific continent of which Hawaii formed the most northerly portion. Scientists who agree with this theory assert that what are now the Pacific islands were at one time the mountain peaks of this great continent. This affords opportunity for voluminous conjecture and discussion. If such a continent existed during the age of the evolution of man, was it peopled? And are the various Polynesian clans of today but the remnants of a civilization that flourished many thousands of years ago ? Or did it exist prior to the age in question, and then sink, leaving only the mountain tops as islands to be peopled by wandering tribes? Prof. William A. Bryan, formerly with the College of Hawaii, not long ago visited Easter Island, off the coast of Chile, where, he declared, he found indisputable evidence of a Pacific continent. His findings would appear to add weight to the theory that the Polynesian race originated in South America, and that it was from that point that the migrations into the Pacific began. Pro- fessor Bryan's evidence was in the form of certain plant life which he found on Easter Island, and which he knew existed also on islands thousands of miles to the West and Southwest. Scientists are unanimous in the theory that there was a high type of civilization in Hawaii many years before the first historical date, which is 1555, when, histories say, the islands were dis- covered by Juan Gaetano. They point to the great distance of Hawaii from the more Southerly islands, and from the Asiatic coast and the coast of South America. If the Polynesian branch that later became the Hawaiian race journeyed to these islands in double canoes, as it undoubtedly did, it must have reached that degree of civilization which brought with it some knowledge of navigation, for without this knowledge, scientists say, such voy- ages never would have been undertaken. Other evidence lies in the unpleasant but none the less impor- tant subject of cannibalism. As far back as history goes, there is no known instance of cannibalism among the Hawaiians. It is true, and history and legend so state, that during the semi- barbaric period or periods prior to the momentous year of 1820, the Hawaiians, upon the orders of their chiefs or high priests, offered human sacrifices to their deities. But there is absolutely nothing to indicate that a "long pig," the term the late Jack Lon- don and other writers of fiction liked to use, ever found its way 58 The Press Congress of the World into their ovens. Today cannibalism is still practised to some extent in the less civilized parts of the Solomons and the New Hebrides, while in the Marquesas, where the custom has long been dead, there are a few old men who still boast of their past prowess in this respect. Recent scientific exploration in the Marquesas undoubtedly adds weight to the theory concerning the early civilization of the Hawaiians. In that Southern group there have been found won- derful specimens of stone carving — now apparently a lost art — and the still more surprising revelation that these specimens were the work of the ancestors of the present inhabitants. In the opinion of the scientist who made these discoveries — Ralph Lin- ton of the Bishop Museum at Honolulu — these is ample evidence to show that this art was constantly improved upon as generations came and went, and that, when finally abandoned, it had reached a surprising degree of perfectness. And this, coupled with the fact that the Marquesans used these great blocks of stone in their building projects, in much the same way that modern archi- tects employ statuary, goes a long way toward proving that in the Marquesas hundreds of years ago there existed an unusually high degree of civilization, Mr. Linton thinks. Might it not be so, then, that this civilization crept to the North and to the Northeast until it sank its roots into Hawaiian soil and flourished and increased anew ? This, of course, is mere conjecture, but it is easy to imagine that ofifshoots of the Mar- quesans journeyed over the Pacific to Hawaii, taking their primi- tive yet practical civilization with them. One of the most picturesque of all of the events in Hawaiian history is that attendant upon the arrival at Kealakekua, Island of Hawaii, in 1778 of Captain Cook, the English navigator, who is heralded as the discoverer of the Hawaiian Islands. The story is that prior to Captain Cook's arrival, the Hawaiian god, Lono, left his people and ascended to heaven, but leaving behind the promise that some day he would return to earth, and that his downward path would lie along a rainbow. When a Hawaiian priest emerged from his temple one sunny morning, he saw in the harbor two queer-looking ships ; and, strangely enough, above them against the clouds was a great rainbow. The priest instantly fell upon his knees, proclaiming the return of the god Lono. Hawaii and its Hospitality 59 And so, when Captain Cook went ashore, for they were his ships that the priest had seen, he was escorted with great dignity to the temple of Lono, where he was worshipped as the original god. But the natives quickly found out that Captain Cook was not a deity, but a human being like themselves, and their worshipping quickly ceased. A year later, in 1779, the natives engaged in a battle with members of the crews of the ships, in which Captain Cook was killed. Kealakekua, where Captain Cook landed, means "The Pathway of the God," and it is here that a monument, still standing, was erected in his memory. It was Captain Cook who gave to Hawaii the name "Sandwich Islands" in honor of the Earl of Sandwich of England, who aided in the financing of his ventures. Hawaii's latter-day history really begins when Kamehameha I, known as Kamehameha the Great and Kamehameha the Con- queror, and often referred to as "The Napoleon of the Pacific," united all of the windward islands of the group — Oahu, Molokai, Maui, Lanai, Kahoolawe and Hawaii — under one rule, with him- self as the supreme sovereign. This was in 1796, three years after the arrival of Captain Vancouver, another English navigator, at Kealakekua. Many and fierce were the battles which Kameha- meha and his great army of warriors, each man not less than six feet in height and trained to the minute, waged against the island chiefs and their followers. Thousands of great double canoes, manned by sail and paddle and built especially for the occasion, were used to convey the conquering followers of the great king from island to island. Today, in the Kona district, on the Island of Hawaii, may still be seen the great, broad plain upon which these warriors were trained. And history says that this training was most exact, including even a crude type of military formation and movement. Having united all of the islands, with the execption of the Island of Kauai, King Kamehameha settled down to the business of ruling. He was a man of great discernment, and withal a wise and good king. While a born ruler and warrior, he was also a statesman and a lawgiver, and the wisdom of all of the law li- braries is contained in one of his first decrees : "Let the women and children and old men lie down in safety beside the highway." In 1810 the Island of Kauai was ceded to Kamehameha the Great, thus firmly uniting the entire group under one sovereign — 60 The Press Congress of the World a union that was never afterwards broken. Explorers and navi- gators who in later years came to Hawaii learned to respect and admire Kamehameha, and were amazed at the high type of civilization that was flourishing under his wise rule. He died in 1819. It was during the year that Kamehameha the Great died that the Hawaiians effected upon their own volition the greatest moral change known to history. They destroyed their temples, their idols, their religion. They broke the time-honored "tabu" system which, as an example, forbade the women to eat with the men, forbade the women to eat certain kinds of food, and w^iich regu- lated the fishing and other industries of those days. It was while they were in this state that the first missionaries arrived from New England in 1820; and the missionaries found the natives easily amenable to accept the Christian faith. The gigantic task that faced those noble men and women who journeyed from Boston around Cape Horn in the brig Thaddeus needs no description here. Their story has been emblazoned upon the pages of history. They found in Hawaii a simple, friendly people who responded eagerly to their teachings. First of all, they had to master the Hawaiian language, and then reduce that language to a written form. These things accomplished, they were in a position to teach the Hawaiians to read and write, and then followed the translation of the Bible into Hawaiian. Schools and churches were established, and within an unusually short time the native people came under the remarkable influence which paved the way to a thoroughly civilized Hawaii. In all of these noteworthy developments the printing press played a remarkable role. EHsha Eoomis, one of the mission- aries, brought to Hawaii around the Horn a Ramage press, and in October, 1821, it was set up in a little coral stone house at Honolulu, ready to disseminate the written word among a people who, as yet, had no written language. And just one hundred years later there was held at Honolulu the second gathering of the Press Congress of the World — certainly a fitting celebration of the centenary of the assembling of the first printing press west of the Missouri river. In January, 1822, a Hawaiian chief, clothed in feather helmet, "ahuula" or cloak, and "malo" bore down upon the press lever and the first printed sheet in the whole western hemisphere was pulled from the platen. Hawaii and its Hospitality 61 Following Kamehameha the Great were eight rulers, four of whom were of the family of Kamehameha. The entire line was as follows : Kamehameha I, born in 1737, reigned from 1782 to 1819. Kamehameha II, born in 1797, reigned from 1819 to 1824. Regency of Kaahumanu and Kalaimoku, 1824 to 1833. Kamehameha III, born in 1813, reigned from 1833 to 1854. Kamehameha IV, born in 1834, reigned from 1854 to 1863. Kamehameha V, born in 1830, reigned from 1863 to 1872. Lunalilo, born in 1835, reigned from 1873 to 1874. Kalakaua, born in 1836, reigned from 1874 to 1891. Liliuokalani, born in 1838, reigned from 1891 to 1893. Thus the Hawaiian monarchy was one hundred and eleven years old. Queen Lydia Liliuokalani was deposed January 17, 1893, and died November 11, 1917. She was an exceedingly gracious woman and beloved by all who knew her. Following annexation she was paid an annual allowance by the United States government. During the last years of her life she lived with a few old faithful retainers at Washington Place, now the territorial executive mansion, which was built in the forties by her father-in-law. Captain Dominis, a ship-owner in the trading business. She wrote several books and composed the song "Aloha Oe." She was the sister of King Kalakaua, last male sovereign of Hawaii who died at San Francisco in 1891 while on his way back to the islands from a tour of the world. Prince Jonah Kuhio Kalanianaole, last titular representative of the old monarchy, died in January, 1922, at Honolulu. For twenty consecutive years, or ten terms, he had represented Hawaii as its delegate to the Congress of the United States. He was given a royal funeral at which many ancient customs and cere- monies were revived. He was a nephew of King Kalakaua and Queen Liliuokalani, and a prince by royal proclamation issued when King Kalakaua was on the throne. The first whaleship arrived at Honolulu the same year the missionaries came, and thereafter for many years the port be- came a rendezvous for these vessels. In 1827 the first Catholic missionaries arrived, laying the foundation for a work that has since spread Catholicism rather widely throughout the islands, and sent priests and sisters into many notable avenues of en- 62 The Press Congress of the World deavor, including education and work among the lepers on the island of Molokai. In 1836 the first English newspaper, the Sandwich Islands Gazette was published at Honolulu, and four years later the first constitution was proclaimed. The monarch in 1842 officially- recognized the independence of the United States. Two notable events occurred in 1843, one being the provisional cession of the islands to Great Britain, and the second being the restoration of Hawaii's independence and the Hawaiian flag by Admiral Thom- as, then in command of the British fleet in the Pacific. The story of this latter incident is that Lord George Paulet, then in com- mand of the British man-of-war Carysfoot, conspired with the British consul at Honolulu in the preparation of spurious royal decrees in which Great Britain ostensibly demanded the immediate cession of the Hawaiian Islands. When information concerning Paulet's activities reached Admiral Thomas, then at Valparaiso, he came immediately to Honolulu, interviewed the king, and re- pudiated Paulet's actions, at the same time formally restoring the independence of Hawaii and the Hawaiian flag. The restora- tion was delayed several days, however, as Paulet, among other things, had destroyed every Hawaiian flag, and Admiral Thomas had to have one made aboard his ship. In 1849 the Hawaiian monarchy concluded its first treaty with the United States, and two years later a protectorate was offered to America. The first Mormon missionaries arrived in 1853, and since then have been exercising a laudable beneficial influence in the islands. Recently a handsome Mormon temple was erected at Laie, Island of Oahu, where the Mormon colony and sugar plan- tation are located. This is the second Mormon temple to be erected outside of Continental United States, the other being in Canada. The reciprocity treaty was concluded in 1876. It gave Pearl Harbor, today one of the world's greatest naval stations, into the control of the United States, and the latter admitted Hawaiian sugar free from duty. William C. Lunalilo, who followed Kamehameha V to the throne, was a grand-nephew of Kamehameha the Great. The Lunalilo Home for aged and destitute Hawaiians at Honolulu was provided for in his will. He was the last of the Kamehamehas, Hawaii and its Hospitality 63 and the legislature chose as his successor the descendant of two of the great Kona chiefs. This was David Kalakaua. In 1881 King Kalakaua toured the world to gather knowledge concerning the immigration of labor for the sugar plantations, the journey being incident to the reciprocity treaty. In 1887 a new Hawaiian constitution was proclaimed and two years later came the first of a series of insurrections and revolutions, which eventually led to the annexation of the Ha- waiian Islands by the United States. This insurrection was led by Robert W. Wilcox, who became Hawaii's first delegate to the American Congress, having been elected upon a Home Rule ticket. King Kalakaua died at San Francisco in 1891, and his body was brought to the Islands aboard an American warship. There were no cables in those days and all Honolulu had gathered at the waterfront to welcome the king upon his return. But their joy was soon turned to mourning when the news spread that the warship bore the dead body of the monarch. In the same year Liliuokalani was proclaimed queen. She attempted to change the constitution so as to restore the old powers of royalty. In 1893 she was deposed, following a revolu- tion, and for a time was held prisoner in the old royal barracks on Hotel street, Honolulu, now the Army Service Club. A pro- visional government was established with the Honorable Sanford Ballard Dole, Hawaii's ''Grand Old Man," as president. In 1894 the Republic of Hawaii was established, with Judge Dole as president, and in 1895 occurred another insurrection with a view to restoring the queen. This was suppressed, and on August 12, 1898, the Islands were annexed to the United States amidst an impressive ceremony in which the Hawaiian Flag was lowered from the staflf on the old lolani Palace, and the Stars and Stripes hoisted in its place. In 1900 the Islands became a territory of the United States, and a territorial form of government was inaugurated. Gradually but steadily during all of those years Hawaii emerged from isles of isolation to isles of commercial and strategic preeminence, until today its importance as an in- tegral part of the United States is known internationally. WALLACE R. FARRIXGTON, (iovEU.NOi: OF THE Tekkitory of Hawaii, V. S. A., \'ice I'resideitt and (Iciirral Business Manager, Ilunuhilit tStiir-Bi/lletin, Vltainnan. JIairaiiun Islands Executive Committee. IV. PROCEEDINGS OF THE CONGRESS. FIRST SESSION. TUESDAY MORNING, OCTOBER 11, 1921 The session was called to order by Walter Williams, Presi- dent of the Press Congress of the World, who acted as Chairman throughout the session. THE CHAIRMAN : In the absence of the secretary of the Congress, Mr. A. R. Ford, of the London (Canada) Free Press, I take the liberty of asking Mr. Guy Innes, of Melbourne, Aus- tralia, to act as Honorary Secretary. I present to you the chairman of the local entertainment com- mittee, who has done so much to make possible the attractiveness and service of the sessions of the Congress, Mr. L. A. Thurston. MR. THURSTON: Mr. Chairman, we have found by ex- perience in the past in connection with some of the functions we have had here that no matter how much we put in print, some of the delegates do not seem certain as to the program, and a number of questions have been asked of me concerning going to the Windward Islands, as to time of departure, etc. Mr. Thurston here made announcements of various features of the program of entertainment. He was followed by Mr. L. de Vis Norton, Secretary of the Hawaiian Committee on Entertainment. TFIE CHAIRMAN : W^e will now have the report of the tem- porary committee on credentials, to be presented by Mr. Holling- ton K. Tong, of China. MR. TONG: Mr. President, here is a letter which has been prepared by the Committee on Credentials of the Press Congress of the World, and I think it is best for me to read it : (65) 66 The Press Congress of the World Honolulu, T. H. October 11th, 1921. Dr. Walter Williams, President Press Congress of the World, Honolulu, T. H. Dear Sir : We, your preliminary committee on credentials of the Press Congress of the W^orld, beg leave to report that we have examined the credentials submitted by the various applicants who did not previously hold credentials for appointments as delegates and have found that the following are en- titled to participate in the proceedings of the Press Congress as duly authorized delegates : Mrs. W. F. Frear, Mrs. A. G. Clarke, and Mrs. Emma Livingston Reed, representatives of the League of the American Pen Women. Mr. Chas. C. Hadley, representative of the Governor of Pennsylvania. Mr. John F. Ness, representative of the Honolulu Press Club. The list of delegates whose applications had previously been received and favorably acted upon is herewith appended to the committee's report. Yours respectfully, HOLUNGTON K. TONG Chairman Secretary, RiivEy H. Allen. For list of delegates see Appendix. THE CHAIRMAN : You have heard the report of the Com- mittee. If there are no objections it will be approved and the Committee will be continued for such further business as may come before it in connection with the credentials of delegates. It is so ordered. Under the Constitution of the Press Congress of the World, it is the privilege of the Executive Committee of the Congress to select at each meeting of the Congress an Honorary President, who is to be a journalist of the country in which the Congress holds its sessions. Acting upon this constitutional provision, the Execu- tive Committee of the Congress selected as the Honorary Presi- dent for these sessions being held in Honolulu, Territory of Ha- waii, U. S. A., a distinguished American journalist, — the editor and publisher of the Marion (Ohio) Star, who, incidentally, is President of the United States of America. (Applause). His election to the Honorary Presidency of this Congress was presented to him by two distinguished members of the Congress, both former presidents of The American Newspaper Publishers Proceedings of the Congress 67 Association, Mr. H. L. Bridgman, of Brooklyn, and Mr. Frank P. Glass, of Birmingham, and was accepted by President Harding upon the visit of this committee to the White House in Washing- ton. President Harding was unable to attend in person the sessions of the Press Congress, but sent to the Congress by a special messenger some words of introduction to the session. He selected as his representative another distinguished American journalist, who holds by his appointment and to the joy of his friends and to the high credit of this territory the position of Governor of Hawaii. We had the pleasure of hearing him last night in a three-fold capacity. He is the fourth dimension this morning and we hear him in another capacity, showing that he is a square man. I have the very distinguished pleasure of pre- senting to you at this time to deliver the message of the President of the United States, specially commissioned by him, the Governor of the Territory of Hawaii, journalist and gentleman, the Honor- able Wallace R. Farrington. THE HONORABLE WALLACE R. FARRINGTON, GOVERNOR OF THE TERRITORY OF HAWAII: Mr. President, fellow delegates of the Press Congress of the World. One of the details of education which I experienced in connec- tion with assuming the responsibilities of office in this territory, was that it was necessary for a prospective officer to display his credentials in order to assume the office to which he had been ap- pointed. I will therefore read briefly from this preliminary let- ter from the White House, dated September 10, 1921. My dear Governor Farrington: I am enclosing a letter herewith which I would like to have you read to the Press Congress of the World, and I would like you to read it in the capacity of my appointed representative. Very truly yours, Warren G. Harding. White House, Washington, September 10, 1921. The following is the President's letter : White House, Washington, September 10, 1921. My dear Governor Farrington: At one time I dared hope that it might be possible for me to come to Honolulu at the opening of the Press Congress of the World, and say in person some of the things that I think would 68 The Press Congress of the World be appropriate on so notable an occasion. I find it impossible for me to be away from Washington at that time, and therefore am asking you to extend in my behalf the greeting of our govern- ment to the delegates, and to assure them of the great importance we attach to this world gathering of representatives of the press. I hope the fact that I chance to have been most of my life a newspaper man, will not have distorted my judgment so far as to cause me to overrate the importance of journalism in the present-day world. Not only have the World War, and the events transpiring since the Armistice, impressed us all anew with the use and value of the public press, but they have demonstrated the possible danger which resides in a press too freely employed for mere propaganda. In the overwhelming emergency of the war, propaganda became a well-nigh universal habit ; I might almost say a code among journalists. It was, of course, intended to be the propaganda of patriotism, of devout nationalism, of well-intentioned aspiration for the salvation of the best in human society ; but it was not always entirely fair, judicial or discreet. On the whole, it served a splendid purpose in the circumstance of war-time ; but we newspaper men could indulge ourselves in no more grievous error than to assume that propaganda is the first or even a leading aim of a properly conducted press. Your own letter, which has just come to hand, concerning the Educational Conference of this summer at Honolulu, suggests to my mind the idea that might well dominate an ideally conducted press. I cannot but feel that the primary purpose of the press, as a social institution, is the opening of men's minds, rather than the closing of them. Propaganda aims primarily at shutting up the mind against other conclusions than those which the propa- gandist designs to implant. Education, on the contrary, aims to open the mind, to prepare it, to make it receptive, and to urge it to formulate its own conclusions. Propaganda would at last mean intellectual paralysis ; education is, when properly em- ployed, intellectual stimulus. It is better that men should think than that they should accept conclusions formulated by other men for them. We have need in these times that men should think deeply, that they should realize their necessity of settling their own problems. Proceedings of the Congress 69 The world has well-nigh become a great aggregation of democ- racies. No democracy will rise very far above the level of it** average thinking capacity, and no aggregation of democracies will rise very far above the average intellectual abilities of its members. In short, democracy has come to its great trial and the verdict will depend largely on its capacity to make men think. It is not enough to say that other systems, by their very nature, discourage men from thinking, because they aim to provide or- ganizations at the top to do their thinking for them. That may be true, but it is no answer to my proposition, that if democracy is to succeed, it must deserve success by proving that it can in- spire the race of common men to serious, continuous, eflfective consideration of the problems of common men. In this work of education no single force or influence of which we now know can be expected to exert so great a potency as the press. Perhaps the press never confronted so great an op- portunity to demonstrate its adequacy to this task, as now. You peoples of the Pacific have invited the Press of the World to be your guests, to consider the problems of our time and our race. You are meeting in a day when the world is looking for- ward to the gathering of the Nations to consider limitation of armament and the maintenance of world peace. If your de- liberations shall inspire a larger, a better, a more humane view of the elements which enter into the problem of peace and at least a measurable disarmament; if you can encourage the ideal of a world permanently at peace; then you will have given a vast impetus to the efforts of statesmen who are presently to consider these problems in Washington. We have heard much in recent years about the problem of the Pacific, whatever that may be. I take it to be merely a phase of the universal problem of the race, of men and nations wherever they are. It is hard to imagine justifications in this day and age, es- pecially in view of the world's late unhappy experiences, for armed conflict among civilized peoples anywhere and especially among peoples so widely separated as those on opposite borders of the Pacific. They represent different races, social organiza- tions, political systems and modes of thought. Between them and their widely varying systems, there may well be an amicable competition to determine which community possesses the better 70 The Press Congress of the World and more effective ideas for human advancement. But that there should be conflict ; that warfare and controversy should inter- fere with this worthwhile demonstration of the value of dif- ferent modes of progress, is almost unthinkable. The Pacific ought to be the seat of a generous, free, open-minded compe- tition between the best ideals of eastern and western life; be- tween the aspirations and endeavors of the oldest and the newest forms of society. You are meeting at the cross-roads of the Pacific, amid all the glamour and romance and glory which have always sur- rounded the very name of the South Sea. You have an oppor- tunity to do a work for humanity, and I believe you have met at a peculiarly auspicious time. I could express no greater hope, no more earnest wish for your Congress than that it might prove the precursor of an understanding which in our day, in our very tomorrow, I may say, would insure the peace of the world, the proximate end of the frightful waste of competing armaments and the establishment of peace on earth, good-will toward men. Very sincerely yours, Warren G. Harding. Hon. Wallace R. Farrington, Executive Chamber, Honolulu, H. T. THE CHAIRMAN: The message of the President of the United States, the Honorary President of this Congress, so well presented by Governor Farrington, will be referred to the proper committee when it is appointed, that the Congress itself may send a greeting back to the President of the United States. Now may I ask your indulgence when, as your President. I follow the President of the United States? The Press Congress of the World is an outgrowth of an in- creasing professional spirit among journalists and of an en- larged desire for closer comradeship and for adequate con- sideration of common problems. It was organized in San Fran- cisco in 1915, though in previous years the way had been pointed to such an association by international conferences and associa- tions meeting in Switzerland, France, England, the United States and elsewhere. In the preliminary session, during the Panama-Pacific Inter- Proceedings of the Congress 71 national Exposition in San Francisco, representatives from twen- ty-eight countries united in effecting an organization. The Congress Executive Committee selected at that time ac- cepted the invitation of the government of New South Wales to hold the first formal sessions of the new world organization at Sydney. The continuance of the World War deferred the meet- ing and, other conditions intervening, it was deemed best by the Executive Committee to change the site of the Congress and to accept the cordial invitation promptly extended by Hawaii to hold the first formal sessions in Honolulu. No more suitable place could have been selected than this beautiful city situated at the cross-roads of the Pacific Ocean — may it ever be, in fact as in name, the Pacific — where are to be found representatives of so many nations harmoniously working out life's problems. Let us not permit the charm of these Islands, of which Honolulu is the capital, "the loveliest fleet of islands anchored in any sea," to divert our minds from the possibilities of the Congress as an instrument of service to the profession to which we hold allegiance. Rather let the charming and historic setting which the gracious and bountiful hospitality of our hosts oi Plawaii offers be our stimulant to make of the Congress an organization of permanent usefulness. The Congress today has members in fifty countries and upon its roll are more than twenty-three hundred representative jour- nalists. The object of the Congress is set out in its constitution : "To advance by conference, discussion and united effort the cause of journalism in every honorable way." It seeks by interchange of views, by discussions, by correspondence, by acquaintanceship, to enlarge the horizon of its members and to bring to all of them added appreciation of the dignity and the possibility of the profes- sion. No definite limits are set upon the meetings of the Congress. Whether they shall be held triennially, biennially or occasionally is a matter to be determined by this session of the Congress or by the Executive Committee under its direction. Whatever may be the decision as to the time and place of later sessions, it is suggested that provision be made for regional conferences to be held annually or biennially. With propriety, the first of these regional conferences may well be organized during the sessions 72 The Press Congress of the World at Honolulu, the Pan-Pacific Conference, a department of the larger world-organization, a department having large opportunity for usefulness. Later, regional conferences may well be formed in other parts of the world. The Congress should take into consideration provision for its future work, possibly the establishment of central bureaus of information for journalists everywhere, the inauguration of a publication for distribution among its members, and such meas- ures for financing the permanent maintenance of the world or- ganization as may seem most feasible. Permit me to suggest, therefore, the prompt appointment of a special committee look- ing toward the future organization and activities of the Congress or the reference of the entire question with power to the Ex- ecutive Committee. That an interchange of views on problems of wide interest may be undertaken with some definiteness during the present sessions, the Executive Committee has prepared an agenda which proposes the discussion of these questions : (a) What preparation is desirable for journalism? (b) How far is freedom of the press necessary or desirable and how may this freedom best be attained and safeguarded? (c) How best may avenues for news communication through- out the world be established, maintained, and kept open? (d) What, if any, are the obligations of journalism in ref- erence to international relations? (e) The question of interchange of journalists. It is not intended of course that the Congress discussions shall be limited to these questions, including, as these discussions may, others of importance. It is suggested, however, that these questions be given primary consideration and that ad interim committees be named to prepare and present at future sessions comprehensive reports upon them. Because journalism in its product is ephemeral, we are too apt to regard the questions which affect it as of only momentary interest or concern. Quite the opposite is of course true. The principles of journalism endure however the application changes with the generations or however it may vary in different lands. The long look helps to see clearly one's way to the fulfillment of the day's duties. Like the leaves of the tree which is for the healing of the nations, the printed pages rain upon the earth — Proceedings of the Congress 73 let us consider the tree, its soundness, its permanence, and its strength, not merely the fluttering, evanescent leaves. Journalism, in its final analysis, is a profession of public serv- ice, not a business or a trade, though it may involve in new- paper manufacture and sale, the trade of the mechanic and the sagacity of the merchant. It is primarily a profession of public service, and, in this place and presence, it may be sug- gested, a profession of international service. If journalism be a profession of public service, then those engaged upon it have a common object — 'the service of the public; and in international, as well as national relations there should be the studious desire to interpret the words of others in the best sense, to avoid what- ever widens breaches between nations and peoples and to make the most of whatever tends to narrow the breaches between nations and peoples. To these principles the journalist who wishes best to serve internationally will seduluously conform. A distinguished British journalist, Lord Burnham, has said that the hospitality of the press should not be denied on any ground of opinion or bias. It should not, he adds, be denied on any ground except that publication would be dangerous to the safety of the people — salus populi — which in journalism should be the suprema lex. Lord Burnham's happy statement may be — shall I not say should be — carried further. It is not only true that no publication should be made that is dangerous to the safety of the people, but that every publication ought to be made that advances the safety, the health, and the welfare of the people. Evil may be wrought through journalism by the suppression of the good as by the publication of the bad. Journalism should keep open house for every wholesome truth while the doors of its sheltering space are closed to the falsehoods, under whatever specious plea they come, which are destructive of domestic or world welfare and peace. "There is none ever fear the truth should be heard Save those whom the truth would indict." The great object of a conscientious journalist, said a speaker at the centenary of the Manchester Guardian, is to make righteous- ness readable. That is only part of the truth. The great object of the conscientious journalist is to make righteousness more than readable — to make it obtainable and sought. Any consideration of the world's journalism with a view to its 74 The Press Congress of the World betterment must take into consideration all its tendencies, good and evil. Some evil tendencies arise from a low estimate of the public's wishes. Even the skillful merchant does not give the public what it wants but stimulates demand, creates new and different and better wants. So journalism that seeks to give the public what it wants will bear in mind the higher needs and op- portunities as well as the lower appetites. Other evil tendencies arise from editorialized news, from lack of personal responsibility, from the cheapness and lowered standard of vulgarian journals. While these suggest tendencies for evil in the world's press today, other, and, I believe, dominat- ing tendencies are toward better things. Never before has the professional spirit of journalism been so manifest, never before has the press recognized itself so generally as a profession of public service. Individual responsibility for a social institution attaches more and more to those who serve in any capacity in journalism. We come to a Press Congress that we may learn and serve, for every man is a debtor to his profession, as Francis Bacon wrote, "from the which as he seeks to obtain countenance and profit, so ought he of duty by way of amends to be a help and ornament thereto." Generations before the philosopher of the West, the greatest sage of the East, Confucius, had given rules for the service of a good writer. Let me put them as corollary to the philosophy of Bacon. Confucius wrote that he who would be a good writer, the journalist in his time, should be clear in vision, quick in hearing, genial in expression, respectful in demeanor, true in word, serious in duty, inquiring in doubt, firmly self-controlled in anger, just and fair. Journalists who live by their profession may live for their profession by putting into practice in their own work, accepting full personal responsibility, the Confucian creed. We make better journalism only as we improve journal- ists. There is another tendency in the world's journalism unto higher service. More and more it has become the voice of the voiceless, the tribune of the people. Victor Hugo's glowing eloquence uttered the ideal of the journalist who would be man- kind's prophet: "The people are silence. I will be the advocate Proceedings of the Congress 75 of this silence. I will speak for the dumb. I will speak of the small to the great, and of the feeble to the strong. I will speak for all the despairing, silent ones. I will interpret this stammer- ing. I will interpret the grumblings, the murmurs, the tumults of crowds, the complaints, ill-pronounced, and all the cries of beasts that through ignorance and other suffering man is forced to utter. I will be the word of the people. I will be the bleed- ing mouth whence the gag is snatched out. I will say every- thing." The journalist who undertakes this high mission will be the daysman who stands between the extremes of society. He will be the keeper of the conscience of King Demos and woe be unto him if he neglect his primary duty to the weak, the friendless, and those who have no helper. That we may better realize our responsibilities to the world in which we live and to our profession, that we may be the better prepared to meet these responsibilities through our profession to the world in which we live is the high object of this Congress. We are engaged in a common profession with common faith in its high purpose and in the possibilities of its service toward the welfare of mankind. If we do to the utmost our duty in its behalf, wars would become impossible, the world vv^ould be tran- quilized and made prosperous unto more abundant living every- where. Men of good will would take the place of men of hate. It is true and increasingly true, the whole quotation makes the meaning clear, that "beneath the rule of men entirely great, the pen is mightier than the sword." We would change Fleet Street to a wider avenue, a high road unto human happiness in which all who walk as well as all who ride may have a chance, in which every man and every nation may have a chance, and so far as the written, generous truth and aggressive comradeship can make it so, unto the fullest individual and national self-realization, an equal chance. The new world journalism is the outcome of a new world spirit. It is the outward and visible sign of an effort at self- expression. This new world spirit is a struggle among the peoples for different relations to the external, a conviction that they should have more to say concerning their own fortunes. Its manifestations are various. Its attitude is critical everywhere 76 The Press Congress of the World and sometimes openly contemptuous. In some lands it seeks re- form, in some it inspires revolt. So journalism is freakish in some places for a time and revolutionary elsewhere. Man is not made for the established order, the new spirit asserts. The es- tablished order must be made or remade for man. Civilization is a garment. If it does not fit comfortably, let us change it. So state and church, society and business, school and government, are invaded with interrogations if not with axes by the new world spirit. Of this spirit, at the same time its creature and its creator, its prophet and its slave, is the new world journalism. One outstanding significant and hopeful fact that any con- sideration, however slight, of the world's journalism today re- veals is that journalists in every land are more and more possessed of the conviction that their profession is to be engaged in pri- marily for public good, that they are to be, whatever the personal risk, keepers of lighthouses to bring the world's peoples through troubled seas to a safe, peaceful and prosperous harbor. This conviction is wide-spread and growing among journalists. That it exists, and so generally, gives hope and courage to all who recognize the power of journalism in the present transition age. The new journalism will have the public for its client and will accept fee from no lesser source. Its high purpose will be the public welfare, not alone locally or nationally, but the world's welfare. It will recognize that welfare is brought about not by commercial domination or by force of arms, not by the tyranny of a proletariat or an oligarchy, of the educated few or the ig- norant many, but by that powerful comradeship of all — that genuine neighborliness — of which journalists themselves often give to their own personal and professional associates the best example. A league of journalists — keeping open and free the avenues of world communication — and speaking just and fair may do even more to preserve sacred institutions of society, to promote and maintain world peace, to give large life to all, than even the most skillfully balanced league or association of nations. In the last analysis, public opinion rules. Recorded, crystallized, inter- preted, expressed by journalism, it is supreme. Ideas, not navies, rule the sea. Ideas, not armies, dominate the land. Let us dis- arm the typewriters of the jingo press in every land and limitation Proceedings of the Congress 11 of — nay abandonment of — armaments, even without the Washing- ton conference, is an accompHshed fact. Without the press' aid, whatever the wise men at Washington may determine, there is no peace ; disarmament is an iridescent dream. Increase the avenues of communication between nations and free news sources from the poison of interested propaganda and we thereby help to make a sick world well. Permit these avenues to be clogged, congested and corrupted and the fever of war returns apace. Open the door of the Washington conference and of all confer- ences that involve international relations to the press of the world and there is great gain thereby. Debate and decide the destinies of people in secret and behind closed doors and. what- ever the good decision, its effect is weakened by the suspicion created by the very secrecy. The war dogs are unleashed behind closed doors, not when men talk with frankness at a con- ference table while the world looks on. Our meeting in this city suggests that no longer are the na- tions separate. No longer may they be unconcerned, the one with the welfare of the other, for all nations and all peoples every- where are bound up in the sure bundle of the world's life. To serve the life of the world and not to do dis-service to those who live next door is the high mission of the journalism of to- day. Impossible, you say, the accomplishment of such a mission. Nay, nothing is impossible to those whose hearts are young, whose faith is sure, and who have ever before them the splendid vision of the profession of journalism — journalism, the great, un- finished, fascinating, new adventure. THE CHAIRMAN: We have a large number of messages from members of organizations, institutions and individual jour- nalists, which will be considered at a later time and referred to committees as may seem proper, but I crave your indulgence to hear two of these messages at the present time. One is from The Empire Press Union, of the British Empire, and one from the American Newspaper Publishers Association. I will ask the executive secretary of the Congress, Mr, John R. Morris, to read these. 78 The Press Congress of the World THE EXECUTIVE SECRETARY: The Empire Press Union, 71, Fleet Street, London, E. C, 5th August, 1921. Dr. Walter IViUiams, President, The Press Congress of the World. Dear Mr. President : It gives me much pleasure to send to you, by the hand of Col. E. F. Lawson, who represents The Empire Press Union and "The Daily Tele- graph," the warm greeting of the members of this organization to dele- gates to the Press Congress of the World assembled at Honolulu, and to convey the following resolution adopted unanimously by tlie Council of this Union : — "On behalf of The Empire Press Union this Council beg to convey through their representative member, Col. E. F. Lawson, D. S. O., M. C, hearty and fraternal greetings to their colleagues in the Press Congress of the World assembled in Conference at Honolulu, and to ex- press cordial and sincere wishes for complete success of this important gathering of representatives of the world's Press, whose deliberations should be attended by most happy results." May I ask that I associate myself most heartily with this expression of the Union's goodwill towards the important gatliering over which you are to preside, and join in wishing for the Congress every success. I feel that the occasion will be one of very great interest to all concerned in the Press, and that such a mobilization of the world's newspaper workers should wield an immense and fruitful influence, not only in the common interests of the newspaper press, but also in improving and securing mu- tual understanding and sympathy. I wish it had been possible for me to accept the invitation to attend the Congress. For reasons already explained to you I am not able to be present, but I am glad to take this opportunity of sending a message of fraternal regard to the delegates of the Congress from their colleagues in the Empire Press Union. Yours very truly, BURNHAM President. American Newspaper Publishers Association, New York, U. S. A. September 37th, 1921. Dr. Walter Williams, President, Press Congress of the Worlf^, Honolulu, T. H. My dear Dr. Williams : On behalf of the American Newspaper Publishers Association permit mc to extend heartiest greetings to the Press Congress of the World. It Proceedings of the Congress 79 is a gathering from which it is impossible for anything but good to come, wherein it will be regarded in some quarters, perhaps, as differing from other congresses which we all respect too highly to mention. It is really of good omen to the people of all countries that there should be such an international conference of their respective newspaper fra- ternities as that which you are holding. The press is, in every civilized land, the supreme vehicle of public opinion, and it is public opinion which ultimately governs. That the press, by which the chief nations are interpreted to one another, should be inter- nationalized in the spirit of fraternal good will is therefore of the highest consequence to men everywhere. This friendly mingling of editors and publishers from widely separated lands for the purpose of better understanding and increased co-operation is the first step toward the era of worldwide good feeling for which all mankind so deeply yearns. The complete success of your meeting is the earnest wish of the newspapermen of America. Cordially yours, T. R. Williams, President, American Newspaper Publishers Association. THE CHAIRMAN : The chair recognizes Mr. H. L. Bridg- man. MR. BRIDGMAN : Mr. President, if you will permit me I will offer a few resolutions relating to the conduct of the business of the Congress, and move their adoption. First, that the President be authorized to appoint all standing committees. Seconded and carried unanimously. Second, it is ordered that all resolutions except those originat- ing in a committee shall, after having been read to the Conven- tion for its information, be referred to the proper standing Com- mittee of the Congress. I move its adoption. THE CHAIRMAN : Seconded and carried unanimously. The Chair will announce later the committees of the Congress covered by Mr. Bridgman's motion. I now recognize, to present the Congress Agenda, a member of the Executive Committee, Dr. V. R. Beteta, of Guatemala. DR. BETETA : I will read the Congress Agenda : (a) What preparation is desirable for journalism? (b) How far is freedom of the press necessary or desirable and how may this freedom best be attained and safeguarded? (c) How best may avenues for news communication throughout the world be established, maintained, and kept open? (d) What, if any, are the obligations of journalism in reference to in- ternational relations? 80 The Press Congress of the World (e) The question of interchange of journalists. THE CHAIRMAN : It is not intended to limit discussions but rather to encourage expression of your thought on these topics. I hold in my hand a gavel presented to the President of the Congress by a crippled Portuguese boy who is now running an elevator in the Governor's official home. His name is Louis Madeiras. He used to sell newspapers on the street here, the Star and the Bulletin, before they became the Star-Bulletin, I understand, and other papers, perhaps the Advertiser. Wishing to do something for the Congress he made out of the island ma- hogany this gavel which bears upon it the coat of arms of the Territory of Hawaii. In your name and in my own I take this public occasion of expressing your thanks and mine to the crippled Portuguese lad who thus shows his interest in the Press Con- gress of the World. I recognize at this time Mr. Hollington K. Tong, of Peking, China, who has a pleasant duty to perform in a presentation to the Congress. MR. TONG: Mr. President, I have the honor of presenting to you as President of the Press Congress of the World, two small tokens which I have brought oyer from China, in appreciation of the great part that the Press Congress of the World has played in international life. This memorial arch, engraved with the words "World Opinion" is a tribute to the power of the press and is sent by the Prime Minister of China as an emblem of Peace, which the Press does so much to voice. It is designed as an ex- ample of one of the largest of our national arches, and it is hoped that when your eyes rest upon this memorial arch you will be reminded of the Chinese Republic. This cup, also designed with characteristic Chinese art, bears the words, "The Universal Voice," and like its companion is pre- sented to the Press Congress of the World for the use and possession of its officers. It is sent by the Minister of Finance of the Republic of China, in token of his deep appreciation and with the hope that the World Press will help to smooth out our difficulties. I hand these small tokens to you, Mr. President, with the heartiest wishes for your continued good health and for the prosperity of the Press Congress of the World, which you have done so much to bring to its present standing. Proceedings of the Congress 81 THE CHAIJRMAN : These beautiful tokens of appreciation and good will from the Republic of China, I am confident, will be highly valued by this and future Press Congresses, as mani- festing the interest of the Prime Minister and people of that country, in which the art of printing, the medium of expression for journalism, had its origin generations ago. The mother of printing thus greets the daughter of printing here between the East and the West. And what Mr. Tong has so felicitously ex- pressed in his presentation I am sure will be recalled by all of us as another evidence in the nature of the erection of spiritual temples, in which we, as the High Priests of journalism enter day by day, seeking to do service there unto all mankind. In your name and for you I accept these tokens of friendship and goodwill from the distinguished Ministers of China, and will place them in possession of the Congress as perpetual reminder if reminder be needed, of the goodwill that should exist between journalists and peoples everywhere. I again recognize Dr. Beteta, who will read a cablegram from the Mayor of the City of Seville, Spain. DR. BETETA : Translation of a cablegram received from The Count of Urbina, Mayor of the city of Seville, Spain, Rep- resentative there of the King of Spain and President of the Ex- position to be held in 1923-24: Seville, October 10, 1921. To President, Press Congress of the World, Honolulu. Confirming invitation sent by means of your Delegate to Spain and Latin America, Dr. Virgilio Rodriguez Beteta, the City Council of Seville feels honored to invite the members of the Press Congress of the World, sitting at Honolulu to name Seville as the site of the next meeting of tlie Congress. I beg this request to be passed to the assemblage in the name of the Council of Seville, so tliat our invitation may be official in its character. Mayor, Count of Urbina. THE CHAIRMAN: It will be referred to the proper com- mittee. We will have announcements only at certain times except as the Chairman makes announcements and I will make this an- nouncement at the present time : First, there will be no after- noon session of the Congress today. A little later in the morning we will have a ten minute recess before we finally adjourn and 82 The Press Congress of the World Mr. Aldrich, the photographer, will take motion pictures of this room and the people in it, the fihns to be for pubhcity use. Acting in accordance with the resolution adopted by the Congress a moment ago, I wish to announce that the commit- tees are only partly organized as to membership and will be added to from time to time. I will read them as far as they have been organized. The first named on each committee will be the chairman, and the second the vice chairman. Committee on Resolutions. Col. E. F. Lawson, England, Chairman. F. P. Glass, United States, Vice-chairman. Thales Coutoupis, Greece. K. P. Wang, China. H. L. Bridgman, United States. Oswald Mayrand, Canada. M. Zumoto, Japan. Gregoria Nieva, Philippine Islands. Mrs. Mabel S. Shaw, United States. Agustin Laze, Cuba. Henry Chung, Korea. W. Easton, New Zealand. Guy Innes, Australia. Committee on Constitution. K. Sugimura, Japan, Chairman. F. P. Hall, United States, Vice-chairman. Jabin Hsu, China. H. A. Davies, Australia. R. W. Kettle, New Zealand. Agustin Laze, Cuba. H. U. Bailey, United States. C. H. Fogg, United States. V. S. McCIatchy, United States. Committee on Nominations. Mark Cohen, New Zealand, Chairman. James Wright Brown, United States, Vice-chairman. \ Hollington K. Tong, China. K. Sugimura, Japan. Guy Innes, Australia. Col. E. F. Lawson, England. V. R. Beteta, Guatemala. J. P. Herrick, United States. IvUdvig Saxe, Norway. Thales Coutoupis, Greece. W. R. Farrington, United States. Mrs. H. J. Allen, United States. Proceedings of the Congress 83 Oswald Mayrand, Canada. Gregorio Nieva, Philippine Islands. Agustin Lazo, Cuba. Committee on Credentials. W. D. Hornaday, United States, Chairman. Riley H. Allen, United States, Vice-chairman. C. S. Smith, New Zealand. Hollington K. Tong, China. John R. Morris, United States. Committee on Rules and Order of Business. L. A. Thurston, United States, Cliairman. V. R. Beteta, Guatemala, Vice-chairman. S. E. DeRackin, United States. Mr. DeRackin is the only member of this Press Congress, so far as my memory serves me, who was present at the initial meeting held some dozen years or more ago when it was suggested that this present convention be held. (After Ten Minutes Recess) THE CHAIRMAN : The session will reconvene. I will have the Executive Secretary of the Congress read a letter from the Director of the Shun Pao, of Shanghai, China, regarding the next meeting of the Congress. THE EXECUTIVE SECRETARY: Shanghai, September 21, 1921. My dear Dr. Williams: We understand that the Third Press Congress of the World will be held not very long from now, and we therefore wish to extend an invita- tion to the members of the Congress to hold their next Congress in China. Judging from the trend of world progress and from the position of im- portance in the family of nations within the next few decades, there will be no other country as fit as China will be, to be tlie meeting place of the next Press Congress. Moreover China is an old nation, and she has many notable characteristics and original traditions that will be worth- while for the newspapermen of the world to observe and study. No other country could offer a better and richer field of interest for the members of the Press Congress to digest. We, therefore, sincerely request you to extend an invitation on behalf of the Chinese people to the Congress to hold its next Congress in China. We further learn that a party of journalists will visit China soon after the close of the Second Congress. Shanghai is the biggest port in the Orient and the "Shun Pao" is the leading newspaper in China, the visiting journalists surely can not afford to miss calling on us. Pleasure will be ours to be at their service whenever they come. Please convey our senti- ment of welcome to those who are coming here soon or some time in the future. 84 The Press Congress of the World With best wishes for the greatest success of the Second Congress. I am, Yours very sincerely, SzE Liang Zay Director. THE CHAIRMAN : This letter and the invitation will be re- ferred as the others have been to the proper standing committee. I recognize Mr. Nieva, of the Philippine Islands, who will make a brief statement. MR. NIEVA: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: As I mentioned last night. Governor General Yeater, on behalf of the Government of my country and the Press of the Philippines, has given me instructions to invite you to meet in Manila on the oc- casion of the next Press Congress. Manila is now closer to Honolulu and to the United States, with the establishment of the direct route, on which pleasure boats are running and at the same time is as close to both Americas as it is to Europe. With the appointment of Major General Wood as our next Governor Gen- eral, the Philippines is coming to the front, for Governor General Wood will be a towering figure not only for the Philippines but for the welfare, progress and peace of the whole Far East. We, as well as you, should watch the progress of which he will be the instrument in the Orient. If but for this reason alone, it should be worth while for you to note what is being done in the Philippines in the interest of humanity, that the Far East may assume her proper place on the earth. Allow me therefore to ex- tend to you once more a cordial invitation from the Governor and the Press of my country. THE CHAIRMAN: The invitation presented by Mr. Nieva will be referred to the proper committee. Mr. Bridgman has an announcement to make. MR. BRIDGMAN: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: I assume entire personal responsibility for the statement which I am about to make, believing that a frank explanation is due. Re- cently, as you are all aware, that great newspaper The New York Times, celebrated its seventieth birthday and the twenty-fifth an- niversary of the management of Mr. Adolph S. Ochs, and in connection with that interesting event published a complete his- tory of the rise, development and progress of that great news- paper. Meeting Mr. Ochs the other day, I suggested to him Proceedings of the Congress 85 that an inscribed copy of this excellent work be presented to the Congress, offering my service as messenger, but Mr. Ochs, with characteristic modesty in which he resembled other great men, appreciating the compliment, declined graciously to accept my offer. Subsequently, however, he placed in my possession three copies of the history, with the request that I place them at the disposal of this Congress, and it gives me much pleasure to per- form this honorable commission. I ask you, Mr. President, to ac- cept these books. THE CHAIRMAN : The Chair, for the Congress, has pleas- ure in accepting the gifts through Mr. Bridgman of the three copies of the history of one of the world's greatest newspapers, the New York Times. Acceptance and thanks in due course of time will be forwarded to Mr. Ochs. Mr. Bridgman has kindly offered to place on exhibition for a time at Tiffany's, in New York, and later to place in the safe- keeping of a safe deposit company of which he is vice-president these beautiful tokens of China's good will and friendship, and make them available to the public at such times as the Congress may determine, and in such ways as it sees fit. The suggestion is gratefully received and will be considered by the proper com- mittee, to which it is hereby referred. MR. JAMES WRIGHT BROWN : I should like to move, Mr. President, that this Congress rise and extend its thanks and ap- preciation to its Honorary President, President Harding, and to Governor Farrington, for their most welcome and appreciative messages. THE CHAIRMAN: You have heard the motion of Mr. Brown, what is your pleasure? MR. HERRICK, New York : I second the motion. THE CHAIRMAN : All in favor will make it known by ris- ing. The motion is carried unanimously. You will recall that the committees that have been named will meet at the call of the Chairman wherever he wishes and whenever he wishes and take up such matters as may be referred to them, or as they may initiate for themselves. Additions will be made to these committees and the Chairman of the committee will be notified thereof. The list of the committees can be ob- tained from the secretary of the Congress. There will be no 86 The Press Congress of the World more formal meetings of the Congress until Monday, October 17, but during the five days of that week we hope to have par- ticularly profitable and effective sessions and we urge you this far in advance to let none of the attractions of Honolulu keep you away from attendance upon these Congress sessions at that time. It may have escaped the attention of some of you that tonight is the four hundred and twenty-ninth anniversary of the discovery of America by the great Genoese navigator, who was financed by Spain, and that those of you who wish to do so and have not al- ready done so may properly commemorate that event by helping others to discover, as Balboa did the Pacific Ocean later, some of the wonders of this part of the world. It is particularly appro- priate it seems to me that this first meeting, which is just a hint of what we hope to accomplish, comes on the anniversary of the day when Christopher Columbus was looking out over the At- lantic, seeking to find a new world. May we today be looking out to see a new world in a higher, better and truer sense than even the great Genoese when America was added to the then known world. The Congress will stand adjourned until ten o'clock Monday morning, October 17. SECOND SESSION. MONDAY MORNING, OCTOBER 17, 1921. The session was called to order at ten o'clock a. m.. President Williams occupying the chair. THE CHAIRMAN : I have appointed Mr. H. B. Hale as ser- geant-at-arms. He possesses both strength and diplomacy. The Congress sessions will begin each morning hereafter at ten o'clock in this room and each afternoon at two o'clock in this room, today, Tuesday, Wednesday and Thursday. The sessions on Friday will be held elsewhere and due announcement made thereof. The sessions must begin promptly on time in order that we may transact the business for which we are in Honolulu. The program as heretofore printed and appearing from day to day in the newspapers will be followed, except that the Chair- man reserves the right to change the make-up if necessary just before the paper goes to press. The meetings of the Congress are open to the public and a cordial invitation is extended to all who wish to attend at any time. i Proceedings of the Congress 87 Before any discussion of any paper is taken up, I beg to call to your attention the provision of the Constitution, stating that '"Sessions of the Congress are to be open to the consideration of all questions directly affecting the press, but discussions of religion, politics and governmental policies will not be permitted," and the Chair will feel it his duty to hold strictly to the pro- vision of the Constitution, for we are here to consider journalism and not some other questions that may be interesting but are not within the line of our work. Under instructions of the Executive Committee there has been named a committee on the organization of a Pan-Pacific Press Conference. I will ask the secretary to read the names of this committee. THE SECRETARY : As authorized by the Executive Com- mittee, the following committee on the organization of a Pan- Pacific Press Conference is announced : Alexander Hume Ford, Chairman. Guy Innes, Australia, Vice-chairman. F. F. Bunker, United States, Secretary. V. S. McCIatchy, United States. K. Sugimura, Japan. Jabin Hsu, China. Mark Cohen, New Zealand. V. R. Beteta, Latin America. Oswald Mayrand, Canada. Hin Wong, China. Riley H. Allen, United States. G. Nieva, Philippine Islands. H. H. Cynn, Korea. S. E. DeRackin, United States. THE CHAIRMAN : This committee will have charge of the program planned for Friday of this week. The Congress has received a number of messages from distant parts of the earth which the secretary will now read. THE SECRETARY : These, gentlemen, are mostly messages of congratulation and good wishes. The first is a cablegram from Fred Johnston of the Falkirk Herald, Scotland: "Heartiest greetings sincerest absence apology." The second is from W. T. Brewster, Irish Independent, Dublin : "Greet- ings from press of Ireland and heartiest wishes for success." From B. M. Harvard, "Cordial greetings." From Kaibyuk Magazine, Korea : "Greetings." From Toundokyo Magazine, Korea : ''Greetings." 88 The Press Congress of the World From the editor El Mundo, Azucarero, New Orleans : "The Louisiana Press Association in annual session authorized me to convey to you the good wishes of all the editors of Louisiana with the hope that your session will be full of intellectual enjoyment and mark an advance in the newspaper status of the whole world." From A. A. Humme, President of the Dutch Association of Journalists. The Hague : "To the Congress all liail for international brotherhood's sake." From the Dutch Association: "Best wishes." From B. W. Fleisher, Japan Advertiser : "Please convey deep regret inability avail myself great privilege to have actively taken part this Con- gress for such constructive work international journalism more important now than ever and in no sphere more important than in Pacific. Trust I may be of service in any permanent Pan-Pacific organization formed." From Charles Igglesden, Kentish Express, Ashf ord, Kent, England : "Hearty good wishes from reluctantly absent member." From the editor of the Fourth Estate, Ernest F. Birmingham : "Much regret my inability to be with you. Please convey to Governor Farrington and members of Congress the Fourth Estate's congratulations and our be- lief that your meeting will prove historic in strengthening the relations be- tween the press of all nations which although always cordial are not suffi- ciently coordinated to demonstrate its full power and influence on the world's progress. I am certain that the interchange of thought on the practical problems of newspaper publishing will broaden editorial vision and help materially in framing policies dealing with the momentous ques- tions now before the world's leaders, outstanding among whom is our own President Harding, himself a man of lifelong training in the profession of journalism." From the Korean Independence News : "Hearty congratulations, best wishes." From John Clyde Oswald, editor American Printer ; one of the Vice- Presidents of the Congress : "Fraternal greetings. May your sessions prove interesting and profitable. Deeply regret enforced absence." From Salvado Canals, Madrid : "Best wishes for the success of your Congress." THE CHAIRMAN : There are two or three invitations rel- ative to the next meeting of the Congress, that will be presented and read at this time. THE SECRETARY: I have here the translation of a mes- sage from Sig. Urbina, King's representative, Seville, Spain: The Hispanio-American Exposition Committee requests that Congress be held, according the proposition presented by our official representative, Rodriguez Bcteta, here in 192,3. We hope a favorable resolution. THE CHAIRMAN : This invitation, together with others pre- sented, will be referred under the Constitution to the Executive Committee for consideration and determination. I now recognize Mr. William Southern, Jr. Proceedings of the Congress 89 MR. SOUTHERN : Mr. President, brother delegates, I bring you greeting from the Missouri Press Association which, at a meeting held in September, extended a very cordial invitation to this Press Congress to hold its next conference in Missouri, in either of our large cities or at Columbia, Missouri, the seat of our university and the home of our president, Dean Williams, who presides there over the Missouri Univetrsity School of Journalism. THE CHAIRMAN: This invitation will be referred to the Executive Committee. I will ask the secretary now to read a request from the Naval Communication Service. THE SECRETARY: The telegraph companies of the United States to whom we forward press dispatches for further transmission to their destination require that press dispatches in order to enjoy press rates over their lines must con- tain only items of news and inquiries concerning news. For this reason delegates are requested not to place items of a personal nature in their dispatches. A low price night letter rate is offered by the Radio Corpora- tion of America. The Naval Radio operator on duty will furnish any in- formation regarding this class of message and will accept them for trans- mission after they have been oked by the hotel clerk : Naval Communication Service Moana Hotel. THE CHAIRMAN : The Chair again states what is doubtless familiar to you all, that discussion is permitted at any time and on any subject raised by the papers presented or subjects that may be created, with the limitations already referred to. This afternoon the general subject for discussion will be Journalistic Education. This morning we begin our program with an address on the "Freedom of the Press." It comes with appropriateness from a delegate from a land which we have associated in all centuries, even under difficult conditions, with freedom. I have the honor of presenting to you a distinguished journalist of Athens, Greece, a former member of the cabinet of Venizelos, eminent in state- craft as in journalism, Mr. Thales Coutoupis. MR. THALES COUTOUPIS: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: Before I enter into my subject, allow me to tell you something as a prologue to my address. I come from a country which is far away from here, a country which has been the cradle of freedom of opinion and public expression of thought. Who wotild have believed in the 90 The Press Congress of the World ancient times that a day would come when we would be discussing in a new Athenian AW PA political and social matters to pro- mote general ideas for the development of mankind? Even in modern times one would scarcely believe that a gathering of such importance could bring men of letters from both hemispheres as it happens now. I may say that in the expression of opinion for the develop- ment of mankind, no other factor can more than the press draw the attention of the people and make universal the matters which are local for many men of religion, statesmen, military men, men of business and also men of letters, by pretending to enlighten by their teaching the whole of mankind. The press, through its influence and its generality of opinions will succeed more than all universities, parliaments, conferences, books, etc., to bring peoples together and to persuade them that they will be happier if they look at all the different matters from an international rather than from a national point of view. No man can be so active as a newspaper man ; no profession makes the mind so acute to catch on to international affairs and take an interest in them. The press is the guide of public opinion not only of one people but of all the peoples of the world. Of course, the principal aim of this congress is to promote peace. I ought perhaps to touch in my speech upon this subject. It was in my country that first the general idea of an understand- ing between enemies was discussed in congress. I refer you back to the congress in Delphi, the so-called AM\wy, left to riglit) JABIN HSU, Shanghai:. K. P. WANG, Shanghai; HOLLINGTON K. TONG, Peking; HIN WONG, Canton; PEI-YU CHIEN, Tientsin. AT THE MILITARY REVIEW (lower). Proceedings of the Congress 225 should have made their joint service to mankind one of tremen- dous efficiency, the representatives of the Press have to work hard to get the news, to chase it ahead of others, then to boil it, then to construe it, then to comment on it, and then to serve it to their reading public. Misconstruction has thus in many cases endangered the safety of the interests of the community. It is this mutual confidence, it is this cordial openness, gentle- men of the press, that we all must try to see as the distinguishing features of our service in behalf of universal good hereafter. It is this service that I wish to enlist in the achievement of humane purposes in the Far East. Fortunately, nations today seem to be working under the pressing tendency to associate themselves, to group together in alliance, just as individuals in clubs or associations, for the more expeditious promotion of their purpose. The press, which has always been the promoter of great ideals, strangely enough, is almost the last to realize the impera- tive necessity of organizing itself into a world-wide association for the systematization of its efforts into one combined and effi- cient service to mankind. The new spirit, however, is now per- meating our various communities and impelling them into such a world-wide association. This is, indeed, a very hopeful sign. It is doubtless for this great purpose, as well as the call of the new spirit, that we are met here today. I have been going over man's creative ideas of the age, to see which of them are best suited to man's requirements today. While some — to mention those for war purposes — are for quickening the reciprocal an- nihilation of contending forces, and while science and industry are thus placed at the service of civilization for the latter's own lightning-like destruction, however, it is gratifying to see the new spirit leading the press of the world towards an every-day much closer association, towards one great periodical Congress, for a heart to heart intercourse of ideas and opinions and plans, such as our living experience may enlighten us to formulate before an organization of our own, for our own information, for action by ourselves. I profess the profoundest faith in the immense possibilities of the Press as a world power for good, and for evil as well. It must still be easy for us all to remember the influence of a cer-. 15 226 The Press Congress of the World tain portion of the Press in shaping and reshaping policies of national and international purport during the early stages of the war in Europe, even at that time when secrecy in motives of action on public matters didn't seem to run fully in accord with the character of the latter, and when press representatives were not yet, as they are not yet today, accorded, as I have said above, that openness which should have been accorded to them ab initio and which would make the joint functioning of the Press and the government a great deal more efficient indeed. The press, however, loyal and patriotic, rendered its service just the same, to the very best, and at times saved whole armies from utter annihilation, at its own expense, and in all without the least expectation either of official recognition or official reward. The idea of an honest and loyal service to the public has always been its best reward. This shows that, if properly harnessed, there would be none on earth that could pride itself with claiming a greater meaning to, and with being a greater power for, humanity than the press with the systematic utilization of its dynamic forces — forces that would always stand for conquest without invasion, for victory without annihilation, for peace without reparations. In Tulsa, Oklahoma, to refer to a recent instance, a reporter's pen proved itself a powerful contributing factor to cause as it caused that beautiful city to fall asunder. That same pen, however, could have helped to save that graceful city from utter destruc- tion. In this sense, the press can be a war-preventer. In this same sense, it can, just as easily, cause utter destruction. It is, therefore, the dynamism of our as yet unorganized forces that we must patiently, that we must carefully harness. Fortunately enough, it is not yet too late for us to have them efficiently or- ganized. Heretofore, men and nations have been laboring for the future by nationalities. The future was accordingly mapped out by na- tionalities also. It could not be helped. It was simply impossible to help. The civilization of the West was that way. And that civilization was our heritage. It was the model civilization after which nations and democracies, schools and universities, the pul- pit even, were patterned. Never was there a true community of interests, physical or spiritual, between nations, except when a Proceedings of the Congress 227 blast of danger threatened to blow them together. There had been some of it in religious doctrines, socialistic tendencies, or labor preachings, and this, for the masses below, for those whose rights are more or less rightly believed to be trampled down, but even then, with relative or rather doubtful sincerity. Selfishness, in terms of nationalities, in terms of races, made actual commu- nity spirit simply impossible for the world, and made it impossible for the nations jointly to labor for universal good. During the war, nations allied themselves in formidable groups for offensive and defensive purposes, for greater efficiency in war. After the war, horrified at the grimy sight of death, of destruction, of the universal bankruptcy now mercilessly chok- ing up the world, they began to think of peace, and to labor for the permanent promotion of peace, and today, with some grat- ifying consistency, the world is drifting towards peace. Presi- dent Harding, through his proposed unrestricted discussion of public questions, which must really be made public for all men and nations on earth by throwing wide open the doors of secret diplomacy, if heeded and fortunate, may at last start the discus- sion of human affairs in the clear open at all times and find the formula for man's lasting peace, based upon mutual understand- ing. For this effort, and to help make public questions really public, all our support and all we are and all we stand for should be placed unqualifiedly available for him. In this way we may render a decisive service to help cause to fade whatever difficulties may block the path of or blind our statesmen. And in this, our service to man will nicely fit. Indeed, it is a happy coincidence that in Honolulu, in this group of tiny Isles which, in vivid contrast, are the birthplace and home of the gigantic Pan-Pacific Union idea, the courtesy of a very significant meeting place — the Hall of a Throne that was — has been so splendidly, so accommodatingly, so munificently ex- tended to us, both by the government and the local business and press community of these diminutive Isles, that it may perhaps be once more the birthplace of a new spirit, of a new idea for the regeneration of humanity. I hope you will heartily join me in ex- tending to them all our most expressive thanks. After San Francisco, this is, indeed, the most logical meeting place, for we all can see that from here, then in Japan, China, the 228 The Press Co7igress of the World Philippines, Java, India, and so on, hand in hand on this side of the earth that is still free from the frightful bickerings of antago- nistic interests and antagonistic attitudes and antagonistic futures as those still obtaining on the other side, the idea of a United Press of the World and the idea of the Pan-Pacific Union, one helping the other as the two greatest movements of the age, both may, here, give a sound start to the union of all Pacific countries and then of all countries on earth, into one brotherly search after the solemn truth of their common future and the common future of men. The Pacific is making colossal strides forward. Its dot-like, central islands seem to house the spark to set the world again afire. And the forebodings of war and of war causes and war forces would seem to accumulate on the Pacific, and, if unpre- vented, I am afraid, the next most stupendous of all wars will be here. However, if we are really determined to utilize what God has so purposely placed in our hands — that pure, piercing light of a fearless publicity — to test and gauge the purity and consistency of man's purpose, without becoming disloyal to our- selves, without becoming disloyal to our respective countries, but just assisting, with absolute loyalty, our own statesmen and our masses and the world itself intelligently to understand, in every instance, the true case for man, I hope we may help cause such accumulation of war purposes and sinister means for war to fade away like night darkness before the unflinching onrush of day- light. This, on the one hand. On the other, there is today a factor surging for this — the advent to world power of journalists and of great dreamers whose writings are now capturing the profound at- tention of humanity leaders, and who are presenting the world with the unpolluted gift of their dreams — dreams that are not at all wholly unworkable, dreams that are not at all entirely un- feasible, dreams that, if backed up by the earnest response of re- organized humanity, can be made into powerful factors to reshape the world, to remodel world interests, to revitalize mankind through the revigorization of its old nerves and tissues with new, fresh, dynamic forces for peace. Harding, Wilson, North- cliffe, Hara, Wells, Tagore, Gandhi, and others are great hopes for man. As I have said, the Pacific today is assuming vast proportions. Proceedings of the Congress 229 Europe, both Americas, the whole Far East are meeting nowa- days in the Pacific. The richest and untouched treasures of the world are here. The logical market of the world is here. More than one billion people from India, Java, the Philippines, China, Japan, Oriental Russia and other countries inhabit the left hand side of the Pacific, if we look northward, with the little, almost dot-like, but all-important isles of Hawaii, Yap, Ladrone, Guam, and others in the center, while peoples of the Anglo-Saxon and Latin stocks are on the right, all perhaps to melt in the Pacific, and there, once melted, to form a real association of races, vital- ized with one common hope, with one common ideal, with one joint, whole-hearted determination to achieve what Europe has failed to, and what has made of America today the nearest ap- proach to this dreamed reality. It is here, therefore, where we may put to actual test the re- sistive power and inclination of races against that great crime to humanity or incomprehensible human error named "race preju- dice." It is here where, in the face of the new situation surging all over the Far East, we can put to actual test the true con- sistency of high principles of humanity, both as proclaimed in the West and then as applied in the East, or as must be proclaimed in and applied to both the West and the East alike. For one can see today universal principles are still conceived, proclaimed and observed one way for one place, and another for another place — one way for the West and another way for the East. And it is here where, if really determined therefore, we may put an end to such prejudice and such practice or else be ready again to face the undesirable as heretofore, ignoring all that for which man- kind has so nobly fought and which it so patiently and so direly achieved. This is the crime or error to help suppress which, we, members of the World Press, must boldly stand united and com- bined, as it has been fought against from Christ to date. We already had too many dreadful wars, even during the last fifty years previous to 1914, when war was proclaimed by somebody as an element of world order, when universal peace was considered a mere dream, and not a beautiful dream even; when everything drifted towards war, through schools and papers and pulpit as its more or less veiled channels. This, to give a tangible preponderance to stronger nationalities, and to make prosperity 230 The Press Congress of the World the exclusive privilege of the latter, at the expense of the weaker. Already we have seen that this policy has caused the world to sink deeper and deeper, and then deeper still, and the items of loss in war to be enormously greater than the item of loss in peace, and the item of profit in peace to be inconceivably greater than the item of profit in war, besides being more stable and better balanced for all. The time, therefore, seems ripe for the world to think of peace through these same factors, and to give room for a fitting community spirit for all nationalities to prevail through the work of peace as an every-day reality. Can't we really do it ? Some said that if man can conceive it, man can do it. If this is really true, if we ourselves can conceive it, if we can make our- selves want it as necessity, then my answer will be "Yes, chiefly through the press." The world is becoming so much narrower every day, and men and nations are getting themselves so much more closely depend- ent upon each other, that one can no longer live without the other. Marriage, intermarriage, the Bible, education, science, industry, trade, internationalism. Service as the supreme ideal of man to- day, fast transport and communication by sea, land and air, and the press, all tend to broaden our vision, but only to make our world much narrower each time, to lay everything open to man's sight, and thus make it the world of real men as God — the God of all men — wants men to be. But above all this, the press serv- ice — as superbly typified by the service rendered by the Asso- ciated Press, through which we are enabled to know every-day happenings in Russia, Ireland, Alaska, Congo, Argentine, Tibet, Afghanistan, India, and other places, from our respective homes, no matter where, in cities or villages — is the one service that truly links the world together, that causes waves of public wrath or public sympathy or public gratification to surge the world over, making men feel as men towards each other, and thus gradually furnishing an eflfcctive check against state rulers, through the daily formation of a gradually increasing, powerful public opin- ion to enlighten the world on universal and local matters. And I feel positive that if w-e, members of the press, can only inform the masses thoroughly, as thoroughly as we should inform them, about things around them and around the world, so that we may Proceedings of the Congress 231 help them to understand those things properly, and properly to understand themselves as well, then we shall have accumulated such an enormous force of social cohesion for all mankind, ir- respective of race, of religion, of government, as to make the state anywhere on earth a true servant of the people, and deliver the masses from merely being food for guns or the desequilibrium of heads of states. It is for this that I feel positive that, if we can only serve the people of the world with unveiled information about national and international purposes of the men at the helm of the ships of states, and make this a point of unevadable duty for both the men of the press and the heads of governments, we would relieve the world from so much of human worries and miseries and suffer- ings to the full measure of everybody's realization of his duty, and the exercise of man's right towards his fellow man. This way we could no longer be indifferent to massacres of Armenians, to Bolshevism in Russia, to famine in China, and when, after a night's rest, morning comes bringing to the home of every citi- zen of the world, through the press, the unmutilated news of the day, to place him in contact with the rest of mankind and in readiness to start the toil of the day with a fair knowledge of how his other fellowmen elsewhere on earth are, and cheerfully do his share in man's tasks for man, then we can say that, through the honest, efficient service of our association, we shall have ex- pedited the creation of a world comradeship spirit, and rendered mankind that service that will make it feel under the unescapable duty of upholding humane purposes anywhere on earth. Then, through the press, we shall have seen the achievement of humane purposes in the Far East. And now, in the face of the new forces today in evolution in the Far East, whose tendency is to unite together and to a man push the Far and Near Easts towards the place allotted to them on earth ; in the face of present tendencies towards a provoked separation, I, for one at least, and as one coming from the Philip- pines, or as a Far Easterner, dare respectfully raise my voice to appeal to you, fellow members of the press in this Congress, for me the one Congress possessing the greatest power on earth for the maintenance and preservation of humane purposes with neither violence nor reprisals, to invite you all to do all that is in our 232 The Press Congress of the World hands, through our respective papers, for a joint action in the maintenance and promotion of man's purposes anywhere we may be. Human unity the world over must not fall asunder. Humane purposes in the Far East must not fail. And universal comradeship must not be rendered impossible for racial reasons or other trifling causes. For their achievement in peace is per- fectly within the possibilities of the press. We must make up our mind to engineer the collossal power of a sane public opinion resulting from a fearless, thorough information, to utilize it in engineering the gigantic waves of these new forces for the preser- vation and promotion of civilization, to stop murder, to stop de- struction, once and for all to bring to an end the subjugation of man by man, that the West and the East may at last get together in behalf of man, that there may be universal contentment and welfare. Shall we fail the world? Shall the world fail us? Shall we fail each other? It is up to us to give an honest answer. In closing, allow me to thank you most heartily for the priv- ilege of addressing you on this occasion. My government, as well as the press and Chambers of Commerce of my country, have authorized me to extend to you its cordial invitation to hold our Congress's next meeting in the Philippines which, with the co- operation of the United States, is now trying its best so that the world trade may have a modern distributing center in the Far East, and which you will find as close to both Americas as to Europe. But you will find it closer still to your hearts if you will consider the fact that the Filipino people speak the language of your own civilization, that the Filipino press is written in the same language as your own press, and that the Christ of the Philippines is the same Christ of your countries. It is perhaps for this reason that the Philippines may justly claim to be the country of the Orient that may best labor for the unification of the East and the West. Our people, our press, our public institutions would all cheer- fully be at the service of humanity in this gigantic task. Indeed it would be a signal honor for my people and for the press of my country to have you all as our honored guests. Once more I thank you. (Applause.) Proceedings of the Congress 233 THE CHAIRMAN : The Congress has enjoyed very greatly this very beautiful and strong presentation of the spirit of the Philippines as embodied by that English-speaking and English- writing people and press. The invitation of Mr. Nieva will be referred, as the other invitations have been, to the Executive Committee for future consideration. The next speaker on this program is Mr. William Southern, Jr., of the Independence Examiner, Independence, Missouri, U. S. A. MR. SOUTHERN: Mr. President, Members of the Press Congress : It is with a good deal of embarrassment and some re- luctance that I appear on the program following the distinguished speakers who have discussed so forcibly the vital questions with which our Congress is to deal, and then attempt to turn your minds from the consideration of these great features of our Congress to the consideration of one portion of the press of the United States. This morning you listened to Mr. Bridgman, who discussed the features of the metropolitan press, and what I shall have to say should be, I think, a corroUary following that through the press publications in the smaller cities of the United States. I come, Mr. President, from a small press on which the local features predominate. It is our theory that a dog fight on Main Street, well written up, is of more interest to our readers than the story of a band of anarchists chasing a Grand Duke through Moscow. And so you will understand that to drop from the dis- cussions you have been hearing and listen to a discussion from a small paper, is rather embarrassing. The Chairman assigned me to discuss the provincial newspapers of the United States. Only a few years ago in England all newspapers not published in the city of London were called provincial papers. It is prob- able that if a definition of a provincial paper were sought in New York the answer would be promptly forthcoming that all papers not published on the isle of Manhattan are provincial papers. If the definition should be asked of the papers published in the smaller cities the term provincial would be passed on down the line to include only the weekly press of the country. If the weekly papers were asked for an opinion they would promptly reply that the most provincial papers published are the New York papers and point out the fact in proof that the great daily 234 The Press Congress of the World papers in New York City have not yet discovered that the eigh- teenth amendment is a part of the constitution of the United States. We have thus a complete circle of definition and conclude at once it was a wise man who said that if a camel could define God his picture would show God with four legs and a hump. The definition of the provincial papers of the United States draws no distinct line of demarkation between cities or states. Provincial papers may be found among the largest papers of the cities of the world and papers which have lifted themselves out of the provincial class may be found in the smaller communities. We go back in the history of the United States more than three hundred years to find the first provincial paper, the first effort to establish a newspaper in this country. Boston was the birthplace and the date was 1689. The paper was called Publick Occurences Both Foreign and Domestic. It was a four page paper, pages about the size of the standard letter head in use today, one page blank. There were two columns to the page. Only one issue of this newspaper was published and as far as is known only one copy is now in existence and that is found on file in the state offices in London. The paper was suppressed by the government. The next venture in journalism in the United States was The Boston News Letter founded and published by John Camp- bell, postmaster of Boston. The affinity between the postoffice and the local newspaper has often been remarked and here we have our authority for the custom of appointing the editor to the postoffice. In announcing an enlargement of his paper John Campbell said, "This time twelve months we were thirteen months behind with foreign news and are now less than five months," and encour- aged his subscribers to remain faithful "until January next, life permitted, they will be accommodated with all the news of Eu- rope." The News Letter was the only paper published in the prov- inces for fifteen years and then came a tragedy. A change in the administration appointed another postmaster and the new post- master started another paper. John Campbell was greatly peeved to lose his job as postmaster and at the same time find his field Proceedings of the Congress 235 as editor also threatened and then began the first war between edi- tors, a war that has continued even unto this day. At the commencement of the Revolution in 1775 there were seven newspapers in Massachusetts, one in New Hampshire, two in Rhode Island, three in Connecticut, eight in Pennsylvania, three in New York, two each in Virginia, Maryland and North Carolina, three in South Carolina and one in Georgia, thirty-four in all. The development of the newspaper and the evolution from a small three-page paper printed once a month on a screw press, capable of producing about three hundred copies printed on one side in an hour, divides itself into three periods, up to the Civil War, the last quarter of the Nineteenth Century and to the pres- ent. From the beginning of the newspapers in the United States to the Civil War in 1865 and for ten years thereafter the progress was interminably slow. Processes of printing were such that papers were small in size and small in circulation and the cost of the white paper was almost prohibitive. Men of today will remember when a majority of the small papers were printed on the Washington hand press and the city papers were printed on a drum cylinder press to which steam power had been adjusted and the sheets fed separately for printing on one side at a rate not ex- ceeding one thousand an hour. The demand for daily papers could not be met. Stereotyping the forms was unknown. Print- ing from a roll was still in the future to be suggested from the method of manufacturing cotton cloth in rolls. All type was set by hand and the tramp printer flourished. Four pages was the usual size. Just one hundred years ago there were published in New York City eight daily newspapers with an aggregate circulation of ten thousand, eight hundred copies. None of these boasted of more than two thousand copies daily. Irl 1835 no paper in the country circulated more than five thousand copies daily and very few could show half that number. The first rapid folding machine attached to a press was shown at the centennial at Philadelphia in 1876. A writer in 1894 after describing the typesetting machines of that day told of the Mergenthaler and the Thome and ended his article with these words, "Most of the typesetting of the world is done by hand." 236 The Press Congress of the World Great circulations of individual papers were impossible until the last quarter of the nineteenth century. In this time the presses capable of printing by duplication as many copies as neces- sary for any circulation were perfected, the type setting machines made possible the composition and the price of news print paper dropped to a ridiculous figure. Before and during the Civil War news paper cost as high as twenty-two cents a pound. In 1864 it sold for sixteen cents a pound ; in 1873 at twelve and thirteen cents a pound, declining in 1875 to eight and fifty-three hundredths cents a pound, in 1880 to six and ninety-two hundredths and in 1890 to three and thirty-eight hundredths. In 1897 contracts for good paper delivered in large quantities in New York press rooms were made at one and five-tenths cents a pound. Telegraph and cable sprang into general newspaper use and the service became reasonably cheap and within reach. Followed a riot of cheap newspapers, many paged newspapers, and the scramble for large circulations, no matter how secured. From 1915 to the present brought another great change. The war taught the newspapers of this nation many things and has brought them to a better business basis and to a better and larger service. Every newspaper publisher is familiar with this phase of the newspaper development and the lessons which it taught. To many came the discovery that their business methods were bad. Advertising was developed to an extent unheard of and unex- pected. It was found that advertising had a distinct news value and the standards maintained in the editorial rooms were adopted in the advertising departments among the best papers. In the United States today, according to the American News- paper Directory, there are 22,373 publications sent out regularly from 10,894 towns, of this number 2,374 are published daily with a circulation of thirty-two million copies. The evening papers out- number the morning papers three to one. This means that one daily paper is printed every day for every three and one-fifth persons in the United States. In two states there is a daily paper for every one and one-tenth person living in those states. Missouri is third in the list. There are in the United States 150 cities of more than 50,000 population and from these cities are published 399 daily papers. There are 1,475 cities with a population of between 5,000 and Proceedings of the Congress 2hl 50,000, and, including the comparatively small number of daily papers published in cities of less than 5,000 population, there are 1,875 daily papers published in this group of cities and they cir- culate approximately 12,000,000 copies daily. Writing the story of newspapers of the United States in the late nineties Whitelaw Reid said, "The period since the war has been marked by the rapid development of local journalism throughout the United States. Nearly every city of 15,000 in- habitants must have its daily paper. A great business has grown up in the furnishing from some central city of ready printed sheets so that the local paper may have the news and literature and only need print at home one or two pages. Ready plates have also been a factor in the development of the small city daily." De- velopment of the small city daily since that time has been far greater than in all the years before. The small city daily is now printed on a perfecting press and buys its paper by the carload. It is set on type casting machines and every office has from two to five of these machines. It carries the Associated Press franchise and gives the news of the world on the same day that news is printed in the large cities. As a member of an organization which includes the daily papers of this class from seven states it was my privilege not long ago to look over the tabulated and classified report of the busi- ness and work of one hundred of these small city papers. In that list there were only two which failed to show a profit and the average profit revealed was fifteen per cent of the gross re- ceipts for the year for which the report was made. This group of small daily newspapers is a most powerful group because of ownership, method of management and per- sonal touch. The metropolitan daily is often a bulletin of the press news of the world and of the daily report of the courts. It treats news as news, impersonal and inexorable. The individual is submerged. This makes a wonderful news medium and it is bought as such. We often deplore the fact that we do not now have a Greeley or a Dana or Watterson ; picturesque, able, posi- tive and strong men. These figures have disappeared, not because there are no great and strong editors among the metropolitan papers today, but because the metropolitan paper has become a marvelous and complex business machine, pervading every field 238 The Press Congress of the World of endeavor, a great manufacturing plant, reaching to the tim- ber lands of the north for pulp, owning paper mills, requiring millions of dollars investment and employing thousands of men and women every day. Machines set the type and turn the presses and adjust the rolls and write the editorials and edit the copy and the whole is a vast commercialized business. In the days of Greeley, in the days of Dana and Watterson theirs were one man papers, provincial papers, if you please, papers with a soul and a purpose other than to carry the news of the world, like a phono- graph machine set on jazz records, to the minds of thousands of careless hurrying people who read today and occupy the mind tomorrow with the next day's news. In the smaller cities the daily paper is still a personal paper. The editor is known to everybody. He is supposed to know everything and what he does not know he suspects very strongly. He takes part in all of the activities of his city, readers point to an article and name the man who wrote it. The small daily paper has the soul, the personal touch. It is often noticed that in great campaigns all the big papers united fail to defeat a man for office. The provincial paper more often is successful. The small city daily often owns a congressman, makes a governor, defeats a senator. It is found like Greeley's Tribune, on the table with the family Bible, nowadays more often on the table from which the Bible may have been banished and bridge whist substituted. While a newspaper in a large city may find a sufficient clientage to make a financial success by dealing out only the sensational and the high spiced evil aroma of a salacious world, the news- paper in a smaller city can never make such a success. You will not find the rococo style of newspaper in the smaller cities. Nor yet the yellow journal. This style of paper can only thrive in cities large enough to provide a clientage. It appeals to the sen- sational and to the morbid and to the lawless. In the smaller city the percentage of such is so small that there is no room for a paper which is all gingerbread and froth. Something else is demanded and the newspaper instinct is that which senses the demand of its clientage and fills that demand. If it can not do this it can not survive. The only way to success is to establish a character which is recognized and which brings the faith and the confidence of the public. Proceedings of the Congress 239 Samuel Johnson once said, "It is a reproach not to have friends, it may be even a greater reproach not to have enemies." Nowhere is this truer than in the newspaper business of a small city. The newspaper man can not make a reputation for wisdom by going around with a solemn face and the chastened appearance of an undertaker at an open grave. He must take the knocks with a smile, sympathize with and help and stand always for the best things of his community and his country. His friends and his enemies are a part of the game. After a good many years in the newspaper business one comes almost to believe that he does not know very many things and is not quite certain about them. Yet, established in the afifections of his readers, they always want to know what he has to say about everything. The League of Nations, the conduct of the wars, the acts of congress, the building of cabinets, the election of candidates, must all be discussed and are thus passed on to those who think about such things. I remember very well when Colonel Roosevelt died. It was several days afterward and I had not printed an editorial about Roosevelt. I had printed edi- torials from other papers and comments upon the career of the great man who touched the life of our country in so many places and who was the typical American in the minds of very many. One day I met an old friend who reproached me. "Oh yes," he said, "you have printed what others have said, but we want you to say something yourself." I relate this incident to show how close we come to the lives and hearts of our readers and how careful we should be never to betray the trust, once we have it. Newspapers before the Revolution were not given to the ex- pression of comment and opinion. They were quite likely to be suppressed very quickly and Ben Franklin, still the patron saint of the printer, was among the few who had the independence and courage to express an opinion. His brother, James Franklin, be- fore him was put out of the newspaper business through a relig- ious discussion. Newspapers in the United States have struggled from the first for the right of free speech and a free press and have secured that right which is permitted to the point where it becomes license. Franklin believed in giving the people what they should have whether they wanted it or not. The highest art in the newspaper business is to give the read- 240 The Press Congress of the World ers what they should have in such a way that they will think it is exactly what they want. Experience and the survival of the fittest has taught lessons from which the small city paper draws success. About the ex- perience of years has been builded a code of ethics and a style of work. Perhaps it may be called an idealism. During the history of newspaper building from the time the first bulletin was etched on a piece of hardened clay in Egypt to the time of the multiple multiple press printing thousands of many paged papers from machine-set forms in a single hour, the owners have blazed their own trail. They found their own ethics and marked their own ways to success. It is only recently that Schools of Journalism have announced the theory that the principles of newspaper work may be taught successfully. The first of these schools was only established a dozen years ago, in the State of Missouri. Then there were sneers and jeers at the idea, now this has disappeared and other states have followed in line and the thinking men of the profes- sion indorse the idea whole-heartedly. This education and teaching of ideals has brought about an effort among groups of papers to formulate into words a code. These declarations have so far come only from the provincial papers, but have received the strong endorsement of the larger papers and world wide comment and approval. The foundation of such a code is the responsibility of the press to its public. The newspaper is the interpreter. Its busi- ness is to gather together and carry to the world the truth and its interpretation. A newspaper does not belong to its owner. It is a public service institution and is not fulfilling its highest functions if de- voted selfishly. As a fundamental principle it is agreed that the truth is the basis of all correct journalism. To go beyond the truth is a betrayal of trust. To suppress the truth when it properly belongs to the public is always to be condemned and never practiced. Control of news or comment for business considerations is •unworthy. News should be written, interpreted wholly and at all times in the interest of the public. Not only arc these principles to be applied to the news and LUDVIG SAXE (upper left), Christiania, Norway; IMAIIK (OMEN (upper right), Dumedix, New Zealand; THALE8 COUTOUPJS (l.Aver left), Atiien.s, Greece; VIRGILIO RODKIGLTEZ BETETA (lower right) Guatemala City, Guatemala. Proceedings of the Congress 241 editorials, but to the advertising columns. Deceptive or mis- leading advertisements or advertising disguised as news bring disrepute to the newspaper which permits such practice. It was a noted Frenchman who wrote "Suffer yourself to be blamed, imprisoned, condemned; suffer yourself even to be hanged, but publish your opinion. It is not a right, it is a duty." Dante wrote "Give light and the people will find their own way." This is the great duty of all newspapers whether they are published in the teeming centers of population or in the smallest community and if we agree, then it is manifest that any- thing which is permitted to blur the brilliancy of the light, or to sully the stream of truth should be shunned as a plague. No matter what may be our view of the origin of the Ten Commandments, whether we may believe or not the story as told in Exodus that this charter of our faith and practice was carved on the face of a great stone by God himself and delivered over to Moses, the principles there enunciated remain the same and the constitution upon which the progress of the human race to- ward civilization and light has stood for centuries, is still as firm as when first enunciated. Of miraculous conception or the con- densed expression of the experience of mankind reduced to words, the effect is the same. All codes of ethics are invariably based upon the teaching which is found in this charter and concentrated in a verse to be found in writing attributed to the prophet Micah : "What doth the Lord require of Thee, but to do justly, and to love mercy, and to walk humbly with thy God." Newspapers are the interpreters, the massage bearers in every printed page, the medium which gathers from every quarter the truth and the lights the torch for its perusal. Theirs is to break down the prejudices and the boundaries of class, to remove the barriers of ignorance and selfishness and to dissolve misunder- standing. This accomplished, armaments will disappear and war be banished. This is the mission and the burden of the newspapers of the world. To the end that this mission be accomplished I bring to you the message and the promise of the community news- paper, the provincial press. In all our strength and our every effort we stand with you who represent the press of every clime in the cause of high ideals and of world co-operation among the Press and the peoples of the earth. (Applause.) 16 242 The Press Congress of the World THE CHAIRMAN : This has been a splendid tribute to the village newspapers of the mainland of the United States. It closes the program for this afternoon. SIXTH SESSION. WEDNESDAY MORNING, OCTOBER 19, 1921. Congress was called to order at 9 o'clock. President Williams in the chair. THE SECRETARY : I have here some further messages of greeting. The first is from Mr. Gus J. Karger, Chairman of the Washington Correspondents, who says in part : We of the Fourth Estate are the men and women on the side lines and our part in the proceedings is to enforce the rules of fair play — fair play to the public by the players, and fair play to the players by the public. We live in an era of great movements and we must help to give them the proper direction as far as in our power lies. The Press Congress of the World may make of itself a strong instrument toward that end. With cordial regards and best wishes for the success of the Congress." The next is from Mr. xA.aron Watson of London: It would have been delightful to me to meet the representatives of the World's Press at Honolulu ; but, as there are circumstances which make it impossible for me to be present, it is a satisfaction to me to be- lieve that I have been of service to tliose who have brought about so re- markable an event, and to think that the meeting must have beneficial re- sults not only in promoting acquaintanceship among some of the leading journalists of the world — a good end in itself — but in extending public recognition of the common purpose and the high mission of journalism. The World's Press Congress is, in its own way, a League of Nations. The World's Press has an enormous, perhaps an excessive, power of pro- moting the same ends, or of impeding them. Those of us who have had a share in the work that has preceded the Honolulu Congress have liad our visions of a World's Press so far united in feeling and in purpose as to be undeviatingly on the side of the world's highest interests and as- pirations. So, indeed, may it be. Also one from Mr. T. W. Heney, Queensland, who says : I am satisfied that the peace and prosperity of the Pacific begins now to depend, under Providence, upon tlie frequent meeting of the chief public men, business men, journalists, literary men, teachers and educa- tionalists, including of course, women, of each country having a Pacific littoral. Whoever serves and helps that ideal is a good servant and true friend of the Pacific. THE CHAIRMAN: As the first speaker of the morning I have the privilege of presenting to you a man who has done more Proceedings of the Congress 243 than most men have done in behalf of better journahsm in the United States and throughout the world; a man whose publica- tion and personal service have been given withovit stint to the promotion of the profession of journalism: Mr. James Wright Brown, Editor of Editor and Publisher, New York City. MR. BROWN : Mr. President, Fellow Delegates of the Press Congress of the World: The Congress will readily agree with Mr. Thales Coutoupis that the "Press of the world must be free." Especially so of governmental and parliamentary control. Legit- imate public service by the press must not be interfered with. Indeed I am very strongly of the opinion that the members of the Congress here assembled believe that modern publicity has become a tremendous force which righteovisly administered will lift mankind on to higher ground for no problem is too big for an honest press to tackle. News and views are the raw material of public opinion and public opinion in a democracy is impelling and controlling. Mr. Coutoupis voiced his sincere regret because of the in- ability of the militant journalists to finance a new venture these high cost days without seeking financial aid and assistance of bankers and big advertisers. In this connection it may interest him to learn that one of our big newspaper concerns has started four new papers in the United States of America in the last four months — Fort Worth, Birmingham, Norfolk and Washington, D. C. — and plans to start thirteen new enterprises this year. The Scripps newspapers are evening six-day papers, so-called "People's papers." They begin in a small way with a very small force and few pages. They follow the budget system carefully. Advertisements are not so- licited for the first six months. No loans are soughi, enough money is deposited in bank to pay salaries and expenses the first year. If after a fair trial the paper is not making a profit, it is discontinued. There is absolutely no sentiment about it. The paper must be made to pay. The Scripps profit basis is about twenty per cent of gross receipts. The total volume of business of this organization last year amounted to about twenty- five million dollars. It may also be of interest to Mr. Coutoupis and some of the overseas delegates to learn that whereas the present Greek Gov- 244 The Press Congress of the World ernment is concentrating its advertising in the Royalist press, the American Government is using display space in American daily and weekly newspapers irrespective of political consideration to promote the interests of the Army and Navy and the Shipping Board, and the service has been quite satisfactory. We all agree, I'm sure, that the press should be used in far greater measure than at present to promulgate ideas. Scandals and crimes and so called crimson news, have occupied the col- umns of newspapers the world over since the signing of the armistice, to the exclusion of the live and vital international and domestic problems that must inevitably engage the attention of the thoughtful peoples of the world. With us in the States we have had the Hamon murder case, the Stillman divorce and the Arbuckle scandal all over our front pages for months past. Professional baseball and other sports have been given space out of all proportion to their importance. 1 for one have felt that this was just a natural and inevitable re- action from the goose-stepping of war days, just a passing phase, on the road to more militant public service by the press than ever before. "Facts ought to be kept holy," is the immortal phrase of Ludvig Saxe, of Norway. It should be emblazoned on the editorial walls of the world, but whilst we are in complete har- mony and sympathy with this ideal we must vigorously dissent to the sentiment quoted that "It does not pay to publish a clean newspaper as people want a shady one." American publishers are finding out that the clean, dependable, reliably accurate newspaper is the newspaper that wins and holds public confidence and sound financial support. It has been very clearly demonstrated in American journalism that character is the first essential to success. That the kept newspaper is usually kept as no one wants it. With Mr. Saxe's observations in re-advertising influence and control we are in hearty sympathy. There are many newspapers in the States dominated by the advertising department as referred to by Mr. Cohen and Mr. Saxe. On many of these newspapers the managing editor is merely a sort of an assistant advertising manager, but thank God, the pendulum is now swinging in the other direction and in the last analysis the total of such news- papers in the United States is a small percentage of the whole. Proceedings of the Congress 245 The whole is represented by two thousand five hundred and seventy-four newspapers, morning, evening and Sunday, having a net paid "A. B. C." circulation of forty-seven million copies. 432 Morning 10,000,000 Circulation 1606 Evening 18,500,000 536 Sunday 19,000,000 "A. B. C." circulation means that the circulation statements of newspaper publishers are semi-annually audited by the auditors of the Audit Bureau of Circulations, an organization maintained through the active interest and co-operation of all the publish- ing interests in the United States, magazines, newspapers, farm papers, advertisers and advertising agents, etc. This was an increase of circulation for these newspapers of more than two million copies during the year. The Bourne law adopted by the American Congress in 1912 contains many of the features emphasized by Mr. Coutoupis as altogether desirable. For example under the Bourne law American newspaper publishers must file semi-annually with the local postmaster a statement giving the names of the responsible editors and pub- lishers, managing editors, business managers, stockholders, own- ing more than one per cent of the capital stock, the bond holders, and the average net paid circulation of the newspaper for the preceding six months. This statement must be filed April 1 and October 1, each year, moreover it must be printed in the columns of said daily newspaper within five days of filing; however, there is no penalty for violating or false statement, but it is not neces- sary, as most of the newspapers find it distinctly to their ad- vantage to be a member of the "A. B. C." and make truthful, dependable statements of net paid circulations. Some newspapers in America are of the "fifth page" variety to which Mr. Saxe has referred, but the number is small and growing smaller. Most of our newspapers are of the class to which Mr. Saxe referred as "small and poor" confining advertising to advertising pages and consecratedly devoted to the public interest. Of course, we have papers of the immensely prosperous sort, making yearly profits after taxes in excess of one million dollars and one or two in the two million class but of the two thousand six hundred dailies and eleven thousand weekly newspapers in the United 246 The Press Congress of the World States of America, by far the vast majority are simply making a living for the owner a very modest living at that. They are honestly administered. Mr. Saxe spoke of the Master Craftsman turned out of a post because he refused to write that which he did not believe. All honor to him, which recalls to my mind the suggestion that I made some time ago that the Congress should have and main- tain a welfare committee for the aid and assistance of all such worthy brothers. Messrs. Coutoupis and Saxe agree that we must raise the ethical standards if we are to inspire a greater devotion to the public interest. Mr. Sugimura raises the question "what should be the stand- ard of value? All of which suggests to my mind the need for an international code of ethics or an international Standard of Practice that would be at all times available for the pressmen of the world. To this end I suggest the appointment of an ad interim commit- tee whose duty it should be to give these questions careful and painstaking study in order that the whole profession of journal- ism throughout the world may be served in a big way. I have not deemed it either wise or expedient to discuss in this presence the historical background of the fight that has been waged in the last three hundred years for freedom of speech and of the press. In the United States in recent months there have been three attempts made to discipline and control the utterances of news- papers. The attempt of Postmaster General Burleson to discipline the New York Socialist daily, the Call, for criticism of Governmental policies by the withdrawal of the second class privilege. The ten million dollar suit of the City of Chicago filed against the Chicago Tribune and the Chicago Daily News. The suit is for defamation and libel. The articles upon which the suit is based consists of some thirty-five in number running into dif- ferent publications over a series of three months. The series are not in serial form ; they are detached publications, not refer- ring one to another in any way. They allege that the city is bankrupt, the streets of the city are filled with dust and dirt. Proceedings of the Congress 247 the moral conditions constitute a serious menace against women and children, etc. There is only one similar suit to it in the whole history of jurisprudence. That was a suit filed more than a hun- dred years ago, by the city of Manchester against a local paper. The attempt of Mayor Hylan of New York City to influence the merchants of the great city to withdraw their advertising from some of the daily newspapers that dared to criticise the Mayor and point out to their readers the prevalence of crime. I have not given much thought in this brief talk to a discus- sion of the historical background of the fight for freedom of speech and of the press with all of which the members of the Congress are more or less familiar. But in answer to the query as to the necessity and desirability of freedom of the press, I should like to quote to you three master craftsmen and advocates of other days. John Milton, who, in 1643, indignant over the shameful at- tempts to rob the press of its rights, and stirred to the very depths of his soul by the indignities heaped upon the heads of those who dared lift up their voices against the abuse of power by the Government, wrote the most forceful and convincing argument for the liberty of the press that had been written up to that time, and which is still regarded as a masterly presentation of the sub- ject. Milton declared that if printing was to be regulated then all recreations and pastimes, all that is delightful to man, must be regulated. "Give me the liberty to know, to utter, and to argue freely according to conscience above all (other) liberties," he said, "For who knows not that Truth is strong, next to the Almighty; she needs no policies, nor stratagems, nor licensings to make her victorious. Those are the shifts and defences that Error uses against her power. A free country without the Liberty of the Press is a contradiction of terms ; it is free slavery or unchained liberty." A hundred years later Lord Thomas Erskine, whom Lord Campbell in his "Lives of the Chancellors," pronounced "with- out equal in ancient or modern times as an advocate in the Forum," declared that "men cannot communicate their free thoughts to one another with a lash held over their heads. Genius breaks from the fetters of criticism. Subject it to the critic and you tame it into dullness. 248 The Press Congress of the World "The press," he continues, ",must be free ; it has always been so and much evil has been corrected by it. If government finds itself annoyed by it, let it examine its own conduct and it will find the cause ; let it amend it and it will find the remedy. "A free and unlicensed press, in the great and legal sense of the expression, has led all the blessings, both of religion and government, which Great Britain or any part of the world at this moment enjoys, and is calculated still further to advance mankind to higher degrees of civilization and happiness. Gov- ernment, in its own estimation has been at all times a system of protection ; but a free press has examined and detected its errors and the people from time to time reformed them. The more men are enlightened the better they will be qualified to be good subjects of a good Government." William Ellery Channing, the Unitarian clergyman who dur- ing the early days of the last century, was one of the most elo- quent opponents of slavery in America and an ardent defender of the liberty of the press, declared : "Fredom of opinion, of speech and of the press is our most valuable privilege, the very soul of republican institutions, the safeguard of all other rights. Nothing awakens and improves man so much as the free communication of thoughts and feel- ings. If men abandon free discussion ; if , awed by threats, they suppress their convictions ; if rulers succeed in silencing every voice but that which approves them; if nothing reaches the people but what would lend support to men in power then farczvell to liberty; the form of a free government may remain, but the life, the soul, the substance is fled." In my humble judgment this freedom of the press may best be attained and safeguarded by the publication of more accurate and dependable newspapers righteously administered in the pub- lic interest. An international code of ethics and standard of practice would aid and assist materially in bringing this about. The following is President Williams' Creed: Tlie Journalist's Creed. I believe in the profession of journalism. I believe that the public journal is a public trust ; that all connected willi it are, to the full measure of their responsibilitj', trustees for the Proceedings of the Congress 249 public; that acceptance of lesser service than the public service is betrayal of this trust. I believe that clear thinking and clear statement, accuracy and fairness, are fundamental to good journalism. I believe that a journalist should write only vi^hat he holds in his heart to be true. I believe that suppression of the news, for any consideration other than the welfare of society, is indefensible. I believe that no one should write as a journalist what he would not say as a gentleman; that bribery by one's own pocketbook is as much to be avoided as bribery by the pocketbook of another ; that individual re- sponsibility may not be escaped by pleading another's instructions or an- other's dividends. I believe that advertising, news and editorial columns should alike serve the best interests of readers; that a single standard of helpful truth and cleanness should prevail for all; that the supreme test of good journalism is the measure of its public service. I believe that the journalism which succeeds best — and best deserves success — fears God and honors man ; is stoutly independent, unmoved by pride of opinion or greed of power ; constructive ; tolerant but never care- less ; self-controlled, patient, always respectful of its readers but always unafraid; is quickly indignant at injustice; is unswayed by the appeal of privilege or the clamor of the mob ; seeks to give every inan a cliance and, as far as law and honest wage and recognition of human brotherhood can make it so, an equal chance ; is profoundly patriotic while sincerely promoting international good will and cementing world-comradeship, is a journalism of humanity, of and for today's world. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : The second speaker of the inorning is Mr. F. P. Glass, of the United States, about whom I said some good things yesterday, which remain true today. MR. GLASS: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: The subject assigned to me by your worthy President is "Tendencies in Present Day Journalism." You will recognize at once that it is a big assignment. Tendencies are as numerous and varied as the eyes of observers. "Present day" may be interpreted very broadly. And the title might be construed to include the news- papers of other cotmtries than the United States. In this paper the attempt will be made to treat the subject in a common-sense way. Not all tendencies will be enumerated — the outstanding ones will be picked out. The "present-day" out- look must be dependent upon developments of recent years. And while references may be made to the newspapers of other coun- 250 The Press Congress of the World tries, there will be no attempt at analysis of their tendencies. 1 shall also speak mainly of daily papers. Probably it may be instructive to give you some of the facts as to the personal experiences which unavoidably must be behind tiiis paper. The writer has been connected with four papers in Alabama. Just out of Princeton University he started a country weekly forty years ago, merely interrupting the study of law for that supposed temporary undertaking. The fascinating quality of printer's ink got its grip on him, and in a year's time he bought control of a daily in Selma, then a city of 10,000. Four years later he moved to Montgomery, the State capital, assuming the general management of The Montgomery Advertiser, one of the Oldest morning dailies in the South. There he was in associa- tion with one of the noted editors of the historic South, Major William Wallace Screws, who was for fifty years its directing spirit. He was an editor of the fine traditional Southern type of the school of John Forsyth and Henry Watterson. He steadily pressed me into service in political campaigns as editorial assistant, for while he was the sweetest of men, he believed it a newspaper's duty to fight vigorously for honest govermnent and high-class men as officials. Then after twenty- five years' association with such a wise and noble mentor, I was induced to take an interest in The Birmingham News, an evening paper, in the great industrial center of the South. For five years my time was divided each week between duties as general man- ager of the Montgomery morning paper and as editor of the Birmingham evening paper. Later, time and interest were con- centrated at Birmingham. For a year I have been out of news- paperdom altogether. It will be seen that such training from the old-time cases of a country weekly through dailies in three cities of different sizes, surroundings and ideals at first, amid the trying conditions of the South following the period of reconstruction and then in its later astonishing industrial development, would tend to develop a sort of progressive-conservative in journalistic ideals. And I think that has been the result. I have always revered the essential soundness of the traditional Southern newspaper in its consistent devotion to constitutional principles and its fearless advocacy of honor and honesty in public life. I have always been Proceedings of the Congress 251 receptive of new ideas and perhaps too quick to respond to pro- gressive methods in newspaper conduct. Necessity has forced me into work at various times in all departments of a newspaper — mechanical, circulation, advertising, reportorial, desk work, ed- itorial writing and general management. While I had the ad- vantage of a college education, schools of journalism, where the lessons of past newspaper experience and the best methods of special equipment are taught, were unknown in my youth. What little I have learned about the gigantic task of journalism has come from active masters and from hard knocks, some of which frequently laid me out flat in more ways than one. But enough of preliminaries. Let us go to the subject. What are the conspicuous tendencies in present-day journalism? There has been abundant public discussion of the subject in the last year especially, and there are conflicting views. Nat- urally there have been great changes going on in newspapers in our rapidly growing country in the last generation, and these changes have been crystallized, or made more noticeable, in the last few years of world war and world readjustment. There has been much materialistic growth and hence considerable pessimism in the criticism of unavoidable changes. There have been also of late extraordinary difficulties and abnormal problems for pub- lishers in print paper and labor conditions, as well as for editors. There has been a period of transition, and not all the results of the different factors in the manifest evolution are clear and in- disputable. Probably the most conspicuous change in newspapers in recent years has been towards breadth and strength of business con- duct. To one who has attended annually the sessions of the American Newspaper Publishers Association for more than twenty-five years, this is very apparent. Of course, there have been dailies in the largest cities for many years which were ably managed and profitable. But in the period named the business of publishing has been systemized all over the country, and there are now hundreds of papers that are models in a business way. They have efficient organizations, with various depart- ments, mechanical, circulation, advertising, auditing, which are capably manned and harmoniously functioning in team work. The net result may be told in one simple statement. In 1880 252 The Press Congress of the World the newsprint consumption of this country was three pounds per capita; in 1919 it was thirty-three pounds per capita. Naturally with this wide-spread business development of news- papers there has been an undue emphasis upon the part that the business organizations have played in the outcome. The cir- culation manager has been credited with it, the advertising man- ager has glorified himself on account of it, the business manager has been pufifed up with big claims and bigger salaries, the pub- lisher has too frequently become the chief owner and has arro- gated to himself the airs of a genius, a Napoleon of finance. Too often, it must be admitted, have newspapers deteriorated into mere factories for the production of advertising space, and too frequently great space merchants have imagined that they were born journalists. Sometimes these space merchants have decided that the counting house downstairs was the dynamo of their es- tablishments, instead of the brains and the souls of the men of vision upstairs who handled the news of the world and inter- preted it so effectively that circulators and advertising men were enabled to sell the papers and the space profitably. One incident of this too common elevation of the space mer- chant to power has been the charge of control of papers by in- terests, of their failure to print the news, all the news, the real facts of vital interest to the public. This has led frequently to cynical distrust of newspapers, and sometimes to arguments that papers have lost their influence. In the last few years the suc- cess of candidates for mayor in some of the largest cities, in spite of the opposition of all the local papers, has been cited as proof of this alleged degeneration of the press. And in con- nection with this argument there have been allegations of con- ditions from important sources which have been alarming. One of these allegations was made by a dry goods trade pub- lication a few months ago. Substantially it was that there ex- isted a close working arrangement between editorial and business offices. There have been frequent charges that department stores suppressed the publication of news injurious to them. And yet stronger indictments have been brought against newspapers by editors of national repute. Mr. Charles Grant Miller, formerly of the Cleveland Plain Dealer, the Christian Herald and t!ie Scripps-McRae League, in a series of signed articles in The Proceedings of the Congress 253 Editor and Publisher, has been especially vigorous in denouncing the system of publicity work done for great corporations, banks and statesmen all over the country by capable ex-newspaper men. He has said this : Propaganda and puffery, double-cooked news and predigested opinion are sapping the life blood of America's newspapers. For five years there has been a world-wide famine in facts. Truth, the whole truth and nothing but the truth about anything of grave public interest seems to have dis- appeared from the face of the earth. Date lines are no longer the signs of the real source of the news. Assertion is little indication of the truth. Most of the foreign news is strained through the foreign loan centers of Wall Street, and where all the rest of the world-full of interested, if not interesting, misinformation comes from, the Lord only knows. Even so eminent an editor as Frank Cobb, of the New York World, probably the ablest, most virile editorial writer on the American press, lately protested against the terrific volume of propaganda and colored news, termed in newspaper vernacular "hand-outs." He is reported as having said in an address that the press was "exhausted" by the war, that "the war did more to debauch journalism than anything that has ever happened." He deplored the system of censorship that was used as a war neces- sity, and spoke of its spread into all channels of information. Inside censorship has unquestionably gained too much of a grip on too many news sources, official, public and private. He re- grets that the use of censorship through hired publicity men has been accepted and permitted too much by newspaper editors. One writer has called this stereotyped publicity the "hook-worm of journalism." There can be no question that this program has become too general. Hired publicity men are too common in the highest circles at Washington. It is estimated that there are 1,200 in New York alone. They are common in all the smaller cities of the country. This system has a two-fold injurious influence. Not only does it generally repress and restrict the sources of news, but it also tempts with high salaries capable, progressive news- paper men out of great usefulness and bright futures into com- fortable, but dwarfing and semi-paralyzing sinecures. Let us move on to the consideration of other tendencies in latter-day and present journalism that are more perceptible and perhaps more permanent. There has taken place a great change 254 The Press Congress of the World in the general type of newspapers, in respect to their news con- duct. It has not been many years since it was the ambition and the undertaking- of the daily papers to print all the news, or as much of it as their growing incomes could afford. The older news- paper men here will recall the period when such metropolitan papers as The New York World, The New York Herald, The Chicago Tribune, The St. Louis Globe Democrat, and others like them in Boston, Philadelphia, Baltimore and Cincinnati were daily epitomes of all the happenings of the world and especially of our own country. They were very full and complete news- papers, with wide-awake correspondents in every state and in every city of consequence, as well as in many parts of the world. You could find every news happening of consequence in a par- agraph or a stick or two, or more, as its importance dictated. Efforts for national circulation were common, and heavy expenses undertaken for special fast trains to get general circulation with the splendid feast of general news. Rapidly all that plan of newspaper making has changed. How many papers of that type remain? Very few, of which perhaps The New York Times is the nearest approximation. The purpose of publishers and the program of managing editors has been trans- formed into getting local news, into playing it up in big space with large headlines. Even during the Great War the process went on. Big battles had the first claim in the make-up, but local news was not squeezed off the first page. Today in the majority of daily offices the country over a sensational divorce suit in high local society, or a particularly revolting crime in the neighborhood, is considered worth the best talent in handling and the most conspicuous space in the make-up. Even the great news associations have yielded to this pressure, as illustrated in the recent Arbuckle case. This change of standpoint as to the relative value of news has reached the smaller cities of the country, because their news- paper managers and managing editors keep close watch on metropolitan tendencies. In how few papers is the bulk of the splendid Associated Press report printed? In many offices it is used as a mere index to news, by which perhaps to order specials, while the mass of it comes from too far away to consume space, and so it is thrown aside. Proceedings of the Congress 255 What has been the cause of this remarkable and not alto- gether desirable transformation in news valuation? It is the imperative requirement of the business office for local circula- tion. The advertising manager demands it. The fierce compe- tition between two or more dailies in every city for the larger volume of advertising space has long ago distorted the vision of publisher and managing editor. The circulation man finds that the public eats up the local news, especially if it has a sen- sational quality, and so the drive is made on all hands to please the public, to beat the other fellow in local circulation, and to get the record in advertising. There is where the modern business system of the news- papers has yielded too much to the spirit of commercialism. Full incomes and good profits are desirable things, of course, but principle and service should not be timidly subordinated to profit. Is it not true frequently that the high function of the paper as a teacher and a leader is forgotten in the greed for income and profit? Furthermore, is it not undesirable education for the people that the important daily developments of progress and material advancement all over the land and the world should be minimized or neglected in order to pander to a depraved taste for the sensational and salacious? Cannot large circulations be gained and held by all papers, as in the case of some, through the provision of the better class of news written intelligently and handled tastefully? Take The Christian Science Monitor, of Boston, for instance. Its name is largely a misnomer — it is not nearly so much a denominational organ as an excellent news- paper, with news well chosen and well written. In this connec- tion it may be said that no purely religious daily has ever suc- ceeded, because such undertakings have been too dull and heavy There has lately been another example of failure of such a publication in Chicago. The highest sort of newspaper conduct and success will re- quire working forces with more brains and better eilucation. And is not the supply of that sort of forces becoming constantly more available through the various schools of journalism — which are springing up in all parts of the country? The more news- paper men of high ideals and of broad education and .special equipment who are turned out, the surer the uplift m the evolu- tion of newspapers and of their conduct. 256 The Press Congress of the World Another marked tendency in present day journalism is the wide-spread effort to make daihes and weeklies with a super- weight of magazine features and diversified attachments. No longer is the printing of the news the chief concern of the enter- prising publisher and of the alert managing editor. The supply of sensational local news is apparently not steady and ample enough to hold the attention of the feverish reader, whose taste has been more or less perverted, and so he must be entertained every day, as well as Sunday, with all sorts of stories, features, comic illustrations, etc. One recent advertisement of a daily in a city of less than 250,000 has stated that it was expending about $75,000 a year for features. Just think of it — about $1,500 a week for material that is not news, probably much more than all of that paper's news services and specials are costing! Now no one is prepared to condemn features by wholesale. They are valuable in attracting certain classes of readers and getting home circulation. Yet it cannot be denied that the feature business is being overdone by many papers. They are thoughtlessly educat- ing their readers away from an appreciation of their prime func- tion of "printing all the news that is fit to print," of furnishing the public with all the important facts of daily happenings, not merely of local occurrence, but of national movements, scientific progress, industrial uplift, etc. In this connection, is to be com- mended the recent endowment of the late Mr. Scripps of the Scripps-McRae League, of an institution to gather scientific news and put it into available form for newspaper use. News of that sort is sure to be far more useful and profitable to farm- ers, laborers, manufacturers and merchants than most of the criminal news and some of the frivolous diversions termed fea- tures. But will it not make for higher journalism and more at- tractive papers, if much of the full appropriations for features were diverted to the salaries of low paid desk men and reporters ? Would it not be a better trend in journalism to turn back to the old standards of The New York Sun, under Dana, Laffan and Chester Lord? There dozens of thoroughly educated men were trained into rewriting all news matter into clear, terse, com- pact English. Some of the force could take a busy reporter's stick story and expand it into a half column gem of a human in- Proceedings of the Congress 257 terest story far more entertaining than the most attractive gen- eral feature, because it was about facts of yesterday, and not fiction of last month or last year. In this connection it may be well to consider one of the con- trasts of British journals with our own. Many of the English and Scottish dailies may not be as newsy, as enterprising, as bright, as those on this side ; but in some respects they are more excellent. For the most part they are scholarly, well written, and quite thorough in the news treatment of all subjects of pub- lic interest. The greater papers have large staffs of men who are broadly educated and who are ready authorities on all up- permost issues. They receive handsome salaries, even though in many cases they do not give all their time to their papers. The consequence is that all leading questions are discussed in the most illuminating way. Frequently there are signed articles by staff men giving opposite viewpoints. The reader is always in- formed, his mind clarified, his judgment assisted, his thinking made more accurate, his decision more positive. Sometimes the British papers may be charged with heaviness, but rarely with superficiality or ignorance or unfairness. And a strong feature of British papers is their steady follow-up from day to day of all large questions. It seems quite natural, therefore, to dignify many of the British dailies with the title of "journals." Among the papers of the type described are The London Times, The London Telegraph, The Manchester Guardian, The Edinburgh Scotsman, and The Glasgow Herald. The mention of foreign journals brings up another recent development in our papers on this side. The Great War has brought about a wide-spread interest in foreign news. The problems of peace, and our own direct interest in their solution, has aroused a tremendous appreciation of new events in Europe, China and Japan. Our papers are printing columns of real cables from England, France, Germany and Italy. The Asso- ciated Press' foreign service has been greatly amplified because of this new interest in what our recent allies and antagonists are doing, politically and commercially. Furthermore, special news services are now springing up to interpret and analyze foreign news from an American standpoint, so that the average American reader can weigh facts intelligently. 17 258 The Press Congress of the World One of the best of these special interpretations comes from the pen of the foreign news editor of The New York World, Mr. Eugene Young. Another noticeable development in American journalism is the illustrated daily. The Illustrated News of New York has quickly attained a circulation of about half a million. It is surprising that this development has not come before now, be- cause in London there are two very successful dailies made up mainly of illustrations of news events. The London Mirror has a circulation of over a million and is a great money maker for its chief owner. Another very successful English illustrated daily paper is The London Sketch. It may interest you as a piece of newspaper gossip in New York to hear that several of the big dailies in the metropolis and Boston are about to start tabloid sections, or issues, made up mainly of news event pic- tures. Another marked development in dailies in recent years has been the large amount of space given to sports. This is com- mendable in the main, because it helps build human strength and sanity. But probably too much space has been given to profes- sional baseball, which is a great business and not always a clean business. There is no more justice in the free advertising of the business of the baseball magnates than there would be in similar gratuities to department stores. In another respect newspapers have made great advances — in the fullness, promptness and accuracy of their market reports. These help the farmer, the merchant, the housewife. But here again, as in baseball, there has been a sort of slop-over, in the extensive reports of pure stock gambling and that of other ex- changes, where private business, frequently dishonest, has been helped, to the detriment of masses of unsuspecting Iambs. There is an outstanding fact in present-day American journal- ism, which is to a large extent the result of the systematic busi- ness development of newspapers. There are very few great editorial figures nowadays. Mr. Henry Watterson, one of the greatest editors the world has produced, recently said this in a magazine article: "The old system of personal journalism having gone out and the new system of counting-room journalism having not quite yet reached a full realization of itself, the ed- Proceedings of the Congress 259 itorial function seems to have fallen into a lean and slippered state. Too often the counting room takes no supervision of the editorial room beyond the immediate selling value of the paper the latter turns out. Things upstairs are left at loose ends. The personal element eliminated, why may not the impersonal head of the coming newspaper, proud of his profession and satisfied with the results of his ministrations, render yet better account to God and the people in unselfish devotion to the common in- terest ?" It will be seen that the great editor's optimism has not faded away as his years are added, but that he has faith in the right evolution of the newspaper in spite of the present-day weaknesses. More despairing is the utterance of another writer on that phase of present-day journalism. Mr. Bruce Calvert lately wrote this: "There aren't many editors left now anyway. The editor in America belongs to a fast disappearing species. He will soon be extinct. The day of the great editors, men of personality and power, leaders in national affairs, is actually dead and gone. I asked a well read man recently to name three great editors, just 3 out of 25,000 — men with soul, insight, courage, men with the sublime vision to inspire the thought of a great people — just three who could stand alongside of such editors and in- tellectual giants of the past as Greeley, Dana, Watterson, Hal- stead, McMichael, the older Bennett, Bullitt, Medill, Nelson, Story, McCullagh, McClure, Piatt and Reid, and my friend could not do it." He argued that commercial corporations were dominating newspapers and had dispensed with great personalities at their head. His view is that the controlling policy of such papers is not "Is it right?" but "Will it pay?" All of this is depressing and discouraging. While there may be for the time considerable truth in the allegations that there are few great editors in the public eye, it cannot be denied that their souls go marching on in the splendid structures they builded when living and working. And, what is still better, I believe their spirits yet animate the majority of newspaper workers, who are toiling away inconspicuously in their great machines to make them living things and to make the world a better place to live in. 260 The Press Congress of the World In this connection you will be pleased to know that Frank Cobb of The New York World, M^hom I have already quoted as uttering a pessimistic note about "hand-outs" and publicity propaganda, holds a decidedly optimistic view by and large. He has lately said : "I have never known a first-class newspaper man who would not print the news, if he knew it was true. In the long run the newspaper can't be much better or worse than the community in which it circulates. On this question of integrity I believe that whatever are the faults of our newspapers, they are on a higher plane of integrity than any other journalism in the world." It so happens that I can quote a less partisan authority on that point than the New York editor. In November, 1918, I had the honor as one of the newspaper guests of the British Gov- ernment to sit at a newspaper dinner in London, given by Vis- count Burnham of The Telegraph. I was seated alongside of one of Britain's greatest statesmen and scholars, Hon. Arthur J. Balfour, then Minister for Foreign Affairs. It was the night following the signing of the Armistice, and the subject of con- versation turned upon the coming Paris Peace Conference. I was asking him some rather impudent questions, extenuating my boldness with the statement that he must have discovered on his long visit to Washington the previous winter just how bold American newspaper men could be. The great man, who is kindliness personified, showed his breadth and faith by this re- ply : "Yes, I met many of them in Washington. They always knew just what they wanted, and proceeded to ask for what they wanted. I talked to them with unusual frankness, not al- ways for publication, and I can truthfully say that not one of them ever took advantage of my confidence which is more than I can say of some of their British colleagues in my experiences here." Of course, these high testimonials are as to the character of individual newspaper workers, and not as to the quality of de- pendability of newspapers as impersonal quantities. But what is true of the mass of individual newspaper men of America, as to their respect for truth and their regard for confidence, must be reflected in the conduct of the newspapers they play such a large part in making. They and the rising army of newspaper Proceedings of the Congress 261 men, their coming colleagues and successors, are the great up- lifting force which must minimize the trend of commercialism that has been too manifest of late. They and you must play a great part in the complete restoration of the free play of pub- lic opinion, which can be possible only through a faithful search for the whole truth and its fearless publication. If it is at all true, as lately written by an authority, that "Every edition of every paper is tinctured with lies, and every sensible editor knows it, and at heart is sick about it, and that he cannot see how to help it," then what a splendid field is open to the coming crop of reporters and newspaper men to reform the newspapers of the land? But no matter how dark the picture that may be painted by some discouraged idealists, who have too short a perspective, or who have distorted specific short-comings into sweeping gen- eralizations, there are many, many great newspapers which are still dominated by high ideals of unselfish devotion to the public welfare. It is a fact that no great newspaper, no important newspaper, even if not frequently in the national eye, was ever established, built into public confidence and into financial success save through the broad brain and the true soul of some one strong man. When Shakespeare wrote, "The evil that men do lives after them The good is oft interred with their bones." he had not seeA The London Times, whose great office now stands on the site of one of the playhouses where doubtless those words may have been first uttered. The great British editors who made it have established what Northcliffe calls "an institution," which he told me once "he dared not change." Nor had Shakespeare dreamed of the great development of modern journalism, and the hundreds of concrete contradictions of his words. The great work of many an unselfish editor lives on. He built his brain, his character, in many cases his very blood, through years of toil and service, into the very fibre of his newspaper, and in most cases the papers can't outgrow that influence, no matter how careless or thoughtless may be their latter-day count- ing-house domination. The tradition persists from year to year through successions of desk men and reporters, and like Ban- quo's ghost "will not down." 262 The Press Congress of the World Take, for instance, the spirit and life work of that great journalistic figure. Col. W. R. Nelson of The Kansas City Star, whom all younger newspaper men respected. The slogan of his management, constantly repeated to his force, is thus reported: "Remember this : The Star has a greater purpose in life than merely to print the news. It believes in doing things. I can employ plenty of men merely to write for the paper. The successful reporter is the one who knows how to get results by working to bring about the thing he is trying to do." The spirit of the elder Bennett, one of the very first fearless newsgatherers and publishers, so persisted that The New York Herald, after years of later control and adhesion to old-time methods had resulted in a losing property, has been sold to Mr. Munsey for four million dollars. It was largely the elder Bennett's character and The Herald's tradition of printing the facts that brought that price. The New York Tribune was made a great paper by that fearless truth teller, Horace Greeley, who was one of the great moulders of national opinion and the chief creator of the Repub- lican party. Whitelaw Reid was a worthy later successor, with more polish, and though The Tribune sufifered for a period the lack of a strong steering hand, its soul persisted and latterly the paper is reasserting its pristine vigor and usefulness. The New York World was founded as a religious daily in 1860, but was soon turned into a secular paper because of finan- cial troubles. Manton Marble put his brain and soul into it, though not a strong business man. Joseph Pulitzer, who had demonstrated his journalistic genius at St, Louis, took hold of The World and in a few years in the fierce struggle of metropol- itan journalism built into it his fearlessness, his love of free- dom, his devotion to the public welfare. It has long been one of the finest newspaper properties in the country and still ad- heres to his principles and purposes. Yet he is reported to have said frequently that he never spent an hour in the busi- ness office. He reasoned that if he voiced the opinions and the aspirations of Lincoln's "plain people," the business office would take care of itself, that men could always be found competent to look after the outgo and income. Pulitzer was a pugnacious journalist, always trying to enforce his views. He built his life's blood into his paper, and his spirit persists. Proceedings of the Congress 263 The New York Times had built into it more than two gen- erations ago the brain and soul of Raymond. After his death it accomplished a great achievement for New York in the de- thronement of the Tweed Ring. Steadily, however, it went down in a business way, so that when Adolph Ochs, a comparatively unknown provincial newspaper man, took hold, its losses were several thousand dollars a week. He built upon the foundations and traditions of Raymond, and for years The Times has been one of the most prosperous journals of the country, and in many respects the most complete newspaper, with probably a wider diffused national circulation than any other daily. The list might be prolonged, to include papers in Boston, Philadelphia, Springfield, Chicago, St. Louis, Charleston, Rich- mond, New Orleans, Montgomery, Nashville, Louisville. Their names would be legion, if all could be listed in which some in- dividual's life, character and brain, have been slowly but surely and permanently built into newspapers. That is the explanation of why so many newspapers have extraordinary vitality, why some of them survive periods of bad management. It takes time to build character into a man. It requires time and struggle to build character into a newspaper. That is one of the chief reasons why old established newspapers so frequently defy the onslaughts of younger papers with more money. It takes much more than brains and money to establish newspapers— it requires character, soul, vision, sacrifice. And the structure has the permanency of the rock that withstands all storms. In summing up let me fortify my optimism as to the general healthy trend of newspaperdom by a summary of a round-table discussion at a dinner given in February to Harold B. Johnston, editor of The Watertown (N. Y.) Times by that admirable newspaper man, Mr. Herbert F. Gunnison of The Brooklyn Eagle, one of the best, most public spirited and constructive papers in the whole country. There were a number of notable news- paper figures at that dinner, and The Editor and Publisher stated this as a summary of the ideas developed: "The daily newspapers of the country have not retrograded, notwithstanding the charges to this efifect that have been brought against them, but have made progress since the day of Greeley, Bennett, Raymond and Dana. They do not mould public opin- 264 The Press Congress of the World ion as they did in the days of those famous journalists, but rather they crystallize it. Instead of doing the thinking of the masses, they encourage people to do their own thinking by fur- nishing them all kinds of information on public questions and urging them to form their own conclusions. "The editorial page is of better average quality. Personal vituperation between editors is no longer indulged in, except in rare cases. Bitter partisanship has been replaced by tolerance or rather a desire to be fair and just to those who belong to the opposing party." It is probably true that while editorial influence has been lessened by greater education of the masses, who seek facts and do more of their own reasoning from the facts, that the general influence of newspapers is greater. It must be admitted, too, that there has been too much at- tention paid to the trend of dailies in the greater cities, and too little to the bulk of papers in the smaller cities and towns. And furthermore there are the thousands of country weeklies throughout the land, which have been little observed and con- sidered in the aggregate study of newspaper tendencies. If it is true that the average paper is no better, no worse, than the community in which it circulates, should it not be admitted that the bulk of the papers, whether daily or weekly, printed in the smaller towns, are of higher moral tone and more devoted to the public welfare, because of the relative purity of their en- vironment and their lesser temptation to go ofif after false gods of sensationalism and interested influence? It is frequently said at Washington that the average Congressman is far more sen- sitive to the views and wishes of the small dailies and weeklies read by his constituency than to the thunders of the great dailies of his own State or of the greatest cities. In conclusion allow me to assure my auditors of journalistic experience that all the good papers have not been in the past, that there is evolution upward still going on, and abundant room at the top for any of them who has the will to make the way. And to the large number of younger men, who are starting in all sorts of newspaper work, let me say that never before has there been so rich a harvest opening out for educated brains, il- lumined souls and trained hands. Please remember that the Proceedings of the Congress 265 greatest of newspaper men began as printers and reporters, that competent reporting is the very foundation of successful news- paper work — the very highest function of journaHsm. They should perfect styles of clear, terse, forceful English. They should equip their minds with an adequate understanding of the psychology of men, of their human nature, so as to approach all sorts in the effective way to get the truth, the essential facts. Their memory should be filled with all the knowledge possible of sound economics and of history. And, above all, all of us should sweeten our souls with faith in the progress of all things, and train our spirits into the habit of vision. Thus you will make of yourselves powers in your lands to neutralize all low ten- dencies in journalism and to preserve, strengthen and mature all the good work which has been started by the giants of the past. Then we will serve our time, our countries, as well as bring happiness, success and honor to ourselves. (Loud applause). THE CHAIRMAN : You have heard the strong and thought- ful address by Mr. Glass. It is now our privilege to hear from another representative of the United States, a dweller in Hono- lulu, who has done distinguished public service in other fields of action as well as in journalism. Colonel Riley H. Allen, of the ^ Star-Bulletin. COLONEL ALLEN : Those of you who were not here at the opening of this session missed to my mind one of the finest things I have heard said, when the Chairman asked speakers today to cut out all unnecessary details from their speeches. That to me was a real privilege because the first day I came out here I heard a comparatively long paper by Mr. Tong covering most of what I have to say. I came out yesterday afternoon to hear Mr. McClatchy on "Communications" and that enabled me to cut about half of the remainder of my paper out after hearing his talk. After hearing Mr. Glass this morning and Mr. Brown I will touch only on some of the high points, and make my talk rather short. Mr. Chairman, Delegates to the Press Congress of the World, Ladies and Gentlemen: Hawaii has an interest in a real free- dom of the press as keen as that of any other part of the world ; 266 The Press Cu ngress of the TForld keener than most. We consider here that freedom of the press — and by that I mean especially freedom of news communication and editorial comment upon subjects of international importance — is an imperative condition for our existence as a self-govern- ing community. Because we are set squarely in the midst of an ocean which admittedly is disturbed by competing cultures and ambitions on its two great shores, our social and industrial serenity depend upon accurate knowledge of these disquieting elements more than upon any other one factor. Because in this archipelago two civilizations and parts of several others have met and are in hourly close contact, it is essential that we should have ample information as to the events and probable future of the civilizations in the countries of their birth. In instancing Hawaii, I do not wish to be understood as assuming that these islands should set pattern for the rest of the world. We are a very small part of the great community of nations ; industrially the territory is still immature ; and its newspapers do not pretend to compare with the great journals of the several continents. It would ill become a newspaperman of this little mid-Pacific community to advise the rest of the world what to do. However, as I have listened to various papers and addresses presented at this Congress, I have felt more and more that in Hawaii we have a crystallization of many interna- tional problems which loom only vaguely on the world-horizon ; that we have here, in a small but concrete and easily visualized form, that same impact of cultures and customs which is felt throughout the world today. In Hawaii, the physical facts of this crystallization and im- pact are under our eyes daily; in the world at large, they are seen only as sinister clouds, disturbing to thoughtful men and women, but, even if felt by the great mass of people, not under- stood. We here see almost immediately in the reaction of our cit- izens or alien residents the results of frictions between nations. And, as the ways of world-communication are becoming more and more expeditious and ample, news of international misunder- Proceedings of the Congress 267 standing will be borne more and more quickly to the various nationals resident here. We who live here, like to call Hawaii the "Paradise of the Pacific." But without sufficient freedom of the press to keep us closely informed on world-affairs, we would be living in a fool's paradise. When I say that a free press is an imperative condition of our existence, I mean exactly that. This ocean may be either as serene with peace as a smiling summer sky, or as stormy with war as a typhoon off the China coast. Without a press which can keep us informed, and rightly informed, on events which may mean peace or war for our respective nations, we in Hawaii would be as helpless as chips in a whirlpool. Few of you gentlemen live in communities which stand to lose as Hawaii stands to lose if war should come on the Pacific. For some of you, such a war would come no closer home than the war in Europe came to the man in Iowa or Utah or Oregon. For us, it might come with the shattering, roaring, bloody trag- edy that visited France, Belgium and Italy. So, if I talk from the standpoint of a newspaperman of Hawaii, it is not to attempt to advise you, who are from much more important newspaper centers, but to give you the view- point of one man in a community which he considers to embody in minature certain international conditions affecting the news- papers of the world. How far is freedom of the press desirable and how may it be safeguarded? To the first part of that question, which is the subject for today, an American newspaperman has but one answer. Free- dom of the press is desirable to its peace-time limits. Those limits are set for us by libel laws and by constitutional provisions occasionally added to by federal or state enactment. Our con- stitution guarantees freedom of the press, and when I say that freedom of the press is desirable to its peace-time limits, I mean that those extraordinary restrictions recognized as necessary, even if disagreeable, in war-time have no place whatever in normal periods ; that censorship in peace-time is both uncon- stitutional and intolerable ; that it is to the interests of the gov- ernment as well as of the people to encourage free and informed newspaper exchange of fact and opinion. 268 The Press Congress of the World To me there can be no two sides to the question of desirability of freedom of the press, and therefore I have no extended dis- cussion to make of it. How may freedom of the press be safeguarded? Only one phase of this rather broad subject can be taken up in this paper — that of making a clear distinction in newspaper columns between what is news or what is editorial comment, and what is propaganda. A delegate said yesterday that he wished the word propaganda could be decently interred. So do we all, but it can't. The Great War, in fact, immensely widened the scope which prop- aganda could take. It taught governments and ministries new lessons in influencing the peoples. If it had its tremendous benefits, in the quick results of organized campaigns to sell bonds, recruit soldiers and raise relief funds, it had its evils in de- veloping the business of controlling and directing public opin- ion to a scale and efificiency hitherto undreamed of ; and now, instead of letting propaganda get the best of us, w^e must get the best of it, by keeping it within proper bounds and making it do its proper work. Propaganda which threatens the freedom of the press by at- tempting to use the press as a cloak for ulterior motives and subterranean actions is of two sorts — ^that emanating from private businesses and that emanating from governments. Both take a great variety of forms ; both deal with many matters of purely domestic concerns, and these I shall not dis- cuss. Our special interest in this Congress is as to those which are apt to lead to international frictions. Now as to the private business propaganda which may lead to international trouble, it is plain that its weight is lessening. We used to hear a good deal of the pernicious influence of muni- tion-makers, professional warriors, and international bankets who looked on war as a good thing. The recent great conflict gave these gentry the coup-de-gracc. The world has been dis- illusioned on war. Not so many years ago in our own country, a war was considered good business by many large newspaper- publishers. The Spanish-American war taught most of them differently; and the World War finished the course of lessons for everybody else. Proceedings of the Congress 269 No gain in circulation, or in the prestige arising from carry- ing news of the most intense interest and importance, compen- sates, in the long run, for the business depression (not to speak of the human cost) following such a war as the world has just gone through. Never again will thinking newspapermen con- sider that war is good business for their profession — for news- paper and magazine making and selling. And, such being the case, the professional war-maker will hereafter get scant en- couragement from newspaper publishers. In public or government propaganda the freedom of the press has still an ancient and powerful enemy. It is all the more dangerous because sometimes it comes to the newspaper disguised under the cloak of patriotism. Some governments have done far more than others in con- trolling the press for their own purposes — those purposes being to further imperial ambition, no matter how certain this am- bition was later on to run the people into a head-on collision with other peoples. Is it not significant that our greatest, most vivid, most tragic example of a nation which wrecked itself in a headlong dash for world-supremacy is also our greatest example of a govern- ment which used its press to control and direct and mould the minds of its people to its own ends? Is it not significant that it is precisely those people who for more than a generation had been pap-fed on propaganda instead of news who followed blind- ly a fatal and suicidal international course? The public is too often fed with "inspired statements." We too often read windy and unimportant views sent out by some- one "on high authority." Sometimes the observations thus pur- veyed to a yawning and uninterested world are good, sometimes tiresome; sometimes true, sometimes untrue. To distinguish between government matter which should be published as a patriotic duty (aside from its news interest) and matter which should not be published because it isn't news, tests the newspaperman's alert professional ability as well as his courage. I cannot offer any panacea to prevent absolutely the debasing of a free press by government propaganda. Education, the rise of general public interest in government affairs, the demand that 270 The Press Congress of the World the source of news as well as the news itself be open to the public eye ; a constant fight for the right of the press to free speech within the bounds of decency — these will help to enlist the reader on the side of the newspaper. No hard-and-fast rules can be given to the editor or pub- lisher on what government matter is of sufficient general in- terest to be run as news, and what is not. Such distinction de- pends on the merits of each case, and on locality and reader- character of the paper, dearth or amplitude of other news, and many othei factors. What I want to emphasize is that to continue and develop true freedom of the press, newspapers and magazines all over the world should adopt and adhere to the principle that govern- ment propaganda, like any other propaganda, which is of little or no straight news interest, should be carried as paid adver- tising at card rates. (Applause.) More than this — that governments should recognize that great- er power and efifectiveness which modern advertising, with its distinctive typography and its hammering repetition, can give their messages, even when these are also carried in the news columns. Paid advertising — the kind which is carried in the display col- umns or plainly marked with the word "advertisement" ; the kind which tells the reader who inserts the matter and who is paying for its insertion ought to be insisted on for government propaganda just as for the promotion of a private commercial interest. I do not mean to say that government announcements, gov- ernment doings, government plans, are not news. Much of this matter is good news, affecting thousands, hundreds of thou- sands of readers of our papers, and therefore eagerly read by them. But the point I want to emphasize is that governments should realize the value of paid advertising to explain to the people the merits of their plans and actions ; and, to use Ameri- can idiom, it's up to the newspapers to drive this point home to the governments. During the war, under the terrific necessity of getting great things done in a hurry, the governments used paid advertising on a liberal scale. War-bonds, recruiting-campaigns and the like Proceedings of the Congress 271 were widely advertised. The results proved conclusively that when the government has a big message to get across, the way to do it is both through the news columns and through the ad- vertising columns. That lesson shouldn't be forgotten in peace. If governments and government bureaus will put their peace- time messages in the form of paid advertising, over the signa- tures of these bureaus or responsible officers, they will reap in- stant benefit in the interest and understanding of their readers. We are moving and talking today in an atmosphere of peace- desire. This very Congress illustrates how inevitably nearly all public discussion touches on the need for peace. Our hag- gard countries are yearning for a day free from the torments and anxieties that go with thoughts and signs of war. I submit that one effective way to bring about that better understanding concerning which there is so much general, nebu- lous talk, is through this very method of advertising by nations. Most of us know that diplomats and official missions are going about in many capitals of the world talking peace. But a great deal of their talk misses the mark. It isn't read, or if read, it loses force from lack of proper display and repetition. It isn't direct; it isn't put in the language of the people, one and two syllable words. The man who talks war gets more attention than the man who talks peace. Yet in the long run peace-talk is the more valuable of the two lines of conversation, and ought to be more emphasized. Most of the world has reached the point of education in advertising where it is perfectly possible for governments to use this tremendous modern publicity force to further the cause of world peace. I sincerely believe that if the governments to be represented at the Limitation of Armaments Conference were to join a few days before the Conference, in a series of full-page advertise- ments to be published in daily papers and magazines in every country of the world, setting forth the high purpose and friend- ly desire which animates this conference, the result would be worth more for future peace than any dreadnought — and it could be done for less than a tenth of the cost of a dreadnought. I sincerely believe that a year's advertising campaign for 272 The Press Congress of the World peace, conducted by the governments of the world, would be more effective than a line of forts or a division of infantry or a fleet of battle cruisers. And it would cost far less. Now I am not so visionary as to believe this is immediately possible. In some countries it may be decades before advertising is as far advanced as in the United States or the British king- dom. But we can measurably hasten the day of world-wide use of advertising by governments for perfectly legitimate ends. We can hasten it by emphasizing daily and nightly that our news columns be kept free of propaganda — that if propaganda is pub- lished, it be in the advertising columns where readers may know exactly what it is. Let it not be disguised as news or editorial. Each in our own community, we can work for, struggle for, fight for this principle. We may not always succeed, but we can always make progress. If the Great War had its evils in de- veloping cleverly disguised propaganda, it also inmiensely broadened the advertising field, and definitely committed some governments to paid advertising as one method for uniting their peoples and thus helping to win. I can assure you that nowhere in the world will the efforts of newspapers to preserve freedom of the press, and to make both their news and advertising columns effective media for friendship and peace, be more closely or anxiously watched than in Hawaii. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN: After hearing what Colonel Allen has so well said you may understand why what he writes and what he speaks is always listened to with attention and profit. We, who are delegates to the Press Congress, may add that what he does for us is also to our pleasure and profit. We will have the pleasure of hearing as our next speaker Mrs. Georgina Townsend, of Los Angeles, representing the Southern California Women's Press Association. MRS. TOWNSEND: Mr. President and Delegates: To the Press Congress of the World I bring greetings from the South- ern California Woman's Press Club of Los Angeles, of which I have the honor to be president, and a member of twenty-one years' standing. My club was organized twenty-eight years ago by a small MK ON G MliEKS OF TllK Al SIKAI.IAX 0KL1':(;ATI()N, W I I H (i( )\ KlLXOl! FARRING- TON (upper, left to right). UY INNER Meluour.nk: ANDREW DUNN, Rockhamptox, Queensland; GOVERNOR WALLACE R. FARRINGTON; JOHN HENRY KE8SELL, Glad- stone, Queensland; HERBERT ARTHUR DAVIES, Meluoukne. THE REVIEWING STAND AT lOLANI PALACE (lower, left to right). OVERNOR FARRINGTON; REAR ADMIRAL EDWARD SIMPSON, U. S. N.; MAJOR-GENERAL CHAS. P. SUMMERALL, U. S. A.; PRESIDENT WALTER WILLIAMS. Proceedings of the Congress 273 group of women doing journalistic work. It was at a time when women's clubs were laughed at, but like other pioneers it out- lived scorn and scoffing, and stands today as the most distin- guished woman's club in the state of California, a state having more than fifty thousand club women federated. As my club's representative I bring the message that we are one and all, once and always for peace, and then more peace even if we have to fight for it. As newspaper women and writers we know the tremendous influence a free, untrammeled press would exert upon the efforts of men and women to bring peace and harmony and prosperity to the peoples of the world. We are looking for splendid results from this Congress, which has sounded two deep notes dear to women's hearts, peace and a free press. To each and every one of our members, be we news- paper women, writers of fiction, makers of text books, or com- posers of music, has come the restriction upon our creative work which a press controlled wholly by financial considerations im- poses upon such effort. If for no other reason than this, we would be opposed to big business control of publications. But we are as women opposed to the present conditions under which newspapers are conducted. We are soul-sick of scintillating editorials which attract the attention of the careless, unthinking reader, and mould his opinions, yet which contain day after day, a tiny drop of poison that works insidiously to lower standards, to create hatred, unrest and dissatisfaction, and to pollute the mind of the public. We are soul-sick of the exploitation of crime, of screaming headlines, of lurid sensation. We are soul- sick of mawkish sentimentality, of sob sister stuff, of disgusting details of debaucheries, of minute particulars in sickening mur- der trials, divorce scandals, and horrible deaths. We are soul- sick of extravagant statements of the beauty and genius of second and third-rate moving picture people, statements which we know are paid advertisements run in the news columns, and which deceive no one except the foolish young girls with am- bitions to become beautiful and famous. And we mothers are soul-sick of the comic section and the low standard it sets in a child's mind in regard to fun, play, obedience and obligation. But most of all we are sick unto death of propaganda, and what is more, you men are also. 18 274 The Press Congress of the World Yet we read the papers and the magazines. But we read them with resentment, indignation and contempt, and only be- cause we have nothing else to read. Yet our intelligence is insulted by being told that publishers are giving the public what it wants. They are not giving the women what they want, and yet it is the women who support the papers. A broad statement you may say. But if the financial success of a publication depends upon its advertisements, as it admittedly does, and at least ninety per cent of all advertising is addressed to women, who are the buyers of necessities and luxuries, then the success of a publication depends upon its women readers who patronize the advertisers, who are the financial backers of the newspaper industry. And because women are the buyers of ninety per cent of all necessities and luxuries, and because it is to this buying element that advertisers look for patronage, why is it not good business policy upon the part of publishers and editors, to give women what they want, a free, uncorrupted press? And the courageous publisher or editor who gives women what they want, is giving the public what it wants, which is legitimate news well pre- sented, editorials which build up standards and ideals instead of dragging them down, and all that produces harmony, good will, understanding, tolerance, charity and peace, for these are the foundation stones of prosperity, and that is what the whole world needs. The newspaper which is fearless of the eflfect of truth upon its advertisers will have the women back of it, and such a newspaper will be in a position to dictate to its advertisers instead of being dictated to by them. If you doubt the truth of this statement, think back some thirty years to the time when the Ladies Home Journal attacked the patent medicine business, a business seemingly impregnable ; to attack such business ap- parently meant ruin to any publication undertaking to expose the gigantic fake which was fattening off the credulity of the public, and it was freely predicted that the Ladies Home Journal would never survive but would be crushed by the pressure which the immense patent medicine business would bring to bear upon it. And such pressure was brought to bear and the magazine suffered severe loss, but because it was telling the truth by ex- posing a harmful and dishonest line of business, it had the Proceedings of the Congress 275 women with it. And with the women back of it, the magazine lived, and the patent medicine business industry died. Therefore it seems to me that the problem of the present con- dition of the press might be solved by the application of this bit of psychology, simple enough to state to be sure, but not so simple to carry out, for it takes courage and fearlessness. But our journalists have both courage and fearlessness, and upon these splendid attributes we women are depending for the purity of the press and the future welfare of our nation. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : Mrs. Townsend has set a good example to the speakers on this program, not only in the thought she presents but in the time she took to express her thoughts. If she would have added a postscript in which she would have told exactly what all women want in the newspapers, she could be employed on any newspaper in the world at any time. We next have the privilege of re-adjusting the program slightly in order to hear a delegate from Canada, the managing editor of La Presse at Montreal. The French Canadian has done great service in Canada, and we in the Mississippi Valley and all editors are glad to meet him South of the imaginary line which separates the Dominion from the Republic. I have pleasure in presenting to you now Mr. Oswald May- rand, managing editor of La Presse of Montreal. MR. MAYRAND: On behalf of the Canadian Press, which I have the honor to represent here, it is my privilege to con- gratulate the organizers of this congress for the magnificent success they are achieving. Conventions of this kind bring soldiers of the pen together, make them know, understand and appreciate each other ; they put in common the fruits of the most experienced among them and the whole human community, of whom journalists are the best natured servants, get the ultimate benefit. Having been asked to present a lecture on any journalistic subject, I thought you might be interested to hear something of the Canadian press and especially something of the French- Canadian press history. The press of a country reflects the ideals of such country. French-Canadians are peaceful people living in harmony with 274 The Press Congress of the World Yet we read the papers and the magazines. But we read them with resentment, indignation and contempt, and only be- cause we have nothing else to read. Yet our intelligence is insulted by being told that publishers are giving the public what it wants. They are not giving the women what they want, and yet it is the women who support the papers. A broad statement you may say. But if the financial success of a publication depends upon its advertisements, as it admittedly does, and at least ninety per cent of all advertising is addressed to women, who are the buyers of necessities and luxuries, then the success of a publication depends upon its women readers who patronize the advertisers, who are the financial backers of the newspaper industry. And because women are the buyers of ninety per cent of all necessities and luxuries, and because it is to this buying element that advertisers look for patronage, why is it not good business policy upon the part of publishers and editors, to give women what they want, a free, uncorrupted press ? And the courageous publisher or editor who gives women what they want, is giving the public what it wants, which is legitimate news well pre- sented, editorials which build up standards and ideals instead of dragging them down, and all that produces harmony, good will, understanding, tolerance, charity and peace, for these are the foundation stones of prosperity, and that is what the whole world needs. The newspaper which is fearless of the effect of truth upon its advertisers will have the women back of it, and such a newspaper will be in a position to dictate to its advertisers instead of being dictated to by them. If you doubt the truth of this statement, think back some thirty years to the time when the Ladies Home Journal attacked the patent medicine business, a business seemingly impregnable ; to attack such business ap- parently meant ruin to any publication undertaking to expose the gigantic fake which was fattening off the credulity of the public, and it was freely predicted that the Ladies Home Journal would never survive but would be crushed by the pressure which the immense patent medicine business would bring to bear upon it. And such pressure was brought to bear and the magazine suffered severe loss, but because it was telling the truth by ex- posing a harmful and dishonest line of business, it had the Proceedings of the Congress 275 women with it. And with the women back of it, the magazine Hved, and the patent medicine business industry died. Therefore it seems to me that the problem of the present con- dition of the press might be solved by the application of this bit of psychology, simple enough to state to be sure, but not so simple to carry out, for it takes courage and fearlessness. But our journalists have both courage and fearlessness, and upon these splendid attributes we women are depending for the purity of the press and the future welfare of our nation. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : Mrs. Townsend has set a good example to the speakers on this program, not only in the thought she presents but in the time she took to express her thoughts. If she would have added a postscript in which she would have told exactly what all women want in the newspapers, she could be employed on any newspaper in the world at any time. We next have the privilege of re-adjusting the program slightly in order to hear a delegate from Canada, the managing editor of La Presse at Montreal. The French Canadian has done great service in Canada, and we in the Mississippi Valley and all editors are glad to meet him South of the imaginary line which separates the Dominion from the Republic. I have pleasure in presenting to you now Mr. Oswald May- rand, managing editor of La Presse of Montreal. MR. MAYRAND: On behalf of the Canadian Press, which I have the honor to represent here, it is my privilege to con- gratulate the organizers of this congress for the magnificent success they are achieving. Conventions of this kind bring soldiers of the pen together, make them know, understand and appreciate each other ; they put in common the fruits of the most experienced among them and the whole human community, of whom journalists are the best natured servants, get the ultimate benefit. Having been asked to present a lecture on any journalistic subject, I thought you might be interested to hear something of the Canadian press and especially something of the French- Canadian press history. The press of a country reflects the ideals of such country. French-Canadians are peaceful people living in harmony with 276 The Press Congress of the World all ethnical groups which surround them. Canada at large is often looked upon as a lively hyphen between the several great races of this continent and even of the whole world. There can not be a higher purpose to achieve. Our people's motto is "J^ me souviens" (I remember) and should not this be one of the ideals of the universal press? Above the legitimate interests of each country, pressmen, let us remember and serve the interests of humanity, our common mother. In 1752 appeared the first journal published within the actual limits of Canada. It was at Halifax and its editor was named Bushell. That man was therefore first to take out of the bushel the Canadian journalistic light and also first to fire a newspaper shell in the land which was to be the future peaceful Dominion of Canada. Suspended a few years after its first publication, that paper, which was rather an official gazette, reappeared later and is still living under the name of Nova Scotia Official Ga- zette. Twelve years after on June 21, 1764, appeared in Canada as it was then formed the first journal. La Gazette de Quebec, which was published by Brown and Gilmour, two printers who had come from Philadelphia. It was printed at first half in French, half in English ; then, for many years, alternately in English and in French, and from 1842 in English only. After the death of Gilmour and, later, of Brown, the Quebec Gazette became the property of the latter's nephew, named Neilson, and for more than half a century, it belonged to the Neilson family. At first, that paper contained foreign news rather than local news and it soon became an official gazette in which were pub- lished ordinances and laws. During about fifteen years it was the only Canadian paper. It disappeared in 1874, after one hun- dred and ten years of existence. In 1778, Fleury Mesplet, another printer coming from Phil- adelphia, founded in Montreal La Gazette Litteraire, which hav- ing ceased to be exclusively literary and having encroached up- on the political arena, died after about a year of existence. In 1785, the same Fleury Mesplet began the publication of La Gazette de Montreal. When he died, in 1793, his paper was bought by Mr. Edwards and it is the same which still exists under the name of the Montreal Gazette. Proceedings of the Congress 277 In 1796 and 1797 another Gazette de Montreal was simul- taneously published by Louis Roy, who had printed before the first journal of Upper Canada, The Canada Gazette. Those two papers were edited in English and French. At the beginning of the nineteenth century, when the struggle between the French Canadian patriots' party and the English bureaucracy became more acute, many fighting papers then came out. First of all appeared Le Canadien, founded in 1806 and which after getting through many hardships was killed by Craig, general governor, in 1810. To fight against Le Canadien, Thomas Cary brought forth, in 1806, the Quebec Mercury which was still more fiery than Le Canadien. The moderate party had also, at that time, their own organs. Le Courrier de Quebec which lived from 1807 to 1818 and Le Vrai Canadien, which lasted from 1807 to 1811. Both papers were supported, at least secretly, by the Government. From 1810 to 1820, other journals pursued the struggle for each side. On the English side, the most prominent as well as the most fanatic at that time, was the Herald, which was es- tablished in 1811. On the Canadian, or patriots' side, there were above all Le Spectateur, founded in 1813 by C. B. Pasteur, and the Canadian Spectator, edited in English by Jocelyn Waller. At about the same time Michel Bibaud began to publish periodical reviews which favored bureaucracy. Then, at Three Rivers, Ludger Duvernay published La Ga- zette de Trois-Rivieres, Le Constitutionnel and L'Argus, which, although they had a short life, valiantly fought for the Canadian cause. In 1826, La Minerve, the most accredited organ of French Canadian interests, was founded by A-Norbert Morin. That paper lived six months only. It was revived in 1827 by Ludger Duvernay as publisher and by the same A-Norbert Morin as editor. Before, it had been attempted twice, though unsuccessfully, to revive Le Canadien in Quebec, but that paper was definitively re-established in 1831, with Etienne Parent as its director. Until 1837, La Minerve and Le Canadien were the two French 278 The Press Congress of the World papers which led the fight against the Herald and the Montreal Gazette. ^ , La Gazette de Quebec, which from 1822 had ceased to be the official gazette, went also into the fight, but with moderate views. In 1832 came out, in Montreal, L'Ami du Peuple which sup- ported the Government while he was supposed to fight against the exaggerations of the Patriots. On behalf of the Patriots were then published in Quebec Le Liberal by S. M. Bouchette and Le Fantasque by Aubin, in Montreal, La Quotidienne by Lemaitre, Lejean-Baptiste by Dr. Gauvin, and La Canadienne by Plinguet. As a supporter of the Government there was above all Le Populaire published by Gosselin and Leblanc de Marconnay. Among the most fiery champions of the Patriots' cause there was also The Vindicator, edited in English by Dr. O'Callaghan. All those papers were wiped out by the storm of 1838-39. Even La Minerve was forced to give up for some time its publication and Ludger Duvernay, who had run away to Burlington, edited there Le Patriote Canadien. After the union of Upper to Lower Canada, the struggle was transferred upon the constitutional ground. La Minerve, re- established in 1842 and especially inspired by Lafontaine, called for a responsible government, and it was supported by Le Cana- dien, who was still published in Quebec. Both papers had to fight against the Montreal Gazette, the Herald, the Transcript, the Courier and sometimes against L'Aurore des Canadas, a wavering French paper, which, having been established in 1839, lasted until 1848. During the same period several publications were edited by Michel Bibaud: La Bibliotheque Canadienne, L'Observateur, Le Magasin du Bas Canada and L'Encyclopedia Canadienne, all ig- noring politics. A little later, the political struggle took place between the Liberal party as created by Lafontaine and the Red party as es- tablished in 1844, when Louis-Joseph Papineau had come back to Canada. On the one side which can already be named Liberal- Conservative there were, each having its shades of opinion. La Minerve of Montreal, Le Canadien of Quebec and, from 1842, Le Journal de Quebec. Proceedings of the Congress 279 On the radical side there was above all L'Avenir, which after having been founded in 1847 by Jean-Baptiste-Eric Dorion, gave its place, in 1852, to LePays edited by Dessaulles. In 1855 Le National of Juot, Fournier and Plamondon came and helped Le- Pays. Among the influential papers which came along and helped the Conservative party should be mentioned Le Courrier du Can- ada, established in 1857 and at first edited by Aubry. Under the pressure of political evolution, the papers varied more and more until the Confederation. Then, in 1867, was founded L'Evenement which, edited by Hector Fabre, sustained for years a most strenuous fight against Le Journal de Quebec published by the Honorable Joseph Cauchon. After 1867, besides the party papers which still existed like La Minerve, Le Courrier du Canada, L'Evenement, Le Canadien, Le Journal de Quebec, etc., there were, from 1870 to 1880, many politico-religious papers which most acrimoniously fought each other. Let us mention L'Ordre, edited by Mr. Royal, Le Nouveau- Monde, directed by Canon Lamarche and Le Franc-Parleur, of Adolphe Ouimet. Of the same kind came, a little later, L'Etend- ard, of Senator Trudel and Le Journal de Trois-Rivieres of McLeod. From 1880 H. Beaugrand founded La Patrie, then a liberal organ, and in 1880 the Hon. C. E. Gagnon brought forth at Quebec L'Electeur, another Liberal organ which while edited by Earnest Pacaud was interdicted and then became Le Soleil. In 1881 Le Nouveau-Monde was transformed into Le Monde which was made by its publisher, Frederic Houde, a first model of what was to be the French Canadian modern newspaper. Houde having died, his paper was soon supplanted by La Presse, founded by Mr. W. E. Blumhardt in 1884, but reorganized and remodeled as a thorough newspaper of today by Treffle Berthi- aume in 1889. Let me say only a few words of the present French Canadian press. There are four French dailies published in Montreal : Le Canada, a morning Liberal newspaper ; La Patrie, Le Devoir and La Presse, all independent evening newspapers. In the city of Quebec there are three French dailies Le Soliel, organ of the Liberal party ; L'Evenement and L'Action Catho- lique, both independent as to politics. 280 The Press Congress of the World Besides, there are a few French daily newspapers pubhshed in some other Canadian cities, for instance: Le NourvilHste in Three Rivers, La Tribune in Sherbrooke and Le Droit in Ottawa. From the maritime provinces to the Western Canada we have also a great number of French weekly newspapers, literary or scientific reviews which are of a most valuable credit to our French Canadian people and to the whole Dominion's com- munity at large. Will you allow me to say just a few words more about La Presse, the French newspaper which has the largest circulation of all the dailies published in any language in the British Domin- ion of Canada. Established, as it is, by a courageous self-made man, Trefifle Berthiaume, who was a printer, that paper has the following program, which appears, as in a nutshell, in each of its editions : La Presse is an institution irrevocably devoted to the French- Canadian interests : free from political influences, it treats every- body with justice, protects little and wxak people against big and strong interests, fights for right against wrong, prefers en- lightening to governing, makes truth shine through its power- ful information service and is a champion of reforms which can better the life of social classes. Does not such a program spell some of what might inspire the whole press of the world? (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN: We next have an opportunity of hear- ing a representative of the Havana Reporters' Association, Mr. Agustin Lazo of Cuba. MR. LAZO: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: It is not the first time that journalists from the different countries of the world have analyzed, studied and discussed the freedom of the press, although this Press Congress of the World is somewhat different in character, having for its aim fomenting the union and solidarity of the press. It is convenient at this time, now that we are assembled to discuss arid study beneficial measures to make decisions in relation to freedom of the press, proceeding without any passionate feeling which might tend to mar otherwise harmonious results of our plans. The freedom of the press as has been asserted, must be as Proceedings of the Congress 281 wide as the freedom of thought. Our thoughts and our ideas cannot be checked. Our minds may conceive sentiments which cannot be governed by moral or human law. But does this ap- ply in the same way in regard to our ideas? Surely not. In our minds are mixed together all our good and bad sentiments, which unfortunately all of us possess. Purity of thought does not always predominate. Freedom of the press, which means the free and untram- melled expression of our thoughts cannot be so governed as the freedom of thought, which certainly has no boundaries, no cen- sors, no rules, and no laws or control. Only when our ideals are all pure can we equalize the two freedoms which, nevertheless, are in close and intimate relation. In a world which really is not our earthly world the conceptions of the mind and its ex- pressions are apt to be confused. Let us therefore struggle for universal purity of ideas which must govern the spirits of those who, like ourselves, have for their object the guidance of public opinion in all the most important problems of life. Taking into consideration the importance of the press, which has reached the denomination of Fourth Power of the State, it is only logical that the various governments have had to publish laws relating to the press. The press is as significant in the development of a government as any other power under a con- trol, offering as it does a means for the discussion and approval of legislation in order that it may become effective. But the press is something more than a law-making, judicial and ex- ecutive power. Restrictions to the expression of written thoughts have been only local or national, and in the international con- ventions, governments have never intended to limit the activities of the press to the sphere around which the press turns. In no international treaty have there been restrictions against which it was necessary to protest. Our sphere of action has no bound- aries and is more extensive than the boundary lines of the dif- ferent countries of the world. The ideas scattered by the press reach to all points of the compass, whereas laws and powers of individual governments are confined to one particular country. To us of the press falls the responsibility of establishing rules to assure healthful and favorable results for mankind, avoiding all despotical and depreciative proceedings by which journalism 282 The Press Congress of the World can lose its reputation and prestige and grow repulsive and hate- ful. What should be the necessary and desired freedom of the press, and how can that freedom be defended and maintained? This is a problem which opens up an opportunity for wide dis- cussion. The political relations between individual citizens and countries provoke a different situation in each case. Temperance of rulers is not the same in each case and temperance of writers is always different. Laws are dififerent, too, and the internal sit- uations differ in each country. Another point I have especially appreciated in my country, the Republic of Cuba, has been the nationality of writers. The government has not followed the same course against natives and foreigners but this sentiment has had to be completely changed. Freedom of the press is necessary. Sentiments of nations, just as the sentiments of citizens who formed those nations, will hardly be altered, but to that difficult task let us unite in our efforts. May divisions between the journalists of the world never appear. Let ideas be expressed freely so that from dis- cussions may come out the light, pure and bright, to color in an atmosphere of transparency and cordial harmony the spirits of the inhabitants of all the world, maintaining a universal peace and an intense, deep, and mutual love amongst human beings. The press is the organization in charge of the defense of men's rights, of the liberties of nations, of universal peace, and is the institution which will spread knowledge of interest to everyone ; which will reflect the sentiments of public opinion, its necessities, its claims, and at the same time will indicate the means to be employed for the realization of inspired ideals. The press can not be put aside by progress and civilization. The press will be the means of transporting from mind to mind, rapidly, with the speed permitted by means of modern communication, the events occurring in every place. To governments more than to anybody else will depend the maintenance of the freedom of the press. Let both governments and the press unify their aims towards the maintenance of the solidarity they need so that passions will not break out furiously as a storm menacing nationality, transformed to a weak vessel without steersmen and without Proceedings of the Congress 283 secure direction. The press must always claim the rights needed for the fulfillment of its noble and beneficial purpose. How shall the press claim and maintain those rights? By friendly negotia- tions it must search for the betterment of conditions, first within its own country, exhausting all sources given by code and reso- lutions in force, and if that is not sufficient, by appealing to the Press Congress of the World, which after hearing the details of disagreement, will act according to the prudent judgment of a committee appointed by us. This committee or tribunal so appointed should be composed of press representatives from the different nations, in order that the experiences of every par- ticular nation be at its disposal. Its nomination should be made immediately, so that complaints already officially presented may be made known to this Congress. According to my reports, we have two communications on the table of this Congress and they ought to be studied carefully by the committee named for investigation. One of those cases comes from Lima, Peru, where the government has expropriated the building and properties of the newspaper El Comercio, one of the oldest dailies in Lima. Soldiers were sent against the house alleging a breach of public order on account of some articles published by that important organ of the Peruvian Press. Mr. Fernan Cisneros, the owner, one of the vice-presidents of the Press Congress of the World, was even after being deprived of his belongings, exiled, and now lives in Panama from where he is sending a protest to the civilized world and especially to journalists and to the Press Congress of the World. These are two different cases worthy of our attention on ac- count of the solidarity we are obliged to maintain with journalists in both South American countries, and because these will not be the only cases submitted for the consideration of the distinguished members of this Congress. The first case is isolated to the life of the Peruvian government. The second relates to government systems generally as criticized by the press of almost every nation. In both cases the Press Congress of the World should take ac- tion, promising its moral support. But all these problems I have referred to are more or less governed by the education received by the various journalists. Frequently the freedom to express ideas will depend exclusively 284 The Press Congress of the World on the intelligence and prudence of the writer, who must have had adequate preparation obtained in a favorable manner and under favorable conditions to enable him to properly express his thoughts and opinions. Now, what is the most desirable preparation for a career of journalism? In this field nothing is so necessary and so useful as a course in schools of journalism as established in the United States and several other countries. In other places questions re- lating to the establishment of a faculty in the universities are pending where those who take courses in politics, science, finance or religion may also study modern journalism. In Cuba we are trying to establish our school of journalism. We need it and it would be a great asset to the success of journalism in the future. To these schools we ought to direct our thoughts now that we are assembled here for the search of new plans tending to the improvement of journalism. The Press Congress of the World must start an effective campaign on behalf of these schools for journalism. Within them, pupils will learn to demonstrate a knowledge of good grammar and literature in the language used in their writings. There should also be civic instruction which will include elements of the constitution, administration, political and international law, political economy, ethics and mod- ern history. The pupils should also have practical training for writing editorials and for searching out the news. The teachers in these schools of journalism should be persons of unquestioned ability in order that they may give their scholars besides tech- nical knowledge the necessary capacity to rapidly estimate the value of any particular event and applying great doses of prudence, discretion, sagacity and acuteness of mind, qualities on which will greatly depend the success of the students, because journal- ism embodies all human activities and is the motor of ideas in the advancement of modern civilization. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : As the last speaker of the morning we have the opportunity of hearing a representative of China, a member of the staff of The China Press of Shanghai, commis- sioned by the Press Association of Shanghai, China, to this body, educated at the University of Michigan, United States. I have great pleasure in presenting to you Mr. Jabin Hsu. Proceedings of the Congress 285 MR. JABIN HSU: Mr. Chairman and Members of the Press Congress : Perhaps you will remember that our esteemed friend, Colonel Lawson, at the opening session, told you in a very neat way what he thought of America. My message will be more or less an address from one organic body to another organic body, viz : what we, the Chinese press, think of the world press. It is in that name that I propose to speak this morning. The press of China is rapidly growing in influence and is now voicing the opinions of the thinking Chinese. Its views on matters of domestic concern carry much weight with all classes of people in the country. I believe that before long the views of the Chinese press on matters of international character will carry equal weight with the people of other nations. As the opinion expressed by the Chinese press on all kinds of topics of the day are shared to a more or less extent by the populace, a discussion of the views of the press in my country about the world press may not be lacking in interest, representing as it does the concensus of public opinion in China. Before the World War, the Chinese press, which was then in its infancy, paid all its attention to domestic affairs and sel- dom, if ever, ventured into the realm of international politics. The war, however, was responsible for the shifting of part of the attention to world problems. Since 1914, the newspapermen in my country had been eagerly devouring all the news dished out by the foreign press about aflfairs of other continents, es- pecially about the news of international nature in relation to China. In their first contact with the newspaper world of the West, Chinese journalists placed implicit confidence in what they read in the foreign papers. However, when the roar of cannon and the butchery of human beings ceased on that memorable day, November 11, 1918, the newspapers in China were led by the world press to believe that finally the better instincts of mankind would assert themselves and that arms would be subordinated to reason while aggrandise- ment and imperialism would simultaneously cease. Chinese jour- nalists all over the country hailed the same unanimous view that instead of secret diplomacy, we were to have covenants openly arrived at and instead of entangling alliances, we were to have a League of Nations with armament reduced to a minimum re- 286 The Press Congress of the World quired for the performance of mere police duties. Thus the Chinese people were led by their own press, which was in turn led by the world press, to believe that the longed for Utopia was about to be realized and that liberty, justice and equality would soon reign supreme. For had not the European and the Ameri- can press repeatedly declared to the world that the great war was a war to end all future wars and that the Allies were fighting for justice and civilization against militarism and barbarism? Such press views from America and Europe were re-echoed by the press in China. And the people of China had the great- est faith in them. Urged on by these promises as were scattered broadcast by the press of the world, the people of China bore the heavy burden of deprivation and sacrifice willingly in fond hopes of future peace. But today, after three long years, they find themselves disillusioned and deceived by press reports. In- stead of a period of social, financial and political quietude, we face today a world of unrest in which we Chinese are sufifering equally with the rest of the world. During the last three years, more strikes and labor troubles have happened than in any other period of similar duration in history. In a word, the Versailles Conference did not prove to be the panacea that the Chinese ex- pected. Has the press deceived the Chinese pre?s. and through the Chinese press, deceived the Chinese people by holding out an unusually bright future, a future which was later proved to be a mere illusion? Most of the Chinese journalists have now realized — whether rightly or wrongly — that the press news from Europe and Ameri- ca had selfish purposes to serve ; that the whole truth of the conditions of the West at the moment was not wholly told, oi that the foreign pressmen, or publishers of the foreign news- papers, were but catspaws in the hands of their statesmen and carried out their instructions for the furtherance of a political program. The confidence of the Chinese journalists in the for- eign press for the time being is being totally shaken. Their criticism of the toreign press which they consider as not playing the game fairly, is rather severe, and perhaps too severe. The advice they offer to remedy what they consider as a deplorable international situation is sound. They suggest that if the world press is to continue the enjoyment of the confidence of mankind, it Proceedings of the Congress 287 should endeavor to refer back now and then to old facts while reporting the new events. In order to make themselves clear on this point, one newspaper had this much to say: "Great statesmen of two continents in the midst of the war promised in the most solemn manner a new world to mankind after the termination of the great international conflict, prom- ised equal rights to big as well as small nations and promised self-determination of the people. The newspapers in America and Europe wrote editorials after editorials praising them with- out reservation, to use a Chinese expression, 'to the skyward.' At the Versailles Peace Conference, the words and acts of these advocates of high-sounding principles were found to be dia- metrically opposite. And the people and the press of China ex- pected to find in the various foreign papers which used to praise them without qualification editorials of condemnation, but they were disappointed as they found nothing of the kind. There was silence which the foreign press religiously observed with regard to the inconsistency of the deeds and words of their statesmen; the silence could be interpreted as their connivance at the low grade statecraft." Another paper endorsed the foregoing views and added that if the world press is to serve mankind, it should take to task those statesmen who make promises which are not meant to be carried out. These suggestions, I feel certain, are worthy of ■consideration by press representatives. If the press is to lead world opinion, it must exercise pres- sure wherever and whenever it is necessary in the interest of public welfare. Once a great statesman who does not intend to keep his promises which are made to secure either cheap pub- licity or to mislead the world, experiences such pressure, he dare not to repeat it and will be more truthful in what he says as well as what he does in the future. The vigilance of the press over conduct of those who are "high-up," when effectively exercised, will do away with much misunderstandings, which are responsible for all human conflicts, and will finally lead to the creation of a better world. Is the international press ready to assume this responsibility? This responsibility is by no means light, but it cannot be assumed by any other institution except the press of the world. If the world press is not yet ready to do 288 The Press Congress of the World so, then it fails to perform its vital function of guiding the world opinion along the proper channels and enforcing what is right and fair. Having been disappointed by the foreign press and inclined to distrust news reports from abroad, the leading Chinese jour- nalists have offered their reading public an explanation of their own with reference to the cause of the economic and political unrest. This unrest is attributed to the return of the United States of America to her ante-bellum isolation. They stated that the enthusiasm with which she went into the war and waged it has now become supercooled ; since the conclusion of the war, she has been almost deaf to the appeal of the sore distressed world. On this question, the general comment of the Chinese press, which undoubtedly supplies American newspapermen much food for thought, runs in this way : "The United States which for years considered her splendid isolation as a justification for being indifferent to world affairs, discovering in 1917 that she could not keep herself further aloof from the cataclysm of Europe, jumped into it just in the nick of time to save what was left of this old world of ours. The Allies, strengthened not only materially but more so morally, emerged victorious and were going to run the world, as their statesmen said, on a new plan. The big heads of Europe, Asia, and Amer- ica met to devise this plan of running the world whereby every one was promised a decent chance to live and be happy. This plan was evolved in the covenants of the so-called League of Nations. President Wilson brought this plan back to the United States, but the American people could not stand for any such league as that existing at that time. What now? Every piece of news that comes from Europe indicates that war has ex- hausted practically all the resources at the command of Europe, which badly needs America's aid to rehabilitate herself. Austria is starving. Spain, Italy, France and England are all turbulent with constant labor troubles, making production impossible, America is the only nation in the world which is able to help the world, but she, for good reasons, declines to do so. Hence Europe today is starving, while America has goods, money and clothing in abundance. The exalted mood of wartime has died away and the American people who gladly made sacrifices in the Proceedings of the Congress 289 war are now demanding the concentration of American energy and wealth for America alone. The general populace who made such supreme sacrifices during the conflagration are now return- ing to their old time mode of living in a rather cool-blooded spirit." "The high cost of living," to get some further ideas about the Chinese press comment on world afifairs, "has been due to Amer- ica's indifference to international affairs and refusal to meddle in European affairs and to play her manifest role as the hope of mankind. Europe needs America's raw material, her coal, wheat and financial credit, but America is evidently unmoved. If America had the same enthusiasm now as when she fought for civilization then, we might have a different world altogether." We who have been in touch with the affairs of the world more closely know that such comment in the Chinese press is far from being fair. We know too well that it is not the withdrawal of the United States from European affairs, but the inevitable af- ter-war effects that are principally accountable for the political and labor unrest all over the world. But ladies and gentlemen, you are reaping your own harvest from what you sowed during the war. The foreign press has destroyed the confidence of the Chinese pressmen, who are naturally not very well-acquainted with world conditions, in the reliability of its news and it is only natural that they should allow their own imagination free play which is most injurious to the world at large. For the misinter- pretation by the Chinese press of the world conditions today — for which America has been held responsible — the foreign press, especially the American journalists, have to thank themselves. In order to secure a renewed confidence of the Chinese press- men in Western journalism the papers in America and Europe should discard expediency and perform their function of sup- plying genuine information and of supervising the conducts of statesmen of the world faithfully, though unpleasantly. A world press free from jingoism and consecrated solely to public wel- fare can overcome the unfavorable attitude of the average Chinese newspapermen towards their Western fellow-craftsmen. I hope the day is not far distant when the public press may be consecrated to the high ideals so eloquently urged by the leading journalists of the day at this Congress. 19 290 The Press Congress of the World The faithful performance by the Western press of its func- tion in the light of the comment of the Chinese press is impor- tant, for it does not need a prophet to tell that the Pacific will be the storm center of the world in the years to come. The responsibilities of our fellow-craftsmen in handling Pacific prob- lems correctly are immensely heavy. We know by experience that we cannot entirely rely on diplomats for the promotion of international peace. They too often misunderstand one another and the slightest spark of friction among them would kindle the fire of Mars to slaughter the sons of men ! As nations, we are by no means intelligent on the affairs of one another, largely perhaps due to the failure of the press to perform its sacred duty of telling the "truth, the whole truth and nothing but the truth." We are suspicious of one another. Consequently, some nations resort madly to the increase of armament as a means of preserva- tion while others indulge in secret diplomacy, intrigue and op- pression of the weak. Here is an opportunity for the foreign press to show its Eastern brother that it is sincere in working for universal peace and it will not hesitate to note publicly inconsistencies of their statesmen, which will remove some of the misunderstandings now entertained by the Chinese press. Within a month from today, there will be held in Washington a Disarmament Con- ference. At this, many of China's intricate problems will be discussed and her grievances, we hope, aired. There may be obstacles to the solution of these problems. But American and European statesmen, as well as those from the Orient, have re- peatedly announced their intention to see to it that China re- ceives a square deal at the Conference table and that some means will be devised for the reinforcement of the policy of Open Door and the principle of territorial integrity of our country. If these statesmen will carry out their promises in letter and in spirit, well and good; but, if not, I trust that the press of the world will not allow them to pass unnoticed as they did during the Paris Conference. A repetition of the events at the Paris Con- ference will confirm the unfavorable opinion of the Chinese press and will produce undesirable results, because, as we all know, not until the last war cloud disappears from the Pacific horizon will the nations of the world trust each other and lay down their arms. Proceedings of the Congress 291 Ladies and gentlemen of the Press, I have frankly stated to you the views of the Chinese press on the world press. In giving them, I have no other motive than to bring closer to- gether the relationship between the press of the Orient with that of the Occident. The sincere co-operation of these pressmen of the East and the West is imperative as it will result in a better understanding between nations at this critical hour. Let us re- member that our interest in the journalistic profession is in concord and not in conflict and our real success rests in public service and co-operation. I hope that all who are here this af- ternoon, whether he be an editor, a publisher or a business man- ager, I hope he may be moved to higher and nobler efforts for his own and the world's good and that out of this Congress may come not only cordial relations between the delegates, confidence and fraternity, improvement of our profession, but also service to humanity and consecration of the high ideals of mankind so as to make this old world of ours more pleasant to live in ! It will be a great satisfaction, I am sure, if as a result of this historical gathering of the leading members of the journal- istic profession here at the crossroads of the Pacific we at once join hands to carry out this supreme duty! (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN: Opportunity will be given tomorrow for the discussion of Mr. Hsu's interesting and suggestive paper, as well as for discussion of the other papers read this morning. This afternoon, beginning at two o'clock we will have some important and interesting addresses, closing the program of for- mal addresses at this Congress session. Some most stimulating addresses will be made this afternoon. The Congress will be in recess until two o'clock. SEVEJNTH SESSION. WEDNESDAY AFTERNOON, OCTOBER 19, 1921. Congress was called to order at two p. m. by President Wil- liams. THE CHAIRMAN : The Secretary will read a message from His Excellency, the Governor of Hongkong. THE SECRETARY: This letter has been entrusted to Mr. 292 The Press Congress of the World Petrie, delegate to the Press Congress of the World from the Hongkong press, who handed it to Governor Farrington, who in turn suggests that it be made part of the minutes of the Press Congress. That has been done and the letter from the Governor of Hongkong is as follows : Government House HONGKONG, 9th August, 1921. To the Governor of Hawaii: I avail myself of the opportunity afforded by the presence of Mr. T. Petrie as Delegate of the Hongkong Press at the Press Congress of the World to send greetings to Your Excellency and to express the hope that the results of the Congress meeting in your territory will be to enhance the value of the World's Press by facilitating the dissemination of accurate in- formation and thus helping to remove prejudices and misunderstandings and to promote international goodwill and co-operation. R. E. Stubbs, Governor, &c. THE CHAIRMAN : However full the news reports and how- ever fair and instructive the editorial opinions may be, unless a newspaper has readers, news and opinion do not serve the de- sired purpose. The first paper this afternoon is on "The Build- ing of Circulation," by a conspicuously successful country pub- lisher from the middle of the United States, Mr. H. U. Bailey, of the Bureau County Republican, Princeton, Illinois. MR. BAILEY: Mr. President, Members of the Congress: I might say here that I believe that the publishing of the news in a community is usually a matter of education to be conducted by the editor of the paper. In our own experience I know that we are now publishing a very large line of news matter which fifteen or twenty years ago we could not have published without giving offense to a considerable number of people, but the people in our community have learned to feel that matters of real import- ance are going to be published, and unless there is some senti- mental reason — some innocent people to suffer — the subscribers know it will be published. The modern newspaper is a commercial institution to the extent that it has two commodities for sale — circulation and ad- vertising. Both of these are essential to the success of any newspaper enterprise for they constitute the only legitimate sources of revenue upon which a newspaper may depend for sup- port. Of course, many newspapers, especially in country towns, Proceedings of the Congress 293 operate a job printing plant from which a profit is derived, but certainly the income from job printing cannot be reckoned as newspaper earnings. In my opinion the circulation of a newspaper is its greatest asset, for upon the circulation, its size and character, depends the value of its advertising space. It is the basis upon which advertising rates are fixed and is the lodestone which attracts advertisers who have a message to deliver to the public. The building of circulation is one of the publisher's most im- portant and sometimes most difficult problems. A large sub- scription list is the ambition of every publisher of a newspaper whether he be located in a great city or in a little country town. Circulation is the tape-measure of popularity. It indicates the degree in which the newspaper is fulfilling its mission in the community and the response which its efforts to supply useful information meets from the people it attempts to serve. No newspaper can hope to succeed unless it becomes a vital, throbbing part of the community life. It must reflect what is in the minds and hearts of the people ; it must be a faithful record of human progress and human events ; it must lead the way with the pulpit toward the better things of life. It must win and hold the confidence of the people as the champion of right and justice and the unceasing antagonist of that which is against the common good. To reach this goal, requires more than good intentions. It requires hard work, tenacity of purpose, and a keeii understand- ing of human nature. While truth in journalism is essential to success there must be coupled with it energy and alertness to deliver the news bright and fresh from the various centers of ac- tivity. Wherever the common welfare is concerned the news- paper should spare neither time, effort nor money to keep the public informed. It will be repaid many fold. I once knew a newspaper man in Iowa who conducted a weekly paper in a small town for twenty years, and it was his boast that he had never published an item that gave offense to any of his subscribers. He was proud of the claim that he did not have an enemy in the world. And yet, when he became a can- didate for the job of local postmaster he could not muster enough support to land the job and failed. While perhaps, it was true 294 The Press Congress of the World that he did not have any enemies, his supine attitude during his twenty years of editorship did not make him any real warm friends and both he and his paper were a failure in that com- munity. The publisher in building up circulation is engaged in the sales end of a commercial enterprise. He is selling his product — news. He has the same things to consider that a merchant has who is setting out to market his goods. The same principles of salesmanship apply to both. In the first place there must be a need for his product and in the second place he must produce something that fills the need. A study of the history of American journalism reveals an in- finite variety of methods for the building of circulation. In fact, American publishers, as business men, have shown as much versa- tility and as much ingenuity in selling their product as have the men engaged in other lines of business. Many schemes have been de- vised for getting subscribers, some of them excellent in their re- sults and others not so good. Voting contests, premium offers, free trial subscriptions, and a great many other schemes have been tried by publishers all over the land, with varying results. For our part we have never tried any of these. We employ sub- scription solicitors during the summer months of the year but we have never employed advertising solicitors. Advertisers come voluntarily to the office and to meet their needs in addition to our news service we find it necessary to print from sixteen to twenty-four pages of each issue. In the matter of circulation I believe publishers should give their advertisers full and accurate information concerning that which they are buying, viz : cir- culation. Therefore at six months intervals we issue rate and circulation folders in which we give the total sworn circulation during the preceding six months and we supplement this with a table giving the exact number of subscribers in each town and on each rural route of the county. In addition to the affidavit we publish a guarantee in which we agree that we will cancel the bill of any advertiser or refund the amount paid by any adver- tiser in case such advertiser points out one instance in which an error of as many as six subscriptions has been made in any town or on any one of the forty-nine rural routes of the county. We let these circulation statements take the place of advertising solicitors. P?'oceedings of the Congress 295 Personally I have come to the conclusion that circulation is something which cannot be acquired in a day or a year. The building of a substantial, bona fide subscription list is the work of years. It must rest upon a firm foundation. In my judgment, the first essential in building circulation is to furnish a really worth-while newspaper. In other words, manufacture a meritorious article for which there is a public demand. It is useless to send out agents to secure subscribers if you cannot hold them after you get them. You must furnish a satisfactory news service, giving in an interesting manner an un- biased report of the events transpiring in the community which you serve. I do not wish to pose before this World Press Congress as an expert circulation builder. I am simply a country editor, who has achieved a measure of success, and willing to share the benefit of my experience with my fellow publishers. If there is any- thing in that experience that may be useful to you, I gladly give it. When I acquired the Bureau County Republican, which was established seventy-five years ago at Princeton, Illinois, a town of about 5,000 inhabitants, it had a circulation of 2,500. It was a weekly paper in a county seat town and because it carried the news of the courts and the proceedings of the board of super- visors it had a more or less general circulation throughout Bureau County, an agricultural district with approximately 43,000 in- habitants. Without artificial means to stimulate subscription sales a campaign was undertaken to increase the circulation. One of the first steps in this direction was the appointment of additional correspondents in order to cover every local community in the county and thereby improve and extend the news service. We have raised the number of our correspondents from twen- ty to fifty-six in a territory thirty-six miles square, in addition to our regular editorial stafif at Princeton. These correspondents are volunteers who contribute items of news each week from their community in a total volume of from fourteen to twenty columns without other remuneration than a free copy of the paper. We could not afford to maintain such a large corps of correspondents if we had to pay them in cash, but we have tried 296 The Press Congress of the World to make our paper represent our county in such a way that in contributing to our news columns these correspondents feel they are serving their community and take a certain pride in the dis- tinction. The correspondents for the most part are persons of prominence in the community. They include teachers, justices of the peace, housewives, ministers and farmers. Many of them have served for more than twenty years and usually when they drop out they arrange with others to take their places. We sel- dom have to look for a new correspondent to fill a vacancy. We got a foothold in the towns outside of Princeton by send- ing special staff men into them and "writing up" the town. We picked out the leading industries and the leading citizens and the leading things of interest in them and in special articles, illus- trated with pictures, we touched the local pride of the people to work up a friendly attitude toward the paper. Then our solicitors were sent in to sell subscriptions and by this method our circula- tion was greatly increased. That was about fifteen years ago. Never since then have we permitted our circulation to take a slump. We have never lost sight of the fact that we are selling news and that the only reason people buy our paper is to get the news. Like the wise merchants, we aim to give our patrons the best on the market at the lowest possible cost and we have cen- tered our efforts on putting out a good newspaper. We print all the news that we can get hold of in our territory and pass it on to our readers in as interesting a fashion as our staff can present it. We do not suppress legitimate news through fear or favor nor do we permit personal animosities to creep into our news or edi- torial columns. We strive to conduct the Republican so that it will command the respect and confidence of our readers and keep them constantly with us. That we have succeeded is evident by the fact that we have many names on our list that have been there for half a century and in numerous instances there are as many as three generations of the same family taking our paper. The Republican has grown in circulation in the last fifteen years from 2,500 to 7,100 in a territory where approximately 35,000 of the inhabitants speak the English language. This is an average of one copy to every five persons. There are nine rural delivery routes radiating from the city of Princeton and there is an average of ninety-six mail boxes on each route. The average Proceedings of the Congress 297 number of Republicans going on these routes is eighty-eight. The RepubHcan goes into eighty-five per cent of the mail boxes on the rural routes in the whole county. Our subscription agents report that they sometimes run across thirty to fifty farm homes in suc- cession in which the Republican is read. During the last year we put seven hundred new subscribers on our list, and over four hun- dred of this gain came voluntarily through the mails or at the office, while less than three hundred of the gain was received by solicitation. The subscription price of the paper is now, and for the last fifty-four years has been, two dollars a year. The growth of the Republican to a point where it has the largest circulation of any county weekly newspaper in the United States has not been sudden or miraculous. It has been the result of years of patient and painstaking effort to serve the best in- terests of the community. We have tried to incorporate in the Republican the highest ideals of newspaper making and have been rewarded by the whole-hearted support of our people. What the Republican has done in Bureau County, Illinois, any newspaper can do in its particular field. Human nature is the same the world over and while the experiences here recounted have been realized in a district in the central or an agricultural portion of the United States, I believe they can be achieved in any part of the civilized world. If I were to attempt to give any ad- vice to my fellow publishers assembled here in this Congress, it would be this : strive first to produce the best newspaper within your power and all things else will come unto you. (Applause.) THE CHAIRMAN: The Chair may add that Mr. Bailey practices what he preaches in his paper. MR. MARK COHEN: I would like to place before this meeting for information only at this time the following draft resolution : Membership. Resolved, That memberships in the Press Congress of the World shall be of three classes as follows : (a) individual memberships with dues of $5 annually in the coin of the United States, (b) corporate member- ships with dues of $50 annually in the coin of the United States and (c) sustaining memberships to be held by persons, corporations or institutions contributing any amount to the support of the Congress. 298 The Press Congress of the World Resolved, further, That individual or corporate members shall be en- titled to one vote "at meetings of the Congress but that sustaining member- ships shall not include the voting power. THE CHAIRMAN : The report will be held over until to- morrow. The Chair presents to you now Colonel Lawson for discus- sion of "Preparation for Journalism in Great Britain." COLONEL LAWSON: First of all, as Chairman of the Resolutions Committee, I should like to report on the action which has been taken. Resolutions as subinitted and approved will be submitted at the session tomorrow at a time to be ap- pointed by the President, and unless the President should direct otherwise, the resolutions will be taken in the order in which I read them. First of all comes a resolution as to the Constitution, sub- mitted by Mr. Mark Cohen. Next a resolution proposed by Mr. S. E. DeRackin. The third is on the question of communications. The next was moved by Mr. McClatchy. Next, a motion offered by Mr. Sugimura. Next, a resolution proposed by Mr. Saxe. Next, one proposed by Mr. Wong of China. There is also the possibility that two further resolutions will be brought forward, one which is now being drafted by Mr. Nieva of the Philippines and another being drafted by Mr. Innes of Australia, on the subject of international travel, which are still to be submitted to the Resolutions Committee. The final resolution is for the Press Congress of the World to express appreciation of the hospitality it has received in these islands. I will not divulge the wording of that resolution at this moment. It is moved by Mr. Innes and seconded by Mr. Glass, supported by Mr. Tong of China. I will now proceed to my subject. I feel that it is not quite right that I should be addressing you on this subject. I have al- ready held the platform once, but I have come a long way and represent many different institutions. When I spoke on the ques- tion of communications I was representing the Empire Press Union. The Institute of Journalists particularly asked me to let this Congress know what has been done in the way of journalistic education in England and finds me the excuse for addressing you. Proceedings of the Congress 299 I see on looking through it that a great deal of my address has been struck out as of no importance by the one Honolulu paper to which I gave the only copy, so any slight difficulties there may be in my getting through with it, you will understand are through no fault of my own. This subject of journaHstic education is one which I ap- proach with particular interest as a member of the British Insti- tute of Journalists, and as its accredited representative to the meeting of the Press Congress of the World at Honolulu. The Institute of Journalists is a Victorian institution whose aim and object is in the words of its charter, "the promotion of whatever may tend to be the elevation of the status and the improvement of the qualifications of all members of the journalistic profession and the promotion by all reasonable means of the interests of journal- ists and journalism.' The Institute has done in the past a great deal of valuable ser- vice in restoring and improving such rights in British law and recognition in the British social and political commonwealth as have accrued to journalists and journalism by the merits of the service. Much of this story and its connotation in the history of the world's press is already known to the President of this Congress. With such a President and such a Congress it may not be neces- sary to excuse one's self for recalling that at least by intention the Institute of Journalists was amongst the first — if not quite the first — to connect professional education with professional associ- ation for journalists. If our delegation to Honolulu is not nu- merous you will remember with indulgence that the Institute of Journalists sent the largest delegation of any country except the United States to the first World's Congress of the Press called by American conveners. The President will be able to correct our history if it is at fault but we have the impression that the School of Journalism of the University of Missouri was a direct off- spring of the World's Congress held at St. Louis in the great ex- hibition year. Having given such evidence of good international and professional spirit, I must in honesty and candor, in continu- ing to speak of professional education, decline upon a minor key. For we have not yet succeeded in establishing in any British uni- versity or in any other manner or connection that can be regarded 300 The Press Congress of the World as sufficiently complying with our own conception of the needs and opportunities of the undertaking, any complete system or provision of professional education. We made powerful and gen- erous friends among the leaders of our press, but for all that our professional society has on professional issues and objects been fighting a soldier's battle. A few words concerning our successes and failures to estab- lish professional education for journalists on effective and per- manent bases may be a serviceable contribution to this debate. Several of our universities have set up courses of study shaped and very usefully shaped to the purposes of intending journalists. But they have not hitherto succeeded in enlisting enough of the intimate, constructive, and enduring teaching of and training in the technique — the typical actualities of modern journalism — to enable them to develop into schools of a kind in any way com- parable with the schools of journalism at the University of Mis- souri, at Columbia University, and at others of the American universities. Most recently we have turned with hope towards a new endeavor identified with the institution, in 1919, of a course of journalism at the University of London. Such courses have been instituted before, and similar proposals have been many times considered between the Institute of Journalists and repre- sentatives of London and other British universities. But the in- stitution of the present London University courses had two pre- cipitating causes. One was a visit to our institute in December 1918, of Professor CunlifTe of Columbia University and one or two of his colleagues of the American University schools of journalism and when the subject was redebated in our hall against the great newspaper offices of Fleet Street between these gentle- men, Sir Sidney Lee, Dean of Arts of London University, and the President and some senior and official members of our body cor- porate, the University Senate appointed a journalism committee — primarily of teachers of the University and of its colleges — to which our institute sent representatives, as also did the National Union of Journalists, and to which a number of other well known journalists were elected. A three years' course was devised by this committee chiefly by the personal instrumentality of its chairman, Sir Sidney Lee. This course has been carried through for the first time and the diploma Proceedings of the Congress 301 examination held. Amongst the students were many who had practical experience in journalism and for the second course it appears that there will be quite sufficient students not only to jus- tify and require the continuance of the undertaking, but to give it the prospect of development and permanence. Like all undertakings this effort of London University has had to meet with considerable criticism. The course may not be ideal but the university does not claim to give a diploma in jour- nalism but a diploma for journalism. In its own words it strives "to promote the efficiency of those intending to pursue the pro- fession of journalism." Students are warned that before entering their first session they are expected to make themselves proficient in shorthand and typewriting. But the university student journal- ist is still expected to obtain the more technical elements of his qualification by practice as a pupil in the ordinary duties of a member of the editorial stafif. Practically nothing of technical teaching is included in the courses. English composition includes essay writing and practice in writing for the press, principles of art and literary criticism are taught, and the whole system of teaching has reference to its special application, but it is fair to say that the London School teaches academic and not technical subjects. To a journalist member of the Joint Committee a young jour- nalist ex-officer wrote, early in July: "I have received from the University of London a pre- liminary announcement of their Journalism Course, and I am disappointed. Instead of its being a course in Journalism it is one in Arts and Science, useful, I admit, in perfecting one's general knowledge, but hopelessly out of place to a student of journalism. 1. Newspaper make up; 2. Comparative journalism ; 3. Newspaper direction ; 4. Editorial policy and writing; 5. News gathering and editing; 6. Principles of advertising; 7. The County Newspaper ; 8. Agricultural journalism ; 9. Advanced news writing; 302 The Press Congress of the World 10. Feature writing and illustration; 11. Rural newspaper management. These headings I am clipping from the 1916-1917 an- nouncement of the Missouri School of Journalism from where I am receiving their treatises on the different jour- nalistic problems enumerated. I conceived that your committee would rise to the oc- casion and give to the rising generation some such course, instead of some theoretical nonsense, useful only to the special writer. So I am afraid I have no use for the course, much as I should like to study certain of the subjects if I had the time, and was not the bread-winner of a wife and family. Above all things I aim at being practical in my studies if I am to attain to a place of controlling interest in the profession." Subjects taught are "A" (1), English composition. Two of the following (2) Principles of Criticism (3) History of Political Ideas (4) General History and Development of Science ; and three of the following (5) EngHsh Literature, (6) History (7) Political Science (8) Economics (9) Modern Languages (10) Natural Science (biological) (11) Natural Science (Physio- Chemical) (12) Philosophy and Psychology. Some of the criticism has been extremely just — the technical training is not included — therein lies the whole problem of all education, not only of journalistic education. I could not venture to suggest exactly just what should be the brand of specialized and general education in the ideal jour- nalistic education. In conjunction with our own schemes I have studied the curricula of of Columbia University and the University of Missouri and have read much that has been spoken and written on the subject and have, I confess, come back almost to where I started. As every good journalist should I fully recognize the necessity of professional education and I am here for information. I had very much hoped that we should have the great privilege of hearing President Williams on this question. We recognize that the United States is far ahead of us in this matter, and I am here to assist in carrying back the information of what it is doing. Speaking as a private person and not as a delegate, I should like to make a few observations. Proceedings of the Congress 303 Journalism recruits the ranks of her writers from everywhere and it is obviously impossible for all journalists to be qualified by a test examination like the bar, medicine and other learned pro- fessions. And after all who can say what are to be the limits of the curricuhmi of the journalists? The requirements of his knowl- edge are as extensive as the scope of the paper for which he writes. A knowledge of philosophy, law, history, economics, and science are of great value, if not essential. A conversational pro- ficiency in modern languages in Europe, at any rate, is a very great asset. If his knowledge of these subjects is not very pro- found it must at any rate be deep enough for him to know where to find the information which he does not possess. He may be called upon to lay down the law on any conceivable subject, and more is required of him than mere facility of expression. Above all in these courses of instruction we desire to achieve some measures of success not only in promoting the interest of the intending journalist, but to raise the level of the press as a whole by improving the education of those who serve it. Journalism may not be literature. Lord Morley was accused of saying that journalism is literature in a hurry, but much of what is written in our daily papers is not perhaps purely ephem- eral — much I trust is. The primary purpose of a daily newspaper is admittedly not the cultivation of letters but the presentation of news, but I believe that very few of us rightly estimate the edu- cative value of the modern newspaper, and when we talk of the education of journalists we are talking of the education of per- haps the only professors under whom enormous numbers of our modern reading public study. We must not be tempted to regard our profession solely as an industry and not as an art. To write and to write well is an art. It is true that by overstressing the technical side of the education you would not deprive journalism of its literary merit. Numbers of journalists will always go into the profession from the love of literature because they want to write and because they think they can write. They do not go in because they want to disseminate news. They do not even go in because they want to make money. Men of their talents and abil- ity can make much more money elsewhere. Do not think that in discussing this subject I think that every one who takes this course is going to be an editor or a leader 304 The Press Congress of the World writer. There are many of our profession who do most of their writing with a blue pencil, many more do not write at all. But as we have only attempted the education of the editorial man, I con- fine myself to that. I think that we can, we ought, to insure that every man who enters the ranks has the field marshal's baton in his knapsack, and not predestine the journalistic graduate to finish his life as a sub-editor or reporter. Perhaps after all one is driven back to the fundamental difiference between the two schools of thought in journalistic education, those who desire to turn out the finished product fit to take his place in the economic world, and those who would leave the greater part of the technical edu- cation to be acquired as a pupil in a newspaper office. Nobody wants to plunge the boy fresh from school into the thick of press work as was done in the old days. But is it or is it not pos- sible to give a young man his technical education outside a news- paper office ? Can any laboratory, however complete its organiza- tion and however real its conditions, represent what is required for the fevered struggle of modern competitive journalism? If you do not give the technical education you delay the time at which your student can arrive at his full salary-earning capac- ity, and it may be urged that the journalistic student has little advantage over the man who has received another form of final education. Against that he has the advantage of the wider education which the other man may have received, and a good deal of training be- sides in its special application to the uses of journalism. If you neglect the wider education you may have deprived your student of an inestimable advantage. There is a certain time when a man can study and derive the fullest advantage from it. A man is never too old to learn but there is a time when one prefers to pick up what comes to him rather than go out to get it, to settle down to serious work. And when can the man who has commenced his journalistic career better his education? Even in the improved modern condition of hours and work the general utility man on a newspaper has very little time of his own to devote to widening the sphere of his knowledge. If there is any doubt about the ideal proportion of technical and general education, I may be conservative or even reactionary, i^Mj-.^ JOHX HEXRV KESSELL, Gladstone, (.jueenslaxo, Australia; HER- BERT ARTHUR DAVIE8, Melbourne, Australl\; ANDREW DL'XX, RocKHAMPTON. QUEEsSLANO, AUSTRALIA. (Upper, left to right). MOTOSADA ZU.MOTO. Tokyo. (ctMiter. U-ft ) ; K. SI'(H:\H'RA. Tokyo. ( center, right ) . HIX WONG, Canton, China; Il()l.LiX(rrON K. TOXG, Peking, China; (tRP:GORIA NIEVA, Manila. Philippine Islands. ( Eower, left to right). Proceedings of the Congress 305 but I should like to put in a plea for erring on the broad side. Nothing which a man can get later can ever replace the deeper training of the mind which a man can acquire when he is at the receptive age. The wider a man's education, the wider will be his sympathies and the result will be a better journalist and a better citizen. There is another side of journalistic education which we in England are not neglecting, the education of the man who is al- ready in the profession. Here again our will outstrips our accom- plishment but we are doing our best. The Empire Press Union of the council of which I am a member are preparing a scheme of travel scholarships for journalists with reference to which Mr. Robert Donald has been in communication with the President of this Congress and with other leaders of American education. I have spoken too much. This is a subject in which speaking for myself I am here to learn. But I wished to assure you that in England, although we may not have accomplished much, we too have the best interests of our profession at heart and have not neglected the question of journalistic education. And when we consider this question we want to envisage it on its very broadest lines, we want to maintain the loftiest conception of the greatness of our profession. We should consider it our duty to leave jour- nalism better than we find it. But we have a double duty. We want to make it better as a means of livelihood for the capable worker, we want to give the man who wants to adopt this pro- fession the best advantages of entry and qualification, but more than that we want to raise journalism to a higher sphere than it has ever reached before and make it better as an instrument for the service of the human race. I should very much like to hear from President Williams and hope to have that very great priv- ilege. (Applause.) THE CHAIRMAN : The Chair may be permitted to disagree in the name of the Congress with the copy reader or sub-editor on the Honolulu newspaper and to say that nothing should have been struck out of the remarks that Colonel Lawson has just made. The resolutions which he read as coming from the different delegates to the Committee on Resolutions will be considered to- morrow morning beginning at ten o'clock if possible. The Con- 20 306 The Press Congress of the World gress will meet at nine for other business preceding the consider- ation of those resolutions. The resolutions will be considered in the order suggested by the committee. We are fortunate in having as our next speaker the President of the Australian Journalists Association, an organization which is distinctive in character and somewhat different in accomplish- ment from press organizations with which most of us are ac- quainted. I have genuine pleasure in presenting to you at this time, Mr. H. A. Davies, of the Melbourne Argus, the President of the Australian Journalists Association. MR. DAVIES : In dealing with the subject of what prepa- ration is desirable for journalism one cannot lay down hard and fast rules. Where there is a natural aptitude for the profession, little preparation beyond a sound education is necessary. But even the man or woman who has a flair for newspaper work can be wonderfully improved by a course of study in suitable subjects. It is obvious that the gift known in the newspaper world as a "nose for news" cannot be developed, but a very good imitation can be obtained by a newspaper man who realizes that this sense is lack- ing and who resolutely sets out to acquire a procedure to be adopt- ed in any set of circumstances. Thus he equips himself to meet any emergency and protects himself against leaving any avenue of inquiry unexplored. The art of writing correct English in an attractive form can also be acquired by one who is not born with gift of writing brilliant descriptive matters. The Australian Jour- nalists Association, over which I have the honor to preside, and which includes among its members editors, leader writers, re- porters, authors, press artists, press photographers, licensed short- hand writers, and members of the parliamentary Hansard staffs, having devoted the earlier years of its existence to improving the conditions of journalism in Australia is now actively engaged in improving the journalists themselves. Exhaustive investigations have been made into the best course of study for journalists to pursue, and, while we do not claim that anything like perfection has been reached we do believe that as the result of our efforts substantial progress has been made along the road to higher efifi- ciency. This belief is buttressed by comments made by Lord Northclifife during his recent visit to Australia. In the course of my paper I shall refer to the work being done Proceedings of the Congress 307 in the various states which form the Commonwealth of Australia and in order that members of the Congress may properly under- stand the position I propose at first to give a brief description of the Australian Journalists Association which occupies a unique position in the newspaper world. Previous to 1911 newspaper work in Australia was not attractive. The salaries paid (except on one or two of the leading metropolitan journals) were small, men were required to work inordinately long hours and there was little opportunity for home or social life. It was realized that in offices where the men worked reasonable hours and received fair remuneration the proprietors carried on at a considerable dis- advantage compared with papers which, by paying low wages and working long hours, produced a cheaper publication. Therefore in 1911 the Australian Journalists Association was formed. The new body made rapid progress and by its efforts the lot of the newspaper man has not only been made more comfortable, but the general standard of efficiency among Australian journalists has been raised. The Australian Journalists Association is a federal body with districts in each state, governed by a state or district committee, which is responsible to a Federal Council meeting once a year. The executive work, where it is not delegated to a district, is car- ried on by a federal executive committee, upon which each state is represented, and which meets weekly in Melbourne, the head- quarters of the association. The new association upon its forma- tion was registered under the Commonwealth Conciliation and Arbitration Act, a course later followed by ship captains and officers, actors and medical officers in the employ of the Federal Quarantine and Health departments. The objects of the associa- tion are: (A) To combine the journalists and allied press workers of Australia so that the Association may represent them or act for them in any matters connected with their calling. (B) To encourage and where possible initiate whatever may tend towards the improvement of the status, training and quali- fications of all classes of journalists. (C) To formulate in so far as may be found desirable pro- fessional usages and customs of journalists ; and to formulate, protect and extend when necessary the beneficial privileges of the press. 308 The Press Congress of the World (D) To mediate in regard to, and, if possible, to reconcile disputes affecting members of the association. (E) To watch all legislative or other proposals which may- affect journalists in the discharge of their professional duties. (F) To devise a scheme or system of providence against age, sickness, death, misfortune or unemployment. (G) To regulate and protect the conditions of work and the relation between employers and employees ; to provide legal as- sistance in defense of the rights of members ; to promote the gen- eral welfare of members and to improve the relations between employers and employees. (H) To take advantage of the machinery provided by legis- lation for the prevention and settlement of industrial disputes. The association has no political faith. Naturally, it could not as its members include journalists employed on newspapers of every political faith. Its sole aim is the welfare of journalism. One of the first acts of the newly formed organization was to meet in conference the proprietors of the newspapers published in the six capital cities of the Commonwealth, and an agreement was entered into which assured to the newspaper man a fixed amount of leisure time in each week. This agreement was subsequently amended by an award of the Commonwealth Arbitration Court in which the deputy president (a justice of the High Court of Aus- tralia) considered the position adopted by the association so reasonable that he granted the claims in full. In Australia nowa- days, the newspaper man works 46 hours in each week (40 hours if constantly employed after midnight), receives one and a half days off in each week and three weeks holiday on full pay each year. This concession has a direct bearing upon the subject of this paper, for it ensures to the journalist who is undertaking the course of study we have arranged at the universities, a fixed amount of leisure time in each week. A tired brain refuses to coin bright and feeling phrases and the beneficial effect on rea- sonably short hours has been recognized by Lord Northcliffe, who is one of the most successful newspaper proprietors in the world. Speaking at a reception given him by the Australian Journalists Association in Melbourne last month he said: "I was the first newspaper proprietor in England to introduce the five I Proceedings of the Congress 309 days week for my staff. I have found that short hours make bright newspapers." Owing to the infinitely varied nature of the work performed by newspaper staffs, it was found to be impossible to classify the duties, so a system was adopted of dividing the staffs into fifths. Three-fifths of the newspaper staffs are senior reporters — men capable of performing any function — one-fifth are general re- porters and one-fifth junior reporters. Cadets, or young men in training as journalists, are allowed in the proportion of one to every five members of the classified staff. The minimum salaries payable (taking the normal rate of exchange of $4.86 to the pound) are — isenior reporters, $46.00 a week, generals $40.00 a week and juniors $30.00 a week. It must be remembered that these are the minimum rates. Good men command substantially higher salaries and on most all of the newspapers are men receiving above the minimum. In the case of the Melbourne Herald, whose asso- ciate editor (Mr. Guy Innes) is present at this Congress, every member of the staff receives a salary in excess of the minimum. This is a brief resume of the principal work performed by our association in improving the conditions of journalism in Aus- tralia. It gives me great pleasure to say that all this has been achieved without generating any bitterness. The relations between the proprietaries of the newspapers and the Australian Journalists Association are most cordial. In fact one of my close friends is a man whom I am sometimes called upon to meet on the other side of the conference table. The whole aim of the Australian Journalists Association is to raise the standard of journalism and to make the profession one that will attract to it young men of ability and to insure that that ability will meet with its reward. During the past three years the Australian Journalists Asso- ciation has devoted much time to the improvement of journalists themselves. In May, 1919, a committee of the Association con- ducted an exhaustive inquiry into the question of the higher edu- cation of journalists. Opinions were obtained from university professors, newspaper editors, leading journalists, commercial men, and publicists and the results, with the recommendations of the committee, have been embodied in a pamphlet. I have copies of this pamphlet with me and will be pleased to give one to any 310 The Press Congress of the World delegate who is interested in the subject. After considering the report, the Austrahan JournaHsts Association made the following recommendations : That efforts be made to secure the establish- ment of a course for journalists at each of the Australian uni- versities, that the course be as nearly as possible identical with the arts course with the addition of lectures and examinations in journalism, and that the classes be open to matriculated students and to all other persons of adequate scholastic attainments. Immediately the various district committees set to work and the following schemes are now in operation : Victoria. Negotiations between the Victoria district and the authorities of the Melbourne University were successful, a course upon the completion of which a diploma of journalism will be granted, being agreed upon. A number of journalists are now taking this course. Matriculation is not required but the students before being permitted to embark upon the course are examined by a joint committee of the University stafif and the Australian Journal- ists Association which decides upon the fitness of the can- didates. The subjects to be passed before the diploma is granted are : English, three subjects of the history or economics group for the B. A. degree and two other subjects in the course for the B. A. degree. After completing the six subjects set out above the stu- dent must pass a test in practical journalism and must also show evidence of at least four years experience in newspaper work. The requirement is a wide selection of subjects as follows: Group 1 : Greek, Latin, English, French, German, the science of language and comparative philology, English language and philosophy. Group 2: (History and political science) British History, European history, ancient history, political economy, modern political institutions, sociology. Group 3: (Philosophy and pure mathematics, (psychology, logic and ethics, history of philosophy, advanced logic, advanced ethics, metaphysics and pure mathematics. Group 4: (Science) Mixed mathematics, natural philosophy, chemistry, zoology, botany, and geology. Proceedings of the Congress 311 QUEIENSLAND. In this state also the district committee of the Australia JournaHsts Association has arranged for a special course of study for journalists extending over at least two years and on tie successful completion of which a diploma of journalism will be granted upon the production of a certificate from the Australian Journalists Association that the candidates have satisfactorily come through three years' practical expe- rience in journalism. Admission to the course is by applica- tion to a joint committee of the Australia Journalists Associa- tion and the University Senate. The course comprises four single subjects and not more than two may be attempted in any one year. They are, English, British history (or an alternative course), economics, including economic history and one only of the following: Latin, Greek, French, German, constitutional history, political science, ancient history, logic and psychology, ethics and metaphysics, pure mathematics, applied mathematics, biology, chemistry, geology and mineralogy, physics. Western Australia By arrangement with the West Australian District of the Australian Journalists Association the Perth University has instituted a special course for journalists. Two lectures a week are given but there is no examination at the end of the course nor is any degree or diploma granted. Arrangements have also been made for members of the association in the country towns to be supplied with synopses of the lectures. The district has also established a library from which those attending the course may obtain the text and reference books recommended by the lec- turers. New South Wales Lectures are also given in New South Wales but here again there is no examination. English literature is mainly dealt with, each lecture lasting an hour, after which there is a discussion for another hour upon the subject of the lecture. In the progressive series of lectures already given, writers from Shakespeare to the leading writers of the present day, have been discussed. 312 The Press Congress of the World In the other states it has not yet been found possible to in- stitute courses, the university authorities in some cases not being favorably disposed towards the scheme. It will be seen, how- ever, that much work is being done in Australia to encourage and assist the working journalist to increase his store of knowl- edge. It is obvious that a purely academic course will not in itself fit any young man for a position on the press, but when practical experience in the rough and tumble of newspaper work is fortified by a wide knowledge of such subjects as literature, economics, history, French and one of the sciences the journalist must of necessity be better equipped for his work. That the systems which have been adopted in Australia have not been without result is shown by a statement made by Lord North- clifife in Melbourne when he said : "The level of efficiency of reporters in Australia is very high. So far as I am aware, have not once been, misreported since I have been in the Com- monwealth." Some weeks later in a speech at Brisbane he said: "I have not seen any 'go-slow' in Australian newspaper offices. Most of the offices are as good as any we have in England, con- sidering the populations you have to deal with. I have been in the offices of your great newspapers in Melbourne and Sydney and they are equally efficient. The whole tone of the press in Australia is on a very high plane and the editorial articles are just as well written as in England." These words are very en- couraging to our association and are a striking testimony to the success of its efforts to improve the status and qualifications of its members. There is another factor in the training of journalists, that is, travel. This opens up a wide field for discussion and I will not attempt to deal with it fully in this paper. But I would like to suggest to this Congress that it should discuss proposals for the frequent interchange of journalists between the various coun- tries, particularly between America and Australia. It is my be- lief that many misunderstandings and misconceptions would be avoided if we had a better knowledge of one another's afifairs. It might be possible for a newspaper proprietary in New York, Chicago, or other large cities to arrange with a Melbourne or Sydney newspaper to exchange bright young men at yearly or two-yearly intervals. If the selection be delegated to the Aus- Proceedings of the Congress 313 tralia Journalists Association (as was the selection of the Of- ficial Australian Correspondent and Historian of the War) I can assure the congress that none but the best will be sent. Bet- ter mutual understandings, thus fostered through those who in- form the public, will strengthen the bonds of friendship between the two countries and will also make for greater knowledge and efificiency on the part of the journalists concerned. (Applause.) THE CHAIRMAN : The Chair may be permitted to remark that even more could be said in praise of this work in Australia than its president has just said to us. We have had the privilege of hearing a representative of China coming from Peking in North China, and another repre- sentative from Shanghai, which is an international settlement in mid-China ; now we have the third representative of this great country, who comes from Canton, South China, He is the editor of the Star of Canton and the representative in Canton of the Associated Press and of Reuters, — the first Chinese, I think, to be appointed to so important a position by news serv- ices. I present Mr. Hin Wong of Canton, China. MR. WONG: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: I have been requested by the Chinese delegation to thank the Congress for the time allotted to them, and also to say that we very much appreciate the many kind words spoken by the Japanese delega- tion regarding China. The subject I am to speak on this morning is, "Why Not a Journalistic Mission to China?" China must get into the world or the world will get into it. China must decide to assume her responsibility in the world in accordance with her power, position, and ability, or she will be forced to do so by others in manners detrimental to her sta- tion and interest. To ascend to her rightful place in the family of nations, while she should chiefly rely upon her own people, China cannot afford to refuse encouragement and guidance from friends abroad. Friends of China are assisting her in various ways, especially through the many religious and scientific missions now operat- ing in the diflferent centers of the RepubHc. They are adopt- ing a very wise policy. They try to impart into the Chinese what 314 The Press Congress of the World the West knows and extract from this ancient race the best it possesses, always working in co-operation with the Chinese people themselves, so that the knowledge of one nation may be shared by many and the achievement of a few be an inspiration to all. The world is meeting China half-way in her struggle to ad- vance towards the higher position from which she may render her service as a great and influential power. And many indi- viduals and organizations are either thinking, talking, or writing of her problems at home or actually laboring for her welfare on her own field. Aside from the labors of the Christian mission seeking to echo back to Asia the Oriental message of universal brother- hood and unselfish service, there are many departments of ac- tivities now at work in China under the auspices of foreign or- ganizations or by joint management of foreigners and Chinese. It is safe to say that the Chinese will welcome all co-opera- tion in matters of social reform and education and matters tend- ing to promote international friendship and commerce and in- dustry. British merchants and manufacturers have established courses in engineering and commerce in the Hongkong University for the purpose of training and enabling Young China to apply the intelligence and ability of the race to the development of Chinese resources as far as possible in the light of modern learning and foreign experience. The Pennsylvania, the Kansas, and other American State Colleges are co-operating with institutions in China in the study of Western and Chinese systems of agricul- ture and forestry, while the Yale and other Universities have branches in China to teach medical science and institute re- searches regarding Chinese medicine. In Shanghai, the largest port in China, there is a school with courses in law and po- litical science which are taught by capable British and American lawyers. The Rockefeller Foundation from America has just inaugurated a scheme in Peking for the spread of medical edu- cation in China, opening a school and a hospital with an equip- ment second to none in the world. The Chinese-American Edu- cational Mission, made possible through the remission by the United States of the Boxer Indemnity, is being followed by the Proceedings of the Congress 315 organization of a Chinese-French Educational Society, through which many hundred Chinese students are now studying in col- leges in France. Seattle and other leading cities of the world are making arrangements through which Chinese students abroad may obtain practical experience in their shops and offices after graduation from schools before returning to China to take up their life work, and some well-known firms — Chinese and for- eign — in China are supporting students in English and American colleges in Great Britain and the United States. The Interna- tional Silk Association with offices in New York is financing a course in sericulture in Canton Christian College, while foreign architects sent by foreign governments or missions to China to design consular buildings or school houses are doing great service by utilizing native materials and skill in working out Western ideas and thus harmonizing the East and the West in an important development of the arts and sciences at the same time proving that Chinese and foreigners can work together. Exchange of professors between Chinese and American schools has begun to develop as a promising medium of intercourse in the intellectual field ; and the Y. M. C. A., the Red Cross, and other religious and philanthropic agencies are greatly helping the world to better appreciate the moral assistance needed by the Chinese. In addition to what has been mentioned, the occasional in- dustrial and parliamentary missions from foreign countries to China are also helping the world to better understand China. It is safe to assume that, while special missions for par- ticular purposes have their value both for China and for the benefit of the world at large, the different peoples must be brought closer to China through every day reading and every day life. Much injustice has been done to China because of ignorance of Chinese conditions on the part of foreigners and of the fail- ure on the part of Chinese leaders to make her cause and aspira- tions understood by the world. Much misconception regarding things Chinese exists, and it is high time that definite steps should be taken by Chinese and others interested to bring to the at- tention of the world the existence of a great people with incal- culable natural resources capable of bringing peace, prosperity, and happiness to mankind if properly developed and appreciated 316 The Press Congress of the World or curse and war to the world if misunderstood and mistreated. The Chinese are hoping that better means and faciHties may be devised and greater effort made by their own leaders and friends to bring Chinese news and views uncolored and unprej- udiced before the world, to advertise Chinese goods and products abroad, to have the best Chinese thought interpreted to other peoples, to correct misconceptions regarding China, to enlist more admirers and supporters for the Chinese people among the leaders of all circles in the West, to give prospective vis- itors to China advance information, to keep Chinese people at home and abroad better informed regarding the political, ec- onomic, social, educational progress of the world, to provide Chinese merchants and manufacturers with world intelligence on commerce and finance so as to assist them in the extension of their trade abroad, to gather for Chinese and foreign publications information which cannot easily be obtained through private and individual efforts, and to supplement some of the work already initiated by learned societies and special agencies. It is recognized that, under present conditions and with lim- ited resources, the Chinese press is unable to open expensive and extensive news agencies in the Far East, Europe, and America with representatives in the leading capitals and cities to supply Chinese information to the foreign press or send home important news of events affecting world interest and China in particular and political movements with which Chinese statesmen and pub- lic men should be in touch. The Chinese have realized the value of all this but they do not possess as yet the means and facilities to encourage and interest Chinese scholars and specialists to con- tribute to foreign newspapers and magazines on Chinese sub- jects or to translate from articles of the foreign press valuable to Chinese trade or politics. Very little has yet been done to arrange for Chinese and foreign schools to exchange student publications and for the printing of Chinese matters in the country or provincial press of the lead- ing nations of the world, in spite of the general admission that the common mass in the West and the East must be brought to- gether before real friendship between different peoples can be assured and maintained. It is a fact that, while many progres- sive enterprises of the people and notable acts of the Chinese Proceedings of the Congress 317 leaders and officials are not reported in the press, their mis- takes and errors are circulated throughout the world by agencies unfriendly to China and not seldom for political and selfish pur- pose. There are cases in which first-class Chinese goods are being sold as inferior and superior articles listed as second-class be- cause of lack of systematic watching and advertising abroad. And some of the merchants of one country will counterfeit the trade-marks of those of another in China in order to promote the trade of a particular country to the detriment of others. This is possible because of the inability of the Chinese to dis- tinguish the many foreign articles and many trade-marks. While names of foreign firms seeking connection with Chinese importers and exporters may sometimes be obtained from foreign con- sulates, a well-balanced and extensive international trade di- rectory including Chinese merchants and firms cannot be found. Improvements of Chinese goods and products as desired and demanded by foreign merchants do not come to the knowl- edge of the Chinese merchants and manufacturers mostly con- cerned. The best Chinese literature in arts and thought has not yet been translated for the benefit of the world. The good side as well as the bad must be seen before admiring and respecting Chinese ancient learning. And books written by foreigners on Chinese questions are often left unnoticed by Chinese from the Chinese point of view, not to speak of having them translated into the Chinese. It is surely necessary that an expression of opinion, views and comment, should be made by those most concerned in matters sometimes involving their national honor and territory. Chinese must know more about other people and be known by them in order to interest a large number of foreigners to visit China and bring them periodically, if possible, for conference and study on particular subjects. This is necessary if Chinese are to have more personal intercourse with leaders from all parts of the world or to accept the invitation from other coun- tries for visits of Chinese leaders in order to properly discuss Chinese foreign questions. It is most desirable and will be of advantage to both China and the world for a body like the Press Congress of the World to appoint or request the greater news agencies or press associa- 318 The Press Congress of the World tions of representative countries to constitute a commission to look into the condition, extent, methods, and purposes of the sev- eral news agencies, foreign and Chinese, now operating in China and the facilities now being offered by the cable and telegraph companies and the concessions given, if any, by the governments protecting the services. Inquiries might be made to ascertain if the more resourceful and greater press associations or individual newspapers interested in the publication of Chinese news abroad and the transmission of foreign information into China would organize a permanent international press service with head- quarters in Shanghai or some other large Chinese city to un- dertake publicity work in all parts of the world in accordance with the desire of the Chinese and as demanded by the foreign public for accurate presentation and fair interpretation of Chinese news and views. The leading news agencies of the world are now already maintaining correspondents in China and are also employing Chinese in their service to a more or less extent. Some of them furnish foreign news to the Chinese press. While the Chinese appreciate the service now provided them by the foreign agencies, they cannot honestly admit that everything supplied is welcomed. It cannot be denied that some of the information furnished to the press in China is greatly distorted and wrotigly interpreted for a variety of reasons. It must be pointed out, however, that the majority of the agencies now at work in China is not inspired by improper motives. And it is true to say that the country whose press agents are the most unfair and least accurate is the most distrusted by the Chinese. Some of the propaganda methods used by more than one people represented in China during the World War in order to gain Chinese sup- port and sympathy are being copied by the Chinese in their present civil war, and the value of these methods is still a subject of doubt. An impartial and international press service, organized to cover the affairs of one-fourth of the world's population for the benefit of the other three-fourths would discourage unreliable information, minimize distortion, and exclude the inefficient and partisan news agencies now rendering free service to the Chinese press. And such a service might continue to function until the Proceedings of the Congress 319 Chinese themselves should have the experience, ability, and re- source to direct it independently and create a public opinion capable of discriminating and judging all the reports coming into the country from outside. Foreign advertising experts and impartial news correspond- ents in China would have no difficulty in adjusting their ways to conform to the general policy to be adopted by an associated international press service, as special fields still require special information. A general book on physiology and hygiene, writ- ten in popular language intended for public circulation, cannot destroy the value of a technical work for medical and scientific students. The policy of the Open Door in China must be openly di- rected and discussed with equal facilities and given equal at- tention by all parts of the world, and any attempt to disregard and misinterpret it by a particular nation for selfish motive must be resisted by all seeking to have relationship with the Chinese people. Pacific problems must be solved through pacific means; and as the Chinese form the greater part of the Pacific popula- tion, no solution of Pacific problems will be satisfactory with- out their full knowledge and hearty support. Satisfactory re- organization of Europe and her reconstruction will not prevent another great world war; and peace will be better assured only when China also appreciates her position and possibility in the service of mankind. It is unwise to keep China in ignorance of world affairs and progress and take no heed of her latent power ; and further delay on the part of China to co-operate with the world in its many problems and demands will be dangerous not only to herself but also to every nation in the group. The ability to support one another depends on the amount of knowl- edge one has of the other. A journalistic mission to China has, in fact, been started in a small way, following more or less on the principle of the medical and agricultural missions to China from the foreign col- leges and universities. Many journalists, trained in the Univer- sity of Missouri, have accepted the claim of President Walter Williams that journalism has a world mission and is a public service. They are now engaged in this profession in the large cities in China, Japan, and the Philippines ; and a group of them, 320 The Press Congress of the World including a few Chinese, are controlling and editing at least one publication of international influence, although it deals principally in Chinese and Far Eastern questions for the information of people outside as well as inside China. It may not take long for the enterprising graduates of this institution to initiate a course in journalism in connection with some larger schools in China, as some graduates of Yale have founded a medical college in this country. Graduates of Missouri have organized the first advertising club in China and were the first advertising experts to interest a Chinese town to advertise its resources and advan- tages in a foreign newspaper. It is, indeed, a great joy and a real pleasure for one who has enjoyed the educational facilities offered by this Paradise of the Pacific and learned the high calling of his profession while serv- ing a newspaper here, and who was the first of his race from these islands to sit at the feet of the great teacher and leader of newspaper-making to endorse on behalf of the country of his origin the organization of a Pan-Pacific Press Congress. To prepare the way for a greater journalistic mission to China, many journalists should pay a visit to China, especially the city of Canton, where the Hawaiian hospitality can easily be duplicated. The President of the Constitutional Government of the Republic of China, Dr. Sun Yat-sen, has been a resident of Honolulu, and the Mayor of the city of Canton is a Maui boy and a former student of Honolulu schools. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN: What Mr. Wong has so impressively and simply said, particularly his closing sentences, is an indica- tion of what can be accomplished by meetings such as this and what may be accomplished by Chinese journalists who are, at personal sacrifice, giving their lives among their own people unto high public service. We have other addresses this afternoon. The next to the last on the program is an address by the Secretary. It is not his address, it is an address prepared for him, or rather pre- pared for the Congress, by Mr. J. E. Davidson, now the managing director of The Barrier Miner, Broken Hill, Australia, and first president of the Australian Journalists Association. His subject is "Journalism in Australia." It is particularly appropriate that Proceedings of the Congress 321 it should be read, with some additional comments I trust, by our worthy Secretary, Mr. Guy Innes, who was for a long time associated with Mr. Davidson on the Melbourne Evening Herald. MR. INNES: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen: Mr. Davidson has been more fortunate in his paper than Colonel Lawson was in his. Far from cutting portions out, the Star Bulletin has indorsed great sections of it with black marks, so I take it, it will approve of what Mr. Davidson has said. Mr. Davidson I might say is of American birth, an Ann Arbor boy. He was for some time on the Detroit Free Press ; then he came to Australia eventually becoming first president of the Australian Journalistic Association, a position which Mr. Davies occupies at present. This association has done more for the working journalist than any other body, and I have great pleasure in presenting his address : Eight hundred and forty-five newspapers supply Australia's five and a half millions of people with news and journalistic comment. Australian journalism compares favorably with that in any other part of the globe. From the editorial and com- mercial points of view, the bulk of the newspapers are ably conducted. In a social system in which the newspaper must necessarily be a commercial success in order to live, they maintain the highest ideals. There has never been ground, so far as I know, for suspicion that any newspaper of standing has ever been actuated in its policy or advocacy by self-seeking or cor- rupt motives. Bribery of the Australian press is unheard of. Its honesty of purpose is beyond question. The leading and special articles are vigorously written. The news on the whole is set out fairly and impartially. The style employed is generally crisp and pithy, but without any attempt at elaborate display. In the last ten years the evening newspapers, which have made rapid progress, have to some extent broken away from the un- written law in regard to the non-display of news, but the morn- ing papers still rigidly conform to it. In the same way, the evening newspapers have abandoned the practice of excluding pictorial features. Several of the most successful evening papers are now following the example set by the American press in that respect. On special occasions the morning papers use photo- graphic work, but not so generally as their evening contempo- 21 322 The Press Congress of the World raries. Line illustrations as used in the United States are rarely seen in Australian newspapers. A lack of humor is perhaps one of the outstanding features of Australian journalism. One rarely gets a laugh out of our daily press, unless it be a laugh at the intense seriousness of some of the political articles. Conscious humor is studiously avoided, so studiously avoided, that not infrequently unconscious humor is abundantly present. The Australian newspapers are originally modeled on the British type of journalism, to which type they still closely adhere. True to the British type, the Australian journalism is staid, weighty and serious. It worships at the shrine of dignity, and therefore in many of the leading daily newspapers humor is taboo. That is not to say there are no humorists among Australian newspaper men. As a fact, there is as high a percentage of them on the inky way under the South- ern Cross as among journalists elsewhere, but most of the witty newspaper matter and headings are only published in clubs or other places where the Australian newspaper men congregate. Several bright writers in Australia have, at different times, nearly lost their jobs, because in unguarded moments, they let a joke a creep into their "copy." ^^ On this phase of journalism many proprietors and managers have a perfect horror of what they call "Americanizing" their newspapers. A remonstrance to one manager in respect to the dull seriousness of his newspaper drew the remark, "My dear fellow, dullness and seriousness pay me. Tell me how to make my paper more solemn and serious and I'll listen to you." And there was wisdom in that apparent topsyturvy observation. There is nothing the Australian public resent more quickly or more em- phatically than innovations in its newspapers. The Australian newspaper reader likes his paper to have exact- ly the same appearance from day to day. He wishes to find its several features — the wool market, the mining news, the financial articles, the cabled and local news — all in precisely the same part of the paper each day. Further, he expects all the reports and articles to follow a stereotyped form. For that reason what is called the "lead" in American journalism is unknown in Australia. In Australia a newspaper story must start at the "beginning" and work up to a climax like the old three-volume Proceedings of the Congress 323 novel. A police court story must first of all set out when and where the court was held, who occupied the bench, the name of the accused, and the charge. The evidence tendered in the case must follow in the order submitted, and the fate of the person concerned must be carefully concealed until the last par- agraph is written; unless perchance it is disclosed in the head- line. In the case of one newspaper which departed from that formula the managing editor received numerous letters from readers to the effect that they objected to him turning "all the reports in the paper upsidedown." Until the Australian States federated and the Commonwealth of Australia was created, the newspapers devoted an inordinate amount of space to politics. This again was one of the jour- nalistic traditions handed down from the British type. The political writers were always the best-paid men, and the editors of the great daily newspapers were selected mainly on their political acumen. In those days most of the work in what Americans call the "human interest" domain was entrusted to the junior members of the staffs. While the states remained en- tirely separate entities, the big metropolitan newspapers wielded enormous political power, and on that power they flourished in a financial sense. More than fifty per cent of the Australian population is centered in the state capital cities, and that enabled the great newspapers to build up their immense political influence. Each paper strove to become a sort of political director, and the more powerful of them were indeed able to make and unmake State Ministries at their own sweet wills. The success of these papers led others to strive after similar effects, with the result that the real news side of journalism was neglected. The aim of every proprietor was to make his publication, not a first- class newspaper, but what some were pleased to term an "or- gan." In other words, a force in the formation of public opin- ion. When the Commonwealth was inaugurated, however, na- tional matters began to overshadow state affairs. Australia on a whole displaced the individual states in the minds of the people. Realizing that fact, the newspapers began to devote less space to state poHtics and more to Commonwealth politics ; but they 324 The Press Congress of the World had not nearly the same influence of power over the Federal (Commonwealth) Parliament or in Federal political matters as they had enjoyed in state matters. This was inevitable. The big metropolitan newspapers, while all-powerful in their own states, could do nothing to influence the electors of other states, simply because they have no circulation there. Therefore, since the establishment of the Commonwealth in 1900 the newspapers have devoted much more attention to general news as distin- guished from political news. In the early days of Australian journalism the newspapers were divided in the political field along a line somewhat similar to that existing in Great Britain. They belonged to one of two groups — Conservative or Liberal. The Conservative papers stood for the preservation of vested interests, chiefly those of the landed proprietors, men who had come to the new land from Great Britain and taken up large areas of pastoral country. These men were and still are, known as "squatters." On the other hand, the Liberal newspapers favored the breaking up of the holdings of the squatters into small areas with the object of absorbing the population which had been attracted to Australia by the gold discoveries, and in order to provide land for other immigrants. Later on, as secondary industries began to grow up, the di- vision was along the fiscal issue, except in New South Wales, the Australian home of free trade. The Conservative newspapers took up the cudgels on behalf of free trade and the importing interests, while the Liberal journals supported a policy of pro- tection for the new industries. In this battle the Liberal papers eventually won a decisive victory. In the first two Common- wealth Parliamentary elections after the states had federated, the free trade party was completely routed, since then, the fiscal issue has played a very insignificant part in Australian journalism. Even in New South Wales the contest against the policy of protection has been abandoned. Meanwhile, as secondary industries had multiplied, there had grown up in the big cities, almost unheeded by the news- papers, a large wage-earning population — artisans and factory operatives. That class of the population was augmented by the masses of unskilled laborers, created and encouraged to remain Proceedings of the Congress 325 unskilled by the expenditure by the State Governments of enor- mous sums of loan money borrowed from Great Britain. The steady growth of this proletarian population silently worked a tremendous change in the political thought of Australia, which again had its efifect on political journalism. For a time the proletarian class swung in behind the Liberal Party, as it did in Great Britain for nearly two centuries. This meant a vast ac- cession of power to the Liberal newspapers. But about 1890 — the year of the great hard fought strike in the shipping industry in Australia — the proletarian or working class population began to organize a political party of its own. This became, and is still, known as the Australian Labor Party. It was at the time wholly without newspaper support. For ten years the work of organization went on steadily, and ultimately changed the whole aspect of Australian political journalism. Conservative and Liberal newspapers, which had hitherto been fiercely fighting each other, began to find a common cause in hostility to the new party and its socialistic policy. Almost unconsciously, they joined forces to oppose sternly the now rapidly rising party. There was still here and there a slight dif- ference in the tone adopted toward certain measures proposed by the Labor Party, but in the broad sense both Conservative and Liberal journals were unanimously anti-Labor. Despite their combined efforts, they failed utterly to stem Labor's on- coming tide. Assisted, but not much, by three or four small weekly propa- ganda sheets, published in State Capital cities, the Labor Party eventually secured a majority in two or three of the State Legis- latures and in the Commonwealth Parliament. The political power and influence of the Australian newspapers were dealt a staggering blow, from which they have never recovered in a polit- ical sense. This was unmistakably demonstrated during the war period. On two occasions during that period the Commonwealth Government submitted to a referendum of the editors (adult suffrage) the question of whether the Australian army fighting abroad should be reinforced by means of military conscription. The Labor Party opposed military conscription and was supported by five small and feeble daily newspapers which it had meanwhile established. The whole of the powerful anti-Labor and non- 326 The Press Congress of the World Labor newspapers, numbering seven hundred throughout Aus- traHa, strongly advocated the principle of and need for military conscription. Clearly the old-established newspapers had lost their power to sway the people at will, though doubtless the element of strong self-interest and family interest in the con- scription question was beyond the reach of newspaper argument in the case of vast numbers of the electors. One result of this loss of influence is that the political side of Australian journalism is gradually losing much of the im- portance it once possessed. More and more attention is being paid to the world's news, received by cable, and to happenings af- fecting the general life of the community. In short, the Austra- lian newspaper is becoming less of a political machine, and there- fore truer to name. In addition to the weekly Labor papers already referred to the Labor party now publishes five daily journals, one each in Hobart (Tasmania), Adelaide (South Australia), Brisbane (Queensland), Ballarat (Victoria) and Broken Hill (New South Wales). There is no Labor daily press in either of the two chief cities — Melbourne and Sydney, although at the outbreak of the war the Labor party had a modern plant ready in Sydney to pro- duce a daily newspaper. Owing greatly to the narrow lines and narrow views which characterize the Labor papers as compared with their non-Labor opponents — which, again, is owing greatly to the fact that the leaders of the party have not yet learned the first essentials of newspaper management — little journalistic or financial success has yet been achieved by any Labor daily paper. All of them are dependent on constant and grudging financial sup- port from the Labor unions. The circulations, too, are exceed- ingly small, even among the working class, in comparison with those of non-Labor papers. One explanation of the poor cir- culations is that the Labor publications are not newspapers in the proper sense of that term. They may be described generally as propaganda sheets disguised as newspapers, and they are therefore neither one nor the other. They try to be both, and fail both ways. Another drawback to successful Labor journal- ism is that there are wide divisions within the party itself. These divisions cover sections such as the revolutionary communists, of the Karl Marx school; guild socialists; State socialists and Proceedings of the Congress 327 constitutional democrats. All these sections issue small weekly, fortnightly, or monthly newspapers which have little or no in- fluence on the mass of the proletariat. From the offices of most of the principal daily papers bulky general weekly newspapers are issued. There is usually one such weekly paper connected with each big daily paper pro- prietary. These publications are a distinctive feature of Aus- tralian journalism. They are not mere weekly enlargements of the dailies, but they are entirely separate publications under sep- arate titles. They contain summaries of the week's news, special agricultural, pastoral, horticultural and sporting articles, short and serial stories, and an illustrated section printed on art or supercalendared paper. Many of these are highclass productions and have large circulations, chiefly in the rural districts. Aus- tralia, however, is deficient in first-rate magazines and reviews, the reason being that its population is too small to carry them. Except at Sydney, in the State of New South Wales, there are no Sunday papers in Australia. In that city, however, three Sunday papers are published regularly, two of them from the offices of evening newspapers and one independently. All are built more or less on the lines of American Sunday papers. In several of the States the publication of regular Sunday papers is expressly forbidden by law. In those States it is provided that established newspapers may publish three Sunday editions dur- ing any one year, but then only if the matter contained in such editions is of national importance. Among the weekly publications there is one which is known in most parts of the English-speaking world. This is The Bulle- tin, published in Sydney, New South Wales. It is the nearest approach that Australia has to a national paper. In its make-up and range of matter there is nothing quite like it in the whole world of journalism. Founded by an extraordinarily brilliant Australian, whose outlook was essentially that of the average Australian, it has done much to mould national thought and char- acter. Seizing the field of humor and satire, left largely untouched by the daily newspapers, the founder of The Bulletin produced a paper brimful of those qualities. After the usual struggle, ow- ing to insufficient capital, it was a complete success. It handles 328 The Press Congress of the World politics, finance, art, literature, and the topics of the day from a broad national viewpoint, and all its articles, paragraphs, car- toons, caricatures and drawings are given a witty turn typically Australian. The humor is so adroitly mixed with sound common sense, good taste, solid argument, and lofty national sentiment that The Bulletin makes delightful reading. It is as popular with women readers as with men. Its contributors are to be found in all classes of the community, and in every remote corner of the island continent. It has done more to encourage and build up the short story writers and the black and white artists of Australia than any one paper in any other country has done for its writers and artists. It is popular in city, town and country. Indeed it has been said that if, on the long, lonely back country tracks of Australia, you meet a solitary swagman, bush worker, or sheep or cattle drover, he may ask you for a pipe of tobacco, but he is sure to ask for a copy of The Bulletin. And withal it is in the hands of practically every financier and statesman, ,J investor and business man in every part of the Continent. As is natural in a country so devoutly devoted to all forms of sport, the sporting papers are numerous. These follow closely the lines of the British and American sporting publications. The great handicap under which the Australian newspapers suffer is the cost of obtaining the world's big news. The bulk of this news is cabled from London, England, and in comparison with the cable charges to other countries, the rate per word is high. Two cable lines touch Australia, the Eastern Extension and the Pacific cables. The news is transmitted through those lines, but the heavy cost is a drain on the resources of the news- papers. The whole of the Australian press is dependent on three cable news organizations. One of these is controlled by the v morning newspapers of Sydney and Melbourne, formed into an «, association for that purpose. This association uses its own serv- 1- ice, and also sells it to the other morning papers in the capital * cities, and to one or two evening papers in the capital cities as !;' well. The other two cable news organizations are at present | ' working together under an agreement. They consist of a service | controlled by the evening paper in Sydney and another in Mel- "s^' bourne, and of the Reuter's Service. These services are sold to | other newspapers throughout Australia on a contributory basis which gives the contributors no voice in the management. Proceedings of the Congress 329 With slight variations the laws, libel and otherwise, govern- ing newspapers in Australia are the same in all the states of the Commonwealth. They are based on the British laws dealing with newspapers. So far as the law of libel is concerned, the principle is that nothing must be printed that is calculated to injure or damage a person in the eyes of his fellow-citizens. Under it a newspaper has no greater rights or privileges in com- menting on public affairs, or in criticizing public men or other persons, that are possessed by the ordinary citizen. The courts of justice are very strict on this point, and the libel law is re- sorted to by persons who consider themselves aggrieved much more frequently in Australia than is the case in America. The Australian citizen is much more sensitive in respect to what is said about him in the press than is his American cousin. The following instance, from my own experience, will il- lustrate the nervous condition of the Australian newspapers as regards the printing of libels. During the Broken Hill strike of 1919-20, when the whole city was laid idle for eighteen months, The Barrier Miner discovered that three of the strike leaders, while drawing strike pay coupons, were secretly receiving seven pounds a week for alleged services in procuring the attendance of union members for examination by a medical commission specially appointed by the Government, at the Union's request, to enquire into the health conditions at the mines. The leaders were suspected of opposing the work of the health commission, and so they were secretly paid salaries by the commission to counter- act their adverse intentions — a scheme which proved successful. The Barrier Miner, having got the men to unsuspectingly convict themselves out of their own mouths, telegraphed the facts, as specially good copy, to all its correspondent newspapers, and to all the other leading newspapers in Australia. But although the strike was a matter of great national concern, scarcely any, if any, dared to reproduce the exposure. The guilty men had published a threat of libel actions against any newspapers that should reprint the facts, and that sufficed to terrify the Australian press into silence. The men did begin suits against The Barrier Miner but they did not proceed to court. Meanwhile one of them was hounded out of office over the matter, and the others went out of their own accord. This is an example of the paralyzing effects of the libel nightmare on the Australian press. 330 The Press Congress of the World One law, peculiar to Australia, has been enacted by the Com- monwealth Parliament. This is contained in the Electoral Act, a law relating to and governing the election of members to the Commonwealth Parliament. In it there is a clause providing that between the date of the issue of a writ for an election, and the date of the return of the writ to the President of the Senate or the Speaker of the House of Representatives every article ap- pearing in any paper commenting on matter relating to the elec- tion must be signed by the writer thereof. This provision was brought forward by the Labor party, and was intended as a blow at the influence of the anti-Labor newspapers. It was considered that if the names of the writers of political articles were attached to them, it would detract from the weight of such articles. The underlying idea was to detach the force and influence of a paper from the article published in it, and to give them the appearance of expression of mere personal opinions by obscure writers. The intention of the law, however, has been fairly generally defeated whenever desired. This has been done by attaching to each article the names of the whole of the persons composing the editorial and leader-writing staff, by appending a statement that the article was written, after consultation, by "Brown Smith" or by printing a statement in some part of the newspaper to the effect that for any matter in the issue requiring a signature under the law, "Brown Smith," "Smith Brown," and "Jones Robinson" are responsible. Consequently it is exceedingly doubtful whether the law has had the effect desired by its framers. It has been the means of satisfying some idle curiosity as to the identity of the political '/ writers, but that is about all. f For the last ten years the working journalists of Australia j. have been organized in a trade union, registered under the in- |' dustrial law of the Commonwealth. This union is known as \ the Australian Journalists' Association. Any person the major | portion of whose income is derived from journalism, not being / a managing editor or chief of staff, is eligible for membership. 1 1| Practically every working journalist is a member of the organiza- 'v tion, which has obtained by appeals to the Arbitration Court i, created under the Industrial law, awards fixing the minimum -^ wages, and the hours and conditions of labor for all its members. ^ Proceedings of the Congress 331 These awards have substantially increased the wages of journaHsts on the regular newspaper staffs throughout Austraha, and at the same time they have decreased the hours of labor. Separate agree- ments have been made by the Journalists' Association with city and country newspaper proprietors. In the capital cities, the Melbourne (Victoria) and Sydney (New South Wales) wage rates are taken as basis, and percentage reductions are provided in the wages paid in the smaller capitals like Brisbane (Queens- land), and Perth (West Australia), Hobart (Tasmania), and Adelaide (South Australia). At first, where the journalists were fighting for the formation of the Association and for their awards from the Arbitration Court, there was some friction with the newspaper proprietors, who resented the application of trade union principles in the working of their literary staffs. Now, however, the position has been accepted, and the scheme is operat- ing smoothly and, on the whole, satisfactorily. The need for a national Australian daily newspaper is crying aloud for recognition. The great dailies of the large cities are all parochial. Even the greatest of them, and they include news- papers that would bear comparison with the world's best, give surprisingly little space to Australian affairs outside the state in which they are published. Indeed, after eliminating the purely metropolitan news and the foreign cables, there is little left. Australian happenings of far greater importance than much of the news cabled from the other side of the world are often over- looked if outside the boundaries of the state in which the paper is published. One would think that the leading metropolitan dailies had come to an agreement not to compete with one an- other, otherwise, within twenty years of federation, surely one, if not more, of them would have pubHshed an edition simultaneously in each state. That opportunity will not be left unseized forever; for though it would take large capital to initiate a new daily news- paper on national lines, with a national policy, and published simultaneously in each of the six states, such a paper would really have no opposition in its own wide sphere. Three-fifths of the population would be reached by such a paper before break- fast every morning. Well and patriotically conducted, such a journal would indeed be a power in the land, and a power for great good. Perhaps such a paper will soon appear. Until it 332 The Press Congress of the World does, it cannot be said that the AustraHan press has attained its majority. (Loud applause.) THE CHAIRMAN: Those who have the privilege of ac- quaintance with Mr. Davidson hold him in high regard and admir- ation, which regard and admiration is increased by the paper we have heard read by his worthy representative on this program, Mr. Guy Innes. As the delegate from Great Britain is out of the House at this time, the Chair may quote a remark made by an Australian journalist regarding journalism in Australia. When asked if it was not true that the journalism of Australia has descended from the British journalism, he replied, "No, ascended from British journalism," which was, of course, with the becoming modesty of a child as to its parent. The final speaker of the afternoon is a woman. She would have a larger audience except for herself. She, as President of the Honolulu Press Club, has provided such delightful entertain- ment outside of this room that it has taken from her audience persons who otherwise would be here. I have the distinguished pleasure of presenting to you the President of the Honolulu Press Club, to whose activity we owe so much of the attractiveness of our stay in the Islands, Mrs. John T. Warren. MRS. WARREN : Mr. President and Delegates of the Press : As the special representative of the Honolulu Press Club, in my heart I also represent the League of American Pen Women of which I have been Territorial representative for three years, and the Southern California Women's Press Club, whose President addressed you this morning, and of which I have been a member for the past eighteen years. They say that the most important part of a woman's letter is her postscript, as it is then that she asks her husband for money and then that she lets the one man know that he is the one man. I was allowed to choose my subject and so show my two hobbies, "interviewing" and "headlines." No real feminine fails to look at the end of a story first seeking for the happy ending, so I am going to start with my postscript and then go back to the story. There is one suggestion or rather appeal which I would like to make and it comes as the result of ten years' active experience \ I Proceedings of the Congress 333 on a daily paper, upon the staff of which I occupied every posi- tion from society editor at the beginning to associate editor in the middle and special writer at the end, when I wrote in every department, police court to heads, and many times had to train the cub reporters into the bargain! The question which burns in my soul and has scorched my otherwise good disposition is the matter of headlines. Of all the departments of a daily newspaper where there is room for more just criticism than any other, it is in the abominations which appear frequently on the front page under the name of headlines. It is not only the inaccuracies to which I refer, but the bad technique. There is an art in writing a headline just as in anything else, but if more reporters were trained at the start how to write heads there would be more city editors in the world ten years later who could head up a story properly. Is it heads or tails ? Sometimes I think the city editors toss their thoughts up into the air and trust to luck whether it is heads or tails that turns up. Sometimes I have searched half way down the column of a front page story trying to discover the germ of an idea which gave the headlines to the story and just when I had about decided that this time it was the fault of the composing room in getting heads switched I found the poor forlorn little idea buried under an avalanche of words, struggling for air. If I had taken the job of city editor which was offered me a few years before I left the active newspaper game, one of the reforms which I would have instituted in my office would have been in the writing of headlines. I should have required every reporter on the paper to turn in heads with every story. Per- haps none of these headlines would ever have been used — cer- tainly they would not have till they conformed with the required standard — but the reporters would not only be gaining valuable experience in the proper writing of heads but they would many times have given the man whose business it is to head up stories an idea for the heads. In the last few years I have been many times disgusted by the irrelevancy of many headUnes. Many times the chief idea of the story, the very reason for its existence, is completely ignored and cne has to search with a miscroscope to find an excuse within the story for it. No man ought to know 334 The Press Congress of the World the big idea in a story as well as the man who wrote it and many times the man who writes the story can give a good idea to the man who writes the heads, who must skim scores of stories so hurriedly that he oftentimes in the hurry and bustle of makeup loses the best points in a story. Headlines have always interested me and my editor not only expected me to head up most of my own stories but to turn in heads for many of the other reporters. On many occasions this was a big help to the city editor. I do not contend that a good writer of heads can be made in a week or a month or even a year, perhaps, but every bit of training helps and if the heads thus written cannot be used there is nothing lost and there is the ever-yawning waste basket. This is an age of quick action and quick results. The busy man and woman must many times depend almost entirely upon the headlines for their news. A three or four-deck head when properly written "hits all the high places" and gives the chief facts of the story. Every writer of heads should be taught to phrase his head- lines. You cannot break a thought in two at the end of a line and stick the end of it into the second line. There is an etiquette and technique in the writing of headlines which should be carefully observed. It is as important as is the phrasing of a piece of music. Thought come in phrases and a broken thought in a headline is as bad form as a word hyphenated, and continued over to another line ! It seems impossible but I have seen that un- pardonable sin committed even in Honolulu. One such headline ruins the whole page which it defaces. Put a picture into your headlines. Make them live. While the yellow journals lean too far toward the side of the dramatic and sensational I sometimes think they write better heads that the inert, aenemic groups of words which many times — alas too many — disgrace the top of otherwise good stories. I plead for a better co-operation and co-ordination between the writer of the story and the writer of the head. Unity of thought and expression is a goal to strive for, and when the man who writes the story is capable of writing his own captions the newspapers will go far toward solving this vexing problem. Interviewing is an art, and an art that many a good writer Proceedings of the Congress 335 has never mastered. There are two prime factors that enter into an interview : one is, how to get it ; the other is how to write it. At first sight the former would seem to be more important for you ask: "How can you write a thing until you have it?" Let the yellow journals who do that sort of thing answer. Certain it is that many an interview that in itself was good stuff, has been so blotched and spoiled in the handling, that it would re- quire a very clever person to detect the hallmarks of the genuine article. It requires a certain amount of cleverness, tact, and adaptability to secure a good interview. It requires a certain amount of cleverness and genius to write it. Any one can ask another man questions and jot down those questions and answers, verbatim. But that by no means con- stitutes an interview in the best sense. To begin with, one should be a good student of human nature — be able to read people quick- ly and accurately, and then to remember what he reads. He should be able to see at a glance little peculiarities and bits of personality that are distinctive and individual, and, like a charac- teristic pose in a picture, stamps the personality of the man in- delibly upon the printed page. Any little mannerisms or habits, or prominent traits should be noted, and hoarded up for use later on, when the interview comes to be written. It is these more than the thoughts which the man expresses that will give the personal flavor, that will stamp an interview on disarmament with James Diplomat, Congressman from the Sixth District, as distinctive from another with the Governor of the state upon the same sub- ject. The thoughts they express and the words they utter are but half the interview after all. If, after reading an interview with someone you know per- sonally, you have not been made to feel that you have just had a conversation with that man, then that interview has fallen short of what it should have been in just so far as it has lacked naturalness and the little indefinable something, known for lack of a better name as personality. If you are interviewing a man who persists in twirling his mustache and always crossing his legs when he talks ; who paces back and forth across the room with his hands in his pockets and his eyes on the carpet as he thinks ; or a woman who tilts her head on one side when she looks at you ; who has a peculiar way of 336 The Press Congress of the World pushing back the hair from her forehead ; who affects any notice- able style in dress that sets her apart from other women; re- member it. You will have use for it later on. It seems immaterial perhaps, and foolish, to you as you think of it, but when you wish to put a little of the actress' personality into your two column interview that lasted but ten minutes, you will find these bits of information like grains of pure gold. Atmosphere is another thing which is a veritable "first aid" to the interviewer. For instance : some years ago I had the pleas- ure of spending an hour with Augustus Thomas, the well known playwright, one rainy Sunday morning at his picturesque home, "The Ramble," in New Rochelle, "forty-five minutes from Broad- way!" It so happened that the only hour at which I could see him was his breakfast hour, so while he ate toast and oranges, and drank his morning coffee, between surreptitious glances at the New York papers which his man brought in, damp from the rain-soaked lawn, I chatted with him of his work, and he told me how he writes his plays. A reception room or a business-office interview is quite the ordinary thing, but here was atmosphere more novel. It is not often that one is admitted to a cosy break- fast room and allowed to chat in such a delightfully informal way with the lion one is coaxing to roar ! So the oranges and the coffee, the jam and the toast; the old blue breakfast porcelain and the newspapers all had their parts to play when the interview was written. At another time I spent some pleasant hours with Bronson Howard, the dean of American playwrights, this time, three thousand miles away from his home environment, in the midst of a Southern California winter. Surrounded by fruitladen orange trees, with the odor of orange blossoms and roses in the air, and the waving palm branches framing a glimpse of purple- peaked mountains in the distance, it was possible to give a very different atmosphere and setting to the interview than if it had been secured in a stately New York drawing room. A rose garden chat in the dead of winter apparently appealed to the eastern edi- tors, for I syndicated the story myself and sold almost every one of the many copies I sent out. Francis Wilson at home at "The Orchard," surrounded by his fine collection of brasses and rare paintings, his Napoleon and MLSS CAROLINE .SOLTHLRN Catches a Fish (upper, left) ; LOULS MAJ3E1R1S 10RTUGUE8E, PrE«ENTIXO GaVEL FOB CONGRESS TO GOVERNOR E\RRlN(iTO\ A.O PRESIDENT WILLIAM., o. Steps oe Io.a.sx Paeace (uppet .^M HENRV CHUNG, Korea; DONG-SUNG KIM, Korea (lower left, loft to rioht) MR^HENRY J. ALLEN axd MRS. RALPH A. HARRIS. Deu..vtes , K<,^, I^xs.s Ukcoratei, with Lkis (lower rigl,t, left to ri^I.t). Ir r I f I l' cle 1 1 ac( ani I Proceedings of the Congress 337 the wonderful old carved chairs made from the pew ends of the Shakespeare chapel at Stratford-on-Avon, was a very different Francis Wilson from the actor in his dressing room, and the two interviews I had with him were as different as though with two different men. Edward Kemble in his quaint old studio in New Rochelle gave me just the setting I wanted for the kind of interview I sought — far more of the atmosphere of the palette and brush than had I met him at a down town club. Paul de Longpre among the flowers that he loved to paint and among which he lived, gave me just the setting I needed for an Easter interview obtained in December, that brought me one of the best checks I ever endorsed. And it was ten times easier to get and to write than many other I have knocked off on my old machine in the city room to the accompaniment of a dozen other typewriters, three telephones and the unrelenting urge of the copy boy waiting for the next page ! George Ade in a Southern California lemon orchard gave that touch of novelty and background to the tale I had to tell that brought me anything but lemons when the checks came home. They were peaches, every one of them ! Sometimes you want a man in his own environment. Some- times you want him out of it. Oftentimes the appropriate setting is the more effective and artistic. At others it is the dramatic contrast and antithesis which prove your greatest assets. The clever reporter will recognize these facts and plan his interview accordingly. Many times, of course, he cannot choose his setting and then he will make the best of what he finds. Just as a picture takes on varied tones and aspects from the frame which surrounds it, so the man who is interviewed may be made to appear as differently by the kind of setting in which he is placed. If this is in any way unique or unusual or picturesque, so much the better. If it has none of these attributes make the most of it and use it to the best advantage, watching all the more closely for the individualities of the man himself. Naturalness is another most necessary adjunct of the good interview. Ask yourself continually as you write: "Is this natur- al ?" For instance : when two persons are conversing one usually does not say many sentences without giving the other an op- 22 338 The Press Congress of the World portunity to say something. Be careful to avoid long speeches in the mouths of your "victims." Break up the conversation. There are many little devices one may use to do this, if a speech seems too long to be natural. Drop in an occasional, "he con- tinued ;" "concluded the speaker ;" "added Mr. Blank," etc. Hunt up a few more verbs beside "said" and "answered" and "replied." Remember that "rejoined, laughed, added, smiled, suggested, ex- claimed, questioned, admitted, frowned," and numerous others all may be used, and still carry enough distinctive meaning to change the color of the monochrome. Try to let the manner of the man's speech suggest the verb that is to express it. The Bible admonished the disciples to "be in the world, but not of it." No less should the interviewer, be he a cub reporter at twenty-five dollars a week, or a magazine writer of the nth power, strive to be in the interview but not of it. He must be careful not to intrude his own personality into his story, at the same time putting enough of himself in to keep the interview from appearing like a lecture taken down verbatim by a stenog- rapher. He must ask questions, and some of these questions are necessary to the continuity and sequence of his story. But the ego, the every present "I" must be kept skillfully in the back- ground. If you are doing an interview remember that you are merely the electrician operating the lights, and that the audience will have eyes and ears only for the stage and the leading man. If your machinery squeaks and your fuses sputter, the audience may cast their eyes your way, it is true, but be sure it will not be glances of approbation that you will receive. Just as anything which diverts the attention from what is going on upon the stage detracts from the interest of the play, so anything which takes the attention of the reader from the hero of the story, weakens the effect and the reader is just as liable to harbor a grudge against this foreign element as is the occupant of the aisle seat whose gaze is attracted by the sputtering lights in the theatre. When we look at a sketch we see the outline of the drawing, we do not see the pen which traced the graceful lines. If we stop to analyze it we know the pen was there, or there could never have been the lines, but the pen is kept out of sight, and there is only the evidence of its existence. Just so should the re- porter efface himself from his interview ; the reader must never be allowed to "see the wheels go round." Proceedings of the Congress 339 The backbone of the interview will depend upon the ques- tions the reporter asks. Someone has said that it takes a wise man to ask questions. It certainly requires some knowledge of the subject in hand to ask intelligent questions that will draw out the thoughts and opinions of the one interviewed, and on the originality and versatility of the questioner will largely de- pend the success of his interview. Even a clever man is not liable to appear clever unless there is some kind of a magnet to draw the needles of his wit, while a dull man is hopeless in the hands of a reporter who has not learned the art of interview- ing. Make your subject live and breathe between the lines of your story. Stamp it so indelibly with his personality that a stranger reading it would afterward recognize the man from your inter- view- — that his friend would feel that he had had converse with him. If you are a reporter on a daily paper there are many times when you have no warning of the impending interview. When given such an assignment you must do your best on the spur of the moment with the light you have. But on the other hand if you know beforehand as many times it is quite possible to do — as it almost invariably is necessary to do if you are getting your interview for a magazine — secure all the information about the man or woman you are to interview before you call. Go to the library, look him up in "Who's Who," read a bit of biography if he is famous enough to have been accorded the honor of one — saturate your mind with knowledge of him. Then you will be able to ask much more intelligent questions ; you can mould your interview almost to suit the especial needs of your story. Like the background of a picture or the accompaniment of a song, your character will stand out in much stronger, more effective relief if you can surround it with the proper setting, the atmos- phere which it demands. You must be like a sponge — absorb much more than you expect to give out in order to give out enough. The most effective interview is the one which gives the reader the impression that the writer has acquaintance with his subject and could have told a lot more about him if he had wished. There is great power in the art of repression. There is nowhere in newspaper work where a little superficial knowledge of this 340 The Press Congress of the World kind will go farther than in creating a background for an in- terview. Again, if you are writing your interview for some special paper or magazine, study the policy of the periodical before sketching your story. For instance: an interview with the same man for a Hearst paper would require very different handling than one for The Outlook or The Atlantic. If sensationalism is the policy of your journal, play up the points that will be the most dramatic, couch your story in the most vivid, expressive language you know, feature the most unique points. If you are writing for a newspaper or magazine of more conservative tone you will have more opportunity to make your work artistic and pay more heed to literary forms, perhaps, at the same time not losing sight of its dramatic value. Accentuate your powers of observation and concentration to the nth power. Do not let the minutest detail of surroundings, personality, dress or speech escape you. It may be your most valuable material later on, when you begin to write. Every good newspaper man or woman is past master of the art of journalistic dentistry. Remember that many of the best interviews like any other story — no, I will say more almost, than any other story — must be extracted by the roots, and the more painless the process, the more successful the job. It is true that many of the most interesting, worth-while people from the stand- point of the public and the interviewer, do not enjoy talking about themselves. If the interview is to be a very personal one it is most essential that you get some of this personal "business" — if I may resort to stage parlance — into your story, and it often- times requires great tact and cleverness to extract these facts. When I was a little girl I had a dear old grandfather who was a clergyman of the old school. He used first to write his sermons and then commit them to memory as he had a horror of preach- ing from notes. When he had a particularly difficult ser- mon to commit, he always dressed up in his Sunday best for he said when he looked well he could always learn his sermon better ! Now mere man may laugh if he will, but for the woman re- porter, at least, the psychology of clothes — her own clothes — is one of the most important things to consider in preparation for a dated interview. I will even go farther and say that the psy- Proceedings of the Congress 341 chology of color is of importance, and a clever woman will recog- nize this and accept it. "A word to the wise is sufficient." Per- sonal appearance is one of the chief aids to the proper getting of an interview. The more difficult the subject you must inter- view, the better you must look when you do it. I once sent a woman out on a difficult assignment, one in which men had failed. When she came back she had, according to the popular parlance of the day, ''brought the bacon." When I asked her how she had done it she replied laconically, "Oh, I wore my best hat." Keep your ideals high. First, make yourself worth believing in. Then believe in yourself, hard. There is a world of dif- ference between self confidence and conceit. Self confidence is believing in something that exists in you. Conceit is merely the artificial camouflage of personal vanity and egotism as hollow as air and with nothing to justify it. Whenever I knew ahead of time that I was dated for an interview, that was the morning I took extra care in dressing for it. I dressed for the part as carefully as I would for a social function, though not in the same clothes ! An over-inappropriate- ly dressed woman would queer herself right at the start and de- feat the very object for which she strove. You must look your best, not so much to make a good impression upon the sub- ject — though that of course has its value — but because the well- groomed M^oman has better poise, better command of herself. If you know you look well you can forget yourself. There is a sureness and a feeling of power in a properly tailored suit, a bunch of violets and a hat that brings out the best points of your eyes and complexion that all the courses in college of jour- nalism training in the world can never give you ! Of course it doesn't always work but it is a big help. I have written scores of interviews and from those ten years experiences have worked out my own theory of procedure, but there was one among the men I interviewed and only one, I remember, from whom I failed to get one single thing I tried for. And he was the most charming of them all ! I refer to Myron T. Herrick, now Am- bassador to France. It was many years ago when he was spend- ing the winter in Pasadena — I do not remember whether it was during the period of his governorship of Ohio or not — but I was told to interview him on certain phases of the political sit- 342 The Press Congress of the World uation about which my editor was very anxious to have him speak. We talked for an hour. I never saw a man in all my life who could fence with words as he did. He parried every question I asked, he diverted it and all so tactfully and skillfully that I could not possibly take offense, but neither could I pen- etrate his wall of diplomacy. He baffled me at every turn. I had a column interview on the front page that afternoon — but not one thing in it which I went after. When I got through I said to him: "Well, Mr. Herrick, you are the first man from whom I could not get one thing, one wee bit of information I sought. If ever you want to qualify for the diplomatic corps call on me for a recommendation !" He turned to me with that rare smile of his that makes his the most alive face I have ever seen and said : "Well, if ever I do, you shall be my private sec- retary !" Years afterward, when he went to Paris as American Am- bassador I could not help wondering if I had not been married if he would have kept his word. For an interview which the reporter knows beforehand he is to do he should map out his questions and plan of interview with much care. At one time when I was doing a series of in- terviews for The Theatre Magazine in New York, I made up my mind to secure an interview with Sarah Earnhardt when she was playing at Venice, California. It had been announced in the Southern California newspapers that she would refuse all interviews. That was oil to the flame of my purpose. I knew it would tax my ingenuity to get the desired interview. I realized that time would probably be at a premium so I not only planned out my interview but typed the list of questions I wished to ask and left plenty of space between as I expected to have to work like mad. How I secured the interview both for my paper and the magazine and was the only person in Southern California to get one, to say nothing of an autographed picture with a personal message to me on it, is another story and of no interest to anyone but myself, but my methods may be. When I found that every question had first to be given to the interpreter I realized how wise I had been to have my questions ready. I gave him my notes and so deft was he at his job that the answers came back to me in a steady stream with no break Proceedings of the Congress 343 in the continuity, and it was a simple matter to take the neces- sary notes and arrange them in the story as I wished later on. There are people whom the sight of a pencil and paper in the hands of a reporter, frighten into frigid silence, and because of this fact it is always well to cultivate the art of interviewing without taking many notes, none at all would be advisable if the reporter has a sufificiently good memory to be trusted. However, when one is working from morning till night and from night half the way back to morning, he cannot always trust his memory, and a few notes are almost a necessity. He can, however, keep the thread of the conversation unwinding, and take notes at the same time if he is at all clever, and this will help to dispel that awful blankness which comes over most people when they feel they are being "interviewed." It is usually easiest to get the conversation started in a sociable sort of way and then gradually to lead up to the interview. A little adroitness on the part of the reporter and a little thought beforehand as to the questions he will ask, will greatly aid him. Interviewing is an art in itself, but it is also one of the best training schools for the creative, imaginative work which every writer who really loves his work hopes some time to do. There is nothing that will give one ease in handling conversa- tions and sketching character like interviewing, at the same time giving the reporter a rich bank account in the way of character types upon which he may often draw in the future. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : While Mrs. Warren was reading what she had written regarding Heads and Headlines, these lines were handed up to the Chair. Permit me to read them : HEADS AND TALES When the man who writes the story writes the head. The news will be applauded, when it's read, By all, perhaps, except the City Ed. When the man who writes the story writes the head. The journals that are yellow will be red, And Swift and Burke and Sterne In their silent graves will turn, 344 The Press Congress of the World Assured that they are lucky to be dead. When the man who writes the story writes the head, The tears of Mrs. Warren won't we shed, And there won't be any "postscript" to be said. The shuttle of the news is swiftly sped — The paper simply has to get to bed ; Of the time that will be lost, Let the printer count the cost. When the man who writes the story writes the head. MR. GUY INNES : I was struck indeed with the soundness of Mrs. Warren's argument about gowns and being properly dressed when seeking an interview. It may interest you to know that so fully was this recognized by one of the Melbourne papers when the Prince of Wales visited Australia, that they made their lady reporter a special allowance to buy pretty frocks when the Prince was there. THE CHAIRMAN : Mr. Henry Chung, Korea, has presented an invitation from the journalists of Korea to hold the next ses- sion of the Congress in that country. This invitation will be re- ferred with the others to the Executive Committee. THE CHAIRMAN: The Congress is now adjourned until nine o'clock tomorrow morning. EIGHTH SESSION THURSDAY MORNING, OCTOBER 20, 1921. The meeting was called to order at nine o'clock a. m. by President Williams. THE CHAIRMAN : The Chair will ask Mr. William South- ern, Jr., United States, to act as Secretary pro tem until the ar- rival of Mr. Innes. The Chair acknowledges with thanks on behalf of the Con- gress the gift of these beautiful African daisies from the chil- dren of the Manoa school in Honolulu. They make an excel- lent decoration for the stage. As this is the day set apart for discussion and for considera- tion and votes upon the various reports to be submitted to the Proceedings of the Congress 345 Congress, attention is called to the fact that the voting power of the Congress rests of course with the delegates to the Congress, and not with the visitors to the Congress. For the Committee on Constitution, the Vice-Chairman of that Committee, Mr. F. P. Hall of New York, will present the report. MR. HALL, Mr. President, Members of the Press Congress of the World : The Constitution of this body which was adopted at San Francisco is a very brief document. The Committee at their meeting yesterday afternoon did not deem it advisable to alter it to any great extent, and are simply bringing at this time a substitute to Article IV which relates to the Officers. It is deemed desirable to make some changes in that article and I will read what the Committee adopted as a substitute for the present Article IV. ARTICLE IV. Officers. The officers, who with the exception of the honorary Presi- dent to be chosen by the Governing Committee, shall be elected at each session of the Congress, shall be as follows : An Honorary President, A President, Two Vice-Presidents from each country holding membership, A Secretary-Treasurer, A Governing Committee, consisting of the President, Sec- retary-Treasurer and thirteen additional members, which shall have general direction of the activities of the Congress. The members of this Committee shall have power of substitution, and may designate an Executive Committee of Five. Vacancies shall be filled by the Governing Committee upon recommendation of the countries affected. The old Article IV provided for a Committee consisting of the President and Secretary-Treasurer and five additional mem- bers chosen from the Vice-Presidents. It was deemed advisable to have a somewhat larger Executive Committee, or Governing Committee as we have designated it, and that they should desig- nate an Executive Committee of five to handle the affairs of 346 The Press Congress of the World the body. That is all the change the Committee thought it wise to make at this time. I therefore present this and move its adoption. THE CHAIRMAN : You have heard the motion made relat- ing to the Constitution by Mr. Hall. What is your pleasure? MR. McCLATCHY: I second the motion. THE CHAIRMAN : All in favor of the motion to change Art- icle IV of the Constitution as suggested, please make it known by saying Aye; contrary No. The motion is carried and the constitutional change is there- by made. The Chair recognizes at this time Mr. Petrie of Hongkong who will present a brief comment on several of the papers pre- sented during this Congress. MR. PETRIE: Mr. President and Delegates: I did not in- tend to trouble you with any remarks. I came from Hongkong, which is represented for the first time at a gathering of this kind, to listen and to learn, and I must confess I have listened with the greatest of pleasure and learned not a little from the excellent papers submitted. It does not follow, however, that I agree with all that I have heard, and, under the disadvantage of not having the text of the various addresses to quote from, I would, if you will spare me a few minutes, take just a couple of points and so far relieve my mind before we pass on to the business of the session. We have heard a great deal about the liberty of the press, and we have all, myself included, applauded the views expressed on this age-old subject. It has occurred to me, however, that no attempt has been made by any of the speakers to define the extent of the liberty desired, whether it is to be full liberty or liberty within limits, if the word liberty can be applied in such a sense. There are "scabs" — ^you know what I mean — in most pro- fessions, and in the profession of journalism, I regret to say, there are men whom it would be dangerous to trust with the full liberty that every honest journalist would like to enjoy. I think a clear definition of what is meant by the term so often Proceedings of the Congress 347 and so glibly used, the liberty of the press, might very well come from this Congress. It has also occurred to me that the excellent paper read by my very good friends and neighbors, the Chinese delegates, have not given due credit to the sincerely honest attempts of foreign writers and newspaper correspondents especially, to ascertain and tell the truth and nothing but the truth about their country. Mr. Tong particularly made an eloquent appeal for justice and fair play in this connection. That so little is known of China and her teeming millions, and that so much misconception prevails abroad regarding this great land and its promising people, is not en- tirely the fault of the foreigner. I want the delegates to this Congress to clearly understand that, and I trust Mr. Tong will forgive me if, as close range observer of his country and people for the last twenty-two years, I endeavor to temper some of his criticism. No foreign journalist ventures abroad to deliberately write lies about any country. He can always do that at home if he wants to. I make bold to say that the alleged misrepresenta- tion of China in the foreign press is the fault of the Chinese themselves. Chinese ignorance, suspicion, self-interest and often fear, have played a large part in the past in misinforming the Western world. I am glad to acknowledge that these failings are likely soon to give way to a better order. But even today there are very few men of the caliber of Mr. Tong, Mr. Wong or Mr. Hsu to give facts concerning the country to which they belong. Unless the foreign writer has access to such men or such men make it their business to get into touch with foreign writers in search of information about China, I can see no im- mediate hope of the complaint that was expressed so eloquent- ly being remedied. Despite the many changes for the good ■which China has witnessed since 1911, the type of "Chinee" de- scribed by Mark Twain — I need not quote the line — is by no means extinct, and so long as he exists, the writer of the foreign press is liable to be the innocent victim of his fabrications. I speak from experience. The type I refer to is not peculiar to China, nor is China's average any greater than elsewhere. But in other countries where the language barrier is not so steep and information is easier to obtain, the discreet foreign writer 348 The Press Congress of the World is always safeg-uarded against hitting the rock of falsehood. Here in Honolulu Mr. Tong and his fellow Congressmen from Cathay have had a practical lesson in the presenting of essential facts and figures which should not have been lost upon them any more than it will be upon the writers who are assembled here from other parts of the globe. I have had many inquiries since I came here about China, and the Chinese. No doubt my Chinese friends have been similarly questioned, and no doubt like myself they have endeavored to enlighten some of the in- quirers. But with this question of misinformation before us, it will perhaps astonish those delegates who have not yet been to China to learn that in a country embracing one-fourth of the population of the world there is scarcely any informative literature of the type with which we have been so liberally supplied in this relatively small territory of Hawaii, and which is so common in the United States and elsewhere. Such literature as is available is almost entirely of foreign production. I men- tion this to prove that the foreign writer has invariably done his best with such information as he could command, to make China known to the world, that China herself has done next to nothing to provide such enlightenment as Mr. Tong and his colleagues would like the world to have. The correspondent who rushes through China and writes to the press does not care to hunt for facts in the heavy figure-laden tomes of the customs department, nor is he interested in the dry-as-dust volumes issued by the statistical bureau. He looks for facts and figures, in terse and attractive form, such as have been presented to us here, and failing that, he is compelled to trust to his own observations and the statements of individuals who may or may not be well in- formed. If the misconception, misinformation and misrepresentation for which foreign writers have been blamed are to be removed, China must have cheap, concise, attractive, reliable and up-to-date literature. In making this statement, I hope I have removed any sus- picion that may have been created in your minds regarding the general run of foreign writers on China, and that in venturing to differ I have given no offense to those worthy delegates from China whose eloquent utterances have helped to illuminate these proceedings. (Applause). Proceedings of the Congress 349 THE CHAIRMAN: The Chair has received a number of papers on journalism in various countries, papers prepared for presentation to this Congress. If it does not meet with the dis- approval of the delegates to the Congress, these papers will not be read but will be placed in charge of the Committee which will direct the publication of the proceedings of the Congress, to be used in whole or in part in the proceedings as that Committee may deem best. If anyone has any objection to that plan of procedure he may speak now, if there is no objection it will be so ordered. COLONEL LAWSON : The first list of resolutions prepared by the Committee is printed in this morning's paper, and most of you will have read them. In addition to that are the follow- ing: Resolution proposed by Mr. Hollington Tong of China. Resolution proposed by Mr. Zumoto of Japan. Another resolution presented by Mr. Coutoupis. May I say that the work of the Resolutions Committee con- sisted only in considering resolutions that were submitted by members of the Congress, and assuring themselves that such resolutions fell within the scope of the Articles of Constitution of the Congress. The Committee only accepted one resolution on any question, but, as announced before, that will not prevent any member of the Congress from moving any amendment which may alter the meaning of any resolution which you have had read out to you. Any alteration will be made by discussion and ap- proved by the vote of the Congress. THE CHAIRMAN : You have heard the report as made by the Chairman of the Committee on Resolutions. We will con- sider the resolutions proposed in the order in which they have been presented. The first resolution, which will be read by the Secretary, is proposed by Mr. Mark Cohen of New Zealand. THE SECRETARY : The resolution is as follows : (Memberships) Resolved, That memberships in the Press Congress of the World shall be of three classes as follows : (a) individual memberships with dues of $5 annually in the coin of the United States, (b) corporate memberships with dues of $50 annually in the coin of the United States and (c) sustaining memberships to be held by persons, corporations or insti- tutions contributing any amount to the support of the Congress. h 350 The Press Congress of the World Resolved, further. That individual or corporate members shall be entitled to one vote at meetings of the Congress but that sustaining memberships shall not include the voting power. MR. MARK COHEN: Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentle- men : The resolution which I have the honor to move on behalf of the Committee on Nominations, who have had this particular matter under their consideration is, I venture to think, one of the most important, if not the most important, matter with which this Congress will have to deal, because it essays for the first time to put the affairs of the Congress on a suitable and per- manent financial footing. So important indeed is this matter, that I fully expected that every seat in this room would have been occupied this morning, because it is an open secret that on the attitude of the Congress towards the question of finance, the success of all future Congresses absolutely depends. This is the second session of the Press Congress of the World and if I am rightly advised, the financial burden of the Congress of 1915 and, to a large extent, the cost of this present gathering, will fall upon one shoulder. If our worthy President were not in the chair I should be tempted to say a good deal of what I know from my absolute knowledge as to the part that he has himself played, not only in shaping the deliberations of both these Congresses, but in selecting the men to whom has been entrusted the onerous duty of giving executive action to your de- liberations, and if the President will bear with me I will so far let this meeting understand, that when the Committee came to consider the crucial matters underlying this question of finance. Dr. Williams met us just in the manner that might have been expected of a gentleman of his well-known characteristics and fine feelings, by telling us with perfect candor how matters really stood, and I am not doing my colleagues any injustice when I say to you that that recital of actualities created a deep impression on our minds, and we unanimously resolved there and then that, no matter on whom the choice of this Congress might fall as to the person most fitted to occupy the high position of Presi- dent by reason of his ripened judgment, culture, knowledge of affairs and great experience, that that individual should under no circumstances be saddled with the thought of having to finance such a great institution as this. For my own part, believing as I do firmly in the validity of Proceedings of the Congress 351 the principle of every laborer being worthy of his hire, and having preached it in my own country in every position to which the pubHc has been good enough to call me, I would be lacking in my devotion to that principle and would fail to recognize the great worth and manifold virtues of your present president, were I not to stand up here and affirm with all the strength at my command that now is the time for you delegates to show, not only your confidence in President Williams as a man and as a friend, but to test your friendship and may I say your love for the man, by declaring that each and every one of us will do the utmost in his or her power, if he will accept at our hands today a renewal of that confidence, coupled with the knowledge that the finances of this Congress shall from this day henceforward be a matter entirely in our keeping. We have been assured that a sum ranging from sixty to seventy-five thousand dollars is necessary to secure the efificient running of the machinery of this Congress and to give to your President whatever clerical assistance he finds it necessary to employ, and we are confident that the world's press will have no difficulty whatever in raising the necessary fund to accomplish this and even more. I ought to explain to you that we have very considerable difficulty in arriving at a conclusion as to what should form the basis of future membership. In the Committee a strong plea was put up on behalf of the poorer nations of Europe, that it would not be possible for them to send representatives to future Congresses, if in addition to having to bear the cost of travel, which is unnecessarily high now and is not likely to be reduced for some time to come, they would have to bear a heavy indi- vidual membership fee, and rather than see any country debarred from assisting in the deliberations of this organization, we had no difficulty in reaching what I hope you will consider to be a proper compromise. We think that no working journalist who is animated by a desire to work for the betterment of our pro- fession and for ameliorating the conditions of life in less favored countries than our own, will object to the imposition of a small fee annually, sufficient not only to constitute membership but to carry with it certain undefined advantages. We may have later to consider seriously whether there are not too many persons, 352 The Press Congress of the World styling themselves journalists, who have no valid claim to that title and who persist in hanging on the fringe as it were of a Congress like this, merely for the social advantages which such a gathering entails. It will be well worth consideration by the Executive, whether a substantial fee ought not in future to be exacted from persons who legitimately fall within this category. The Committee apparently had good reason for thinking, from the enthusiastic manner in which these proposals were re- ceived in the Committee, that the wealthy newspapers in dif- ferent parts of the world, particularly in English-speaking coun- tries, will see it to their advantage to subscribe in bulk in order to enable them to send from their staffs or from their managerial establishments the best men in their service, and we are more- over fortified with the belief that there are many great industrial enterprises, more or less associated with journalism, that will also find it worth their while to keep in active touch with and to sup- port liberally an institution that is capable of doing so much good for the world of letters at large. It is the opinion of the Committee, which I heartily share, that these three resolutions will meet with your favorable con- sideration for the reasons which I have attempted to adduce, and that they will receive your unanimous endorsement. At a later period of the day it will be my privilege as well as my duty as the mouthpiece of this Committee, to submit for your acceptance not only the name that will I am sure be re- ceived with the heartiest demonstration of approval, but the names of gentlemen also who will bring to the assistance of your new President a large measure of that enthusiasm which, during the past six years, he has brought to bear on the suc- cessful administration of the affairs of this Congress, and who, like himself, will spare themselves neither time, money nor ef- fort to carry on the great and beneficent work which Dr. Wil- liams so successfully inaugurated at San Francisco in the summer of 1915. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : The present occupant of the chair may be permitted, I trust, to hope that his name may be eliminated from any discussion of a matter so important and far-reaching as that we have under consideration. While he is grateful for what has been said by his friend from New Zealand let us omit Proceedings of the Congress 353 the personal note from a discussion of so much importance. Mr. James Wright Brown of New York has something to say. MR. BROWN : It seems to me that Mr. Cohen has covered this resolution adequately. If there is any emphasis I should add to what he has said, it is along the line of application by the individual delegates. Obviously this sum of from twelve thou- sand to fifteen thousand dollars is not going to be raised without the whole-hearted cooperation of every delegate to this Congress. We are at the threshold of a new era in international journalism and in international relations also, a new era that can best be inaugurated by a sympathetic understanding of the journalists of the world. It would be manifestly unfair for us, it seems to me, to go forward as we have been going this last five or six years, dependent upon the consecrated devotion of a few men, more especially one man. This resolution is really a compromise resolution. Some mem- bers of the Nominations Committee — and I think I may say that the Nominations Committee has worked hard and given a great deal of thought and devotion to the problem put before them, and I think it only fair to say the same of the Committees on Resolutions and Constitution, — the thing that has impressed me about the whole of the Congress sessions is first, the dominant mastery of the Chairman who has forced us to come at nine in the morning and stay until five in the afternoon, and second, the earnest, sincere, and devoted way in which the delegates have given careful thought and attention to the papers that have been read and have voiced their yearning for better times and better days. Some of our overseas delegates thought that ten dollars for individual membership was a little high, so it was made five dollars. Some of the members of the Nominations Committee thought that the price for membership should be twenty-five dol- lars while some thought that it would be just as easy to get fifty dollars as twenty-five dollars. Obviously we must have funds. We cannot function in journalistic interest or public interest un- less we have ample funds. Colonel Lawson has suggested that I explain to you what corporate membership means. The plan is briefly this: that del- 23- 354 The Press Congress of the World egates may have individual interest in the Congress, and that the great newspapers may have membership in the Congress so they may send delegates to represent their newspapers ; and the third is sustaining membership, by which the allied interests might contribute to the support of this work. Sustaining membership, it is optional with the member as to whether he contribute one hundred dollars, two hundred dollars or a thousand dollars, or any other sum to the maintenance of this work. It seems to me that this resolution is very closely associated with another resolution that comes before you this afternoon. If the Chair will permit I should like to explain that this other resolution is a very modest resolution but it seems to me that it provides the machinery for greater activity of the Congress than ever before. Someone has said that the simple things of life are faith, love and hope. This is a simple little thing but it provides the machinery for permanent standing committees. It provides for news communication between members situated throughout the world ; for a standing committee on the freedom of the press — in reality a grievance committee where the griev- ances of journalists may be submitted with the firm knowledge that such grievances will have a careful hearing and investiga- tion; a standing committee on interchange of journalists; also a committee on journalistic education; another on ethics of jour- nalism and standard of practice and another standing committee for the promotion of the welfare of journalists. It is hoped that we may be able to institute a system of bulletins, weekly, month- ly, semi-monthly or bi-monthly bulletins that will keep the jour- nalists of the world informed as to activities throughout the world — on communications for example. If there is interference with the delivery and distribution of news to Hawaii and the Pa- cific, it would be the duty of this committee to make an investiga- tion and publish the facts to the members of the Congress through- out the world. You can see that through this system of bulletins we would have co-ordination to a greater extent than ever before. I am in hearty sympathy with it and hope the resolution will be adopted. I second Mr. Cohen's resolution. THE CHAIRMAN: All in favor of the adoption of the resolution on membership as proposed by Mr. Cohen and sec- onded by Mr. Brown will please make it known by saying aye. Proceedings of the Congress 355 The resolution is unanimously adopted. The Secretary will read resolution number two, proposed by Mr. DeRackin. THE SECRETARY: Resolved: by the Press Congress of the World, in session at Honolulu, this eighteenth day of October, 1921, that as a first and very proper step in the direction of a better understanding between the people of the world, that the international conference soon to assemble in Washington, at the invitation of the President of the United States, be requested to admit the representatives of the Press to all sessions of said conference. THE CHAIRMAN: In the absence of Mr. DeRackin, will some delegate in sympathy with the resolution move its adop- tion? MR. BROWN : I move the adoption of the resolution. MR McCLATCHY: I second it. COLONEL LAWSON: I rather hesitate to speak on this matter as I do not wish to be proclaimed as an advocate of secret diplomacy. I am as strongly opposed to secret diplomacy as any one of the delegates here present. But as I understand secret diplomacy it means arrangements between certain groups of na- tions to which other nations are not a party. At Washington where there is a conference in which almost every nation in the world is represented, there can be no ques- tion of secret diplomacy. It is the history of representative in- stitutions all over the world that most of the business is accom- plished in committee. Here where there is a mass of detail to be discussed on subjects regarding which many of the nations hold directly opposing views, it may be impossible to get the business transacted in open session. There is, I think, in this a double danger. Firstly, that you will only get business transacted in which there is a certainty of agreement. Secondly, there will be nothing but the delivery of set speeches embodying the sentiments which all of us hold about peace. I want to see something done, not hear something said, and I think that the greatest danger of all in adopting this motion would be that you would set up the situation that you wish to avoid, and that most of its business would be transacted by nations and groups of nations in private committees before they went into session. I move this amendment, because even if it is lost I wish it to 356 The Press Congress of the World be understood that there is another point of view, and if the representatives of any nation be found holding this point of view, it does not mean that they are not sincere in their desire to co- operate to secure peace and disarmament. I want also to emphasize the fact that I am the last to uphold the principles of secret diplomacy. I should prefer that a reso- lution of this kind should read, as to the second part of it, "That the international conference soon to assemble in Washington, at the invitation of the President of the United States, be re- quested to ensure that as far as compatible with the transactions of its business, representatives of the press should be admitted to sessions of the conference." MR. COHEN : I second the amendment. MR. McCLATCHY: I am going to ask for the information of all of us that the original resolution be read again and have Colonel Lawson say which portion he wishes to amend. (Resolu- tion and amendment read.) MR. COHEN: I would like to thank Colonel Lawson for the privilege of seconding his amendment, not because I am in hearty agreement with all he said but because I recognize there are very serious difficulties in the way of giving efifect to what I know to be the wishes of this Conference and the civilized world. One has to bear in mind when discussing questions that may affect the whole being of millions of people, that those who represent those peoples are stimulated by a desire, if it be pos- sible, to achieve some tangible results in their deliberations, and speaking with an experience of nearly half a century as a re- porter and public man, I have no hesitation in stating that there are times when it becomes absolutely necessary for those in charge of public affairs and matters of such a delicate nature as now have to be discussed, that it is in the interest of general peace that those particular matters should be withdrawn as it were from the gaze of the general public. The complaint against secret diplomacy in the past has been that actual decisions have been reached about which the peoples whose destinies are affected by these conclusions were unaware until their representatives met in their respective parliaments and tried to explain what had taken place. There is always some ex- cuse put forward to camouflage the action of those proceedings. Proceedings of the Congress 357 and that is why I think most people wish to see secret diplomacy done away with. There may be of course, when before even a report is finally read, matters sufficiently advanced to enable the world at large to weigh what is in the minds of the contracting parties, and at such conferences or meetings the accredited rep- resentatives of the press should be allowed to be present to watch the proceedings. Of course the difficulty I know — and I have been privileged to attend at meetings of a similar char- acter — has been not that the record of the proceeding is not given to the public but that too often the views of the individual reporter for a paper are set before the public. That complaint has been voiced over and over again and will be voiced still until it is impressed upon the minds of the men who go as the representatives of the press, that the responsibility is not theirs to do as they wish or to write as they think, but that they shall record without fear or favor the actual phrases of the men who propound the policies governing the world. Given always a fair and accurate and faithful report of those proceedings, I don't think anyone would object. With regard to the Washington Conference, the world is just now reaching its most serious moment and upon what is done at that Conference the happiness of the world rests. If the men who represent the press there are animated with the desire for peace, which we all hope for, a peace lasting in time, a peace that will endure, then by all means let the world at large know what the people are expected to do and I think you will find that pub- lic opinion throughout the world will agree to any form of dis- armament and permanent peace which the world is thirsting for today. MR. FRANK O. EDGECOMBE: I also wish to support the amendinent of Colonel Lawson. I hope to see the Washing- ton Conference reduce oratorical action and fine phrases to ac- complishment, and I do not believe that in our own experience with our national Congress at Washington and any other delib- erative body of a similar character, that things that ought to be done can be done as we are asking by this original resolution to have them done. I believe also that we should save our faces. It is not likely that any resolutions we adopt here will have great influence upon 358 The Press Congress of the World what the accredited delegates from the numerous countries de- cide is the right thing to do, and even if we could influence their decision, it would not be to the interests of the Press Congress to attempt to do so (Hear, hear) and I believe something in the form of the amendment suggested by Colonel Lawson would be more satisfactory from every point of view than to hanker for something that would probably not be granted and which if granted might be unwise. THE CHAIRMAN: Before we proceed further the Sec- retary will read the resolution in its original form, and then the resolution as amended as Colonel Lawson proposed. THE SECRETARY: In its original form the resolution is as follows: Resolved: By the Press Congress of the World, in session at Honolulu, h this eighteenth day of October, 1921, that as a first and very proper step '/ in the direction of a better understanding between the peoples of the world, \ that the international conference soon to assemble in Washington, at the in- % vitation of the President of the United States, be requested to admit the \ representatives of the Press to all sessions of said conference. '| The amendment to take its place reads: |. Resolved, By the Press Congress of the World, in session at Honolulu | this eighteenth day of October, 1921, that as a first and very proper step t in the direction of a better understanding between the peoples of the world, j'j that the international conference soon to assemble in Washington, at the \-^ invitation of the President of the United States, be requested to ensure that, as far as compatible with the transaction of its business, representatives of the Press should be admitted to sessions of the Conference. MR. McCLATCHY: It seems to me that we may without discourtesy expedite matters and save a great deal of trouble, and I therefore submit to Mr. Brown, who moved the original reso- lution, if he does not think it will be discourteous to Mr. De- Rackin, to accept the amendment in place of the original resolu- tion. MR. BROWN : I would say that I am very strongly in favor of the original motion and very strongly opposed to the amend- ment, and I would like to say further that it seems to me that this Congress should concern itself with fundamental principles and ideas. We should not be concerned with matters of ex- pediency; we are on the road up the hill to the ultimate parlia- ment of man and we expect some day to attain that ideal. I recall distinctly a talk I had with Lord Northcliffe in New 4 Proceedings of the Congress 359 York, on the occasion of his recent visit there. He told me about the arrival of the delegates from Czecho-Slovakia at the Paris Conference. The delegate said to Clemenceau: "It will take me seven hours time to read my paper to the Conference," and I said : "Perhaps mankind would have been better off if the delegate had been given his seven hours time, because ever since the Paris Conference, mankind has been debating the mat- ters supposed to have been settled." I very firmly believe that in the first international Conference in Washington there should be the utmost frankness, there should be no committee meetings or session meetings at which repre- sentatives of the press are not present. The newspapers of the world are going to get the news obviously. So far as getting the news is concerned, it matters little whether secret sessions are held or not, but the point is that a good deal of this so- called news wirelessed throughout the world is going to be con- jectured, surmised, and it will unavoidably be misinterpreted. When you look the other man in the eye and give him some idea of your aspirations and you do as Mr. Cohen has said, viz : put all the cards on the table in the white light, the shining light of publicity, you are not going to be misinterpreted. The people will know what you want and what you expect. It seems to me that on the basis of consideration of prin- ciples and ideals alone, this original resolution should be adopted and the amendment voted down. THE CHAIRMAN: The Chair may be permitted to state that without any instructions from the Congress, in order to ac- complish the business of the session, speeches will be limited to five minutes from this time on. MR. GLASS : I think that Mr. Brown has in a considerable measure answered himself, and has also shown the strength and wisdom of Colonel Lawson's amendment when he says that newspaper men are going to get the news anyway. I have been in Washington a good deal, and if ever there was a secret in Washington for twenty-four hours, I have never heard of it. The results of the executive sessions of the Senate are known five minutes after the sessions adjourn, and, with the army of magazine correspondents and the army of newspaper cor- respondents from all over the world, there is not going to 360 The Press Congress of the World be anything worth knowing about that Disarmament Conference and its dehberations that will not be known right away. The Paris Conference was supposed to be secret and it lasted six months. If you throw open this Conference to the gallery, it will last for a year, and everybody will be speaking to the gallery — Japan, Great Britain, the United States, France and all the rest. Let us have action and don't let us interfere too much. I thoroughly agree with Colonel Lawson's amendment. MR. INNES : Gentlemen, I would like to support Colonel Lawson's amendment, very largely for the reason set forth by Mr. Glass. I think the form in which Colonel Lawson has couched the amendment is a dignified one. It is advisable not to strive for the unattainable and this will meet the desires of the Congress. MR. ZUMOTO : Mr. President, as this matter has been fully threshed out by the preceding speakers, all that is needed of me is to say that I am in full accord with the sentiments expressed, by Colonel Lawson in proposing his amendment. It may, however, be interesting to you to know that a few days before my. de- parture from Japan, The Disarmament Society of Japan pro- posed a resolution similar to the one introduced by Mr. DeRackin. I was among those who opposed it on grounds almost exactly like those expressed by Colonel Lawson. It was laid aside at the meeting I attended, but at the next meeting which circumstances prevented me from attending, it was brought up again and passed unanimously, and the message was at once telegraphed to Washington asking that the sessions of the Pacific and Dis- armament Conferences be fully opened to the public. I believe this was a mistake. I have too high a regard for the reputation of this Congress as an assembly of sensible and practical men, to let this opportunity pass without a word of protest against the resolution as originally framed. THE CHAIRMAN : All in favor of the amendment as pro- posed by Colonel Lawson and seconded by Mr. Cohen will make it known by saying Aye. Contrary minded No. The amendment is carried. MR. BROWN : I rise to move that it be carried unanimously. THE CHAIRMAN : All in favor of the resolution as amend- ed will make it known by saying Aye. The amendment is car- ried unanimously. Proceedings of the Congress 361 MR. COHEN : I would like to thank Mr. Brown for his fine action. THE CHAIRMAN : The Secretary will report the next reso- lution moved by Col. Lawson on international press communica- tion. THE SECRETARY: I will read the resolution: International Press Communications: This Congress declares that, in the interests of world amity and of better international understanding and sympathy, telegraphic facilities for the general interchange of news and press comment should be greatly cheapened, improved, and extended : and, That the representatives of the world's press here assembled in con- ference, undertake, in their respective countries, to press by all legitimate means for the establishment of lower rates for press messages, whether by land telegraph, submarine cable, or wireless telegraphy, and for the im- provement and extension of such means of communication. COLONEL LAWSON: I have already spoken about this resolution at considerable len^h. I don't intend to say any more. In view of the resolution which we have just carried I will re- peat this part of it : That I consider that disarmament in itself is nothing at all and it is no use in limiting the means of fighting if you leave the desire to fight. The surest way to eliminate the desire to fight is to improve our knowledge of each other, and that can only be done by extending, cheapening, and improving the means of international communication. MR. COHEN : I second the resolution. THE CHAIRMAN : Colonel Lawson moves and Mr. Cohen seconds the resolution as reported to you. Are you ready for the question? All in favor say Aye, contrary No. The resolution is unanimously carried. The Secretary will report the next resolution, proposed by Mr. McClatchy. THE SECRETARY: The following is resolution number four: Realizing the vital necessity for interchange of reliable, uncontrolled and uncensored news reports between the peoples of the earth, if mis- understandings are to be avoided and peace maintained: Appreciating the action of Congress of United States in authorizing the use of United States Navy radio facilities for trans-oceanic news com- munication at a word rate which has encouraged the development of comprehensive daily trans-pacific news reports : Realizing the fact that continuation of this policy on the part of the United States, with co-operation from other nations on the shores 362 The Press Congress of the World of the Pacific, will insure permanent communication across that ocean, and encourage similar conditions in other portions of the globe; Understanding that in no other way at this time, is it practicable to insure satisfactory news communication across the Pacific and that the present service must cease in July 1922, if Congress fails to renew authorization to the Navy Department; The Press Congress of the World, in session assembled at Hono- lulu, expresses its warm appreciation of the initiative thus taken by the United States in practical peace promotion, by fostering the de- velopment of independent uncensored news communication with other countries, and trusts that the U. S. Congress will not permit lapse or discontinuance of the present service. The Press Congress of the World further commends the policy thus established by the United States to the careful consideration of other nations in the hope that through co-operation all parts of the world may in time enjoy such interchange of reliable news as is now possible on the Pacific; and pledges its members in their respective countries, to the promotion of such a policy. MR. McCLATCHY : I think it unnecessary to make a speech on this matter. My paper covered the fundamental facts upon which the resolution was based. May I say only this. You have shown by unanimous endorsement of Colonel Lawson's resolution the sentiments of this Congress as to the necessity of the free interchange of news communications throughout the world. The principles are good but none of us can accomplish anything if we confine ourselves to generalities. The Press Con- gress of the World has a remarkable opportunity to demonstrate its usefulness by doing something practical. President Harding in his address intimated that he would be glad to receive and thought he might receive suggestions from this Congress look- ing forward to maintaining the peace of the world. Here is a concrete example in which we can suggest. The papers which you see published in Honolulu carrying complete press reports are the development of that plan. It is only necessary to extend that plan through other countries to secure on the part of all peoples and countries of the Pacific ocean that intercommunication of news which must prevent propaganda and misunderstandings. Let us not neglect this op- portunity. Let us not only interest the United States in estab- lishing a plan of this kind but urgently ask that they do not per- mit that plan to be killed by failure to provide the means by which that plan may be continued and extended. I Proceedings of the Congress 363 MR. PETRIE: I second the resolution. THE CHAIRMAN : There being no further remarks on the resolution as proposed and seconded, those in favor make it known by saying Aye, contrary No. The resolution is unanimously carried. COLONEL LAWSON : On behalf of the Resolutions Com- mittee I would like to announce there will be a short session of that Committee immediately after this session, in order to look through some resolutions recently submitted. I am sorry it is necessary to call the Resolutions Committee again, but if del- egates will not pay any attention to announcements made we have to do the best we can. THE CHAIRMAN : In that event the Chair will submit some resolutions just handed to him by delegates from Latin America. The Secretary will read the next resolution which is pro- posed by Mr. Sugimura of Japan. THE SECRETARY: The resolution reads: Whereas : The influence of and future growth in sphere of general use- fulness of the press of the world must necessarily depend upon the stand- ards which are set by its great power for good or evil, and that these stand- ards can be best attained through the training of journalists along the broadest and most wholesome lines ; then be it Resolved : That the Press Congress of the World here assembled gives its heartiest indorsement and moral support to the work that is being done in various ways for the training and education along the broadest and high- est lines of young men and women in those things that may best serve the newspapers and the public in their profession of journalism. MR. WONG: I second it. THE CHAIRMAN : Are there any further remarks on the motion to adopt this resolution? There appearing to be none, all in favor of its adoption say Aye, contrary No. It is unani- imously adopted. The Secretary will now report the next resolution, by Mr. Ludvig Saxe. THE SECRETARY: Whereas, it is understood that there is at diis time being formed in Belgium an international press union which is to be composed of rep- resentatives of those countries included in the League of Nations ; and whereas it is desirable that if possible one great international Press Union should be formed, therefore be it Resolved: That the Congress ask the Executive Committee to direct its attention to the international press union with a view to co-operation if found practical so that duplication of effort may be avoided. 364 The Press Congress of the World MR. SAXE : Some months ago the Belgian Press Associa- tion sent an invitation to press associations in different coun- tries, asking them to send delegates to a congress in Brussells, with the intention to constitute an International Press Union. It was the understanding that admission should be open to jour- nalists from the political dailies in the allied and neutral coun- tries within the League of Nations. An invitation was received also by the Norwegian Press Association, but we could not ac- cept it. The Congress in Belgium probably has been held ere this and the new International Press Union probably has been consti- tuted. As far as I know it should be discussed in Belgium as to whether admission should also be open to journalists from coun- tries outside the League of Nations. Nobody can say at this moment how that Press Union will develop, but it may happen that it will become a great interna- tional association and I think it would be wise if the Executive Committee of the Press Congress of the World would have its attention directed to the new Union. It might be desirable to get into contact with it and possibly co-operate with it. MR. GLASS : I second the resolution. THE CHAIRMAN: All in favor of this resolution say Aye, contrary No. The motion is carried unanimously. The seventh resolution is by Mr. Hin Wong. The Secretary will please read the resolution. THE SECRETARY: Resolved : That the Press Congress of the World shall instruct its Ex- ecutive Committee to confer with representatives of the Chinese delegation to the conference with a view to the possibility of appointing at their request a commission to study the present condition, extent, and methods of Chinese foreign press service with a view to recommending means of improvement if necessary. MR. HIN WONG: I move the adoption of the resolution. MR. ZUMOTO: I second the motion. MR. HENRY CHUNG: Mr. Chairman,. I am in hearty ac- cord with my friend Mr. Wong of China in supporting the reso- lution presented by him. It will be a good thing for China, and consequently it will be a good thing for a country closely allied with China both by racial ties and territorial propinquity, Korea. Proceedings of the Congress 365 For that reason, Mr. Chairman, I propose the following amend- ment to Mr. Wong's resolution : Resolved, that the Press Congress of the World shall instruct its Ex- ecutive Committee to empower the same Commission to make a similar in- quiry into the present condition, extent and methods of press services to and from Korea with a view to recommending means of improvement if neces- sary. This does not in any way change or modify the resolution proposed by Mr. Wong, but simply widens its scope so that the investigation be extended to Korea. Korea is a nation of splendid history and achievements. By coming into closer contact with her, the rest of the nations of the world will be benefited in learning the ancient culture and civilization of that nation. In so far as Korea is concerned, she is anxious to play her role in the family of nations in the way of cultural exchange and friendly co-operation. Her aspirations in this regard should have the support of the other nations sur- rounding the Pacific. Japan should have no objection to having a commission of journalists investigate the conditions in Korea. On the con- trary she should welcome it as it would afford her a chance to air possible misunderstanding that might exist between Korea and Japan. For all these reasons I solicit your support in the amendment I have proposed. MR. ZUMOTO: Mr. President, I second Mr. Chung's amendment and in so doing I ask your permission to say a few words. I am in hearty sympathy with the desire which Mr. Chung has so clearly expressed, that conditions in Korea be made known to the world more accurately and more widely than is the case now. I have the greatest sympathy with the Korean people among whom I count not a few dear friends, and any- thing that may conduce to the betterment of their conditions commands my hearty support. As for Japan, she has nothing to conceal from the world con- cerning her policy and action in the peninsula, and there is no doubt that her best interests will be served by having everything made known to the outside public, no matter whether the facts revealed may be favorable or unfavorable to her. Mr. Chung's proposal, therefore, has my whole-hearted endorsement. 366 The Press Congress of the World THE CHAIRMAN : Mr. Wong, will you accept Mr. Chung's amendment ? MR. WONG: Yes. THE CHAIRMAN : Mr. Wong accepts the amendment and includes the amendment in his original resolution. All in favor of the resolution as amended will make it known by saying Aye, contrary No. The resolution as amended is carried unani- mously. The next resolution will be reported by the Secretary, whose resolution it is. THE SECRETARY : My resolution is as follows : Whereas, it is desirable, in order to facilitate travel, particularly the free passage from country to country of journalists whose efforts may promote mutual international enlightenment and understanding, be it Resolved: That the members of the Press Congress of the World pledge themselves to urge upon their respective governments the necessity for the removal, as far as possible, of all vexatious restrictions upon the issue of passports, and that the imposition of any additional charges for such pass- ports, other than that made in the country of their issue, be discontinued. MR. GLASS: I second that resolution. (The resolution was carried unanimously.) THE CHAIRMAN: Resolution number nine will be held over until the afternoon session. The Secretary will next re- port the tenth resolution, proposed by Mr. Nieva of the Philip- pine Islands. THE SECRETARY: The resolution reads: Whereas, it is the earnest desire of the Press Congress of the World to co-operate with duly organized governments in the establishment of per- manent peace for mankind. Be it Resolved : That it is the hope of the Press Congress of the World that all governments of the world will give the Press of the world all such means of access to avenues of information as should enable the Press every- where to inform the world correctly and unreservedly on public matters. Be it Also Resolved: That the Delegates to the Press Congress of the World pledge themselves to give the widest publicity to this resolution. THE CHAIRMAN : In the absence of Mr. Nieva will some one in sympathy with that resolution move its adoption, if not it will be deferred until the afternoon session. COLONEL LAWSON: On behalf of Mr. Nieva, I beg to move the adoption of the resolution. MR. COUTOUPIS : I second the resolution. (The resolution was unanimously carried.) Proceedings of the Congress 367 THE CHAIRMAN: The next resolution is apparently pro- posed by the Chairman of a committee, there is no name on it. The Secretary will read it. THE SECRETARY: Resolved : That the President be authorized to nominate and with the approval of the Executive Committee to appoint standing committees to deal with (a) news communication, (b) freedom of the press, (c) inter- cliange of journalists, (d) journalistic education, (e) ethics of journal- ism and standards of practice, (f) promotion of the welfare of jour- nalists. MR. MARK COHEN : I move the adoption of the resolu- tion. MR. SOUTHERN: I second it. COLONEL LAWSON : A number of members of the Con- gress, with various cases of specific grievance in various parts of the world, have come to the Chairman of the Resolutions Com- mittee and have asked for resolutions to be passed by this Con- gress expressing its approval of certain action or advocating some form of action. I want it understood that it is impossible for this Congress, assembled as it is here, to take any action on what, al- though it may be correct, is only an ex parte statement. It is the intention of the Congress to appoint these standing Committees which will be empowered to handle any case brought before them. The Committees will endeavor to the best of their ability to get all the evidence on these cases, and their decisions and anything they may be able to do to adjust these grievances will be published in the Bulletin about which Mr. Brown has spoken to you. The only weapon which this Congress has is that of publicity. It is perfectly useless for us to pass a resolution expressing dis- approval of the action of some state, because the answer of that state will be that they do not recognize any jurisdiction of this Congress. But, on the other hand, if such a conclusion is shown in its true light, in a Bulletin which is circulated all over the world, they may do a very great deal to insure that that grievance should be put right. That is the constructive policy of this Congress on this particular question, and I hope it will be understood by the various members who brought forward these cases that there is no lack of sympathy on the part of the Resolutions Committee but because it is absolutely impossible for them to take any ac- 368 The Press Congress of the World tion. It is only by the establishment of these Committees that anything can be done, and therefore in my opinion this is the most important resolution to come before the meeting today. THE CHAIRMAN: Are you ready for the motion? The resolution is carried unanimously. The next resolution is proposed by Mr. Hollington Tong on interchange of journalists. The Secretary will read it. THE SECRETARY : Whereas, each nation must depend in large measure upon its journalists for its knowledge of the other nations of the world, and Whereas, it is in the interests of world peace and understanding that journalists should be most thoroughly informed as regards the people and customs and thought of countries other than their own, Be it Resolved, That the Press Congress of the World urges wider practice of the policy of interchange of journalists between nations and proposes to its Executive Committee that definite steps be taken to increase tlie practice between the countries represented in the Congress. MR. TONG: As it is unnecessary to dwell on the importance of the necessity to interchange newspaper men between the na- tions, and as Colonel Lawson and other speakers have dwelt upon this matter at great length, I will not speak about it any more and have pleasure in merely moving the adoption of the resolu- tion. (The motion was seconded by Mr. Davies of Australia, and carried unanimously.) THE CHAIRMAN : The Secretary will report the next reso- lution on international obligations, proposed by Mr. Zumoto, of Japan. THE SECRETARY : Mr. Zumoto's resolution reads as fol- lows: Whereas, it is believed that the difficulties which arise between the nations of the world are due largely to lack of full understanding between the several governments and peoples, and Whereas, it is further believed that to dissemiioate among the peoples of the earth more complete knowledge of countries and races other tlian their own would be one of the surest guarantees of international amity, Be It Resolved, That the Press Congress of the World in this man- ner recognizes tlie solemn obligations which rest upon journalists every- where to spare no effort to promote a spirit of world fellowship among the peoples of all nations. MR. ZUMOTO : I do not think this resolution requires any amplification from me. It expresses very clearly what is pro- \V. J). IIOKXADAY, Austin. Tkxas (u|)i)."r, left); MR. am) MRS. V. 8. McCLATCHV. Sacramento, Califounia (iipiier, center); HERBERT L. BRIDGMAX, Brooklyn, New York (ui)per, right). ]\1RS. JOHN TRENHOLM WARREN, Honolulu (center, left); FRANK r. GLASS, SR., Birmingham, Alabama (center, right). JOHN R. MORRIS, Executive Secretary of the Congress. Tokyo (lower, left); MR. and MRS. H. V. BAILEY, Illinois (lower, center); L. W. UE VIS-NORTON. Secretary, Hawaiian Islands Executive Com- mittee (lower, right). Proceedings of the Congress 369 posed, so I will simply ask your hearty apprcval of this resolu- tion. MR. TONG: I heartily second the motion. MR. DAVIKS: T would like to make a few remarks. We all realize that a more complete knowledge of countries and races other than our own will help to remove a great many misunder- standings, but I think to a certain extent the newspapers them- selves are to blame. The cable news going from Australia to England for the last year for instance, has led to a wonderful misconception of the place. There is an impression in Great Britain now that Australia is a land of drought and where strikes are constantly in evidence. As one newspaper said : "Australia is a land where industrial peace occasionally breaks out." That is all wrong. It has a drought now and again but there are por- tions of Australia where the rainfall is continual throughout the year. It is only in certain sections of the country where we ever have drought. In other matters too, the sending of sensational news only and the printing of sensational news only of remote countries helps to create a misconception and if it were possible that the press of the world could endeavor not only to print sensational news from remote countries, but also to give some indication of ordinary life there, it would do a great deal of good. I think the proposal for an interchange of journalists as outlined in the previous motion would help out a lot. Therefore, if this system of interchange of journalists can be brought about it will be a good thing. I most heartily support this motion and I hope the press of other countries, when sensational items do come from Australia, will realize that that is not the general run of things there. (The motion was put to the meeting and carried unanimously.) THE CHAIRMAN: The Secretary will report the last of the resolutions to be presented at this time ; not all the resolu- tions but the last to be presented at this time, a resolution re- garding the freedom of the press presented by Mr. Coutoupis of Greece. The Secretary will read the resolution. THE SECRETARY: Whereas : Fairminded men everywhere realize the benefits to be de- rived from a free and unhampered press and know^ that a press subject to the control of any outside power or influence can never be an agent of true public service; 24 370 The Press Congress of the World Be It Resolved, That the Press Congress of the World condemns every power or influence which would seek to control the utterances or color the news reports of the press of any land and the delegates in the Press Congress here assembled pledge themselves to the principle of absolute freedom of expression for the press of the world. MR. COUTOUPIS: In moving this resolution I may be considered as proposing something superfluous, as nowadays no one either in this room or outside of it is Hkely to be against the freedom of the press. The real question about the matter is, how far must this freedom go? I am aware there are circumstances where freedom of the press must have some limit but I would like to say that a Press Congress should always regard the prin- ciples of the freedom of the press as its basis. During the war in France, a country which stands to the front for freedom of opinion and thought, there were complaints that the censors abused this privilege by limiting very much the freedom of the press. Clemenceau, the great French statesman and journalist, very often complained about this. I therefore sug- gest that the Press Congress pass this resolution in order to re- mind all governments that even in exceptional circumstances, as in time of war, this freedom must be respected. I move the adoption of this resolution. (The motion was seconded by Mr. Brown of New York, sup- ported by Mr. Chung of Korea, and carried unanimously.) THE CHAIRMAN: This completes the list of resolutions for this morning's session. The Congress will recess until two o'clock. NINTH SE;sSION. THURSDAY AFTERNOON, OCTOBER 20, 1921. Congress was called to order at two o'clock by President Williams. THE CHAIRMAN : The Committee on Resolutions have a further report to make. COLONEL LAWSON : Further resolutions were submitted this morning which have been approved by the Committee on Resolutions and have been handed to the Secretary of the Con- gress. THE CHAIRMAN: The Secretary will read these resolu- tions. Proceedings of the Cong?' ess 371 If you will allow me before that, however, I will ask the Secretary to read a communication from Mr. Beteta regarding some matters which will, after having been read for information, be referred to the Executive Committee for such action as may seem desirable. THE SECRETARY : Mr. Beteta announces : The two Vice-presidents of the Congress for Spain have sent to the Press Congress papers containing an outline of the Spanish Press History and the Spanish Press Legislation. Representing the Spanish Press Association I have the honor of pro- posing that the Spanish language, which spoken by more than eighty mil- lions of persons and on which such a great deal of human culture has been constructed would be declared as one of the official languages of the Congress. On behalf of the same institution I have the honor to express that should the Congress decide to hold its next meeting at Seville, the Association would be glad to support and co-operate as far as necessary to the end of making such a meeting of great success worthy of the important mission of the Press Congress of the World. Dr. Roberto Brenes Mesen, a veteran of the journalism of the Republic of Costa Rica, Central America, and former Secretary of Education there and Minister of Costa Rica to Washington, proposes to create the Con- tinental American Press Sub-Congress, as a part of the Press Congress of the World, with two independent sections, because of the diflFerence of language — but in close spiritual relation. The function of this Sub-Con- gress should be to determine those important questions upon which the international consciousness of the Continent needs must be formed and educated in order that each of its composing nations becomes aware of the share incumbent upon the American Continent in the preservation of the peace and welfare of the world. The Spanish American Section of this Sub-Congress should take in charge, besides, this most important function : to emphasize the spiritual unity of all peoples speaking one and the same Peninsular language, creat- ing in a solid and definite way the sentiment and the conviction that in the realm of art and science and all the spiritual forms of civilization all those nations are, separately, mere provinces of a vast ensemble which we must take in sight when the artistic work is created, or the scientific research is brought about, or the philosophic doctrine is expounded. Dr. Brenes Mesen outlined his complete plan for this Sub-Congress. Mr. Ernesto Montenegro, General Representative of the Chilean daily El Mercuric, the oldest paper in Latin America, proposes to the Congress a plan for the creation of a Monthly Magazine devoted to the Youths of the three Americas, in order to complete their education and to create in their spirit high ideals of human solidarity, peace and friendship. 372 The Press Congress of the World Mr. Jose Elias Levis, President of the Press Association of Porto Rico, proposes a plan for the diffusion of the Schools of Journalism through- out Latin America and for the bettering of the actual conditions of the members of the staff and other inferior employees of the journalistic enter- prises. THE CHAIRMAN: Unless there is some objection, this communication will be referred to the Executive Committee for such action as to it may seem desirable and possible and neces- sary. The Chair presents to you Mr. Frank P. Glass as your pre- siding officer for the rest of the session. MR. GLASS : The next order of business is the continuance of the presentation of the various resolutions by the Secretary. THE SECRETARY: Ladies and Gentlemen, these resolu- tions by Mr. Riley Allen, in his absence will be introduced by Mr. Herrick and Mr. McClatchy. Whereas, the Associated Press has given to the Press Congress of the World its fullest co-operation and sympathetic help at all times, both in advance arrangements for this convention at Honolulu, and in carrying all over the world the news of the convention's deliberations, and Whereas, the Associated Press has especially manifested this spirit of interest and co-operation by furnishing free of charge through the Honolulu Associated Press newspapers an augmented news service ; Therefore be it Resolved, First, that this Congress votes its thanks and gratitude to the Asso- ciated Press and its representative in Honolulu, Mr. John Snell, who has taken great personal interest in promoting the success of the Congress. Secondly, that we view the interest of the Associated Press in this Con- gress as an encouragement to the cause of good journalism, whose founda- tion is the dissemination of correct and authoritative news. Thirdly, that copies of these resolutions be sent to the board of directors and the general manager of the Associated Press and to its Honolulu rep- resentative. MR. HERRICK : I move the adoption of the resolution. MR. HOLLINGTON TONG : I second the motion. (The resolution was carried unanimously.) THE SECRETARY: The next resolution is also by Mr. Riley Allen and will be introduced by Mr. McClatchy. Resolved, that the thanks of this Congress be extended to the United Press, whose interest in the Congress has been evidenced by its arrange- ment to send by wireless a special news report from time to time during the sessions of the Congress. Proceedings of the Congress 373 MR. McCLATCH Y : I have pleasure in urging the adoption of that resolution. MR. BROWN : I have pleasure in seconding the motion. (The resolution was unanimously carried.) THE SECRETARY: Another resolution, in the name of Mr. Riley Allen, reads: Whereas, the Communication Division of the United States Department of the Navy has made possible, during the sessions of the Press Congress of the World, a largely expanded daily news report, carried free by United States Navy Radio, and has spared no effort to provide for the delegates here assembled a most thorough and representative news report, Be it Resolved, by the delegates to the Press Congress of the World, First, that we heartily appreciate the attitude of the Communications Division of the Department of the Navy of the United States; Secondly, that we express special appreciation for the high degree of technical success which has characterized the efforts of the U. S. Navy Radio officers and staff operators in bringing the several daily and nightly news re- ports by navy radio to Honolulu; Thirdly, that copies of these resolutions be sent to the officer command- ing the communication division, United States Navy Department, to the district communications officer at San Francisco; and to the district com- munications officer at Honolulu, Lieut. C. N. Ingraham for himself and staft. MR. McCLATCHY: I have been in intimate touch for one and a half years about with the Navy Department and know per- haps as intimately as anyone the credit that is due, and I have great pleasure in moving the adoption of the resolution. MR. HERRICK: I second the resolution. (The resolution was carried by acclamation.) THE SECRETARY: I have a resolution here standing in the name of Mr. Beteta, to which I am sure you will give your most hearty support. Be it Resolved, that the Press Congress of the World assembled at Honolulu wishes to express to Dr. Walter Williams, tlie President of the Congress, its deep appreciation of his tireless efforts in behalf of this or- ganization of the world's journalists. The delegates to the Press Congress of the World recognize that the maintenance of the Congress since the meeting in San Francisco in 1915 and the signal success of the present ses- sion is due, more than to any other factor, to President Williams' wisdom, his lofty integrity, and his devotion to the duties which his high office in- volves. MR. SOUTHERN: I have the honor to second the resolu- tion which is offered by Mr. Beteta. 374 The Press Congress of the World I am sure that every member of this Congress will agree with me when I indorse the ability and the justice and the im- partiality and the humor with which our presiding officer has conducted these meetings, (applause). He has been the means of bringing among us such a fine spirit of co-operation and good feeling, that our meetings have been brought to a larger success through the courtesy of Dr. Williams. It has been said that a prophet is without honor in his own country. It gives me pleasure to say that we in Missouri have proved that saying does not fit on this occasion. I, therefore, coming from Missouri, speak, I think, the feeling of every member present when I heartily ask the adoption of the resolution offered. MR. ZUMOTO : Permit me to suggest a word on this reso- lution. I think it is fitting to have an expression of the high obliga- tion and appreciation that we men in the Far East hold for Dr. Williams. We have always found Dr. Williams a man of the broadest views ; a man without petty feeling of race and color, and so thoroughly impartial in his views that he has endeared him- self to the Japanese people, the Chinese and the Koreans. The fine spirit of interest and sincerity of his character has been recognized and has appealed to the imagination of the Oriental people, and we have had quite a number of specimens of jour- nalists that he is turning out at his School of Journalism, and of these men some are working in Tokyo, some in Shanghai and at other places in the East, and judging from the fruits we all know that he is conducting one of the best schools of journalism in the world. I am very happy to have had this opportunity of expressing the sentiments we feel towards him before an audience composed of important and influential journalists from all parts of the world. JUDGE PIERCE: Not as a substitute and of course not as an amendment, I desire to place partly through the motion of the other and partly because there cannot be too much said on the subject the following: Resolved, that it is the unanimous and grateful sense of this Assembly of the Press from all over tlic world, that diligent search and happy fortune could not possibly have furnished us a more wise, efficient and accomplished President; and Secretary as well. Proceedings of the Congress 375 Our President's vision and vigor in forecasting this notable movement ; his great services in its organization ; his dignity and judicial bearing while presiding at our deliberations; his ever present humor, render entirely inadequate any measure of our express admiration and thankfulness. Yet we cannot let this opportunity pass without recording our sincere sense of the highest appreciation and the deepest gratitude to our noble President, Dean Walter Willians, the head of the School of Journalism of the University of Missouri, as well also to our tall, handsome and brainy Secretary, Guy Innes, Associate Editor of the Herald of Melbourne in far-away and always-admirable Australia. I propose a rising vote for the adoption of both these reso- lutions. THE CHAIRMAN : Does Judge Pierce offer that as a sub- stitute or as an amendment? JUDGE PIERCE : As a resolution to run concvirrently with the other. THE CHAIRMAN: That would be hardly parliamentary I fear, Judge. Also there is another resolution with reference to the Secretary. COLONEL LAWSON: Had Judge Pierce submitted his resolution to the Resolutions Committee, we should have been able to approve it, but as he did not do so it is too late to do any- thing now, I fear. May I point out that this resolution especially before the Congress was specially designed to cover Dr. Walter Williams' actions as Chairman of this Congress in session ; there is another resolution on paper covering what he has done as President of the Press Congress of the World, and there is also another reso- lution referring to Mr. Guy Innes as Secretary. Therefore, as Chairman of the Resolutions Committee, I submit that it would be preferable that the resolution proposed by Mr. Beteta now before the Congress be allowed to stand. MR. TONG : I cannot allow such an important an occasion to pass without saying a few words on behalf of the Chinese delega- tion on the fair manner in which Dr. Williams conducted the meet- ing. I consider this an unusual occasion. Dr. Williams has always been impartial, fair-minded, sincere and earnest. I have 376 The Press Congress of the World been well accustomed, as one of his students, to these charac- teristics of his and so I am not surprised at the fairness, sin- cerity and impartiality which he has shown throughout the whole of the proceedings on these Islands and I say that he is a man of international caliber. (Applause.) THE CHAIRMAN : Am I to understand that Judge Pierce withdraws his resolution? JUDGE PIERCE: Certainly. THE CHAIRMAN: Then the resolution is ready for the vote. All in favor will rise. The resolution was carried by a rising vote. Here is another resolution of a similar trend. THE SECRETARY: Resolved, that this Congress desires to place on record its high apprecia- tion of the ability and impartiality displayed by Dr. Walter Williams as Chairman, in the conduct of the sessions of the Congress. This resolution is also proposed in the name of Mr. Beteta. MR. SOUTHERN : I also have pleasure in seconding this resolution. THE CHAIRMAN : The Chair also calls for a rising vote in this case. The resolution was carried unanimously. THE CHAIRMAN: I have a resolution here which reads as follows: Resolved, that this Congress desires to express its thanks to Mr. Guy Innes, for acting as secretary during the sessions of the Congress. This resolution is in the name of Colonel Lawson. MR. HERRICK: I move its adoption. MR. TONG: I second that motion. (The resolution was unanimously carried.) MR. GUY INNES: Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentlemen, I have to thank you very much and also Judge Pierce, for the resolution you have just passed. All I have done I have been only too happy to do in the cause of that great crusade of which Dr. Williams has been such a noble and efficient leader. THE CHAIRMAN : The next order of business, if the time has arrived, is the report of the Committee on Nominations, un- less someone has business to introduce in the meantime. JUDGE PIERCE : I am wondering with becoming modesty and deference I hope, that since there were three resolutions on Proceedings of the Congress Zll the same subject if the one I offered may not, without any re- marks, be considered at the close of the regular resolutions which have come from the Committee, and therefore I make a motion, without remark, that that resolution of mine be also adopted in connection with the other three. Too much praise cannot be offered these two gentlemen. THE CHAIRMAN: The Chair offers the suggestion that Judge Pierce's motion be incorporated into the minutes of the session. It will be so ordered. MR. PETRIE: I move that the last three resolutions passed by the Congress be engrossed on parchment and sent to the President and Secretary respectively. MR. TONG : I second that motion. THE CHAIRMAN : The motion is carried unanimously, and it is so ordered. MR. McCLATCHY: I presume that copy of these resolu- tions will be sent out by the Secretary of the Congress. I pre- sume there is no need for motion to that effect. THE CHAIRMAN: There will be no harm whatever in moving to that effect. MR. McCLATCHY: I make a motion in accordance with that suggestion. MR. HERRICK : I second the motion. THE CHAIRMAN: The motion is carried and it is so or- dered. We will now proceed to the Report of the Committee on Nominations. MR. COHEN: Mr. Chairman, Ladies and Gentlemen: In presenting the final report of the Committee on Nominations, I desire to call your attention to the fact that there are two independent matters discussed in that report, and with your ap- proval I propose to discuss them separately. The first is a resolution recommending that Article IV of the Constitution be amended so as to increase the number of members of the Executive to fifteen, and to remove the require- ment that Vice-Presidents of the Congress should alone be mem- bers of that committee. The second part of the resolution submits for your ratifica- tion or otherwise, the names of the gentlemen who have been 378 The Press Congress of the World selected to fill the various executive offices as well as the several Vice-Presidents. Taking the need for the amendment of the Constitution first, we have found as the result of experience in working out the constitution, that in limiting the choice of your Executive to Vice-presidents, a very limited field of workers is presented, and we are anxious that the President shall have to his hand a committee sufficiently large, not only to advise him on difficult matters as they arise, but to warrant him after consultation with them to express the mind of the Congress on any matter of urg- ency, and we venture to think that the names that have been se- lected as members of that Executive Committee will meet with your hearty approval. It was indeed a great pleasure to us as a committee to know that both Mr. Glass and Mr. Brown, whose work as colleagues I take this opportunity of acknowledging, consented immediately to the wish of the committee, that they should be relieved of the Vice-presidential offices in order to become the trusted advisers of your President. (Applause). This morning I said all that I think is necessary to commend the name of Dr. Walter Williams to you as the most fit and proper person to fill the Presidential chair for a further term, and the many eulogies that were passed upon him, and the cordial manner in which his name was received by you, make it ■unnecessary for me, on this occasion at all events, to add one single word to the many well earned tributes that were paid this morning to our beloved President. In Mr. James Wright Brown, Dr. Williams will have a man after his own heart, and in Mr. Glass a coadjutor of acknowledged national standing. It is quite unnecessary for me to give the names of the other gentlemen who are to constitute your Executive, but a few of them are deserving of passing mention. Dr. Beteta performed yeoman service at San Francisco and has placed this Congress under an obligation to him for his splendid service in Europe during the present year. The representatives of Japan, of Greece, of China, and of Canada, require no eulogy at my hands. Each and all have done their work splendidly and in Mr. Guy Innes, of Melbourne, Proceedings of the Congress 379 you have had not only a hard working and zealous secretary, but a man whose standing in his profession in Australia deserves recognition in the way that you purpose to utilize his services in the immediate future. Among the lists of Vice-Presidents it will be seen that in several of the coimtries only one nomination is made, but the tmderstanding is that wherever a single nomination has been made, that individual will do his utmost to associate with him- self some journalist in his own country who will co-operate with him in furthering the interests of this Congress. A number of invitations were sent out by the Executive to persons asking them to act as Vice-Presidents, but the time has been so short for their signification of acceptance or other- wise, that your committee deemed it wise to renominate them in the hope that they would find no difficulty in the way of acting in the way we asked them to do. It gives me very great pleasure indeed to move not only the amendment of the Constitution but to submit as the office bearers for the ensuing term the names in the list which I hand to the Sec- retary to read. THE CHAIRMAN : You have heard the report of the Com- mittee on Nominations. I will ask the Secretary to read the resolution relating to Article IV. THE SECRETARY: That Article IV of the constitution of the Press Congress be amended so as to increase the number of members of the Executive Committee to fifteen, including the President and Secretary-Treasurer of the Congress, and to remove the requirement that members of the Executive Committee be also Vice-presidents of the Congress. MR. HERRICK : I second that motion. MR. McCLATCHY: My understanding of the Constitution is that there are two Vice-presidents from each country repre- sented in the Congress and that the amendment of Article IV in no way amended that portion of the constitution. As I gather now the suggestion is that we make Vice-presidents members of the Executive Committee. MR. COHEN: No. MR. McCLATCHY: How many members are there? MR. COHEN : Fifteen. 380 The Press Congress of the World MR. McCLATCHY: Those fifteen must be chosen from the Vice-presidents ? MR. COHEN: Not necessarily. Take for example Great Britain. MR. McCLATCHY: How many members is the Executive Committee supposed to have? MR. COHEN : Fifteen including the President and Secretary- Treasurer. There are more than forty Vice-Presidents, two from each country. MR. McCLATCHY: We don't provide in our resolution that they must be Vice-Presidents? MR. COHEN : May I put it this way. The future executive body as now selected will number fifteen but will not necessarily include every Vice-President but may include a certain number of them. In the case of Great Britain we have suggested two names who, we think will be of great service to you, and we ask you to put them on the Executive Committee. MR. McCLATCHY: Our present Constitution does not provide that members of the Executive Committee shall be chosen from the Vice-presidents, MR. COHEN : Oh, yes, it does. MR. McCLATCHY : That is dififerent. (The amendment was seconded and carried.) MR. COHEN : The following is a list of nominations to be presented to the Congress with the recommendation that they be elected officers of the Congress to hold office from the time of election until the next regular election. I will ask the Sec- retary to please read the names. THE SECRETARY: For President: Walter Williams of the United States of America. For Secretary-Treasurer : James Wright Brown of tlie United States of America. For members of the Governing Committee : E. F. Lawson, of England K. Sugimura, of Japan Edouard Chapuisat, of Switzerland V. R. Beteta, of Guatemala Robert Bell, of New Zealand Ludvig Saxe, of Norway Thales Coutoupis, of Greece Hollington K. Tong, of China Proceedings of the Congress 381 Oswald Mayrand, of Canada P'. Horace Rose, of South Africa Sebastiao Sampaio, of South America Guy Innes, of Australia For Vice-Presidents the following: Argentina : Ezequiel Paz and Dr. Jorge Mitre Australia: Keith Murdoch and H. A. Davies Brazil : Jose Carlos Rodriguez and Felix Pacheco Belgium : Edouard J. C. Fonteyne Canada : Walter Nichol and Oswald Mayrand Chile : Augustin Edwards and Dr. Carlos Silva Vildosola China : Hin Wong and Sze Liang Zay Colombia: Enrique Lievano and Ismael E. Arciniegas Costa Rica: Luis Cruz Meza and Guillermo Vargas Calvo Cuba : Agustin Lazo and Jose del Rivero Denmark: Kristian Dahl and J. Borgbjerg Dominican Republic : Arturo Pellerano Alfau and Conrado Sanchez Ecuador : Leonidas Pallares Arteta and Cesar Borja Cordero France : Philippe Millet and Stephane Lauzanne Great Britain : Sir Campbell Stuart and Sir William Davies Greece : Thales Coutoupis Guatemala : V. R. Beteta Holland : D. Hans and Dr. G. G. van der Hoeven Honduras : Troylan Turcios and Paulina Valladares Hongkong : T. Petrie India: Sir S. Banerjee and R. N. Vatchaghandy Ireland: J. F. Charlessen and W. T. Brewster Italy: M. Borsa and Olinda Malagod Japan : K. Sugimura and M. Zumoto Korea : Henry Chung and Dong Sung Kim Mexico : Rafael Alducin and Felix E. Palavicini New Zealand : Robert Bell and Cecil W. Leys Nicaragua : Daniel Maldonado and Juan Ramon Aviles Norway : Ludvig Saxe Panama: Guillermo Andreve and Guillermo Colunje Paraguay : Dr. Enrique Bordenave and Dr. Carlos Luis Isasi Peru : Oscar Miro Quezada and Luis Fernan Cisneros Philippine Islands : Gregorio Nieva and Conrado Benitez Porto Rico : Manuel Fernandez and Jose Elias Levis Portugal: Alfreda de Mesquita and Dr. Julio Dantas Salvador : Ramon Mayorga Rivas and Francisco Gavidian South Africa : F. Horace Rose Spain : Rufino Blanco and E. Gomez Baquero Switzerland : H. Schoop and Edouard Chapuisat Turkey : Mihran Nacachian and Vertanes Mardigian United States : FVank P. Glass and Gardiner Kline 382 The Press Congress of the World Uruguay : Jose Batle Ordonez and Dr. Juan Andres Ramirez Venezuela : Laureano Vallenille Lanz and Andre Mata MR. COHEN : You will notice in one or two places a single name has been put forward and the understanding is, that the person so named shall put forward the name of someone in his country for the other vice-presidency ; and that those who have not had time to send confirmative replies or in the negative will be regarded as accepting. With these two exceptions I beg to move the adoption of the report in its entirety. THE CHAIRMAN: It is moved and seconded that the Secretary of this Congress be authorized to cast a vote of the entire body for this list of nominations for the various offices. THE SECRETARY : Mr. Chairman and Gentlemen : I wish to announce that I have cast the ballot, and the result is as I have just read here. THE CHAIRMAN: The motion to adopt is carried by ac- clamation. I have here one more resolution, proposed by Mr. Glass, which I will ask the Secretary to read. THE SECRETARY: Whereas, The President of the United States has called a Conference of representatives of the principal nations of the world to assemble in the city of Washington on November 11th, and Whereas, the purpose of this Conference is to consider the best ways and means of reducing armaments and of laying foundations for a general and permanent peace throughout the world, so that all peoples may be re- lieved of oppressive taxation and may have the opportunity to develop their highest qualities of blood and spirit, Nozv, Therefore be it Resolved by this body of forward-looking jour- nalists that we commend heartily this great vision of world harmony ; that we express the deepest sympathy with the purposes of the Conference ; that we entertain the most earnest hope that wise and practicable policies may be matured by that great body of strong men; that we have an abiding faith that the time is ripe for a substantial step forward in securing the world's welfare, and Be it Further Resolved: That, as a league of journalists, conscious of a world outlook at this strategic point in the great Pacific, we pledge our- selves to sustain and support the work of the Disarmament Conference in every deserved and practicable way, to the end that public opinion in all countries may ensure success for all decisions and undertakings that look to the attainment of world peace. MR. GLASS : I move the adoption of that resohttion. Proceedings of the Congress 383 COLONEL LAWSON: I have pleasure in seconding the motion, (The resolution was unanimously carried.) THE CHAIRMAN : I now desire to appoint a Committee to notify Dr. Williams of his re-election to this important position, and to ask him into the room — to bring him into the room — and let him make such remarks as he may see fit to make. I appoint Colonel Lawson, Mr. Brown, and Mr. Tong as a com- mittee. You will please proceed to find Dr. Williams and bring him here forthwith. (The committee appointed found Dr. Williams and led him into the hall, to the singing of "He's a Jolly Good Fellow.") THE CHAIRMAN: Gentlemen, I have very great pleasure in presenting to this body its new President, but never its old one. Dr. Williams. MR. WILLIAMS : I deeply appreciate, friends of mine, the high honor that you have paid me. I fear that I cannot trust myself to put into words that which my heart would suggest of gratitude and appreciation. You have given me far more honor than I merit and entrusted me with a position which I very much fear I will not be able to fill as acceptably as I would hope to fill it for your sake and mine. The success of these Congress sessions and of the prepara- tions therefor has been due to the helpfulness of journalists everywhere and in particular the success of this meeting has been due to the men and women of Hawaii who have given us such a cordial reception, and to your tolerance and patience and sympathy with the presiding officer. He could not help but do fairly well however feeble his efforts might be, when he had you to preside over, mild mannered, kindly disposed and eager to help as you have always been. We have had a great session. The tone and spirit of the papers that have been read and the addresses that have been delivered, and in particular the fine fraternal relationship es- tablished between journalists of various lands have, I believe, made this a most notable assembly of the world's press. We have builded well a foundation unto the future good of jour- nalism and through journalism to the good of mankind. The resolutions that you passed this morning offered the framework and the foundation for an edifice out of which may 384 The Press Congress of the World come much of good to journalism and humanity, but the build- ing of that edifice depends not upon me, to whom you have en- trusted in your mistaken kindness of heart the Presidency for another term, but the building of that edifice rests upon you, and you, and you (indicating) in every country represented here and in those countries which should be represented in like Congresses. We can only succeed when we are united, earnest and active, in the support of this great movement. Journalism may be seen in various manifestations through- out the world, just as we see in tropical countries where there are no seasons, fields that show the seeding side by side with fields that show the harvesting, and fields where planting is being done side by side with fields where the fruit is being gathered. So as we survey the world's journalism, we may see in some places the beginnings of journalism ; in other places, it coming to a finer fruitage, and yet others where the harvesting is more nearly to be attained. But one may not say to the other that journalism is not being well done there. We may, I think, say with sympathy and hope to the journalism of any land that those of other lands where journalism has progressed farther to freedom and a longer distance toward better conditions, that we should all stand together, bound up in the bundle of the world's life, and, that, I think is one of the purposes of the Press Congress. At one time, in the master city of the world, there stood a great and golden vase. It stood in the very center of the city and each evening as the sun went down, the toilers in that city came by that great and golden vase and placed within it the offerings of the people, and the next morning when the day dawned and the sun's first roseate streaks ran along the sky, the high priest of the city came unto that great and golden vase and took from out it the offerings of the people, reading aloud the legend writ upon the vase, and this is what he read: 'From each according to his ability Unto each according to his need.' And each day the high priest took the offerings of the people and distributed them to the city's life and beauty and to the com- mon good. The blessing of the gods was on the city, from the temple altar e'en down to the great and gloomy walls and yet be- o i Proceedings of the Co7igress 385 yond to the fair and fertile fields on which that city stood, as all cities stand, on the fair and fertile fields beyond the city gates. And the blessings came and never went until one day the custom failed. Each man toiled as hard as yesterday but all that he had he kept for his own selfish use, and shrivelled in his heart as he kept it for himself, and today, this glorious October day, if you would go to that one-time master city of the world you would find that bats rear their noisome brood within the market place ; the great and gloomy walls are there no more; the temple altar has fallen into ruin and there is not a soul left to do the city reverence This is a symbol as I understand it, of the high mission of journalism, a profession which seeks to take from every man his thought and opinion and aid, according to his ability, and distribute it throughout the world unto every man according to his need. And in this community and everywhere where that lesson and legend is forgotten, then, as the civilization of yes- terday reached its summit and went down again in ruins, what we call our civilization of today comes to the summit and goes down again. And that, it seems to me, friends of mine, sums up the pur- pose of a Press Congress of the World, representing the pro- fession of journalism throughout the world. Considering all the responsibility that you have again placed in my hands I am grateful personally to each one of you for your kindly considera- tion at this session ; and, hoping to do such service in the future as may be within my power in your behalf and in behalf of the cause which to all of us is dear, the profession of journalism, I am happy to accept again the honor that you have conferred upon me. (Loud and prolonged applause.) THE CHAIRMAN : The ninth resolution was laid over from this morning until this afternoon for presentation. Is the Chair- man of the Resolutions Committee ready to present it at this time? COLONEL LAWSON: Since that resolution was prepared I understand there probably will be a further meeting of the Congress and, if it is your wish, I suggest that the resolution be presented at the final meeting of the Congress. THE CHAIRMAN: That is my understanding, that there will be a brief meeting at some hour to be designated by the Ex- 25 386 The Press Congress of the World ecutive Committee or the President, probably the morning of the first of November, at which final resolutions will be adopted, the meeting being for no other purpose than that. If there is no objection this resolution will be held over for consideration at that time. Does any delegate wish to bring up the matter of the next meeting place? If not, under the Constitution it goes to the Executive Committee. MR. HODGES : I move that no preferential vote be taken but that the matter be left entirely to the Executive Committee. MR. HERRICK: I second that motion. THE CHAIRMAN : The motion is carried unanimously. MR. BROWN : I should very greatly appreciate the oppor- tunity at this time of expressing my personal thanks to the Con- gress for the high honor they have conferred upon me. I feel very deeply that honor. I may say that while there has been that spirit of self-sacrifice, that these ideals have uplifted me and will place this Congress on a higher plane than any I have previous- ly attended. The spirit of accommodation, the spirit of good-will, the spirit of co-operation have been so much in evidence here on the part of the delegates from so many different lands. I wish that we at this particular time would pledge ourselves, each and every del- egate, — and I hesitate to even give thought or expression at this time to this idea, but this Congress is outstanding in my mind as the one Congress that has not been stamped all over with the dollar mark. We have discussed here questions of public service and I hesitate to sound a note of dollar interest, but it does seem to me that we are not going to achieve our object, that we are not going to be able to benefit in the largest possible measure, un- less each personal delegate feels it his personal duty to co-op- erate with the officers providing the means for the larger ac- tivities, the machinery for which has been provided today. If it is in order, Mr. President, I should like to ask every del- egate to stand on his feet and promise to keep strongly and per- sistently after new members in his individual country. THE CHAIRMAN: The Chair will ask all delegates and guests who will pledge with themselves in their respective coun- tries to do everything possible to carry out the resolutions adopted this morning, to rise. Proceedings of the Congress 387 It is unanimous. MR. McCLATCHY: May I suggest in line with the remarks of Mr. Brown that I think it might be well to send out a blank to each particular representative of the Congress before he de- parts from Honolulu, — two blank subscription forms that they might indicate thereon their subscriptions as individual members and also if so disposed their subscriptions on the part of the paper they represent, for corporate membership. THE CHAIRMAN: The suggestion of Mr. McClatchy will be referred to the Executive Committee for action and I presume will be acted upon with promptness. There will be a dotted line on the blank and you will do what you are supposed to do on the dotted line. The Chair announces that there will be a meeting of the new Executive Committee called within the next few hours of which due notice to the members of the Executive Committee will be given. Now, ladies and gentlemen, we have come to the close of the formal sessions except the brief final session of this second Congress of the World's Press. I think it would be entirely proper, as the Governor of the Territory of Hawaii said the opening word of the sessions of the Congress to have him say a word at this closing session of the Congress, the Chair reserving always the right to say a word after the Governor finishes. GOVERNOR FARRINGTON: Mr. President, and Fellow Delegates of the Press Congress of the World : I made it a special point to come out here this afternoon in order that I might par- ticipate in some of the active duties of this Congress, but I had no idea I was to participate in this manner in giving you a final word, not the final word but the final word previous to the last word of the President. I deeply regret that it has been impossible for me to be with you here at your regular daily sessions. I like Congresses of this character; I like conventions of this character. As your newly-elected President was speaking to you on his acceptance of the duties for another term, I noticed that he used the word frequently "journalist." Now you know I have always been in the rough and tumble of newspaper life and I am glad to 388 The Press Congress of the World have somebody come along once in a while and dignify my pro- fession a little more than I do myself, because in my newspaper work, in my activities from a reporter to business manager, no sooner has one day's work been finished than I wonder what we are going to do for the next. It is either a story or the program for the paper or an endeavor to find the necessary dollar where- by we might be fed and clothed for another day. This is the first opportunity I have had of looking upon a body of journalists from the standpoint of official position, and I assure you, gentlemen, that I have enjoyed it, not because I am pleased to be sort of set apart from you for a time being, but I am glad to get the new point of view. Out in my back yard is a fig tree which has given me a number of valuable lessons on points of view. At various times of the year it bears fruit and I go and pick it until I think the tree is entirely harvested from fruit ; then I get up into the tree and see there is more there and it has been a lesson to me. So I am pleased to have a new point of view of journalism, newspaper writers and the men who furnish the wherewithal of the profession. I have failed to tell you I think of how this thing started so far as Honolulu is concerned, and I think you ought to know, because possibly it is typical of journalistic enterprise. It is not a long story nor an ornamental story, I know, and there is nothing particularly exciting about it. But as I was sitting in my office of the Star-Bulletin one day, Mr. Thurston came in with a clipping in his hand and he said, "Mr. Farrington, do you know Walter Williams?" I said, "I do." "Well," he said, "Here is a clipping from the Editor and Publisher which says that the people of Sydney have given up the Press Congress of the World and it seems to me that we ought to get that Press Congress for Honolulu." I said, "All right, let's get it." He said : "I don't know Dean Williams and I understand that you do and I wish that you would join with me and see if we cannot work out some sort of scheme whereby we can extend an in- vitation to the Press Congress of the World so that they shall come here." I said, "All right, anything I can do I am willing to do." So we got up a telegram there and then and sent it to Dr. Williams inviting him in the name of the Territory to Proceedings of the Congress 389 bring his Press Congress of the World to Honolulu. In the course of our shaping up of that telegram, we enlisted the name and effort of Alexander Hume Ford, who has to do with most anything that circles around the Pacific, and through Mr. Ford we enlisted the then Governor of the Territory, Governor Mc- Carthy, and we sent on this telegram. Mr. Williams responded very favorably, communicating that it would be appropriate for the Congress to have some money in order to guarantee meeting" here. So Mr. Ford, Mr. Thurston and myself wondered if we could guarantee that money. Mr. Ford said he would be ready with his $5,000, Mr. Thurston said he would guarantee his $5,000 and then and there the thing was settled. I have some- times thought that some newspaper enterprises have started on faith just as that did, but of course we knew with whom we were dealing as far as our community was concerned, and from that time on the enterprise grew, and it has been a pleasure to be as- sociated with that enterprise in various capacities. You are not going to leave us right now, you are going to have a further ses- sion in connection with the Pan-Pacific Congress tomorrow. I have followed through the newspapers the papers read and resolutions passed by this Congress, and I am very sure that the expectations of those who have felt that this Congress would have some definite beneficial influence on that Congress which is to be assembled in Washington next month, those who ex- pected much from this Congress, have by no means been dis- appointed. I am gratified to be here with you on the closing session and since Dean Williams is to have the last word I will not hold you longer. (Applause). THE CHAIRMAN : If the Governor of Hawaii gets inspira- tion and suggestion by climbing a fig tree in his back yard and picking the fruit therefrom, I tremble to think what would be the consequences to Hawaii if that was a cocoanut palm and that only in that way he could get such interesting and valuable sug- gestions as he has presented to us this afternoon. I am also pleased to know that he acknowledges in public that he knows me. His incidental suggestion with regard to the use of the word journalist permits me to say there is no other general term that 390 The Press Congress of the World applies ill all countries as the word journalist does. In one country it means the man that keeps the press and runs the ma- chinery, and something else in another country. Journalist gives the suggestion of dignity. I also have recently become a jour- nalist. I v^as a newspaperman before I associated with the Press Congress, and I am pleased to have that word for use as it adds dignity to the profession. We are happy to have the closing word of Governor Far- rington at this session and also happy to know that we are to remain in Honolulu under his jurisdiction for some days longer, to our great enjoyment. Is there any further business to come before the Congress? Let me say then once more, let me emphasize once more, the high value which I think has been achieved by the sessions of the Congress, the tone and spirit of the papers and addresses and the movements that have been begun. The Congress is adjourned. TENTH SESSION. TUESDAY, NOVEMBER 1, 1921. The Congress was called to order at ten o'clock a. m. by President Williams. THE CHAIRMAN: American delegates to the Congress have signed a statement in reference to conditions in the Terri- tory of Hawaii, and the obligations of the American Govern- ment as they see them, with respect to these conditions. I will read the paper signed by the American delegates : We, the American Delegates to the Press Congress of the World, now in session at Honolulu, Territory of Hawaii, after a sojourn in Hawaii of three weeks, during which time we have visited the three principal islands of the group, and had opportunity to observe all phases of life in this Territory — social, educational, political, agricul- tural and mercantile — have noted the facts hereunder set forth, which, in our opinion, vitally affect American interests, and we desire, there- fore, to place ourselves on record concerning the same, as follows: 1. We find that the predominating spirit and controlling influence in these Islands is overwhelmingly American. That we are strongly of the opinion that, not only from American viewpoint, but from that of the perpetuation of orderly government and the peace of the world — more particularly that of the Pacific regions — Proceedings of the Congress 391 this status should be sustained, maintained, and extended, in every legitimate, practicable manner. 2. We find that growing out of conditions incident to the war, there is an abnormal shortage in the number of agricultural laborers in the Hawaiian Islands, by virtue of which every principal industry upon the maintenance of which American dominance depends, is en- dangered. That it is our earnest belief that the conditions now prevalent jus- tify and require the enactment of the measure now pending before Congress, relating to immigration of laborers to Hawaii, under the direct control of the President and the Secretary of Labor, or some measure affording similar relief, if American supremacy in Hawaii is to be successfully and normally maintained. 3. We find that in respect to every obligation incident to state- hood, imposed by law, such as payment of federal taxes, customs and internal revenues, subjection to military draft laws and all other laws applying generally to the several States, Hawaii is included. That during the war, government officials and civil organizations of the mainland treated Hawaii as being upon the same plane of ob- ligation with the States of the Union, to make pro rata subscriptions to Liberty Bonds, Postal Savings Stamps, the Red Cross, the Y. M. C. A., the Relief of Europe, and every other patriotic and philanthropic appeal for money and service. That such appeals were fully and loyally responded to by the people of Hawaii, they going "over the top" in every instance, well up in the lead in percentage of excess over the quota assigned and in prompt- ness of response. That notwithstanding this continuous policy of assigning obliga- tions and imposing burdens, upon a basis pro rata with that of the several States of the Union, Congress and Departments of Government at Washington, have been, and still are systematically and persistently excluding Hawaii from participation in the benefits under appropria- tion bills which provide for payment pro rata to all the States ; such, for example, as appropriations for roads, for education, and all other bills of a similar general character. That, in our opinion, this policy is unjust and inequitable, and should be changed so that Hawaii, shall be permitted to share in the privi- leges and benefits incident to its connection with the American Union, upon the same basis that it bears the burdens and is subject to the obligations incident thereto. As this meeting this morning is merely for the adoption of resolutions, and as many of the delegates have already gone to their homes, and furthermore, as this is a domestic question and not a world question, and still furthermore, because it deals with questions other than that purely concerning journalism, the paper having been signed by the American delegates, will be placed in 392 The Press Congress of the World the record book of the Congress and the Secretary will be in- structed to make note of it as representing the views of the American delegates here to such authorities as it should properly go- MR. DOTSON : I wish to inquire whether it was your in- tention to convey that it had been signed by all the American delegates as representing their sentiments. THE CHAIRMAN : No, only of those who signed it. MRS. WARREN : Some of us have not had any opportunity to sign it. THE CHAIRMAN: They will have an opportunity to sign later. Next in order is the report of the Committee on Resolutions, to be presented by Mr. Frank P. Glass, the Vice-Chairman of the Committee. MR. GLASS: Mr. President and members of the Press Con- gress, I beg first to ofifer the following: Resolved, That the delegates to the Press Congress of the World, as- sembled in formal session at Honolulu this first day of November 1921, do hereby make grateful acknowledgment of two beautiful gifts of silver from the Prime Minister and Acting Minister of Finance of China, pre- sented by Mr. Hollington K. Tong, of Peking. Resolved further, That, with deep appreciation of the spirit of world fellowship in which these gifts were made, they be accepted by this Con- gress, to be retained in the perpetual possession of its officers as reminders throughout the years to come of the greatness and goodness of China. Resolved further. That a copy of this resolution be incorporated in the record of this day's proceedings, that the Secretary be directed to transmit copies to the Prime Minister and Acting Minister of Finance of the Chinese Government, and tliat the President of the Congress be requested to convey to them in person at his first convenience the thanks of this body. The resolutions were unanimously adopted. MR. GLASS: I have the privilege for the Committee on Resolutions to offer the following: Resolved, That it is the wish of the Press Congress of the World to make permanent record of its heartfelt gratitude for the many kindnesses and constant attention its delegates have received at the hands of the people of Honolulu, the seat of the Congress of 1921, and of all the Hawaiian Islands. The Congress deeply appreciates its welcome. Through the courtesy and daily exertion of the people of these Islands, it has been possible to hold the present sessions under the most enjoyable conditions. The hospitality extended to the delegates has been most cordial, spontaneous and delightful. i Proceedings of the Congress 393 Resolved, That at this final session of the Press Congress of the World, in Honolulu, November 1, 1921, the delegates here assembled desire to express their deep appreciation of the tireless efforts of L. A. Thurston, chairman of the local entertainment committee, and his associates, to make their visit in Hawaii in every way delightful. Resolved, Further, that while appreciating the extent to which all the people of the Territory of Hawaii have combined their efforts to make pleasant and profitable the stay of the Congress delegates in their Islands, it is desired especially to express appreciation for the great kindnesses shown by the Hawaiian Islands Committee, the Honolulu Press Club, the Honolulu Ad Club, the Oahu Country Club, the Pan Pacific Union, the Honolulu Automobile Club, the Hawaiian Patriotic Societies, tlie Outrigger Canoe Club, the Hawaiian Pineapple Packers' Association, the Hawaiian Sugar Planters' Association, the Chambers of Commerce of the Islands of Hawaii and Maui, and the United States Army and Navy. Mr. President, it gives me unusual pleasure to move the adop- tion of these resolutions. I don't think it necessary to attempt anything like an elaboration of them or emphasis upon them. But I believe I speak the heart, as well as the mind, of every del- egate present, when I say, that the few weeks spent in these Islands have been one of the most delightful episodes of our lives. We do not believe that anything in the way or method of our entertainment and for our pleasure could have been advanced to a greater degree. (Applause.) I am sure that everyone of us will treasure during the rest of our lives the acquaintance and the charm of the people of these islands ; that we will understand sympathetically their trials and troubles and problems ; that we will go back to our several States on the mainland and to our several countries throughout the world, watchful, always sympathetic with the laudable and progressive aspirations of this remarkable people, this extraordinary aggregation of the great races of the world, who are working out unusual problems in the most ef- ficient and harmonious way. I move the adoption of these resolutions. MR. J. P. HERRICK, NEW YORK: I second the motion. MR. COUTOUPIS : I would like to add a few words to what Mr. Glass has said. I would like to express my thanks for the hospitality shown from the officials down to the people. I sup- pose that none of us will forget in this life the pleasant and de- lightful time we have had in these islands ; the Hawaiian Islands and the Hawaiian people, will, I am sure, be always in our minds. 394 The Press Congress of the World MR. KESSELL of AUSTRALIA: Mr. President, Fellow Members of the Congress: It would ill-become an Australian to allow a resolution such as that so ably moved by Mr. Glass to pass without comment from Australia, and on behalf of the Australian delegates, I would like to say how very deeply we appreciate the wonderful kindness of the residents of Honolulu during our stay here. In my opinion the residents of Hawaii have discovered the secret of perpetual motion. Ever since I have been here I have been on the move from early morning till noon and from noon until evening. Everything that could be done has been done to make the stay of the delegates a pleasant one. We came hear- ing a lot about the Paradise of the Pacific, but we have been more than surprised by what has been done. Somebody has said that Australia was the "Kohinoor" of the British Crown. Well, I will say that if this is the Paradise of the Pacific, Australia is the Pearl of the Pacific and the white pearl at that. We are immensely proud of our country ; we believe that we are a hospitable people, but having seen the hospitality of the Paradise of the Pacific, it makes me wonder if, when you hold a Congress in Australia, we shall be able to hold a candle to the one held here. You have given us an opportunity of seeing the whole of the interests of this Island, and as far as I am per- sonally concerned, what impressed me most, apart from your activities in a commercial sense, has been the military and naval spectacles. Of course, I would not display the bad taste to touch on domestic matters. I am Australian and you are members of the United States. But I heard a gentleman say during the military review that apparently America trusts in God and keeps her powder dry, and Saturday, at the Naval review, if I so far forgot myself as to give advice, I would say : "Trust in God and keep your oil tanks full." I will say this, Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen, that we in Australia watch with tremendous interest the problems with which you are so ably dealing. You and we are one. We feel that more than ever now since we have met you and got to know you. We feel that your interests and ours are identical. We feel that what you are doing is making Australia wonder- fully safe, and, as an Australian, I give you greetings from the i Proceedings of the Congress 395 Pearl of the Pacific. I trust that some day you will come across, every one of you, and see what our country is like. We have our wonders, we have our beauties, but above all, we have our hearts that beat for America. When you come to us, just as you have received us as members of the great race, so when you come to Australia we will hold out the hand of fellowship ; we will take you to our hearts and we will discuss with you as abundantly as you have done with us some of our domestic troubles, that you may help us. I cannot use the Hawaiian term which is filled with beauty, but will say to you at this, our fare- well meeting, on behalf of the Australian delegates, — I say goodbye to you in the good old sense of the term, God be with you, and I am sure in our hearts we will never forget what has been done for us, and I would like the residents of Hawaii to take from me on behalf of the Australian delegates our heart- felt thanks for the wonderful entertainment given us. MR. HIN WONG: Mr. President, Members of the Press Congress : In supporting the resolution expressing the apprecia- tion of the Congress for the kindness shown by the people of Hawaii, I would like to say that Hawaii is truly a Paradise, as she has no racial prejudice and oflfers opportunity to all who come to her. On behalf of the Chinese delegation, I wish to ex- press not only the appreciation for the entertainments offered them during the sessions of the Congress, but also for the kind treatment the people of Hawaii have always extended to the Chinese, visiting or residents. I wish the world to know through the journalists from all parts that, while the Chinese at home have to work hard in order to send their children abroad to re- ceive a college education, Chinese boys and girls are able to get their higher education here free, like the rest of the people in Hawaii. I wish those who have the good of the Chinese at heart would encourage some Hawaiian Chinese young men and women to return to China with their training, as we need them in China, or do something for the people in the land of their parents. If other countries and communities will only treat the Chinese as well as Hawaii does, there will be no dififiiculty or racial problems, as Hawaii has had no difficulty with the Chinese. I am sure the Chinese do appreciate the good that is being done for their people in Hawaii, and they will return thanks by pro- moting peace at home and for the world. 396 The Press Congress of the World MR. BETETA: May I say a few words, Mr. President, on behalf of the Spanish Press Association? This Press Congress, I think, has accompHshed a great success. And we members of the Press Congress have enjoyed one of the most wonderful times of our lives. The Press Congress at this session has remarked the fact in the first place that journalists from every part of the world de- sire to work for peace. It is interesting to note this is a unani- mous movement on the part of journalists, who are the best rep- resentatives of public opinion, to work for the future peace of the world and to have selected as one of the best means for it the construction of a League of Journalists. From its present meeting, our institution will grow up more and more and through the League of Journalists will grow each day better able to en- force the ideas of human peace. We could not have chosen a better place for the foundation of these ideas of peace through the public understanding among the peoples of the earth, than Honolulu. We have laid this foundation in the very heart of the most cosmopolitan people of the world. One of the most impressive events of our entertainment in the islands, to my mind, were the words pronounced by the little girl at the Japanese Theatre in Hilo, when that little girl told us "I am only a little girl, but I will make you a little speech." That little girl, born in Honolulu, or shall I say in the Hawaiian Islands, from Jap- anese ancestors, educated in the American Spirit, willing to be an American, and feeling herself facing the big problems which is the racial problem of this country, — the impressive words of that little girl are in themselves a big lesson and of the best im- pulse to move the spirit on which the ideas of this Press Con- gress is constructed. There is no reason for all men, all in- habitants of the world having to confront big problems of coun- try, because of having been born in one particular place or an- other. This little girl is the best lesson in the construction of our ideas. So far as the entertainment is concerned, we have enjoyed here, let me say, hospitality and kindnesses, so well expressed by the words of the resolution, that I will only add that I brought with me the invitation of Spain to hold there our next meeting. I have had the honor to present it on behalf of the City of Seville, I Proceedings of the Congress 397 and so wonderful have been the demonstrations given to us by the people of the Hawaiian Islands, by its authorities, by every institution of Honolulu, and by its people, that I am really afraid if my invitation would be accepted, I do not know how we, the Spanish speaking peoples, could hope to surpass this entertain- ment, but I will say that we will do nearly as well. MR. LUDVIG SAXE: Mr. President, allow me to say that I expected very much from this meeting of the Congress, and from the stay here in Honolulu, but I consider everything has been beyond my expectations. I have travelled half way around the world to come here, but if it had been necessary to have gone all around the world, it would have been worth while. I think it is something wonderful the way the people of Hawaii have entertained us, and I just wish to express my most cordial thanks. THE CHAIRMAN: All in favor of the adoption of the resolution of thanks, as presented by Acting Chairman of the Committee, Mr. Glass, will make it known by rising. The resolution is unanimously adopted. I have now the privilege of presenting to you your new Secretary-Treasurer, who has some important announcements to read into the record, and for you to hear. May I not say to you that, in my opinion, the Press Congress of the World ac- complished a desirable work when it persuaded Mr. James Wright Brown, of the Editor and Publisher, of New York City, to serve in this important position, on which so much of the future of the Press Congress depends. You could not have improved upon him, even had you elected all of yourselves to take the position that he is to occupy. (Applause.) MR. BROWN: Mr. President, Ladies and Gentlemen of the Congress : I very deeply appreciate the high honor that you have conferred upon me. You have opened the door to a larger op- portunity of service and that is the animating purpose, my ani- mating purpose, in accepting this task, for verily it is a task. If we are to carry forward in the future as aggressively, and let us hope more aggressively, the work of cementing the bonds of friendship as between journalists throughout the world, then it must be a real task, a task of consecrated, devoted service on the part of every member of the Congress. I would like to have 398 The Press Congress of the World every member of the Congress feel that he has a personal rep- resentative in New York City, who is at all times at your serv- ice, willing to make any sacrifice of time to be helpful to you and helpful in promoting the spirit of journalistic world fra- ternity. It is worth any sacrifice of time and money to come to know such men as we have come to know here in this Con- gress, newspaper men and journalists, men like Cohen, Kessell, Davies from Australia, Coutoupis of Greece, Beteta of Latin America, all these outstanding journalists, men animated by lofty ideals, and I for one feel that we have marched along the high- way a great distance in this Congress, that many obstacles have been eliminated here and that we will go forward to new ac- complishments and to greater performances. I thank you most sincerely, Mr. President and Delegates, for your kindness and courtesy to me, and I should like to have you feel that I am at all times at your service. The President has appointed some important committees. As Chairman of the Committee on Communications: Col. Edward Frederick Lawson, of the London Daily Telegraph, London, England. As Chairman of the Committee to Study the Present Conditions, Extent and Methods of the Chinese and Korean Press Services, with a view to recommending means of im- provement, if necessary, he has named Mr. Frank P. Glass, of the United States. As members of the Executive Committee, the Governing Committee has named the following, through the power of substitution given to the Committee by this Congress : K. Sugi- mura of Japan, Virgilio R. Beteta, of Guatemala, Gardiner Kline, of the United States, Oswald Mayrand of Canada, and E. F. Lawson of England. The President and Secretary-Treasurer are ex-officio members of the Executive Committee. He has also named a committee to draft a reply to President Harding, con- sisting of Messrs. James Wright Brown of New York, Secretary- Treasurer ; Guy Innes of Melbourne, Australia, and Virgilio Rod- riguez Beteta of Guatemala. I think I should take advantage of this opportunity, if I may, Mr. President, to emphasize the needs of carrying forward the new financial system which this Congress has inaugurated. As you know, the dues of individual members have been fixed at five dollars per year; newspapers may join at fifty dollars a year, and Proceedings of the Congress 399 sustaining members may contribute any sum desired. I think most of the delegates in the room have already paid the Secre- tary-Treasurer their dues for 1922. As you know, present mem- bership covers the year 1921, and the remittance you have made covers the dues for 1922. Dues are on the calendar year basis. If there are any who have not paid, I do hope that they will see the Secretary-Treasurer before they leave, and let us leave Hono- lulu with a one hundred per cent result of paid-in-advance dues and this I assure you will be the aim of the Treasurer to maintain. THE CHAIRMAN : Now, Ladies and Gentlemen, We have come to the close of the sessions of the Press Congress of the World in Hawaii. It has been a most wonderful meeting in every way, more than two hundred representatives from eighteen na- tions have registered during the sessions of the Congress their personal attendance. Economic conditions and the disarmament conference at Washington have to a degree interfered with the size of the attendance, but those of you who are here will, I am confident, agree with the Chair in its conclusion that nothing has interfered with the quality of the delegates that have attended or with the representative character of the Congress itself. The resolutions that you have passed paid a tribute to the hospitality, the marvelous hospitality, of the Territorial Govern- ment and the people of these Islands. It may not be beyond the propriety of the occasion for the Chair to add on his behalf, and he thinks also on behalf of the Press Congress, a special word of appreciation to the Honorable Wallace R. Farrington, Gover- nor of the Territory of Hawaii, the Chairman of the Committee ; Mr. L. A. Thurston, an intellectual giant and a master of organiza- tion. Chairman of the Committee on Entertainment ; Mr. Alex- ander Hume Ford, the dynamic force of the Pan-Pacific Union, and also Mr. L. W. de vis Norton, the efficient Executive Secre- tary, as well as to the various members of the Committees here as- sembled, for our hospitable reception and their great and thought- ful consideration unto us. May it not also be added that nowhere could the Congress have received more generous treatment ; its deliberations, discussions and addresses more faithfully reported than has been reported in the newspapers in the City of Honolulu. (Applause.) It is to me as a journalist a source of pride in the profession of which I am a member, that we have here in this 400 The Press Congress of the World remarkable city newspapers that are so fair and enterprising and aggressive, and at the same time hold to the high standard that should characterize the profession of journalism everywhere. One cannot mention the various individuals, much as all of us would like to mention individuals who have contributed so much to our happy stay and to the profit of this Congress. The reception that we have received, the greeting that we have had, and the aid given to us here has not been confined to any race or any nation- ality or any group, but has been spontaneous, general and wide- spread. The American sentiment that has been dominant has been aided in its expression of hospitality by the Japanese, Ko- reans, Chinese, and every other racial line represented in these Islands. There has been a systematic efifort to express a fine sen- timent of hospitality and gratitude to the visitors. We may not have entered the kingdom of friendship as yet, nor become mem- bers of a democracy of human brotherhood, but surely the gates into the kingdom of friendship and the doors of the brotherhood of democracy have been opened wider and swing easier in this Paradise of the Pacific than in any other community. The Congress has accomplished some notable results. First, it seems to me, in its results, has been an added acquaintanceship with' the Pacific Ocean questions ; a larger knowledge of the situa- tion as it exists on the blue waters of this great ocean, and here- after, whatever else may be true of the delegates to this Con- gress, they will no longer have closed eyes or shuttered minds when it comes to the consideration of the great questions which are to be solved, if solved at all, in this laboratory of human races here on the Pacific. The Pan-Pacific Press Conference, left as a legacy to the coun- tries bordering on the Pacific, would of itself be a sufficient achievement. But that is not all. In the papers that have been read, in the addresses delivered, in the discussions that have followed, in the debates in the Congress (and particularly the debates out- side) there have been considered questions of high import to the profession of journalism and of high concern to mankind. To ensure as far as compatible with the transaction of its business that members of the press should be admited to sessions of the Wash- ington Conference; to plan international communication so there should be lower rates charged for communication between conti- Proceedings of the Congress 401 nents and peoples ; to continue the United States Naval Radio facilities for trans-oceanic news communications ; to approve of methods for better journalistic education; to communicate with the proposed International Press Union in Belgium ; to inquire into the present methods, conditions and extent of the Chinese foreign press service, with a view to recommending means for improvement, if necessary ; to inquire into the present methods, condition and extent of the Korean foreign press service; to re- move the vexatious restrictions on passports ; to secure the es- tablishment of permanent peace through making accessible to the press everywhere all avenues of information, that the world may be correctly and unreservedly informed on public matters ; to permit the interchange of journalists ; to work for a spirit of world fellowship ; to establish and maintain an absolute freedom of the press everywhere and to lend our influence as far as may be in our respective spheres, to the laying aside of some at least of the weapons of warfare, that the world may turn more quickly to the practice of peace; these are substantial contributions of the World's Press Congress through the resolutions adopted, and adopted with unanimity. We have set in motion forces that are hereafter to do more good than even we have in mind just now. The ad interim com- mittees which have been named and which are to be named, which are to consider the interchange of journalists, the freedom of the press and other questions of high import, are to carry for- ward the work of this Congress until its next session. This alone, if nothing else had been accomplished, would again have marked this Press Congress of the World as of high value to journalists in every land. The Congress itself has been made permanent. The preliminary organization in San Francisco in 1915 has brought together this first session of another World Congress and here in Honolulu there has been established upon, it seems to me, a permanent basis, a Congress of the World's Press that means much for the uplifting of journalism and through journalism unto the high service of humanity. Centuries ago, the written word tells us that after days of chaos in the then universe, the Lord said : "Let there be light, and there was light." It seems to me if we have faith in our own profession and if we understand what it means unto the 2fi 402 The Press Congress of the World world today, that if some great Supreme Being said now "Let there be light," there would be journalism, for the light that journalism is to spread upon problems and peoples and policies and purposes is the light that is to shine more and more unto the perfect day, a living sun for every man, woman and child beneath the skies. And so, with that high purpose, we come to the close of a wonderful session. If the Press Congress is to succeed, it is to succeed, not by individual effort of officers or members, but by that spirit of co-operation and comradeship that is characteristic of our own profession wherever journalists meet together the world around. It has been demonstrated in these sessions, it will be demonstrated more and more as the years pass, and it is through that spirit of co-operation that the Press Congress of to- morrow and the many morroAvs to follow is to do its greatest and best work. The individual whom you have honored with the presidency says this final word with his love and thanks to each of you for your kindness unto him personally. With appreciation and thanks to you all, and with a final word of challenge unto higher consecration unto a nobler service, he declares the Press Congress of the World in Hawaii adjourned. V. MESSAGES TO THE CONGRESS. Many messages were received at the Congress from associa- tions of journalists and individual journalists throughout the world. Some of these messages are included in the proceedings and others follow : E. Lansing Ray, President and Editor, St. Louis Globe-Democrat, St. Louis, Missouri. Permit me, not only personally but for the entire staff of the Globe- Democrat, to wish the greatest success to the Press Congress of the World. The Honorable Arthur M. Hyde, Governor of the Commonwealth of Missouri, paid me the high compliment of appointment as one of Missouri's representatives. It was with the sincerest regret tliat I felt compelled to advise him that I could not attend. The Fourth Estate is the great guiding light of the world. Without it, there would be medieval darkness. In the troubled and serious times of the reconstruction period, following the calamitous World War, when nations and races are inclined to look askance at one another, what can be more fitting and offer greater promise of helpfulness than a meeting of this kind? As a gathering of representatives from the four corners of the world, of the greatest force of civilization for good or evil, may you discuss the many and varied problems frankly and fairly and endeavor to come to a sincere and mutual understanding. With the world press of the twentieth century united by a bond of common sympathy and a desire for mutual co-operation, steadfastly preach- ing truth and hopefulness, many of the threatening clouds will disappear. After all, men are of the same human flesh and blood, and only need the cementing influence of free and friendly intercourse to throw off the preju- dices and passions of ignorance. I feel sure that the press of all nations is watching your deliberations with the keenest expectancy of beneficial results of the greatest magnitude. May it not be disappointed. Percy S. Bullen, President The Association of Foreign Press Corrc^ spondents, 66 Broadzvay, Nezv York City. The Association of Foreign Press Correspondents in the United States, comprising sixty representatives of the leading journals of Europe, South America, and Japan, desire me to express tlieir most sincere wishes. for the success of your Congress. 403 404 The Press Congress of the World We believe that the delegates assembled in Honolulu will have a unique opportunity of promoting the best interests of the press, and through the press rendering service to mankind. The members of the association had the honor of entertaining Colonel Lawson, the English delegates, also the American representatives to the Conference from New York and Brooklyn on the eve of their departure for San Francisco, and entrusted to them personally the pleasant duty of con- veying to the Press Congress of the World a message of fraternal greet- ing and abundant good-will. Dean Colin Dyment, College of Literature, Science a)id the Arts, Uni-^ versity of Oregon, Eugene, Oregon. May you have every good luck, and above all may you get something done! Robert Bell, ChristchurcJi Star, Christchnrch, Neiv Zealand. I sincerely regret my inability to be present with you today. During the intervening years since 191.5 I have looked forward to attending the sessions of the next Congress, and now that the place and date has been fixed I find that my newspaper and other interests intervene to keep me at home. Especially do I regret not being able to be present, because I had the privilege to be one of those who drafted the constitution of the Congress and actually moved the resolution for its permanent establishment. But, if not present in the flesh, believe me I am with you in spirit and herewith send you my best wishes for a happy and successful gathering. I have no doubt tliat this great and representative gathering of news- paper men from all parts of the world — the men who not only supply news but who form public opinion in their respective countries — will be con- ducive of great good. The interchange of opinions and ideas on national and international questions must result in better understanding of the problems which face the peoples of every part of the world of today. Members of the Fourth Estate are charged with a great responsibility, for the power of the press is a very real factor for good or ill, not only in the affairs of state, but in the everyday affairs of life. I look forward, therefore, with great hope to the benefits which will result from the de- liberations of the Congress, not only to the members of the press who at- tend, but to the peoples of the countries whom they represent and whose voice they are. Director H. F. Harrington, the Joseph Medill School of Journalism, Northzvestem University, Chicago, Illinois. The Joseph Medill School of Journalism of Northwestern University sends hearty greetings to the delegates of the Press Congress of the World assembled in Honolulu. If sympathetic understanding of the ideals, institutions, and daily life of kindred peoples is to be established in the world, it will come Messages to the Congress 405 through the sharing of correct information, as spread broadcast by the newspapers and periodicals. You editorial brethren, who unleash the winged word in many lands, have in your keeping the education of a more intelligent brLed of men and women. If you gentlemen think straight, if your sympathies are born of adequate knowledge, if you have an abiding faith in the good intent of neighboring peoples, the thousands, who read your publications, will also come into closer alliance of heart and mind. The schools of journalism in the United States, which have to do with the training of tomorrow's reporters and editors, confidently believe that your deliberations will cement still more securely the bonds of mutual purpose. Eccquicl V. Pas, Director of La Prensa, Buenos Aires, Argentina. I am very sorry indeed not to be able to assist at the meeting to be held in October at Honolulu; this is due to the manifold duties I have to comply with owing to the direction and management of this paper. However, I sincerely offer my heartfelt co-operation and moral support to- wards the useful finalities pursued by the Congress. Cesar Riera Mares, Spanish poet, stenographer, author, Barcelona, Spai)i. I send a strong brotherly embracement for all companions of the Press Congress of the World. /. D. Graham, Express and Star, W olverhampton, England. The fact that I am prevented from being present at the Press Congress in Honolulu is a source of deep regret, because I realise the immense value of that assembly to all who are engaged in journalism. The Press Con- gress of the World is more than ever necessary at this critical period in history, when the closest scrutiny is being given to every system and to the whole of our international relationships in the light of ideals which are essential as the motive force of good government and ordered progress. The first great service and one that ought to be rendered to the world in the name of those who nobly redeemed it from the menace of militarism is the promotion of international amity, peace and understanding, the fostering of conditions which will make it easier for the nations to work in unison for the betterment of the whole world. The Press Congress is a vital instrument to this great end. L. A. Hodoroff, Russian journalist, Moscow. The coming meeting of the Press Congress of the World is undoubt- edly an event of great importance and interest in our world of journalism. It is with utmost reluctance that I give up my intention to attend it. Other- wise, I certainly would try to fulfill your hope by preparing a speech on "Journalism in Russia," which would give an idea of what the subject sug- gests and contribute towards giving a better understanding of the true state of affairs in this much misrepresented country. 406 The Press Congress of the World R. Mackenzie, Proprietor, Argyllshire Advertiser, Lochgilphead, Scotland. I wish the great Congress the loftiest success in every way and that it may result in a greater and nobler friendship to all concerned in the pros- perity and glory of the world's press. Rario Ribas de Cantruy, Editor of Revista Renacimiento, Tegucigalpa, Republic of Honduras, Central America. May I ask you to be so kind as to express to the Press Congress my deepest regrets for not being able to be present at Honolulu? It would have afforded me an immense pleasure to be able to attend per- sonally the sessions of the Congress, first because of the great interest and numberless charms that those poetic and hospitable islands with their un- rivaled scenery offer to the stranger from distant lands ; and then also because of the vast benefits that as a journalist I would most assuredly have received by coming into contact with what I will call "the brains of the world," — for indeed, a gathering of four or five hundred of the world's best publicists does represent the brains of the world, — its brain and its heart. We cannot estimate to its full measure the importance of the press, as a world institution, unless we try for a moment to picture to ourselves in this century of light and progress, a world without newspapers, a world without printed news, without magazines, without press of any kind; then and only then, can we slightly grasp what the press really means to human- kind. The press can cause wars ; the press can prevent wars ; the best league of nations would be a League of the World's Press which, extending its action beyond all frontiers, and with a fixed program in mind, would have as its chief aim the furtherance of human welfare and the gradually bring- ing about of the real, effective, durable brotherhood of men of all na- tions and creeds. This is why I am a strong believer in gatherings such as this where newspapermen from all countries come to meet together to discuss and exchange ideas and to strengthen the bonds of fraternal cor- diality. A great amount of good would be done to the world if these meetings could be held together more frequently; and if, as the most humble member of the Press Congress of the World, my voice can have any weight, I wish to raise it here and now to advocate a yearly meeting so tliat we may once a year come together to further a better understanding between the peoples of the world. Thus, through our mutual effort displayed col- lectively and with the same aim in view we will work together with en- thusiasm and with faitli in the performing of our sacred duty as guides of human thought and as builders of international amity. G. Andreve, Director-proprietor, El Tiempo, Panama City, Panama. Owing to unfavorable circumstances it will be impossible for me to at- tend the meetings of the Congress. However this does not lessen my in- terest in its work nor does it prevent me from sending my friendliest greet- Messages to the Congress 407 ings to all its members and my best wishes that they may achieve a highly satisfactory work for the benefit of the press interests of the whole world. H. M. Richardson, General Secretary, National Union of Journalists, 18o Fleet Street, London, B. C. 4. We trust that your deliberations will be harmonious and that, as a re- sult of the coming together of representatives of the world's press, tliere will be a greater coming together of the nations of the world. We are quite sure that the exchange of views at close quarters between representa- tives of the newspapers of the different nationalities must lead to a better understanding between the different peoples. Miss Bertha Gray Robinson, Editor, Observer, Orange, Virginia, U. S. A. I feel a deep interest in all the proceedings of the Congress, for I am confident that the deliberations of such a distinguished body, composed of commissioned delegates from every known country of the world, will re- dound to the greatest good to any and all of tlie countries therein repre- sented. Though I am not present with you I shall have the meeting in mind and shall wish for each and every one not only an important busi- ness session but a delightful social gathering. Miss Hedwig Bott, 421 W. 65th Place, Chicago, Illinois. I sincerely hope the conference will prove an auspicious one. B. K. Gaylord, President, Oklahoma Publishing Co., Oklahoma City, Oklahoma. I earnestly hope that the Congress will be of very great importance and benefit to the editorial profession in general. P. Selig, Christchurch Press, Christchiirch, New Zealand. Wishing you a highly successful Congress, which I trust may be fraught with the best of results far-reaching in their effect. Jens K. Grondahl, Editor, Red Wing Daily Republican, Red Wing, Minnesota. It is with deep regret, and because of circumstances over which I have no control, that I am unable to be present and participate in the delibera- tions of the Press Congress of the World as a representative of the Na- tional Editorial Association and of the State of Minnesota. I wish to ex- tend my fraternal greetings to the members of the Congress, with my best wishes for results that will benefit journalism and the peoples throughout the earth. At this critical time in the world's history, when the leading nations are about to make what seems an honest effort to lessen the chances of war and lessen the burdens of taxation by limiting armaments of war, the hour 408 The Press Congress of the World appears exceedingly opportune for the journalistic forces of the world, gathered at Honolulu, to exert their tremendous power, to promote the peace of the world and the brotherhood of man. Millions will watch the proceedings of the Press Congress of the World at Honolulu with the same interest that they will scan the progress of the Conference for the Limitation of Armaments and other world matters a little later on at Washington. Dr. Frits Holm, 14 John Street, New York. By virtue of your united efforts, and under the life-giving sun of a hospitable Pacific archipelago, you are planting tlie seed which is still further to enhance the guiding influence and merited power of the press in all the lands of the globe — that influence which is ours, however, only as long as we, as journalists, remember, through vigilant observation, ceaseless study and struggle, and endless labor and toil, to serve nothing but the truth as based upon the facts before us in each and every individual case as it presents itself. May you all benefit by your important conferences and by your pleasant travels, and may the benefits, which you yourself glean, gen- erously be passed on to mankind that you all serve in so responsible a capacity. Richard Ivens, Editor, the Nottingham Guardian, Nottingham, England. I much regret that it will not be possible for me to attend the Press Congress of the World at Honolulu. I had made arrangements to attend, but have been compelled to put them on one side at almost the last moment. It would have given me intense pleasure to meet so many illustrious jour- nalists, from so many countries, and the fact that I cannot now do so will be one of the chief disappointments of my life. Please accept my best wishes for the success of the conference and for the enjoyment of all who are so fortunate as to take part in it. I have been associated with daily newspapers for more than fifty years and I have been editor of one of them for nearly forty years. My long experience in newspaper work leads me to tliink that the Press Congress of the World will be use- ful and I herewith send my most hearty greetings to all of you. Henry Wyatt, Editor, Blackpool Times, 14 Clifton Street, Blackpool, England. On behalf of British weekly journalism, I extend hearty greetings to the Press Congress of the World and trust that its deliberations may be happy, successful and serviceable to our common cause. Robert H. H. Baird, Belfast Telegraph, Belfast, Ireland. In expressing my deep regret that I am unable to attend the great Press Congress of the World, I desire, as an Ulsterman, to extend through you cordial greetings to all my colleagues of the press, and to express the hope that the Congress will prove one of the greatest levers in the ad- vancement of civilization and progress. Messages to the Congress 409 Your world-wide gathering at Honolulu is unique in the history of newspapers. By bringing together newspaper producers from every clime, it is sure to prove an inspiration and an incentive to literary and me- chanical achievements hitherto undreamt of. All nations and languages have, through the conquering attainments of modern science, a common bond of union in the newspaper press, and I know of no league so likely to bring about that universal peace for which the world is yearning. Your great gathering may indeed be called the "Pacific" Congress. Its aspirations, resolutions, and achievements will emanate, as a great wireless from the Punch Bowl, in every direction, and reach the remotest journal- istic outpost of the two hemispheres, giving encouragement to all who are engaged in our noble profession. I have no doubt that the Congress will ultimately realise the dream of the poet in establishing itself as "The Parliament of Man, the Federation of the world." Major Alexander Steven, Director, Northumberland and Benvickshire Newspapers, Limited, Berzvick-upon-Tivecd, England. The Congress will be a great success, to the advantage of the world. B. O. Norton, Secretary, the Weekly Neivspaper and Periodical Pro- prietors' Association, Limited, Fleet Street, London, B. C. 4, Bngland. The Council of the Weekly Newspaper and Periodical Proprietors' As- sociation much regret their inability to send a representative to the Press Congress of the World, which is being held in Honolulu in October next, but hope to be more fortunate on the next occasion. As the association, therefore, will not have the advantage of being directly represented, the council desire to send their best wishes for the success of the Congress. They fully appreciate the vast importance of the objects in view, and are strongly in favor of conferences of this sort, which tend to promote international good feeling. Morley Stuart, Cambridge Daily Neivs, Cambridge, England. Aloha ! I feel that I must respond to your invitation to send a word of greeting to my brethren of the press gathered at the great Press Congress of the World. I have heard much of the hospitality of Honolulu and should dearly like to share it with you, but it is a long journey from England and considerations of time and money prevent my coming. It would be a particular joy to me to pass through the great Republic of America and thus follow in the footsteps of my father, himself a journalist, who ever retained the happiest recollections of a lecturing tour in 1887. Need I say that I shall read with deep interest of your meetings and that I sincerely hope that your deliberations will make for the good of the great profession to which we are all so proud to belong. 410 The Press Congress of the World It is a splendid idea to link together in this way the press of the world and some day I hope we may have the pleasure of welcoming the Con- gress to England. Should that happy event come to pass I hope that it may be possible to spare one day for a visit to the great University of Cambridge, in which case I shall be happy to do everything in my power to ensure you the heartiest of welcomes. Across the Atlantic and the Pacific I extend the right hand of fellow- ship and wish you well. Mrs. R. W. Gough, Corresponding Secretary, Southern California Women's Press Club, Los Angeles, California. I greet you, and express sincerest regret over my inability to meet with you and share the pleasure and profit of your association. May you all realize in fullest measure the privileges afforded by this international com- mingling of ideas and infusion of thought and may you register splendid progress in the press attainments of all people. David Beecroft, Director Editor, The Class Journal Company, 239 West 39th St., New York City. We know nothing more necessary than that the press of the world, including the business or industrial press, work in the closest co-operation. Speaking for the business press we feel that it is more essential than ever that those directing it are familiar with not only all of the countries of the world but many of the industrial problems in each. The business press must take a stronger place in foreign trade, as well as in other matters of world importance. Conferences such as yours draw attention to the obligations that rest upon the press. A better acquaintance among the personnel and a more mutual understanding of objectives will always work for the betterment of world conditions. John Kaiser, Managing Editor, Register-Leader, Marietta, Ohio. If the world is ever to be restored to its former conditions, a large factor in such restoration will be the press of the world. Upon your de- liberations at beautiful Honolulu will depend to a great extent what the world is to be for the next decade. The underlying structure of the world press has ever been that of service to humanity, and I am sure that the newspaper men of today are alert not only to their duties but to their op- portunities. Benjamin J. Fisher, Editor, Eastern Shore Herald, Eastville, Virginia. Out of this session of tlie Press Congress I hope for large results to the press of the world. While the Eastern Shore Herald is a small country paper, j^et we are trying to do our part in moulding public opinion on the great questions of the day. I bid you and all the members of the Congress Godspeed in your work. Messages to the Congress 411 Professor Bristoiv Adams, Nciv York State College of Agriculture, Cornell University, Ithaca, Netv York. Those of us at Cornell who are interested in high standards of journal- ism wish for the Congress every success and feel sure that it will mark an important step in developing a world solidarity among journalists. Benjamin S. Herbert, President, Illinois Press Association, Chicago, Illinois. Greetings from Illinois ! Several representatives from Illinois, in which nearly a thousand newspapers are published, will attend the Press Con- gress at Honolulu. The Illinois Press Association, representing more than half the newspapers in Illinois, are of one accord that this great gathering of master minds will work out policies and establish thought along lines of advancement which will have a great influence in directing the destinies of nations. The country press of this state stood whole-heartedly behind the Government during the war and the editors and publishers are lending their energy in promotion of reconstruction. Any decision reached by the Press Congress of the World will have the most respectful consideration of the Illinois Press Association. /. H. McKeever, President, Aberdeen American and Nezvs, Aberdeen, South Dakota. From the prairies of South Dakota I send my greeting to the Press Congress of the World and with it my regrets that I shall be unable to attend. In this period when all nations are devoted to binding up the wounds of the world, I conceive that the press is destined to be a great factor in spreading among them a closer acquaintance and more intimate knowledge which must prevail as a constant and perpetual insurance against disagree- ment and strife. To tliat end, the session of the Press Congress in which you are sitting has a magnificant destiny, and it is my sincere regret that I am not per- sonally to be there to share in the proceedings. 0. S. Freeman, President, Connecticut Editorial Association, Watcr- toivn, Connecticut. Hearty greetings from the Connecticut Editorial Association. May the deliberations of the Press Congress of the World result in helpfulness and inspiration to the thousands of men and women workers m the most helpful profession on earth. Will E. and Charles H. Beeson, the Winchester Journal, Winchester, Indiana. Our regrets in being unable to attend your sessions are only ex- ceeded by the good times we know you are having as the guests of the Hawaiian people. We are sure that your hosts are meeting every anticipation of their guests- 412 The Press Congress of the World Besides the pleasures of the trip you doubtless are enjoying the satisfaction of realizing that as individuals and as an organization you are performing a service not only to the present generation but to unborn generations. There is, "wt believe, no power so well fitted to cement the nations of the world as the newspapers, and a personal acquaintance among newspaper makers of the various nations will not only be a social privilege but a strong factor in the betterment of the world. It is claimed, and possibly rightly, that if the National Editorial Association had been in existence in the fifties and early sixties of the century just past there would have been no civil war in the United States, and it is our belief that if the Press Congress of the World had been functioning there would have been no World War. With this belief and with eyes to the future we wish Godspeed in your deliberations. Ernest J. P. Bcnn, Bcnn Brothers, Limited, 8 Bouverie Street, London, E. C. 4, England. I hope that any of my colleagues of the business press who are able to be present will be able to secure a good large share of the time of the Congress because it seems to me that they have a special duty to talk and a special right to be heard at this most interesting crisis in the world's history. Stated very simply, the broad fact is that the field of industry, busi- ness, commerce, call it what you like has, for good or ill, been invaded by the politicians. This means that the political and popular journalist is called upon to deal much more fully and deeply with business ques- tions than has ever been the case before. The natural tendency of the journalist is to take his cue from the man who shouts loudest. That is one of the inherent and necessary weaknesses of journalism. In connection with current problems it means that our newspapers are liable to give undue emphasis to the irresponsible and uninspired ut- terances of people who know little or nothing of real business, and that the views of the practical men, always and obviously lacking in sen- sation, are denied the prominence which is their due. Therefore, if at Honolulu the trade journalists feel inclined to talk, be lenient with them, apply your genius to the dry-as-dust, matter- of-fact, unpalatable truths in which they are specialists, and thus your conference might arrive at a new and beneficent discovery, and bring sensationalism to the service of sense. Yours for the revolution — the real revolution which makes the wheels go round. Douglas C. Leng, Director, Sheffield Telegraph, Sheffield, England. It is not too much to say that the moulding of the future of human- ity lies in the hands of the pressmen gathered together at Honolulu. May a beneficent Providence guide their deliberations and ensure Messages to the Congress 413 through the medium of the printing press peace on earth and a better understanding between mankind. Let the two great English-speak- ing nations in particular remember that their responsibility is para- mount if the progress of the race is to continue, and let the primary object of the newspaper man be to ensure on both sides of the Atlantic that the peoples raise themselves to the height of it. Clement Shorter, Editor and Director, The Sphere, London, England. I greatly regret that it is not possible for me to accept your kind invitation to the Press Congress of the World at Honolulu. I send, however, very cordial greetings and rejoice in the brotherhood of jour- nalism that such a gathering implies. I believe with all my heart, in spite of the tragic conditions of the past sad years, that the world can be mended and ennobled only through sympathy and understand- ing and that these qualities can only be commanded through the medium of newspapers with their millions of readers. Goethe dreamed that a World Literature would make for peace among the nations. It was an idle dream. Literature from Homer to Rudyard Kipling has tended rather to war than to peace, has thrown a false glamour over force as a ruler of the world. It remains for journalism, with its myriads of preachers in every land, to strive for that happy harmony among the peoples of the earth for which we all long. I can see no solution of the problems which beset the nations if one cannot be found in such a Congress of the World's Press as that assembled at Honolulu of which I would give much to be an humble member. The Rei'. J. G. Digges, Editor, Irish Bee Journal and Beekeepers' Ga-> zettc. Lough Rynn, R. S. A., Ireland. I wish for the Congress unbounded success. Permit me to send herewith sincere greetings to all concerned. O. S. Bailey, Editor, Waiikon Republican and Standard, Waukon, lozva. With profound regret at my inability to attend this, the greatest meeting of public men of the age, I tender greetings to all. L. J. Berry, Secretary, The Nezvspapcr Proprietors' Association of Nezv Zealand, Inc., Wellington, New Zealand. Best wishes for profitable sessions and enjoyable entertainments. Dietrick Lamade, President and General Manager, Grit Publishing Company, Willianisport, Pennsylvania. I can conceive of no movement of more profound significance to journaHsm and, through it, to the world, than the convention of the Press Congress of the World. Language is the instrument of the individual — the newspaper is the voice of the multitude. If, then, through exchange of thought and development of higher common ideals the dominating minds of news- 414 The Press Congress of the World papers of the world may unite in common cause, we may hope, through proper direction of public opinion, to unite our constituents, regardless of race, color or creed, in bonds of world wide peace and brotherly love. I look for excellent results to come from this meeting and hope it will lead to a thorough organization of the press of the world to the end that journalism may fulfill to the highest degree the service for which so much opportunity exists. Gits J. Kargcr, Washington Bureau, Cincinnati Times-Star, 61 Post Building, Washington, D. C. The session of Congress and the coming gathering of representa- tives of great nations to discuss Far Eastern problems and devise measures to put a period to rivalries that lead to w^ar make it in- expedient, to my sorrow, to join you at the Honolulu Congress. I can send no message to that assemblage that will not appear trite and commonplace beside the messages your speakers will deliver. But I W'ould stress this point: We of the Fourth Estate are the men and w^omen on the side lines and our part in the proceedings is to enforce the rules of fair play — fair play to the public by the players, and fair play to the players by the public. We live in an era of great move- ments and we must help to give them the proper direction as far as in our power lies. The Press Congress of the World may make of itself a strong instrument toward that end. Arthur R. Holbrook, Portsmouth Times, 19 Porchester Square, W. 2, England. Will you please convey my respects and my apologies for absence. This Congress will, I feel confident, have world-wide influence in promoting peace and progress throughout the world. M. C. Modi, Hon. Secretary, the Press Association of India, Bombay, India. I am sorry that due to pressing engagements and the pending of an important question of the removal of the blackest Indian press legisla- tion, I shall be unable to leave India to attend the Press Congress in October next. The journalists and the press of India will watch with deep interest the proceedings of your Congress for the betterment of the present standard of their work in all lines connected with their profession. It is needless to say that the liberty of the press is the essential thing and for a country like ours it is to be first taken into consideration. The Indian Press Act of 1910 is a standing menace to our liberty and progress. Our strong agitation since its enactment for its removal both in form and spirit, from the statute book had been ignored by the government of India till now. However, there is a ray of hope now. In its next session of tlie Indian Council, a report of the Press Laws Inquiry Messages to the Congress 415 Committee will very likely be discussed and my association looks to you for your support in our achieving the said object, viz., entire re- moval of the act and restoring the press its freedom. Yours being the Press Congress of the World, my association thinks it shall be befitting if the Congress will also handle this ques- tion and urge the Government of India, in the name of the press, to repeal all obnoxious press legislation as soon as possible. Before concluding, my association wishes you all success and has its entire sympathy and support with your aim and objects. Hans Den Wcisz, Volksaeitiing, St. Paul, Minnesota. I congratulate you on your work. What we need most is the old time spirit of confidence. The newspaper man, as no other, has the opportunity to develop in his country optimism, hope, and faith. Regret cannot be with you. Godspeed to the Press Congress. Henry Stead, Stead's Review, Melbourne, Australia. With best wishes for a most successful and resultful conference. Pred Johnston, Herald, Palkirk, Scotland. Heartiest greetings; regret absence. W. T. Brewster^ Independent Nezvspapers, Ltd., Dublin, Ireland. Greetings from press of Ireland and heartiest wishes for success. President, Dutch Association of Joiirnalists, Scheveningcn, Holland. Editors associations Holland wishes congress all hail for interna- tional brotherhood's sake. Igglesden, Kentish Express, Ashford, Kent, England. Hearty good wishes from reluctantly absent member. Ernest P. Birmingham, Editor, The Pourth Estate, Neiv York City. Much regret my inability to be with you. Please convey to Gover- nor Farrington and members of Congress the Fourth Estate's con- gratulations and our belief that your meeting will prove historic in strengthening the relations between the press of all nations which, although always cordial, are not sufficiently co-ordinated to demon- strate its full power and influence on the world's progress. I am certain that the interchange of thought on the practical problems of newspaper publishing will broaden editorial vision and help materially in framing policies dealing with the momentous questions now before the world's leaders, outstanding among whom is our own President Harding, himself a man of life long training in the profession of journalism. 416 The Press Congress of the World John Dyynond, Past President, National Editorial Association; Editor, Louisiana Planter and Sugar Manufacturer ; Editor, El Mundo Acucarero, New Orleans, Louisiana. The Louisiana Press Association in annual session authorized me to convey to you the good wishes of all the editors of Louisiana with the hope that your session will be full of intellectual enjoyment and mark an advance in the newspaper status of the whole world. Prof. Joseph S. Myers, Department of Journalism, Ohio State Uni- versity, Columbus, Ohio. World journalism will benefit profoundly as a result of this and succeeding Congresses, and what makes for the betterment of the newspapers and their editors is also inevitably for the advancement of all society. Aaron Watson, Bcu'ley Cottage, Lacock, Wiltshire, England. It would have been delightful to me to meet the representatives of the Press Congress of the World at Honolulu but as there are circum- stances which make it impossible for me to be present, it is a satis- faction to me to believe that I have been of service to those who have brought about so remarkable an event, and to think that the meeting must have beneficial results not only in promoting acquaintanceship among some of the leading journalists of the world — a good end in itself — but in extending public recognition of the common purpose and the high mission of journalism. The Press Congress of the World is, in its own way, a league of nations. The world's press has an enormous, perhaps an excessive, power of promoting the same ends, or of impeding them. Those of us who have had a share in the work that has preceded the Honolulu Congress have had our visions of a world's press so far united in feeling and in purpose as to be undeviatingly on the side of the world's highest interests and aspirations. So, indeed, may it be. Andrea Ferretti, Ilby Card, Borga, Finland. I shall always be very much pleased to keep in touch with you and be informed about the further enhancement of the association to which I ask you kindly to interpret my sentiments of greeting. John A. Park, Publisher, Raleigh Times, Raleigh, North Carolina. I feel sure the sessions will be of unusual interest to every member attending, and I know the splendid tours will be worth all the in- convenience and long journej'^ on the part of each attendant. General J. C. Smuts, Premier, South Africa, London, England. The purpose of the Congress sets a high ideal and my sincerest wish is that the deliberations will strengthen the desire and the passion for Messages to the Congress 417 public service and uplifting of humanity, which is the real end not only of the press but also of all true statesmanship. W. Adamson MacCallumy, Superintendent and Manager, Drmnviond's Tract Society, Stirling, Scotland. I trust that the meeting will be a great success. When so many men representative of the world's press meet together to confer there is bound to be a great gain for the universal interests of humanity. The world is ultimately ruled by reason and by ideas and the world's editors by con- tinual reiteration of ideas can exert an incalculable influence in bringing forward the time when humanity as a whole will not only believe all these ideas but will act upon them. Will you express to the Congress my personal regret at my inability to be present, as also my genuine and sincere desire that this meeting may be the prelude to a new era in the world's pilgrimage towards peace. S. G. Jarman, J. P., the North Wales Guardian, Argyle Street, Wrex- liam, England. I hope your gatherings will be a glorious success. United Chambers of Commerce, United Educational Associations, United Bankers Association of China. Pray accept our hearty congratulations for successful holding of second sessions and our appreciation of collective efforts made by pressmen of the world for international goodwill. May we have the honor of inviting the Congress to hold the next session in China ? Dong-a Daily, Seoul, Korea. Wish Congress great success. Natal IVifness, Pietermaritzburg, South Africa. Express our regret unable attend fraternal greeting Best wishes success Congress. Rafael Alducin, Excelsior, Mexico City, Mexico. Unable attend Congress I wish to convey to all delegates assembled my best wishes for complete success and my innermost desire that collective co- operation will result in improvements, interchange of world's news and stronger friendly and uplifting spirit amongst great newspaper fraternity. Messages of grceling were also received from the foUoiviug : Conrado Sanchez, Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic. Josephus Daniels, the News and Observer, Raleigh, North Carolina. Mihran Nacachian, Director and Proprietor, Sabah, Constantinople, Turkey. • Juan Guillermo Mendoza, Director Administrator, Notas, Venezuela. L. O. Trigg, Editor, Eldorado Daily Journal, Eldorado, Illinois. 418 The Press Congress of the World William Grant, Stornoway Gazette, Stornoway, Scotland. J. E. Dertinger, Editor and Publisher, the Bushnell Record, Bushnell, Illinois. Chief Director, the African Bureau of Information, Monrovia, Liberia, West Africa. Randolph Bedford, Brisbane, Queensland, Australia. Vertanes Mardigian, Djagadmart, Constantinople, Turkey. Fermin Manzanares, Duaca, Venezuela, South America. Camille Devilar, Corresponding Secretary, Association of the French Colonial Press, 132 Avenue d'Orleans, Paris, France. Arturo Alessandri, Santiago, Chile. W. Arthur Wilson, Editor, The Malaya Tribune, Singapore, Straits Settlement. Leonard W. Matters, Herald, Buenos Aires, Argentina, South America. Hugh Curran, Irish Times, Dublin, Ireland. Walter Makepeace, Singapore Free Press, Singapore, Straits Settlement. John Clyde Oswald, Editor, American Printer, New York City. Korean Independence News, Shanghai. Salvado Canals, Madrid, Spain. Toundokyo Magazine, Keijyo, Korea. Kaibyuk Magazine, Keijyo, Korea. VI. PAN-PACIFIC PRESS CONFERENCE. The first Pan-Pacific Press Conference, a regional section of the Press Congress of the World, was held under the auspices of the Pan-Pacific Union and called by Dr. Walter Williams, Presi- dent of the Press Congress of the World, in Honolulu, October 21, 1921. Dr. Williams was Honorary Chairman of the Conference. Alexander Hume Ford, editor of the Mid-Pacific Magazine, was chairman of the Conference program; Mrs. F. M. Swanzy, chair- man of the entertainment program ; Dr. Frank F. Bunker, secre- tary of the Conference; M. Zumoto, chairman of the morning session; V. S. McClatchy, secretary of the morning session; FIol- lington K. Tong, chairman of the afternoon session, and Hon. Mark Cohen, secretary of the afternoon session. Lorrin A. Thurston, proprietor of the Honolulu Advertiser, was elected President of the permanent Pan-Pacific Press Con- ference. Dr. Frank F. Bunker, executive secretary of the Pan- Pacific Union, was elected Secretary of the Conference, and Y. Soga, editor of Nippu Jiji, Honolulu, was elected as third mem- ber of the executive committee of the Conference. At nine o'clock on the morning of October 21, 1921, Hon. Wallace R. Farrington, Governor-of Hawaii, as President of the Pan-Pacific Union, met with the Admiral of the U. S. Navy, the General of the U. S. Army, and the trustees of the Pan-Pacific Union on the steps of the Capitol Building to receive the dele- gates to the first Pan-Pacific Press Conference, and with them to review the pageant of the states and countries of the Pacific, com- prising children of each state and country who presented the flag of each. There were fifty groups of children from the states and terri- tories of the United States, each marching behind the state flag, each in the colors bearing the floral emblem of his state. These 419 420 The Press Congress of the World were led by a detachment from the Army carrying the national colors. The groups from Pacific lands in their national dress were headed by a detachment from the United States Navy, carrying the colors, and concluding with the Filipino section escorting an historic silken flag of the Philippines which was presented to Governor Farrington as head of the Pan-Pacific Union. At the conclusion of the pageant. Governor Farrington led the way into the throne room of the old lolani Palace of the ancient Hawaiian monarchy, now the Executive Building of the Territory. After a brief address of welcome. Governor Farrington intro- duced a distinguished visitor, Hon. S. T, Wen, Commissioner of Foreign Affairs, Nanking, China, who was on his way to the Washington Conference on Limitation of Armament. Governor Farrington then turned the meeting over to the chairman of the Executive Committee having the program for the day in hand, Mr. Alexander Hume Ford. Dr. Walter Williams, President of the Press Congress of the World, in behalf of the Congress, expressed appreciation to the Pan-Pacific Union for permitting the organization of the Pan- Pacific Press Conference in Honolulu. In his belief the object of the Pan-Pacific Conference should be "to permit each of the Pan-Pacific peoples and nationalities to grow to the fullest extent of their own individual grace and beauty and power without in- terfering in any way with the growth and the beauty and grace and the power of the other nations and peoples represented in the Pan-Pacific lands. Just as the individuals in a community are en- couraged to make the most of themselves, so long as the making of the most of themselves permits others to make the most of themselves, so each community reaches its highest results." Hon. J. H. Kessell, former member of Parliament, Queens- land, and Mayor of the city of Gladstone, Queensland, brought greetings to the Conference from Australia. In selecting addresses for publication here, the editor has chosen those especially concerning the practical problems con- fronting the press of the Pacific. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 421 WHY A PERMANENT PAN-PACIFIC CONFERENCE BODY By Ai^ExANDER Hume Ford, Director, Pan-Pacific Union. There is need, as never before, that the gatherers and dissemi- nators of news in Pacific lands come to a better knowledge of each other and each other's land and problems. The Australian journalist knows little of Japan, the Ameri- can journalist is confused by the reams of paid-for press propa- ganda that deluges him from the Orient, the Japanese press takes seriously the utterances of the American jingo journalist and tries to out-jingo him. The Latin- American press is fairly well served so far as her northern neighbor is concerned, but little in other Pacific lands is known concerning the affairs of the great South American continent. The result of all this neglect of understanding is that Pacific lands are steering straight for the shoals of chronic misunder- standing and worse. Unfortunately the great news distributing bodies of Europe and America play an influential part in the keep- ing up of Pan-Pacific misunderstanding. They control, largely, the dissemination of world news to and between Pacific lands, and, because of their contracts, entered into long ago, when news dissemination methods depended on now antiquiated methods make it practically impossible for the press of the Pacific to secure cheap and abundant news service to which the invention of the wireless entitles it. To illustrate, the delegates from Australasia to this Conference up to the day before their arrival in Honolulu, could send wireless messages to Australia and New Zealand for fourteen cents a word ; the moment they landed, however, they were shut off from wireless communication with Australia and must resort to cable rates at 83 cents a word. Surely Australia and New Zealand should be urged by this Conference to find immediately some means of opening their wireless stations to the reception of press and commercial messages from Pacific lands at least. I learned when in Japan, and from a director of the Associated 422 The Press Congress of the World Press, that owing to a contract between American Associated Press and British Renter that world news to Japan must go only through Reuter. Java has asked tliat Honolulu be made a "drop" station and that a man be stationed here to select from the "drop" service such news as each Pacific country may desire and forward it by wireless. Premier Massey of New Zealand informed me the other day that it may be years before the round-the-world British system of wireless stations is put in operation. One of these is to be located at Auckland and the premier hopes then that we of other parts of the Pacific, not colored in red, may be permitted to send wireless press messages to Pacific British possessions. Who knows what may happen in the Pacific during the next few years before us if the press of the Pacific does not arise to its great duty and by truthful reporting dispel some of the misunderstandings that are arising because of the fact that the press of the Pacific is not educating the people concerning each others afifairs. Tributary to the shores of the Pacific lives more than half the population of the globe. The Pacific Ocean is the future theatre of the commerce of the world. Here in the Pacific meet the oldest and the newest civilizations. From now on it is the Pacific lands that must feed the world. Lack of co-operation and understanding among Pacific peoples would prove the greatest calamity the world has yet known. The press of the Pacific alone can prevent this calamity and save the world. From now on the greater part of the world's people will have their homes in Pacific lands. Their lead- ers should be brought together for better understanding of each other's aims and ambitions, and the press should create, as it can, a patriotism of the Pacific. In the Orient many of the journalistic leaders are graduates of an American school of journalism where they have been tavight, as the foundation principle, that a news-gatherer should be a gentleman at heart and in action. This is also a tradition among the British pressmen in the Orient, This leaven is permeating the Anglo Saxon press of the Far East and should be the watchword of the vernacular press. This little body of men is having a marked influence in the Orient ; the leaders among the pressmen in the Philippines, China, Japan and Korea, know each other per- sonally and trust each other. As this circle enlarges the jingoists Pan-Pacific Press Conference 423 will find it more difficult to excite the imaginations of those who do not always think seriously and investigate. The men of the press in the Pacific, when they know each other, will learn to trust each other, and in every Pacific land they will strive to be worthy of this trust of their distant confreres and the serious problems of the Pacific will dissipate in fleecy clouds, knowledge of each other's afifairs will take the place of ignorance and prejudice and under- standing will supersede misunderstanding, if only our press of the Pacific will consummate its high mission. Perhaps there should be two distinct bodies in the future Pan- Pacific Press Conference: One a League of Pacific Newspapers composed of proprietors and the business staff, that should out- line the general business policy, deal with the cost of paper and news-gathering, reducing their cost by co-operative methods and perhaps reducing the cost of international advertising to the ad- vertiser through similar methods of co-operation among the busi- ness staffs of the newspapers and magazines published in Pacific lands. The other and more important body, for the peace of the world at least, should be the actual disseminators of news and information concerning Pacific lands. They should meet together to know each other and to plan work that will make the people of each Pacific land know more about the people of other Pacific lands. The first step such a body should take would be to secure a reduction in the cable and wireless press rates between Pacific lands, and actual free trade in wireless press correspondence, unhampered by any private or other contracts that would militate against the cheapest possible rates in the dissemination of inter- national news and information. The late ex-Secretary of the Interior, Franklin K. Lane, ex- President Wilson, Senator Henry Cabot Lodge and President Harding have all voiced the opinion that in the Pacific, having be- hind it thousands of years of traditions of peace, that here might be the logical birthplace of a real League of Nations. Who knows but that it may not be the mission of the press of the Pacific to bring this about. Next September there is to be held in Honolulu under the auspices of the Pan-Pacific Union the first Pan-Pacific Com- mercial Conference. It is hoped that President Harding may be present, and should he find it possible to be here at that time, he 424 The Press Congress of the World will. If he does come to Hawaii, the Pan-Pacific Union will invite the presidents and premiers of all Pacific lands to meet here in friendly conference. Then, perhaps once more, the pressmen of the Pacific may be asked to gather in honor of such an informal meeting of the heads ■of Pacific governments, and it would be an inspiration for better understanding the future results of which might be incalculably good. The Pan-Pacific Union at the request of Dr. Walter Williams, President of the Press Congress of the World, issued the call for the first Pan-Pacific Press Conference, with the understanding that it was to be a permanent body to meet for conference every two or three years ; a regional conference body affiliated with the Press Congress of the World and one that would stimulate the holding of annual local press conferences in the Orient, Aus- tralasia and on the Pacific Coast of America. The Pan-Pacific Union gladly assumed the responsibility for the call, and further offers its services to the permanent organ- ization. The Pan-Pacific Educational Conference, recently held here, passed a number of recommendations that it requested the Union to carry out, among these the publishing of its proceedings and the preparation for and the calling of a second Pan-Pacific Edu- cational Conference. The Union has secured the services of Dr. F. F. Bunker, to assist in carrying out the recommendations made and has appropriated sufficient funds for carrying out most of them. In the matter of aiding the Pan-Pacific Press Conference along kindred lines I am certain that the Union would endeavor to carry out any recommendations of this Conference, if so requested. We wish to serve. The workers in the Pan-Pacific Union are constantly brought face to face with the fact that for good or evil the power of the press will guide the destinies of the Pacific. There is need today as never before that you men of the press give us the best that is in you toward the dissemination of truthful and helpful facts con- cerning Pacific lands. What will you do about it — how can we aid? Pan-Pacific Press Conference 425 A PACIFIC UNDERSTANDING By Guy Inne;s, Associate Editor, The Herald, Melbourne, Australia. Throughout his tour to AustraHa and New Zealand, Lord NorthcHffe, principal proprietor of the London "Times," and one of the greatest of the British Empire's journalists, lost no oppor- tunity of emphasizing the importance, particularly to Australia and the British possessions in the Pacific, of the Disarmament Confer- ence to be held at Washington. He pointed out that at this confer- ence Australia's fate might be settled, and, largely as the result of his utterances, the five and a half million inhabitants of the great Island Commonwealth are beginning, perhaps belatedly, to realize how vital to them and to their country are the problems to be dis- cussed at the Conference, and how much they are concerned in the result of its deliberations. It was originally understood that the interests of Australia as a component part of the British Empire, would be safeguarded by the British delegation to this great international congress ; and, though Australia trusts her Motherland to the full, more than one close student of the situa- tion regretted that the Australian Commonwealth was not to be represented individually and directly by one of her own statesmen, who could interpret clearly and emphatically the attitude and ideals of his nation in regard to problems peculiarly her own — such, for instance, as the maintenance of the White Australia policy. This is of particular importance in view of the statement that Japan intends to seek the removal of restrictions upon immi- gration from Japan to other Pacific lands. Very welcome, there- fore, is the announcement of the Prime Minister of Australia, William Morris Hughes, that, as the outcome of communications with Washington, Senator G. F. Pearce, Minister for Defense, has been appointed to represent Australia at the Disarmament Conference. Senator Pearce, who was appointed to his present position in the cabinet before the war, can be relied upon, by reason of his long political experience and his thorough familiarity with the problems that will be discussed, for the ample presenta- tion of Australia's case, particularly as he will have full knowl- 426 The Press Congress of the World edge, through his close personal association with Mr. Hughes, of the transactions at the recent Empire Conference of Prime Min- isters. The appointment of a direct representative is clear proof that Australia realizes to the full that her future is as closely involved in the outcome of the Washington Conference as is that of any nation bordering on the Pacific Ocean. It is in the Pacific, in days to come, that the form of our future civilization may be decided. Peace in the Pacific is a surety for the peace of the world. A stroke of the pen maye fore- stall and prevent the blow of the sword. By strokes of the pen has the Pan-Pacific Union been created ; and there are no bounds to the hopes which that Union may inspire for the dawn- ing of the day "when nation shall not lift up sword against nation." It is fortunate and fitting that the Pan-Pacific Press Conference should precede the great conference at Washington ; for there is as yet no other agency in existence so well calculated to promote that mutual understanding between the Pacific nations and that frank appreciation of the aims which they have in common to safeguard civilization as is this organization of practical idealists. That the shore of the Pacific is the threshold of the world has been realized by Mr. Hughes, who, addressing the Commonwealth House of Representatives shortly after his return from the con- ference in England of the Prime Ministers of the British Empire, said in effect that the solution of the problems of the Pacific was essentially a precedent to the satisfactory conduct and conclusion of the Disarmament Conference. It needs no profound study of his utterance to demonstrate its truth. So long as there is a possi- bility of this ocean becoming the arena of the world in arms, for just so long will the certainty exist that those nations taking part in the conference at Washington will endeavor to attain and main- tain that state of overwhelming preparedness which prefers arse- nals to arbitration, and, in too early a resort, cruisers to congresses of peace. Every possible step should be taken to ensure that each participant has concrete rather than piously hopeful reasons for the belief that the meeting will achieve more than ever Hague Conference has attempted aforetime, and that there must be no feeling, however diplomatically concealed that though a colleague has his cards on the table, there is a gun on his hip. Much, therefore, rests with the Pan-Pacific Press Conference. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 427 Assembled on one of the fairest isles of a sea which has ever been a field of exploration and of commerce rather than the battle- ground of contending navies, it can serve greatly in making that sea Pacific in fame as it is Pacific in name. By promoting an in- ternational understanding, honest, frank and free from chau- vinistic propaganda masquerading as patriotism, it can go far to annihilate those mischievous misunderstandings too often deliber- ately fostered, which even if they do not lead to direct war, yet create an atmosphere of unrest and distrust which can be para- lysing if not actually disastrous. Nowhere does one realize this as in Honolulu, standing as it does as a marine telephone exchange where the world's wires converge ; where, in the words of Emerson ''Every day brings a ship — Every ship brings a word." Shall not the efforts of the Pan-Pacific bring the consumma- tion voiced by the poet : "Well for him who hath no fear. Looking seaward, well assured That the word the vessel brings Is the word he longs to hear." And that word is — "Peace." As has been said by resolution duly attested, the Conference offers a co-ordinating agency which can take the initiative and can stimulate, in the wisest and widest sense, education to common ends in the various Pacific nations. And it can "undertake either directly or indirectly * * * a thorough scientific investigation of the causes of war and assist educational machinery in the various nations to remove causes which may contribute to war making." Now, the power-house of that machinery is the Press. No other medium is so certain in its operation or so far-reaching in its activities. It is for the Congress to take advantage of it, and by its legitimate use, discountenancing the spread of misleading or merely sectional propaganda of the baser sort, to establish an understanding among Pacific countries which will form the best guarantee that the world can have for a reduction of armaments, or, failing their immediate reduction, a halt in that adding of armor-plate to armor-plate and weapon to weapon which makes a nation so ponderous in its might that it must through sheer weight fall upon its neighbor. 428 The Press Congress of the World Excellent within their limits as are the various news services to Australia, and widespread as are their ultimate sources, they are at present too costly, as was pointed out at the recent Im- perial Press Congress held at Ottawa, to permit of their full use as a factor in promoting international understanding. There is too little opportunity for the chronicling of consecutive and con- structive steps in social progress, in altruistic legislation and its effects, in great educational movement, and in efforts in any coun- try which have for their objective the co-ordination of internation- al forces for peace. Were a cheaper cable service possible, particu- larly between countries bordering upon the Pacific, Australian papers could afford to a greater extent than they do at present to maintain trustworthy special correspondents in the important cities of these lands, whose work would go far to promote what may be described as the entente cordiale of the Pacific. This, from the Australian point of view, would be preferable to the estab- lishment of a news bureau which would endeavor to serve the Australian press as a whole. The more important Australian papers prefer to maintain as far as possible an individuality in their news service, at least as far as the two main groups of journals are concerned. One of these groups, which consists largely of morning papers, receives a cable service which is under control of its own managing editors in London and New York, and the other, in which the two principal Australian evening journals (the Melbourne Herald and the Sydney Sun) are associated, in conjunction with Reuters, receives services from London, Vancouver, Tokio and elsewhere, although London and Vancouver are the main headquarters. From the point of view of accuracy, general interest, and scope, this latter service, always having regard to the restrictions imposed by the cost of cabling, reaches, it is generally acknowledged, a high standard of excel- lence. But it might cover Pacific news far more fully than it does at present. Whether greater recourse could be had to wireless messages as a means of securing a more ample service is a matter of some doubt. Were the cost of cable transmission made cheaper, most of the existing drawbacks could be overcome. Competition or threatened competition by wireless might have this effect, as the cable companies might reduce their charges in self-defense. But Pan-Pacific Press Conference 429 it remains to be proved by actual experiment whether an exclu- sively wireless service could ever take the place of cable news. A partly wireless service has been introduced by the Pacific Cable Board, but this is not much used for press purposes. It should here be explained that there are two principal cable companies operating routes to Australia from England. One is the Pacific, by which messages after being transmitted from England across the Atlantic to Vancouver by the Anglo-American and Commercial Company's cable, are forwarded from Montreal by way of Fanning Island, Fiji, and Norfolk Island to Southport, Queensland, whence they are distributed over Australia. There is a branch cable from Norfolk Island to New Zealand. In addition, there are two submarine cables which connect the latter Dominion with the Australian mainland. The other principal organization is the Eastern Extension Cable Company, which, in addition to the original cable from London to Port Darwin, in the Northern Territory of Australia, has duplicated this line, and has also laid a cable from Great Britain via Durban, South Africa, to Fremantle, West Australia. There is an alternative route, partly belonging to the Eastern Ex- tension Company, connecting the Port Darwin-Singapore cable with London via Hongkong, Shanghai, and Russia. A cable from Java to Cocos Island affords another route from South Africa to Australia, and a radio station at Cocos strengthens the line of communication between Australia and the East. Rates for press cables from England range from seven cents to seventy- two cents a word, according to whether they are ordinary press or urgent. In considering the question of wireless competition, regard must be had to the fact that the Governments of the various Australian States were, and the Australian Federal Government is, financially interested in the continuance of the existing cable services, inasmuch as the cable companies were or are subsidized by Government to defray in part the cost of the service or of laying the original cable. With regard to the Pacific Cable, the Commonwealth shares proportionately in the profit or loss which accrues from the traffic. The subsidy agreement between the State Governments and the Eastern Extension Company ex- pired in 1900, 430 The Press Congress of the World Even if present circumstances, which include the terms of existing press contracts with the cable companies, do not permit of immediate recourse to wireless, the prospect of its adoption might be of value as a lever to secure a reduction in cable rates. In any case, the lowering of the latter should be strongly urged by the Pan-Pacific Press Conference. But whatever be the ultimate means adopted to increase the scope and efficiency of the news services throughout the Pacific, no permanent good can be achieved that is not sought in a spirit of forbearance, understanding, and mutual comprehension. Con- cession must meet with concession, not challenge with challenge. The Pan-Pacific Union has supplied the initiative, and it is for the press of the Pacific to follow its example. Nation by nation, it may educate the world. Much has already been gained by the gathering together in one spot, where they may interchange ideas and formulate constructive proposals, of so many men who are primarily a power for the dissemination of the truth. The torch of enlightenment has been kindled, and it may yet illuminate the greater half of the globe. The acquisition of a better mu- tual knowledge of national aims and aspirations is inseparable from such a meeting as this ; and when those who have assem- bled go forth pledged to spread in their own countries the truth about every other land, the good that will result must be incal- culable. With every succeeding conference the scope of achieve- ment will be amplified, until, in Mr. Alexander Hume Ford's notable words, the press has created a patriotism of the Pacific. PAN-PACIFIC CABLE NEWS SERVICE By T. Petrie, Editor, South China Morning Post, Hongkong. "Tell them we want a broader, bigger, brighter and better cable news service." That was the last injunction I received on leaving Hongkong to attend this conference. Hitherto the position has not been satisfactory. Hongkong is tied to Renter, Manila to the Associated Press, Tokyo to Kok- usai. No agency treads on the ground of another, and costs are far too high for the development of individual enterprise. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 431 Shanghai, on the other hand, is a dumping ground for many services. Renter is the chief ingredient of a confused mass of intelHgence landed there, but the lump is leavened by smatterings of American and French wireless, and supplemented by liberal doses of Russian and German information of doubtful origin and authenticity. It is not an ideal dish, but, in such a mixed community, it probably meets with more acceptance than any single agency service could possibly command. What we should aim at is the ideal dish. Renter, as a British agency, features British news and views. The Associated Press caters for American readers, while Kok- usai, which I believe is a camouflaged Renter oiTshoot, is in- tended solely for Japanese consumption. Not one of these big news agencies deals, except in the "scrappiest" fashion, with the news which most concerns ask, the news of the countries bordering the Pacific. They tell us of happenings, mainly po- litical, in London, Paris, Washington, but seldom do they give enlightenment as to what is transpiring in those vast territories which border the Pacific, the peoples of which comprise one- third of the population of the globe. They tell us little or noth- ing about our immediate neighbors, and it follows that such news as we get, presented as it is in different ways in different coun- tries, is not conducive to good understanding. Errors creep in, even falsehoods, and friction results. This is perhaps the chief disadvantage of the present system, or lack of system. Some months ago I received a letter from Mr. Ford, direc- tor of the Pan-Pacific Union, in which he suggested Honolulu as a center for the collection and dissemination of news to and from the Pacific. Herein lies an opportunity for the Pan-Pacific Press Conference to step in and to perform a real service not only to pressdom but to the reading public of Pacific lands. Benjamin Franklin described the press as "the mistress of in- telligence." It behooves us to guard that title. To be worthy of the dignity it implies, it is imperative that the press of the Pacific should move with the times. The war has altered many things. It has broadened the outlook of millions. No longer are we satisfied with news from the homeland alone, the news which in days gone by came like water to thirsty souls. We want to be fully informed of current events in other lands, and chiefly 432 The Press Congress of the World we want to know and become acquainted with our neighbors. We want to get together and to understand each other. Then we must give a thought to the wants of the native elements who surround us. The foreign press is an important factor in bring- ing enHghtenment to many millions of races who are just be- ginning to interest themselves in the doings of the western world. The numbers of native readers of the foreign press in China, Japan, Malaya and elsewhere on the Pacific are increasing by leaps and bounds, and no progressive newspaper can afford to ignore their wants. It should be possible for us to organize a liberal and inex- pensive yet thoroughly reliable and acceptable general news serv- ice for the Pacific. A broader service — a service of world-wide scope and out- look, a service which as far as possible will reveal both sides of the picture at the same time. A bigger service — ^a service which will not be restricted by the terms of a contract yielding so many words for so many dol- lars, a service always as big as the event recorded warrants. A brighter service — ^a service which will deal much more liberally with the happy side of international affairs and much less liberally with the petty woes and worries which torment humanity. A better service — a service of real live news and news only, a service which will not attempt in any way to influence the minds of the writers who may have to handle it. Surely between us we can provide a service on these lines. A central organization will be needed to collect and distribute the news. I can think of no better center than Honolulu, the hub of the Pacific. Here we already have the nucleus of the or- ganization and the willingness to work. This great Pacific Cable News Service will need a staff and a number of correspondents. The cost will be heavy, but as a set-off there should soon arise a demand for Pacific news from our organization, which news will be supplied by and credited to its respective contributors. Telegraphic charges will be the main item of cost, but it will be the duty of our organization to continually press for reduction. By ceaseless agitation we can, I am sure, obtain both cheap and better telegraphic facili- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 433 ties than we have hitherto had. With wireless and the sub- marine cable competing for our business — they are bound to do this in time — such a news service as I have outlined can be or- ganized and operated with benefit* to all concerned. Better served, the press can do much to tone down and even dispel the many misunderstandings and jealousies which afflict the cosmo- politan communities bordering the Pacific. Some members of the Conference may consider a Pacific cable news service such as I have outlined in advance of the times, but those members who have resided in the East for a number of years cannot fail to appreciate and approve the motive which has inspired the idea. A big change in the collection and distribution of cable news must come sooner or later, and it will be well to prepare, for much water will flow under the bridge before such a get- together opportunity as this gathering ofifers occurs again. INTERCHANGE OF NEWS IN THE PACIFIC By Riley H. Allen, Editor, Honolulu Star-Bulletin. There can be no difference of opinion among newspapermen of the countries in the Pacific, as to the high desirability of that millenium of "better understanding" about which we have heard with significant frequency from the day the Press Congress of the World opened. We need not debate the question whether freer interchange of news and views about really important Pacific questions will help to promote better understanding — the truth of it is self- evident. W^e need not assure our Anglo-Saxon, Japanese, Chinese, Fili- pino, Korean fellow-newspapermen that if the channels of com- munication about and across the Pacific were broader and smooth- er, we who live about the Pacific would be less apt to suspect each other's motives and criticise each other's actions. The truth of that is self-evident, too. Our first problem is right here among those of us who are fortunate enough to be at the Press Congress of the World, and 28 434 The Press Congress of the World this Pan-Pacific conference. It is to translate all the energy and fervor and gallant spirit expressed in the many addresses and papers into certain concrete terms which shall formulate at least one or two courses of action to be undertaken immediately after this conference has concluded. I need hardly emphasize to our visitors that we newspapermen in Hawaii agree with what has been said of the need for lower press rates; the need for a broader service between the United States and the Orient; the need for a greater variety of news, and especially for Oriental and American news, to be made avail- able for Australia and New Zealand. Hawaii's geographical position is such, and the development of the island press has been such, as to bring home to us daily the desirability of a vastly increased news service throughout Pacific lands. We know also that the majority of newspapers in the Pacific islands and in Asia are financially unable to assume a greater burden of news expense than they now carry, and many are finding their costs in traffic tariffs and the salaries of correspondents a greater load than is comfortable. Nor need I emphasize that the newspapermen of Hawaii believe that this freer interchange of national news would have a beneficial political effect in addition to its obvious benefit to the newspaper by the greater diversity and balance of matter which it could offer its readers. Our visitors, I am sure, will not have failed to see that in Hawaii we Americans believe in frank exchange of views on important and sometimes deli- cate subjects with our fellow-residents of other races. On a vastly larger scale, that same principle would be carried out in the great news-exchange which we should like to see developed for the Pacific. Taking it for granted that we have fairly similar ideas on the principles and purposes just mentioned, how can we put them into action? My two suggestions, and they are put forth with entire knowl- edge of the difficulty of carrying them out, are, first, an inter- national press rate ; and secondly, the use of government wireless stations to carry the news. In connection with the matter, let me, for Hawaii, heartily second what Mr. McClatchy of Sacramento said to the Press Pan-Pacific Press Conference 435 Congress of the World a few days ago — that the agreement by which the government radio is made available for communica- tions on the Pacific be extended, after its first two-year period ends next July. The renewal of this agreement is so imperative to the welfare of the American newspapers of the Pacific that I cannot emphasize it too strongly. It means so much to the future of the Pacific for press service to be comprehensive, un- hampered and efficient that an abrogation of the present system would be disastrous. 1. The International Press Rate: Various suggestions have been made in recent years, and es- pecially since the conclusion of the World W^ar, for national press rates. One such suggestion which received considerable atten- tion has, I believe, been considered by the British government — that a uniform one-cent rate be established for press matter be- tween any two points in the British dominions. I have read also that the French government has considered a similar plan. Now obviously this plan is not based primarily on the expense of such a traffic service. It takes no account of distances to be covered, relays to be made, or other physical features. The plan is based primarily on a realization of the value of an empire- wide press service, a service which shall permit and encourage the transmission of a great volume of news at a low cost. It is based on a recognition of the need for giving to far-separated peoples a sense of their common interests and common destiny. No private business could set up such an arrangement, in which the charge to patron is based not at all on the cost of opera- tion, and survive. But a government which spends billions to build battleships which may never fire a shot, or drill armies that may never be called into the field, can subsidize the lines of com- munication, either government or privately owned, and make such a uniform rate possible. It may be argued that while a single government might per- fect such an arrangement, the technical difficulties involved in immense distances and various kinds of communication facilities would make an international plan impossible. I do not think so, I think that if we accept the idea of an international press rate as sound, we and other countries would have no more diffi- culties working out the details than we had with our international 436 The Press Congress of the World postal conventions, — and the United States, for instance, has successfully operated under international postal conventions since 1869. This is a day when international standardization is being used to promote business — why not use it to promote communications and peace? We are getting to a universal system of weights and measures ; we have international telegraphic unions already. It is noteworthy that an adviser to the French treasury department, Monsieur I. Bourquin, has just proposed in La Revue Mondiale an international money to pass at par throughout the world in all international transactions. A uniform press rate would immensely stimulate and simplify press traffic around the world. I think perhaps its greatest value would be to bring world-news to remote communities. Its value in getting the larger communities of North and South America, Europe, Asia, Australia, and Africa into contact with each other would be scarcely less. ^ I do not mean to suggest government control of the news in § any form, except the physical features of the traffic. My thought | is that the support and activities of the governments concerned |. would be confined to providing the facilities for transmission, and I paying the bills — for assuredly, at the outset, there would be some | deficits. Perhaps the single arbitrary control which the governments should exercise would be on the point of volume of news matter to be carried. Of course they could not be expected to turn their facilities over without limit. Within the limits, however, it should not be a matter of government dictation what sort of mat- ter was transmitted, except as are already imposed by constitu- tional law. 2. Use of Government Wireless Stations. What I have just said on a uniform press rate must be con- sidered with the second suggestion of greatly developing the use of government wireless. Hawaii has made and is making perhaps greater use of wire- less in peace-time than any other community in the world. It was in these islands that wireless was first made commercially practicable. For a good many years the daily papers of Honolulu have received almost, and are now receiving all, of their news report by wireless. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 437 Our very successful use of wireless, and especially the fine cooperation and efficient traffic arrangements which the Honolulu papers are receiving from the United States naval radio system makes me believe it entirely practicable for governments to place their wireless systems in the service of the press — and not, of course, from a commercial motive, but from the patriotic and quite as legitimate motive of promoting world-interests. Wireless is still in its infancy, and yet today Hawaii can talk with Paris. If necessary, we could tonight put a message into that barred capital of Soviet Russia which is under the shadows of mystery almost as deep as those which once shrouded the For- bidden City. During the war our navy operators here heard French operators on a lofty tower in Bordeaux, and German operators signalling from the masts at Nauen. Establishment of press wireless around the world, with the governments providing traffic facilities, means three principal prior things : First, agreement by the governments that they will do it. Secondly, the erection of wireless stations at many points and the enlargement and strengthening of other stations. Thirdly, the development of news exchange agreements and contracts be- tween existing news agencies, and probably an international news agency to supervise the great system. And the government serv- ice should be so developed that the individual correspondent would be able to file his dispatches without danger of being choked off or crowded out by the big agencies. Such a plan might seem Utopian were it not for our expe- rience in Hawaii with the use of the United States navy radio system. By act of congress, the facilities of the navy wireless have been made available to American newspapers and news agencies, and the comparatively short time this has been in opera- tion has proved a boon to the local dailies. We have found the navy officers and staff charged with the duty of handling this traffic keenly alive to its importance, deeply interested in perfecting the technical side, and with their imagi- nations stirred by the possibilities for development of this mys- terious force which can fling the words of men instantly to im- mense distances, to be read by millions of people we shall never see but whose interests more and more are becoming identical with ours. 438 The Press Congress of the World The local staff and equipment of the navy radio can handle with ease 27,000 words a day. You have perhaps noticed that during the sessions of the Congress we have been printing an augmented telegraphic service. In addition to the regular daily news report of the Associated Press, we are getting more than a thousand words extra a day from the Associated Press, and the Chicago Tribune, recognizing the importance of this congress, has enterprisingly given a three thousand word daily report es- pecially compiled by its syndicate service. All of this has been handled efficiently by the navy radio here — more, it was handled without serious delay or interruption even when we were getting play-by-play bulletins, every few minutes, on the world-series baseball at New York last week. It seems to me that governments may well expend some of the great sums they will save by limitation of armaments in develop- ing wireless press service. It would not take many of the mil- lions of dollars which go into dreadnoughts, to build stations and establish operating staffs sufficient to cover the globe. Such a plan as is herewith suggested would not necessarily conflict with the legitimate business of commercial cable and wireless systems. As international business grows, these are finding their facilities taxed in the straight commercial traffic. Some of them frankly do not want to handle press service. Nor do I propose any system to tear down the large news- gathering and distribution agencies whose development is really among the wonders of the world. Today we have a close and cordial cooperation between the Associated Press and the United States navy radio in bringing world-news to Hawaii, and I have no doubt that same cordial spirit could be maintained with in- ternational systems. In peace-time — and this whole congress is an illustration of the hope that peace may continue — in peace-time the govern- ment wireless can easily handle an immense press traffic. The United States navy plant and the staff here can handle a much larger volume of traffic than it is now called upon to handle. With the increase in number of wireless stations, and the steadily improving service which the fertile invention and the enthusiastic industry of wireless experts are developing, it will become more and more easy to flash tens of thousands of words a day around Pan-Pacific Press Conference 439 the world. That opens to the newspaperman such a vista of possibiHties that it seems indeed like a dream. But a great part of that dream has already come true in this part of the Pacific. FIELD OF SERVICE FOR THE PAN-PACIFIC PRESS CONFERENCE By LoRRiN A. Thurston, Proprietor, Honolulu Advertiser. "'Oo's the bloke?" " 'Ee's a stranger." " 'Eave a 'arf a brick at 'im !" (From a supposititious conversation between two English la- borers concerning a passerby.) The foregoing is illustrative of a trait in human nature — an innate feeling that every stranger is an enemy. It is doubtless an inheritance from the days of the "cave era," when man was a "beast of prey," taking what he could and hold- ing what he took — when he was strong enough to do so. It is a survival from the days of uncurbed individualism, when "might was right" — when every man's hand was against every other man. In these twentieth century days, mankind has progressed to the extent, at least, that all other men are not necessarily enemies ; that some may even be, prima facie, friends — those, for example, of the same family, clan, and, more latterly, of the same nation — although it is historically but of yesterday that the Scot and Briton looked askance at one another, and even the "hielander" and the "lowlander" of "bonny Scotland" were each the legiti- mate prey of the other ; and the warm sentiment with which, on general principles, a south-of-Irelander still regards the En- glish needs no elaborate proof. The millenium is not in sight. It is not even within hearing distance over the horizon, nor within signaling distance by wire- less! It is, however, conceivable that the friendliness which has 440 The Press Congress of the World in course of time expanded from family to clan, from clan to na- tion, to some extent, to nations of kindred blood or principles, can be extended to nations not of the same race origin, or who have been nurtured to revere different ideals ! It is an axiom that "like produces like." That acquaintance begets friendliness. "Pan-Pacificism" as evidenced in and through the "Pan- Pacific Union" is the visible manifestation of a spirit — ^a senti- ment; and that spirit — that sentiment is, that friendliness begets friendliness — friendliness evolves cooperation, and cooperation results in progress. The great distances between the shores of the Pacific, and, until recently, the scarcity of speedy steamers and the complete absence of cables and wireless, prevented communication be- tween the countries bordering thereon ; knowledge of what was transpiring across the ocean and intimate acquaintance between citizens of the Occident and the Orient, almost as completely as though the respective countries had been located in separate worlds. No better evidence is required of the recent remoteness of Hawaii from the other Pacific countries, and they from each other, than the fact that the news of the election of President McKinley came to Honolulu by a steamer sailing from Yoko- hama, Japan, and the news that President Cleveland intended to restore the Hawaiian monarchy reached Hawaii by a steamer sailing from Victoria, Canada, and the news of the recognition of the provisional government of Hawaii by the United States reached Hawaii by a steamer sailing from Auckland, New Zea- land. During the past two decades communication, both steam and electric, across the Pacific has rapidly developed; but, until a chance visitor — one Alexander Hume Ford — breezed into Hono- lulu, well within that period, but little advance had been made in the bringing together of the peoples of the Pacific. Whether Ford evolved the spirit of "Pan-Pacificism" — the spirit of friendliness — of co-operation — of progress, out of his own inner consciousness, or whether he crystalized it out of the balmy breezes and friendly atmosphere of Hawaii, has not been revealed; but as a matter of historical fact, the gentleman was Pan-Pacific Press Conference 441 soon in full cry upon a scent which led to a shrine dedicated to friendliness entitled "The Hands Around the Pacific Club." After spending some months in Honolulu proclaiming the virtues of this organization to a somewhat skeptical community, remindful of the voice of the prophet crying in the wilderness, Ford, not a bit discouraged or abashed, departed on a swing around the grand circuit of the Pacific, taking in New Zealand, Australia, the Philippines, China and Japan. The only credentials which he carried were his own optimistic, almost beatific enthusiasm and a letter from the governor of Hawaii couched in somewhat general terms, to the effect that the writer thought that Ford was "all right." In the course of a year or so Ford returned to Honolulu — not with a string of scalps at his belt, but with a sheaf of en- dorsements of the "Hands Around the Pacific" ideal, by high officials and public organizations of the several countries named, where branches of the new organization had been established by him. A natural inquiry was : "What is there in this for Ford ?" Honolulu has long ago arrived at the conclusion that there is nothing in it for Ford — nothing except the "joy of service" and the exhilaration incident to accomplishment. This brilliant beginning of a movement which has finally evolved into the Pan-Pacific Union, was due to Ford's intense enthusiasm, patent sincerity and unflagging energy ; but even these qualities, combined as they were, with his magnetic and almost uncanny faculty of setting other people to work, would not have succeeded in galvanizing the traditional lethargy of the East into action, if it had not been that the time was ripe for just such a movement. That the time was ripe, is evidenced by the rapidity with which the spirit of "Pan-Pacificism" has taken hold and "friendly co- operation" become the slogan of all the Pacific countries which have come within the sphere of the spirit. There seems to have come into the Pacific world — spontaneous- ly — like unto a new creation — the feeling that the old policies of aloofness — of isolation — of "every man for himself and the devil take the hindermost," are obsolete. The feeling that friendliness and co-operation were to lead the Pacific nations out of the wilderness of suspicion and doubt, 442 The Press Congress of the World seems to have been just beneath the surface, awaiting the magic touch which should crystaHze this latent sentiment into realization and action — and this touch was supplied by Ford. So much for the animating cause and the avenue through which "Pan-Pacificism" has arrived at its present position of beneficent activity. It is easy to formulate generalities and express appreciation of good intentions ; but "the proof of the pudding is in the eating of it," and one fact is worth a hundred theories. I wish to place on record a concrete instance of accomplish- ment directly due to the Pan-Pacific Union, which would not have occurred but for the existence of that organization, which ap- pears to me to justify all of the time, effort and expense which has been expended upon its organization and maintenance. In October, 1920, a most disturbing condition of affairs exist- ed in Hawaii, with possibilities of developing in such manner as to intensify already existing race suspicion, leading even to possible international friction. Following the war spirit engendered on the mainland against the German newspapers and schools and the propaganda carried on through them, the sentiment had become prevalent in Hawaii that the local so-called "Language Schools"— chiefly Japanese — should be abolished or radically controlled. An attempt to accomplish this through the local Legislature of 1918, excited so much opposition on the part of those who would be affected thereby, that the proposed legislation failed. Instead of settling the question this failure to secure action aggravated the situation and the avowed determination was ex- pressed throughout the Territory that Language Schools should and must be abolished. The Attorney General and the Chamber of Commerce of Honolulu, the leading civic organization of the Territory, caused drafts of bills for this purpose to be drawn and published. There was no sign of abatement of opposition to the pro- posed measures and there seemed no prospect for settlement of the issue except upon a basis which would leave a permanent feeling of resentment in a large part of the community against the ruling element thereof, based upon the beliefs that the former had been unjustly and unfairly dealt with. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 443 A special term of the Legislature was already in session and the anti-Language School bills under consideration. At this stage of events a "Pan-Pacific Banquet" was held at the International Y. M. C. A. building in Honolulu. Upon this particular occasion the threatening aspect of the Language School question rippled the placid surface of the inter- national pool somewhat more than usual, and out of the discus- sion there was evolved a plan between certain of the Japanese and some of the Americans present, by which it was hoped that a friendly settlement of the issue might be promoted. The initiative was taken by the Japanese and the ground work of a regulatory legislative act suggested. This was presented the next day to a meeting of the Ameri- can Chamber of Commerce which had been especially convened to consider the bills which had been drafted by its own com- mittee. The chamber debated its own bill and the proposition sub- mitted by the Japanese for several hours and adjourned without action. Four days later it met again and received in confirmation of the original proffer a written draft of a bill to carry the original proposition into efifect, accompanied by a letter signed by a com- mittee of 24 Japanese residents of Honolulu, representing the business, financial, professional, and religious leadership of the community of that nationality, and the editors of three of the daily Japanese newspapers published in Honolulu, asserting that they were responsible for the proposed act and would support its enactment and execution. As a result of this action, the Chamber of Commerce by a vote of 5 to 1 endorsed the measure presented by the Japanese in place of that presented by its own committee, and recommended its enactment by the Legislature. The bill was forthwith introduced into the Legislature. A public hearing was given thereon by the committee to whom it was referred at which the community was invited to express its views. This was freely done for an entire forenoon. The ultimate result was that the senate passed the bill which had been offered by the Japanese, by a unanimous vote and the house of representatives by a vote of approximately 5 to 1 and the measure was signed by the Governor. 444 The Press Congress of the World The law contains many details — prescribed the time and hours of sessions; subjected the curriculum to the control of the local board of education; required the schools and teachers to be li- censed, the latter to be subject to the ability of the teachers to pass an examination in speaking and writing the English lan- guage and in knowledge of the American Constitution and his- tory and of the ideals of democracy. The same Japanese committee which had originally proposed the legislation then took up with the territorial board of education the question of securing special instruction, at the expense of the language school teachers, in the subjects upon which they were required to pass an examination. The board of education co-operated with great energy and friendliness, such instruction beginning early in this year 1921. On July 1st last the required examinations were taken by ap- proximately 300 Japanese language school teachers, besides those of other nationality and a large majority of them passed and were duly licensed. The language school teachers affected by this law have ex- pressed themselves, practically unanimously, as being highly ap- preciative of the fair and friendly treatment accorded them by the educational authorities of the territory and the American community has been more than pleased at the prompt acquies- cence and manifest sincerity of the language school authorities involved. It is even reported that some of the teachers, through the medium of their studies, have been converted from imperial- ism into enthusiastic advocates of a democratic form of govern- ment. Through the medium of the Pan-Pacific Union's method of discussion across the table and "getting together" in friendly co- operation, a question which a year ago seriously threatened the peace of mind of this community with the possibility even of its affecting international relations has been amicably and satisfac- torily settled. While all of the issues now pending between Pacific countries cannot be settled as easily or as promptly as was the language school question in Hawaii, the principles involved in the settle- ment of this question are equally applicable to the larger and more serious issues now pending or which may hereafter arise. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 445 The spirit of "Pan-Pacificism" — that is, the spirit of settHng differences by friendly face to face consultation and mutual co- operation, will not immediately bring the millennium, but it offers a better and more hopeful method of settling international differ- ences and preventing war than any other method yet proposed. "Friendly consultation and mutual cooperation" is a slogan worthy of the earnest and enthusiastic support of this organiza- tion. I trust, hope and believe that the Pan-Pacific Press organiza- tion this day formed will be an added and potent influence in advancing the beneficent objects of the Pan-Pacific Union. OPEN DIPLOMACY, THE HOPE OF THE PACIFIC PRESS By HOLLINGTON K. TONG, Peking editor of the Review of the Par East, Director of the North China Star of Tientsin, representative of the Peking and Tientsin newspapers and of the Commercial Press. of Shanghai and the North China Daily Mail of Tientsin. In three weeks' time a conference of international significance called by President Warren G. Harding will be held at Washing- ton, D. C, to consider the Pacific questions and the advisability of the reduction of armaments of the leading nations. More than one hundred Chinese delegates and experts are now on their way to the Capital of the United States, and Japan is sending twice that number of officials to attend the conference. Other participating nations are taking a similar great interest in the Washington meeting. The importance of the forthcoming event in America is self-evident. If this important Washington con- ference is to be successful, the principle of open diplomacy must be religiously observed by those who are to participate therein. The press on the other side of the Pacific Ocean has repeat- edly expressed its hope that at the coming Washington meeting parlor discussions would not be resorted to, that all of its pro- ceedings would be thrown open to the public as far as advisable 446 The Press Congress of the World and that whatever secret understandings that might be pre- viously entered into would not be recognized as having bind- ing force. It has uttered a warning against the repetition of the secret diplomacy which has usually characterized the decisions of vital questions at international conferences in the past. With- out exception, all the newspapers in China are unanimous in voicing their wish for the adoption of open diplomacy as the car- dinal principle of the Washington conference, and looking for- ward to that conference openly to lay down righteous and just lines along which all international afifairs that may arise on the Pacific should be regulated. A section of the press in Japan which is liberal in its opinion on international relationship is sharing the foregoing views, know- ing that the present Pacific situation is far from being satisfactory and that a little intrigue here and there may start a worldwide conflict anew. Undoubtedly the press on this side of the ocean may also urge open proceedings at the Washington conference and ask that the peoples of the interested nations should be taken into the confidence of negotiators in view of the fact that it is they who will have to make good whatever promises that their states- men may make. But as yet it has not taken a definite stand on the issue. If the Pan-Pacific Press Conference can rouse the press in America and other countries which are sending dele- gates to the Washington meeting to take a renewed interest in the matter of open diplomacy during the next three weeks, it will render a useful service to humanity. As a press representative from China, I propose that the Pan- Pacific Press Conference pass a resolution advocating statesmen of various nations who are to sit at the meeting reflect twice be- fore they would follow in the footsteps of those who have in the past endeavored to arrive at secret understandings. It should be sent broadcast to the Pacific press and especially to the news- papers in America which can exert more influence than their con- temporaries in the Far East in this connection, inasmuch as, first of all, the meeting place of the conference is to be in their capital, and secondly, they are always looked up to by the Ameri- cans as leaders of public opinion. Copies of the resolution should be specially sent to President Harding, American officials and officials of the other nations by the Pan-Pacific Press Confer- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 447 ence in order to inform them in advance of the collective wish of the Pacific press. Unless this is done, it will be hard for those newspapers who would like to see intrigues replaced by open proceedings to realize their hope. A statement concisely worded may be prepared by the Pan- Pacific Press Conference to support and amplify and explain the resolution mentioned. A request for the publication of the statement as well as of the resolution should be sent to all the newspapers in America, Canada, Japan, China and other coun- tries in order to enlist the support of the press world in general. If sufficient public pressure can be brought to bear upon those statesmen who have made secret diplomacy a profession and considered it as an expediency, the hope of the Pacific press may yet be realized, the Washington conference may go down in history as the first international conference none of the decisions of which has been secretly reached beforehand, and the out- standing questions between the Pacific nations may be solved to the satisfaction of their peoples, which ultimately will lead to a better international understanding. Not only should the proceedings of the Washington confer- ence be guided by full publicity, but also daily international inter- course should be so regulated. If the nations can be frank in their relationships with their neighbors, the chance of war might be much minimized. It is the countries which did not show their cards on the table while engaged in negotiations which were ac- countable for the large proportion of the past warfare. History is full of instances to illustrate this point. On the other hand, if the diplomats concerned are open-minded and abhor diplo- matic practices, a serious situation may be averted and substi- tuted by a better relationship. Secret diplomacy is often disadvantageous to the country or countries which resort to it. They cannot continue practicing it without being found out. Once discovered they lose the re- spect of civilized mankind. Even if they are truthful once in a while in what they say or promise, the nations with which they have dealings would suspect them and would refrain from plac- ing faith in them. This is bad enough for them, but the worst has yet to come. Because of their secret diplomatic dealings, they usually keep back the news concerned as long as possible. 448 The Press Congress of the World The newspapers which by chance should get a tip therein often magnify the seriousness of the situation and call upon imagina- tion for assistance in writing up the story when they fail to get from the officials the true facts. Corrections are usually belated, and the reading public as a rule places more confidence in the first story than in the subsequent corrections. An ambitious govern- ment may be aggressive in nine out of ten cases, but when it has really rendered some disinterested service to mankind in the tenth case, no one will believe its altruism. Its credit has been lost, and none would have confidence therein. Injuries, direct or indirect, from the loss of credit by a nation, must be tre- mendous. Is it worth while to reap such a disastrous fruit from the continued practice of secret diplomacy? The reply of an in- fluential section of the press on the Pacific is in the negative. Today open diplomacy is more needed than ever before. The future ahead of us is rather gloomy indeed. A new international clash that shall drown the world in a lake of blood beside which the late blood-letting in Europe will appear but as a small stream is freely predicted and tremblingly feared. Some have forecasted that the time for the conflict between the East and West is also fast approaching. Small incidents which have happened in the past are magnified by the yellow press of the world out of all proportion either to their cause or to their significance. Even the thinking peoples in all countries become nervous, and are afraid of the day when another world-war may be waged. At such a time, the use of a little secret diplomacy may cause the explosion and bring woe to peaceful inhabitants of God's earth. No organization, in my opinion, is more fitted than the Pan- Pacific Press Conference to endeavor to make open diplomacy an accepted creed of international statecraft and to decide at its first session upon the attainment of this object as one of its aims. With the support of President Harding, one of its honorary presidents, who cannot but be sympathetic with our motive, I fully believe that this Press Conference may be able to accom- plish something in that direction. The rulers of other countries may be requested to lend their support to the carrying out of the program. I feel certain that the President of the Republic of China will be glad to do all he can in this worthy matter. I sincerely hope that before the adjourning of the first ses- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 449 sion of the Pan-Pacific Conference a resolution will be passed ad- vocating the publication of all the proceedings of the Washing- ton conference as wished by the Pacific press, and that steps would be taken by the officers of the Pan-Pacific Union to give to the resolution wide publicity and to try to put that great principle into effect as early as possible. The Washington con- ference to be held on November 11th should give us an impetus to work for this object which I believe must be cherished by all the newspapermen who desire peace on earth and good will towards mankind. JAPANESE PRESS IN HAWAII By Y. SoGA, Editor, Nippu Jiji. The Japanese press in Hawaii plays an important part in the manifold activities of Hawaii due to the fact that it repre- sents a large number of Japanese residents who constitute a majority of the population of these islands. The influence of the Japanese press, whether in the good direction or in the bad direc- tion, vitally affects Hawaii's interests, and upon its attitude de- pend interracial harmony and concord in this integral part of the United States. The Japanese press in Hawaii is not a small question, and in treating the question, I shall be brief, confining myself to a statement of principal facts, divided into past, present and future. The first Japanese newspaper made its appearance twenty- nine years ago, in 1892, when Nippon Shuho or Japanese Weekly printed its first sheet by a mimeograph machine. This publica- tion after sending out a number of editions changed its title to Hawaii Shuho or Hawaii Weekly, with B. Onome, superintend- ent of immigration board of Hawaii, as editor. In 1893 another weekly newspaper came into existence, with the title of Hawaii Shinbun. It was edited by Dr. J. Uchida who published about 65 editions. A little later another publication came into existence. It was called Jukuseiki or Nineteenth Cen- tury. 20 450 The Press Congress of the World The appearance of the Jukuseiki was followed by the estab- lishment of the Hawaii Shimpo in 1894, and Yamato Shinbun, the forerunner of the Nippu Jiji, in 1895. Shin Nippon or New Japan, another publication, appeared about the same time or short- ly afterwards. The Yamato Shinbun was first edited by H. Mizuno. About the time the Yamato Shinbun and Hawaii Shimpo came into being, the mimeograph machines were discarded and their places were taken by types imported from Japan. At the same time the newspapers changed their editions from weekly to daily, gaining substantial increase in circulation. This was the beginning of the Japanese press in Hawaii. At the present time there are in the whole territory about twelve dailies and weeklies and several monthly periodicals. The city of Honolulu has four Japanese dailies which are the Hawaii Shimpo, Hawaii Hochi, Hawaii Nippo and the Nippu Jiji. Hilo city has two daily and one weekly publications, while west Ha- waii has one weekly ; Koloa, island of Kauai, one weekly ; and Lihue, Kauai, also one weekly. The island of Maui has two newspapers, one being semiweekly and the other a weekly publi- cation. Besides these newspapers there is the Jitsugyo-no-Hawaii, known in the English-speaking community as the Commercial and Industrial Magazine of Hawaii. This periodical is ten years old. Another periodical is the Japanese-American Review which will soon come into existence with objects to promote better un- derstanding between races in these islands. The Japanese newspapers in Hawaii, like all newspapers, are striving for supremacy. In the gathering and dissemination of local news, in the printing of world news, they are engaged in keen competition. The development of the Japanese press in Hono- lulu has been so rapid in recent years that some of the largest Japanese newspapers published outside of the Empire of Japan are found not on the continental United States or in Korea or any other country where Japanese reside, but right here in Hawaii. The policies of the Japanese newspapers in Hawaii, while differing from one another in minor points, agree in their es- sentials. As a part of their policy the Japanese newspapers pro- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 451 pound to Japanese residents in the territory what the Japanese call "Eiju Dochaku" or permanent residence in Hawaii. This policy is pursued by the Japanese press not with any sinister motive to secure control on these islands or to obtain domination over other races, but with the idea of inducing the Japanese of becoming a part of the land of their residence. The Japanese press believes that the longer the Japanese live in Hawaii, the more interested they will become in Hawaii's affairs and things American, and the more they come to know about America the better it is for the Americanization of themselves and their children. The life of the Japanese press in Hawaii will not be long. The steady increase in the English-speaking Japanese educated in America and the decrease of the older Japanese generation speaking the Japanese language will make the publication of Japanese newspapers an unpaying proposition within twenty-five years or so. In this comiection it might be interesting to mention that the Japanese press in Hawaii is advocating the use of Romanized Japanese which makes it possible for Japanese writers to convey their sentiment in Japanese phraseologies reduced to Roman letters. In order that there may be a better understanding between Americans and Japanese in Hawaii, one of the Japanese news- papers in Honolulu, The Nippu Jiji, publishes its editorials and news articles in Japanese as well as in English, giving the En- glish-speaking community a comprehensive view of what takes place in the Japanese community every day. The Hawaii Shimpo, another Honolulu daily, has also recently started to pub- lish its leading editorials once a week, in the English language^ which is very commendable. The English section of the Nippu Jiji is largely devoted to promoting understanding between Japanese and American com- munities, and also to the promotion of interest of Japanese chil- dren growing up into American citizens. In the beginning this section was not so popular as it was expected, the criticism be- ing that it was too much for the Nippu Jiji, which is an eight-page newspaper, to devote a page for English news items. However, this criticism has now entirely disappeared, parents of Japanese 452 The Press Congress of the World children finding it a valuable source of information for their children who prefer to read and speak English rather than Japanese. The Nippu Jiji has grown from a small printing plant having a circulation of a few hundred copies to a large printing establish- ment holding the leading place among the Japanese press in Ha- waii. It holds membership in the Associated Press through whose services its readers are given reports of up-to-date world events. Its cable despatches from Tokyo are noted for accuracy and promptitude. The Japanese press of Hawaii has been, and is still to some extent, very unpopular among certain elements in the American community. The unpopularity was at its height a year or two ago when an unfortunate event unavoidably took place in Hawaii. The popular belief among the white people seems to be that the Japanese press allows anything to appear in its columns be- cause no one, except the Japanese, knows what is being said. This is untrue. Responsible newspapers control their utter- ances, though at times, they become irrelevant in an unguarded moment. They are perfectly aware of the fact that what is being said in Japanese is rapidly communicated to the American community. The Nippu Jiji, for one, prints in the Japanese as well as in the English language what actually takes place in the Japanese community, withholding or camouflaging nothing. This honesty is sometimes criticized by its Japanese contemporaries, but the Nippu Jiji could not justify itself if it concealed or sup- pressed facts just because they are unpleasant. In spite of all that may be said against the Japanese press, it must be conceded that it is a valuable factor in the Americani- zation work of the alien Japanese population of the islands which is dominating any other single race as far as number is concerned. The majority of the Japanese in Hawaii do not speak or read the English language. They must rely upon the Japanese press for the day's information relating to practically everything, from the enactment of new laws down to the social customs, if they are to conform, as best as they can, to the requirements of the country of their residence. The Japanese press is necessary until such time as the alien Japanese population shall have at- tained such a degree of Americanization that its assistance is no longer needed. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 453 In support of the statement that the Japanese press is a vahiable factor in the upHft of Hawaii, let me cite some of the many instances of patriotic work it has performed. When the European war started it was the Japanese press through the Japanese language that successfully urged the Japanese residents to enlist in the United States army, to buy Liberty Bonds and War Savings Stamps. It enlisted the support of the Japanese in American Red Cross work and other patriotic services, and what they have done, in my opinion, cannot be successfully con- tradicted by any one. We have in Hawaii a press law enacted by the 1921 territorial legislature for the primary purpose of controlling the utterances of the foreign language press. While this law has been enacted particularly for the control of Japanese newspapers in Hawaii, Ave hope it will never find application to any of the newspapers in the territory. The future of America as a nation depends in an important degree upon the measure of success Americans achieve in uniting all the racial strains into a single racial element — the American — with a single American aim with a single American ideal. And Hawaii cannot afford to alienate the Japanese press by setting up against them a barrier of prejudice and undeserved suspicion when they can be used to mix the Japanese racial strain into American race. A MESSAGE FROM THE CHINESE PRESS By Jabin Hsu, Representative of the Newspaper Association of Shanghai and the Chinese Press, Shanghai. The press of the Pacific countries has come to play an im- portant role in the regeneration of the intellectual life of China. Contact with other nations shatters the crust of China's provincial journalism and induces mutation and progress in the journalistic activities. As it has been in Japanese newspaperdom, so it is in China. Contact with the West, especially America, has brought in new ideas, new forces and new influences, which are helping 454 The Press Congress of the World to guide the public opinion of China's vast populace. In the journalistic development, China is in a transition from the old to the new, from the conservative to the progressive, like her other phases of national life. During this period of transition, we are looking to our neigh- bors on the Pacific for sympathetic guidance and support and to a certain extent we have succeeded. We are copying all the methods of news gathering, editing and advertising, which our big brothers have wisely adopted through trying experiences. On account of her youth as a factor in the intellectual life of a na- tion, China has for some considerable extent allowed herself to be led by the opinions of the Pacific newspapers and news agen- cies. During the world war, newspapermen in China devoured everything that the foreign press chose to feed the Orient but the news reports concerning the international relationship of China as conveyed by the foreign agencies had their own purposes to serve. In their contact with the Pacific press, the Chinese press- men placed unreserved confidence in the columns of the news- papers circulated in the countries bordering the great ocean and the daily dispatches furnished by news agencies of these coun- tries. When peace was proclaimed, newspapers in China unanimous- ly predicted disarmament and the elimination of secret diplomacy, because the press of the Pacific had repeatedly declared that the late war was fought in the interest of justice and humanity. The Chinese press at that time merely reproduced the promises made by the statesmen of the day through the Pacific press and other machines of publicity. Three long years have elapsed and Chinese today discover that they have been misled, intentionally or un- intentionally, we are not here to discuss. Chinese journalists have now realized that press dispatches from their foreign col- leagues were distributed with ulterior motives and that the truth of the conditions of the nations of the world was not honestly told in the Far East. Some believed that the foreign press or- ganizations are merely weapons in the hands of their respective diplomats. Inconsistency, of course, is the greatest impeachment with which the press of China today charges the press of the Pacific, for did not the statesmen of Europe and America declare through Pan-Pacific Press Conjjrence 455 their own press that the war was to end all future conflicts and that upon its successful prosecution, each and every person would be given a decent chance to enjoy life, property and the pursuit of happiness. If the Pacific press expects to enjoy the confidence of us all, the Chinese journalists say, it should be at least con- sistent: it should review the utterance and declaration of the figures of world importance as it publishes new facts about them. If the press of the Pacific is to lead the opinion of the Orient, it must necessarily exercise such vigilance and supervision as are required from time to time to check the inconsistent words and acts of the world politicians. Under such circumstances and only under such circumstances can the world be free from propa- ganda, so expressively termed the "hookworm of journalism." The comment of the Chinese press on the Pacific press, though somewhat too severe, is but the outcome of the disease seeds sowed by the foreign journalists themselves and they have only themselves to thank for. But in order to secure the confidence and hence sympathic support of the Oriental newspaperdom, the foreign press should tell "the truth, the whole truth and nothing but the truth." A press devoid of propaganda and colored news, or "handouts" and aimed for the welfare of the Pacific as well as the world is the call of the Orient. The faithful performance of its duties by the Pacific press during the world crisis as is existing today will accomplish much to disperse the war clouds which even today hang darkly over our horizon. Such being the case, the reason why the Pacific press should be clean, consistent and truthful more than any other section of the world press is more than apparent. With the results of the Versailles Conference still vividly lin- gering in our minds, the nations of the earth are about to under- go another experiment to solve the Pacific problems without re- sorting to arms. The time is opportune for the journalists of the Pacific to see to it that the tragedy of the Versailles conference is not reproduced. It is well within the power of the Pacific press to avert the coming strike. Secret diplomacy, intrigue and entangling alliance have but one remedy, the bitter pill of wide publicity. The statesmen who are going to participate in this coming conference, like those at the Versailles Conference, have announced to the world through the press their intention of re- 456 The Press Congress of the World lieving mankind of that terrible burden of deprivation for the increase of armament and of giving all the nations, whether strong or weak, a square deal at the conference table. The same pledge, it will be remembered, was made by the participants of the Versailles Conference before its sessions. I trust that the newspapermen of the Pacific will effectively exercise their su- preme function of making the statesmen make good their prom- ises and prevent that great catastrophe which must follow if a revivification of the Versailles Conference takes place. JOURNALISM IN KOREA By I. Yam AG AT A, Edit or, Seoul Press. I am a Japanese and have come from Seoul in Korea where I am the proprietor and editor of a little daily paper called the Seoul Press. Although my paper is a humble publication of only four pages, yet Dr. Williams, the President of the World Press Congress, when he visited Korea several years ago took notice of it and afterwards in a pamphlet he prepared on the press of the world, included it among the hundred representative papers of the world. I am not so self -conceited as to think that Dr. Williams gave my paper this distinction and honor because it was a good standard journal. On the contrary mine is very poor stuff, containing not much cablegrams and highly paid special articles and giving only local news written in the poorest Eng- lish. Nevertheless it is the only daily paper published in English in the whole of the Korean peninsula and besides at the time Dr. Williams visited Seoul it was the highest priced paper in the world, the monthly subscription being one dollar and a quarter gold. These two, I think, are the reasons which induced or compelled Dr. Williams to mention the name of my paper in the list of a hundred great papers of the world. Our distinguished president was simply forced to give my paper, the Seoul Press, this great honor for there was no other competitor in the field for the laurel. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 457 By the way, a few years ago I was obliged to abandon the distinction of publishing the highest priced paper in the world. I was constantly assailed by my readers with complaints against the high price of my paper and with demands for a reduction of it. I lowered the price to only a half a dollar a month a few years ago and though this trebled the circulation of the Seoul Press I am not getting so much profit as I did before. This makes me think that we journalists should combine ourselves to maintain a reasonably high price for our papers. Newspapers are now a thing of necessity, as indispensable as our daily food. They are a necessity, or it may be a necessary evil. People simply cannot do without them. Why should not we ask from them for more pay for our work and labor. As I have said, I have come from Korea, a country which is still little known by the people of the rest of the world. If any of you, ladies and gentlemen, would like to know about the real condition of Korea I should only be too glad to supply you with correct information as best as I can. As this is a congress of journalists, permit me, however, to tell you something about jour- nalism in Korea. It is charged that the Japanese government re- stricts the freedom of the press. This charge is true to a certain extent. No cities except such big cities as Seoul and Fusan were permitted to have more than one newspaper. In other words, one paper for one city was the rule. This policy was enforced by the government partly for political reasons and partly in con- sideration of the interest of the people at large. For some time after the annexation of Korea by Japan was carried out, there prevailed much political unrest, which induced the authorities to think it prudent and expedient to control the press. At the same time the authorities thought it beneficial to the people at large, not to permit the publication of too many newspapers, because when there are many newspapers published in a small place it is always the public that suffer much in consequence of the compe- tition and struggles for existence between them. Keen canvas- sing for soliciting advertisements and subscriptions must be kept up so that they may live on and the result is that the general public are victimized. As a matter of fact, before annexation Seoul had four or five Japanese and four Korean daily papers, all of which were but 458 The Press Congress of the World poorly supported and had to live, so to speak, from hand to mouth. The result was that not a few instances occurred in which the public were made to lose. In view of this evil the government put restriction on the number of newspapers making one newspaper for one city a general rule. This policy, as you will see, was taken with the best of intentions, but I do not think it was a wise one. The government should have left the matter alone, leaving the public to manage it by itself. The gov- ernment was too paternal and this was resented by the public. The government has since seen its error in this respect. Two years ago when the Government-General of Korea was reformed and reorganized, one of the first things the new au- thorities did was to permit the publication of three Korean and two Japanese newspapers in Seoul. One of the Korean news- papers is here represented by my friend Mr. Kim. His paper is Dong-A Daily, or Eastern Asia Daily News. It is the best paper with the largest circulation in Korea, being edited by some of Korea's best educated young men. It is a great educational power and influential moulder of Korean public opinion, and though its utterances occasionally displease the Japanese authorities, as out- spoken and radical opinions of young men do older men, it is a great help to the government because through its columns the the authorities can sound and learn the desires and ideas of the Korean people, so that they may frame such a policy of admin- istration as will please them and promote their general interest. Journalism in Korea is still in its young days of development. There are published in Seoul, capital of the peninsula, three Korean, three Japanese and one English dailies, besides a num- ber of monthly magazines, Japanese and Korean. In the prov- inces about a dozen daily papers are published. Most of those metropolitan and provincial papers are rather poor stuff and their financial conditions are anything but good. The Korean masses are still too ignorant and too poor to be able to support any big papers, in running which much capital is needed. Be- sides, Korea being an agricultural country and her commerce and manufacturing industries being still undeveloped, the papers in that country can not as yet collect many advertisements and can not obtain any big income from that source. Both subscription and advertising rates are low and editors are very poorly paid. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 459 As I said, the Dong- A Daily is the Korean paper enjoying the larg- est circulation, issuing, as I understand, some forty thousand copies a day. Even this paper, however, cannot be said to be financially very well off. As I understand, it is run with little or no profit. Nevertheless, the Korean papers have a great future. Education is rapidly spreading among Korea's rising generation and along with the economic advance the people are steadily making today, there is no doubt that the number of people read- ing newspapers will increase and correspondingly the position of the press and of those engaged in it will be improved. I thank you all for listening to my poor paper. THE NEWSPAPER IN KOREA By D. S. Kim, The Dong-A Daily, Seoul, Korea. (Read by Guy Innes.) The average English reader knows little of the Korean news- paper in the making. It is a happy occasion to inform this great gathering briefly how the modern Korean paper is turned out. Koreans use the Chinese characters as well as the alphabet or the phonetic syllabary, which is composed of eleven vowels and fourteen consonants which is considered the simplest written lan- guage in the world. Anybody can learn to read and write within a week. For this reason there is no illiteracy in Korea, but a Korean journalist must be a scholar in Chinese classics which form the basis of all written language in the Orient. The Eng- lish papers have passed the stage when the reading public en- joyed a long editorial, but in Korea it is still in demand. History tells us that the Koreans invented the iron movable types long before Gutenberg; those old types are still kept at the royal museum today. The Korean alphabet has been already adapted to the linotype with which the Koreans in America are publishing their papers, but on account of the Chinese characters it is not practicable in Korea. Now, take the Dong-A Daily, the leading newspaper in 460 The Press Congress of the World Korea, it has four pages with sixteen members on the editorial staff which is too crowded for an English paper of the same size. One might criticise for the waste of labor, but actually the writ- ing is all done by hand, and it must be carried out by a bigger force than an English paper. The manuscript papers are ruled so as to write one word in each square space by which means the man in the composing room may know how many words to the line or the whole article at a glance. The Korean language is like the Chinese, read up and down and from right to left, so the first page is really the last of a four-page paper. It is a decided rule, that each page has its separate departments : The first page is editorial, by all means the most important; the second, telegrams, politics and com- mercial news ; the third, the social or city news, the written pic- ture of Korean life ; and the fourth page has fiction and cor- respondence from all corners of the nation. Advertisements go at the foot of the first and last pages. The third page is written entirely by the Korean alphabet, that attracts more readers than the other conservative pages. The Dong-A Daily has a rotary press that turns out twenty thousand copies per hour, and the press rolls almost three hours daily to turn out fifty thousand copies that reach every corner and nook of the country. The local news is gathered by reporters who have been as- signed to certain places and also by news agencies, but the for- eign news is supplied by the Reuter and Kokusai, that tell very little about the news of the different races bordering the Pacific. The Koreans want to know more about the news concerning the Pacific. In view of this fact the Dong-A Daily has been rendering all possible assistance and publicity to the Pan-Pacific Union, so today the name of Mr. Alexander Hume Ford, our esteemed chairman of the conference, is as well known to the Koreans as to the Hawaiians, and the full report of the first educational conference proceedings has been published and now the Dong-A Daily is represented at the first Pan-Pacific Press Conference, at the threshold of a new era, may we hope that we know each other better than ever before by the efforts of this conference. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 461 THE NEED IN LATIN-AMERICAN COUNTRIES By ViRGiLio Rodriguez Beteta, Representing the Press Association of South America Being one of the fundamental purposes of the Press Congress to estabhsh and maintain closer relations between the publishers of newspapers and magazines in every country, nothing could be better than the formation of subdivisions of this Congress, in such a way that this may be the big organization which will pre- side over all subdivisions and these will serve with greater con- centration on sectional problems, and particular attention to re- lations between peoples of one section of the globe. The or- ganization of a Pan-Pacific Press Conference to be a part of the Press Congress of the World is, in consequence, not only a logical step in the development of the functions of the Press Congress of the World, but a step of more than ordinary significance at this time when the eyes of the world are turned expectantly on the development of this section of the globe. The papers presented on the occasion of the inauguration of this Pan-Pacific Press Conference will show how practical can be the promotion of understanding between the Pan-Pacific coun- tries to secure better means of communication between them and, above all, to advance the cause of world peace. I will refer now only to what this section of the Press Con- gress can accomplish in the case of Latin America. All of the Latin American Republics have coastlines, both on the Atlantic and the Pacific, with the exception of Uruguay, Argentina, Brazil, Paraguay and Bolivia, but even these countries have considerable interest in the Pacific. In so far as the first four are concerned they are interested because of the establishment of railroad facilities between Chile and the Republic of Argentina by means of the Transandean Railway. In reference to the last named of these republics, Bolivia, which has no coast, either on the Atlantic or the Pacific, has its natural outlet, however, toward the Pacific. In spite of the many commercial interests which Latin America 462 The Press Congress of the World has on the Pacific it can be said that there are but very few rela- tions maintained between these countries and those of the Ha- waiian Islands, Japan, China, Korea, New Zealand, the Philip- pines, Australia and other countries bordering the Pacific in the Old World, countries which are known to Latin America through name only. There are in Latin American countries bordering the Pacific not less than seventy wireless stations, among them one of high power located in Chile, but no news is sent there directly from the Orient. It is relayed to California by wireless, from there it is sent to New York, thence to South America by cable from Galveston on the Gulf of Mexico, going to Vera Cruz, Mexico, crossing then the isthmus and going from there through all the Pacific countries of Central and South America. The main task of the Pan-Pacific Conference in connection with the interchange of news in Central and South American news- papers should be directed to obtaining direct means of communi- cation at the lowest possible rate. The dealings which rapid de- velopment of this Congress is maintaining is of great interest to the Orient because of the rapid growth which these young coun- tries have made in their fight for advancement against so many handicaps. The Orient would be interested in knowing how the racial problem has been solved in countries like Argentina and Uraguay, how the extension of a great population of Negroes in Brazil does not constitute a problem there, and how the problem of a large native Indian population, by means of its slow assimi- lation with the white populations, is being solved. You of the Orient will be very much interested in knowing of the magni- tude and intensity of the fight in which these countries have been engaged in their struggle to adopt the most advanced principles of representation and democracy in spite of poor preparation by the masses and a national independent life when these countries obtained their independence from Spain. Finally you will be as- tonished when you know the progress, the figures of natural trade and some other striking results achieved by some of these coun- tries. While a group of them have achieved great results and all the others are in different degrees of development, all tending to- ward the same results. The size of the Latin American territory which is at least four times that of the United States and is cap- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 463 able for a population of four hundred million people, and the stupendous number and variety of natural resources foreshadows that Latin America is destined to occupy a great position in world affairs. And now it is interesting to know how the Orient will be benefited from the position which Latin America holds. From the beginning of the development of the practical works of the Pan-Pacific Conference in Latin America I suggest the ne- cessity of starting the relations with it by means of a center of communication established at a point in America which is to be in direct contact, both with Latin America and at the same time with the Orient. There is but one way to begin, that is to say, to take advantage of an intermediate point. The situation is similar to that of two persons, who, in order to become acquainted need the services of a third person to make the introduction. Through this point you will speak to Latin America and Latin America will speak to you, it being the center of diffusion and the source of the information contained in your newspapers, magazines and pamphlets, and vice versa. Of course this point which is selected must be one which has the best and most rapid means of com- munication by cable, wireless, steamer and mail with both the Orient and Latin America. Through this center there would be developed the mutual relations between the Orient and Latin America, until the time when such communications could be put on a direct basis. That is the way for the Pan-Pacific Conference to promote a better understanding between the Pacific countries of Latin Amer- ica and the Pacific countries of the Orient, and especially of es- tablishing better understanding between the journalists by means of communication. In so far as the high purposes of advancing the cause of the peace of the Pacific, a phrase of deep sigtiificance for securing the peace of the world, this branch of the Press Congress should make the task of Latin America a very impor- tant one. There are in the most southwesterly part of America big problems which concern the international policies of all Latin America. The "War of the Pacific," so-called, is the name given by history to the war between Chile on the one side, and Peru and Bolivia on the other side during the last tliird of the eight- eenth century. This war left as a legacy a bitter dispute as to frontiers and provinces which has been impossible to settle ami- 464 The Press Congress of the IVorld cably in spite of the many efforts used, as much on the part of politicians and diplomatists of the contending nations as by the mediation of disinterested countries. Neither the Pan-American Congress, started nearly thirty years ago with the purpose of bringing together the American countries, both of Saxon and Spanish origin, for the settlement of international quarrels and disputes and adopting a common point of view in regard to in- ternational policies, or the efforts of prominent men of thought and good will in North and South America have succeeded in stopping this acute quarrel which represents the most perplexing problem confronted by the people of Latin America. Bolivia expects, naturally enough, an outlet to the sea, of which she was deprived at the time of the treaty after that war. Peru demands the return of two provinces which Chile retains in her hands. Chile argues that she has the right for doing it and the other says that the main condition of that treaty, which was to put the disputed provinces under the test of a plebiscite, was not fulfilled. The settlement of the problem involved is the main purpose of any attempt to maintain peace in the Latin American Pacific. If the Pan-Pacific Press Conference could do something that would gain the attention of the most influential journalists of both countries in order to bring about a common point of view which would result in arranging a covenant, it would be an achievement which would excel any other one accomplishment made by the many tentative Pan-American Congresses and courts of arbitra- tion. Another point to which the work of the Pan-Pacific Press Con- ference could be addressed is Central America. The separation of these five small republics, which at the time of its independence and some twenty years after, were constituted a sole nation, is a Latin American international problem which in a certain way op- poses the prestige and harmonious development of the American continent of Spanish speaking countries. Since its independence the most intelligent and patriotic public men have been engaged in fighting at first for maintaining the unity of the Republic of Central America and afterwards for the establishment of it. Since 1885, on which date Rufino Barrios fell in battle, fighting gloriously for these ideals, the attempts to secure this union by Pan-Pacific Press Conference 465 means of force were stopped, and has been changed by means of a policy of diplomacy and other peaceful means. In 1911 a league of Central American journalists was attempted for the same pur- pose. At present they are not engaged in re-uniting the govern- ments, but mainly the peoples. Big things are being performed worthy of the help and support of all honorable people. The Spanish and Latin American press has offered at different op- portunities its support, and recently most of the papers of the United States, especially the papers and magazines of New York, have become interested in this affair and have applauded that ef- fort. Should the Pan-Pacific Conference take upon its own ac- count the task of using its influence for securing a definite moral support of the press of the Pacific it would be very opportune and it would signify that they would help the five countries occupying the center of the New World, through which the oceanic com- munication was opened and which is the point at which not only the communication of the Atlantic with the Pacific was con- summated, but which represents the bridge uniting the great portions of North and South America. THE PAN-PACIFIC PRESS CONFERENCE By Dr. Frank F. Bunker, Executive Secretary, Pan-Pacific Union. The hour has come to close this session of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference and with it there terminates as well the official program of the Press Congress of the World. Very soon, all too soon to suit those of us who belong to Hawaii, you will begin retracing your steps. Very soon comfortable and commodious vessels and swift trains will have carried you back to your desks and very soon you will find yourselves in your accustomed places, engaged in your accustomed duties, meeting your accustomed associates and again living your accustomed lives. For a brief time you will have slipped out of your place in the smoothly work- ing machinery with which each of you has surrounded himself 466 The Press Congress of the World and of which each is an integral and essential part. Soon you will have slipped back into your particular niches, outwardly un- changed by your visit to Hawaii. While your avoirdupois may show some increase, neverthe- less, I have no doubt, your architectural lines will still bear suffi- cient resemblance to your former proportions to enable your friends to recognize your silhoutte. Outwardly, I say, all will be as before, but inwardly, I doubt not, there will have come a change as a result of new perceptions, an enlarged outlook, an energizing vision, for you have been seeing with the mind as well as with the eye. The citizens of Hawaii, with that hospitality for which they are justly famous (I can say this without immodesty for I have been here not much longer than yourselves) have tried to make it easy for you to see something of nature's wonders here to be found in lavish profusion; to gain some notion at first hand of Hawaii's important occupations; to learn somewhat of the customs, lore and character of the great race of Polynesians who have long inhabited these Islands, and to form some idea of the problems of labor and race here to be found. Although we hope you will have found these features of suffi- cient interest to lead you to speak and to write of them as op- portunity arises, nevertheless, if that inward change of which I speak has led you to do no more than to observe and enjoy the unparalleled beauties of sea and land and sky, here to be found, your trip will have fallen short of its possibilities, both to you and to us, for you will have missed the interrelations of things, the hidden meanings, the things which do not appear. In such event it will be as though "having eyes one sees not" and "having ears one hears not." That the countries and states bordering the Pacific and in the Pacific constitute a region having features and characteristics and problems which differentiate it from every other region has been recognized by many. Seventy years or more ago W. H. Seward, then United States Senator from New York, and later Secretary of State under Lincoln, in a notable speech in the Senate, gave expression to a remarkable prophecy concerning this region. He said : "Henceforth European commerce, European politics. Euro- Pan-Pacific P^^ess Conference A61 pean thought, and European activity, although actually gaining force; and European connections, although actually becoming more intimate, will nevertheless relatively sink in importance ; while the Pacific Ocean, its shores, its islands and the vast region beyond, will become the chief theatre of events in the world's great hereafter." The fact that on Armistice Day, November 11th next, there convenes in Washington at the call of the President of the United States representatives of the principal allied and asso- ciated powers to consider the principles and policies which shall govern in and about the Pacific, is clear proof of the fact that in the view of the President of the United States the future peace of the world now turns on the settlement of difficulties in the Pacific. If further proof of his interest in the Pacific were needed it would be found in the letter of greetings which he sent to the delegates to the Pan-Pacific Educational Conference which convened in this city in August last. Let me read his letter : "The Pan-Pacific Congress on Education soon to meet has greatly appealed to my imagination, and I want to express my hopes that it will be marked by a measure of success that will justify all the hopes that have been entertained for it. It seems only yesterday that we thought of the broad Pacific as separating two unrelated worlds, now we have come to regard it as a world by itself, the greatest of neighborhoods, the romantic meeting place of East and West, where each merges into the other and both discover that at last the supreme interests of humanity are common to all men and races. Two-thirds of the earth's popu- lation live in the lands of the Pacific, numbering the oldest and the newest of organized communities, and, characteristic of our times, their mighty ocean is come to be regarded by all of them as a bond rather than a barrier. In a large way we must feel that the future of the race, the hope of creating a true community of men and nations and civilizations, each retaining its own tra- ditions, character and independence, yet all serving the common end of human progress must greatly depend on the development of your fine ideal of a Pan-Pacific neighborhood. With better acquaintance, more intimate interdependence, riper mutual under- standings, we shall advance to the realization of such an ideal. I feel that your Educational Congress is one of the most practical 468 The Press Congress of the World means of drawing these communities thus closer together, and therefore have special reasons to wish it well." In this connection I want also to bring to your attention a statement made by Lloyd George, uttered but a few weeks ago, in discussion of the British-Japanese alliance. As quoted by the Associated Press, he said : "If the alliance with Japan could be merged into a greater understanding with Japan and the United States on all problems of the Pacific, that would be a great event, and it would be a guarantee for the peace of the world. The problems of today may be in the Atlantic. Yesterday they were in the German ocean, and they may pass tomorrow into the Pacific and when they do the powers that are most greatly concerned in the Pacific are America, Japan, China and the British Empire. These four great powers are primarily concerned with having a complete understanding with regard to the Pacific. The svirest way to make a success of any disarmament plan is, first of all, to arrive at an understanding upon the Pacific." And may I not add also the words of the late President Roose- velt, speaking to this matter of the Pacific as a region of signifi- cance : "The Mediterranean era died Avith the discovery of America ; the Atlantic era has reached the height of its development ; the Pacific era, destined to be the greatest, is just at dawn." This area which we are calling the Pacific region is so big and broad, so diversified in its peoples, its climate, its industries ; and we in turn may become so occupied with the minutiae of our particular vocations that it is easy to fail to see the larger whole and consequently to fail to do our part in bringing into harmo- nious relationship the divergent elements to be found therein. The fact, however, that the Press Congress .of the World thought it important enough to meet here in Hawaii and that you have thought it wise to organize a Pan-Pacific Press Conference to carry forward lines of work which have to do primarily with this region show unmistakably that you are not blind to the need or to the possibilities. Fourteen years ago this vision of a Pacific region knit to- gether in all of its parts and its interrelations by friendly under- standing came to Mr. Alexander Hume Ford. Like many other Pan-Pacific Press Conference 469 movements which have grown into powerful agencies for pubHc welfare, the idea first found lodgment in the mind of a single in- dividual who had the courage and singleness of purpose to de- vote his entire time and energy to its promotion. The attitude of Hawaii, itself, towards the Pan-Pacific move- ment inaugurated by Mr. Ford has been much the same as that which communities generally take toward projects of like char- acter. At first the feeling was one of indifference and of in- credulity. Then came a period characterized by an awakening interest followed by the full endorsement and the active support of local persons of the highest standing. As to the nations and countries in and about the Pacific, Mr. Ford has secured for the Union from many the endorsement of their chief administrative officers and the permission to use their names as sponsors. Among these countries are the following : The United States and Canada in North America ; New Zealand, Australia, Java, the Philippines and Japan among the Pacific islands ; and Siam and China on the continent of Asia. Furthermore, such is the recognition accorded the Pan-Pacific Union, that Mr. Ford succeeded, through the assistance of the Federal Bureau of Education and of the Pan-American Union, in having the Department of State of the United States govern- ment, through its diplomatic connections, extend to the govern- ments and self-governing colonies of the Pacific, a formal invi- tation to send delegates to the Pan-Pacific Educational Conference held last August here in Honolulu. A year ago the leading scientists of Pan-Pacific regions were convened here by the Pan-Pacific Union in a conference of great success, held under the chairmanship of Dr. Herbert E. Gregory, Director of Bernice Puahi Bishop Museum, Honolulu. Last August, as I have just stated, the Pan-Pacific Union brought together seventy-five experts in the general field of education under the chairmanship of Dr. David Starr Jordan. Copies of the proceedings have just come from the press and will be dis- tributed among you. In August or September of next year it will bring to Honolulu in similar fashion a group of the leaders of commerce and of business drawn from Pacific regions. Other conferences of like character are in prospect for succeeding years, all of which are in line with the thought with which I am sure 470 The Press Congress of the World you will agree, that amity and goodfellowship among the races and nations of this great region will be conserved and stimulated by bringing together leaders in the drfiferent fields of human ac- tivity. All of this has, let me add, been accomplished in fourteen years by the genius of one man and with the co-operation and help of a board of trustees of very able and public-spirited per- sons who have had faith in Mr. Ford and in the practicability and value of his idea. The educational conference recently held here, with unanim- ity and much enthusiasm, recommended that the Pan-Pacific Union take up and carry forward important investigations which it proposed and lines of activity which it believes will minister to a better understanding among the Pacific nations. The Pan- Pacific Union gladly acceded to its request, and is expanding its machinery to serve as indicated. This morning, as the heritage of the Press Congress of the World, you have organized a permanent Pan-Pacific Press Con- ference to undertake to bring the peoples of the Pacific into closer and better relationships through making the way for the transmission and interchange of information easier. While main- taining its contact with the Press Congress of the World you have arranged to place it under the fostering care of the Pan- Pacific Union. We gladly accept this foster child under the conditions which have been proposed and will give its nurture and growth our sympathetic and active assistance and we hope that two or three years hence when the second meeting of the repre- sentatives of the press of the Pacific is held that our child will be a lusty and vigorous one with lungs and a voice sufficiently developed to be heard by the governments of the nations of the Pacific whose ears are sometimes a bit deaf. Thus does the Pan-Pacific Union seek to cooperate with any and all agencies which attempt to make of the region of the Pacific one wherein the minds of all of our people shall be thoroughly saturated with the spirit which prompted Abram of old to say to his nephew Lot when trouble was in prospect: "Let there be no strife, I pray thee, between me and thee, and between my herdmen and thy herdmen, for zvc be brethren." Pan-Pacific Press Conference 471 GETTING NEWS IN AND OUT OF CHINA By K. P. Wang, Associate Editor, the Shun Pao, Shanghai, China. China is a country where the newspaper has not been fully developed as yet. Both the news releasers and the news readers have not fully understood the value of good news service, and hence the task of the news gatherers is a rather difficult one. However, as the news field in China is so rich and abundant, and practically the whole of which is unexplored yet, a conscientious and adventurous journalist will find his work in China to be one of unsurpassed fascination and of inexhaustible inspiration. It was only a few years ago that the people of the country took jour- nalism not as a profession or a profession of public service. But today, there is already a group of people, who have recog- nized the importance of journalistic work in China and have re- solved to devote their lifetime to serve the public through their pens ; and quite a number of them can be considered as real, genuine, and faithful journalists, journalists who chose journalism as their profession because they have faith and love in the value, interest and fascination of the work itself, and not because they take it as a means to achieve a certain selfish aim for themselves or for somebody else. In spite of the fact that we have quite a number of real jour- nalists in China, yet the news service in the country today as a whole has not been proved satisfactory or efficient at it should be, either because the news releasers would not give enough co- operation and assistance in putting out news in a manner that is most prompt and most worthy, or because the news gathered and published does not suit the taste of the reading public. In China, public organizations, or even government bureaus, have not adopted the policy and have not realized the advantage of releasing news to the papers from time to time ; and whatever they release for publication, if any, is either too formal and un- interesting, or too brief and incomprehensible, and in the majority of the cases, the news gatherers for the papers have to go here and there to get materials to supplement that released so that it 472 The Press Congress of the World can be rendered into readable and understandable matter. Many a time, news items of public interest, the nature of which is com- mon and the significance of which is not far-reaching, have to be withheld from publication by the authorities concerned, simply because they deal with the government or government officials, and as such, they should be regarded as secret to the public. It is also very common that meetings and gatherings of public or- ganizations, or important movements conducted by public bodies, which by their nature possess tremendous news value, would pass through without being noticed and reported by the papers. As a rule, people in China do not notify the papers as to what they have done, they are doing, or they will do, and it is up to the papers to find out these doings themselves. The institution of getting an interview for publication from a certain person is practically unknown to Chinese, not because the reporters are not on the job, but because the people whom the reporters would interview do not want publicity in that way. People in China still hold the old virtue of modesty, and they do not wish to have their names appear in the papers if they can help it, even if the appearance of their names, would do them good and would give them fame and credit. Our people at home simply have not been accustomed to that institution as yet. Then again, the nature of the news and the style in which the news is written have a great deal to do with the success and popularity of the papers. The study of newspaper readers' psy- chology in China is a very interesting one. The majority of news- paper subscribers there do not subscribe for the papers for the news of the day, but for the so-called literary pages. The most important feature for a newspaper to have in China has been, and will continue to be for the next few years to come, these literary pages, pages containing not the news of the present mo- ment, but the news happenings of years ago, pages not contain- ing articles on current topics, but articles of literary value. Anecdotes concerning certain noted persons in the past are al- ways more preferred than telegraphic news telling stories about the present day people who reside far away, or describing current events which happened in farther-ofif districts or countries. A few stanzas of poetry are much more welcomed by the readers than a few articles on political or economic problems. Therefore, Pan-Pacific Press Conjerence 473 the main task of the news gatherers of the majority of the papers in China today, particularly of the papers in the interior parts of the country, is to gather news not of the present, but of the past, because that is the only way to keep the paper going, and that is also the only way to satisfy the subscribers. Then the style of writing must be strictly literary, and no vulgar expres- sions can be tolerated, as the Chinese are essentially a literary people, though the number of educated people is so limited. The literary style must be kept and emphasized throughout the whole paper, including the news columns. Chinese people will not read a story which consists of facts alone, with no opinions or comments intermingled. The more opinion the writer puts into the story, the more the story will be read ; and papers giving the stories in pure narrative style will not appeal to readers and hence will not make any success in China. The American journalistic principle of giving facts alone and no comments in the news col- umns can not be worked out in China just now, and most likely will remain unworkable for a few decades to come. The British way of treating news, that is : editorial opinions intermixed with news stories, is a favorite type for the Chinese. However, the above picture only gives a description of con- ditions existing in the newspaper world of China at large, and principal papers having their publications issued in newspaper centres like Shanghai, Peking, Canton, Hankow, and Tientsin are being conducted more or less according to modern methods and principles. Let us discuss a few minutes the ways through which these papers are getting stories for their news columns. The papers in these newspaper centres, though still publishing literary pages and employing literary style for their writings, are paying more and more attention to the importance and value of getting news of the day and, by so doing, they are gradually introducing into China principles of modern journalism. Now, how do they get news? That is a question worth considering. Take the Shanghai papers into consideration first, as the Shang- hai papers are by far the most advanced and progressive of all the papers in the country. Nearly all the papers in Shanghai employ special correspondents stationed in the different princi- pal cities, who send in the bulk of news to the editorial offices of their home papers generally through postal administration. A 474 The Press Congress of the World few rich papers and papers of old standing provide a better facility for the public, however; the correspondents of these papers would send in the comparatively more important news through telegraphic channels. As a rule, the papers possessing facilities of telegraphic news are more popular to the readers than papers without such service, and the telegraphic news items themselves have also been proved more popular than items sent through other means. The most highly paid correspondents are those who are stationed in Peking, and most of them deserve the highest merit. Peking is the greatest news centre in China, and as such, the responsibilities of the correspondents towards the papers of which they are representatives are also the greatest. In Peking, where the seat of China's national capital is situated, news items of all description and of all nature are produced nearly every minute, and it takes men of big calibre, clear mind, keen judgment, and learned farsightedness to sort out all the news that comes to him, to pick the true and good, and to send it back to their home papers. Correspondents stationed at other cities do not play such an important part as those at Peking, but they also make valuable contributions to the papers from time to time. For local news, practically all Shanghai papers have good services, both by their own staff and by professional reporters. As Shanghai is the commercial centre of China, Shanghai papers give more commercial news of China than all the papers in the country combined. Most of the papers have specials dealing with economic news, and very often learned scholars are employed as financial editors. These financial editors are in close and con- stant touch with the leading merchants, bankers, trade commis- sioners, shipping and customs officials, guilds and chamber of commerce of the city and also of other parts of the country, so that their source of financial news will never become exhausted. Besides these financial editors, there are special reporters who are always ready to be on the job for any reporting work at any time. Social news and news of human interest are abundant in Shanghai, and taken as a whole, Shanghai papers generally put out good and interesting news every day. A few of these papers are also conducting engraving and photographic departments, and hence they have the advantage over other papers by issuing il- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 475 lustrated pages. In Shanghai, we have a special class of news- paper workers known as professional reporters. These profes- sional reporters are not employees of any paper, nor are they employed by any news agency or news syndicate. They are a class by themselves. During the day they would go out and get whatever news they can, and towards the evening or late in the afternoon, they would meet together at certain appointed tea houses or restaurants to talk over what each has gathered in the day. They would exchange the news thus gathered, one with another, and each would use his best style to render the materials thus exchanged into story form, and when these stories are sent to the papers and published the next day, they get their pay due to them from the papers in which their stories appear according to proper basis of valuation. Next to Shanghai, we have another city of great journalistic importance, namely Peking. Peking is an important city, not be- cause of its abundance of news, but because of its peculiarity of being a city of news agencies instead of newspapers. There are upwards of thirty news agencies in Peking, publishing news in Chinese, English, French, Russian and Japanese languages, con- ducted by peoples and organs of different nationalities, including Chinese, American, British, French, Russian and Japanese. It is these news agencies instead of newspapers, which are carrying on the important function and duty of getting the news. In fact many of the newspapers in Peking do not have any reporters of their own to run after news and whatever they published in the morning is just reprinted from whatever they have been supplied by the news agencies the preceding evening. Even some of the correspondents of Shanghai papers at Peking have to depend upon these agencies for news, which can be secured by regular subscriptions. These reports are generally issued at 7 or 8 o'clock in the evening and soon after are distributed to various newspapers, all edited and ready for print for next morning's paper. The subscription list is open to all persons who desire to get news one night earlier, and as a rule, the subscription list of private persons of some of the agencies is very long. By this way, the news agencies in Peking are taking the place of evening papers, and many of them have built up a reputable standing and hence become very influential. It is almost invariably true that 476 The Press Congress of the World these news agencies are either run by poHtical parties or sub- sidized by certain political figures, and it is therefore also invari- ably true that the news they issue is tinged with political color or mixed with personal element. Such being the case, it is there- fore rather hard for newspaper editors, if they want to use the service of these agencies, to distinguish between a real story and a yellow information, to trace dividing lines of political and per- sonal interests, and to select the right ones for publication. In case of foreign news agencies, that is, news agencies supported and conducted by foreigners, they are operated with certain defi- nite purposes to achieve certain definite objects. Most of them are ofificial organs of foreign governments, and some of them are mouthpieces of big foreign financial interests. Since the policy and purpose of these agencies are so divergent one from another, it is not uncommon that the news items issued by them are con- tradictory. Very often, a British report about conditions in Rus- sia appearing in today's paper has to be corrected by a Russian version tomorrow. Still very often news sent out by Japanese agencies on U. S. -Japanese relations can never be confirmed by American agencies. With the Chinese agencies they even present more interesting phenomena than the foreign agencies. One agen- cy would send out, sometimes purely through manufacturing, a report about the unfavorable situation of the political party, with whose views and policies the issuing agency can not agree ; an- other agency would publish something concerning entirely private afifairs of an influential person in the enemy's camp ; and still another agency would put out in its reports items absolutely un- true and detrimental to the interests of the opposition group. Of course, all these practices do not appear every day, but the agencies certainly take them as their weapons to defeat people be- longing to diiTerent political belief and faith. All these news agencies employ a certain number of news gatherers to get material for publication. As it has been said above, it is very seldom that the reporters can get news through regular way of release, the news agency reporters in Peking have to resort to some other ways than regular. Generally these re- porters are alert and always on the job, and the way they get their news is through making friends with government employees, visiting parks, tea houses, theatres, and restaurants, and fre- Pan-Pacific Press Conference All quenting other amusement places where the government em- ployees go during their leisure hours. Through conversations with others and through hearing others' conversations, these re- porters usually get good stories about what is going on in and around Peking, socially as well as politically ; and whoever se- cures the greatest number of friends and whoever secures the greatest number of stories, he will be the most successful re- porter in the long run. Such is the fascinating life of news agency reporters in Peking, and such a fascinating life is probably unequaled anywhere else in the world. With regard to the foreign journalists in China, be they news agency reporters or be they specially sent correspondents of some big and influential papers of foreign countries, the number of the latter case is, by the way, very limited, their life is an en- tirely different one. Their usual way of getting news is through direct calls on the people from whom they want to get something and through correspondence with people from whom they are anxious to learn something. It is very strange to say that Chi- nese officials and authorities are very willing to grant interviews to foreign newspapermen, and to answer the questions put to them by the foreign correspondents, though such interviews are as a rule very formal and uninteresting, and though such answers given are generally too indirect and not to the point. To an ex- pert foreign correspondent, who has been in China for many years, such interviews and answers would not be regarded as good and fit for print, until he puts a lot of finishing touches to them by his knowledge of Chinese people and Chinese aflfairs ; but an inexperienced one, who just came over, is liable to use them as they have been given to him, possibly coupled with wrong interpretations of his own. It is through this latter case that many a time misunderstanding about China and Chinese af- fairs would arise, and it is therefore sincerely hoped that no foreign newspaper would send any correspondent over to China, unless it is assured that he is fully equipped with a knowledge about China and thus fully qualified. Now just a word or two about sending Chinese news abroad and getting foreign news into China. Both of these services are at present in the hands of foreigners. News about China is being dispatched to foreign lands by telegraphic lines, submarine cables, 478 The Press Congress of the World or wireless transmission. Most of the materials are taken from the interviews and correspondence acquired through the man- ner as above described, and the rest of them are secured through translations from Chinese papers. They are usually misleading and full of misinterpretations. On the other hand, news about foreign countries generally comes through the offices of foreign news agencies. Only a few Chinese papers have their own cor- respondents abroad, though many of the students studying in foreign countries, including girls, have been contracted with to dispatch news home by some of the papers. Practically a hundred per cent of the Chinese papers take in foreign news items and publish them as they are supplied by the responsible foreign news agencies. Sometimes home correspon- dence appearing in foreign newspapers in China is also trans- lated by the vernacular papers for publication. In both cases, the news thus published is not of the first hand value, and generally not the kind of news fit for Chinese readers. It is therefore strongly urged that neither newspapers of foreign countries nor Chinese newspapers at home should feel satisfied with the foreign news service which they are getting and both of them should send out correspondents of their own to get whatever news they want, which can be taken by the readers as trustworthy and re- liable. Such is a brief survey of news service in China, and the con- ditions as now prevailing are certainly unsatisfactory and in- efificient. We want improvement and progress, and we want to better these conditions. We are only hoping now that the cable rate, which the Press Congress of the World has been energeti- cally discussing, will be eventually reduced, so that newspapers of China and of foreign countries can afiford to send correspondents to do some real correspondence work between China and other countries, which is so badly needed, and we are also hoping now that an international news agency, properly managed and con- ducted with honest and straight purposes, which the Pan-Pacific Press Conference is trying to realize, will be realized in the near future, so that countries, at least countries bordering on the Pacific ocean, can be better acquainted one with another, and the news service between them can be better handled. These are what modern journalists in China are looking for from the Press Pan-Pacific Press Conjerence 479 Congress of the World, and particularly from the Pan-Pacific Press Conference. We have only a handful of journalists in China who deserve to be called journalists, and unless the journalists of the world, particularly Pan-Pacific journalists, will be willing to help and assist us, we can not expect to remedy the present journalistic condition in China, which is so undeveloped and be- hind time, in a short time. Will the journalists of the world, and of the Pan-Pacific countries help and assist us? THE PAN-PACIFIC UNION AND THE CANADIAN PRESS By Oswald Mayrand, Managing Bditor, La Presse, Montreal, Canada. Canada has a coast line of 7000 miles on the Pacific Ocean, so that my country is quite naturally interested in all questions con- cerning the Pan-Pacific Union Press Conference. The Ca- nadian press at large is aware of the fact that the eyes of the whole world are actually drawn upon the Pacific's problems and all the journalists of my country are anxious to contribute, as much as possible, to the solution of such problems. As it has already been said by some speakers at the present Press Congress of the World, mutual understanding is to be sought by all nations who want to live in peace with their neighbors. And to make nations understand each other, the lowering of the rates of fast communications by land telegraph, cable and wireless seems especially desirable. * * * The shortness of unskilled labor, as it exists in the Hawaiian Territory, is, for instance, a serious question to be settled by the government of the United States, but the press of the whole Pan-Pacific Union is taking a deep interest in the solution of such economic problem which may have a wide bearing on the international labor. There is actually so much unemployme?it 480 The Press Congress of the World all over the world that it is lamentable to see in these days of general postwar hardships courageous men as the Hawaiian in- dustrial leaders short of labormen. Let us hope that the Govern- ment of the United States is on the verge to bring forth a solution which shall secure necessary labor and prosperity to these is- lands without jeopardizing the security of the American Re- public. * * * The Canadian Press, Limited, which supplies nearly all the dailies with foreign news as well as local news, is a cooperative organization of which most newspapers of the Dominion are members. She has reliable correspondents in all the great cities of my country and her connections with the Associated Press of the United States secure to our people a satisfactory service which, however, we urge to make better. Should not the co- operative principle which is at the very basis of the Canadian Press, Limited, and which makes her services effective be em- bodied in the Pan-Pacific Union? Countries having common in- terests in the many problems concerning the territories confined by the Pacific Ocean should pull together and give their full cooperation for the common welfare. * * * There are surely great possibilities of commercial intercourse between the Hawaiian Islands and Canada, separated only by water, and I hope that the present congress of the Fourth Estate held in these islands shall contribute to stimulate such intercourse which should be profitable to all interested parties. The Canadian press realizes that the Pan-Pacific Union is a peaceful organization seeking to settle harmoniously all diver- gencies of opinion among interested parties and she rallies to your colors ; she is willing to take a glorious share in your enlighten- ing mission. On the sixth of September last, more than one hundred years of peace between the United States and Canada were commemo- rated by the dedication of the Peace Portal, a huge arch of steel and cement, on the international boundary line near Blaine, Washington. The Peace Portal rfests half on American and half on Canadian soil. On the south side are inscribed the words: Pan-Pacific Press Conference 481 "Children of a Common Mother." On the north side appear these words : "Brethren DwelHng Together in Unity." On the interior, below one of the doors can be read: "Open for One Hundred Years." And below the other door : "May These Doors Never be Closed." The structure bears two flag poles from which fly the Stars and Stripes and the Union Jack. During the dedica- tion ceremonies the flags of Belgium and France were hoisted. Is not that Peace Portal an inspiring emblem of what should be the friendly relations between the several nations having some territory in the Pacific Ocean? THE PRESS AND PEACE IN THE PACIFIC By He;nry Stead, Editor, Stead's Rcviciv, Melbourne, Australia. I regret most deeply that illness prevents my being present at the first Pan-Pacific Conference, to attend which I traveled specially from Australia. I regard this Conference as of the very greatest importance for the political center of the world has now shifted from Europe to the Pacific. In the old world the great war has left the Allies supreme. Their word is law and they realize that if they would maintain peace they must agree amongst themselves. In the Pacific however these same Powers are by no means a happy family. They do not agree, and their differences, minor though most of them be, actually threaten the peace of the world. That being so every effort put forth to improve the relations between the Pacific nations is of peculiar importance at the present time. We newspaper men realize how great an influence we can and do wield among the people, and if we, in conference, can come to some understanding amongst ourselves, can evolve some plan of united action with the object of enabling the Pacific nations to get to know one another better and thus avoid the unnecessary friction which so easily arises, we will indeed have done well. 31 482 The Press Congress of the World It is an astonishing fact, which too few people properly realize, that whilst all the great nations are spending huge sums on mak- ing preparations for defense and war, not one of them is spend- ing a single cent in order to systematically attempt to make the war they fear impossible. Millions of dollars are spent on build- ing gigantic superdreadnaughts which will be obsolete in five years, but not one dollar is set aside with the object of promoting better relations between the nations, getting them to know each other better, thus making war less likely. It was a well known American statesman who, at a time of crisis prior to the late war, declared : "Give me the price of a single battleship and I will undertake to make this threatened struggle impossible," Just suppose for a moment that the Administration were to set aside no more than one per cent of its war appropriations for use in peace propaganda. Why there would be no war ! Today it costs at least $25,000,000 to build a dreadnaught. What could not be done with one per cent of that huge sum for the cause of peace. But no government at present sets aside even one-tenth of one per cent of its war expenditures for peace purposes. Several years ago when the mayors of French towns were visiting England, having been invited to do so by their English confreres, all the money required for their entertainment had to be raised privately. The British Government, although most sympathetic, had actually no funds available to provide these vis- itors with even one banquet! Yet when distinguished soldiers from abroad came to England the War Office had always plenty of money to entertain them with. Every one admits that visits of this nature helped to bring about a better understanding be- tween England and France, but the expense of such visits had to be borne always by private individuals. That is not right and I think it is the duty of every newspaper man to try and induce his particular government to set aside a definite sum, better still a fixed percentage of its defense and war expenditure, which should be used in order to facilitate visits of representative men and workers from one country to another; should be used to disseminate correct information about one country in another, and above all should be utilized to run to earth in one country the lies which are at present so widely circulated about another. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 483 What is needed in every country is a Ministry of Friendship in charge of a man whose duty it should be to apply the grease of truth to the international machinery when the friction between its parts became acute. We have secretaries of state, for war, for the navy, ministers of defense. Immensely complicated dip- lomatic services whose nominal duty it is to work for peace but who, alas, are much more concerned in finding out the latest de- vices other nations have adopted in their armies and navies than they are in smoothing away those little irritations which so quick- ly give cause for war. In Australia the year before the war we spent almost £6,000,- 000 on the army and navy. Unless the Disarmament Conference at Washington is successful we shall have to spend much more than that in coming years. The taxpayers in the Commonwealth, already complaining, will strongly protest, but protests will be of no avail if other fleets of the Pacific are being increased in size. The man who has to find the money is likely to approve the sug- gestion that a very small part of it should be used to make the war he fears impossible. Australia could well afford to spend one-tenth of one per cent of its defense appropriation on work for peace in the Pacific. £60,000 is a small amount, yet carefully expended it should make the raising of £6,000.000 for defense purposes unnecessary. If all the Pacific countries were to spend no more than one-tenth of one per cent of their appropriations for armies and navies on systematic peace propaganda I am con- vinced that the need for those armies and those navies would quickly disappear. We are, I think, all seized with the fact that wars are almost always due to misunderstandings which had time permitted could have been cleared up. But whilst the machinery for making war is always well oiled, efficient and up-to-date, no special machinery for preserving peace exists at all. It seems to me that we might well work for the setting up of such machinery and urge our respective governments to set aside a mere fraction of the huge sums they spend on getting ready for war to be used in bring- ing about a better understanding between Pacific peoples, in running a campaign of truth to counteract the wild and foolish 484 The Press Congress of the World rumors which at present furnish fuel for misunderstandings and mutual distrust. But whilst I think it is the duty of governments to systemati- cally work for peace and not concern themselves only in pre- paring for war, it will be difficult to bring them to a realization of that fact. Meanwhile can we not do something ourselves to counteract these lies and rumors which work so much mischief in our relations with other Pacific countries. We are severely handicapped because we ourselves do not know the truth about our neighbors and, not knowing the truth, we cannot contradict the lie. It would be well if every large newspaper or group of newspapers were to have a reliable correspondent in each country washed by the Pacific, who could be relied on to give accurate information himself and to report false news which was being circulated in the country where he was living about that one where the papers he represented were located. Expense is of course the chief argument against this plan, but already some of the Australian papers have made a beginning and a reliable corre- spondent represents the Melbourne Herald in Japan. It is to be hoped that other papers will follow suit. But correspondents are a luxury which great newspapers only can indulge in, the lesser journals have to rely upon what they get from the large dailies and from chance letters. The Pan-Pa- cific Union, which has already done so much to promote a better feeling in the Pacific, might be of use here. It might act as a dis- tribution center of reliable news concerning every Pacific coun- try. There are plenty of journals in Australia which would be glad to have short articles telling, for instance, about labor con- ditions in Japan and China ; plenty which would publish brief accounts of social movements in other countries. How far they would be prepared to support a "truth" service of this kind it is difficult to say. but my experience certainly suggests that it would be unwise to oflfer it free. Individuals and newspapers, whilst at first welcoming something for nothing, soon cease to have interest in it. On the other hand, when they have to pay even a small sum for it, their interest is preserved and Mdien thev would throw a batch of free articles into the waste-paper basket, Pan-Pacific Press Conference 485 they would carefully peruse those they had paid to have sent them. The scheme would require working out and considerable modification but, properly done, it should be of immense value in bringing about a better understanding between the Pacific peoples. It is because we do not understand each other, because we are suspicious of each other, that we think and talk of war. If we knew more about each other we would think much less about war. The press can do more than any other agency to bring about the desired understanding. It can frown on scare rumors and seek always to soothe instead of ruffle the suscepti- bilities of its neighbors. The Pacific being now the center of world politics the responsibilities thrown on the Pacific press are great, far greater than they have ever been before. I am con- fident that we will rise to the occasion and do everything in our power to dispel the danger of war and bring in that era of peace which we so fondly imagined would be ours once the great war had been won. I, at any rate, pledge myself to do everything in my power to assist any movement started at this Conference which has as an object the bringing of mutual understanding and trust amongst the peoples of the Pacific. REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE ON RESOLUTIONS By LoRRiN A. Thurston, Chairman. I would say that the Committee was presented with three ap- parently inconsistent propositions: one was that this Pan-Pacific Conference, the permanent organization, should be under the con- trol of the World's Press Congress ; the second proposition was that it should be under the control of the Pan-Pacific Union; and the third, that it should be an independent body. The duties of the Committee have been to try and reconcile these three prop- ositions, and it was recognized, before the initial steps were taken, that there were advocates for all three propositions. 486 The Press Congress of the World Taking the last first, it seemed that the newspaper men of the Pacific were able to handle their own affairs without having to look to anybody else for advice or counsel. On the other hand, we recognized that it is an unorganized body, so far as having any paid official, and experience has demonstrated that an unpaid organization of men with other business to attend to is liable to lose interest, and affairs are apt to lag behind, whereas ai permanently organized body with paid officials, such as is the Pan-Pacific Union, whose first business is to carry out the ob- jects of that organization, will be much more promptly attended to. It is desirable to allow the Pan-Pacific Union to utilize its machinery for carrying out this object. As to the Press Con- gress, the Committee recognizes the extreme advantage of being a part and parcel of a working organization, and therefore having the moral as well as the positive and material support of that organization when it had formulated policies which it wished to have incorporated into its policies, consequently the Committee has felt strongly that it was extremely desirable to have the three policies combined if possible, and the resolutions I will now pre- sent are an attempt to do that. A second problem presented was as to the method of control of the organization, the difficulties being, on the one hand, that it should be democratic and that every member of the Congress should have something to say in regard to its policies, but, on the other hand, our members are so scattered that, in order to secure promptness and efficiency of action, it is necessary to have concentrated control for current work. We have attempted in that respect to give a control to every member of the Congress when the meetings take place. In order to give a partial general control by the members during the in- tervals between meetings, the scheme has been devised of having a general committee which shall consist of at least one member from every country in the organization. In order that this may never delay operations, the countries being scattered along the Pacific, requiring a month or two for full consideration, the ad- ditional scheme was devised of having a central steering com- mittee of three persons, and again, to get prompt action, that Pan-Pacific Press Conference 487 these be located in Honolulu, where lines between the countries are shortest. That is an explanation as to why there appears to be undue concentration of authority between meetings. Your Committee on Resolutions herewith presents four reso- lutions relative to : 1. The organization of a permanent Pan-Pacific Press Con- ference ; 2. Electrical News Service in and about the Pacific ; 3. Defining the scope of the activities of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference ; 4. Endorsing the Conference to Limit Armaments and to con- sider the problems of the Pacific and the Far East. Your Committee recommends the adoption of these resolu- tions. RESOLUTION No. 1, Concerning the Organization oe a Permanent Pan-Pacific Press Conference. Whereas, representatives of the press of the countries in and bordering upon the Pacific Ocean in attendance upon the sessions of the Press Congress of the World have been convened and are now in session as the "Pan-Pacific Press Conference" for the consideration of matters of special concern to the journalism of the Pacific regions ; And Whereas, the formation of a permanent organization of representatives of the press of the Pacific will promote the pur- poses for which this Conference was called ; provide a means for effectuating its objects and desires; give publicity to its purposes and proceedings and the needs of the Pacific region and furnish a medium for calling and holding future meetings of such rep- resentatives ; And Whereas, the Pan-Pacific Union is a duly incorporated body, organized under the laws of the Territory of Hawaii, U. S. A., with offices in Honolulu, having an international Board of Trustees representing the principal nations of the Pacific, one of the main objects of which is to call conferences of delegates from Pacific regions to discuss and further interests common to 488 The Press Congress of the World Pacific peoples, with a view to bringing them into closer contact and more friendly relations; And Whereas, the said Pan-Pacific Union has called the first Pan-Pacific Press Conference with the approval and cooperation of the Press Congress of the World, and has financed this Conference and ofifers its services in carrying forward recom- mendations made by the Conference, in calling further Pan- Pacific Conferences at such times and places as may be mutually agreed upon, when so requested by the proper officers of the same, and in bringing the press men of the Pacific into better ac- quaintanceship, cooperation, correspondence and communication ; Be It Resolved, that the members of this Pan-Pacific Press Conference be and hereby are organized into a permanent body to be known as the "Pan-Pacific Press Conference," to con- sist of representatives of the press from the countries and states in or bordering upon the Pacific Ocean; such representatives to be appointed upon such conditions, in such numbers and in such manner as may be hereafter decided by the General Committee of said Conference as hereinafter indicated; Be It Further Resolved, that all of the powers of the Pan- Pacific Press Conference hereby formed, between the meetings of same, shall be vested in a General Committee, consisting of not less than one delegate from each country or state now repre- sented in the present Conference or which may hereafter be rep- resented therein ; who shall be appointed by the President. Except as herein otherwise provided, all of the powers of the General Committee shall be vested in an Executive Committee of three, one of whom shall be the President, and one the Sec- retary. The Secretary shall also act as Treasurer of the Con- ference, of the General Committee and of the Executive Com- mittee. For purposes of convenience of administration and securing promptness of action, the President and Secretary shall, until otherwise ordered by the Conference or the General Committee, be residents of Honolulu, Hawaii. The members of the Executive Committee are hereby de- clared to be : Pan-Pacific Press Conference 489 President Secretary Member Vacancies in the General Committee or the Executive Com- mittee, caused by death, resignation, disability or failure to act for the space of one year, shall be filled by appointment by the President. In case of a vacancy in the office of President, the same shall be filled by vote of the General Committee. Members of the General Committee representing additional countries or states which may hereafter join said Conference, shall be appointed by the President. Officers and members of said General and Executive Com- mittees shall be hereafter elected at each meeting of the Pan- Pacific Press Conference, by a majority vote of the delegates at- tending such meeting. The officers and members of said General and Executive Committees shall continue to hold their respective offices until their successors are duly elected or appointed. The members of the General Committee are hereby authorized, by majority vote, between sessions of this Conference, to amend or add to the terms of organization herein expressed. Be It Further Resolved, that the said offer of the Pan-Pa- cific Union is hereby accepted with the sincere thanks of this Conference. Be It Further Resok'ed, that, in the opinion of this Pan- Pacific Press Conference, it will be in the best interests of all concerned if the Pan-Pacific Press Conference shall act as and be a permanent regional section of the Press Congress of the World, representing it and cooperating with it, in and concerning all matters appertaining to or of special interest to the countries and peoples of the Pacific, and the Executive Committee is here- by authorized and directed to make such arrangements to effec- tuate this suggestion as are mutually satisfactory to it and the Press Congress of the World. Meetings of the Conference shall be called by the President, or by a majority of the Executive Committee, at such times and places as, in conference with the Pan-Pacific Union, may be de- 490 The Press Congress of the World termined, due notice thereof being given to members of the Con- ference. Every appointment herein provided to be made by the Pres- ident, shall, when made, be immediately reported to each mem- ber of the General Committee, and shall be subject to revocation and the appointment of another in place thereof, upon a vote to that effect by majority of the General Committee. Until such vote is received, such appointment shall be effective. Resolution No. 2 — Eleictrical News Service In and About THE Pacific Ocean. Whereas news dispatches are now transmitted electrically with speed, efficiency and economy between certain countries bordering upon the Pacific Ocean; but as to certain other coun- tries, more particularly between the United States on the one hand and Japan, New Zealand and Australia on the other, such service is neither speedy, efficient nor economical ; It is hereby declared by the Pan-Pacific Press Conference now assembled in the City of Honolulu, Territory of Hawaii, U. S. A.: That ignorance by one people of the character, objects, pur- poses, doings and intentions of other peoples, is the most prolific cause of misunderstanding and ill-feeling between such peoples, tending to generate suspicion and produce friction and disagree- ment and is therefore one of the principal causes of war ; That the easiest, quickest and best medium for dispelling such ignorance is the public press ; That the day has passed when the mail is adequate to trans- mit news from one country to another ; That communication from one country to another by electric telegraph, cable or wireless, is essential to that full and prompt knowledge of what is transpiring in the various countries to se- cure in full measure the benefits incident to publicity ; That to obtain the full advantage and benefits of such elec- trical transmission of press messages, it should reach all parts of the civilized world by the shortest, cheapest and quickest routes; That such service around and across the Pacific Ocean is, as to some portions thereof inadequate in its connections, ham- Pan-Pacific Press Conference 491 pered by artificial obstacles, and so expensive as to be prohibitive of the free use necessary to enable the press to make the best and fullest use thereof ; That this Conference hereby declares its unqualified convic- tion that prompt expansion of the means of communication to all parts of the Pacific and extension to the press of facilities for cheap, unrestricted, uncensored and uncontrolled electrical com- munication throughout the Pacific will be a most potent influence for securing, establishing and maintaining good feeling, good will and peace between the peoples of that region, and thus tend to a satisfactory solution of the chief issue now pending before the nations ; That this Conference hereby most heartily commends the pol- icy under which the wireless service of the U. S. Navy is now transmitting press messages between certain points in the Pa- cific, at a low rate and hereby most urgently recommends that such service be expanded and extended to all parts of the Pacific where practicable ; and that the charges for such service shall not exceed the amounts necessary to make such service self- supporting ; That to insure the full and adequate exchange of desirable news, if the purposes of this declaration are to be assured, it is necessary that means be evolved for the collection of news in the several countries affected and the same exchanged through some common medium mutually agreed upon ; That such news having been so collected it is highly desirable that the same should so far as reasonably practicable, be concen- trated at a common center, to be there segregated and forwarded to such points as it may be of interest. Honolulu is recommended as the point at which such news exchange should be located ; That this Conference therefore most strenuously urges the governments and companies owning or controlling mediums of electrical communication in and about the Pacific to comply with the suggestions and recommendations herein contained ; That the officers of this Conference are hereby authorized and instructed to take all necessary or proper steps to secure the ac- tion herein sousrht. 492 The Press Congress of the World RESOLUTION No. 3 — Defining the Scope oe Activities oe the Pan-Pacieic Press ConeerEnce. Be It Resolved, that upon the permanent organization of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference, among other matters which it may properly undertake, the following shall be considered to be with- in the scope of the activities thereof, viz. : 1. To act as an agency for interchanging among the news- papers and magazines of the Pacific region accurate information about the peoples of the Pacific and their problems. 2. To arrange future conferences of representatives of the Pacific press to the end that the problems incident to the work of the press of the Pacific region shall be considered. 3. To take such steps as are necessary to securing cheaper rates and more efficient service for telegraph, cable and wireless messages. 4. To entertain representatives of the press of the Pacific aa they pass through Honolulu, thus utilizing the opportunity af- forded for spreading the Pan-Pacific spirit. 5. To investigate the feasibility of the international inter- change of journalists to the end that wider contacts may be created and initiate such interchange if a practical plan can be formed. 6. To consider the practicability of establishing a Pan-Pa- cific school of journalism and take steps to bring this about if feasible. 7. To collect and interchange films and pictures that portray accurately the life of the people. 8. To assist in furthering the movement among Pacific coun- tries of the adoption of the Roman alphabet and of a common language. 9. To take such steps as will secure a modification of the ruling of the shipping board, recently made, which forbids pas- sengers on a foreign boat bound for a United States port and wishing to stop over in Honolulu, from resuming passage on a boat of the same line. This is the interpretation given the regula- tion that no foreign boat can carry passengers between American ports and works a hardship upon persons coming from foreign ports who wish to stop over in Honolulu to attend conferences or for other purposes. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 493 Resolution No. A — Concerning the Limitation oe Arma- ments AND Problems oe the Pacific and the Far East. Whereas, the delegates of the daily, weekly and monthly press of the countries and regions bordering the Pacific having been convened in this Pan-Pacific Press Conference for the consider- ation of questions pertaining particularly to the Pacific regions ; And Whereas, the President of the United States has invited the principal allied and associated powers to participate in a con- ference on the limitation of armaments and on the problems of the Pacific and the Far East ; Therefore, Be It Resolved, that we, in conference assembled, do warmly commend the President of the United States for call- ing what may prove to be an epoch making conference and we further commend him for his wisdom in proposing that at this conference an attempt be made to come to a common under- standing with respect to the principles and policies which shall obtain in the Far East. Furthermore, that we instruct the of- ficers of this conference to convey by cable to the President of the United States this resolution. Discussion of Resolution No. 2 Mr. Cohen : I would not like this resolution to include the word "inefficient" as applied to the service of cable news to Aus- tralia or New Zealand, because in my humble judgment it is contrary to the fact. One has to remember the birth and growth of cable communications during the past 25 years. Since then there have been great developments and great improvements in cables, and remembering, as I do, that the Pacific cable is owned by Great Britain, and the several countries of Australia and New Zealand and Canada, forming a federation who have been able out of its profits to put aside large sums of money in order to secure better service, and remembering further that the Great Imperial Conference of 1909 committed itself to this declaration of policy that as soon as the system of wireless had progressed sufficiently as to make it reliable and dependable that the govern- ments of those countries should be asked to consider the prac- ticability of furnishing a chain of imperial communications by 494 The Press Congress of the World wireless around the globe ; and remembering that an important delegation, again headed by Canada, the moving spirit in this matter, went to Mr. Asquith, Premier of Great Britain, and put that view of the case before him, and induced him, by solid ar- gument, to entertain the view that the day of wireless was quickly coming; I venture to say in view of all this that but for the un- fortunate great war, a chain of wireless, assisted by that great genius in wireless, Marconi, would have been in existence today. I understand that that very thing is now being evolved. Since the press of New Zealand and Australia depend on Lon- don for the major supply of their news, everything has been done to make that news reliable and thoroughly representative of that frqm which it emanates. Anyone who has seen the Sydney Morning Herald or the Melbourne Argus or my own country papers of today, will remember the advance that is given to world wide events, will say with me that the service is dependent, re- liable and efficient, and far cheaper, having regard to all circum- stances of the case. I recognize and freely accord the Govern- ment of the United States credit for what it has done in the mat- ter of establishing a service with which at all events you Ameri- cans are thoroughly well satisfied, but you must have some re- gard for the traditions of these countries which have a monopoly of utilities — the countries that we are looking to for help and as- sistance, and we cannot run counter to their wishes. If there is a clearing house established in the Pacific, I hope it may be established here. I hope to see the day come when all sensational items are suppressed as you would the plague. We want news, absolutely reliable news, and nothing else. We don't want sen- sationalism. We don't want items about the decision of 200 or 300 school children as to whether they will wear short frocks and expose part of their anatomy to the gaze of the public. We call that "piffle." You must give us some credit as pioneers in this work, for having done what we tried to do. We intend to go on establish- ing wireless where we can, having thought for the enterprise and press of our country, and we ask you Americans, especially you here, to second our eflforts and see when the time comes that we Pan-Pacific Press Conference 495 are supplied with news quickly, that is thoroughly reliable, thor- oughly wholesome and thoroughly dependable. (Applause.) Mr. Thurston : I wish to say a word of explanation on the point concerning which Mr. Cohen has addressed the conference. Far be it from the Committee to intend, or attempt to ignore the news service which is going to Australia from the south, by cable. This question has been given more consideration by the Committee than any other point that came before it. The statements which have been made here, and which have called forth the criticism from the gentleman were based on information received by the delegates from New Zealand, Australia, and Hongkong, in ad- dition to the information furnished by the chief of the wireless station in Honolulu. The delegate here from Hongkong stated to us that the news they received in Hongkong came to them not direct but by way of London — telegraphed across the world to London and then relayed to Hongkong. That does not seem to be efficient or economical and I have therefore characterized that as being a part of the service that is inefficient and un-eco- nomical. One of the delegates from New Zealand stated to the Committee that on the way here from New Zealand, up to the day before they reached Honolulu, he was able to send messages for 4j^d or 9 cents a word, and that the day after he got here he attempted to send a message and was told he could not send it. but was referred to the cable office where he was told he could only send a message at 75 cents a word. His message had to be cabled to San Francisco, telegraphed to Victoria, and from Can- ada cabled back to New Zealand. That did not seem efficient or economical to the Committee — in fact, it seemed a prohibitive condition of affairs. Again, the local Committee, before the Congress assembled here, took the matter up with the Navy wireless station, which receives wireless news service in Honolulu, and asked if it would not be practicable to make this the center of a special wire- less at uniform rates. It appealed to him immensely and he said he would take it up and see what could be done. He stated it was physically possible to make contact with Japan, but that the regulations did not permit him to send messages to Japan. He stated that it was feasible for the radio station here to transmit 496 The Press Congress of the World messages, as far as he knew, to New Zealand and Australia, but that was not being done, and that he would ascertain why not, and he commnnicated with Washington and later informed us that it could not be done. We are in daily communication with Samoa, and the Fijis. The cable from Samoa and Fiji can transmit messages to Aus- tralia and New Zealand, but it cannot be done because of a con- tract between the cable company coming to New Zealand and Australia from the south, by which these countries are prohibited from receiving telegraphic or wireless except over their cable over a term of years, except from the sea. That was why the delegate was able to send messages up to the night before he landed from the steamer. He was prohibited from sending mes- sages from our local ofifice because of the contract between New Zealand and Australia and that cable company. That did not seem to be efficient or economical, when it is within the possi- bilities of the wireless to transmit such message at a cost not exceeding 9 cents a word, and the delegate had to pay 75 cents a word. We recognize that the communications which the gentleman spoke of by way of the southern cable, and also from Canada, is an immense advance over the previous conditions when there was no cable. We recognize that the governments and companies in that connection, which the honorable gentleman has mentioned, looked forward to the time when wireless was coming, and now' we feel that the time has arrived when there are physical means by which that communication can be cheapened and made far more efficient, so that countries across the waters from the United States and each other can get into communication, and it should be recognized by this Conference, and they should exercise their influence, so far as practicable, to get wireless put into operation as promptly as possible. As to the cost, I was told by Mr. McClatchy, a director of the Associated Press, that the present service being conducted by the Navy wireless will cost only 6 cents a word from San Francisco to the Philippines, and practically the same to Japan. The present service to Japan is sent by wireless to Guam, taken 20 miles across the Island and then cabled to Japan ; three charges for the one Pan-Pacific Press Conference 497 message — 'in addition to the delay. There is no reason, except artificial obstacles which have been interposed, why the message could not go direct from San Francisco to Japan in the twinkling of an eye, at the rate of 6 cents a word. The Chairman told me only yesterday it was incredible to him that such a service could be obtained and yet was not available. It is not our object to condemn any service of any country, but to set forth the fact that this cheaper and more efficient service is to be had, and to make a declaration on our part that we favor putting that cheaper service into operation as soon as possible. Mr. McCIvATCHy : May I supplement what Mr. Thurston has said by another concrete example. I was told by the editor of the Nippu Jiji that his cabled news or wireless received from Japan here in Honolulu cost him 263^^ cents per word, and that a similar charge would be made from here to Japan. The Navy wireless, as you have been told, is sending news all the way from San Francisco to Cavite, for 6 cents, and is prepared to send from San Francisco to Japan for 6 cents a word, with the cooperation of Japan, and between San Francisco and Honolulu and Hono- lulu and Manila, the rate is less. It is obvious that the journal- ists of Japan are losing not only money but a great advantage in the opportunity for an extended news service which would be of value there and here. Col. Lav^son : I think I can explain in a few words the position of the British Empire in regard to this system, and I think I can make the apparent difficulties quite clear, if I should be allowed to do so. The object of the British Empire scheme of establishing and improving the system of communications is this — they are endeavoring to put their communications on a sound commercial basis, and at every station they are endeavoring to establish, it is intended to be a comanercial one, whether op- erated by private companies or endeavor. It is meant to be com- mercial and permanent, therefore I don't think it is quite fair to compare it with the facilities which the U. S. Navy Depart- ment can put at the disposal of the public for communications in the Pacific. While not wishing to depreciate in any way the value of that service, I should like to point out that it is only a temporary expedient — unless the sanction is renewed, it will be 3] 498 The Press Congress of the World \ void on July 22 next, and might be void at any moment for strategic or other reasons. Therefore I do not think it quite fair i to blame any part of the British Empire for failing to fall in I with what is only a temporary expedient. ^ Dr. Pierson was over in London this summer, endeavoring to ■ arrange these questions of communication in conjunction with ; our government. I have no doubt but that if this service which is now operating was operated on a permanent commercial basis, it would be possible to make some arrangement with the cable companies of New Zealand and Australia and see that the dif- ficulties Mr. Thurston speaks of do not exist. I think that this | is the position as regards the British Empire. It is not because they are not doing their best to improve the system of communica- ^ tions, not only by cable but by wireless by all means in their power, ; but because they are endeavoring to get a permanent solution of the problem, and that will take a very long time. As soon as the wireless chain is established, there will be a high-powered station in Australia, and that will be the time for entering into these arrangements in the Pacific, which will make arrangements to perfect things all through. I think that explains ; why our plans as they now stand do not fall in with the temp- | orary wireless arrangement in operation now. \ Mr. Cohen : I thank Colonel Lawson for his remarks. New j Zealand through its delegation will cordially support him in every ^ effort he makes to cheapen the means of communication through- If out the world. And I am quite sure that the representatives of Australia will stand shoulder to shoulder with him in endeavor- ing to achieve such a desirable result. The excellent speech he has made and the cogent arguments he has adduced recall to my mind the part his family, the first Lord Burnham and the present holder of the title, played in 1909 % at the great Pan-British Press Conference in London in June ,> of that year, when the question of cheaper cable rates and greater * facilities for the transmission of foreign news was forced on the attention of the British government. A committee, to which > Canada contributed a strong contingent, waited on Mr. Asquith | (then Prime Minister) and the Postmaster-General with a re- ',• quest — I was almost tempted to say a demand — that the natural Pan-Pacific Pj-ess Conference 499 complement of the Pacific cable in establishing an all-Red cable under the Atlantic should be immediately undertaken by the partners — John Bull and Sons — as a great national enterprise. We were most fortunate at that time in having in England the presence of the late Sir Sandford Fleming, the Canadian engineer, to whose fine spirit of optimism and constructive ability the world owes much. And it was a Canadian journalist, Ross Gottawa, whose faith in the potentialities of wireless pointed the way to the authorities of the British Post Office and compelled them to acknowledge that Marconi's wonderful invention had come to stay. These are matters of historical importance, and I mention them merely to emphasize my contention that as newspapermen we are justified in pressing for the removal of the disabilities under which we at present labor. But there is another angle from which this question must be viewed. While we are de- manding cheaper and better communications we must not over- look the fact that trade and commerce are even more deeply concerned than ourselves in securing the paramount advantages of cheaper, quicker and more extended communications ; whether it ultimately be cable duplication or by improved wireless, must be left to the experts to determine. Returning for a moment to the London Conference of 1909, that committee did some splendid work. They induced the cable companies to reduce their tariflFs to India, South Africa, Ceylon, and Australia ; they obtained "deferred" and week-end messages, and they might have reasonably anticipated other advantages if the world-war had not summarily stopped all negotiations. It will be remembered, moreover, that the British government set up a Trade Commission which took evidence in every one of the British self-governing dominions, and made a series of im- portant recommendations, among them being pronouncements in favor of cheap press and mercantile cablegrams, and the estab- lishment of a chain of high-power wireless stations to embrace Great Britain and all her dependencies. The war prevented any of these recommendations being acted on, but I have the best rea- son for saying that successive Prime Ministers' Conferences in London have warmly endorsed these findings and that before 500 The Press Congress of the World another year shall have passed a commencement will be made in erecting these high-power stations. But whether the carrying out of this project will be left to private enterprise or form part of the activities of the British Post Office lies in the womb of the near future. Whatever hap- pens, it is high time that something were done to terminate crush- ing monopolies that can be proved to be inimical to the public interest. Let me give two concrete illustrations. While we were journeying hither ward we were able through the medium of the Australian Wireless Company, which I un- derstand has its headquarters at Sydney, Australia, and took over the Telefunken wireless system from a German syndicate, to dis- patch radio messages either to Australia or New Zealand at a flat rate of 9 cents per word, but the moment our steamer came within American territorial waters the Sydney system ceased to operate, and the American operators demanded a tariff of 75 cents per word ! If that is 'not profiteering, pure and unadul- terated, I cannot conceive what is, and in my own country, would be promptly investigated by our Board of Trade, who would suggest a remedy. A few days after our arrival here we were waited on by the head of the local naval station, who most courteously offered to dispatch a daily message of 100 words to New Zealand, guaran- teeing delivery only at Tutuilla (American Samoa), but prom- ising the assistance of his department to get the messages for- warded to Doubtless Bay (the nearest radio station in the north- ern part of New Zealand). But from the explanation made by the chairman of the New Zealand Press Association, who is a member of our delegation, it appeared that this organization has an agreement with the government of New Zealand which prevents absolutely the receipt of any message — by cable or other- wise — which the Press Agency has not authorized. This is prob- ably done to eliminate competition, for the Press Association has to pay dearly for its foreign news, and therefore must avoid over- lapping. But had we known in time of what your radio-operators can accomplish I am sure the embargo in New Zealand would have been lifted if the facts had been brought under the notice of Pan-Pacific Press Conference 501 our Prime Minister when he passed through Honolulu a couple of weeks ago. It would have been an illuminating experiment, and would have kept our people in daily touch with the proceed- ings of this Conference, a considerable achievement in itself. Having no right to pass judgment on the domestic policies of the United States, I merely remark in passing that the plan out- lined by Mr. McClatchy has no element of permanence, as it seems to me. Will your Congress agree to forward at a flat rate to any part of the world uncensored press messages, which may go to the length of camouflaging the policies of the Administra- tion in office? What we are out for, apart from the question of cost, is real news ; in other words it is not quantity but quality that counts even before cost. Newspaper publishers, being sharp men of business, will take good care that the charges are more reasonable ; but the respon- sible conductors of the press all the world over lie under a grave responsibility to the reading public, that the news shall be abso- lutely reliable and never be "doctored" to help a partisan cause or to wound the susceptibilities of another nation. Far too much pin-pricking goes on these days. Those "misunderstandings" of which you complain so bitterly will remain sources of national ill- will so long as public men and press writers persist in inflaming racial passions and take a delight in suppressing the truth. Col. Lawson has struck the right note. Let us be scrupulously fair and thoroughly impartial in our criticism of our neighbors' policies, give them credit for striving to be honest in their inten- tions toward us just as we expect them to believe us to be honest, unless the contrary can be proved, and let us by every legitimate means get into closer touch with those weak peoples whose trials and tribulations call aloud for redress, but whose actual position is unknown to us. To that consummation so devoutly to be wished, nothing, it appears to me, will contribute more potently, more efifectively, or more readily than the diffusion of whole- some, authentic, and widely-circulated news, the impartial gar- nering of which will constitute the raison d'etre of this World's Press Congress, now entering on the third and most important period of its career. 502 2' he Press Congress of the World The resolutions, as reported by Chairman Thurston, after dis- cussion and amendment, were adopted. As adopted they appear in the report. RESOLUTION OF THANKS TO NEWS AGENCIES After resuming the chair at the conclusion of the afternoon session, Mr. Alexander Hume Ford stated that the last business of the Pan-Pacific Press Conference session, which would like- wise formally conclude the official program of the Press Congress of the World, should be, he felt, an expression of hearty apprecia- tion to the various news agencies which had contributed so sig- nally to the success of the conference, both by their comprehen- sive news reports of world events brought to Hawaii during the session, and by the notable wide service over the world given to the Conference through these agencies and their correspondents. He proposed a vote of thanks to the agencies individually and collectively for their sympathetic attitude in promoting a better understanding through the communication of news and also for the technical excellence with which the United States Radio News Service had carried the dispatches. The four agencies specified are: The Associated Press, which augmented its daily reports to Hawaii newspapers with a special 1,000 word report. The Chicago Tribune Syndicate Service, which established es- pecially for the period of the sessions of the Press Congress of the World, a 3,000 word daily news report, which it collected in its Chicago office from foreign news dispatches gathered in all parts of the world. The United Press, which sent a fifty- word dispatch daily. The United States Navy Radio, which made special arrange- ments to handle incoming and outgoing news as well as placing the daily news report at the disposal of the delegates at the Press Congress hearquarters. In addition to the foregoing, representative correspondents of other newspapers and news agencies were commended for their interest in, sending out complete reports of the sessions. The chairman's proposal was carried unanimously by a viva voce vote. Pan-Pacific Press Conference 503 CLOSING WORDS TO THE PAN-PACIFIC PRESS CON- FERENCE By Alexander Hume Ford, Director, Pan-Pacific Union. The Pan-Pacific Union stands for service. Honolulu is the service station of the Pacific. Here I have met at one time at the Conference table the premiers of three Pacific countries and this not by premeditation, but by the accident of the arrival of their steamers the same day from three different Pacific countries. This would not be likely to happen anywhere else, and it is be- cause of such frequent happenings, bringing together in Hono- lulu the leading men of thought and action from different Pacific countries, that this city was selected a dozen years ago at the First Pan-Pacific Convention, as the meeting place for future Pan-Pacific Conferences. The Pan-Pacific Union is calling a series of Conferences of the leading men in all lines of thought and action in the Pacific. It realizes that without the co-operation and thought of the press it is powerless to go forward. The press of the Pacific is today the greatest educational force and the greatest force for moral uplift in the whole world. In some of our Pacific lands the newspapers pride themselves upon the fact that they disseminate the truth, that no interview is printed until it has the approval of the man interviewed. The truthfulness of these papers in local matters is astonishing, es- pecially to the American, but when these same papers speak of other countries of the Pacific it is impossible for them to verify their information. They publish what is sent to them and copy from foreign journals, and, alas, all is not well. Men wish to do that which is right, and if it is not too difficult they will do the right thing always. It seems to me, therefore, that it is the duty of this body to make it easy for the journalists of the Pacific to learn the truth about one another's countries, es- pecially the pleasant, uplifting and encouraging truths. 504 The Press Congress of the World I You have accepted by resolution the services of the Pan- Pacific Union and 1 feel that its chief object should now be to aid in disseminating among all countries of the Pacific the truth about the conditions concerning each and the actual modes of liv- ing and being of their peoples. If we can establish here at the ocean crossroads a clearing house of accurate information; if from this central station we can send in every direction the cable and wireless items that are dropped here, it will be splendid for Pacific journalism. I believe that here in Honolulu men of ex- perience in press matters would know best as to the items of news i that each Pacific country would wish flashed forward to it and if the Pan-Pacific Union can serve in establishing such a central news gathering and disseminating organization its force is at your disposal in the attempt. All that would be needed to make it a success will be your co-operation. It is for the Executive Committee now of the Pan-Pacific { Press Conference to co-operate with the Pan-Pacific Union to 't establish the service that you desire and to set the countries and peoples of the Pacific press of the world in their true light. The President of the Press Congress of the World has sug- gested that a Pan-Pacific School of Journalism be established here at the ocean crossroads. The Pan-Pacific Union will gladly co-operate with Dr. Walter Williams and the journalists of the Pacific who are looking forward to such an inter-racial journalis- tic school. The proceedings of this Pan-Pacific Press Conference, a book of about one hundred pages, will be printed and published im- mediately and we trust that within a week several hundred copies will be on their way to Washington where the Disarmament Con- ference is about to open its sessions. It has been intimated that the views expressed by the journalists of the Pacific may have a valuable bearing at this time in Washington. It may be that an informal conference of the press men of the Pacific will be held in Washington, as there will be a quorum of the Trustees of the Pan-Pacific Union in that city during the Disarmament Conference. It has been suggested that at the Pan- Pacific Commercial Conference, to be held in Honolulu next September, that there be a section composed of the owners of Pan-Pacific Press Conference 505 newspapers and publications in Pacific lands. This matter will be taken up and duly considered. If, as it is hoped, the Presi- dent of the United States will be with us in Hawaii next Septem- ber, it may be possible that an inf-ormal conference of presidents and premiers of Pacific lands may be brought about in which case it may be well to hold a second Pan-Pacific Press Confer- ence as the leading newspaper men of the Pacific would undoubt- edly visit Honolulu on that occasion. The Pan-Pacific Union is seeking to get the leading men of all lines of thought and action in Pacific lands in personal touch with one another. We have brought together the leading scientists of the Pacific and they are well organized in a body that will carry on and meet again. The same is true of the educators and now also of the press men of the Pacific. Next will be the gather- ing of the leading business giants of Pacific lands. There was once a saying among business men that there is no friendship in business, but this is no longer a truism. The Pan-Pacific Union holds that there should be no business, but friendship, and this will come true. I cannot but be grateful for the kindly expressions that some of the speakers have voiced concerning my personal part in the work of the Pan-Pacific Union. I am grateful because it has made me certain that you go back to your homes in perfect as- surance that whatever the Pan-Pacific Union can do to serve you between your meetings, to aid you in making a permanent success of your Pan-Pacific Congress body that it will do. We have asked for your co-operation and you have accepted ours. In whatever manner you wish us to be of service to you it is but for you to call upon us, and I trust you will call upon us, for we are here to serve. i VII. APPENDIX. In the appendix will be found the Constitution of the Press Congress of the World as amended at Honolulu, the list of dele- gates and guests in attendance upon the Honolulu sessions, and several addresses prepared for but not delivered at the Congress sessions. CONSTITUTION OF THE CONGRESS. Article I — Name. This organization shall be known as the Press Congress of the World. Article II— Object. Its object shall be to advance by conference, discussion and united effort the cause of journalism in every honorable way. The sessions of the Congress are to be open to the consideration of all questions directly affecting the press, but discussions of re- ligion, politics and governmental policies will not be permitted. Article III — Membership. Workers in every department of journalism, in every country, who are engaged in promoting the highest standards and largest welfare of the press, are eligible to membership. Article IV — Officers. The officers, who with the exception of the Honorary Presi- dent to be chosen by the Governing Committe, shall be elected at each session of the Congress as follows : 507 508 The Press Congress of the World An Honorary President. A President, Two Vice-Presidents from each co'untry holding membership, A Secretary-Treasurer, A Governing Committee consisting of the President, Secre- tary-Treasurer and thirteen additional members, which shall have general direction of the activities of the Congress. The members of this Committee shall have power of substi- tution, and may designate an Executive Committee of Five. Va- cancies shall be filled by the Governing Committee upon recom- mendation of the countries affected. Article V — Meetings. The times and places of meetings shall be determined by the Executive Committee. Article VI — Amendments. This constitution may be amended at any meeting under pro- visions to be established by the Executive Committee. DELEGATES AND GUESTS AT HONOLULU SESSIONS. Agee, Mrs. Hamilton P. (Fanny Heaslip Lea, pen name), short story writer, 2256 Oahu avenue, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Allen, Mrs. Henry J., Beacon, Wichita, Kansas, U. S. A. (Tem- porary Address: Topeka, Kansas) — Delegate. Allen, Riley H., Star-Bulletin, Honolulu, T. H.— Delegate. Bailey, H. U., Republican, Princeton, Illinois, U. S. A. — Dele- gate. Bailey, Mrs. H. U., Princeton, Illinois, U. S. A.— Guest. Beteta, Virgilio Rodriguez, Spanish Press Association, Central American Press Association, Guatemala City, Guatemala. (Temporary Address: Waldorf Astoria, New York City.) — Delegate. Blain, Thomas J., Daily Item, Port Chester, New York, U. S. A. — Delegate. Appendix 509 Blain, Mrs. T. J., Port Chester, New York, U. S. A.— Guest. Bowen, L. H., Lincoln County Times, Brookhaven. Mississippi, U. S. A.— Delegate. Breede, Adam, Daily Tribune, Hastings, Nebraska, U. S. A. — Delegate. Bridgman, Herbert L., Standard Union, Brooklyn, New York, U. S. A.^Delegate. Bronson, E. S., American, El Reno, Oklahoma, U. S. A. — Dele- gate. Brown, James Wright, Editor and Publisher, New York City, U. S. A.— Delegate. Brown, Mrs. James W., New York City, U. S. A. — Guest. Bunker, F. F., Pan-Pacific Union, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Burney, Ivan T., Journal and Courier, Little Falls, N. Y., U. S. A. — Delegate. Cain, J. Byron, News, Belle Plaine, Kansas, U. S. A. — Delegate. Canavan, Mrs. Nancy B., El Reno, Oklahoma, U. S. A. — Guest. Chien, P. Y., Social Welfare, Tientsin, China. — Delegate. Childress, E. H., Wayne County Press, Fairfield, Illinois, U. S. A. — Delegate. Chung, Henry, Korea Review, 905 Continental Trust Building, Washington, D. C, U. S. A.— Delegate. Clark, H. J., Herald, Venice, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. Clark, Mrs. H. J., Venice, California, U. S. A. — Guest. Clarke, Mrs. Adna G., Kamehameha Boy's School, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Cody, Frank J., Daily Post-Herald, Hilo, Hawaii. — Delegate. Cohen, Mark, Star, Dunedin, New Zealand. — Delegate. Cohen, Sarah, Dunedin, New Zealand.— Guest. Coutoupis, Thales, Nea Ellas, Athens, Greece. — Delegate. Cross, A. A., Kentucky Press Association, Benton, Kentucky, U. S. A. — Delegate. Davies, Herbert Arthur, Australian Journalists Association, Mel- bourne, Australia. — Delegate. Dean. Mrs. S. Bobo, Metropolis, Miami, Florida, U. S. A.— Delegate. Dean, Miss Dorothy, Miami, Florida, U. S. A.— Guest. 510 The Press Congress of the World DeRackin, S. E., Evening Outlook, Santa Monica, California, U. S. A.— Delegate. DeRackin, Mrs. S. E., Santa Monica, California, U. S. A.— Guest. Dotson, C. L., 420 Riverside Drive, New York City, U. S. A.— Delegate. Dow, B. C, Argus-Leader, Sioux Falls, South Dakota, U. S. A. — Delegate. Dow, Mrs. B. C, Sioux Falls, South Dakota, U. S. A.— Guest. Dunn, Andrew, Morning Bulletin, Rockhampton, Queensland, Australia. — Delegate. Easton, William, Times, Dunedin, New Zealand. — Delegate. Edgecombe, Frank O., Nebraska Signal, Geneva, Nebraska, U. S. A.— Delegate. Edgecombe, Mrs. Frank O., Geneva, Nebraska, U. S. A.— Guest. Elder, Orville, Evening Journal, Washington, Iowa, U. S. A. — Delegate. Evans, Miss Margaret, 520 Menzies St., Victoria, B. C. — Delegate. Fogg, Charles H., Times, Houlton, Maine, U. S. A. — Delegate. Fogg, Mrs. Charles H., Houlton, Maine, U. S. A. — Guest. Ford, Alexander Hume, Pan-Pacific Union, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Farrington, Wallace R., Star-Bulletin, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Frear, Mrs. W. F., 1434 Punahou Street, Honolulu, T. H.— Delegate. Frye, Miss Helen M., League of American Pen Women, Washing- ton, D. C, U. S. A.— Guest. Glass, Frank P., American Newspaper Publishers Association, Birmingham. Alabama, U. S. A. — Delegate. Glass, Mrs. Frank P., 2030 Quinlon, Birmingham, Alabama, U. S. A. — Guest. Glass, Frank P., Jr., World, New York City. U. S. A.— Delegate. Glass, Mrs. Frank P., Jr., New York City, U. S. A.— Guest. Goldthwaite, S. G., News-Republican, Boone, Iowa, U. S. A. — Delegate. Goldthwaite, Mrs. S. G., Boone, Iowa, U. S. A.— Guest. Gordon, Marshall, Missouri Press Association, Columbia, Mis- souri, U. S. A. — Delegate, I Appendix 511 Gordon, Mrs. Marshall, Columbia, Missouri, U. S. A. — ^^Guest. Greason, W. D., Miami Republican, Paola, Kansas, U. S. A. — Delegate. Grisson, Miss Maybel Louise, Michigan Woman's Press Associa- tion, Grand Ledge, Michigan, U. S. A. — Delegate. Hadley, Charles C, Kennett News and Advertiser, Kennett Square, Pennsylvania, U. S. A. — Delegate. Hadley, Mrs. Charles C, Kennett Square, Pennsylvania, U. S. A. — Guest. Hale, H. B., Gazette, East Hartford, Connecticut, U. S. A. — Delegate. Hale, Mrs. H. B., East Hartford, Connecticut, U. S. A.— Guest. Hall, Frederick P., Journal, Jamestown, New York, U. S. A. — Delegate. Harris, Mrs. Ralph A., Herald, Ottawa, Kansas, U. S. A. — Delegate. Heenan, David, Jr., 250 Kaiulaui avenue, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Herrick, John P., Bolivar Breeze, Olean, New York, U. S. A. — Delegate. Herrick, Mrs. John P., Olean, New York, U. S. A. — Guest. Hersey, Miss Mary S., Milton, Mass., U. S. A. — Guest. Hodges, W. R., Herald-Dispatch, Sleepy Eye, Minnesota, U. S. A. — Delegate. Hornaday, William D., School of Journalism, University of Texas, Austin, Texas, U. S. A. — Delegate. Hsu, Jabin, China Press, Shanghai, China. — Delegate, lies, Harry, Southwest Builder and Contractor, Los Angeles, Cali- fornia, U. S. A. — Delegate. Innes, Guy, Herald, Melbourne, Australia. — Delegate. Innes, Mrs. Guy, Melbourne, Australia. — Guest. Johnston, F. H., Review, Hermosa Beach, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. Johnston, Mrs. F, H., Hermosa Beach, California, U. S. A. — Guest. Johnston, Miss W. Valeria, Hermosa Beach, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. 512 The Press Congress of the World Junkin, J. E., National Editorial Association, Miami, Florida, U. S. A.— Delegate. Junkin, Mrs. J. E., Miami, Florida, U. S. A.— Guest. Kelly, Eugene, Tribune, Sioux City, Iowa, U. S. A. — Delegate. Kelly, Mrs., Eugene, Sioux City, Iowa, U. S. A. — Guest. Kern, Frank L., Worth While Magazine, 1021 S. Berendo street, Los Angeles, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. Kessell, John Henry, Gladstone Observer, Gladstone, Queensland, Australia. — Delegate. Kessell, Mrs. J. H., Gladstone, Queensland, Australia. — Guest. Kettle, William R., Evening Star, Greymouth, New Zealand. — Delegate. Kettle, Mrs. W. R., Greymouth, New Zealand. — Guest. Kettle, Miss Viola, Greymouth, New Zealand. — 'Guest. Kim, Dong-sung, Dong-A Daily, Seoul, Korea. — Delegate. Kline, Gardiner, Evening Recorder, Amsterdam, New York, U. S. A.— Delegate. Klock, Jay E., Daily Freeman, Kingston, New York, U. S. A. — Delegate. Kriegesman, George W., News-Times, Webster Groves, Missouri, U. S. A.— Delegate. Langley, Doris H., Herald, Tippecanoe City, Ohio, U. S. A. — Delegate. Lawson, Col. Edward Frederick, Daily Telegraph, London, Eng- land. — Delegate. Lawson, Mrs. E. F., London, England. — Guest. Lazo, Agustin, Havana Reporters Association, Herald of Cuba, Havana, Cuba. — Delegate. LeFavour, Mrs. Helen, Amsterdam, New York, U. S. A. — Guest. Lennon, Mrs. C. W., Sioux City, Iowa, U. S. A.— Guest. Logan, Daniel, National Magazine, Boston, Mass., U. S. A. — Delegate. Mayrand, Oswald, La Presse, Montreal, Canada. — Delegate. Medary, Edgar F., Democrat, Waukon, Iowa, U. S. A. — Dele- gate. Mezquida, Mrs. Anna Blake, League of American Pen Women, 969 Pine street, San Francisco, California, U. S. A.— Dele- gate. Appendix 513 Mills, Frank M., On the Cars, Sioux Falls, South Dakota, U. S. A. — ^Delegate. Mills, Mrs. Frank M., Sioux Falls, South Dakota, U. S. A.— Guest. Mitchell, Miss Frances C. Centralia Courier, Columbia, Missouri, U. S. A.— Delegate. Morris, John R., Japan Advertiser, Tokyo, Japan. — Delegate. McAdams, Mrs. A. G., Dallas, Texas, U. S. A.-^Guest. McClatchy, V. S., Bee, Sacramento, California, U. S. A. — Dele- gate. McClatchy, Mrs. V. S., Sacramentfo, California, U. S. A. — Guest. McCullough, William, Thames Star, Thames, Auckland, New Zealand. — Delegate. McKeown, Mrs. Lillian, Sun and Evening Telegram, San Ber- nardino, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. McMaster, C. H., Tribune, Galveston, Texas, U. S. A.— Delegate. McMaster, Mrs. C. H., Galveston, Texas, U. S. A. —Guest. Ness, John F., Honolulu Press Club. — Delegate. Nevin, C. E., Advocate, Laurel, Nebraska, U. S. A. — Delegate. Nieva, Gregorio, Philippine Review, Manila, P. L — Delegate. Nolen, Miss Anna E., News, Monroe City, Missouri, U. S. A. — Delegate. Orcutt, Reginald W., Linotype Bulletin, 1219 Madison avenue. New York City, U. S. A.^Delegate. Orcutt, Mrs. Reginald W., New York City. U. S. A.— Guest. Patton, H. W., special writer, Hoquiam, Washington, U. S. A. — Delegate. Perry, Miss Eugenie, Canadian Women's Press Club, Victoria, B. C— Delegate. Petrie, Thomas, South China Morning Post, Hongkong, China. — Delegate. Petrie, Mrs. Thomas, Hongkong, China. — Guest. Pierce, Henry Douglas, Vinton-Pierce Building, Indianapolis. In- diana, U. S. A. — Delegate. Powell, H. J., Journal, Cofifeyville, Kansas, U. S. A. — Delegate. Powell, Mrs. H. J., Coffeyville, Kansas, U. S. A.— Guest. Reed. Mrs. Emma Livingston, Southern California Woman's Press Club, Los Angeles, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. 33 514 The Press Congress of the World Richardson, J. A., Sunflower Tocsin, Indianola, Mississippi, U. S. A. — Delegate. Rhodes, Mrs. John F., Hutchinson, Kansas, U. S. A. — Delegate. Saxe, Ludvig, Verdens Gang, Christiania, Norway. — Delegate. Schuler, Mrs. Maud, Gadsden, Alabama, U. S. A. — Guest. Shaw, Mrs. Mabel S., Evening Telegraph, Dixon, Illinois, U. S. A. — Delegate. Smith, C. Stanley, Evening Star, Dunedin, New Zealand. — ^Dele- gate. Smith, Mrs. C. Stanley, Dunedin, New Zealand. — Guest. Smith, William J., Daily Sun, Waukegan, Illinois, U. S. A. — Delegate. Soga, Y., Nippu Jiji, P. O. Box 897, Honolulu, T. H.— Delegate. Southern, William, Jr., Daily Examiner, Independence, Missouri, U. S. A.— Delegate. Southern, Miss Caroline, Daily Examiner, Independence, Mis- souri, U. S. A. — Delegate. Stone, John I., Honolulu Press Club, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Sturgis, H. S., Times, Neosho, Missouri, U. S. A. — Delegate. Sturgis, Mrs. H. S., Neosho, Missouri, U. S. A.— Guest. Sugimura, K., Asahi Shimbun, Tokyo, Japan. — Delegate. Temple, Mrs. Oda M., Republican, Mountain Home, Idaho, U. S. A.— Delegate. Thorpe, Mrs. George C, Quarters A. Marine Barracks, Pearl Harbor, T. H.— Delegate. Thurston, L. A., Advertiser, Honolulu, T. H. — Delegate. Tong, Hollington K., North China Star, Peking, China. — Dele- gate. Townsend, Mrs. Georgina S., 5703 Victoria avenue, Los Angeles, California, U. S. A., (President, Southern California Wo- man's Press Club.) — Delegate. Traer, Mrs. Louise M., Eagle, Vinton, Iowa, U. S. A. — Delegate. Underbill, Edwin S., Leader, Corning, New York, U. S. A. — Delegate. Wang, K. P., Shun Pao, Shanghai, China. — ^Delegate. Wang, T. M., Shun Pao, Shanghai, China. — Delegate. Ward. Miss Etta L. Courier, Winchendon, Mass., U. S. A. — Delegate. Appendix 515 Warren, Mrs. John Trenholm, Honolulu Press Club, Box 769, Honolulu, T. H.— Delegate. Watts, Arretta L., Long Beach, California, U. S. A. — Delegate. Wilke, Will, Gazette, Grey Eagle, Minnesota, U. S. A. — Delegate. Wilke, Clyde S., Gazette, Grey Eagle, Minnesota, U. S. A. — Delegate. Williams, Walter, Dean School of Journalism, University of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri, U. S. A. — Delegate. Wong, Hin, Star, Canton, China. — Delegate. Woodring, Mrs. Charlotte, Journal, Peru, Indiana, U. S. A. — Delegate. Woods, G. A., Boomer, El Reno, Oklahoma, U. S. A. — Delegate. Xanders, Mrs. Amanda L., League of American Pen Women, York, Pennsylvania, U. S. A. — Delegate. Yamagata, I., Press, Seoul, Korea. — Delegate. Zerbey, Maj. J. H., Jr., Republican, Pottsville, Pennsylvania, U. S. A. — Delegate. Zerbey, Elizabeth, Pottsville, Pennsylvania, U. S. A. — Guest. Zerbey, Mildred, Pottsville, Pennsylvania, U. S. A. — 'Guest. Zumoto, Motosada, Herald of Asia, Tokyo, Japan — Delegate. IN THE EDITORIAL "CROW'S NEST' By Joe Mitchell Chapple, Editor, National Magazine, Boston, Massachusetts, U. S. A. Nations are figuratively referred to as "Ships of State," sail- ing on oceans wide. Longfellow's allusion to the United States during the dark days of the Civil War sounded the clarion call of world union: "Thou, too, oh Ship of State, sail on, sail on!" In these days of revolutionary typhoons the tides of the "Seven Seas" — confined to Aegean shores in ancient days — have extended their ebb and flow to all nations of the earth. The swift currents and course of human events have merged and turned the tides of world thought toward the discovery of a great common sea of humanity. 516 The Press Congress of the World It is fitting that the World Press Congress, meeting in the mid-waters of an ocean christened because of the placid view it first presented to Balboa on the heights of Darien, should con- sider the Pacific question in its broadest sense as the great prob- lem of the hour. From the earliest time that a sail carried man and cargo far over seas, the man in the "crow's nest" has been the one to warn of danger, or give the joyful shout of "land ho !" or "ship ahoy !" Whether a crude galley of ancient days or the modern leviathan, the man in the lookout remains indispensable as an assurance that the "port of safety" will be reached. Since the days of Gutenberg and the invention of movable types, the editor or the writer has been in the "crow's nest" of the "ships of state." Statesmen rise to imperishable fame or sink into oblivion — leaders come and go — from reckonings determined by the man in the "crow's nest." The reference to the editor in the lookout is not merely a matter of professional praise, for he has often been wrong as well as right. It indicates how the log of the Ship of State is anade up from the estimate of new leaders appearing on the horizon, crystalized into biographies which con- stitute the chronicles of peoples, nations, and events. The history of the United States is interwoven with the files of its newspapers, which have always been a vital factor in the every day thought and activities of our national life. From the time that the first newspaper was printed in the western hemis- phere — when the Boston News Letter came out of the press damp and limp — ^the "Voice of the People," shouting from aloft, through contributor's columns, editorials, or blazing headlines, have represented the dominating influence of public opinion, re- flected in the American newspapers. Even the thought that their ideas would be further exploited and heralded in the newspapers may well have inspired the im- passioned addresses of Patrick Henry and James Otis and other crusaders for liberty in critical colonial days. The American press has ever taken cognizance of the doings of the humblest individual, whether it be John Jones painting his barn, or Sally, the society queen. pOAvdering her nose. A na- tion of one hundred million humans, distinct as individuals in Appendix 517 some way, at some time, come within personal survey of the edi- tor's "crow's nest." Newspapers are, in fact, the people. They constitute the very soul of our body politic. The editor in the "crow's nest" may give the warning, but on the deck below, holding a firm hand on the helm, is the master of the ship, a representative of the people, in a representative republic. The captain on our "Ship of State" at this time is President Warren G. Harding, backed by the suffrage of a score of millions of voters. He is also the Honorary President of this Congress. As an editor, he has occupied the "crow's nest." His glasses have been intensified with a range widened into the scope of world affairs. His calm poise at this time, when heavy seas are rolling, calls to mind Walt Whitman's tribute to Lin- coln. "O Captain ! my Captain ! The port is near, the bells I hear, the people all exulting, While follow eyes the steady keel, the vessel firm and daring." Here, indeed, we find a poetic and appropriate setting for deliberations outlined in the thought of the great discoverer who rapturously cried "The Pacific !" Even the name suggests the object of the discussion. The world is looking forward to the limitation of armament as a means of establishing enduring peace. The Pacific question is the great problem of the world future. The European situation involves problems of yesterday. Peace treaties of London, Paris, Vienna, Berlin have in the past ac- complished cessation from war, but never have they reached a determination on the Limitation of Armament as a prevention of bloodshed, nor did they quell the lust for territorial gain and the revenge of racial hatred. Nations now join in a cry for peace, a peace that will pre- serve rather than destroy. Centuries have swung around and the Orient is being rediscovered ; China with its most ancient of civili- zations ; Japan with its millions of virile people ; India, Egypt, Persia, Siberia, and Russia all seeking their new destiny in the so- lution of the Pacific question. The waters of the Pacific have never been reddened by a great naval battle for conquest. The Orient gives back to the Occident ideals of an ancient civilization, which may have suggestions for a future of world happiness. China, the very country where gunpowder was first manufactured, but 518 The Press Congress of the World never used for destruction of life — where with their original mariner's compass it was first discovered that the world was round, but the knowledge not utilized for conquest — may furnish a new angle from the ancient arts of peace, as practised in those cycles of Cathay. Thus all the powers of civilization, old and new^— all the energies of the united world thought, are concentrated today upon building enduring temples of peace. Here in Hawaii, where volcanoes have erupted with wild fury, leaving around them this Paradise of beauty, with its soft, witching tone color, in a cli- mate suggestive of poise and content, soothing thoughts condu- cive to sane decision should ensue. Honolulu, one of the fairest monuments to modern civiliza- tion, may become the friendly meeting place as the "house by the side of the seas," where new ideals of the friendship of men may flower. The welcome to the World Press Congress ex- presses ideals of Pan-Pacific unity that are inspiring. Editors who here foregather have occupied the "crow's nest" in all parts of the world, and have had all points of view, but all will agree that this metropolis of the cross-roads of the Pacific may become another Hague tribunal, triumphant in uniting the nations in the bonds of the encircled golden garlands of the lei, which comes with the welcome to wonderful Hawaii. Significant in the trend of recent events is the fact that the League of Nations, presumed by some to be in conflict with the ideals of the Washington conference for the limitation of ar- mament which meets in November, has sent greetings to that assembly, asking them to grapple this fundamental proposition of the Limitation of Armament. This reflects the desire of all nations drawing closer together in consideration of these prob- lems. The doors of the Pan American Building in Washington, owned by twenty-six nations of the Americas, have been thrown wide open to discuss and settle the great question of the hour. With the skylight of the patios of this building drawn aside, the conference may convene under the canopy of heaven, without reflection from such as the Hall of Mirrors at Versailles. The spectres of designing diplomats, and rife intrigue, playing with peoples as pawns in a game of war and peace, will not shadow Appendix 519 the promised blessing of the great Source of sunshine and per- fect peace. Here will prevail the supreme object of drawing the fangs of armament and preventing the sowing of the dragon's teeth for future wars. The whims of "war lords," whether of royal birth or commercial power, can never again bring a deluge of human blood, leaving behind a waste and gruesome misery. There to record and chart the destiny of nations, the editors in the "crow's nest" will be on watch. No longer may a trifling incident be used to fan a revolution or a declaration of war. Those pricking quills, inspired by greed, intrigue, ambition, and hate, must be disarmed before the floodgates of war can be closed. There have been men in the "crow's nest" who served as free-booters, sailing under banners shadowed with the pirate's grisly emblem of the skull and crossbones. The editorial "crow's nest" cannot be fouled with its own am- bition and lust of power if the happiness of the world is to be attained. In my modest editorial "crow's nest" there has appeared to me one great anchor of Hope. In personal observation on fields of battle overseas during the darkest days of the World War — in the day of tension following the armistice, when dawned the pure white light of promised peace — in a trip across the conti- nent of my own country in contact with the people day after day, there has appeared to me this one harbinger of hope. It is woman! Woman's entrance into the real affairs of the world will, in my judgment, save the race. In the United States, Canada, Eng- land, and other divisions of the British Empire she has the bal- lot, but the influence of women's voice and power extends to every nook and corner of the world. She has become a part of the warp and woof of our economic fabric. Wherever the word "home" is understood or idealized, the influence and power of mothers and women is being felt. The primal instinct of pro- tecting her young and refusing longer to furnish her own flesh and blood to feed the maw of war, makes woman a dominant factor in the destiny of nations. Her instinct is preservation of the race. With her power of the ballot she seeks to protect her own 520 The Press Congress of the f For Id and her home from the ravages of commercial greed which had often led to wars. The economic question involved in providing food for her young, whom she has oft seen dying of starvation in her arms, while armament and wars increase, is now a problem for all nations. Motherlands have supplanted fatherlands. The mother's intuition has been awakened. Woman has stood at the sacrificial altar of wars, ceAtury after century, giving of her treasure — her own flesh and blood. She has been the vicarious atonement for the sins of men. The world-wide maternal influence is glori- fied, yes, deified — more than ever before in the history of the world since the days of Mary and the Manger. The Star of Bethlehem guided the men of the East, not to a throne supported by might or relying upon military armament to maintain life, and power, but to a lowly manger, o'er which hangs the eternal halo of a mother's love. The guiding influence of the editor in the "crow's nest" is an intuitive and composite knowledge of humanity. The vision he commands encircles all activities and phases of life. He knows about laws and courts and recognizes the home as the bulwark of enduring happiness. He knows industry in its demands ; and the whir of wheels is music if attuned to the labor of the fields. He is familiar with the ideals of the church and the cabaret, the gentle soul of love and the jarry jazz. He rambles with the rich man, ponders with the poor man — in all cases he seeks first the common ground of an understanding of human beings. The editor in the "crow's nest" at sea has a counterpart in the editor of the sanctum. He lives in the "house by the side of the road" and sees the procession of men pass by. But never can he sit in the scorner's seat, for he knows that amid all the rush and jar of life the greatest achievement of man comes with the prayer: "Write me as one that loves his fellow-man." The name of Abou ben Adhem was written first in the book of gold and led all the rest because he loved his fellow-man. Responsive to the heart impulse of the people, the editor knows what makes sunny days enduring and dark days endurable. Whether in the dangers that threaten in prosperity, or the blows and blights of adversity, he knows that the heart must reign supreme. Appendix 521 In shadow and sunshine, storm and tempest, the editor in the "crow's nest" will stick to his post with a conviction that the old Ship of State carries the sheet anchor of Hope for "man born of woman" — and that the Port of Humanity is the one haven big enough to ensure enduring peace and happiness for all the race. That harbor surely affords safe anchorage for all of God's children. JOURNALISM IN KOREA By DoNG-SuNG Kim, Representative of the Dong-A Daily, Seoul, Korea. Journalism is nothing new in Korea. The Official Gazette, which was not unlike the modern official organ of a government, was started in the tenth century. The movable metal type was invented by our ancestors long before it was known in Europe. But the real modern newspaper began its publications quarter of a century ago. To be exact the Independent News which lived but a short life under the old regime was published in the year of 1894. The Capital News succeeded it until the time of Jap- anese annexation, 1910. There were several minor papers which were stopped simultaneously with the annexation. With the annexation came the suppression of free press. The first Korean periodical that appeared since was a literary magazine called Chung-chun or The Youth, edited by Choi Nam- sun, later known as the author of the famous Korean Declara- tion of Independence. The Youth was the guiding light in a stormy sea. Although it was supposed to be a monthly magazine, only fifteen numbers appeared during its existence from Sep- tember, 1914, to the time of Mr. Choi's arrest in 1919. The rea- son was that the manuscripts had to be submitted to the censor, who might keep them for months as he turned over pages in search of some "dangerous thoughts" or undesirable articles. In 522 The Press Congress of the World case he found anything that was in any way not in accord with the policy of the government; he would blue-pencil that par- ticular section or the entire manuscripts for the month. In those days hardly a page of manuscript was OK'ed by the censor as it was turned in to him. In order to obtain the necessary permit for his publication, it is said that, Mr. Choi had to visit the Government offices every day for about three years until finally he was given a permit to run his press. His personality and enthusiasm induced even the authorities of that time to give him a permit, which was regarded as nothing less than a miracle. Nevertheless, it was a credit to the Japanese authorities in those dark days. Of newspapers, there was for several years only one semi- official organ, the Maill-Shinpo. This was the paper formerly owned by the late Mr. E. T. Bethell, a British subject. It was purchased by the Japanese government in Korea and turned into a semi-official organ. The public had to take news through this medium whether they liked it or not, and it enjoyed the distinction of being the only newspaper printed in Korean lan- guage until the time of Mansei demonstrations in 1919. As a direct result of that disturbance, Korea has now three daily papers besides the semi-official organ, and twenty odd magazmes mostly on general culture. Baron Saito, the new Japanese Governor-General, has done many things worth while for the welfare of the Korean people, one of which was the permission he gave on January 6th, 1920, to publish three daily newspapers in Korean. Evidently he realized that it would be far better for all concerned to give the people some opportunity of expressing their grievances than to suppress thoughts which might generate more agitation. Heretofore the people had been compelled to be blind, deaf and mute. Among the three hundred and forty thousand Japanese in Korea, there are twenty-three dailies, three weeklies and eight monthlies, all published in Japanese, besides four news agencies. The Seoul Press is an English edition. Among the eighteen million Koreans in Korea, there were three but now only two dailies permitted. Shisa-Shin-moon or The Times is already a thing of the past. It was the organ of Appendix 523 the National Association, the head of which was the late Min Won-shik. The policy of this journal was the assimilation of two races, Korean and Japanese, by declaring a new Japanism. The paper stopped soon after the death of Mr. Min without any visible hope of being run again under the same management. For the time being the people are content with two papers out of the three that were permitted under the new Governor-General. The second of these three is Chosun-Ilbo or The Korea Daily, which was under the management of the Peers Club, although the management has now been transferred to Count Song Byung- shun, who was a member of the Cabinet at the time of the an- nexation. In spite of its pro-Japanese ownership, the paper has had thirty-seven issues suppressed, and almost three months sus- pension since it began publication eighteen months ago. In ac- tual number of suppressions this paper leads, due to its strong utterances sometimes in disregard of police warnings. Yet the people look upon it merely as the organ of the peers, for whom they have not much respect. The paper claims to have a cir- culation of ten thousand and the policy is generally neutral with regard to political affairs. Last but not least is the Dong-A Daily, which is already known internationally as the voice of Korea. It turns out fifty thousand copies every day in the year, when it is not suspended by the powers that be. It is really in a sense the successor of the old Hwangsung-Shin-moon or the Capital News, the editor of which, Ryu Keun, was imprisoned at the time of annexation. Mr. Ryu was editor of this new daily until he died a few months ago. The present editor, Chang Duk-soo, is a young man of twenty- seven, who was exiled to a lonely island away from his political activities but was released to accompany Mr. Lyu from Shanghai to Tokyo, upon the invitation of the Japanese Government after the Independence agitation. On account of the personnel of the editorial stafif, one Japanese contemporary called it "a den of anti- Japanese," which was an unjust comment for a paper which advocates the rights of the people, whether they are Japanese, or Koreans. It claims that it is not anti-Japanese but anti-militarist. The stock of the Dong-A Daily Company was subscribed by the people all over the country. Its aims are ( 1 ) to be the organ 524 The Press Congress of the World of the people, (2) to stand for democracy, and (3) to foster the enHghtenment of the nation. It began its pubHcation April 1, 1920, and suffered sixteen suppressions during six months up to September 25, when it was suspended for four months. Then the paper reappeared in February this year, since then it has suffered seven suppressions. Two of the issues suppressed dur- ing the month of August simply contained items translated from Japanese papers. On the sixth of August it was suppressed for news about the border situation that appeared in a Japanese con- temporary in Seoul, while on the twenty-third August it was sup- pressed for reporting the activities of Dr. Syngman Rhee, whom the Koreans claim as their president. This last item for which the paper suffered suppression was a translation of what had appeared in the Tokyo Asahi. Thus the paper stands in a rather delicate position between the authorities and the people, and it is a difficult task to please everybody in spite of the pre- cautions of the editors. Suppressions often result from the au- thorities misinterpreting or misunderstanding the editor's aim. Sometimes, when it is suppressed, the paper may be printed as an "extra" after eliminating the "obnoxious item." The Dong-A Daily has a paid subscription of fifty thousand which is the largest in Korea. The periodicals in Korea are quite numerous, including re- ligious journals under foreign supervision. The actual number of magazines published is twenty-three; all of them are non-poli- tical. Among these Kai Byuk, or The Creation, is one of the best with the largest circulation. It is under the management of the followers of the new religion, called the Heavenly Path, the head of which, Song Byung-hi, was also the leader of the thirty- three signatories of the Korean Declaration of Independence on March 1, 1919. Appendix 525 THE PRESS OF SWITZERLAND By Edouard Chapuisat, Journal de Geneve, Geneva. La presse suisse a des etats de services deja fort anciens et que pourraient lui envier de nombreux pays infiniment plus importants par leur etendue. C'est en I'annee 1610 que Ton signale deja, pour la suisse de langue allemande, un journal qui paraissait a Bale chaque se- maine. A Ziirich des 166^ se publie aussi une gazette et, au commencement du XVIIIeme siecle, on mentionne plusieurs jour- naux a Coire, a Beriiea Schaffhouse et a Lucerne et St-Gall. La Suisse de langue f rangaise est venue plus tard que la suisse de langue allemande au journalisme. C'est en 1634 que parut a Geneve pour la premiere fois une publication periodique in- titulee Le Mercure Suisse. Des la fin du XVIIeme siecle le journalisme litteraire fait son apparition, ce qui n'est pas sur- prenant dans une ville qui s'honorait d'etre pour des causes di- verses, et en particulier a la suite de persecutions contre les pro- testants, un refuge de savants et d'erudits. La Suisse de langue italienne pent, des I'annee 1746, revendi- quer aussi rhonneur d'avoir eu des publications periodiques. Jusqu'a cette epoque elle parait avoir beneficie presque exclusive- ment des journaux de I'ltalie, si proche du Tessin. Le fait meme que nous mentionnons sous trois rubriques sjDeciales les dates des premieres publications de journaux, marque la difficulte de la tache de la presse suisse, mais aussi le role considerable qu'elle est appelee a jouer dans ce pays. Composee de 22 cantons distincts — etats souverains — qui ne beneficient pas d'un meme langage dont les populations sont is- sues de races tres dififerentes et dont les moeurs sont parfois dis- semblables, la suisse presente sur la surface du globe un exemple caracteristique. II a ete trop souvent mis en evidence pour que nous y revenions ici, mais on congoit que la presse soit un agent de liaison non seulement utile, mais absolument necessaire pour que tons ces petits peuples, qui ont decide de vivre ensemble, ne vivent pas seulement du point de vue d'un interet materiel com- 526 The Press Congress of the World mun, mais aussi d'une meme conception en ce qui concerne les idees generales a la base du pays. La Suisse n'ayant jamais connu d'autre regime que la demo- cratie — a part quelques petits etats qui eurent des organisations aristocratiques tres vite dissipees — doit s'employer a maintenir cet esprit democratique. Toute sa presse s'y consacre et Ton peut afifirmer que si, malgre des divergences d'opinions parfois impor- tantes, aucune scission n'est possible en Suisse, c'est parce que la democratic, pivot central de sa politique, n'a jamais ete contestee. Mais si la presse Suisse a une experience tres grande de la democratic, elle varie aussi dans ses idees sur Tapplication du principe et c'est la qu'apparait son role qui, tout en discutant les theories, la ramene constamment au principe essentiel et commun. Les suisses se preoccupent beaucoup de politique et I'instruc- tion tres generalment repandue leur permet d'y vouer une atten- tion speciale. II n'est pas sans interet de constater que pour une population de 4 millions d'habitants environ, la suisse compte 1500 journaux ce qui fait un journal pour un peu plus de 2000 habitants. C'est, si nous ne nous trompons, la plus forte propor- tion connue et cela encore donne a la presse suisse une impor- tance particuliere. On peut s'en rendre compte d'une faqon spe- ciale lorsqu'il s'agit de questions soumises au referendum ou qui necessitent I'intervention directe du peuple par voie de plebiscite. Un exemple frappant est celui du vote du peuple suisse relatif a la Societe des Nations. Alors meme que le cas fut tout a fait par- ticulier, le peuple suisse a estime que c'etait lui et non pas ses magistrats qui devait decider de son entree ou non dans la So- ciete des Nations et Ton se souvient que le peuple a adhere a une enorme majorite au nouveau principe humanitaire inaugure par la Societe. Sur le nombre de journaux que nous venons de signaler, il est evident que tous ne sont pas quotidiens. Leur tirage, il va de soi, n'equivaut pas non plus au grand tirage de vastes pays. Pourtant tous subsistent et vivent malgre les difficultes resultant, dans la periode actuelle. du cout du papier, deia sensiblement ameliore, et des augmentations importantes consenties aux typo- graphes. Si la plupart des journaux traitcnt principalement des ques- Appendix 527 tions de politique interieure, tous renseignent aussi sur la po- litique exterieure. Beaucoup meme y vouent un interet special comme, par exemple, le Journal de Geneve, la Nouvelle Gazette de Zurich, la Gazette de Lausanne. L'etranger veut bien faire I'honneur a la presse suisse d'at- tacher une importance particuliere a ses avis car elle a une re- putation d'honnetete qui est le plus precieux de ses tresors. D'au- tre part la neutralite du pays permet de supposer que sa presse n'est pas infeodee a tel ou tel etat et que par consequent les jugements qu'elle porte lui sont toujours dictes par un sentiment de justice et de droiture. L'un des caracteres principaux de la presse suisse, est son in- dependance. Independance vis-a-vis de l'etranger, independance aussi a I'interieur. Aucune loi sur la presse ne bride ses elans. Elle reste done d'une fagon absolue seule juge des circonstances politiques qui se deroulent autour d'elle. II n'y a pas d'organe officiel ni officieux du Gouvernement suisse, sans doute tel ou tel magistrat peut avoir des relations plus particulieres avec tel ou tel journal et le prendre plus volontiers pour confident. Mais ce sont la des faits tout a fait personnels et meme isoles. On ne saurait dire que tel journal represente la pensee du Gouverne- ment pris dans son integralite. Nous y voyons une force pour avancement des idees a I'interieur du pays. Le jeu de la libre critique est essentiel dans une democratic. D'apres ce que nous venons de dire, on voit que la presse suisse est plus particulierement portee a etudier les questions politiques. C'est peut-etre pour cette raison que les directeurs (editeurs) des grands journaux ont le plus souvent commence leur carriere dans le droit avant de s'adonner d'une maniere complete au journalisme, II ne faudrait cependant pas croire que les interets scienti- fiques, agraires, litteraires et artistiques sont negliges. De nom- breuses publications speciales traitent des divers sujects auxquels nous faisons allusion et la plupart des journaux quotidiens aussi — en tous cas les plus grands — ont des rubriques ou ces questions sont traitees par des specialistes. II est bon de signaler ce fait dans ce pays ou trois cultures sont juxtaposees, car cela permet de marquer I'interpenetration de ces cultures sur un espace a 528 The Press Congress of the World vrai dire restreint mais ou un public instruit est capable d'en profiter. Les traductions en frangais, en allemand, en italien, ou vice versa, sont frequentes dans les journax des trois langues et assurent une collaboration qui permet en fin de former une pyramide particulierement interessante pour tous ceux qui croient que I'esprit des hommes doit un jour se rencontrer sur les som- mets. * * * Les journalistes suisses ont plusieurs associations. La plus importante au point de vue professionnel est I'Association de la Presse suisse fondee le 16 juin 1884 a Lucerne et qui groupe 700 membres. Dans plusieurs des cantons (etats) existent des associations de presse cantonales (Association de la Presse genevoise, Asso- ciation de la Presse vaudoise, etc. etc.) Les associations can- tonales ont un but surtout amical tandis que I'Association de la Presse suisse, qui permet aux journalistes des diverses langues de se recontrer et d'echanger des idees, a plutot une tendance a sau- vegarder les interets professionnels. C'est le cas aussi du Syndi- cat de la Presse romande dont le siege est a Lausanne. A cote des ces organisations il s'est constitue a Geneve, des Tan dernier, un Cercle de la Presse, (siege, 1 Place du Lac,) qui prit tout de suite une certaine envergure etant donne le nombre important de journalistes etrangers qui sont venus se fixer a Geneve, siege de la Societe des Nations et de plusieurs institutions internationales, afin de suivre le developpement de ces entre- prises. Le Cercle de la Presse, en effet, accepte dans son sein les journalistes de tous les pays et nous croyons bien qu'actuellement il en est peu qui ne comptent pas des representants au sein du Cercle qui a ete fonde principalement pour creer un centre jour- nalistique facilitant la tache des professionnels et les mettant en rapport quelle que soit leur nationalite. * * * A cote de ces organisations qui concernent plus particuliere- ment les journalistes, nous devons mentionner une autre associa- tion, la Societe des Editeurs de journaux, d'ordre professionnel, mais qui permet aussi aux directeurs (editeurs) des periodiques suisses de se rencontrer sans tenir compte de leurs langues di- verses. Appendix 529 La presse Suisse est desservie, comme partout ailleurs, par des agences. L'Agence telegraphique suisse est rorganisation la plus im- portante de ce genre. Elle a son siege a Berne, capitale de la Suisse, mais a des succursales dans les villes principales. Une societe de telegraphic sans fil vient aussi de se constituer, dans I'idee surtout de servir la presse, qui compte deux represen- tants dans son Conseil d'administration, M. Usteri (de Ziirich) president du Conseil d'Adminstration de la Nouvelle Gazette de Zurich et M. Chapuisat (de Geneve) directeur (editor) du Jour- nal de Geneve. Comme adjuvant de la presse nous pensons qu'il convient aussi de signaler I'existence d'un Argus suisse de la Presse, (siege a Geneve) qui donne les coupures de tons les journaux du monde. C'est en Suisse que le Bureau de Propriete intellectuelle a son siege. II est situe a Berne et, sans etre specialement affec- te a la defense des droits du journalisme, il est, comme on s'en doute, bien loin d'etre etranger a ses efforts. C'est a Berne aussi que fut constitue le Musee Gutenberg Suisse au sujet duquel nous joignons a ce rapport une notice explicative. Le Musee Gutenberg, fonde en 1894, recueille tout ce qui concerne la Presse. Y a-t-il des principes communs a la presse suisse? Certaine- ment, et ils sont fixes par le reglement de I'Association de la presse suisse. Sans vouloir entrer ici dans trop de details, on pent affirmer que la base essentielle est I'honnetete. Un exemple : la Presse suisse n'accepte pas de reclame payante dans le texte du journal de faqon que Ton ne puisse pas dire que tel ou tel article a ete insere centre remuneration. Nous ne pouvons songer a entrer ici dans tous les details relatifs au journalisme helvetique. Nous pensons en avoir assez dit pour montrer son importance. Nous n' oublions pas d'ailleurs qu'en 1902 il se tint en Suisse un Congres international de la Presse et nous serious particu- lierement heureux de penser qu'im jour ou I'autre il pourrait de nouveau se tenir dans ce pays. 34 530 The Press Congress of the World En terminant, qu'il soit permis au rapporteur d'exprimer les sentiments de sympathie les plus sinceres de ses confreres suisses pour leurs confreres etrangers. Les journalistes suisses savent que, places au centre de races diverses, ils ont une veri- table mission a remplir, mission d'uinion et d'entente. S'ils savent aussi que, suivant le vieux dicton latin "rien de ce qui est humain ne doit leur etre etranger," ils savent encore que dans la carriere souvent difficile, remplie d'ecueils, qu'ils ont embrassee, il y a une jouissance supreme a pouvoir faire preuve de solidar- ite humaine et confraternelle. THE PRESS IN INDIA By RusTOM N. Vatchaghandy, Proprietor and Editor, Sanj Vartaman {Bvening Nezvs) of Bom- hay, India. The history of the Press legislation in India extends over a period of a hundred years. That legislation was at first directed against the Anglo-Indian press. During the first half of the nineteenth century, the Indian press was practically non-existent. The few papers that were published had a very small circulation not exceeding three hundred copies and exercised very little in- fluence over the public and the Government. The press that really counted was the Anglo-Indian press. Of course it did not represent the interests of the Indian people but of the small non- official Anglo-Indian community. As John Stuart Mill said: "English newspaper press in India is the organ only of the En- glish society and chiefly that part of it unconnected with the Government. It has little to do with natives and with the great interests of India." It was in a state of constant antagonism to the Government and severely criticised its policy and measures. The early policy of the Government of India towards the press was characterised by extreme severity. In 1799 Lord Wellesley passed some regulations for the better control of the press. Every paper was to be inspected by a censor before publication and im- mediate deportation for Europeans was the penalty for offend- Appendix 531 ing against the regulations. Marquis of Hastings softened these regulations but the general policy towards the press remained unchanged. The press was still prohibited from publishing "ani- madversions" on public measures and discussions tending to alarm the Indian people. Many Anglo-Indians defied these regulations and suffered punishment for their opinions. It was in 1822 that the question of the freedom of the press in India came to the front. In that year Sir Thomas Munro then Governor of Ma- dras wrote in his minute on the subject under the heading "Dan- ger of a Free Press in India." This minute was all the more surprising as Sir Thomas Munro was one of the most liberal- minded men of his time. His standpoint, however, was that if the liberty of the press was allowed in India the British Govern- ment would not be able to keep its control and domination over the Indian people. These views commended themselves to the Court of Directors in L/ondon. In spite of the protests of Raja Ram Mohan Roy, the leading Indian of his time, these views pre- vailed and on the fifth of April 1823 a regulation was passed called "A Regulation for preventing the establishment of print- ing presses without license and for restraining under certain cir- cumstances the circulation of printed books and papers." This regulation applied to Bengal only and therefore in January 1827, a similar regulation was passed by the Bombay Government. The principal provisions of these regulations were: — (1) No print- ing press was to be established and no book or paper was to be printed without a license from Government; (2) All books and papers printed under license were to be submitted to the Govern- ment for inspection; (3) The circulation of any newspaper or book might be prohibited by notice in the Government Gazette. Raja Ram Mohan Roy and his co-adjutors appealed to His Majesty the King against such a regulation and the way in which it was being worked. The memorial, however, proved unavail- ing and the Privy Council declined to comply with the petition, which was addressed to it. It will be seen from the above that these regulations introduced licensing as well as censorship of the press which are incompatible with a free press. These re- strictions on the press continued in force till the fifteenth of September 1835. In that year, they were repealed and re- 532 The Press Congress of the World placed by a new act, viz., Act XI of 1835. Lord William Beii- tinck made no change in the law but gradually he allowed great freedom. Sir Charles Metcalfe removed all restrictions (1835) by the new act. This new act which was substituted for the old regulation was quite an innocent measure, its object being simply to make printers and publishers "accessible to th.e laws of the land." It was drafted by Macaulay on the lines of the corre- sponding English statute and was the first Press Act enacted for the whole of India. It abolished censorship and the system of licenses, and introduced in their place a system of registration. Every owner of a press and every printer and publisher of any book or periodical work was obliged, under penalty, to sign and file before a magistrate a declaration setting forth a true and precise account of the premises wherein his printing or publish- ing was carried on. Sir Charles Metcalfe's press policy was not, approved of by the Court of Directors. No change, however, was made in the policy and the charter of freedom thus granted to the Indian Press remained in existence for about twenty- two years. After the mutiny of 1857, however, a bill was introduced for the better control of the press and passed on the same day, being known as Act XV of 1857. This Act applied to the whole of British India and re-enacted some of the provisions of the regulations of 1823. At the same time, the provisions of Act XI of 1835 were expressly maintained. It thus restored the old system of licenses without at the same time disturbing the system of registration then in vogue. In one respect, the new act was more liberal than the old regulation. There was to be no cen- sorship of the press. One of the most important provisions of the act was that it was to have efifect only for one year ; and it deserves to be noted that though the public excitement caused by the mutiny had not quite subsided, it was not renewed at the end of the period. The next step in press legislation was Act XXV of 1867. It is still in force as amended by Act XX of 1890. It repealed and re-enacted with slight changes, the provisions of the Act XI of 1835. It had been originally intended to provide rules for the preservation and registration of books only, for which no pro- vision had hitherto existed, but at a later stage, the bill was amend- ed so as to include the provision of Act XI of 1835. Appendix 533 We now come to the year 1870. In that year, the famous section 124-A, deahng with the offense of sedition, as it stood be- fore its amendment in 1898, was embodied in the Penal Code. The draft Penal Code was framed by Macaulay in 1837, but the Code itself was not enacted till 1860. The section dealing with sedition originally stood as Section 113 of the draft Code, but it came somehow to be omitted when the Code was passed. This omission has not been satisfactorily explained. Neither the Act XXV of 1867 nor the inclusion of the sedi- tion section in the ordinary law of the land interfered with ths legitimate freedom of the press. The sedition section was drafted on the lines of its English prototype and, though in later days, particularly in the memorable Tilak trial of 1897, it received a very strict interpretation from the Bombay High Court, the sec- tion itself evoked no opposition when it was embodied in the Penal Code. So, with the exception of one single year, viz., that of the mutiny, the freedom conferred upon the Indian press by Sir Charles Metcalfe, continued to be enjoyed by it till 1878, when it was again partially suspended by the Vernacular Press Act. This act, as its name indicates, applied only to the vernacu- lar press. It was passed in hot haste in one sitting without a single dissentient vote in the Imperial Council, where there were no elected members and where at the time only one Indian mem- ber was present. The object of the bill was to repress seditious writings in the vernacular newspapers and to check the system of extortion to which, it was alleged, native feudatories and native employees were at the time subjected by unscrupulous na- tive editors. This act was strongly opposed not only in India but in England and was condemned in Parliament by a large ma- jority amounting to over one hundred and fifty members. The late Mr. Gladstone who was then leader of the opposition, made a very strong speech opposing it. He said ; "They (the people of India) have or think they have plenty of causes of complaint. I am sorry to say, I regard this Press Act as one of the most salient among them ; but as I observe most of all from reading extracts sent home in order to make a case for the act, all these complaints in India appear to me to be particular complaints. They complain of the errors of Govern- ment just as we complain of them in this country." This act was 534 The Press Congress of the World in operation for a little over three years, and was practically kept on the statute-book without being enforced. For about fifteen years after the repeal of the Vernacular Press Act there was no change made in the legislation affecting the Indian Press. But again there was a wave of reaction, and in 1898 material amend- ments were introduced in the law concerning sedition. None of the changes was approved of by the educated public but in spite of the opposition the amendment of section 124-A of the Penal Code and the enactment of the new section, viz., 108 of the Crim- inal Procedure Code was passed. For about ten years after these changes there was no fresh legislation for the press but on the eighth of June 1908 an Act was passed called "The Newspapers (Incitement to offenses) Act" which was followed within two years by the full-fledged Press Act of 1910. The Newspapers Act was a small act of only ten sections and designed for the pre- vention of incitements to murder and other offenses in news- papers. It has been truly said that neither the conduct of the newspapers nor the publication of books in India during all the period subsequent to the mutiny had been of such a character as to induce the British Government in India to reverse the entire policy followed in the past and go back upon the tradi- tions of the British Jurisprudence so thoroughly as to enact a law licensing censorship of the Press. When the Indian Press Act of 1910 was therefore enacted, preceded as it was by a number of other repressive laws connected with the unrest of 1905-08, the first effort apparently made was to introduce the system of licensing and preventive control of the press by the executive. This act does not ostensibly purport to establish a system of licensing or censorship of the Indian press. It purports only to modify the law of press registration as defined in the Act of 1867 by starting with a demand for securities in all cases when a- new registration and declaration of printing press or a newspaper has to be effected under the act. No security, however, it was de- clared in the statement of objects and reasons, "is to be given by existing presses until they offended the Government." The security as deposited becomes liable to forfeiture as also the press and newspaper concerned as well as further security taken under the act whenever the local Government finds any publica- Appendix 535 tion made by the papers or presses to be seditious or otherwise objectionable as defined in the act. Upon such orders for for- feiture, the act purports to provide what Lord Morley described as : "Appeal to a Court of Law in due form." All such safe- guards and assurances which secured the consent of elected repre- sentatives of the people by the late Mr. Gokhale and also the then Liberal Secretary of State, Lord Morley, proved a mere hallucination when the act came to be practically worked by the bureaucracy. The tendency to treat the act as one investing the executive with the powers of control over the printing presses and newspapers soon expanded and developed in a manner which became a serious menace to the very existence of the Indian press . in the country. The existing presses and papers were in fact always liable to a demand for security whenever they had to go to make a fresh declaration even on account of technical grounds like a change in the residence, etc. Since 1910 there has been a consistent opposition from the whole of the Indian people to this legislation and the arbitrary manner in which it was worked to put down the freedom and liberty of the Indian press. For one whole decade, however, the Government of India remained obtuse to all such appeals and representations showing how very little popular voice counts in the administration of this country. It was only in the last March that a sub-committee of the Im- perial Council was appointed to consider the Press Act and other legislative enactments and this committee has only recently reported that the Press Act must be repealed. It may be hoped that this report of the committee will be adopted by the Govern- ment and this repressive legislation removed from the statute- book altogether. This short survey of the history of the press legislation in India will not perhaps be deemed complete unless I give a history of the press from the starting of the first newspaper in 1780 in Calcutta. This short history is given in Indian Year-book pub- lished by the Times of India and gives a pithy summary of the evolution of the Indian newspapers. The newspaper press in India is an essentially English in- stitution and was introduced soon after the task of organizing the administration was seriously taken in hand by the English 536 The Press Congress of the World in Bengal. In 1773 was passed the Regulating Act creating the Governor-Generalship and the Supreme Court in Bengal and within seven years at the end of the same decade, the first newspaper was started in Calcutta by an Englishman in Jan- uary 1780. Exactly a century and a third has elapsed since, not a very long period certainly, a period almost measured by the life of a single newspaper. The Times, which came into existence only five years later in 1785 ; but then the period of British su- premacy is not much longer, having commenced at Plassey, only twenty-three years earlier. Bombay followed Calcutta closely, and Madras did not lag much behind. In 1789 the first Bombay newspaper appeared. The Bombay Herald, followed next year by The Bombay Courier, a paper now represented by the Times of India with which it was amalgamated in 1861. In Bombay the advent of the Press may be said to have followed the British occupation of the Island much later than was the case in Cal- cutta. In Calcutta the English were on sufferance before Plassey, but in Bombay they were absolute masters after 1665, and it is somewhat strange that no Englishman should have thought of starting a newspaper during all those hundred and twenty-five years before the actual advent of The Herald. The first newspaper was called The Bengal Gazette which is better known from the name of its founder as Hicky's Gazette or Journal. Hicky like most pioneers had to suffer for his enter- prising spirit, though the fault was entirely his own, as he made his paper a medium of publishing gross scandal, and he and his journal disappeared from public view in 1782. Several journals rapidly followed Hicky's though they did not fortunately copy its bad example. The Indian Gazette had a career of over half a century, when in 1833 it was merged into Bengal Harkaru, which came into existence only a little later, and both are now represented by The Indian Daily News with which they were amalgamated in 1866. No fewer than five papers followed in as many years, the Bengal Gazette of 1780, and one of these. The Calcutta Gazette, started in February 1784, under the avowed patronage of Government, flourishes still as the official gazette of the Bengal Government. From its commencement the press was jealously watched by Appendix 537 the authorities, who put serious restraints upon its independence and pursued a poHcy of discouragement and rigorous control. Government objected to news of apparently the most trivial character affecting its servants. From 1791 ih 1799 several edi- tors were deported to Europe without trial and on short notice, whilst several more were censured and had to apologize. At the commencement of the rule of Wellesley, Government promulgated stringent rules for the public press and instituted an official censor to whom everything was to be submitted before publication, the penalty for offending against these rules to be immediate de- portation. These regulations continued in force till the time of the Marquis of Hastings who in 1818 abolished the censorship and substituted milder rules. This change proved beneficial to the status of the press, for henceforward self-respecting and able men began slowly but steadily to join the ranks of journalism which had till then been considered a low profession. Silk Buckingham, one of the ablest and best known of Anglo-Indian journalists of those days, availed himself of this comparative freedom to criticise the au- thorities, and under the short administration of Adam, a civilian who temporarily occupied Hastings' place, he was deported under rules specially passed. But Lord Amherst and still more Lord William Bentinck were persons of broad and liberal views, and under them the press was left practically free, though there existed certain regulations which were not enforced, though Lord Clare, who was Governor of Bombay from 1821 to 1835, once strongly but in vain urged the latter to enforce them. Metcalfe, who succeeded for a brief period Bentinck, removed even these regulations, and brought about what is called the emancipation of the press in India in 1835, which was the beginning of a new era in the history of the Indian press. Among papers that came into being, was the Bombay Times which was started towards the close of 1838 by the leading merchants of Bombay, and which in 1861 changed its name to the Times of India. The Bom- bay Gazette, founded in 1791, ceased publication in 1914. The liberal spirit in which Lord Hastings had begun to deal with the Press led not only to the improvement in the tone and status of the Anglo-Indian Press, but also to the rise of the Native 538 The Press Congress of the World or Indian press. The first newspaper in any Indian language was the Samachar Durpan started by the famous Serampore missionaries Ward, Carey and Marshman in 1818 in Bengali, and it received encouragement from Hastings who allowed it to cir- culate through the post office at one-fourth the usual rates. This was followed in 1822 by a purely native paper in Bombay called the Bombay Samachar which still exists, and thus was laid the foundation of the Native Indian Press which at the present day is by far the largest part of the press in India, numbering over six hundred and fifty papers. From 1835 to the mutiny the press spread to other cities like Delhi, Agra, Gwalior, and even Lahore, whereas formerly it was chiefly confined to the Presidency towns. During the mutiny its freedom had to be temporarily controlled by the Gagging Act which Canning passed in June 1857 on account of the license of a very few papers, and owing still more to the fears of its circulating intelligence which might be prejudicial to public in- terests. The act was passed only for a year at the end of which the press was once more free. On India passing to the crown in 1858, an era of prosperity and progress opened for the whole country in which the press par- ticipated. There were nineteen Anglo-Indian papers at the be- ginning of this period in 1858 and twenty-five native papers and the circulation of all was very small. The number of the former did not show a great rise in the next generation, but the rise in influence and also circulation was satisfactory. Famous jour- nalists like Robert Knight, James Maclean and Hurris Mookerji flourished in this generation. The Civil and Military Gazette was originally published in Simla as a weekly paper, the first issue being dated June 22, 1872. Prior to and in the days of the mutiny the most famous paper in Northern India was the Mo- fussilite, originally published at Meerut but afterwards at Agra and then at Ambala. After a lively existence for a few years in Simla the Civil and Military Gazette acquired and incorporated the Mofussilite, and in 1876 the office of the paper was trans- ferred from Simla to Lahore, and the Gazette began to be pub- lished daily. During Lord Lytton's viceroyalty a reactionary policy was pursued towards the vernacular press which was re- Appendix 539 strained by a special act passed in 1878. With the advent of Lord Ripon in 1880 the Press Act of Lytton was repealed in 1882. The influence of the native press especially grew to be very great, and its circulation too received a great fillip. This may be said to have gone on till 1897, when India entered upon a disastrous cycle of years during which plague and famine gave rise to grave political discontent which found exaggerated expression in the native press, both in the vernacular and in En- glish. The deterioration in the tone of a section of the press be- came accentuated as years went on and prosecutions for sedi- tion had little effect in checking the sinister influence. In 1910 Lord Minto passed a Press Act applicable, not like Lytton's Act, to the peccant part alone, but like Canning's measure, to the entire press. {Vide infra "The Indian Press Law.") The press is a great factor in the progress of nations in the modern world. Whether the advent of the British in this country was a dispensation of Providence, as the late Mr. Gokhale put it, or whether it was quite the reverse, we have to judge the whole of the British administration from its early beginning to the present time by its attitude towards the evolution and growth of free institutions in this country. The press in India is considered by some as one of the glorious achievements of British rule in India. It must be said, however, and even the short summary given by ime in the beginning of this paper is sufficient to prove it, that the press in India has evolved and developed in spite of, rather than because of the British connection. It appears it has been the aim of the administration as a whole to throttle and curb the liberty of the press rather than to allow freedom of action and a free atmosphere in the Indian press. The attitude towards the press of the viceroys and all the heads of different provinces may be sometimes different, some viceroys and gover- nors being more liberal than others. The bureaucracy, however, as such, has never pretended to conceal its studied dislike of the Indian press and has manifested its hostility on all possible oc- casions. The repeal of the Press Act and other enactments now suggested by the Press Act Committee of the Imperial Council gives reasons to hope that with the dawn of representative in- stitutions in this country which we had recently with the inaugura- 540 The Press Congress of the World tion of the Montagu-Chelmsford reforms, we may have the same Hberty of the press as is enjoyed in civilized Western coun- tries. I have, however, my doubts on the point and beheve that such a liberty in the full sense of the term, will not be forth- coming till India is placed in possession of full self-government. JOURNALISM IN THE UNITED STATES By James Schermerhorn, Publisher, The Detroit Times, Detroit, Michigan, U. S. A. Here are a few "fat takes" from the hook of the latest Census Bureau report: There are 20,431 newspapers and periodicals in the United States, the aggregate yearly circulation of which is 15,475,145,102 copies. There are 2,433 daily papers, putting out 32,735,937 copies daily, or five papers for every 16 people ; 952 Sunday papers cir- culate 19,929,834 copies every Sunday. Journalism has been described as "the vast shadow of the public mind." Its vastness is revealed by the value of its prod- ucts in 1919, which was $612,718,515, an increase of 116 per cent in five years. Subscriptions and sales produced $204,638,214, an increase for the five year period of 195.9 per cent. Advertising totalled $407,760,301, an increase of 121.5 per cent. Out of every three dollars of revenue one dollar came from the reader and two dollars from the advertiser. Journalism thus partakes of the prodigiousness of every hu- man enterprise in the republic. The shadow is keeping up with the substance in all of its immensity, its almost unbelievable progress. Circulation in one or two instances crowds a million daily. Advertising is just as close to a yearly total of twenty-five mil- lion lines in papers leading in metropolitan fields. A New York morning paper that celebrated the completion Appendix 541 of twenty-five years under the present ownership in August last, offers an illustration of the wonders in American journal- ism. In twenty-five years it has grown from a net paid circula- tion of 9,000 copies to 352,000 copies. Its gross annual income is $15,000,000. But this is not the record for America. In two years the New York News, a picture paper of tabloid form, climbed from zero to over 400,000. You will not know the most astonishing fact in newspaper achievement in America until you wait to see what tomorrow brings forth. Behold how great an illumination the colonial authorities of Massachusetts started in September, 1690, when they published their distaste and disallowance of a printed sheet entitled Publick Occurrences and promptly suppressed it. Publick Occurrences was the little candle that threw its beam down the centuries until it grew into twenty thousand torches ; until its light was multi- plied thirty-three million fold. Tonnage of white paper of domestic manufacture consumed in 1919 was 1,324,000, valued at $98,560,000. Imported paper brought this up to over 2,000,000 tons. The critical print situa- tion during the world war compelled several publishers to make their own paper, taking over old mills or building new ones. With the soaring price of white paper and labor costs came the era of the three cent price. In several cities the price has dropped to two cents since the print paper market has softened, but there is little liklihood that the one cent paper will ever come back. With respect to news collecting and mechanical facilities, journalism in the United States has a story to tell quite as en- thralling as its report of commercial expansion. The United States now feels itself next-door neighbor to the distant peoples of the earth, and the supplementing of three great news-gathering associations with services and syndicates organized .by leading papers in this country insures such a thorough covering of the whole field as the American press never contemplated heretofore. Mechanically it is hard to imagine what new marvel awaits newspaper-making. It is hard to think at all because an electric type-writer is pounding out the press dispatches just outside 542 The Press Congress of the World the door as this is written. The telegraph operator who took the day's story from the clicking key is no more. The flimsy now comes straight from the unmanned typing machine. Science has given the sender in the bureau at New York or Chicago arms long enough to sit in his relaying station and operate a type- writing keyboard hundreds of miles distant. First the mail-carrier on horseback ; then the telegraph, tele- phone, wireless and airplane ; and now the device that combines telegraphy and typing — that is how the collection of news is ad- vancing. And putting it into newspaper through linotype machines of enlarged capacity and through stereotyping and pressroom facili- ties of vastly improved technique — including the rich effects of the photogravure process — and finally getting the paper to the reader with a dispatch derived from twentieth century triumphs in transportation and organization, are operations facilitated by mechanical marvels no less thrilling than the newspaper methods. Competition makes this up-to-date equipment necessary, and the installation of the same and increased scale of wages in all departments make it out of the question for a modern daily news- paper to live very long upon the favor of corporations or political candidates, or upon the grievance which someone may bear against a paper in the field. To launch a newspaper now is a serious business undertaking, and only ample capital and expense offer hope of survival. These fail likewise more often than they succeed against well-conducted publications that have been long entrenched. Of the publishing and printing establishments reporting to the Bureau of Federal Taxes in 1919 one-third showed no profits earned. In the larger cities the percentage of unprofitable publications is greater than this. This is not quite as bad as the opinion of that experienced publisher who said the average newspaper venture is about as liable to declare a dividend as a church is ; but it is enough to give pause to venturesome souls who rush in where angels fear to tread. From 1914 to 1919 there was a 10.2 per cent decrease in the number of newspapers and periodicals. Publick Occurrences, the first newspaper to feel the dis- pleasure of the authorities, was not the last one to call down pun- Appendix 543 ishment upon the publisher. James FrankHn (an elder brother of Benjamin Franklin) was haled before the General Court for boldly reflecting upon His Majesty's Government in the New England Courant, in 1721. John Peter Zenger was acquitted of the charge of libeling the Colonial Governor, William Crosby, in the New York Weekly Journal in 1734, and he shared with Samuel Adams, one of the founders of the Boston Advertiser, the glory of having established the freedom of the press and given early expression to the principle that governments derive their just powers from the consent of the governed. Nobody is trying to stop anybody from printing a newspaper in the United States nowadays. Nobody is trying to stop any- body from having newspapers in six or eight different cities or a newspaper league from having newspapers in twenty-five dif- ferent cities. There are several strings of dailies in America. What can be done is to stop newspapers from printing cer- tain things. The libel laws of the states make it necessary for the newspapers to be ever vigilant lest they do injury to the reputation or feelings of a citizen through the publication of something that cannot be sustained in court. To the credit of American publishers be it said that instances of the collection of damages for libel are very rare. Theodore Roosevelt, when President, directed the attorney general to bring suit against the New York World for slander- ing the government in its Panama Canal disclosures and just now Mayor Thompson is suing two Chicago newspapers for libeling the city in the mayoralty campaign of 1920. President Roose- velt's suit was quashed, as Mayor Thompson's will be. The law has been invoked successfully, however, to keep un- fit things out of the advertising columns of the newspaper. Private medical abominations, misleading mercantile advertise- ments and wildcat investments have been very generally elim- inated through the enactment of honest advertising laws in thirty- seven states and blue sky laws in forty-three states. It is un- fortunate that more reputable newspapers did not clean house before the advertising clubs of the country compelled them to do so. By continuing to sell space to charlatans and knaves they facilitated the nefarious schemes of these imposters and 544 The Press Congress of the World left it to a few self-censored journals to fight the fight for clean advertising alone. Thirty-two cities have Better Business Bureaus to enlist the co-operation of advertisers in keeping newspaper columns free from fraudulent copy. Twice a year all newspapers admitted to the mails as second- class matter must file affidavits of circulation and give the names of the publisher, editor and business manager and of stockholders holding over one per cent of the stock ; also the names of mort- gagors, if any. "The vast shadow of the public mind." The public mind is all business. It seeks to retrieve what it lost in the war or to make as much again as it made in the war. There is no ques- tion that the public mind was never more commercial than now. The shadow is true to the substance. Journalism also is sor- did. It was as ready as anybody to be self-forgetful when the shadow of autocracy was projected toward the United States, and now it is as ready as anybody to join in the revised hymn, "Bring forth the royal dividend, and crown it king of all." There was at the outset a journalism of protest that put free press into the constitution. There followed a journal of ad- vocacy that helped to forward abolition and emancipation. But protest and appeal have given way to thirty-three million daily — to a journalism of repetition. Whatever influence journalism has today springs from saying the same thing many millions of times. No great authority thunders from the editorial page. No- body knows which member of the staff was responsible for the brilliant thing that took hold ; indeed it may not have been any- one on the staff. It may have come in the syndicate stuif from outside the ofifice, which enables many publications to be equally readable at one and the same time. For the reason already given — the terrific expense of keep- ing a modern newspaper plant going — journalism in the United States is not an opinion-moulding journalism ; it is a money- making journalism. It is a department store journalism ; the voice of the full-page advertiser is the voice of God. Not that the publisher gains the whole world (a page a day) and loses his own soul. Not that. He doesn't barter away his President Hakdixg (left) IIkahs fuom ShxuKTAUY-'ruKAsiKKU Huowx IvKl'ORT OK TllK CoXtiUKSS. Appendix 545 birth-right or change his convictions to get the department store business. He goes no further in commission or omission than anyone would go to cultivate one of his best customers. But he knows that the large advertiser wants circulation and does not care particularly what kind of a paper the publisher makes in order to get it. He knows that the feminine readers of the paper take more interest in the store news than in all the other departments of the paper combined. The department store proprietor knows it, too, and he expects and gets a better rate than the buyers of smaller space pay. The publisher must get from two to three dollars from the advertiser for every dollar from the reader. He must get the advertising of the majority of the big stores or he will not be able to make his paper pay. Therefore columns of flippant and pornographic stuff that pains the cultured reader but which the publisher justifies with the dictum : "We are giving the people what they want." Therefore the reluctance of editors to take up causes of doubtful popularity. The last two amendments — ^pro- hibition and equal sufifrage — were put over in the face of the silence or the scoffing of the leading metropolitan journals of America. The success of these two great movements measured the decline of the influence of the journalism of America outside of the country press, where the personality of the publisher and his participation in social reforms have their effect upon com- munity sentiment. Civilization has conducted itself like a skulking campfollower since the guns of the World War sounded "cease firing." Ter- rible passions have been unloosed ; homicide has become an in- dustry of first rank. Hatred, intolerance, restiveness are rife. A journalism that must have the large advertisers, does more to reflect than correct this terrible aftermath of five years of whole- sale blood-letting. The good of society demands that the hideous- ness of a world out of joint be kept down ; the business office demands that circulation be kept up. There are exceptions to the system of giving the people what they want. You can tell them by the small circulation with which they are credited in the newspaper annual. At the same time there are a few really great and successful journals that maintain 35 546 The Press Congress of the World a high standard; that have souls above vulgar comics and the salacious testimony of orgies in de luxe hotels and divorces in high life. Journalism is no less commercial with these publica- tions of character ; they are serving a constituency that demands a higher quality of goods. Very fortunately they have found a field that is responsive to decency. The journalism of the United States has been at its best in the critical junctures of the nation's history. It will be at its best when the next great emergency arises, no matter how the trail of materialism may be over all now. That eminent political psychologist was right who said he could well dispense with editorial support or endure editorial dissent if the first page gave him a fair show. A journalism that can say the same thing thirty-three million times a day must be reckoned with as a great factor in the formation of public senti- ment if what it says or reports inspires popular confidence; if it can cleanse itself of the stigma of excessive commercialism. To do this a disadvertisement conference should be called. Make it a world's disadvertisement conference if you like. It is too much to expect that complete disadvertisement can be brought about or that it is desirable until all nations agree to disadvertise. But advertisements and newspapers can be lim- ited in size, so that the daily prints shall not smack so strongly of the market place. Disadvertisement should put an end to department store dom- ination of journalism. A half page should be the maximum space allowed any advertiser. This would guarantee just as great vis- ibility to the advertiser and should bring the newspaper just as much revenue as the old full-page spread. A higher rate for reduced space will relieve the over-emphasis now put upon cir- culation, and make economically possible a definite improvement in the content of American publications. There will be less smutting up. Modern efificiency will in good time demand a less bulky and awkward form ; the time-saving tabloid sheet is as certain to come as heat and power from the sun. Hope of a journalism not altogether stripped of idealism is heightened by the growth of schools of journalism in the great universities of the country. Columbia and the state universities Appendix 547 of Missouri, Minnesota, Michigan, Illinois, Wisconsin and Kan- sas are doing notable work in this line. They are giving to the profession competently-trained young men and women who bring with them a passion to serve their fellowmen. The big adver- tiser who would make a billboard of the newspaper page must be made to move over and give these eager recruits room and a chance to bring back a journalism of culture, constructiveness and influence. THE AUSTRALIAN PRESS By Guy Innks, Associate Editor, The Melbourne Herald, Victoria, Australia. Australia's press, which meets, with enterprise and success, the news requirements of a nation of five and three-quarter mil- lion people occupying a continent rather larger in area than that of the United States, follows British rather than American tra- ditions and methods, though in some cases American ideas are being gradually introduced. The more conservative morning jour- nals, however, still adhere almost exclusively to the British model of the established type, the London Times and the Manchester Guardian being their ideal rather than the breezy, newsy, attrac- tively displayed journal of the class whose best exemplar is the London Daily Mail. "Be brief and bright" is a motto which the evening papers rather than the morning papers prefer to obey. They avoid as far as possible the portentous and the ponderous ; they are not afraid of the use of display headings (although the writing of headings as America understands them is an art largely to be learned in Australia) ; and there is a marked difference be- tween the encyclopedic seriousness of the oldest Sydney morning paper, with its solid columns of type, and the lighter and more cheerful methods of the metropolitan evening dailies, which have learned the value of the "human interest" story as compared with the disquisition on politics or the conscientious report of a par- 548 The Press Congress of the World liamentary debate. On the whole, it may be said that the Aus- tralian newspaper and the Australian newspaper man successfully challenge comparison with those of other countries. There are nearly eight hundred and fifty newspapers in Aus- tralia, the leading organs being published in the capital cities of Melbourne (Victoria), Sydney (New South Wales), and Ade- laide (South Australia), though Perth (West Australia), Bris- bane (Queensland), and Hobart and Launceston, the chief cities of the island State of Tasmania, ably fulfill their part. From both the editorial and the commercial points of view, the papers are conducted with honesty, vigor, and ability, nor is there any case on record where corrupt motives have swayed the policy of an Australian journal. Though certain critics have said that a lack of humor is a feature of Australian journalism, serious- ness is seldom pursued to the point of stodginess ; yet in the en- deavor to carry conviction by sheer earnestness there is some- times on the part of some of the older papers a disposition to emphasize the portentously trite rather than to yield to the temp- tation inherent in the motto of one American city room : "Dare to be as funny as you can." Humor as such is therefore largely relegated to the professedly frivolous columns of the Australian press, the news and editorial sections preferring to be serious ; although it must not be understood from this that a vivid, graphic news story does not receive the prominence to which it is en- titled. From the point of view of display, the evening papers are undoubtedly in advance of their morning contemporaries, which, amazing as it may seem to American readers, devote their front pages to advertisements and place their best news, both cabled and local, on what is known as the "open pages" — that is to say, the pages which are presented to the eye when the paper is opened midway, the editorials, personal column, and"star items" being on the left hand page, and the cables, other "star items," and leading local stories filling the page on the right hand. Near- ly all the leading evening papers, however, put their best news on page one, right in the shop window, where one would logically expect to find it. The evening papers, too, are ahead of the morning papers in the frequent use of illustrations — 'the newsier the better. Appendix 549 A valuable review of journalism in Australia is to be found in a paper presented at the recent World's Press Congress by Mr. J. E. Davidson, a well-known Australian newspaper director and editor who gained his earlier press experience in the United States. He makes pointed reference to one characteristic of the Australian press which is beginning to disappear, except from those few journals whose conductors still believe that there is much to be said for the Stone Age; that dullness is safe, and seriousness profitable ; and that innovations in the attractive pres- entation of news must be very gravely considered as detracting from that appearance of stability which is considered to be in- separable from a journal which has achieved success through con- servative methods, and whose motto must be "As it was in the beginning, is now, and ever shall be, world without end, Amen." "The Australian newspaper reader," says Mr. Davidson with some truth, "likes his paper to have exactly the same appearance from day to day. He wishes to find its several features all in precisely the same part of the paper each day." This idea, how- ever, is slowly losing its hold. Australians, who are ninety-eight per cent British born or of British stock, are eager newspaper readers. The standard of education is high, and the majority of the city dwellers read at least two newspapers daily. Mentally, they are Missourians — "you've got to show them ;" but once they can be convinced that new methods are the best, they can be con- verted. Hence, what is called the "lead" in American journalism, once unknown in Australia, is being more and more widely adopted as those who produce the newspapers become assured that the public wants to know the news as. soon as possible, and prefers each item to be introduced by a compact paragraph summarizing the whole story rather than being compelled to wade through half a column of matter before being able to ascertain "what happened to Jones." It is no longer fully true, therefore, to say (as was undoubtedly the case until recently) that in Australia a news- paper story must start at the "beginning" and work up to a climax — that a police-court item must first set out when and where the court was held, the name of the accused man, and the charge ; that the evidence must follow in the order in which 550 The Press Congress of the World it was submitted, and the fate of the person concerned must be carefully concealed until the last paragraph is written — unless perhaps it is disclosed in the headline. Before the Australian States federated in 1901, the news- papers devoted an undue proportion of their space to politics, giving parliamentary reports in stereotyped form, often to the extent of seven columns. As more than half the population of Australia is in the State capitals, this gave the metropolitan jour- nals great political power, some of them being able to decide the fate of ministries. But after 1901, as Mr. Davidson points out, national matters began to overshadow State affairs. The real Australian spirit, which came to full maturity and splendor on the cliffs of Gallipoli and the stricken fields of France, was born. In the national arena a paper which had been politically supreme in its own State exerted but a modified influence, inasmuch as it could not influence the electors of other States where it had no circulation. Therefore general news began to come into its own. The world war, too, gave a tremendous impetus to the publication of cable news, services in this respect being amplified to an ex- tent which has permanently increased the value of the Australian press as a purveyor of world intelligence. Cable rates are less costly than they were, and must be cheaper still before the Aus- tralian public has the supply of news from overseas which it has the right to demand. Excellent as is the present service, the gen- eral adoption of wireless transmission will improve it still more, and it is gratifying to learn that not only is the Australian Govern- m.ent planning for the adoption of a satisfactory system of news transmission by wireless from Imperial sources, but that more than passing attention has been given to a scheme for utilizing American radio as well. As secondary industries began to grow and flourish in Aus- tralia — and to the success of these not only an adequate protec- tive tariff, but the necessity imposed by the diversion to other channels for war service of many of the vessels in which goods had been imported, largely contributed — ^a large wage-earning population grew up in the big cities. Australia became a manu- facturing as well as a pastoral, agricultural, and mining com- munity, and the Labor Party rose to power. Against that power Appendix 551 both Conservative and Liberal newspapers ranged themselves, their attitude varying from direct opposition to armed neutrality ; but the Labor Party eventually secured majorities not only in several of the State Legislatures, but in the Federal Parliament as well. Though it does not now occupy the Treasury Benches in the Commonwealth Legislature, it is a force to be reckoned with, and publishes five daily journals, none of which, however, are issued in the two principal capitals — Melbourne and Sydney, with respective populations of 723,500 and 792,700. But even ardent Labor supporters will concede, that none of these papers can compare, either as newspapers or as organs of public opin- ion, with even those in the third rank of the non-Labor press. Nor, say the working newspaper men, are they preferable as employers. Peculiarly Australian are the weekly papers issued for the most part from the offices of the leading dailies. The Sydney Bulletin, which is world-famous, is one of the very few week- lies which is not published by a daily paper proprietary. It stands by itself in more senses than one. The others are about the size and format of the Saturday Evening Post, but contain about three times as many pages, and are published for eighteen cents a copy. They are a godsend in the "back-blocks" — the pastoral and agricultural regions more or less remote from the large towns, for they contain, in addition to admirable summaries of the cable, local, and interstate news of the week, comprehensive sections dealing with agriculture, the pastoral industry (Aus- tralia has ninety million sheep and twelve million cattle), fruit and vine-growing, mining (Australia has produced three billion dollars worth of gold), commerce and finance, sporting (Two hundred thousand people attend the Melbourne Cup, a horse- race held at Flemington, near Melbourne, as the chief event of the Spring Carnival, and from fifty to seventy thousand witness the League football finals, while thousands are present at the in- ternational and interstate cricket matches), and short and serial stories. These papers also contain excellent pictorial and photo- graphic sections in which current events are portrayed on super- calendared paper. Only in Sydney, New South Wales, and in Perth, West Aus- tralia, are Sunday papers pubHshed. Three Sydney Sunday 552 The Press Congress of the World papers are excellent productions, largely on American lines, and at least one of them contains a comic section — a comparatively recent innovation. In Victoria the Police Offences Act forbids the publication of a Sunday paper, except on occasions of na- tional importance, which must not exceed three in any one year. Sporting papers are numerous, the Sydney Referee being well- known outside Australia. The Melbourne Herald prints a special sporting edition every Saturday evening, copiously illus- trated and dealing with all classes of athletics. The law of libel, particularly in New South Wales, is far more strict in Australia than seems to be the case in America. Truth is not necessarily a defence, the principle adopted being that nothing must be printed which is calculated to hold a citizen up to offensive ridicule, or to injure or damage him in the eyes of his fellows. The regulations governing contempt of court, also, are rigorously administered. In Australia the personal note is not sounded in journalism to anything like the extent it is in America. To publish intimate details of a pending divorce suit, for instance, would not be thought of until the case was actually before the court, and the evidence was being given. Other legal restrictions forbid the publication of betting odds be- fore a race takes place, although in the description of the race after it has occurred these may be given. No reference is per- mitted in the press of some of the States to Tattersall's Sweeps, a large racing "consultation" with its headquarters in Tasmania. It is popular all over Australia, and conducts sweepstakes on all the important races, in which the public purchase tickets on the principle of a lottery, the winners of first prizes receiving as much as $25,000 each after the organization has deducted its commis- sion. The sweeps are conducted with scrupulous fairness under Tasmanian government supervision, yet the Australian Common- wealth postal regulations forbid the carrying of mail matter ad- dressed to Tattersall's. The object is, of course, to discourage gambling. Sweeping generalities have been published from time to time about the gambling tendencies of Australians, but these have been exaggerated. The Australian loves a horse, and loves to take a sporting chance — that is one reason why Australian Light Horse soldiers so distinguished themselves in Palestine during the Appendix 553 war. Let those who say the Australian is a gambler read the ac- count, in the Australian Official War History, of the charge of General Grant's Queenslanders (light cavalry armed with rifle and bayonet) over the crowded Turkish trenches at Beersheba. And let him also ponder the fact that the savings bank deposits in Aus- tralia, quite apart from the deposits in banks of issue, represent two hundred and fifty dollars per capita for four million de- positors out of a total population of five and three quarter mil- lion people. A curious legislative enactment, passed by the Federal Parlia- ment at the instance of the Labor Party in the hope of lessening the political influence of the papers which opposed it, is the sec- tion of the Electoral Act (which does not apply to purely State elections) providing that between the date of the issue of the writ for an election and the return of that writ to the Speaker after the election is over, every article in any paper commenting on matter relating to the election or on election issues must be signed by the man who wrote it. The idea was that the views of Potiphar M. Quad, for instance, published as such, would carry nothing like the weight or exert anything like the influence inherent in the same article appearing as the views of the powerful political organ in which it was printed. But, in operation, the provision, although more or less adhered to in the letter, became almost a joke. Its effect, if any, was to bring into deserved prominence and give weight in the eyes of the community to men whose iden- tity had hitherto been undisclosed beyond the walls of the offices which employed them. Even this was not certain, for in some cases the article bore the name of everyone concerned in its genesis except the compositor who set it up. In others, it was announced at the foot thereof that it was "written, after consultation, to express the views of the Daily Reverberator by William Peter Thompson." The Sydney Bulletin overcame the problem by printing on certain of its pages a laconic statement to the effect that for any matter thereon requiring a signature in accordance with the Act S. H. Prior, James Edmond, David McKee Wright, and J. B. Dalley took the responsibility. If the copy-reader were in a frivolous frame of mind, he occasionally appended to a humorous paragraph on nature study, such as purported to ans- 554 The Press Congress of the World wer the query "Do Barmaids Swallow Their Young?" a brief footnote to the effect that as their might be some lurking sig- nificance in the item, patent only to the trained political eye, which came under the purview of the act, wherefore the writer must be announced as John Smith, 16 Acacia Avenue, Mosman, N. S. W. Whereat no one was more surprised than John Smith. Salaries, working hours, holidays, and sick leave of newspaper men in Australia are decided by law. The system has worked very satisfactorily in the eleven years during which it has been in operation. The maximum salary fixed by law is not necessarily the maximum actually paid, for a progressive paper will pay extra to retain a good man, or will induce him to leave another jour- nal by the offer of a higher salary than he is receiving. Briefly, Australian working journalists are members of the Australasian Journalists' Association, to all intents and purposes a trade union registered under the Commonwealth Industrial Law. It has ob- tained by appeals to the Commonwealth Court of Conciliation and Arbitration awards fixing minimum salaries and hours and con- ditions of work. The leading Australian daily papers are published in the capital cities of the various States, and though there are some pro- vincial journals of importance, space forbids particularizing them. The chief morning papers are: Melbourne (Victoria) — The Argus, The Age. Sydney (New South Wales) — Sydney Morning Herald, Syd- ney Daily Telegraph. Brisbane (Queensland) — Brisbane Courier, Brisbane Daily Mail, Brisbane Standard (Labor). Adelaide (South Australia) — The Register, The Adelaide Advertiser. Perth (West Australia) — The West Australian. Hobart (Tasmania) — ^^The Mercury, The Post (Labor). The principal evening dailies are : Melbourne — The Herald. Sydney — The Sun, The Evening News. Brisbane — The Telegraph. Adelaide — Evening Journal. The majority of the Australian daily papers do not publish Appendix 555 their circulation figures. The circulation of the Melbourne morn- ing dailies, however, is about 150,000 a day each, while that of the evening Herald has touched 230,000, though this is excep- tional. The Sydney Sun (evening) lays claims to upwards of a million a week, but the Sydney morning papers make no categorical statement. Their circulation, however, is understood to be about that of the Melbourne morning papers, with some advantage in favor of the Sydney Morning Herald, an old-established organ which is in the nature of a public institution. Without going into detail, which would be apt to be technical, of the organizations for supplying Australia with cable news, or of the internal economy of the newspaper offices and their staffs, which differ little, except in terminology, from those of the British and American papers, it must here be said that the chief need in Australia is a cheaper cable rate, and a cheap wireless service, particularly from America. These matters, as has been said, are the subject of constant consideration. To cable news to Australia of the Washington Disarmament Conference, from which the present writer dispatched from 750 to 1500 words daily to his home papers, cost (exclusive of overland telegraphic charges in Australia) sixteen cents a word at press rates, sixty-six cents for full rate, and 198 cents for urgent messages. This takes no account of the amount each paper must pay for cables from other parts of the world, notably London, New York, Vancouver, Tokyo and elsewhere. Until these charges have been reduced the Aus- tralian press camiot play to the full its part — and this part is vital in view of the fact that Australia and New Zealand, the southern- most outposts of the English-speaking race, have as their nearest white neighbor the United States more than six thousand miles away — in establishing for all time a patriotism of the Pacific. The basis of that patriotism must be, as Senator Pearce, the Australian delegate to the Disarmament Conference, pointed out in a recent speech delivered imder the auspices of the English- speaking Union in New York, "a complete understanding, not merely between the United States of America and Australia, but between the United States of America and the British Empire." To that understanding the Washington Conference has done much to contribute. American and Australian newspapers and public 556 The Press Congress of the World men may aid in its complete accomplishment. To quote Senator Pearce again : "This continent (AustraHa) is garrisoned by a scant five and a half millions of white people. Within a day's steam of our shores there is one lone island that has a bigger colored pop- ulation than the whole of Australia. Within five days' steam of our shores there are fifty millions of colored people, and within a fortnight of our shores they run into the hundreds of millions . . . But the Empire of which we are a part is . . , six weeks' steam by the fastest steamer. When we look across the Pacific, however, we are within three weeks' steam of this great white Republic of America. You will see, therefore, the angle from which Australia looks at America, and you will appreciate our desire that we should gain your interest, that we should re- tain your good-will." THE EVOLUTION OF THE NEW ZEALAND PRESS By Mark Cohen, Editor, The Star, Dunedin, New Zealand. To tell the story of the evolution of the press of our Domin- ion is to write in considerable degree the political history of our country, for the advent of the newspaper, using that term as popularly understood and generally accepted, dates from the com- mencement of the struggle by the pioneer colonists to secure for themselves and their immediate descendants what is now euphe- mistically termed the right of "self-determination ;" in other words to work out their own political salvation. You have, therefore, to charge your minds with the all-im- portant factor that New Zealand was colonized by peoples with divergent aspirations, though in the main animated by one ab- sorbing desire, viz. to better the conditions and modes of living under which they had existed in the lands from which they emi- grated. Thus, to Auckland came people from all parts of Great Britain, while the outbreak of hostilities against the powerful warlike hapus or tribes in the North Island, dating from the war Appendix 557 of Hone Heke, who hauled down the British flag at the Bay of Islands, to the marauding gangs of bloodthirsty miscreants who under the leadership of Te Kooti and Tito Kowaru led to the importation of ten thousand disciplined British troops under Generals Cameron and Chute, reinforced by thousands of volun- teers from Australia, who flocked to the Queen's standard under a system of land grants which were the means of partitioning among these irregulars the confiscated lands of the rebellious natives. Mid-Auckland, the Waikato, the King or Uriwera country, Taranaki, the East Coast of the North Island, Gisborne, the Wairarapa and the Wairau Valley (Marlborough in the South Island) were the scenes of many pitched battles or of awful mas- sacres of pakcha families. Then, following on the revolutionary era in Central Europe bands of Lutherans, Scandinavians, Danes, and Austrians, fearful of the wrath of the military reactionaries of their own countries, fled to New Zealand as refugees from prescription on account of their religious faith or because of an alleged taint of treason. Even the hardy fishermen and seamen of the maritime provinces of Canada came to the Far North of Auckland, where they founded prosperous settlements. Port Nicholson, as it was then called, was an insignificant whaling village. All the possibilities of its harbor and the capabilities of its back country were recognized by a Royal Commission, selected in Australia, which was entrusted with the duty of removing the seat of government from Auckland and building it in a safe location "somewhere on Cook Strait." In 1864 that commis- sion recommended in favor of Port Nicholson, and ultimately the seat of government was transferred from the shores of Waitemata to those of what is now known as Wellington, a city of more than one hundred thousand people. Nelson had been selected by the New Zealand Land Company with Colonel Gib- bon Wakefield as its guiding spirit, as the future home of its band of emigres; Port Cooper (now Lyttleton) was the haven greeted after encountering the manifold dangers of the long voy- age from the Old Land ; and those who traversed the ocean in the first four ships when they crossed the range that separates the port from what is now Christchurch, were rewarded with the sight of a veritable Promised Land of fertile plains and rolling 558 The Press Congress of the World downs stretching to the foothills of the mighty Alpine range, which is capped by Mount Cook (over twelve thousand feet) with its huge snow fields and glittering glaciers. These Canter- bury Pilgrims were the bone and sinew — the very salt of the earth — of the midland counties and university cities of Eng- land. And farther to the southward the Calvinists and Cove- nanters — the men and women who rather than desert the church of their forefathers turned their backs on Bonnie Scotland, the land of their nationality, and in the year of the great disruption set their faces sorrowfully in quest of a Terra Incognita. In March 1848 they founded Dunedin, or a new Edinburgh, on what was then an Ultima Thule and Britain's fartherest flung posses- sion. Before I proceed to discuss the rise and progress of our news- paper press, let me put it on record here as a matter absolutely beyond dispute that the first printer in our country was William Colenso (long since deceased) who was attached to the Church of England mission under George A. Selwyn, the first Anglican Bishop and who, with primitive presses and types of his day, pub- lished all the Scriptural leaflets circulated among the Maoris by that mission. That was many years before the advent of the earliest colonists. Colenso, who was a philanthropist and a man of letters, endowed the town of Napier, where he lived for some time before his death, with a valuable library. The first broadsheet, though it can hardly be dignified with the title of newspaper, was the New Zealand Gazette. It was owned by the New Zealand Company, and was edited by Samuel Revans, who. with his family, settled in the Wairarapa. It made its first appearance in the Colony on April 18, 1840. It contained the draft of the Constitution for New Zealand ; it was demy in s'ye; and when the infant settlement of whites was shifted from the Wairarapa to Port Nicholson its title was changed to New Zealand Gazette and Britannia Spectator, but when the name of the embryo capital was changed to Wellington, Britannia was dropped. In October, 1841, it was issued twice instead of once a week. ' ' ■""^•"^^^^''^ It may not be out of place to mention here the name of another New Zealand colonist, who was intimately associated with Revans Appendix 559 both in our country and in Canada, where they collaborated. I allude to Henry Samuel Chapman, for a short time a judge of our Supreme Court, Colonial Secretary of Tasmania, and a short time Attorney General of the colony of Victoria (Aust.) One of his sons (Frederick Chapman) recently retired from the Su- preme Court bench to take charge of the law drafting depart- ment of the Legislature. As far back as 1833 Chapman & Revans were journalistic partners in Montreal, where they started the Daily Advertiser which was a very small venture and soon be- came merged in a bigger paper. But it enjoyed the proud dis- tinction, though I cannot find the fact recorded in any Canadian bibliography, of having been the first daily published in English North America. Chapman emigrated from Canada in 1834, pro- ceeding to England as the unofficial representative of the Liberal party of the Parliament which was not then in session. Revans, however, remained in Canada, and in 1837 became involved in the Papineau rebellion, with the result that a price was put on his head. But he managed to get out of the country without the loss of his head. In 1839 the first batch of colonists sailed from England for Wellington, and Revans was among them, arriving in the Adelaide, which was not the first ship to cast anchor in Port Nicholson, though she was the first to do so with any con- siderable number of immigrants aboard. He brought his print- ing press with him, published his first tiny number in London, and printed the second issue on the beach at Petone, where today stands the factory of the Wellington Woolen Company, and is a busy thriving industrial suburb of the Capital City. It was intended to have located the future city at Petone, but in the end the present site was chosen and surveyed. Before the year was out Revans shifted his plant to Wellington, where it pur- sued its career as the organ of the Company. In Revans' hands the Gazette was a fiery paper, for he was very combative and always spoiling for a fight with the authorities. Chapman's connection with the New Zealand press can be briefly told. In January, 1840, after the first ships had sailed from London, but long before news of their arrival had come to hand, he started the New Zealand Journal in London, and today it constitutes the most valuable compendium of New Zealand's 560 The Press Congress of the World early history. There are said to be only four copies in existence — one in the possession of the Hon. F. R. Chapman ; one in the Turnbull library at Wellington; a third in the Hockin library at Dunedin, while the fourth was stolen from the shelves of the Gen- eral Assembly library, its present location being unknown to this deponent. The New Zealand Journal was later merged in the New Zealand and Australian Gazette. When Mr. Chapman was offered a judgeship in New Zealand he sold the Advertiser and with his wife and one child sailed for the Colony in the same vessel that conveyed Governor Fitzroy to the scene of his duties. They were respectively sworn in on the same day, December 26, 1843, at the gardens of the Government House — gardens that remain to adorn the city of Auckland. To return to Revans. He edited the Gazette from 1840 till the arrival of the colony of William Fox, a London barrister, who had been appointed agent of the New Zealand Company and who rose afterwards to political eminence, becoming Premier of the Colony. He was equally caustic with his tongua as with his pen, and became a thorn in the side of the administration, which he rigorously and persistently attacked. But the settlers were not blessed with a plethora of ready cash, and while admir- ing Fox's philippics and praising his courage, did not provide him with the sinews of war, and in the issue of January 22, 1842, he told them bluntly that he could not carry on, heaping coals of fire on their heads by saying that some had never subscribed a single shilling since the paper started. Nothing daunted by Fox's discouraging avowal, Richard Han- son, another London lawyer with experience of London jour- nalism, brought out the Colonist and Port Nicholson Advertiser in 1842, and for a whole year this pair of legal buccaneers in- dulged in vituperation of the approved Eatonsville type. In 1843 Fox succeeded Colonel Gibbon Wakefield as attorney for the New Zealand Company, and vacated the editorial chair. The management of the Gazette was then placed on commission, a committee of control being elected every six months, but the companionship, alleging poor remuneration, appealed to Caesar, the public furnishing them with the means of acquiring the Gazette and buying a new plant in Sydney. Appendix 561 In April, 1844, on the ashes of the Gazette arose the Inde- pendent under the direction of Mr. Thomas W. McKenzie, who made a profitable sale to a syndicate. It was printed on the first fiat-bed machine introduced into New Zealand, and had seen service under the Fairfaxes in Sydney. Undoubtedly the in- tention was to establish a metropolitan journal, on the lines of the Sydney Morning Herald and the Melbourne Argus, and it was whispered at the time that a former governor was responsible for the enterprise, which, however, failed in its purpose and cost a not inconsiderable sum. Then a Mr. Robert Stokes, of Hawkes Bay, issued the New Zealand Spectator and Cook Strait Guard- ian in the interests of Sir George Gray, and in its columns ap- peared a series of brilliant articles from the pen of Mr. Alfred Domett, then Colonial Secretary of New Munster, as the South Island was called, while Messrs. Fox, Featherston and Ian E. Fitzgerald — a powerful triumvirate of colonial politicians — wrote with even greater power and certainly with more circumspection in defense of democratic ideals. The literary duel was waged on both sides with much didactic skill and with great bitterness till the Constitution of the Colony was proclaimed in March, 1853. Among those who made their influence felt during these stressful times through the medium of the Independent were Dr. Evans (a member of the new Constitutional Government) Edward Gib- bon Wakefield, Edward Jerningham Wakefield and Henry Sewell (attorney general in more than one Administration). Both the Independent and the Spectator were issued as weeklies, and gen- erally appeared late in the afternoon. When no printing paper of the required size was obtainable on the market, these papers were printed on blotting paper, and when this article ran short, coarse wrapping paper had to be resorted to, and oft-times two sheets of demy had to be pasted together. And frequently, as the settlers had no ready money, the printer had to be content with the liquidation of his account per the medium of barter by way of firewood, farm produce, fish, etc. Mr. Wakefield retired from the editorship of the Independent in 1856 to become confidential clerk to Isaac Earl Featherston, who was elected the first Superintendent of Wellington Province and later was selected as the first Agent-General for New Zea- 36 562 The Press Congress of the World land in London. It was Wakefield who in an article published in the Independent at the close of the 1856 session, bestowed on Wellington the grandiloquent title of "Empire City," by which it is often known now. John Knowles and Henry Anderson — names familiar to New Zealanders in the late fifties and early sixties — successively filled the editorial chair, both being capable writers. Again the com- positors became troublesome and eventually started a paper of their own under the title of the Advertiser, demy size, which was distributed gratuitously for a while. In these days there was no registration of newspapers, and no compulsion to disclose the owners' names, but files of the Advertiser tell of Bull Brothers being its publishers and Mr. Wakefield as editor. Originally is- sued as a double demy weekly, and afterwards as a tri-weekly, it did so M^ell that it seemed as if it were to become a permanent in- stitution, but the gall with which Wakefield dipped his trenchant pen was spilt over the Speaker of the Provincial Council, who took out a writ for libel against the paper. Wakefield lost the action, was mulct in damages, and was ruined. A. F. Halcombe was the next editor, but did not improve the fortunes of the paper. Eventually, during the governorship of Sir James Fer- guson, an efifort was made to give it a metropolitan prestige like that enjoyed by the Melbourne Argus, the Sydney Morning Herald, the Brisbane Courier and the Adelaide Advertiser, to which end the new management gathered in Australia a stafif of transcendent talent, which came and saw but did not conquer. In 1874 the Independent having fallen on bad times, was ac- quired by a syndicate and Vogel, on taking charge, altered its name to the New Zealand Times. Robert J. Creighton, a jour- nalist not unknown to the dwellers on the Pacific slope, for he was largely identified with the Webb line of steamers that ran under contract between San Francisco and visited monthly the ports of Auckland, Wellington and Port Chalmers (the deep water port of Otago) was given editorial charge, and he led a staff of experienced, versatile, and energetic men, filled with am- bition to succeed where other venturesome spirits had failed to establish a true colonial journal. But though the war against provincialism was nearing the victorious stage, the spirit of Pro- Appendix 563 vincial independence was far from being subdued; and Creigh- ton fared no better than the Austrahan importation. Then fol- lowed a series of lean years, the effects of which were only con- spicuously shown in the reduced patronage of the Times' ad- vertising columns. At one time it issued a well-illustrated weekly called the Marl but it also went into the limbo of forgotten pub- lications when hard times set in. It was now recognized that the project of setting up a colonial journal was at least half a century in advance of the requirements of less than half a million people. Our railways were fragmentary ; Cobb's coach was the one means of transporting paper parcels, and though the postal department (under the aegis of Vogel) gave free transportation through the mails, the telegraphic authorities of that day were decidedly un- sympathetic and made the telegraphic tolls so burdensome that the wires had to be used sparingly. When Seddon jumped into the ministerial saddle and ruled the country with a masterful hand which brooked no interfer- ence with "his somewhat bizarre methods, he found it absolutely necessary to have an organ which would "boost" the Seddonian platform for all it was worth, and he was able ultimately to se- cure a controlling interest in the Times which became the recog- nized mouthpiece of Liberalism, according to its new high priest, and of the "trade" with distinct leanings towards a particular church. But there were too many interests, that often clashed, to be served. Managers came and departed with bewildering rapidity ; there was never a semblance of a settled policy till Robert Loughnan, a scholarly writer and a genuine man of af- fairs, assumed editorial control. Though in the sere and yellow his critical forces are unimpaired and it is always easy to discern his well rounded periods and epigrammatic style in the unsigned articles that often adorn the Times' pages today. When the gen- eral election of 1908 showed that the Liberals had lost the con- fidence of the country, and that the banner of reform was likely to be carried to victory at the succeeding appeal to the constitu- encies those opposed t(f the regime of Seddon (who died dra- matically at Sydney in 1906 in the zenith of his fame) and Ward, his natural successor in the Premiership, had the prescience to establish a morning paper under the title of the Dominion, in 564 The Press Congress of the World which to preach the new evangel. Selecting as editor Charles W. Earle, who had served an excellent apprenticeship under Wesley Lukin on the Evening Post he was permitted to surround himself with some of the brightest intellects in the Dominion. So many of them have been among my closest personal friends, some have been trained under my own eyes in Dunedin, that it would be neither right nor fitting to individualise, but candor and truth compel me to avow that M. C. Keene (now editor-in-chief of the Christchurch Press) was facilis princeps among a devoted band of workers that set the Dominion on a solid foundation from the very start. And these men knew how to bring off a "scoop" early in their career. When our Parliament House was destroyed by fire early in 1908 they stopped the press, lifted in a new plate with a good "write-up" of the conflagration, illustrated the scene, and dispatched the extraordinary issue into the country districts far and wide, while the Times was silent as the grave over the de- plorable incident. Under the Liberal regime it was largely a case of spoils to the victors as far as government patronage by way of advertising is concerned, but the Reformers have instituted a publicity depart- ment, directed by H. B. View, an experienced pressman, which prepares and circulates all ministerial communiques to the press and distributes advertising matters on the basis of the public in- terest, gauged by largeness of circulation — the only real test of value of service — or in a cot or town with two or more papers having equal claims to conservatism their ministerial favors are apportioned alternately, according to departmental needs. Wellington's first evening paper, in fact its first daily, was issued in February, 1865, by Henry Blundell, who on the decline of the goldfield at Wakamaeino, transferred his printing press from the township of Harelock, in Marlborough province, to Wellington. He lived long enough to see the Evening Post grow to be one of the most lucrative newspaper enterprises in the sou- thern hemisphere. His eldest son John was in charge of the mechanical department. Henry (long since dead) directed the commercial and publishing branches, and Louis, the youngest, who began life as a humble scribe among the men who go down in ships, is today the sole representative of the original firm, the Appendix 565 eldest brother, John, now being permanently incapacitated. I served as its parliamentary hand way back in the early seventies, when it was printed on a Columbian hand-press, and was issued as a four-page demy sheet on the top floor of premises that were awash at neap tides which invaded the ground floor! Today its business premises off Willis Street are a common rendevouz, as the headlines of all cabled and special telegrams are displayed on its broad windows ; while all the mechanical and literary depart- ments are housed in the rear. Naturally, I have known all its editors, and served under quite a number of them. Those I re- member most affectionately were Frank Gifford, erudite and ac- complished ; Henry Anderson, Charles W. Purnell, Chas. Rous Marten, E. T. Gillon, D. M. Luckie, and Wesley Lukin. Gifford the Incomparable and Lukin, the beloved "Commodore," who during his unique career, always fought for due recognition of journalism as a profession equal in importance to the bar, the forum, or the pulpit, and succeeded in obtaining for his literary staff a higher rate of pay than ruled elsewhere in the Dominion, were the outstanding figures in a gallery of men of intercolonial — nay, I am quite justified in saying international — repute. Its original circulation was about two hundred and fifty; Blundell senior, his two sons, and two boys constituted the "companion- ship;" today there is an installation of fifteen linos, and the es- tablishment boasts of three rotary three-deckers capable of printing forty thousand copies of the twelve, and occasionally sixteen page (nine columns each) paper produced on rush days. (I have not space nor a desire to recount the innumerable journalistic offshoots that cater for the advertising firms and sup- ply the literary needs of the populations of Med-Wellington, Marlborough, Hawkes Bay, Taranaki, or the Far North of Auck- land. Their name is almost legion, and some of them have been comparatively successful. At the very head of this list I have no hesitation whatever in placing the Wanganui Chronicle, which under the able editorship of John Ballance and managed by A. D. Willis, an enterprising printer, became a very powerful expres- sion of public opinion, the remarkable articles that were the pro- duct of Ballance's well-stored mind having been responsible for turning the hide-bound Conservatives off the Treasury Benches, 566 The Press Congress of the World altering the entire scheme of taxation from a tax on property to a direct tax on land and acquired wealth, and also for revo- lutionizing the land systems of the Colony. It is a matter of ex- treme regret that the alteration of this Congress' opening date was responsible for the absence from our body of Mr. Duigan, whose father was Ballance's first lieutenant in many a hard-fought cam- paign against the evils of absentee landlordism and the inequi- table advantages enjoyed by vested interests.) I have already indicated how the settlement of Otago came to be undertaken by Scotch emigrants sent out under the auspices of the Scottish Association in Edinburgh. The first ships that anchored in Koputai Bay (our Port Chalmers) in March 1848, had among their passengers the Moses and Aaron of the settle- ment in the person of Captain Cargill, who had taken part in the Peninsular War, and who had control politically of the colonists, while the Rev. Thomas Burns, a lineal descendant of the immortal bard, looked after and was responsible for their spiritual welfare. By an oversight they neglected to bring with them anyone capable of producing a newspaper ; but the want was supplied on the arrival of the ship Blundell in September, 1848, when Henry B. Graham, a printer hailing from Carlisle, was accredited to them. He did not lose any time, and on De- cember 13 following, issued the first number of the Otago News, which was published on every alternate Wednesday, sold for sixpence per copy, was foolscap size, and contained four pages of matter. Graham combined in himself the duties of editor, printer, and comp. The career of the News was, however, a checkered one; its policy was unsatisfactory to the majority of settlers, and it had no literary merit, according to Hocken in his Bibliography of Otago. In the following June, it was enlarged to folio size, and was issued weekly, and on December 21, 1850 it succumbed with its ninety-first issue. Graham, who had been in indifferent health for some time, was forced to resign the editorship, but the settlers, in recognition of the sturdy independence and cour- age he had shown in opposing the bureaucratic tendencies of Governor Grey, presented him with a purse of sovereigns. But already the hand of death lay heavily on him, and in the follow- Appendix 567 ing February his earthly troubles were mercifully ended. Then the paper, with its meagre stock of type, etc., was bought for one hundred and fifty pounds by a small company which carried the paper on under the title of the Witness, installing as editor William H. Cutten, who was allied by marriage to the reigning or Cargill family. Cutten drew the magnificent salary of one pound per week. But he had a mind of his own, and refused to write "according to orders." The upshot of their differences was the dissolution of the company, who passed in their ten pound scrip, and handed the paper (lock, stock and barrel) over to Cutten, who secured the services as printer of Daniel Campbell, who came out from Scotland under a three years' employment. A. B. Todd, who finished his apprenticeship as a comp under Campbell, was paid three shillings a week. Hacken declares that Cutten "was undoubtedly able — full of caustic humor and smart satire — qualities often valuable in his onslaughts on the enemies of provincialism. But with all his ability, he was tiresomely care- less and procrastinating, and his faithful compositor occasionally found it necessary to guard, or even lock him up, until the all- important leader was forthcoming." Cutten died full of years and honors. He sat in our Parliament during many sessions, and ultimately enjoyed the dignity of a well-remunerated civil ser- vant, having charge of the administration of the waste lands of Otago. In these primitive days advertising was not regarded as essential to the success of a paper ; indeed it was quite a neg- ligible quantity, for all business in the infant settlement was done by way of barter. Then the circulation of the Witness was lim- ited to one hundred and twenty per issue, half the number being dispatched to relatives and friends in Scotland; and the cost was six pence per copy. I am quite safe in saying that it cir- culates all over the world, is to be found in every town and ham- let in Otago and Scotland. One of its chief features has for many years been its weekly column of "Passing Notes," in which the foibles of the hour are caustically criticised with an entire absence of rancor and absolutely devoid of personality. In similar fashion has the Star, the evening paper, had its "By the Way" column into which some of the most brilliant minds in our community have breathed the shafts of humor interspersed 568 The Press Congress of the World with wise saws and modern sayings that have been racy of the soil. And during the all too brief careers of two other weeklies of more than ordinary merit — to wit, the Southern Mercury and the Saturday Advertiser the brilliant Vincent Pyke found time to write his novel "Wild Will Enderby" and in the other the genial and versatile but impertinent Thomas Bracken — much better known as the composer of "Not Understood" and other clever verses — won universal admiration for "Paddy Marky's" racy weekly narratives. But I am running away from my theme and must return to my muttons. Apropos of the Witness his fellow townsmen had elected Cutten to Parliament, which met in Auckland, involving at times a roundabout journey to Sydney and occupying five or six weeks. During his absence the paper was managed by William Hunter Reynolds and James Macandrew, who later wrote their names large on the scroll of New Zealand's parliamentary record. They were brothers-in-law, but of vastly different tem- peraments. Macandrew was broad-visioned, far ahead of his generation, and full of big ideas. It was he who established steam communication with Victoria, and foretold the replacement of the small, slow sailer by fast steamers that would bridge the distance between Britain and Otago in less than sixty days. On the other hand, Reynolds was inclined to be ultra-Conservative and a drag on progress. Naturally, they disagreed about the policy of the paper, with the result that on Boxing Day, 1856, Macandrew brought out an opposition weekly under the title of the Colonist. For eight years it preached the gospel of progress and immigration according to Macandrew, and was ultimately amalgamated with the Telegraph and Colonist edited by Fred I. Moss, who years later became New Zealand's first administrator of the Cook Islands. That was the only time that the supremacy of the Witness was really seriously challenged, for Macandrew's was a name to carry on with. All subsequent attacks were easily repulsed and today the Witness has an unrivalled and deep-seated hold on the affections of the people of Otago and the Southland. The year 1861, when the discovery of a paying goldfield in the Paupeka district by a shepherd named Gabriel Read, after whom the field was named and who received the government Appendix 569 reward of one thousand pounds, witnessed an inundation of ad- venturous spirits from Australia, mainly from Victoria, deter- mined to try their fortunes in the newest El Dorado. Many of them had exploited the rich placer fields of California; they had likewise worked on the deep leads, but "missed the bus" at Ben- digo, Ballarat, Stawell, Clunes and on the earlier fields of New South Wales. They earned the soubriquet of "New Iniquities," and were the very antitheses of the "Old Identities," the cogno- men applied to the original British settlers. Among this horde were two men who were destined to exercise an enduring in- fluence on the destinies of this still Arcadian village. One was Julius Vogel, educated in London as a metallurgist, but failing as a digger took up journalism at Bendigo; the other Benjamin Farjeon, graduate in the university of the world's experience. Both were of Jewish up-raising, but neither was orthodox, and gradually drifted away from the faith of their fathers. Vogel joined Cutten in the ownership of the Witness and promptly threw himself into the vortex of local politics, ranging himself in op- position to Macandrew. Realizing that the time was ripe for giving Dunedin the benefit of a daily paper Vogel and Farjeon laid their plans accordingly, and on November 15, 1861, launched the Otago Daily Times. It speedily became a bright constella- tion in the firmament of New Zealand journalism, and a beam light of well-reasoned, judicially-balanced public opinion. In the domain of journalism, as in that of general politics, Vogel had a wonderful faculty for selecting strong men, and during the many years that he controlled the Times' editorial columns he was surrounded by a disciplined stafif of capable, earnest and most devoted writers, most of whom later achieved distinction, in the Senate, or attained high positions in the Civil Service of the country. But Vogel, unfortunately, was a spendthrift, and threw away golden opportunities of becoming a rich man. And when he lost his partner Farjeon, who was tempted to embark on the troubled waters of ownership in England, lost what proved to be a gold mine when worked by keen business men on sound commercial lines. The Times passed into the hands of a limited liability company, and Vogel was succeeded in the editorial chair by George Barton, a graduate of Sydney University. Vogel 570 The Press Congress of the World was a ready writer, of incisive power, possessing a world of im- agination and wonderful fertility of resource, but, oh, what a vile penman ! Even now I recall with a feeling of real horror the hour's of misery which as a humble copy holder I put in trying to decipher those mystifying hieroglyphics. Well did the few trusted men of the companionship earn the extra pay (one chud) they drew for setting Vogel's "leaders." But neither the bar- lock nor the Remington had then been thought of. Much signal service came to the Otago community and to the colonists of New Zealand generally by the intrepid advocacy by the Times of Social Reform, but on no occasion was that duty performed more ef- fectively or with more general and generous appreciation than when the paper came into the possession of the present Sir George Fenwick, who as editor initiated a crusade against the "sweating" dens of the tailoring and woolen trades in Dunedin. Aided on the platform and in the pulpit by men and women of light and leading, Robert Stout (now our chief justice, then just beginning to weave the laurel that was to adorn his intellectual brow) Rutherford Waddell, one of our ablest divines, who had as his congregation thousands of people beyond the pale of St. Andrews Church (Presbyterian) who still continue to read with avidity and profit spiritually those magnificent scholarly essays from his classic pen and deeply-stored memory of the writings of British and American authors of world-wide fame. Mr. Fen- wick, helped by a band of enthusiastic and whole-souled social re- formers, was enabled to gather such a mass of irrefutable testi- mony that Parliament was compelled by an outraged public con- science to take prompt measures for the eradication of the foul sys- tem. _A royal commission enquired into the nefarious business and made drastic recommendations for coping with it effectively. These soon found their way on to our Statute Book, and the "sweat- ing" evil, if not killed outright, has ceased to be a menace to the moral and physical well-being of that section of our workers who were directly concerned. Sanitation on approved principles is a sine qua non to registration of any such factory; our women op- eratives work shorter hours under better conditions and receive higher pay, which is regulated by conciliation councils where agreement as to "logs" has been reached by mutual forbearance. Appendix 571 if not, then the Council of Arbitration performs that duty ; over- time, if needed, must be paid for on a higher scale, and the num- ber of hours have to be sanctioned by an inspector of the Labor Department ; a maximum of holidays has been granted on the basis of the regulation scale of pay; and the employer can no longer offer a "young" person just through her apprenticeship term a much reduced wage, with the alternative of what is com- monly called the "sack." Forty-four hours per week of five and one half days are the statutory limitation, but the workers are now urging the Arbitration Council to reduce the period to forty hours, thus paving the way for a Dominion holiday on Saturday. Of course, the employers are in deadly opposition to the pro- posed innovation, but some industries and businesses are recog- nizing the handwriting on the wall, and the agitation is sure to grow in strength and intensity with the coming years. When the time comes for Sir George Fenwick to pay the debt of nature his labors as a philanthropist and worker for the betterment of his fellows may fittingly be rewarded with this simple epitaph : "I strove with all my might to uphold the cause of the weak, and I leave it to posterity to say with what measure of success I performed my task." And there will not be a worker, — man, woman, or child — in the Commonwealth, who will not in reply offer up this heartfelt prayer : "Well done, faithful servant : go to your eternal rest among the Blest." In the natural run of other things, and in following the se- quence of events bearing on my chosen theme I have now to tell you something about a newspaper with the fortunes of which I have been closely associated, as office lad, apprentice, then turning from the mechanical to the literary side on account of imperfect eyesight I successfully climbed every rung of the jour- nalistic ladder, succeeding to the editorial chair in 1897 and re- tiring from it at the end of 1920, thus completing fifty-six years of continuous service under one firm, and putting up a record of which I am naturally most proud. I can honestly claim to be a modest man, wherefor it is necessary to push individual virtues right into the background, and I ask your pardon for having struck such a personal note. (In the characteristic letter which Sir George Fenwick has addressed to this Congress he recalls 572 The Press Congress of the World the fact that as far back as 1864 he and I, being obHged to leave our schooldays behind us, entered the service of the Daily Times, he to learn the trade of compositor, I to go with the publicity department to be a copy holder to the printer of the Government Gazette issued from the same office. Those were the rollicking, riotous days of the gold rushes, and every kind of manual labor, unskilled as well as skilled, youthful as well as adult, commanded big money. In the publishing branch besides dispatching the mail parcels of the Daily Times and Witness per the medium of Cobb's coach, we lads had to work overtime on Far j eon's novels. He had been styled the Colonial Dickens, and his novels of "Grip" and "Shadows of the Snow" were the popular vogue. Encouraged by the greatest of England's novelists of the Vic- torian Era, Far j eon betook himself to England, where he settled permanently, and wrote many serial stories that found favor in the eyes of the great British reading public.) I have taken up so much of your time in detailing the progress of a few of our metropolitan newspapers that I have left myself hardly any time whatever to tell you about other journals of first importance that have exercised considerable sway on our public policies in the past. At the head of this list I would place the Lyttelton Times, the managing director of which is Mr. Robert Bell, who at San Francisco in 1915 gave valuable assist- ance in launching the Press Congress of the World, is the founder of the only School of Journalism that New Zealand yet possesses, and with the shrewdness and business acumen that so often char- acterizes his fellow countrymen from beyond the Tweed has been the head and front of several successful enterprises. In my judgment you have done right well in deciding to avail your- selves of his great experience and well-balanced judgment. It is a great pity that those who guided the destinies of this paper in its earliest years should have obstinately resisted to march with the times ; had they done so the chances are that Christchurch, like all the other centres of population, save the capital, would have been content with one morning, one evening, and possibly two weekly newspapers, to the advantages of the advertiser, and to the exceeding benefit of the reading public. At one time neijotiations to that desirable consummation had Appendix 573 progressed so satisfactorily that the goal aimed at was actually in sight ; but the mistaken sentimentality of one of the prime negotiators who would not sacrifice the title of Lyttelton Times completely checked a well devised scheme of amalgamation. The Lyttelton Times first saw the light on January 11, 1851, and was published at Lyttelton or Port Cooper, the seaport of the province of Canterbury. It was a double foolscap sheet of eight pages; was issued once a week till 1854, when it became a bi-weekly, so continuing till 1863, and Avas first issued as a daily two years later. Its first editor was James Edward Fitzgerald, who filled that post in an honorary capacity for two years, and was relieved in 1854 when Ingram Shrimpton arrived from England, assumed proprietorship and controlled the editorial colmnn. It is worth a passing remark that Thomas Culling, who was the first printer, many years later established at Mataura (Southland) the largest and best appointed paper-making establishment in our Dominion, and also assisted to found one of the largest wholesale stationery businesses in New Zealand. When the bulk of the Canterbury Pilgrims made their future homes in Christchurch the Lyttelton Times transferred (in 1863) its plant to the embryo city, and I learned on searching the historic records of the office that there was a change of proprietorship in 1856 when Crosbie Ward and Christopher Charles. Bowen purchased the property for five thousand pounds. In 1860 Welham Reeves acquired Bowen's in- terest in the paper. Some comment on these names and the part their owners played in shaping the political history of our coun- try will be made by me later if an opportunity offers. Off- shoots of the Lyttelton Times were the Canterbury Times, a well- arranged, finely edited, copiously illustrated family paper that paid special attention to agriculture which existed from 1865 to 1917, when to the regret of the people of Canterbury, it svis- pended and the Star (evening) started in 1868, which on Saturday nights enjoys a great vogue on account of its reliable and ade- quate sporting information, gathered from all parts of New Zealand, as well as from Australia. The first sub-editor of the Lyttelton Times was Francis Knowles (afterwards a canon in the Episcopal Church) to whom succeeded C. C. Bowen in 1856. Of its original editors I have already made passing reference to 574 The Press Congress of the World Fitzgerald, who was followed by John Birch, till the arrival in the colony of Ingram. Crosbie Ward had a long reign from 1856 to 1867; eight years later came J. M. Smith, followed by R. A. Loughnan (1875), William Pemberton Reeves (1869); Samuel Saunders (1891) and M. L. Reading, the present incum- bent. Political dififerences between Fitzgerald and Reeves, Senior, led to the starting of the Press, to which Bowen transferred his services till he was appointed to the magisterial bench. The Lyttelton Times was the recognized standard bearer of Liberal- ism, and under William P. Reeves' management espoused the cause of Ballance, Vogel, Stout and Seddon with such vehemence and courage that it was mainly responsible for Canterbury send- ing to the Colonial legislature a solid phalanx of men whose slogan was "The Rights of the Democracy and Justice to Can- terbury." Reeves abandoned journalism for politics, in which he promptly made his mark, becoming Minister of Labor and Education in the Ballance and Seddon administration. He was the author of our system of compulsory arbitration for the settlement of industrial disputes ; and to his influence in the Cabinet is due the distinct Socialistic flavor of the Liberal pro- gramme ; and he gave a distinct fillip to the encouragement of technical education. He was our first High Commissioner in London, resigning that important post to become a member of the teaching stafif of London University. When James E. Fitz- gerald likewise abandoned active journalism to fill the important position of Controller-general, or first lieutenant of the Min- ister of Finance, he was succeeded in the editorship of the Press by I. Colborne Veel, a noted educationalist; after whom came J. S. Guthrie and W. H. Triggs, both promoted from the sub-edi- torial chair, and the last-named like myself is editor emeritus. We sit alongside each other in the nominated branch of the legislature. Lastly, let me mention the great newspaper of Auckland. In the days of provincialism the New Zealander and the Southern Cross were powerful and well managed organs ; the Evening News was a valuable property before the Allen family failed to recognize that newspapers, like most mundane things, must not simply mark time. The enterprise of Henry Brett, powerfully Appendix 575 helped as he was by that free lance of journalism, George M'Cul- lough Reed, an Irish Presbyterian clergyman, who had a pos- itive love for libel actions, laid on sure foundations the fortunes of the Evening Star, which is a wonderfully lucrative concern and the business aptitude of A. G. Horton (erstwhile of the Timaru Herald) promptly saw that Auckland was to be a pros- perous, progressive city, and to his organizing skill is due in large measure the proud position occupied by the Herald among the dailies of New Zealand, Both are strong financial concerns ; are ably edited, and like yourselves know the value of "boosting" the products and industries of their districts. Of our weekly papers it was my privilege on behalf of the Newspaper Proprietors' Association to submit for your criticism and inspection specimens of our best known publications. Of the weeklies the Witness (Dunedin), the Press (Christchurch), and the Herald will challenge comparison, I think most favorably, with journals of their class — no matter where published — for brightness of get up, for well-selected news and stories, for ac- curacy of information, and for excellence of illustrations. Among the less pretentious honorable mention may perhaps be made of the Farmer (Auckland), the Free Lance (Wellington), the Ob- server (Auckland), and the Sporting and Dramatic (also Auck- land). Other difficulties that our press labored under when cables were unknown, and when communication with the outside world was both intermittent and not unattended with danger, let Mr. Henry Brett, one of the founders of the Auckland Star and him- self the hero of many an exciting adventure at sea, recount for your edification, some of the incidents which marked his pro- gression from role of shipping reporter to the dizzy heights of opulent ownership, in which latter role he has done much, as patron of the fine arts and by encouragement of healthy sport of all kinds, to add to the enrichment of Auckland and to assist her to worthily maintain the title of "Queen City of the North." I append the short paper that Mr. Brett prepared for presentation to this Congress : "In days when telegraphs were scarce and telephones were not invented the shipping reporter — they called him the 'marine 576 The Press Congress of the World reporter' away back in the sixties — was the man who could make or break his paper's reputation. I had some exciting experiences when looking after the shipping column of the Southern Cross during the years 1863, 1864 and part of 1865, and later when I was on the New Zealand Herald in 1865. I was particularly well-fitted for a post offering plenty of scope of initiative and enterprise, for I pulled a strong oar, having been a successful amateur oarsman at my native town of St. Leonards-on-sea, Eng- land, and was possessed of enthusiasm and resource that fre- quently brought oiT scoops for my paper and caused despair in the rival offices. The news from all parts of the Dominion and from overseas came to Auckland either by sailing vessel or steamer, and while the regular traders from Australia generally brought files of the newspapers for the shipping reporters, it was the chance arrivals, such as the cattle and coal boats from the ports on the east coast of Australia that kept the reporters 'on the jump.' There was also a spice of adventure about the billet, and more than once there was a chance of seeing what sort of things 'Davy Jones' kept in that locker of his. (While waiting down the Rangitoto Channel one dark thick night in 1864 for the barque 'Kate,' one of the Circular Saw Line, I and my water- man saw her a good deal closer than we liked, as suddenly out of the blackness a huge hull swept by our little boat — so close we could have jumped aboard if she had not been booming along with the piping westerly that was blowing, and if we had not been so thoroughly scared at our narrow escape. On another oc- casion, when I was out meeting the brig "Papeete" from Tahiti, (this was also in 1864) there was a still north west breeze blow- ing and it did not look too safe to carry out the usual tactics of hooking on to the lee chains and scrambling aboard. But news must be got at all hazards, and the boatman hooked on to the brig which was then going at a good pace, and the reporter made a grab for a hold. 'For God's sake be quick ; I can't hold on any longer!' cried out the boatman, and before the reporter could get a fair hold the boat shot out from under him. He could not climb up and he dared not let go. It was blowing half a gale of wind so no one on deck heard his call, and it was not until the brig tacked ofif Orakei Bay that anyone knew of his presence in the Appendix 511 chains, and by the time he was hauled on board he was just about at the end of his tether. Mr. Hart, the supercargo, phed the half- drowned newspaper man with a bosun's nip of good French brandy and put him to bed where he slept for three or four hours. Naturally after hanging on for such a long time in the chains the reporter had a nice pair of bruised hands for a week or so. "As an instance of the risks the 'marine reporters' had to run in bad weather an adventure of Mr. W. Wilkinson may be recalled. He was then doing the shipping column on the South- ern Cross. In after years he became proprietor of the Thames Advertiser and is still (1921) living in Auckland. Mr. Wil- kinson was boarding the ship 'Water Nymph' in a gale of wind, and had just climbed out of his waterman's boat when she cap- sized, and was swept away. Captain Babot immediately lowered one of his lifeboats and managed to pick up one of the unfor- tunate watermen who was almost gone and took a long time to resuscitate, but the other poor fellow was drowned. "There were two rival news agencies in the early days — the Grenville Telegram Company, which represented Renter, and Holt and McCarthy. When the first Honolulu, San Francisco, and Auckland service was established in 1870 there was always a keen fight between the Auckland representatives of the rival agencies to get the summaries of European news away first on the wires for dispatch to the Southern centres of New Zealand. The first steamer in the service was the Wonga Wonga, a ten knot boat which left Sydney on March 12, 1870, called at Auckland, went up to Honolulu where she connected with a boat from San Francisco, and got back to Auckland on May 10. She took sixteen days between Honolulu and Auckland. Old newspaper men will recall that the man who got the telegraph wire first kept it until his 'copy' was all through. This led to an amusing ruse on my part as representing Holt and McCarthy." Shortly after Mr. Brett started his own paper Geddis was put onto the shipping. It so happened that Geddis, then shipping reporter on the Auckland Star and now editor of the New Zea- land Times had a bit of hard luck in getting beaten in the race to the wharf from the Frisco boat. Mr. Brett watching up on a point of vantage, saw Mr, Geddis coming in behind the Gren- 578 The Press Congress of the World ville agent (it afterwards turned out that the trouble was due to a broken oar blade) immediately rushed to the Star office and got hold of an old copy of the European Mail and Home News, publications which made a feature of a summary of the news up to the time that the mail left England. From these he made up the first sheet of news ready to hand in to the telegraph of- fice. The rival came along in due course, and looked a bit blank when he saw Holt and McCarthy's man at the door before him. 'Mr. Brett hasn't got the wires this time; I am first!" But the operator, who in those days also acted as clerk, refused to enter into an argument, and the rival reporter said he would go oiT and see his employer, which he immediately did. This was exactly what Holt and McCarthy's representative wanted, and before the other man could get back Mr. Geddis came along with the summary, which was made up in San Francisco, and the message of some four thousand words was put on the wires. Holt and McCarthy once more keeping up their reputation. "Various ruses were adopted for beating the opposition when mail steamers arrived. At first I used to have relay runners on the wharf and to them he used to throw my messages as soon as he came up to the end of the old Queen street in his waterman's boat. During the small-pox scare in San Francisco the mail steamers were compelled to drop anchor off the North Head, about four miles from Auckland, and in order to get the usual monthly summary of news to the telegraph office first a fresh scheme had to be evolved, for every trip, as the 'enemy' followed each new plan of the Holt and McCarthy representative with monotonous regularity. After having swift runners on the wharf, the next dodge was to station a horseman on some convenient point down the harbour to which the shipping reporter would row as soon as he got his dispatches from the mail boat. Another successful plan was to provide the purser when leaving Auck- land with a sealed can made like a buoy, into which upon the re- turn trip he put the press messages and quietly dropped it over the stern of the steamer, while the rival pressman was in his boat alongside the steamer, waiting for the doctor's permission to get aboard. The opposition was quite mystified when it saw Mr. Brett's watermen putting their backs into it, as no one had Appendix 579 been allowed aboard, and there was much wrath when the story of the 'buoy trick' leaked out. The steamers running at the time of this incident were the Nevada and Nebraska, three thou- sand tonners, with huge beam engines that worked through the deck, and their spreading paddle wheels were a great source of bother and sometimes danger to the shipping reporters in the light watermen's boats. These steamers went as far as Hono- lulu, the mails being brought by another steamer from Frisco. The Nevada, the first of the side-wheelers to run in the Hono- lulu-San Francisco-Auckland service, arrived in Auckland on May 3, 1871. One of the 'wins' for the Holt and McCarthy con- cern was brought about by enlisting the support of the members of a local rowing club, who paddled down to the mail steamer in a racing whale-boat, and the chagrin of the Grenville agent was keen when he saw the Holt and McCarthy man as soon as he had got his package, pull alongside the whaleboat, jump in and make for the wharf at racing speed. "One more incident when a bit of quick thinking told ef- fectively occurred after 1870, by which time the telegraph wire was through to Tauranga and the southern messages could be put in at that office if it suited. As he was pulling ashore from the mailboat Holt and McCarthy's agent spotted the cutter Hero (Captain Moller) with sails up ready to sail for Tauranga. Meet- ing the cutter's skipper on the old Watermen's steps Mr. Brett said 'Give me twenty minutes to go up to the office and get my vides and you will have the honour of sending the English mail throughout the colony.' Moller said he could not afford to lose the nice westerly that was blowing, but at last agreed to wait a quarter of an hour — 'not a minute longer.' Holt's agent got back just as the anchor was up. The Hero lived up to her name and reached Tauranga at eight o'clock the next morning, and Holt and McCarthy had a forty-eight hour start of the opposition which sent its messages by the steamer to Nelson — that being the port to which there was a regular time table steamer service." As an instance of the need for a "live" man on the early New Zealand newspapers to look after the shipping it may be recalled that on one occasion in the sixties the "Alice Cameron" one of the fast Circular Saw liners, did the voyage from San Francisco 580 The Press Congress of the World to Auckland in thirty-one days — which still stands as the sailing record between the two ports — and brought down English news (in the American papers) which was later than the latest Eng- lish news that had come down by the regular mail channels — via Suez and Australia. New Zealand's regular mails from Europe used to come via Suez and Sydney after the opening of the Suez Canal, and the Dominion also had a service which used the Panama Isthmus. In 1869 this Panama service broke down, a service with San Francisco was established in 1870, but the company had only a short life. A new company was formed at the end of that year, and started in 1871, with the Nevada and Nebraska. Both these services ran between Auckland and Honolulu where they tran- shipped mails and passengers and cargo to other steamers run- ning between that port and San Francisco. An adventure of quite a different nature is worth recording here: At this time the telegraphic regulations allowed a paper to "hold" the wires till it gets its messages through. One day there arrived at Forsant Street a mysterious looking craft, the movements of which gave rise to much speculation among the people of the Bluff (the port of Invercargill). What was going on there came to the ears of this deponent who, taking advan- tage of the aforesaid regulation kept the operators busily em- ployed transmitting scriptural texts until the business of the stranger was definitely ascertained. The issue of the evening paper was delayed till after the local telegraph office was closed (at 5 p. m.) and then the public were startled with the story of how the ship General Grant, laden with gold shipped at Mel- bourne, Victoria, had been set by adverse currents into a huge cave at the Auckland Islands and had disappeared with the loss of all the gold and many valuable lives. The remnants of her crew were rescued by a small vessel, named the Amherst, I think, and brought to the Bluff. Next morning's paper, not being able to prove the story for itself, characterised the publication as a "cock and bull yarn," but, of course was obliged to make the amends when the facts became authentic. Several attempts have since been made to rescue the sunken gold, but all ended in dis- mal failure. Appendix 581 It will not be without interest if I proceed to outline how news — foreign and domestic — is gathered for and distributed among the newspapers of the Dominion. In the early seventies there were two rival press agencies, as explained by Mr. Brett. The one was owned by Holt and McCarthy, the other by the Grenville Company. Then at the end of 1878 representatives of the four principal dailies met in Dunedin and decided to form a co-operative organization that would exchange domestic news, and arrange for the supply to its constituent members of European and Australian intelligence. Thirty papers at once joined, and Mr. E. T. Gillon, of the Evening Post was made first manager. One of the articles of association enacted that only one journal in the same town should belong to the association, the object being, of course, to crush out rival journals. Papers of the standing of the Evening Post (Wellington), Press (Christchurch), Star (Auck- land), and Star, (Dunedin) would not for a moment submit to despotism of that kind, and an opposition press association was the immediate outcome. Not only did they inaugurate their own serv- ice, but were the first to conclude arrangements for an independent supply of foreign news, since Renter had already been "nabbed" by the other combination. Necessarily the rivalry thus engendered was responsible for a good deal of overlapping and entailed much wasteful expenditure. Negotiations for amalgamation were set afoot, and these resulted in the establishment in 1889 of the New Zealand Press Association, which has remained ever since the sole supplier and distributor of all domestic and foreign news. The area of its operations has in the interval been much ex- tended, and it has its own office in Sydney, where an experienced English pressman collects and culls from all the messages re- ceived through the media of the Argus-Sydney Morning Herald combination, the Sydney Sun's special London service, the Lon- don Times special cables. We likewise receive at Norfolk Island direct messages from various foreign sources, including )the United States. All messages sent over the Pacific cable are re- ceived at Doubtless Bay (Auckland) and then retransmitted at specified times to the morning and evening papers. The con- stitution of the organization has also been materially altered, io- asmuch as non-shareholders (i. e. papers that do not rank as 582 The Press Congress of the World share owners) have a potential voice in the managements; the board of directors now comprises eight, of whom two specially represent the country press ; and every paper of any consequence is now either a shareholder or a contributing member. When the first organization was started it was managed by Mr. Gillon with one assistant; the present manager is Mr. W. A. Atack who employs a staff of nine. Though complaint is often made by the visitor that the New Zealand papers exhibit an oppressive sameness about their cabled intelligence, it must be acknowledged by every impartial critic that the news is well-displayed without striving for effect, that it is fair and dependable, and that when- ever comment is added that is done in a most impartial spirit. Though since the war the cable charges have been steadily ad- vanced the directors of our Press Association have not thought it prudent to curtail the supply, which has grown apace, though some responsible directors of our press are disposed to complain of the undue prominence given to prize fights, divorce proceed- ings, and other unsavory intelligence. In 1913 more than half a million words, representing more than a million when the "skele- ton" was extended into the ordinary language which a "sub," blessed with imagination knows so well how to display to the ut- most advantage, were sent over the cables and I am well within the mark when I say that during the most exacting periods of the war the number of cabled words was between six hundred thousand and seven hundred thousand. One of the most serious of the many problems now confront- ing the newspaper proprietors of New Zealand is how best to ensure an adequate and dependable stock of newsprint. Like most countries we were desperately hard pushed at times during the war to keep pace with demands. In some quarters it was a hand-to-mouth existence, and absolute breakdown was alone prevented by some papers that were fortunate to have obtained good stocks coming to the assistance of their less fortunate breth- ren. Mr. P. Selig, manager of the Christchurch Press Company, has been good enough to forward to me a short narrative of the steps that were taken to prevent a future paper famine, and you will hear with regret, I am sure, that the efforts of those who are co-operating with him in this most important matter ended in dis- mal failure. He writes: Appendix 583 "A syndicate, of which I was a member, took up from the Government leases of timber reserves on the West Coast of the South Island. After spending a considerable sum of money in procuring reports from English and other experts on the reserves. location, water power, etc., and estimates for the erection of mills and the necessary machinery for the production of 'newsprint,' we sent abroad a shipment of the different woods from the re- serve in charge of a representative. Under his supervision the timber was made into 'newsprint' of better quality than has been imported into this Dominion. The various timbers were therefore proved suitable for pulping for newsprint. "This was just prior to the war, when the flotation of a com- pany with two hundred thousand pounds capital was decided upon. The war prevented this enterprise from being launched. After the war, machinery had gone up to such an enormous price that made necessary a capital that was not easily obtainable. Then we reached the stage when the money market, owing to the latest moratorium of the Government redeposits, the stoppage of ad- vances by the banks, and the drop in the price of wool and meat, was very difficul*-. There being no chance of raising the neces- sary capital, and he leases having expired, it was decided not to renew and the New Zealand Pulp and Wood Co. went into liquida- tion. "It has been proved there are plenty of suitable timber on the West Coast of the South Island for the manufacture for many years of a fine quality of newsprint, which before the war could have been produced at a cost to profitably sell below the price being paid for imported paper." Had not Mr. Easten (general manager of the Otago Daily Times Company) not been obliged by untoward circumstances to leave Honolulu before the real business of the Congress began he would have told you that during the war period the average cost to land newsprint in New Zealand was sixty-seven and ten one-hundredths pounds per ton, and that today it remains at the extravagant figure of thirty-two pounds. When it was feared that the supply would break down, by reason of the difficulty in procuring "bottoms," from Canada the proprietors of the Mataura paper mills (situated in South- 584 The Press Congress of the World land) contracted to supply twenty-five tons of newsprint for the Dunedin weekly. They were successful in turning out a good white paper, which printed well, but it was far too heavy in substance for use on rotary machines. But the Witness Com- pany liked the product so much that they repeated two years later the order for twenty-five tons, but it took the paper manufacturer so long to execute this second order that it was obliged to go out and search for other lines, and to cancel the newsprint order. The Mataura paper mill then went in for the manufacture of art papers and brown wrapping paper, which paid it better to make, seeing that there was an acute shortage of all kinds of paper needed by the retailer. There are in New Zealand three mills capable of supplying such requirements, i. e., the New Zealand paper mill's main factory at the Woodhaugh (Dunedin) and a branch factory at Riverhead, near Auckland ; also the Mataura mill — the largest of them all — near Gore (Southland). It is worthy of passing remark that so long ago as 1869 this same mill at Woodhaugh turned out a newsprint, on which it was intended that the Duke of Edinburgh, then paying an ofificial visit to Dune- din, should print that day's issue of the Star on a new wharfdale imported by the then proprietor. But the Duke forgot his ap- pointment, and the honor passed to a favorite actress of that day, who started the machine with the orthodox baptismal rites. The paper was said to be of excellent feature and of good color. It was made from phorimium tenax, a native plant, which is admir- ably adapted and largely used for rope making. The newspaper proprietors are now taking concerted action to obviate any recurrence of the troubles of the past few years, and to that end propose to establish depots in some central places, or a single depot in one of the main centers of population where a full six months supply of newsprint for all of the newspapers of New Zealand will be stored. Another organization that has considerable influence in de- termining the attitude of the proprietors towards the various ac- tivities that are more or less remotely associated with the press is another attempt at co-operation. The Newspapers Proprietors' Association, which was founded in 1898 and is also incorporated, deals almost exclusively with business issues and policies. It has Appendix 585 gradually grown in strength and influence until it is now regarded as the official mouthpiece of the trade, and as such deals directly with the administration and appoints representatives to appear before the Conciliation tribunal and the Arbitration Court when- ever a dispute arises between the proprietors and any section of their employees. In 1920 the organization was reconstructed ; it has transferred its headquarters to the capital where it has a resi- dent secretary. At the time of penning this article seventy news- papers have enrolled under the banner of the Newspaper Pro- prietors' Association, and one is amply justified in saying that all the principal papers in our Dominion belong to this organiza- tion, while it is confidently anticipated that the number will in- crease as the advantages of combination for mutual protection are made manifest. One of the first steps taken by the new organiza- tion was to call for tenders for the bulk supply of all the news- print required by the papers of the Dominion during 1922. These tenders were due at the end of September last, and when I left Wellington I learned from the association's secretary (Mr. L. J. Berry) that there was already evidence of keen competition among the newsprint manufacturers and it is hoped that a satisfactory contract will be the outcome. The association accredits certain advertising agencies which as a condition precedent must sub- scribe to a definite set of rules governing their acts or contracts. These agencies are paid by commission on all new business they place with the several newspapers, but no commission is paid for any business received through agencies other than the officially recognized ones. On January 1, 1921, there were two hundred and forty-nine newspapers and magazines on the postoffice register but many of these are small monthlies. But there were sixty-one dailies, and of these forty-one are on the membership roll of the association. The remaining members include seven tri-weeklies. seven bi- weeklies, eleven weeklies and five monthlies. It should be added that the annual meetings of the Press Association, the Newspaper Proprietors', the Empire Press Union, and the Master Printers' Association, are held in February, when office bearers are elected, and general business transacted. In the past these meetings have been peripatetic, the feeling being that the social as well as the 586 The Press Congress of the World business side of the newspaper and printing trades should be cul- tivated, but the disposition is growing to make the capital city the general rendezvous. I will lay on the table, for the benefit of any who may feel interested, the latest available copy of our "Postal Guide," which supplies detailed information relating to the charges for cable and other news transmitted to the press ; the rates of postage ; the list of newspapers published in the Dominion, and the member- ship of the Newspaper Proprietors' Association, etc. In bringing to a close this necessarily discursive paper, I would like to say that nothing has given so much unallowed joy as the virile, outspoken and wise criticism of modern journalism heard from the lips of Mrs. Warren (who has proved herself to be not only a forcible speaker but the embodiment of sound, common sense), Publisher H. L. Bridgman (of the Brooklyn Standard Union) and the veteran Frank Glass (of Birmingham, Alabama). The two last named, who received their professional training in the widest and best of all universities, that of the big world it- self, are journalists of the old school, who have a natural dis- taste for screeching head lines, for sensationalism of all kinds, and for adventitious aids to make a paper sell. They want to see, as do the majority of us, I trust, the newspaper of tomorrow absolutely free from suggestiveness, the purveyor of clean, whole- some, reliable intelligence and the creator of a moral code which we shall live up to ourselves, instead of cultivating, as unfor- tunately happens in too many instances, a commercialism that is calculated to camouflage the truth. When the press rises to the full height of its great mission as the foremost factor in formu- lating a public opinion that shall be broadly based on the trinity of truthfulness, impartiality, and honesty of purpose, it may with justice claim (and only then) to be the real educator of the peoples in all the civilised countries of the world. Is not that a goal worth striving for? Like a goodly number of my col- leagues, by whom I am surrounded today, I have enlisted in the big army of emeritus journalists — men and women who in their day and generation earnestly and faithfully worked for the realization of those ideals that were most dear to our hearts when we possessed the vigorous mind and the healthy body so Appendix 587 necessary to the accomplishment of our self-appointed tasks. Many of those aims yet await attainment, but none of them is be- yond accomplishment if the desire to perform service burns as ardently in the breasts of those who will come after us as it did in those of the pioneers in this great upward and onward movement. Richelieu is credited with saying that "there is no such word in the lexicon of youth as fail!" That is a funda- mental truth, as strong as any precept to be found in Holy Writ. Let it then inspire you of the younger generation of journalists to become like the Crusaders of old the standard-bearers of a Cross of Infinite Hope that will bring in its trail the blessings of peace, prosperity, and plentitude wherever the benign influence of an inspirational, honest, and humanitarian press can make it- self felt. Among the many great intellects that have shaped the policies of the newspapers of the United States that I am most familiar with there is no one for whom we men of British descent have a more profound respect than your Grand Old Man — Henry Wat- terson, editor-in-chief of the Louisville Courier-Journal. We know and admire him for the great courage with which he ex- presses his opinions ; we recognize in him those qualities of mind and heart that make him a very solon among his fellows ; and we revere him for the noble stand he took when after the Lusitania sinking, which was a foul outrage on all humanity, your country hesitated about ranging herself, as happily she ultimately did. on the side of the forces that were fighting to maintain the sacred cause of our common civilization. No finer lay-sermon was ever preached, in my humble judgment, than Colonel Watterson de- livered to the pressmen of Canada in convention assembled re- cently, and as being germane to the debate we have listened to in this Congress I make no apology for asking you to let sink deeply into your inmost heart the pearls of wisdom that fell from the lips of one who, conscious that his life's labors are well nigh ended, has left to those who will evolve the newspaper policies of the future a magnificent legacy of perfected counsel. And what the Colonel begged of his Canadian friends to translate into efifective action I beseech you in the last utterance that hu- manly speaking it will be my privilege to deliver to a Press 588 The Press Congress of the World Congress of the World to make it your slogan of future duty. I would like to see these sententious words engraved on a tablet, which should occupy a place of honor in the editorial sanctum of every newspaper in every land : "The newspaper is the history of yesterday. It is made to sell assuredly, but it is not a commodity like drygoods, like pork and beans, or hardware, or cutlery. It may not care to have any opinions; but, in case it does, it should seek and aim to be a keeper of the Public Conscience, an example and counsellor, nor a corner grocery man — to be level of head and kindly of heart, upright and elevated, always sincere and truthful, avoiding as it would avoid a pestilence or a famine the character of a scold. More and more will newspaper owners and makers discern that integrity and cleanliness will pay the best dividends. The scandal- monger will, in time, be relegated to the category of the unpros- perous as well as the disreputable, and the detective be driven out of the newspaper service, where he should have no place, to the company of the police, where he properly belongs. Manly conduct and aspiration should be and is the rule — the brutal and vulgar be the exception — and the journalistic brand should be no less accepted and honorable than that of medicine, divinity, and jurisprudence." DUTCH JOURNALISM By W. N. Van Der Hout, Honorary Secretary, The Association of Dutch Journalists, The Hag we, Holland. Comparing the Dutch daily papers with those of other coun- tries, especially France, England and America, we are at once aware of a striking contrast. As we immediately observe, our dailies are much more sober in appearance in consequence of the very scant use of conspicuous headlines. Some efforts by the Appendix 589 newspaper press to propagate this use have failed. The Dutch reader is not to be enticed by an abundance of sensational head- ings. The contents of the Dutch dailies are sober and to the point, but consequently rather tedious and deep. The Dutch na- ture is mirrored in the character of the Dutch press. Patriarchal geniality, supported by old-fashioned orthodox religiousness or its reminiscence is prevalent and it is typically characteristic that many clergymen or former clergymen take to the press. They are the very last people in the world to exhilarate the newspaper- reading, but rather add to the dullness of the press. We distinguish here neutral from political papers. The latter represent a political party, which but too often is connected with a religious sect; the former scrupulously abstain from all po- litical and religious quarreling. Yet the difference is not so very great as their partiality is emphasised only in the leading articles which moreover are few. In the intelligence part gi^eat uni- formity exists in all the papers, obviously consequent on the fact that they get their information from the same sources. For foreign intelligence there are Renter, Havas, Wolff, and other general offices ; for home intelligence two correspondence bu- reaus are working, which for the bigger newspapers are supple- mented by local correspondents, who, however, as a rule send their intelligence to several papers and thus form small offices by themselves. Only some of the greatest newspapers can afford correspond- ents of their own in the capitals at home and abroad. The small ones often combine and keep a correspondent among them. This co-operation cannot be avoided, because in a small country the papers have only a small sale. Anyhow this non-ideal prin- ciple is to be preferred to the cutting-and-copying-system which also is still yielding an existence to many smaller papers. The immediate result of these circumstances is that the num- ber of journalists in Holland is small. The number of news- papers amounts to eighty-two, the number of journalists to about five hundred, only three dailies are employing more than thirty journalists, two about twenty and the rest all remain under ten, while sixty even have only five or less. Besides there is a num- ber of papers that appear twice or three times a week. They 590 The Press Congress of the World are doing mostly without a regular journalist: a school-teacher, an official or the owner himself fills up the papers for the greater part with copied stuff. Of the eighty-two dailies some thirty show a certain political colour ; the rest are neutral. This neutral- ity must not be underrated, for these papers confine themselves to news and an impartial summary of what happens in parlia- ment and town-councils. They avoid any subject of quarreling as much as they can. Nine papers only have an evening and a morning issue, while one paper has merely a morning — the rest only an evening — edi- tion. We can honestly declare that journalism here is in a very sound condition. Cases of excessive partiality, of bribing, of love of sensation, of being prejudiced, do not appear. This showed most clearly during the years of European War. One paper only positively sided with a certain group of belligerents, the others all stuck to the Dutch, i. e., neutral standpoint. The commercial and intellectual part of the daily papers are strictly kept apart. An occasional effort to mix them up in- variably meets with disapproval and is happily not imitated. The press is scrupulous in inserting news of a commercial tendency and merely of an odd paper it may be said that the mercantile leading is exceeding the limits and trying too hard to cultivate the intellectual side for the good of the commercial part. But those in my opinion pernicious endeavors are still far from being prevalent. The greater number of the newspapers belongs to a com- pany limited which has to appoint a manager for the commercial and a head-editor for the intellectual part. Another number — the smaller papers — is private property. With the latter business of course comes first. The owner will avoid everything that might make him suffer loss. The judgment of the press, how- ever, causes this to remain within allowable limits. Sometimes the functions of head-editor and manager happen to be united in one person. This is not a happy choice of system and as far as they belong to the employers' union those double functionaries have been shut out by the journalists from their society. This organization of managers and owners which is Appendix 591 wrongly calling itself "The Netherland Newspaper Press" in- cludes nearly all managers and owners. Besides there is the "Journalistenbring" to which organization of the press the pres- ent writer is much honored to be secretary. With this general organization a small one of Roman Catholic members is always co-operating on a friendly footing. Shut out by the "Bring" and discontented that they were al- lowed no more the sunny heights of journalism, some head-edi- tors-managers established an organization of their own to which they also admitted the managers of smaller papers where there is no head-editor and who practically are hardly more than ad- ministrators. The barrier between the intellectual and the com- mercial part is thus broken down. The rigorously upheld separa- tion is fairly gone. An occasional swell-head editor's feather in a poor manager's cap is looking too ridiculous though to harm the general respectability of the journalists' class. Owing to the small number of the editorial staffs the jour- nalists for the smaller papers do a hundred odd jobs. With the greater ones of course they are specialized. For the home, for- eign, art, sport, and financial part special journalists are work- ing. Next come the reporters who do not cover such a big field of labor, as the intelligence offices are already furnishing much. The head of the editorial staff is the head-editor ; the system of sub-editor or secretary to the editor, who has to manage the daily cares and troubles, e. g., the keeping in touch with the com- positors room, the correspondence with the subscribers, etc., is not known here. On the smaller papers the head-editor has to do a greater share of the daily writing and is thus more filling up the place of first editor. On the greater ones this falls to the part of the heads of sections, while the head-editor writes leading ar- ticles only. With very few exceptions the newspapers are not great enough to stand in need of a special head-editor and so a great many of them happen to be serving as a sort of flag flying from the paper's pinnacle. Also many of them are not recruited for being an authority or having a title. On the political papers a politician-to-be or a politician-that-was often has the leading. The "color" of the paper is shown only in the leading-articles and the Parliament and Town-Council Summaries. This part 592 The Press Congress of the World and the intelligence part are strictly kept apart. Thus consider- ing the small extent of the dailies it would be quite rational that the leading of political matters was in one hand and that an all- round journalist would see to the rest. This would make the paper less top-heavy as is often the case now. Evidently one head-editor cannot be supposed to be good at everything, There- fore he is mostly calling in the aid of experts outside the papers and anonymity, the great evil of journalism, covers up the as- sistance. The story of "le journal c'est un monsieur" comes in where the reality of many-sided information is lost sight of. Small wonder that the Dutch editors stand up for anonymity. With sophistries about "the paper being one" the wrong system is defended. In reality this being one is very problematic, the more so where the extent of the papers is greater, its number of co-operators vaster ; anonymity supports the top-heavy leading. As a rule the foreign part in the Dutch papers is well taken care of, the intelligence service works well, foreign papers are care- fully perused, the art of translating is flourishing and the leaders possess a profound knowledge of foreign affairs. In treating them they are given much more free scope than their colleagues for the home affairs. Nor is a hurry "to be up" deemed neces- sary. It is a pity that the "telegrams" cannot more properly be worked out. They are chaotically put together under one head, bearing the peculiar title of "telegrammen," peculiar in that the way the information is got is chosen as a title. There may have been sense in it in times when a telegram was an extraordinary way of corresponding; now that everyone is familiar with wires this title has fairly lost its psychological effect. To the neutral papers foreign affairs regularly provide the right stuff for leading articles. There one need not be afraid to touch upon painful subjects which can easily be the matter when treating home affairs. Home intelligence as a rule is less got up than put together. What is sent the intelligence-offices, what is supplied by private correspondents and reporters is collected and arranged. Even there much is more simply communicatory than a regular report. Truth to tell all the newspapers have tried to give something more and by many journalists interesting work has been done in the general social line. A general, clear picture Appendix 593 of social life is not given by the papers. Club-life, the struggle in the different classes, is not mirrored in them. The professional papers are accomplishing this task better, but only very little of the leading articles is taken from them by the dailies. Again the editorial staffs are too small to write things out more properly and the office- journalists cannot possibly be equal to such a many-sided task as is left to them. Only a few heads can boast a specialist of their own: art, sport and finance. The first is limited to critique of the stage, music, literature and plastic arts ; the second, in my opinion, is much too ample and not in keep- ing with the value of sport. Under this head many penny-a-liners are working and the reports of the matches are marked by bad style and extravagant praise. Personally I am of the opinion that the papers are too much given to criticism, too little didactic ; too much neutrally de- scriptive ; too much individually critical on one side ; too little instructive and too little informatory on the other. A daily should be an intellectual instrument, a pedagogical institution by which a nation is continually being educated and civilized. In the Netherlands it has always been a great fault of the papers that they pay their journalists badly. The journalistic career never was attractive, because only to very few it could become of any importance. Toward the intellectual work done by the journalists the notorious mistake was made of "giving too little and asking too much." Up to this day many journalists' fees do not surpass those of the compositors. Indeed much has been changed for the better since 1918, owing to the action of the "Journalistenbring," but what is necessary has not nearly been attained yet by all the papers. There is an unavoidable mutual connection between the spiritual elevation and the ma- terial reward. He that will create must be in high spirits, a poet once sung; he that is weighed down by cares cannot wholly de- velop his creative power. Beautiful theories may be set up of vocation and satisfaction in one's labor, if it is only granted that a journalist's calling is very many-sided and may be followed in other work also. Journalism will attract even more people that feel the call if the material satisfaction is greater. Journalism and the press are no business of the state. There 38 594 The Press Congress of the World is complete freedom of expressing one's thoughts apart from every one's responsibility toward the law. From experience this freedom has proved to be absolutely justified; seldom if ever it is misused ; law-suits of offence hardly ever appear. Generally speaking the government does not always show yet a clear un- derstanding of the importance of publicity. Much depends here on the persons in authority individually but as a rule at the bureau they are very much given to privacy and mystery. The government does not sufficiently know how to get most out of publicity. One has got la wrest the news from it. However signs of improvement are showing here and there. Dutch journalism is not in the least scandal-hunting; its earnest endeavors to give truthful information, its absolute un- impeachability are its very peculiar features. It is rather kindly disposed and smoothing than exciting and instigating. Only few papers are very decided in their opinion and (assuming their attitudes) in stating their position. Many of them are compelled by their neutrality to keep aloof from interesting problems. Holland is not a country of sensational events and conse- quently a journalist's profession is not so full of variation and adventure as is usual in other countries. Travelling journalists are few in number ; reporters frequent meetings and assemblies and are present at important events, but by all that, their time is not taken up all the year round. Local reporting does not amount to much in Amsterdam and Rotterdam it is well worth men- tioning; here at the Hague the Dutch correspondence bureau has for the greater part taken this task upon itself. It stands to reason that at the Hague there are many parliament reporters whose only task it is to give a neutral report or summary. In those summaries the discussions of the "States-General" are treated from the paper's political point of view. Criticism is what it mostly comes to. Many neutral papers give a minute account of the discussions without much display of criticism ; smaller papers are content to give wired reports, sometimes augmented by weekly summaries. Private life is not discussed in the papers. It is not thought fair and even the slightest allusions are considered to be objectionable. The dailies are not illustrated. Recently a pictorial morning paper was pub- Appendix 595 Hshed and one of the greatest papers has inserted an illustrated page. Illustrated weeklies fill up this gap. The weeklies as a rule are very good. They have got very good contributors and do much laudable work. It seems to me that the dailies by taking no account of a good many things have done much to further the development of the weeklies. The Dutch are very fond of reading. Much unfavorable weather often keeps them indoors and reading is one of the diversions they like best. Therefore it is desirable that the papers should fur- nish them with a good variety of reading, didactic and informa- tory about all the topics of the day. In this respect, considering the nature of the Dutch and their conditions of life, the Dutch dailies are rather falling short. Intelligence is too substantial, especially of foreign affairs too much detail is given. As a rule special correspondence from the capitals is superb. It is giving us a very clear picture of life and proceedings on the other side of our frontiers. Compared with foreign papers the Dutch are very thorough, but also rather dull. Repeatedly the leaders tried to stir them up a little. However in Holland hardly any difference is made be- tween jest and wit, and many writers are trying their hands at joking rather than at real humor. Only very few papers have succeeded in making up a special head of really good "hors d'oeuvres." The Netherlands have produced many able journalists and even now many good writers are working for the press. We will not mention names to escape the danger of becoming unjust by being short. Every period has had its own masters and every period will still have them. Dutch journalism is not subject to many changes; only very slowly some ideas are altering. Of course here too there are innovators, who want to introduce many changes, but they can push their ideas by very slow progress only ; even the public is not keen on novelties. We may be said to have pointed out very candidly the better and the worse side of Dutch journalism, from which description we hope a good idea of it can be formed. A great many circumstances are influencing journalism : the comparatively small sale, the great number of small papers, dis- 596 The Press Congress of the World cord in politics and religion, but after all we think Dutch jour- nalism has won a first place, even in the eyes of the public. The Dutch press has a good serious conception of its task and as a rule understands the importance of publicity. Its as- sociation, the 'Nederlandsche Journalistenbring,' has always stood up for the respectability of the profession. It has had a hard task because there are so many sides to the profession and because of the heterogeneity of the press. In details, however, we are still far from being at one. Last year, e. g., at the first Dutch Journalistic Congress there appeared to be a great difference of opinion about the very important question of anonymity. We shall not expatiate here on this problem, but only state as our opinion that we consider the utmost limitation of anonymity of urgent necessity. Holland has shown by its history that it is ready to give up everything for its liberty ; no feeling has ever grown so much into a passion as the love of liberty with the Dutch. But then they should make the most generous use of this liberty and give their opinion under their hand. We are proud of our honesty and the just endeavors of the Dutch press, a characteristic that is to be set off as by a golden frame by our own signatures under our own opinions. Anonymity is fraud and leads to deceiving. It is unworthy of the sincere. As the result of the small extent of our country little litera- ture on journalism is lasting. Only an odd booklet on this sub- ject has been published. Now this is not so very bad. as foreign literature is open to the greater part of the better classes. The knowledge of foreign languages is essential to the journalist, as it enables him to keep abreast of all that is written abroad. Ef- forts to hold regular courses for journalism have failed. A course was held once, but too few people attended the lectures. In Holland not much is felt for an academic education for jour- nalism. Practical exercise is esteemed much higher. Many a student after taking his degree has devoted himself to journalism ; besides, however, many self-made journalists have held important posts. For journalism in Holland a broad general knowledge, a clear intellect and sober judgment are needed. Scientific culti- vation does not necessarily imply fitness : we witnessed many very good scholars fail in journalism and we saw young men with a very simple school education climb to important posts. Appendix 597 As we mentioned before, journalists' salaries have not al- ways been all that can be desired. A small group was paid well ; the rest could hardly make both ends meet. In 1918 the "Neder- landsche Journalistenbring," which in the beginning was no more than a society of friends and did not care much what happened to the greater part of the journalists, started a strong salary action. It was successful even if it did not attain everything it had wished. The inviolable connection between ideal and material interests has often become apparent. By better salaries better hands will feel attracted toward the profession and its respecta- bility and importance will grow in proportion. The legal condition of the journalist has not been settled. In the Labor Act of 1919, which has not been quite enforced yet, provisions were made for the journalists also, but not of much moment. The association has still an important field of labor there, just as large as with regard to the care for old age and widows' and orphans' pensions. Perhaps it will become necessary to introduce a newspaper- trade bill. Maybe protection of the intellectual labor, influence of all the intellectual laborers on the leading of the paper, the legal condition and the right to a pension, are petitions that can only be granted by an act. Some countries have already set an example and the Netherlands will have to consider the question. Law clauses regarding journalism do not exist : we are en- joying the most complete freedom. Even in the critical years of the European War the government let us absolutely free and we can declare that only very seldom this privilege was misused. Only a short time ago Mr. H. W. Massingham, head-editor of the Nation, declared that the Dutch journalism is better than the English, more serious and instructive. Indeed the Dutch journalism is not superficial like the French, not partial like the English, not sensational like the American. It has a character of its own, typically Dutch, thorough, dreamy though at the same time sober. In the Dutch press there is place for serious, educated young men of high energy and spirits : they will not be wholly satisfied by it, but a grand and resultful career is open to them, if they 598 The Press Congress of the World will never weary of developing themselves and having an interest in the evolution of intellectual and social life. There is an old saying in Holland, spoken once by royal mouth, which runs : "A small people must be great in those things wherein it can be great." These words must also be applied to journalism in our little Holland. The "Nederlandsche Journalis- tenbring" is earnestly striving to make journalism great in Hol- land and each Dutch journalist is honestly trying to do his duty in this respect. We shall all follow the discussions at the congress at Honolulu with great interest and know how to profit by them. Holland has always been on the look-out to get hold of and to bring into practice the best things of all the world. No immoderate national- ism, no self-consciousness, no improper notion of its won glory, has ever prevented it from accepting good things wherever it found them. May you at your congress help to defend the international interest of journalism and to raise it. You may depend upon the Dutch for their readiness to accept and to apply all that is best. "Orbi ex orbe" is the device the "Nederlandsche Journalisten- bring" is bearing on its banner. LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. Wabren G. Harding, President of the United States of America, Honorary President of the Congress. . . Frontispiece facing page Walter Williams, Dean of the School of Journalism of the Uni- versity of Missouri, Columbia, Missouri, U. S. A., President OF the Congress. ......... 7 James Wright Brown, Editor of The Editor and Publisher, New York City, Secretary-Treasurer of the Congress. . . 32 Wallace R. Farrington, Governor of the Territory of Hawaii, Vice President and General Business Manager, Honolulu Star-Bulletin, Chairman, Hawaiian Islands Executive Com- mittee 64 The Opening Session of the Congress, Moana Hotel, Honolulu Delegates to the Congress at the Cliff House, San Francisco on the Eve of Sailing from the Mainland to Honolulu. Lorrin a. Thubston, President, Advertiser Publishing Company Honolitlu; Wallace R. Farrington, Governor of the Terri TORY OF Hawaii; Alexander Hume Ford, Director of the Pan Pacific Union Oswald Mayband, Montreal, Canada; Agustin Lazo, Havana Cuba; Col. and Mrs. Edward Frederick Lawson, London, Eng LAND; Mr. and Mrs. Thomas Petrie, Hongkong. Delegates from China; At the Military Review. LuDviG Saxb, Cheistiania, Norway; Mark Cohen. Dunedin, New Zealand; Thales Coutoupis, Athens, Greece; Virgilio Ro driguez Beteta, Guatemala City Members op the Australian Delegation, with Goveknor Earring ton ; On the Reviewing Stand at Iolani Palace. John Henry Kessell, Gladstone, Australia; Herbert Arthur Davies, Melbourne, Austealia; Andrew Dunn, Rockiiampton, 599 96 128 14-1 176 224 240 272 600 List of Illustrations facing page Australia ; Motosada Zumoto and K. Sugimuba, Tokyo, Japan ; HiN Wong, Canton, China; Hollington K. Tong, PekiiNG, China; Gregoria Nieva, Manila, Philippine Islands. . . 304 Miss Caroline Southern Catches a Fish; Louis Madeiras, Portu- guese, Presenting Gavel for Congress to Governor Farbing- TON and President Williams, on Steps of Iolani Palace; Oklahoma Editors' Club House in Which Congress Was In- vited TO Meet; Henry Chung and Dong-sung Kim, Korea; Mrs. Henry J. Allen and Mrs. Ralph A. Harris, Delegates FROM Kansas, Decorated with Leis 33G W. D. Hornaday, Austin, Texas; Mr. and Mrs. V. S. McClatchy, Sacramento, California; Herbert L. Bridgman, Brooklyn, New York; Mrs. John Trenholm Warren, Honolulu; Frank P. Glass, Sr., Birmingham, Alabama; John R. Morris, Execu- tive Secretary of the Congress, Tokyo; Mb. and Mrs. H. U. Bailey, Illinois; L. W. de Vis-Norton, Secbetary, Hawaiian Islands Executive Committee 368 Peixim: iNARY Session of Congress on Board Matson Navigation Company Steamship "Matsonia." 384 Delegates Hear Dr. T. A. Jaggar Lecture at Kilauea. . . .416 A View of the Luau in the Armory at Lahaina, Maui. . . 448 A Second View of the Luau in the Armory at Lahaina, Maui. 480 A Third View of the Luau in the Armory at Lahaina, Maui. 512 President Harding Hears from Secretary-Treasurer Brown Report OF the Congress 544 INDEX. Adams, Bristow, 411 Ad Club, Honolulu, 41 African Bureau of Information, 418 Agenda, Congress, 79 Aiken, Worth O., 10 Alducin, Rafael, 417 Alessandri, Arturo, 418 Allen, Col. Riley H., 10. 45, 66, 265, 433 American Newspaper Publishers' Association, 77 Andersen, Alfred G., 4 Andrae, Percy, 5 Andreve, G., 406 Armitage, Geo. T., 10 Association of Foreign Cor're- spondents, 403 Australia, Tlie Press of, 547 Australian Journalists Association, 306 Automobile Club, 52 Bailey, H. U.. 292 Baird, Robert H. H., 408 Baldwin, Mrs. W. A., 32 Barr, James A., 4 Beckley, Henry P., 32 Bedford, Randolph, 418 Beecroft, David, 410 Beeson, W. E. and Chas. H.. 411 Belgium Press Association, 364 Bell, Robert, 3, 176, 404 Benn, Ernest J. P., 412 Bentley, Max, 148 BentleV. Robert W., 151 Berrv,* L. J., 413 Beteta, V. R., 14, 79, 81, 182, 371, 396, 461 Birmingham, Ernest F., 415 Bishop. E. Faxon, 45 Blain, Hugh Mercer, 5 Blodgett, Mrs. H. H., 45 Bott, Hedwig, 407 Brazil, Invitation from, 181 601 Brewster, W. T., 113, 415 Bridgman, H. L., 67, 79, 84, 114, 190 Bronson, E. S., 181 Brown, Colvin B., 5 Brown, James Wright, 44, 85, 243, 353, 358, 360, 370, 378. 380, 386, 397 Brown, Raymond C., 10 Bryan, Wm. A., 57 Bryan, William Jennings, 4 Buchanan, James A., 4 Bullen, Percy S., 403 Bullock, Barry, 141 Bunker, Dr. Frank F.. 419, 465 Burke, John T., 140 Burnham, Viscount, 78 Business Press, 410, 412 Canada, Press of, 275 Canadian Press, 479 Canals, Salvado, 418 Cantruy, R. R. de. 406 Carter, George R., 32 Chappie, Joe Mitcliell, 515 Chapuisat, Edouard, 525 China, Getting News In and Out of, 471 China, Invitation from, 83, 114 China, Journalistic ^Mission to, 313 China, Press of, 156, 198, 285 Chinese Foreign Press Service, Com- mission to Study, 364 Chinese Press, A jMessage from, 453 Chung, Henry, 205, 364 "^ Circulation, Building of, 292 Cisneros, Dr. L. F.,"l85 Clarke, Mrs. Adna G., 45 Clarke, F. W., 141 Cohen, Mark, 14. 174. 297. 349. 356. 361, 377, 380, 419, 493. 498. 556 Committee, Governing. 380 Committees, Appointed, 398 602 Index Committees, President Authorized to Appoint, 367 Communications, International Press, 361 Conference, Washington, Approval of, 382 Connecticut Editorial Association, 411 Constitution, Committee on, 82 Constitution of Congress, 3, 507 Constitution, Report on, 345 Coutoupis, Thales, 13, 89, 369, 393 Creager, Marvin H., 152 Credentials, Committee on, 83 Crist, H. M., 138 Crow's Nest, In the Editorial, 515 Cuba, Press of, 280 Curran, Hugh, 418 Dailey, 0. S., 413 Daniels, Joseplius, 417 Davidson, J. E., 320 Davies, H. A., 306, 368, 369 Dean, Dr. A. L., 36, 41 Delegates, List of, 508 Denison, George, 13 Dennis, C. H., 135 DeRackin, S. E., 355 Dertinger, J. E., 418 Desha, Rev. Stephen L., 24 Devilar, Camille, 418 deYoung, M. H., 4 Digges, Rev. J. G., 413 Dillon, T. J., 132 Diplomacy, Open, Hope of Pacific Press, 445 Diplomacy, Secret and Open, 355 Dobell, J. L., 133 Dodds, George W., 154 Dong-A Daily, 417 Dotson, C. L., 38, 173 Doze, J. B., 145 Dutch Association of Journalists, 415 Dyment, Colin, 404 Dymond, John, 416 Edgecombe, F. 0., 357 Editors, Managing, Views of Edu- cation, 128 Education, Journalistic, 115 Eldridge, F. W., 140 Empire Press Union, 77, 305 Ethics of Journalism, 367 Farrington, Frances, 13 Farrington, Mrs. Wallace R., 13, 14, 41, 46 Farrington, Wallace R., 10, 13, 14, 32, 38, 67, 387, 399, 419 Fenwick, Sir George, 180 Festival, Japanese, 44 Field, Mrs. W. H., 37 Finty, Tom, Jr., 143 Fisher, Benjamin J., 410 Fogg, M. M., 5 Ford, A. R., 4 Ford, Alexander Hume, 10, 20, 389, 399, 421, 503 Fox, Ralph E., 5 Freeman, 0. S., 411 French Colonial Press, Association of, 418 Gait, H. R., 137 Gardner, A. R., 5 Garner, Roy, 134 Garretson, Joseph, 136 Gaylord, E. K., 407 Glass, Frank P., Sr., 14, 32, 67, 178, 224, 249, 359, 372, 382, 392 Gough, Mrs. R. W., 410 Graham, J. D., 405 Grant, A. W., 147 Grant, William, 418 Gray, Joseph H., 32 Greece, Press of, 90 Gregory, Dr. H. E., 4l Griffin, Solomon B., 152 Grondahl, Jens K., 407 Hale, H. B., 86 Haleakala, 33, 34 Haleiwa Hotel, 43 Hall, F. P., 345 Hamakua coast, 24 Hancock, John, 46 Harding, Warren G., 1, 66, 67 Harrington, H. F., 404 Harrison, Walter M., 134 Hawaii, History of, 53 and follow- ing Hawaii, Legislation Afiecting, 390 Haywood, R. W., 133 Headlines, 332 Heads and Tales, 343 Heney, T. W., 242 Herbert, Benjamin S., 411 Herbert, B. B., 5 Herrick, John P., 85, 393 Higgins, H. F., 128 Hilo, 23, 25, 54 Hobby, W. P., 148 Hodorofi', L. A., 405' Holbrook, Arthur R., 414 Holland, Journalism of, 588 Holm, Frits, 408 Hoopii, Wm. K. 36, 37 Horn, R. W., 148 Index 603 Hornaday, W. D., 115 Hosmer, Geo. E., 5 Hotaling, H. C, 5 Hsu, Jabin, 284, 453 Igglesden, 415 Illinois Press Association, 411 Indian Press Act, 414 India, The Press in, 530 India, The Press Association of, 414 Ingham, Harvey, 4 Innes, Guy, 14, 65, 321, 344, 3G0, 370, 378, 425, 547 Interchange of Journalists, 368 International Obligations, 368 International Press Rate, 435 Interviewing, 332 lolani Palace, 12, 19 Irish Newspaper Society, 112 Ivens, Richard, 408 Jaggar, Dr. T. A., 31 Japan, Newspapers of, 110 Japanese Press in Hawaii, 449 Jarman, S. J., 417 Jarnagin, W. C., 129 Jarrett, Wm. P., 49 Johnston, Fred, 415 Jones, Will Owen, 155 Journalism, Present Day Tendencies in, 249 Journalism, Schools of, 118, 240, 300 Kahanamoku, Duke, 9 Kaibyuck Magazine, 418 Kaiser, John, 410 Kalanianole, Mrs. Jonah Kuhio, 14 Karger, Gus J., 242, 414 Kessell, John H., 44, 394, 420 Kilauea, Volcano of, 25, 26, 31 Kim, Dong-sung, 459, 521 Khakeebi, H. C, 5 Khan, Mirza Ali Khuli, 4 Kodan, Japanese, 107 Korea, 365 Korea, Invitation from, 344 Korea, Journalism in, 456, 521 Korea, Press of, 205 Korea. The Newspapers in, 459 Korean Independence News, 418 KuUn, Brigadier-General Jos. E., 43 Labor Conditions in Hawaii, 390 Lahaina, 40 Lamade, Dietrich. 413 Lantern Parade, ?2 Latin-American Countries, Press of, 461 Lawson, Col. E. F., 13, 14, 52, 212, 298, 353, 361, 363, 367, 375, 497 Lazo, Agustin, 14, 280 Leng, Douglass C, 412 Leprosarium, 49 Libel Law, 143 Lievano, Enrique, 4 Ling, Lee Sum, 5 Lopez, Dr. Jacinto, 185 Lorton, Otis, 139 Louisiana Press Association, 416 Luau, 40 Lyon, H. L., 44 MacCallumy, W. Adamson, 417 Macfarlane, Peter C, 5 Mackenzie, R., 406 Mack, Norman E., 4 Madeiras, Louis, 13, 80 Makepeace, Walter, 418 Manzanares, Fermin, 418 Mardigian, Vertanes, 418 Mares, C. P., 405 Marshall, Randolph, 131 Matson Navigation Company, 7 Matters, Leonard W., 418 Maui, 23, 32, 34, 36, 37, 40, 55 Mauna Loa, 25 Mavrand, Oswald. 14, 275, 479 McClatchv, V. S., 21, 219, 358, 361. 362, 379, 380, 387, 419, 497 McCullough, Wm., 5 McKeever, J. H., 411 McPherson, A. B., 5 Membership, 297, 349 Mendoza, Juan Guillermo, 417 Mesru, Joseph, 5 Messages to Congress, 403 Militarv Review, 43 Moana 'Hotel, 12. 13, 40 Modi, M. C, 414 Molokai, 23 Mooney, C. P. J., 129 Mooney, Homer, 5 Moore, Charles C, 4 Morris, John R., 77 Morrison. J. C, 5 Mountfortt, Wade, 146 :\Turphy, W. J., 121 Myers, Joseph S., 416 Nacachian. Mihran, 417 Natal Witness, 417 National Editorial Association, 412 National Union of Journalists. 407 Naval Communications Service, 89 Naval Review, 50 Navy Radio, 490 Neff", Ward A., 121 Nelson, Ernesto, 5 604 Index New York, University of State of, 114 New Zealand, The Evolution of the Press of, 556 New Zealand Newspaper Proprietors Association, 413 News Conimunicationa, 219, 224, 367, 427 News Communications, Cheaper, 212 News in the Pacific, Intercliange of, 433 Newspaper Enterprise Association, 137 Newspapers of Hawaii, 17 Newspaper and Periodical Pro- prietors' Association, Weekly, 409 Newspaper of Tomorrow, 190 News Services, 216 News Service, Pan-Pacific, 430 News Value, Logical Basis of, 105 Niesigh, Capt. J. W., 4 Nieva, Gregoria, 14, 84, 112, 224, 366 Nominations, Committee on, 83 Nominations, Committee on. Report of, 377 Norton, E. 0., 409 Norway, Press of, 97 Norwegian Press Association, 364 Noth, J. M., Jr., 144 Oahu, 39, 54 Oahu Prison, 49 Oahu Sugar Plantations, 45 O'Brien, Robert L., 152 Ochs, Adolph S., 84 Oestreicher, W. M., 130 Officers, 4 Officers, List of New, 380 Organization, Preliminary, 3 Oswald, John Clyde, 418 Outrigger Club, 41 Owyang, Kee, 4 Palmer, Rev. Albert W., 43 Pan-Pacific Conference, Permanent, 421 Pan -Pacific Press Conference, 20, 400, 419, 439, 465 Pan-Pacific Press Conference, Com- mittee on, 89 Pan-Pacific Press Conference, Organ- ization of, 487 Pan-Pacific Press Conference, Reso- lutions of, 485 Pappageorge, Geo. D., 5 Parks, John A., 416 Passports, Restrictions upon, 360 Paz, Ezequiel, 405 Peace in the Pacific, The Press and, 481 Pearl Harbor, 50 Penhallow, H. B., 32 Perry, John H., 5 Petrie, Thos., 14, 180, 346, 430 Philippine Islands, Press of, 224 Philippines, Invitation from, 84 Pineapple Canning Industry, 43 Piper, Edgar B., 4 Powell, Hugh J., 33 Press, American, History of 234 Press Club, Honolulu, 12 Press, Freedom of, 89, 243, 267, 281, 367, 369 Press, Provincial, 233 Press, Truth and Falsehood in, 97 Price, Charles W., 5 Prison, Oahu, 49 Puckette, Charles McD., 139 Radio, United States Navy, 301 Radio, Use of, 436 Ray, E. Lansing, 403 Reed, Mrs. Emma B., 197 Regal, Howard K., 152 Relations, International, Obligations of Press to, 182 Resolutions, Committee on, 82 Resolutions, Report of Committee on, 349 Rice, Dr. Milton, 23 Richardson, F. W., 5 Richardson, H. M., 407 Robinson, Bertha Gray, 407 Rook, C. A., 135 R. O. T. C. Military Tournament, 53 Rountree, Lee J., 5 Rowell, Chester H., 5 Rules and Order of Business, Com- mittee on, 83 Russia, Journalism in, 405 Ryan, Frank J., 137 Sanchez, Conrado, 417 Saxe, Ludvig, 13, 97, 363, 397 Schermerhorn, Jajues, 540 Schofield Barracks, 42 Schools, Public, 47 Schoop, Dr. H., 4 Scott, Fred Newton, 5 Scott, S. D., 4 Seitz, Don, 109 Selig, P., 407 Sessions, Charles H., 139 Seville, Invitation from, 81 Shastri, K. D., 4 Shorter. Clement, 413 Shun Pao, 83, 198, 471 Index 605 Simpson, Rear Admiral Edward, 14, 38, 40 Smith, Dick, 138 Smith, Victor B., 136 Smuts, Gen. J. C, 416 Soga, Y., 14, 419, 449 Southern, Wm. Jr., 88, 233, 344, 373 Star-Bulletin, Honolulu, 10 Stead, Henry, 481 Sterling, Donald, 152 Steven, Alexander, 409 Stone, A. L., 133 Stout, R. E., 138 Stuart, Morley, 409 Sugar Plantations, Oahvi, 45 Sugimura, K., 105, 363 Sununerall, Maj.-Gen. Ghas. P., 14, 38, 39 Swanzy, Mrs. F. N., 419 Switzerland, Press of, 525 Thanks, Resolutions of, 372, 373, 374. 376, 392, 502 Thayer, W. A., 154 Thompson, Milo M., 136 Thorpe, Merle, 5 Thurston, Lorrin A., 10, 21, 25, 65, 389, 399, 419, 439, 485, 495 Times, New York, 84 Tong, Hollington K., 14, 65, 80, 156, 368, 375, 445 Toundokyo Magazine, 418 Townsend, Mrs. Georgina, 272 Travis, John L., 130 Trigg, L. O., 417 Understanding, A Pacific, 425 Union, International Press, 363 United Bankers Association of China, 417 United Chambers of Commerce, 417 United Educational Associations, 417 University of Cambridge, 410 University of Hawaii, 35 Urban, Henry F., 5 Uyehara, G. E., 4 Vassadarkis, C, 5 Vatchaghandy, R. N., 530 Vice Presidents, 379, 381 Vis-Norton, L. W. de, 12, 26, 65, 399 Volcano, Kilauea, 25, 26, 31 Von Der Hout, W. N., 588 Wang, K. P., 198, 471 Warren, Mrs. John T., 12, 13, 14, 45 Watson, Aaron, 242, 416 Waymack, W. W., 142 Weisz, Hans Den, 415 Welfare of Journalists, Promotion of, 367 W^estervelt, Rev. and Mrs. W. D., 48 White, William Allen, 142 Wilder, Gerrit P., 10 Williamson, David E. Vv., 154 Williams, Talcott, 5 Williams, T. R., 79 Williams, Walter, 4, 13, 14, 45, 65, 70, 380. 383, 389, 399, 419 Wilson, Fred J., 5 Wilson, John H., 11 Wilson, W. Arthur, 418 Wong, Hin, 313, 363, 364, 395 World, New York, 109 Wyatt, Henry, 408 Yamagata, I., 456 Yellow Jacket, 50 Yost, Casper, 144 Zumoto, M., 176, 211, 360, 365, 368, 374 FOURTEEN DAY USE RETURN TO DESK FROM WHICH BORROWED LOAN DEPT This book is due on the last date stamped below, or on the date to which renewed. Renewed books are subject to immediate recall. ■■ ■:.": ■ REC'D LU AUG 2 1956 6Feb'59MR REC'D LD FEB 3 ^^^^ i LD 21-100m-2,'55 ,, .General Library _ ( B 1 39s22 ) 476 ^°'''^"^'^,^^e,^^'^°"'* J^blO^X/KA YD as930 M281621 9(4 THE UNIVERSITY OF CAUFORNIA UBRARY